ENбетон мешалка PDF

ES Español (Spanisch / Spanish) EN English (Englisch) FR Français (French) DE Deutsch (German)
Documentación técnica Technical Documentation Documentation technique Technische Dokumentation

Indice Table of contents Index Inhaltsverzeichnis
MIXKERT 4 Modelo de máquina Machine model Type de machine Maschinen-Typ
490700918 Máquina N° Machine no. Nº de machine Maschinen-Nr.
, Datos técnicos Technical data Donnees techniques Technische Daten
1 CQ Hojas de mediciones Machine data sheet Feuille de mesures Maschinen Meßblatt
2 490700918 Declaración Ce de conformidad EC Declaration of Conformity Déclaration CE de conformité EG-Konformitätserklärung
3 490700918 Ficha Técnica Machine card Carte machine Maschinenkarte
4 E560673 Esquema hidráulico bomba Hydraulic diagram for pump Plan hydraulique pompe Hydr.-Schaltplan für Pumpe
5 E559040 Esquema eléctrico Electr. circuit diagram Plan électrique Elektr.-Schaltplan
2 Lista de repuestos Spare parts list Lieste de pieces de rechange Ersatzteilliste

6 490700918 Lista de despiece bomba Spare parts list pump Liste de piéces de rechange pompe Ersatzteilliste Pumpe
3 Instrucciones de servicio Operating instructions Instructions de service Betriebsanleitung

7 NOT AVAILABLE Instrucciones de servicio Operating instructions Instructions de service Betriebsanleitung
4 Anexo técnico Technical Enclosure Annex technique Technischer Anhang

8 E-6988-120202 Lista de despiece Motor Spare parts list Motor Liste de piéces de rechange Motor Ersatzteilliste Motor
E-6989-120417
9 Instrucciones Motor Operating instructions Motor Instructions de service Motor Betriebsanleitung Motor
E-6990-120202
10 E-6986-120202 Despiece Eje delantero Front axle spare parts list Liste de piéces de rechange Essiev avant Ersatzteilliste Vorderachse
11 E-6987-120202 Despiece Eje trasero Rear axle spare parts list Liste de piéces de rechange Essiev arrière Ersatzteilliste Hinterachse
12 E-6991-120214 Manual de uso y mantenimiento Eje Operating instruction and maintenance Axle Instructions de service et maintenance Essiev Wartungsanleitung-Betriebsanleitung Achsen
13 E-6993-120330 Información general sensores de inclinación Overview inclination sensors Vue d'ensemble sur les capteurs d'inclinaison Übersicht Neigungssensoren
14 E-6994-120417 Instrucciones asiento Grammer Operating instructions Grammer seat Instructions de service Grammer siège Betriebsanleitung Grammer Sitz
15 PME 653 Datos técnicos Technical data Donnees techniques Technische Daten
Atención Caution Attention Achtung

La documentación debe ser completada y The person or company who brings this machine / La documentation doit être complété et adapté aux lois Die Person oder Firma, die diese Maschine in Verkehr
adaptada a las leyes nacionales vigentes, por la plant into service is obliged to amend and complete nationales existantes, par la société ou la personne qui bringt, muss die Dokumentation vor Auslieferung /
empresa o persona que la ponga en circulación. this documentation before delivery to comply with la met en circulation. Inbetriebnahme vervollständigen und an nationales
national legislation. Recht anpassen.
Putzmeister Ibérica·
Cmno. de Hormigueras, 173
28031 Madrid
Tel. +91 428 81 00 Fax. 91 428 81 06
20287198 Rev. 00-20120625 RG Internet http://www.putzmeister.es 490700918 index
Maschinenkarte
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
KD-Auftrag:20343951 Pos-Nr:100 Mat-Nr:E10100136 Masch.Nr.490700918 Datum 25.06.2012 Seite: 1

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Machine Type MIXER 4,5
CE-Declaration yes
-voltage 24V
painting serie PM
Schematic
Hydraulic circuit diagram E560673 -
Main control cabinet E559040 -
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
POS Materialnr. Bezeichnung EBN Serialnummer

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
001 E10100136 MIXKRET 4 00.1 E05812
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
002 E10100136_VG001 VG:Hydraulic Drive Unit Cpl.
003 E560649 .DRIVE UNIT 130KW/H1-S42 SAE B - PLP20 01.0 E05813
004 E557048 ..D-ENGINE 130KW/2500 C6.6 ACERT, 24V 66620942
005 E557554 ..Hydr. pump 51cm³ serie 42 J11492857
006 E557549 ..Hydr. pump 115cm³ H1 N121313219
007 E558555 ..Mounting kit
008 E510316 ..Hydr. pump R 21,14/ 6,7cm³
009 E560716 .Fuel line (from tank)
010 E563191 ..Filling level control 24V
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
011 E10100136_VG004 VG:HY-COMPONENTS
012 E560673 .HY-COMPONENTS DRAWINGS MIXKRET 4
013 283864005 ..4/3-way valve 24V 2.1 15209
014 283864005 ..4/3-way valve 24V 2.1 15209
015 266358004 ..Pressure limiting valve 40-100bar
016 E557863 ..Hydraulic cylinder L=303-d40/20
017 E557863 ..Hydraulic cylinder L=303-d40/20
018 294071007 ..Suction filter housing 1.5 15428
019 294073005 ..Filter element 10µ
020 E560674 .HY-COMPONENTS F. STEERING SYSTEM MIXKRE 02.1 E05835
021 E99060 ..STEERING UNIT OSPC 200 LS 3.6 E05429
022 E463349 ..Valve OLSA 40
023 E472300 ..4/3-way valve 24V 2.1 E05561
024 E560675 .HY-COMPONENTS BRAKE SYSTEM MIXKRET 4 02.1 E05835
025 E555724 ..BRAKE PEDAL TIP.VB-220 60BAR
026 E99081 ..ACCUMULATOR BRAKE 0.75L PS210B Po 50B
027 E560676 .HY-COMPONENTS DRUM MIXKRET 4
028 E555375 ..Hydr. motor OMTS250
029 E560688 .ASSEMBLY COMP.SUCTION/RETURN MIXKRET 4
030 E563062 .Hydr. components
031 E563063 .Hydr. components
032 E560978 .HY-COMPONENTS F.RADIATOR MIXKRET 4
033 066337005 ..Oil radiator 24V 2.4 11062
034 065036006 .Oil lev.indic.w.thermom.
035 000171007 .Hydr. oil HLP46 DIN51524/2
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
036 E10100136_VG005 VG:ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
037 E559040 .Control cabinet 1,92KW,24VDC E-028-12/2
038 E560709 .ELECT.ASSEMBLY COMP. MIXKRET 4
039 E558793 ..Search light 24V;Power Beam 1000 LED
040 E472051 ..Switch
041 E472029 ..Horn 24V
042 E472032 ..CICALINI A SUONE INTERMITTENTE
043 E559370 ..Battery 12V; 900A
044 E561777 ..Control box 10 pulsadores 05.2 E05833
045 405197 ..Switch box E-STOP 5.3 16153
046 427386 ...Press-button switch 1S6/S6.1
047 406329 ...Circuit element f. button 2Ö 1S6/S6.1
048 415295 ..Protecting cap
049 E560711 .ELECT.ASSEMBLY CABIN COMP. MIXKRET 4
050 E557796 ..SECURITY CAMERA CPL.
051 E512803 ..Warning beacon 24V
052 405197 ..Switch box E-STOP 5.3 16153
053 427386 ...Press-button switch 1S6/S6.1
054 406329 ...Circuit element f. button 2Ö 1S6/S6.1
056 E473151 ..Fixed resistor
057 E560715 .ELECT.ASSEMBLY DRUM COMP. MIXKRET 4
059 E569579 .Set of cable forms MIXKRET 4
060 267559006 .Temperature transmitter 55°C
061 E536661 .THERMOSTAT 90º CPT. W.PROTECTION
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
062 E10100136_VG006 VG:CHASSIS
063 E559777 .CHASSIS CPL. MIXKRET 4
064 E558815 ..ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS PREFABRICATED
065 E559759 ...WATER TANK F.MIXKRET 4 CPL. 01.4 E05821
066 E559761 ...DIESEL TANK F.MIXKRET 4 CPL 01.4 E05820
067 E559711 ....Fuel tank 160 L
Maschinenkarte
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
068 E559762 ...OIL TANK;CPL.238L 1FI. 01.4 E05822
069 E559718 ....Oil tank 238 L
070 065036006 ....Oil lev.indic.w.thermom.
071 E559720 ...Mudguard left-hand-side Tipo -G- 09.7 E05831
072 E559721 ...Mudguard right-hand-side Tipo -G- 09.7 E05831
073 E559753 ...Working platform
074 E559741 ....Railing
075 E559745 ....Steps
076 E561864 ...Support
077 E561870 ...Chute
078 E561979 ...Support
079 E561882 ...CLAMP CPL F.DRUM MIXKRET 4
080 E561885 ....Tightener 1472x299x93mm
081 E561884 ....Rubber plate 222x69x60mm
082 E561883 ....Tension element L=1110mm
083 E562042 ....Bush insert D30xd20 L=25mm
084 E561879 ...Hopper
085 E561985 ...Support
086 E562021 ...Support
087 E562022 ...CLOSING LID CPL. F. DRUM MIXKRET 4
088 E561994 ...Hopper para carga
089 E562000 ....Cover 1030x130x6mm
090 E562001 ....Cover 408x130x6mm
091 E562002 ....Board 986x60x3mm
092 E562003 ....Board 404x60x3mm
093 E562041 ...Cylinder tube
094 E561974 ...Support
095 E562004 ...Protecting cap
096 E564969 ...Protecting cap
097 E562032 ...GRIP CPL F.BARREL TURN CABLE
098 E558816 ..DOORS AND HOODS MIXKRET 4 CPL 09.0 E05826
099 E558920 ...Hinged door
100 E558921 ...Hinged door
101 E558817 ...BENT BLANKS F.DOORS,HOODS MIXKRET 4
102 E558818 ....BLANKS F.DOORS,HOODS MIXKRET 4
103 E558915 .....Hinged door 849 X 657
104 E558925 .....Hinged door 1099 X 851
105 E558926 .....Hinged door
106 E559778 ..ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS SCREWED SUPPORT
107 E562031 ...Chute auxiliar con soporte
108 E561861 ....Chute L=567mm
109 E563154 ....Closure
110 E559739 ...Skip shaft D35xd25x70mm
111 E559793 ...Skip shaft D30xd20x70mm
112 E559794 ...Skip shaft D10x55mm
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
113 E10100136_VG007 VG:CABINE
114 E563380 .Seating primo L
115 E462111 .STEERING WHEEL F/ SIKA PM500
116 E471520 .STEERING COLUMN OTPB 150
117 E564452 .RIGHT MIRROR MP-5050D CPL
118 E564453 .MIRROR MP-7510
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
119 E10100136_VG008 VG:Drum compl.
120 E559515 .Mounting parts
121 E561442 ..Hopper
122 E561435 ..Mixing drum Mixkret 4 .
123 E561437 ..Roller
124 E561441 ..Roller
125 E562185 .Planetary gear 3 m3 11201661
126 E559367 .Hand lever rod
127 E561471 .Hand lever rod
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
128 E10100136_VG010 VG:TRANSMISSION GROUP
129 E564217 .Driven shaft CARDAN CPTO
130 E564100 ..Driven shaft DIN120; Lpm=307
131 E564102 ..Driven shaft DIN120; KV120; Lz=545
132 E564105 ..Driven shaft KV120; L=596
133 E564107 ..Driven shaft DIN120; KV120; Lpm=748
134 E556943 .Axle delantero 212HY-212/975
135 E556940 .Axle oscilante trasero 212HY-212/976 .
136 E557532 .Hydr. motor ICVD GT-S1N-233V-164; 24V DV-11-48-5806
137 E558027 .Wheel, cpl. 12R20 6900kg/25KM 09.1 E05816
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
138 E10100136_VG012 VG:Water line
139 E569689 .Water system MIXKRET 4
140 E562705 ..Water pump 26,5 L/min; 5,5BAR
141 E98219 ..3/2-way valve DN25
142 E563271 .Water hose winder 21m / DN10
Maschinenkarte
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
143 E563836 .Closure
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
144 E10100136_VG014 VG:Additive line
145 E564047 .DOSER SISTEM KIT F.MIXKRET 4
146 E559760 ..DOSER TANK INOX. F.MIXKRET 4 CPL 01.4 E05823
147 E559712 ...Tank 100 L
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
148 E10100136_VG016 VG:HIGH PRESSURE CLEANING PUMP
149 432923 .High pressure water pump 12.3 16526
150 457254 ..High pressure water pump UDOR 12.3 18823
151 428394 ..Water filter kpl. 1.5 18573
152 430391 ..Flow control valve
153 067344000 ..4/2-way valve 24V 2.1 11182
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
154 E10100136_VG018 VG:PAINT
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
155 E10100136_VG020 VG:DECAL
156 E560867 .Set of signs -SY-
157 E560122 ..Function sign 45x25mm
161 E471846 ..SIGN,WARNING OF DANGER
162 E471810 ..Warning sign 49X49X1
163 288171007 ..Function sign (GB)
164 404616 ..Rating plate
165 E549985 ..Warning sign
166 E471844 ..DECAL WARNING HYDRAULIC OIL ALU
167 057054009 ..Function sign
168 E561315 ..Warning sign 150mm
170 249928008 ..Accident prevention sign (D)
171 244301002 ..Warning sign
172 E473155 ..Label 45x25
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
173 E10100136_VG030 VG:STANDARD ACCESSORIES
174 024449003 .Tool box 12.1 17521
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
175 E10100136_ZUBEHÖR VG:OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Mixkret 4
176 E561508 .Perforated plate
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
000 --END--
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Documentación Técnica
REVISIONES DE INDICES DE HOJAS
Fabricante Putzmeister REV. FECHA COMENTARIOS
0 11/06/12 PRIMERA EMISION
Proyecto Cuadro electrico Mixkret
Descripción Cuadro general Mixkret (2º Prototipo)
Observaciones :
Ref.de pedido: Codigo de cuadro: E559040 AB 29/02/12 AS BUILT
Fecha 11/06/12 Cliente : Putzmeister Descripción de página : Pedido : Mixkret

Dibujado SRL Proyecto : Codigo : E559040 + CG
Portada cuadro general Mixkret (2º Prototipo)
Comprobado IGG Observaciones : NºPagina 1
Rev. Fecha Descripcion CEI-439-1 / UNE EN 60204-1
Cuadro electrico Mixkret Codigo fabricante : C-134-11_2 P.Siguiente 2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Características Técnicas
Cliente : Putzmeister Colores de cables :
Proyecto : Cuadro electrico Mixkret
Descripción : Cuadro General Negro : Fases
Codigo de cuadro : E-559040 Azul : Neutro / Ctos CC / Ctos. Seg. Intrínseca
Amarillo / Verde : Tierra
Normas Aplicadas : CEI-439-1 / UNE EN 60204-1 Marrón : Maniobra 24Vac
Rojo : Maniobra 230Vac
Naranja : Ctos. Enclavamiento de mando alimentados desde fuente externa
Características Técnicas : Colores de Pulsadores y Pilotos :

Rojo : Parada
Tensión Asignada : 24Vdc Sección Min. Cto. Protección : 2,5mm2 Verde : Marcha
Azul : Rearme
Tensión de Maniobra : 24Vdc Grado de protección : IP-54 Amarillo : Anomalía
Blanco : Sin Significación específica atribuida
Intensidad Asignada : 80A Tensión de aislamiento : 24Vdc Gris : Sin Significación específica atribuida
Negro : Sin Significación específica atribuida
Intensidad de cortocircuito : 1,2kA Régimen de Neutro : TT
Condiciones de Empleo :
Temperatura de ambiente max. : +40ºC
Distancias Mínimas de Aislamiento : 3mm para partes activas desnudas / 0mm para aparatos con marcado CE. Temperatura max. En periodo de 24h : +35ºC
Lineas de Fuga Mínimas : 6,3mm para partes activas desnudas / 0mm para aparatos con marcado CE. Temperatura Mínima : -5ºC
Aire Límpio
Humedad relativa inferior al 50% a una temp. max de 40ºC
Humedad relativa inferior al 90% a una temp. max de 20ºC
Sección Mínima de Potencia : 2,5mm2 Grado de contaminación 2
Sección Mínima de Maniobra : 1mm2 Altitud Max. 2000Mts
Entrada / Salida de Cables : Parte inferior Compatibilidad electromagnética : Área Industrial

Dibujado SRL Proyecto : Codigo : E-559040 + CG
Características Técnicas
Cuadro electrico Mixkret Codigo fabricante : C-134-11 P.Siguiente 3
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Índice de páginas
Página Descripción de página Fecha Rev. Fecha de Rev. Observaciones
=Mixkret+CG/1 Portada cuadro general Mixkret (2º Prototipo) 11/06/12
=Mixkret+CG/2 Características Técnicas 11/06/12
=Mixkret+CG/3 Indice de páginas 11/06/12
=Mixkret+CG/12 Vista general cuadro eléctrico 11/06/12
=Mixkret+CG/14 Mandos cabina 11/06/12
=Mixkret+CG/15 Maniobra motor diesel 11/06/12
=Mixkret+CG/20 Control cabina 11/06/12
=Mixkret+CG/30 Climatización cabina 11/06/12
=Mixkret+CG/40 Control sistema hidraúlico 11/06/12
=Mixkret+CG/45 Control sistema hidraúlico 11/06/12
=Mixkret+CG/50 Control general de máquina 11/06/12
=Mixkret+CG/55 Control seguridades 11/06/12
=Mixkret+CG/60 Iluminación 11/06/12
=Mixkret+CG/65 Fuerza general 11/06/12
=Mixkret+CG/70 Monitor CCTV 11/06/12
=Mixkret+CG/100 Lista de Materiales 11/06/12
=Mixkret+CG/100.a Lista de Materiales 11/06/12
=Mixkret+CG/100.b Lista de Materiales 11/06/12

Dibujado SRL Proyecto : Codigo : + CG
Indice de páginas
Cuadro electrico Mixkret P.Siguiente 12
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
VISTA GENERAL DEL CUADRO ELECTRICO
LATERAL IZDO. VISTA GENERAL PUERTA PLACA DE

VISTA INTERIOR EXTERIOR VISTA INTERIOR MONTAJE
50C5
25K8
55K2
20K2 35K3
Reserva
20K3 35K6
20K5 35K9
450 mm
20K6 45K2
25K3 45K3
25K5 45K7
X0 = 1..151
25K7 65K8
25
0
400 mm
60F3
60F0
55F7
50F4
45F1
35F3
35F1 Res
35F0 Res
30F6 Res
30F3 Res
30F0 70F1
25F8 65F7
20F6 65F6
20F0 65F4
15F9 65F3
15F3 65F2
15F2.1 60F8
15F2 60F7

Vista general cuadro eléctrico
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Seta de Interruptor Interruptor Interruptor Interruptor

Luz Cabina Luz Posición Luz Trabajo Limpia Calefacción
Emergencia Aire Acondicionado
0-1 0-1 0-1 parabrisas
1-0-2
Selector calefacción
Pos.1 = Limpiaparabrisas
Pos.0 L M
Monitor Monitor Pos.2 = Limpia + Bomba
H
general CCTV
Interruptor Interruptor Interruptor
( SAUER ) Freno mano Rotativo Dirección
0-1 0-1 Sencilla/Doble
Rearme 1-0-2
Pos.1 = Dir. Delantera Interruptor calefacción
Pos.0
Pos.2 = Dir. Cangrejo
Alineación Interruptor
front axle Traslación/
LLave rear axle Trabajo
contacto 1-0-2 0-1

Mandos cabina
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
015.00
11
1 1 1 11 1
25K8
/25.7 14 15F2 15F2.1 15F3 25K5 15F9
16A 5A 40A KL-30 /25.4 12 KL-15 35A
2 2 2 015.01 / 30.0 015.03 / 20.0 2
015.12
015.11
015.05
015.06
015.07
015.08
KL-31
015.02 / 30.0
015.09
015.10
015.09
KL-32
015.04 / 20.0
X0 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 86 86 86 86 86 5 5 5 5 6 7 1 2 3 10 11 8 9
1 2 3 4 1mm2 W4 1 W2 1 W2 3 4 5 1 W1
35mm2
W8
4mm2 16mm2 2,5mm2 2,5mm2 2,5mm2 4mm2
Caja aux.1
Caja de Control 1
mando.1 rpm
motor W2 4 2
15F5
diesel
80A
2
W3 1 2 3 4 5 14 15 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Caja aux.1
015.10 / 50.6 35mm2
Реле
015.11 / 50.7
Зажи- 1 W13 16mm2
1,5mm2 гания
W9 6mm2
2 3
3 W13 W13 2
W14 1
1mm2 К свечам зажигания
015.00 / Caja aux.1
1mm2 W15 3
1
+
Батарея 15F7
Relay 80A
43 53 33 - 2
35 49 50 51 52 20 21 22 1 2 3 9 10 16 7 8 15 40 57 Cabina
Conector Caterpillar
6mm2 W15 X2
ECM A4E2 50mm2
2
W15 1
4 3 1 2
15R7
+ 16mm2 x1 x2
1mm2 Батарея 300Ω
30 50
W9 - 10W
Стартер
4 5 6
15 50 17
W9 1
4mm2
1 4 2
Педаль
газа B+
PWM
W D+
15S7
Ключ зажиг-я
Генератор
50mm2 50mm2 2,5mm2 25mm2
X0 = General
Maniobra motor diesel
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
KL-15 2,5mm2
15.8 / 015.03 015.03 / 50.0
1 1
20F0 20F6
16A 2 5A 2
020.00
2,5mm2 KL-15+
020.00 / 25.5
020.05
020.01 020.02 020.03 020.04
A1 A1 A1 A1
20K2 20K3 20K5 20K6
A2 A2 A2 A2
KL-32 KL-32
15.5 / 015.04 015.04 / 25.0
020.06
1mm2 1mm2 1mm2 1mm2 1mm2
020.07
X0 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
W6 12 13 14 15
KL-15+
020.06 / 45.7
Cabina
1mm2 1mm2
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 0 2
Pos.1 Pos.2
20S2 20S3 20S4 20S5 20Y8 20Y9
20S6
Свет Свет Свет Передние Задние Dirección Doble

NAG.02756 NAG.02756 NAG.02756
Вращение NAG.02756
Кабина 11 14 /60.8 позиция 11 14 /60.0 Рабочий 11 14 /60.3 11 14 /60.8 рулевые подруливание Cangrejo Dirección

Control cabina
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
KL-15+ KL-15+
20.2 / 020.00 020.00 / 30.2
21 1
25K7 25F8
/25.7 22 5A 2
025.06
025.02 025.03 025.04 025.05
A1 2 2 A1 A1 A1
25K3 25V4.1 25V4 25K5 25K7 25K8
A2 1 1 A2 A2 A2
KL-32 KL-32
20.9 / 015.04 015.04 / 30.2
1mm2
1mm2 1mm2 1,5mm2
X0 35 36 37 38 39 40 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151
W1 9 10 11 W1 6 W1 12 13 W5 1 2 3 4
N
025.06 / 40.2
A bomba Sauer W7 1 2 3 4
Back
025.05 / 40.2
For
025.04 / 40.2
KL15+
25.7 / 020.06 020.06 / 25.0
KL30 KL31
030.04 / 30.4 030.05 / 45.0
X2 16 17 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
25S7
1 0 2 Seat /25.2
25S7 25S8
Pos.1 Pos.2 Control
/25.6 /25.5 25S6 Selector 25H8
25S0 Parking 25S8 Traslación-Trabajo
25H9.2
25H9.3
25H9.5
25H9
Brake /25.3
X2 24
Control Automotive.2 Led Red
Opcional Cabina Cabina Luces Galibo
NAG.02756 NAG.02756 NAG.02756 NAG.02756
11 14 /65.3 11 12 /15.6 21 22 /25.5 11 14 /15.0
Limpia Claxon Palanca

Parabrisas Marcha

Control cabina
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
KL-30 KL-30
15.5 / 015.01 015.01 / 55.7
1 1 1
30F0 30F3 30F6

16A 2 25A 2 16A 2
030.06
KL-15+
25.9 / 020.00 020.00 / 35.0
KL-32
25.9 / 015.04 015.04 / 35.0
030.00
030.04
KL-31 KL-31
15.5 / 015.02 015.02 / 60.0
X0 42 43 44 45 46 47
Reserva 2,5mm2
KL-30S
1mm2 1mm2 4mm2 4mm2 030.06 /
KL-31
030.05 / 40.3
W8 5 6 W1 2 3
KL30 KL31
25.1 / 030.04 / 030.05
Cabina
X2 31 1,5mm2 32
Presurizador
Termostato Frio
Caja de mando.1 1,5mm2
Interruptor
Calefacción
Selector Calefacción
W24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
x1
30V0 30V1 30V2 30V3
30V4
x2
Compresor
Subir teja Bajar teja Subir tapa Bajar tapa

Grifo Calefacción
Climatización cabina
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
KL-15+ KL-15+
30.3 / 020.00 020.00 / 40.0
1 1 1 11
35F0 35F1 35F3 35K6
5A 2
035.00 5A 2 5A 2 /35.6 14
035.01
035.02
A1 A1
35K6 35K9
035.03
49 49a
35K3 A2 A2
31
KL-32 KL-32
30.3 / 015.04 015.04 / 40.0
25V7 13
035.04 1 2 35K9
035.06 /35.9 14
035.05 1 2
035.08
035.09
25V7.1
X0 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 155 155 156 130 131 132 133

W W8 5 6 7
1,5mm2 1,5mm2
1 2
Caja de
+ -
W8 10 11 12 W1 14 15 16 W7 5 6 W5 13 14 7 8 W7 W1 17 mando.1
Paro
1mm2 1mm2 1mm2 1mm2 1mm2 1mm2 4
35S7
Sensor nivel Marcha
P1 P2 de agua
Caja de Cabina W27 1 2

mando.1 Cabina X2 33 34 35 X2 36
x1
W26 1 W22 1 2
035.06 / 35Y8
35H5.1
35H6.1
1 0 2 35H5 A monitor
35H6
Pos.1 Pos.2 x2
35S2 general
Sauer
x1
NAG.02756
30V4 13 14 /35.8
x2 NAG.02756
11 14 /35.8
Bomba de
Marcha Marcha Palanca Intermitentes Intermitentes
agua alta
bomba agua bomba aditivo intermitentes delantero trasero
presión

Control cabina
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
KL-15+ KL-15+
35.9 / 020.00 020.00 / 45.6
KL-32 KL-31
35.9 / 015.04 030.05 / 30.9
W6 16 17
CC1 DTM/12Pin
Battery (-) 1
Battery (+) 2
W19
1
Sensor (+) 3 3(+) Motor RPM
direction
2
Sensor (-) 4 1(-) ICVD
3
Motor rpm input (frecuency) 5 2(rpm)
W11 x1
1 For
Forward input (Dig) 6 025.04 / 25.4
40R3
2 Back 3K3 x2
Reverse input (Dig) 7 025.05 / 25.4 0,2W
Sensor (+) 8
Sensor (-) 9
Drive pedal input 10
Drive pedal input 11 Nota : Realizar puentes si el sensor necesita alimentación a 5Vdc.
W11
3 N
Neutral input (Dig) 12 025.06 / 25.4
PPM DTM/3
Sensor (+) 1 + Насос RPM
Pump rpm input 2 rpm H1 Nota : Viene cableado.
Sensor (-) 3 -
PSC DTM/6
PWM C1 (+) 1
PWM C2 (+) 2
Digital output A1 (+) 3 C1 C2 Electronic

CC3 displacement Nota : Viene cableado.
Digital output A2 (-) 4 40Y3 40Y3.1 control pump
PWM C2 (-) 5
PWM C1 (-) 6
PPM DTM/3
W11
4 CAN P01
Can high 1 040.00 / 50.7
5 CAN P02
Can low 2 040.01 / 50.7
6 CAN P03
Can shield 3 040.02 / 50.7

Control sistema hidraúlico
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
KL-15+ KL-15+
40.3 / 020.00 020.00 / 50.0
45F1
5A 2
045.00
11
45K7
/45.7 14
A1
45K7
045.02
045.01
A2
KL-32
45.9 / 015.04 015.04 / 45.6
134 135 136
W1 18 W7 9 10
KL-31
25.1 / 030.05
CC2 DTM/12Pin
Inch input 1
Mod. switch B input 2

KL15+
50.4 / 020.06 020.06 / 20.6
Motor propipcor output (PWM) 3
X2 37 38
Motor directie input (Analog) 4
35H5.1
Sensor (+) 5
35H5
45S1 P
Sensor (-) 6
Brake Brake
Inch input 7 Реле давления
lights lights
тормозов
Motor BPD output 8 left right
Digital output B2 (-) 9 Cabina
Digital output B1 (+) 10

W23 1,2 3,4 W19 5 6
Mode switch A input 11 NAG.02756
11 14 /45.8
x1 x1
Mode switch B input 12
45Y3 45Y5.1
x2 x2
Стояночный Claxon Prop.

тормоз Traslación
EN ICVD

Control sistema hidraúlico
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
KL-15 KL-15
20.9 / 015.03 015.03 / 70.0
KL-32 KL-32
50.9 / 015.04 015.04 / 50.0
KL-15+ KL-15+
45.9 / 020.00 020.00 / 55.0
50R1 x1 x1 50R2 11
10KΩ 10KΩ 1
0,25W 0,25W 45K2
x2 x2 50F4 /50.2 14
10A
050.01
2
Conector Sub-D
A1 A1 50C5 11
50R4
050.00
9 polos hembra
45K2 45K3 45K3

120Ω
050.02
050.03
A2 A2 /50.3 14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
050.04
X0 63 64 65 66 137 138 127 128 129 67 68 139
Can Shield (1)

Can High (4)
Can Low (5)
15.1 15.1 40.2 40.2 40.2
W16 1 2 3 W16NAG.02756 NAG.02756
015.10 015.11040.02 040.00 040.01 Aforador Inclinómetro
W6 9 10 11 11 14 /50.8 11 14 /50.8
W21 2 1 4 3 Nota: Analógico
+ (2)
- (3)
Motor diesel
Motor diesel
1mm2 1mm2 Bornas de 6mm2 M5 M4
CAN P03
CAN P01
CAN P02
+ - + - 50S4 50S4.1
50S0 50S1
Blanco
W1 1mm2
Malla
24
Azul
Termostato Nivel 1mm2
Sensor eje Sensor eje
aceite 95º aceite W1 W9 W18 W10
delantero trasero 19 20 21 22 23 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5
1mm2 Cabina
X2 39 39+ 40 40+ 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 18 51 71 72 52 53 54
45.7 / 020.06
DP620 CP1 Main power ground C1-P1

50R6 50R8
Main power supply P2
120Ω 200Ω
Can 1 + high P3 0,125W 10W
/50.8
Can 1 - low P4
Can shield P5
Can 0 - high P6
Can 0 - low P7
Sensor supply P8 50C6 Conector Sub-D

9 polos
50R8.1
* *
Multi input P9 120Ω
0,125W
Multi input P10
D in P11
D out P12
50S4.2 P
CP2 P1
P2
KL-15+ KL-15+
50.5 / 020.00 020.00 / 50.4
P3 Реле давления
P4 аккумулятор 50R8
тормозов /50.8
P5 200Ω
10W
P6

Control general de máquina
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
KL-15+ KL-15+
50.9 / 020.00 020.00 / 65.7
KL-32 KL-32
55.9 / 015.04 015.04 / 55.0
KL30
30.9 / 015.01 015.01 / 60.0
55F7
5A 2
055.06
PE
55K2
A1 A2 PE 13 23
Реле безопасности PILZ / PNOZ S3
S11 S21 S22 S12 S34 14 24

055.00
055.01
055.02
055.03
055.04
055.05
055.07 055.09 055.11
055.08 055.10
X0 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 33 34
1mm2 1mm2 1mm2 1mm2 1mm2

W1 25 26 27 28 W1 29 30 31 32 W17 1 2
Cabina Cabina
X2 55 56 57 58 X2 59 60
W6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
11 21 11 21 11 21 x1
55S1 55S2 55S3 55S6 55Y7
12 22 12 22 12 22 x2
55S5
Аварийка Аварийка Аварийка Final de Rearme Giro Cuba

в кабине №.1 №.2 carrera
SIRGA
Nota : Quitar puente si lleva FC.

Control seguridades
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
KL-30 KL-30
55.8 / 015.01 015.01 / 65.0
1 1 1 1
60F0 60F3 60F7 60F8

5A 2 10A 2 5A 2 5A 2
060.00
060.02
060.04
060.06
11 11 11 11
20K3 20K5 20K6 20K2
/20.3 14 /20.5 14 /20.6 14 /20.2 14
060.01
060.03
060.05
060.07
KL-31 KL-31
30.7 / 015.02 015.02 / 65.0
X0 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114
1mm2 1mm2 1mm2 1mm2 1mm2 1mm2 1mm2 1mm2 1mm2 1mm2 1mm2 1mm2 1mm2 1mm2
W7 11 12 W5 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 W1 37 38 39 40 W7 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 W1 33 34 35 36
X2 75 76 77 78 X2 61 62 63 64
Cabina Cabina
x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1 x1
60H0 60H1 60H1.1 60H2 60H3 60H3.1 60H4 60H4.1 60H5 60H5.1 60H6 60H6.1 60H7 60H8
x2 x2 x2 x2 x2 x2 x2 x2 x2 x2 x2 x2 x2 x2
Luz Luz Luz Luz Luz Luz Luz Luz Luz Luz Luz Luz Rotativo Luz Cabina
posición posición posición posición trabajo trabajo trabajo trabajo trabajo trabajo trabajo trabajo
trasera trasera delantera delantera delantera delantera cabina cabina trasera trasera cuba.1 cuba.2
izda. dcha. Izda. dcha. izda. dcha. izda. dcha. izda. dcha.

Iluminación
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
KL-30 KL-15+
60.9 / 015.01 55.9 / 020.00
1 1 1 1
65F3 65F4 65F6 65F7

5A 2 35A 2 15A 2 5A 2
065.06
065.13
11 11
25K3 65K8
/25.2 14 /65.8 14
065.07
065.08
065.10
065.11
A1
65K8
065.12
A2
KL-31 KL-32 KL-32

60.9 / 015.02 65.9 / 015.04 015.04 / 65.7
X0 119 120 121 122 123 124 117 118
NAG.02756
1,5mm2 4mm2 2,5mm2 1mm2 11 14 /65.6
W5 15 16 W25 1 2 W12 1 2 W12 3 4
1 2
65H4 65M5 M M 65S7

65M6
1~ 1~
PE
Termostato
Claxon Водяной Ventilador Aceite
Mando насос 55º
Cabina

Fuerza general
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
KL-15
50.9 / 015.03
70F1
5A 2
070.00
KL-32
/ 015.04
X0 125 126
W1 41 42
Cabina
X2 69 70
CA1 Conexión cámara Monitor CCTV
24Vdc
Control Box

Monitor CCTV
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Lista de Materiales
Identificador Cantidad Descripción Fabricante Referencia de artículo Codigo SAP
-C-070-11/1 1 Armario metálico 4mm de espesor, 450x400x250, con 3P de montaje. Especial ESP_450X400X250 ESP_450X400X250
-C-070-11/1 80 Borna doble UTTB 4 (4mm2). Phoenix contact PHO.3044814 UTTB 4
-C-070-11/1 3 Borne de conexion UT 35 (35mm2) Phoenix contact PHO.3044225 3044225
-50C5 1 Conector DB9 + Carcasa. Taller MO.DB9 DB9
-50C5-50R4 1 Resistencia 120 Ohm 1/4W. Taller MO.120Ohm 120Ohm
-50C6 1 Conector DB9 + Carcasa. Taller MO.DB9 DB9
-15F2 5 Portafusibles para 5 fusibles hasta 40A. XB Components XB.031210 031210
-15F2 1 Fusible 15A. XB Components XB.0340150 0340150
-15F2.1 1 Fusible 5A. XB Components XB.0340050 0340050

Lista de Materiales
Cuadro electrico Mixkret P.Siguiente 100.a
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Lista de Materiales
-20K2 1 Relé con diodo y sin soporte 24Vdc 22/10A. Nagares NAG.02756 02756
-35K3 1 Relé intermitente 42W. Hella HEL.4JZ177846007 4JZ177846007
-55K2 1 Relé de seguridad 24Vdc 2NO. PILZ PIL.750103 750103
-50R6 1 Resistencia 120 Ohm 1/4W. Taller MO.120Ohm 120Ohm
-50R8 1 Resistencia 120 Ohm 1/4W. Taller MO.120Ohm 120Ohm
-50R8.1 1 Resistencia 120 Ohm 1/4W. Taller MO.120Ohm 120Ohm
-25V4 1 Diodo rectificador. Taller MON.1N4007 1N4007
-25V4 1 Borna doble UTTB 4 (4mm2). Phoenix contact PHO.3044814 UTTB 4

Lista de Materiales
Comprobado IGG Observaciones : NºPagina 100.a
Cuadro electrico Mixkret P.Siguiente 100.b
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Lista de Materiales
-25V4.1 1 Diodo rectificador. Taller MON.1N4007 1N4007
-25V4.1 1 Borna doble UTTB 4 (4mm2). Phoenix contact PHO.3044814 UTTB 4
-25V7 1 Diodo rectificador. Taller MON.1N4007 1N4007
-25V7 1 Borna doble UTTB 4 (4mm2). Phoenix contact PHO.3044814 UTTB 4
-25V7.1 1 Diodo rectificador. Taller MON.1N4007 1N4007
-25V7.1 1 Borna doble UTTB 4 (4mm2). Phoenix contact PHO.3044814 UTTB 4

Lista de Materiales
Comprobado IGG Observaciones : NºPagina 100.b
Cuadro electrico Mixkret P.Siguiente
0.0 E05500--0409 Das Solten Sie wissen (D, GB, F, E) This you should know Ce que vous devez savoir Cosas a tener en cuenta
0.1 E05812--1206 Gruppen Ubersicht MIXKRET Group summary Vue d’ensemble Plano de conjuntos
1.0 E05813--1206 Diesel Antriebseinheit 130KW/H1--S42 SAE B Diesel drive unit Unité de commande diesel Equipo motriz diesel
1.4 18560--1104 Reinigunsdeckel Ø 235 Cleaning lid Couvercle de nettoyage Tapa de limpieza
1.4 E05819--1206 Behälter MIXKRET Tanks Réservoires Depósitos
1.4 E05820--1206 Dieseltank 160 L Diesel tank Réservoir d’essence Depósito de gasoil
1.4 E05821--1206 Wassertank 200 L Water tank Réservoir d’eau Depósito de agua
1.4 E05822--1206 Ölbehälter 238 L Oil Tank Réservoir à huile Depósito de aceite
1.4 E05823--1206 Dosierbehaelter Kpl. 100 L Additive tank cpl. Réservoir d’additif cpl. Depósito de aditivo
1.5 18573--1105 Wasserfilter Kpl. Water filter Filtre d’eau Filtro de agua
1.5 E15428--1012 Saugfilter Suction filter Filtre d’aspiration Filtro de aspiración
2.1 11182--0207 4/2--Wegeventil 4/2--way valve Distributeur à 4/2 voies Válvula de 4/2 vías
2.1 15209--0207 4/3--Wegeventil 4/3--way valve Distributeur à 4/3 voies Válvula de 4/3 vías
2.1 E05561--0709 4/3--Wegeventil 24V 4/3--way valve Distributeur à 4/3 voies Válvula de 4/3 vías
2.1 E05835--1206 Hyd--Comp. Lenksysteme/ Bremse Hydraulic system Sterring/ Brake Systéme hydraulique Direction/ Frein Comp. hidr. Dirección/ Freno
2.1 E05836--1206 Hyd--Comp. Trommel Hydraulic system Drum Systéme hydraulique Tambour Comp. hidr. Cuba
2.1 E05837--1206 Hyd--Comp. Hochdruckwasserpumpe Hydraulic system high press.water pump Systéme hydraulique pompe à eau press Comp. hidr. bomba agua alta presión
2.4 E05563--0710 Ölkühler Oil radiator Radiateur à l’huile Radiador de aceite
2.8 15683--9910 Temperaturgeber Temperature transmitter Transmett. de température Termotransmisor
3.6 E05429--0703 Hydraulikmotor Orbitrol Hydraulic motor Orbitrol Moteur hydraulique Orbitrol Motor hidráulico Orbitrol
4.2 10286--9702 Minimess--Verscharubungen Gauge port fittings Raccords pour branchement de mes. Racores para puntos de medicion
4.2 10295--0811 Hydr.--Schläuche Hydr. hoses Flexibles hydr. Tubos flexibles hidr.
4.2 11479--0207 Hydr.--Verschraubungen BO-- Hydr. fittings Raccords hydr. Racores hidr.
4.2 12535--0410 SAE--Adapter Adapter SAE Adaptateur SAE Adaptador SAE
4.2 13188--9708 Hydraulikverschraubungen Hydr.fittings Raccords hydr. Racores hidr.
4.2 15365--0405 Rohrschelle kpl. Pipe clamp Collier Abrazadera de tubo
4.2 16672--1010 Manometer Pressure gauge Manomètre Manómetro
4.2 16673--0309 Vakuummeter Vacuum gauge Manomètre à vide Vacuómetro
4.2 17591--0702 Schaluchtüllen Rücklauf Hose nozzles return line Emboutsà olive, retour Portamangueras de retorno
5.1 E05688--1202 Schalterbox Switch box Box d’interrupteur Caja con interruptor
5.1 E05814--1206 Beleuchtung Lighting Éclairage Alumbrado
5.2 E05815--1206 Steuertableau (Kabine) Control panel (Cabin) Tableau de commande (Cabine) Panel de mando (Cabina)
5.2 E05833--1206 Steuertableau (Trommel) Control panel (Drum) Panneau de commande (Cuba) Cuadro de mando (Cuba)
5.3 16153--0512 Schalterbox Switch box Box d’interrupteur Caja con interruptor
5.3 E05825--1203 Schalterbox Not--aus Switch box Box arret urgence Caja con pulsador emergencia
8.0 E05827--1206 Trommel, Trichter Drum, Hopper Tambour, Trémie Cuba, Tolva
9.0 E05826--1206 Türes, Haube Door, hood Porte, capot Puertas, capot
2012--06--21 Ersatzteilliste MIXKRET 4

Spare Parts List 490700918
Liste des pièces de rechange 1 2
Lista de despiece
9.1 E05816--1206 Laufrad Kpl. 12R20 (X MINE D2) Wheel cpl. Roue cpl. Rueda cpta.
9.5 E05817--1206 Farhrerstandkabine--Fahrerkabine Driver’s place--Cabin Poste de conduite--Cabine Puesto de conducción--Cabina
9.5 E05824--1206 Einbaukupplung Assembly transmission Transmission Transmisión
9.7 E05831--1206 Koftlügel Rechts/ Links Mudguard right/ left Droite/ gauche aile Guardabarros derecho/ izquierdo
9.8 E05818--1206 Auspuffanlage m. Auspufftopf Exhaust system w. silencer Echappement cpl. Instalación escape c/ silencioso cpta.
12.1 E05832--1206 Hochdruck--Wasser--system Kpl. High pressure water system cpl. Sitème haute pression cpl. Sistema agua alta presión cpto.
12.3 16526--0810 Hochdruckwasserpumpe High pressure water pump Pompe à eau haute press. Bomba de agua de alta presión
12.3 18823--1112 Hochdruckwasserpumpe High pressure water pump Pompe á eau haute press. Bomba de agua de alta presión
24.4 21499--9312 Profilring--Verschraubungen Profile ring tube fittings Raccords á bague profilée pour tubes Anillo perfilado--unión roscada de tubos
24.9 22412--9311 Keilring--Verschraubungen Tapered ring fittings Raccords á bague conique Racores con anillo cónico
28.2 E05830--1206 Sicherung Security system Système d’assurance Sistema seguridad
28.2 E05834--1206 Komponenten der Maschine Machine’s components Composants de la machine Componentes de la máquina
2012--06--21 Ersatzteilliste MIXKRET 4

Spare Parts List 490700918
Liste des pièces de rechange 2 2
Lista de despiece
Deutsch 3 8 English 9 14 Français 15 20 Español 21 26
Das sollten Sie wissen ... This you should know ... Ce que vous devez savoir ... Cosas a tener en cuenta ...
über die Ersatzteilliste 3 about the spare parts list 9 concernant la liste des 15 acerca de la lista de repuestos 21
pièces de rechange
über die Ersatzteilbestellung 4 about the spare parts order 10 concernant la commande 16 acerca del pedido de repuestos 22
de pièces de rechange
über die Bestellangaben 4 about the order details 10 concernant les indications 16 acerca de los datos del pedido 22
lors d’une commande de pièces
über die verwendeten Symbole 5 about the symbols used 11 concernant les symboles utilisés 17 acerca de los símbolos utilizados 23
über die Ersatzteilblätter 6 about the spare parts sheets 12 concernant les feuilles de 18 acerca de las hojas de repuestos 24
pièces de rechange
über die allgemeinen 8 about the general 14 concernant les couples de 20 acerca de los pares de apriete 26
Anziehdrehmomente tightening torques serrage en général generales
Das sollten Sie wissen ...

This you should know ...
Ce que vous devez savoir ... 1 26
Cosas a tener en cuenta ... E05500--0409
This you should know ...
... über die Ersatzteilliste
Wie in der Betriebsanleitung beschrieben, ist die Gewährleistung gewähren wir im Rahmen unse- Der Inhalt dieser Ersatzteilliste darf ohne unsere
Bedienung, Wartung und Instandsetzung nur rer Verkaufs-- und Lieferbedingungen (bitte anfor- schriftliche Genehmigung auch nicht auszugs-
durch ausgebildetes und dazu beauftragtes Per- dern). Gewährleistungen für Ersatzteile werden weise wiedergegeben werden. Alle technischen
sonal zulässig. Zuständigkeiten des Personals von uns wie folgt vorgenommen: Angaben, Zeichnungen usw. unterliegen dem Ge-
klar festlegen. Bei Lieferung werden diese zunächst berechnet. setz zum Schutz des Urheberrechts. Diese Er-
Wir erstellen eine Gutschrift, wenn wir uns an- satzteilliste darf nur zu dem Zweck verwendet
Nur wenn Sie Original--Putzmeister--Ersatzteile hand der frachtfrei zurückgelieferten, ausge- werden, für den sie von uns ausgehändigt wurde.
verwenden, haben Sie die Gewähr für eine ein- tauschten und gekennzeichneten Teile über die Weitergabe an Dritte, insbesondere an Konkur-
wandfreie Funktion Ihrer Maschine. Anderenfalls mangelhafte Beschaffenheit derselben, im Sinne renzfirmen, ist untersagt. Im übrigen bleiben alle
erlischt jeder Gewährleistungsanspruch. unserer Gewährleistungsbedingungen, überzeu- Rechte, insbesondere das der Patentanmeldung,
gen konnten. vorbehalten.
Wenn innerhalb 30 Tagen nach Benachrichtigung
unsererseits keine Rückforderung von Ihnen er- © Copyright by
folgt, werden beschädigte Teile verschrottet.
Lesen Sie diese Seiten aufmerksam durch, um

Probleme und eventuell entstehende Kosten für
Falschlieferungen zu vermeiden.
Die in dieser Ersatzteilliste enthaltenen Abbildun-

gen und Texte sind unverbindlich, technische Än-
derungen bleiben vorbehalten.

This you should know ... Deutsch
... über die Ersatzteilbestellung ... über die Bestellangaben
Die Ersatzteilbestellung muß grundsätzlich schrift- Alle im Beispiel geforderten Angaben sind für eine reibungslose Bestellung erforderlich.
lich erfolgen, anderenfalls müssen Kosten für
Falschlieferungen von Ihnen getragen werden.
Fa. Beton GmbH
Durchdenwaldstr. 37 von: Fritz Mustermann
Alle Ersatzteillieferungen erfolgen auf der D--77777 Betonhausen
Grundlage unserer Verkaufs-- und Lieferbedin- an: Putzmeister Ibérica Dpto. Repuestos
Tel.: 0111--7171
gungen. Fax: +34 91 428 81 05
Fax: 0111--1717
Die Angaben, die wir bei jeder Ersatzteilbestellung

benötigen, sind in der nachfolgenden Beschrei- Ersatzteilbestellung Rechnungsanschrift / Versandanschrift
bung der Ersatzteilblätter fett gedruckt. Bestell--Nr.:
Muster
Dringlichkeit:
Wenn nicht anders angegeben, gilt die Maßeinheit
Versandart:
Millimeter (mm). O--Ring--Abmessungen sind in
folgender Form angegeben:
Innendurchmesser x Ringdicke (z.B. 15 x 2,5) Maschinen--Nr. 220100048
Material-- Nr. Menge Ein- Benennung Ersatzteilblatt-- Nr. Pos.-- Nr.

Ihre Ersatzteilbestellung richten Sie bitte an Ihre heit
nächste Putzmeister--Vertretung oder an:
0 4 1 3 2 3 0 0 5 3, St O- Ring 1 4 1 7 1 9 6 0 2 19
Putzmeister Ibérica
,
Camino de Hormigueras Nº 173
28031 Madrid ,
España
,
Departamento de Repuestos
Fax +34 91 428 81 05 ,
Teléfono 902 19 41 30
Internet: http://www.putzmeister.es
E--mail: repuestos@putzmeister.es

... über die verwendeten Symbole
In der nachfolgenden Tabelle finden Sie die in den Ersatzteilblättern verwendeten Symbole und deren Bedeutung.
Positions--Nr. mit sind Ver- Befestigungsmittel Recycling:

1 weise auf die Informations- PM--Rücknahmeangebot/umwelt-
spalte. gerechte Entsorgung
Md Dichtungsmittel Umweltschutz: Bei der Entsor-
Anziehdrehmomente Md
gung auf geltende nationale und
in Nm (Newtonmeter)
regionale Vorschriften achten.
Angaben siehe Maschinenkarte Einölen Auf einem anderen Ersatzteilblatt

abgebildet
Menge -- Nach Bedarf Aktivator 4.2 z.B. in der EG 4.2

Maßeinheit ist bei Ersatzteilbe-
? stellung erforderlich.
Austausch -- Teil nicht wieder Einfetten 4.2 z.B. im EBN 10295

verwenden 10295
Ohne Abbildung OIL Anzeige

MAX Verwaltungshinweis
MIN
Sonderwerkzeug OIL Befüllung 23.5 Neuer Stand ist gültig.

SAE 90 21406--9205
5,6 l
Dichtsatz Entleerung 23.5 Alter Stand behält seine maschi-

OIL 21406--9205 nenbezogene Gültigkeit.

... über die Ersatzteilblätter
1 2 3 4 12
1 Informationsspalte
(Zusatzinformationen in Form von Zeichen
und Symbolen)
2 Abbildung der Ersatzteile
3 Positions--Nr. des Ersatzteils

mit Verweis auf Zusatzinformationen in der
Informationsspalte 1
5 Hinweis
6 Verwaltungshinweis
7 Benennung der Ersatzteilgruppe
8 Material--Nr. der Ersatzteilgruppe
9 Anzahl der Seiten des Ersatzteilblattes

950614
10 Ersatzteilgruppe (EG) 1 2
11 Ersatzteilblatt--Nr. (EBN)
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 Wasserzeichen (Kopierschutz)

16
14 Material--Nr. 13 14 15 Deutsch 17 Englisch Französisch Spanisch 18
15 Menge
Ist keine Stückzahl angegeben ( -- ), so
müssen Sie die benötigte Menge und
Maßeinheit angeben.
16 Benennung / Lieferumfang
Die Punkte zeigen den Lieferumfang einer
Position. Im Lieferumfang einer Position EG 12.1 EBN14170
sind alle nachfolgenden Positionen mit

mehr Punkten enthalten.
Beispiele: 1 292813005 1 Rü
2 265990007 1 . Sc
Positions--Nr. 1 3 265984000 1 . . Sc
Lieferumfang Position 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 4 265985009 1 ...M
5 080807003 1 ...A
Positions--Nr. 2 6 032204007 1 ..S
Lieferumfang Position 3, 4, 5, 6 7 041071001 1 O--
Positions--Nr. 3
Lieferumfang Position 4, 5
17 Abmessung
1 2
18 Verweis
Ersatzteilgruppe (EG) und Ersatzteilblatt--
Nr. (EBN), unter denen das Ersatzteil mit
Einzelteilen zu finden ist.

... über die allgemeinen Anziehdrehmomente
Anziehdrehmomente sind von Schraubenqualität, Die folgenden Tabellen beinhalten die maximalen Für Schrauben mit mikroverkapseltem Klebstoff
Gewindereibung und Schraubenkopfauflagefläche Anziehdrehmomente Md in Nm für eine Reibungs- gelten sämtliche Anziehdrehmomente x 1,1.
abhängig. Die in den folgenden Tabellen angege- zahl μges. = 0,14, Gewinde leicht geölt oder leicht
benen Werte sind Richtwerte. Sie sind nur dann gefettet.
gültig, wenn in den Einzelkapiteln der Betriebsan-
leitung oder in den Ersatzteilblättern keine anderen
Werte genannt werden.
Schaftschrauben -- Metrisches Regelgewinde DIN 13, Blatt 13 Schaftschrauben -- Metrisches Feingewinde DIN 13, Blatt 13
Abmessun- Anziehdrehmo- Abmessungen Anziehdrehmo-
gen [mm] ment Md [Nm] [mm] ment Md [Nm]
M SW 8.8 10.9 12.9 M SW 8.8 10.9 12.9
M4 7 3 4,4 5,1 M 8x1 13 27 39 46
M5 8 5,9 8,7 10 M 10 x 1,25 17 52 76 90
M6 10 10 15 18 M 12 x 1,25 19 93 135 160
M8 13 25 36 43 M 12 x 1,5 19 89 130 155
M 10 17 49 72 84 M 14 x 1,5 22 145 215 255
M 12 19 85 125 145 M 16 x 1,5 24 225 330 390
M 14 22 135 200 235 M 18 x 1,5 27 340 485 570
M 16 24 210 310 365 M 20 x 1,5 30 475 680 790
M 18 27 300 430 500 M 22 x 1,5 32 630 900 1050
M 20 30 425 610 710 M 24 x 2 36 800 1150 1350
M 22 32 580 820 960 M 27 x 2 41 1150 1650 1950
SW = S
S Schlüsselweite SW = Schlüsselweite
M 24 36 730 1050 1220 X.X = Qualitätsklasse 8.8, 10.9, 12.9 M 30 x 2 46 1650 2350 2750
X X = Qualitätsklasse 8.8,
X.X 8 8 10.9,
10 9 12.9
12 9
M 27 41 1100 1550 1800
M 30 46 1450 2100 2450

... about the spare parts list
As described in the Operating Instructions, our Our warranty is given under the terms of our The contents of this spare parts list may not be
machinery may only be operated, serviced and conditions of sale and supply (available on reproduced, even in part, without our written
repaired by personnel trained and commissioned request). Warranty claims for spare parts will approval. All technical data, drawings, etc are
to undertake such work. Define the responsibi- be settled as follows: protected by copyright law. This spare parts list
lities of the personnel clearly. Initially, these will be invoiced on delivery. A credit may only be used for the purpose for which it has
note will be issued when the replaced, identified, been supplied by us. It must not be passed on to
You can only be certain that your machine will parts have been returned to us, carriage paid, third parties, in particular competitors. Moreover,
function perfectly if you use Original Putzmeister and we have been able to ascertain that the parts all rights, especially those of patent application,
spare parts. Any warranty claim will be invalidated were faulty and that the claim meets our warranty are reserved.
if genuine spare parts are not used. conditions.
Damaged parts will be scrapped if the customer © Copyright by
makes no request for their return within 30 days
of our notification.
Please read these pages carefully to avoid prob-

lems and costs which may arise from incorrect
deliveries.
The illustrations and texts in this spare parts list

are not binding. We reserve the right to make
technical changes.

This you should know ... English
... about the spare parts order ... about the order details
Spare parts orders must always be submitted in All the details required in this example are necessary for your order to be processed smoothly.
writing, otherwise you will have to bear the costs
of incorrect deliveries.
The Concrete Company
Borchester Road from: Tony Adams
All supplies of spare parts are made on the basis Ambridge BC22 8BL
of our conditions of sale and supply. to: Putzmeister Ibérica Dpto. Repuesots
Tel.: 0111 7171
Fax: +34 91 428 81 05
Fax: 0111 1717
The details we require for every spare parts order
are printed in bold in the description of the spare
parts sheet below. Spare parts order Invoice address/Delivery address
Order no.:
Unless otherwise stated, the unit of measurement Urgency:
Specimen
is the millimetre (mm). O--ring dimensions are Dispatch by:
stated as follows:
internal diameter x ring thickness (eg 15 x 2.5)
Machine number 220100048
Please send your spare parts order to your
Material no. Quantity Unit Description Spare parts sheet no. Item no.
nearest Putzmeister agency or to:
0 4 1 3 2 3 0 0 5 3, off O- ring 1 4 1 7 1 9 6 0 2 19
Putzmeister Ibérica
,
28031 Madrid ,
España
,
Fax +34 91 428 81 05 ,
Teléfono 902 19 41 30

... about the symbols used
The following table shows the symbols used in the spare parts sheets and their meaning.
Item numbers with are Glue Recycling:

1 references to the information PM accepts returns /
column. environmentally correct disposal
Md Sealing agent Environmental protection:
Tightening torques Md
comply with national and regional
in Nm (Newtonmetres)
regulations for disposal.
Refer to the machine card Oil Illustrated on a different

for further details spare parts sheet
Quantity -- as required Activator 4.2 eg in spare parts group 4.2

The unit of measurement must be
? specified in the spare parts order.
Replace -- do not reuse part Grease 4.2 eg on spare parts sheet

10295 no. 10295
Not illustrated OIL Gauge

MAX Version control note
MIN
Special tool OIL Fill volume 23.5 New version is valid

SAE 90 21406--9205
5.6 l
Gasket set Drain 23.5 Previous issue remains valid

OIL 21406--9205 for specific machine

... about the spare parts sheets
1 2 3 4 12
1 Information column
(additional information in the form of signs
and symbols)
2 Illustration of the spare parts
3 Item number of the spare part

with reference to additional information in
the information column 1
5 Note
6 Version control note
7 Description of the spare parts group
8 Spare parts group material number
9 Number of pages in the spare parts sheet

950614
10 Spare parts group 1 2
11 Spare parts sheet number

5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 Watermark (copy protection)

16
14 Material no. 13 14 15 German 17 English French Spanish 18
15 Quantity
If no number is stated ( -- ), you must
specify the quantity required and the
unit of measurement.
16 Description / Scope of supply

The dots indicate the scope of supply for
an item. The scope of supply for an item EG 12.1 EBN14170
includes all items listed beneath it with

a greater number of dots.
Examples: 1 292813005 1 Rü
2 265990007 1 . Sc
Item 1 3 265984000 1 . . Sc
Scope of supply: items 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 4 265985009 1 ...M
5 080807003 1 ...A
Item 2 6 032204007 1 ..S
Scope of supply: items 3, 4, 5, 6 7 041071001 1 O--
Item 3
Scope of supply: items 4, 5
17 Dimension
1 2
18 Reference
Spare parts group (EG) and spare parts
sheet number (EBN), where the spare part
is specified with its individual components.

... about the general tightening torques
Tightening torques depend on bolt grade, thread The tables below give the maximum tightening All tightening torques are multiplied by a factor
friction and bolt head bearing area. The values torques Md in Nm for a friction factor μtot. = 0.14, of 1.1 for bolts with cement in the thread.
given in the following tables are for guidance. for a lightly--oiled or lightly--greased thread.
These values should only be used if no other va-
lues are specified in the relevant sections of the
Operating Instructions or in spare parts sheets.
Set screws -- metric triangular thread, DIN 13, Part 13 Set screws -- metric precision thread, DIN 13, Part 13
Dimensions Tightening torque Dimensions Tightening torque
[mm] Md [Nm] [mm] Md [Nm]
M SW 8.8 10.9 12.9 M SW 8.8 10.9 12.9
M4 7 3 4.4 5.1 M 8x1 13 27 39 46
M5 8 5.9 8.7 10 M 10 x 1.25 17 52 76 90
M6 10 10 15 18 M 12 x 1.25 19 93 135 160
M8 13 25 36 43 M 12 x 1.5 19 89 130 155
M 10 17 49 72 84 M 14 x 1.5 22 145 215 255
M 12 19 85 125 145 M 16 x 1.5 24 225 330 390
M 14 22 135 200 235 M 18 x 1.5 27 340 485 570
M 16 24 210 310 365 M 20 x 1.5 30 475 680 790
M 18 27 300 430 500 M 22 x 1.5 32 630 900 1050
M 20 30 425 610 710 M 24 x 2 36 800 1150 1350
M 22 32 580 820 960 M 27 x 2 41 1150 1650 1950
SW = Width across fflats
S SW = Width across flats
M 24 36 730 1050 1220 X.X = Grade 8.8, 10.9, 12.9 M 30 x 2 46 1650 2350 2750
X X = Grade 8.8,
X.X 8 8 10.9,
10 9 12.9
12 9
M 27 41 1100 1550 1800
M 30 46 1450 2100 2450

... concernant la liste des pièces de rechange
Comme décrit dans les instructions de service, Notre garantie s’effectue dans le cadre de nos Toute reproduction, même partielle, de la
la machine ne doit être conduite, entretenue et conditions de vente et de livraison (les comman- présente liste est interdite, sauf autorisation écrite
réparée que par des personnes formées et der, s. v. p.). Les prestations de garantie pour les de notre part. Toutes les données techniques,
chargées de ces tâches. Il faut définir clairement pièces de rechange s’effectuent de la manière schémas etc. tombent sous la loi sur la protection
les compétences du personnel. suivante: des droits d’auteur. Cette liste des pièces de
Elles sont facturées à la livraison. Nous établirons rechange ne peut être utilisée qu’aux seules fins
Seule l’utilisation de pièces de rechange d’origine un avoir si, au moyen des pièces échangées et auxquelles nous vous l’avons remise. Sa commu-
Putzmeister vous garantit un fonctionnement identifiées, retournées franco de port, nous avons nication à des tiers, notamment à des concur-
parfait de votre machine. Faute de quoi, vous pu constater leur conception défectueuse dans le rents, est strictement interdite. Au reste, tous
perdrez tous recours en garantie. sens de nos conditions générales de garantie. les droits, en particulier celui d’une demande de
Faute d’une réclamation de votre part dans les brevet, restent réservés.
30 jours après information de notre part, les
pièces défectueuses seront ferraillées. © Copyright by
Veuillez lire attentivement ces pages, afin d’éviter

des problèmes et des coûts éventuels résultant
d’une livraison erronée.
Les dessins et textes dans la liste des pièces de

rechange jointe sont communiqués sans engage-
ment de notre part et sous réserve de modifica-
tions techniques.

This you should know ... Français
... concernant la commande de pièces ... concernant les indications lors d’une commande de pièces
de rechange
Pour éviter toute erreur de livraison et tout problème, il est indispensable de nous communiquer
Toute commande de pièces doit impérativement toutes les indications demandées dans l’exemple ci--après.
être effectuée par écrit, faute de quoi les coûts
d’une livraison erronée seront à votre charge. Beton SARL
37, rue de la forêt de: Monsieur P. Dupont
Toutes les livraisons de pièces sont réalisées F--99999 La Ville Béton
à: Putzmeister Ibérica Dpto. Repuestos
sur la base de nos conditions de ventes et de Tél.: 01 01 01 01 01
Fax: +34 91 428 81 05
livraison. Fax: 01 01 01 01 02
Les indications qui nous sont indispensables lors

de chaque commande de pièces sont imprimées Commande de pièces de rechange Adresse de facturation/adresse de livraison
en gras dans la description suivante des feuilles Nº de commande:
de pièces de rechange.
Spécimen
Degré d’urgence:
Sauf indication contraire, toutes les mesures Mode d’expédition:
sont en millimètres (mm). Les mesures des
joints toriques sont indiquées comme ci--après:
diamètre intérieur x épaisseur du joint Nº de machine 220100048
(p.ex. 15 x 2,5) Nº d’article Quantité Unité Désignation Nº de la feuille PDR Nº de
pos.
Veuillez adresser votre commande de pièces au
représentant Putzmeister le plus proche ou à: 0 4 1 3 2 3 0 0 5 3, pces Joint torique 1 4 1 7 1 9 6 0 2 19
Putzmeister Ibérica ,
28031 Madrid ,
España
,
Fax 34 91 428 81 05 ,
Teléfono 902 19 41 30

... concernant les symboles utilisés
Dans le tableau suivant vous trouverez les symboles et leur signification utilisés sur les feuilles de pièces de rechange.
Les nº de positions avec un Produit de fixation Recyclage:

1 sont des renvois à la colonne Proposition PM de reprise /
d’informations. élimination écologique
Md Produit d’étanchéité Protection de l’environnement:
Couples de serrage Md en Nm
lors de l’élimination, respecter
(Newton--mètre)
les prescriptions nationales et
régionales en vigueur.
Indications, voir la carte machine Huiler
Illustré sur une autre feuille de
pièces de rechange
Quantité -- selon besoin Activateur
L’indication de l’unité de mesure est 4.2
p.ex. groupe de pièces
indispensable lors d’une commande
? de pièces.
de rechange 4.2
Echange -- ne pas réutiliser Graisser 4.2 p.ex. feuille de pièces

la pièce 10295
de rechange nº 10295
Sans illustration OIL Indication

MAX Indication concernant la tenue
MIN des documents
Outils spéciaux OIL Remplissage 23.5 La nouvelle mise à jour est

SAE 90 21406--9205
valable.
5,6 l
Jeu de joints Vidange 23.5 L’ancien état reste valable pour

OIL 21406--9205 la machine.

... concernant les feuilles de pièces de rechange
1 2 3 4 12
1 Colonne d’informations
(informations supplémentaires sous forme
de signes et symboles)
2 Illustration des pièces de rechange
3 Nº de position de la pièce de rechange

avec renvoi à des informations supplémen-
taires dans la colonne d’informations 1
5 Remarque
6 Remarque sur la tenue des documents
7 Appellation du groupe de pièces de rechange
8 Nº d’article du groupe de pièces de rechange
9 Nombre de pages de la feuille de pièces de

rechange
950614
10 Groupe de pièces de rechange
1 2
11 Nº de la feuille de pièces de rechange
12 Filigrane (protection contre une reproduction) 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

16
14 Nº d’article 13 14 15 Allemand 17 Anglais Français Espagnol 18
15 Quantité
Si le nombre n’est pas indiqué ( -- ), vous
devez indiquer la quantité nécessaire et
l’unité de mesure.
16 Désignation / Fourniture
Les points indiquent l’étendue de livraison
d’une position. La position est livrée avec
toutes les positions suivantes, précédées EG 12.1 EBN14170
de plusieurs points.
Exemples:
1 292813005 1 Rü
Position 1:
2 265990007 1 . Sc
Etendue de livraison:
3 265984000 1 . . Sc
positions 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
4 265985009 1 ...M
Position 2:
5 080807003 1 ...A
Etendue de livraison: 6 032204007 1 ..S
positions 3, 4, 5, 6 7 041071001 1 O--
Position 3:
Etendue de livraison:
positions 4, 5
17 Dimensions
1 2
18 Renvoi
Groupe de pièces de rechange (EG) et
feuille de pièces de rechange (EBN) où la
pièce de rechange avec ses éléments peut
être trouvée.

... concernant les couples de serrage en général
Les couples de serrage se calculent en fonction de instructions de service soit dans les feuilles de Pour des vis à colle microencapsulée, tous les
la qualité des vis, de la friction du pas de vis et de pièces de rechange. couples de serrage sont à multiplier par 1,1.
la surface d’appui de la tête de vis. Les couples Les tableaux ci--après concernent des couples de
indiqués dans les tableaux ci--après sont des serrage maxi Md en Nm pour un coefficient de
valeurs de référence. Elles ne sont valables, qu’à frottement μtot. = 0,14, filetage légèrement huilé
partir du moment où aucune autre valeur n’est ou légèrement graissé.
indiquée soit dans les divers chapitres des
Vis sans tête, partiellement filetées -- Filetage métrique à pas gros Vis sans tête, partiellement filetée -- Filetage métrique à pas fin
DIN 13, feuille 13 DIN 13, feuille 13
Filetage Couple de serrage Filetage Couple de serrage
[mm] Md [Nm] [mm] Md [Nm]
M SW 8.8 10.9 12.9 M SW 8.8 10.9 12.9
M4 7 3 4,4 5,1 M 8x1 13 27 39 46
M5 8 5,9 8,7 10 M 10 x 1,25 17 52 76 90
M6 10 10 15 18 M 12 x 1,25 19 93 135 160
M8 13 25 36 43 M 12 x 1,5 19 89 130 155
M 10 17 49 72 84 M 14 x 1,5 22 145 215 255
M 12 19 85 125 145 M 16 x 1,5 24 225 330 390
M 14 22 135 200 235 M 18 x 1,5 27 340 485 570
M 16 24 210 310 365 M 20 x 1,5 30 475 680 790
M 18 27 300 430 500 M 22 x 1,5 32 630 900 1050
M 20 30 425 610 710 M 24 x 2 36 800 1150 1350
M 22 32 580 820 960 M 27 x 2 41 1150 1650 1950
SW = O
S Ouverture de cléé SW = Ouverture de clé
M 24 36 730 1050 1220 X.X = Qualité 8.8, 10.9, 12.9 M 30 x 2 46 1650 2350 2750
X X = Qualité 8.8,
X.X 8 8 10.9,
10 9 12.9
12 9
M 27 41 1100 1550 1800
M 30 46 1450 2100 2450

... acerca de la lista de repuestos
Según se describe en las instrucciones de servi- La garantía se concederá de acuerdo con nues- Se prohibe toda divulgación, total o en forma de
cio, el manejo, el mantenimiento y las reparacio- tras condiciones generales de venta y de sumi- extractos, del contenido de esta lista de repue-
nes deben confiarse solamente al personal nistro (a petición). Nuestro procedimiento de stos sin nuestra autorización escrita. Las informa-
especializado responsable. Háganse constar garantía para repuestos es el siguiente: ciones técnicas, los planos, etc. están protegidos
claramente los cometidos del personal. En primer lugar se facturarán las piezas entrega- por la ley de propiedad intelectual. La lista de
das. Después de examinar las piezas marcadas, repuestos no se utilizará más que para el uso
El funcionamiento seguro de las máquinas se cambiadas y retornadas con portes pagados y de previsto. Se prohibe la entrega a terceros, espe-
garantiza solamente si se utilizan repuestos verificar la naturaleza defectuosa de las mismas cialmente a empresas de la competencia. Por lo
originales Putzmeister. En caso contrario no en el sentido de lo especificado en las condi- demás se reservan todos los derechos, especial-
asumimos ninguna responsabilidad. ciones de garantía, extenderemos una nota mente el de solicitud de patente.
de abono.
Si en los 30 días siguientes a nuestra notificación © Copyright de
no hemos recibido petición de devolución por su
parte, las piezas defectuosas se enviará a des-
guace.
Rogamos se familiaricen con estas instrucciones

para evitar problemas y eventuales gastos deri-
vados de envíos incorrectos.
Todas las figuras y descripciones contenidos en

esta lista de repuestos son sin compromiso y con
reserva de modificaciones técnicas.

This you should know ... Español
... acerca del pedido de repuestos ... acerca de los datos del pedido
El pedido de repuestos ha de realizarse siempre Para poder cursar correctamente el pedido se precisan todos los datos requieridos en el ejemplo
por escrito. De lo contrario, los gastos derivados siguiente.
de envíos incorrectos irán a cargo del cliente.
Fa. Hormigón S.L.
Crtra. de los Prados s/n. de: José García
Los repuestos se entregan sobre la base de E--77777 Valdecemento
nuestras condiciones generales de venta y a: Putzmeister Ibércia Dpto. Repuestos
Tel.: 0111--7171
suministro. Fax: +34 91 428 81 05
Fax: 0111--1717
Los datos que se precisan con cada pedido de

repuestos aparecen en negrita en la descripción
Pedido de repuestos Dirección para envío de factura /
de la hoja de repuestos siguiente. Dirección para envío de material
Nº pedido:
Si no se especifica otra cosa, las medidas son Prioridad:
todas en milímetros (mm). Las medidas de las
juntas tóricas se expresan de la forma siguiente:
diámetro interior x grosor de la junta
(por ejemplo 15 x 2,5).
Forma de envío:
Nº de máquina 220100048
Modelo
Nº material Cantidad Unidad Denominación Nº hoja de repuestos Nº pos.
Para el pedido de repuestos, consúltese al
representante local Putzmeister o a: 0 4 1 3 2 3 0 0 5 3, U. Junta tórica 1 4 1 7 1 9 6 0 2 19
Putzmeister Ibérica, S.A.
,
Cmno. de Hormigueras Nº 173
28031 Madrid ,
España
,
Fax 34 91 428 81 05 ,
Teléfono 902 19 41 30
Correo electrónico: repuestos@putzmeister.es

... acerca de los símbolos utilizados
La tabla adjunta contiene los símbolos utilizados en las hojas de repuestos y lo que significan.
Los números de posición con Material de fijación Reciclaje:

1 el símbolo hacen referencia PM--oferta de retorno /
a la columna informativa. eliminación ecológica
Md Material de junta Medio ambiente:
Pares de apriete Md
para la eliminación deben respe-
en Nm (Newtonmetro)
tarse las normativas nacionales
y regionales vigentes.
Para las características, véase Lubricar
la ficha de la máquina Figura en una hoja de repuestos
separada
Cantidad: sobre demanda Activador 42
4.2
Es imprescindible especificar la unidad por ejemplo en el grupo
? de medida en el pedido de repuestos. de repuestos 4.2
No reutilizar las piezas Engrasar 4.2 por ejemplo en la hoja

cambiadas 10295
de repuestos nº 10295
Sin figura OIL Indicación

MAX Indicación administrativa
MIN
Herramientas especiales OIL Llenado 23.5 Vale la última edición.

SAE 90 21406--9205
5,6 l
Juego de juntas Vaciado 23.5 La edición anterior continúa

OIL 21406--9205 siendo válida para las máquinas
a que hace referencia.

... acerca de las hojas de repuestos
1 2 3 4 12
1 Columna informativa
(Información suplementaria en forma
de señales y símbolos)
2 Figura de los repuestos
3 Nº posición del repuesto

con referencia a información suplementaria
en la columna informativa 1
5 Advertencia
6 Indicación administrativa
7 Denominación del grupo de repuestos
8 Nº material del grupo de repuestos
9 Número de páginas de la hoja de repuestos

950614
10 Grupo de repuestos 1 2
11 Nº hoja de repuestos
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 Filigrana (seguro de copia)

16
14 Nº de material 13 14 15 Alemán 17 Inglés Francés Español 18
15 Cantidad
Si no se indica ninguna cifra ( -- ), hay
que especificar la cantidad necesaria y
la unidad de medida.
16 Denominación / Volumen de suministro

Los puntos indican el volumen de suminis-
tro de una posición. El volumen de suminis- EG 12.1 EBN14170
tro de una posición contiene todas las posi-
ciones siguientes con más puntos.
Ejemplos: 1 292813005 1 Rü
Posición nº 1 2 265990007 1 . Sc
Volumen de suministro: 3 265984000 1 . . Sc
posiciones 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 4 265985009 1 ...M
Posición nº 2 5 080807003 1 ...A
Volumen de suministro: 6 032204007 1 ..S
posiciones 3, 4, 5, 6 7 041071001 1 O--
Posición nº 3
Volumen de suministro:
posiciones 4, 5
17 Medidas
1 2
18 Referencia
El grupo de repuestos (EG) y el nº de la
hoja de repuestos (EBN) que contienen el
repuesto y todos los componentes.

... acerca de los pares de apriete generales
El par de apriete a ejercer en cada caso depende Las tablas siguientes contienen los pares de Para los tornillos con adhesivo microencapsulado
de la calidad del tornillo, del rozamiento de la apriete máximos Md en Nm para un coeficiente de se utilizarán los pares de apriete especificados
rosca y de la superficie de apoyo de la cabeza del rozamiento μtotal = 0,14 con la rosca ligeramente multiplicados por 1,1.
tornillo. Los valores de la tablas siguientes son lubricada o engrasada.
aproximados. Valen solamente si en los diferentes
apartados de las instrucciones de servicio y en las
hojas de repuestos no se especifican otros valores.
Tornillos cilíndricos, rosca métrica regular DIN 13, hoja 13 Tornillos cilíndricos, rosca métrica fina DIN 13, hoja 13
Medidas Par de apriete Md Medidas Par de apriete Md
[mm] [Nm] [mm] [Nm]
M SW 8.8 10.9 12.9 M SW 8.8 10.9 12.9
M 4 7 3,0 4,4 5,1 M 8x1 13 27 39 46
M 5 8 5,9 8,7 10 M 10 x 1,25 17 52 76 90
M 6 10 10 15 18 M 12 x 1,25 19 93 135 160
M 8 13 25 36 43 M 12 x 1,5 19 89 130 155
M 10 17 49 72 84 M 14 x 1,5 22 145 215 255
M 12 19 85 125 145 M 16 x 1,5 24 225 330 390
M 14 22 135 200 235 M 18 x 1,5 27 340 485 570
M 16 24 210 310 365 M 20 x 1,5 30 475 680 790
M 18 27 300 430 500 M 22 x 1,5 32 630 900 1050
M 20 30 425 610 710 M 24 x 2 36 800 1150 1350
M 22 32 580 820 960 M 27 x 2 41 1150 1650 1950
SW = Ancho de llave
S SW = Ancho de llave
M 24 36 730 1050 1220 X.X = Categoría de calidad 8.8, M 30 x 2 46 1650 2350 2750
X X = Categoría de calidad 8.8,
X.X 88
10.9, 12.9 M 27 41 1100 1550 1800 10.9, 12.9
M 30 46 1450 2100 2450

28.2
8.0
9.5
5.1
1.4
1.0
5.1
9.0
9.1
1.4
5.2
5.1
TD: Gonzalez
Gruppenübersicht
Group summary
Vue d’ensemble 1 6
0.1
E05812--1206
Plano de conjuntos
1.0 Diesel Antriebseinheit Diesel drive unit Unité de commande diesel Equipo motriz diésel
1.4 Behälter Tanks Réservoires Depósitos
1.5 Saugfilter Suction filter Filtre d’aspiration Filtro de aspiración
2.1 Hydr.--Ventil Hydr. valve Soupape hydr. Válvulas hidráulicas
2.1 Hydr. Komp. Lenksysteme/ Bremse/ Hydr. system Steering/ Brake/ Drum Systéme hydraulique Direction/ Frein/ Comp. hidráulicos Dirección/ Freno/
Trommel Tambour Cuba
2.4 Ölkühler Oil radiator Radiateur à l’huile Radiador de aceite
2.8 Temperaturgeber Temperature transmitter Transmett. de température Termotransmisor
4.2 Minimess--Verschraubungen Gauge port fittings Raccords pour branchement de mesure Racores para puntos de medición
4.2 Bördel--Rohrverschraubungen Flare tube fittings Raccords pour tubes évasés Racores para tubos rebordeados
4.2 Manometer Pressure gauge Manomètre Manómetro
4.2 Vakuummeter Vacuum gauge Manométre a vide Vacuómetro
5.1 Beleuchtung Kpl. Lighting cpl. Eclairage cpl. Alumbrado cpto.
5.1 Schalterbox Switch box Box d’interrupteur Caja con interruptor
5.2 Steuertableau (Kabine) Control panel (Cabin) Armoire de commande (Cabine) Armario de mando (Cabina)
5.2 Steuertableau (Trommel) Control panel (Drum) Panneau de commande (Cuba) Cuadro de mando (Cuba)
5.3 Schalterbox Switch box Box d’interrupteur Caja con interruptor
8.0 Trommel, Trichter Drum, Hopper Tambour, Trémie Cuba, Tolva
9.0 Türes, Haube Door, hood Portes, capot Puertas, capot
9.1 Laufrad Kpl. Wheel cpl. Roue cpl. Rueda cpta.
9.5 Farhrerstandkabine Driver’s cab Cabine de conduite Puesto de conducción
9.5 Einbaukupplung Assembly transmission Transmission Transmisión
9.7 Koftlügel Rechts/ Links Mudguard right/ left Droite/ gauche aile Guardabarros derecho/ izquierdo
9.8 Auspuffanlage m. Auspufftopf Exhaust system w. silencer Echappement cpl. Instalación escape c/ silencioso cpto.
12.1 Hochdruck--Waser--System Kpl. Highe pressure water system cpl. Sistème haute pression cpl. Sistema agua alta presión cpto.
12.3 Hochdruckwasserpumpe High pressure water pump Pompe à eau haute pression Bomba d.agua d.alta presión
28.2 Komponenten der Maschine Machine’s components Composants de la machine Componentes de la máquina
28.2 Sicherung Security system Système d’assurance Sistema seguridad
Gruppenübersicht
Group summary
0.1
E05812--1206
Plano de conjuntos
12.1
5.2
5.1 9.7
Gruppenübersicht
Group summary
0.1
E05812--1206
Plano de conjuntos
Gruppenübersicht
Group summary
0.1
E05812--1206
Plano de conjuntos
28.2 1.5 5.3
2.1
5.1
5.1
12.3
9.5
9.8
4.2
2.4 12.1
4.2
Gruppenübersicht
Group summary
0.1
E05812--1206
Plano de conjuntos
Gruppenübersicht
Group summary
0.1
E05812--1206
Plano de conjuntos
1 0
(1--6)
5 2
TD: Gonzalez
Diesel Antriebseinheit 130KW/H1--S42 SAE B

Diesel drive unit 130KW/H1--S42 SAE B
Unité de commande diesel 130KW/H1--S42 SAE B
E560649
1 2
1.0
E05813--1206
Equipo motriz diesel 130KW/H1--S42 SAE B
0 E560649 1 Diesel Antriebseinheit 130KW/H1--S42 SAE B Diesel drive unit Unité de commande diesel Equipo motriz diesel
1 E557048 1 Diesel--Motor 130KW/2500 C6.6 ACERT 24V Diesel engine Moteur diesel Motor diesel
2 E557554 1 Hydr.--Pumpe D 51 S42 175BAR SAE--B Hydraulic pump Pompe hydraulique Bomba hidráulica
3 E557549 1 Hydr.--Pumpe D 115 H1 Hydraulic pump Pompe hydraulique Bomba hidráulica
4 E558555 1 Anbausatz H1 115 --MOT.D.C6.6 Mounting kit Jeu de montage Juego de montaje
5 E510316 1 Hydr.--Pumpe D 21,14+6,7 PLP20.20/10.6,3 Hydraulic pump Pompe hydraulique Bomba hidráulica
6 E561897 4 K--Lager D 110 x 69 70Sh Cone bearing Silentbloc Silentbloc cónico
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
Diesel Antriebseinheit 130KW/H1--S42 SAE B

Diesel drive unit 130KW/H1--S42 SAE B
Unité de commande diesel 130KW/H1--S42 SAE B
E560649
2 2
1.0
E05813--1206
Equipo motriz diesel 130KW/H1--S42 SAE B
235217008 Reinigungsdeckel Ø 235
Cleaning lid Ø 235
Couvercle de nettoyage Ø 235
Tapa de limpieza Ø 235 1 - 2
1.4
18560-1104
0 235217008 1 Reinigungsdeckel Ø 235 Cleaning lid Couvercle de nettoyage Tapa de limpieza
1 243353006 1 .Spannkreuz .Clamping cross .Encroix .Cruz
2 406411 1 .O-Ring 214x5 NBR .O-ring .Joint torique .Junta tórica
3 243352007 1 .Dichtung .Gasket .Joint .Junta
4 031889009 1 .Zylinderschraube M16x60 DIN912-8.8 .Socket head cap screw .Vis à tête cylindrique .Tornillo cilíndrico rosca
5 295052009 1 .Reinigungsdeckel Ø 235 .Cleaning lid .Couvercle de nettoyage .Tapa de limpieza
235217008 Reinigungsdeckel Ø 235

Cleaning lid Ø 235
Couvercle de nettoyage Ø 235
Tapa de limpieza Ø 235 2 - 2
1.4
18560-1104
1.4
E05820 4
3
1.4
E05823
1 2
1.4
E05821
1.4
E05822
TD: Gonzalez
Behälter
Tanks
Réservoires 1 2
1.4
E05819--1206
Depósitos
1 E559761 1 Öltank 160 L Gasoil tank Réservoir d’essence Depósito de gasoil 1.4 E05820
2 E559759 1 Wasserbehälter 200 L Water tank Réservoir d’eau Depósito de agua 1.4 E05821
3 E559762 1 Ölbehälter 238 L Oil tank Réservoir à huile Depósito de aceite 1.4 E05822
4 E559760 1 Additive Tank 100 L Additive tank Réservoir d’additif Depósito de aditivo 1.4 E05823
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
Behälter
Tanks
Réservoires 2 2
1.4
E05819--1206
Depósitos
(1--4) 3
0 2
5
1 (4)
TD: Gonzalez
Dieseltank Kpl.
Diesel tank cpl.
Réservoir d’essence cpl.
160L
160L
160L
E559761
1 2
1.4
E05820--1206
Depósito de gasoil cpto. 160L
0 E559761 1 Dieseltank Kpl. 160 L Diesel tank cpl. Réservoir d’essence cpl. Depósito de gasoil cpto.
1 E559711 1 Dieseltank Diesel tank Réservoir d’essence Depósito de gasoil
2 E559779 1 Abdeckung f. Fuellstandswaechter Protecction f. fuel level Recouvrement p. flotteur Protección p. aforador
3 E464773 1 Tankdeckel 10 micras Tank lid Filtre à huile bouchon Filtro gasoil c/ tapón
4 E559780 1 Halterbl. f. Fuellstandswaechter Holder plate f. fuel level Tôle de support p. floteeur Chapa soporte p. aforador
5 E563191 1 Fuellstandwaechter 24V FH30.2009.1601 Fuel level Flotteur diesel Aforador de gasoil
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
Dieseltank Kpl.
Diesel tank cpl.
Réservoir d’essence cpl.
160L
160L
160L
E559761
2 2
1.4
E05820--1206
Depósito de gasoil cpto. 160L
2 (3--4)
(1--9) 5
0
1
3
6
4
7 6
8
(8--9)
7
10 9
11
12
TD: Gonzalez
Wassertank Kpl.
Water tank cpl.
Réservoir d’eau cpl.
200 L
200 L
200 L
E559759
1 2
1.4
E05821--1206
Depósito de agua cpto. 200 L
0 E559759 1 Wassertank Kpl. 200 L INOX Water tank cpl. Réservoir d’eau cpl. Depósito de agua cpto.
1 061200001 0,43m PVC--Schlauch D12,0 x 3,0 Hose--PVC Flexible PVC Manguera PVC transparente
2 E559710 1 Wassertank Water tank Réservoir d’eau Depósito de agua
3 E528964 1 Mannlochdeckel f. Dosierbehaelter Manhole cover f. water tank Regard de couverture p. Dos.Boca de hombre p. depósito aditivo
4 E548489 1 Druck/Vakuum Ventile DN50 INOX. Pressure/ vacuum valve Valve de pression / vide Válvula presión/ vacío
5 412004 2 Anschluss KW--Tank Schlauch 1/2” x 12 Connector water tank hose Piece de raccord Pieza conexión manguera tanque
6 E528962 2 Gummischeibe D200x150x 3 Rubber disk Joint en caoutchouc Junta goma
7 E528963 2 Ansaug Deckel Kpl. Suction lid cpl. Couvercle d’aspiration cpl. Tapa aspiración cpta.
8 E528961 2 Ansaug Deckel D200 Suction lid Couvercle d’aspiration Tapa aspiración
9 E97374 2 Wasserleitungszuberhör 3/4” H. INOX. Water pipe accessories Accessoi. de conduite Accesorio de fontanería
10 036105005 8 Federring D8 DIN127 Washer lock Rondelle grower Arandela muelle
11 043730007 8 Scheibe 8,4 DIN125--A4 Washer flat Rondelle plate Arandela
12 032333004 8 Sechskantschraube M8x16 DIN933--8.8 Hexagon head cap screw Vis à tête hexagonale Tornillo de cabeza hexagonal
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
Wassertank Kpl.
Water tank cpl.
Réservoir d’eau cpl.
200 L
200 L
200 L
E559759
2 2
1.4
E05821--1206
Depósito de agua cpto. 200 L
1.4
4
(1--6) 6
0
(3)
2
3
8
1.5
TD: Gonzalez
Ölbehälter Kpl.
Oil Tank cpl.
Réservoir à huile cpl.
238L
238L
238L
E559762
1 2
1.4
E05822--1206
Depósito de aceite cpto. 238L
0 E559762 1 Ölbehalter Kpl. 238 L Oil tank cpl. Réservoir à huile cpl. Depósito de aceite cpto.
1 E559718 1 Ölbehalter Oil tank Réservoir à huile Depósito de aceite
2 E559724 1 Platte f. Schlauchanschluss 4x1” + 1x1/2” Gas Conection plate Plaque de connexion Pletina p. conexión manguera
3 065036006 1 Ölstandsanz mit Thermometer M12 Oil level indic. w. thermom. Niveau huile thermometre Nivel de aceite con termómetro
4 235217008 1 Reinigungsdeckel Ø 235 Clean out lid Couvercle nettoyage Tapa limpieza para depósitos 1.4 18560
5 019291004 1 Tankverschluss mit Gummid. B80 Tank lid Bouchon reservoir avec jointTapa depósito con respiradero
6 019367006 1 MS--Sieb B 80/120 mm MS--Strainer Tamis p. couv. Tamiz
7 294071007 1 Saugfilter ohne Eins. 2X R1”; 2X R1,5” Suction filter housing Carter du filtre d’aspiration Carcasa de fitro de aspiración 1.5 15428
8 294073005 1 Filterelement 10micras 170 L/min. 220L/m Suction filter insert Element filtre Filro aceite cart.
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
Ölbehälter Kpl.
Oil Tank cpl.
Réservoir à huile cpl.
238L
238L
238L
E559762
2 2
1.4
E05822--1206
Depósito de aceite cpto. 238L
(1--9) (3--4)
0 5 2
8
(8--9)
9 7
10
11
12
TD: Gonzalez
Dosierbehaelter Kpl.
Additive tank cpl.
Réservoir d’additif cpl
100 L
100 L
100 L
E559760
1 2
1.4
E05823--1206
Depósito de aditivo cpto. 100 L
0 E559760 1 Dosierbehaelter Kpl. 100 L Additive tank cpl. Réservoir d’additif cpl. Depósito de aditivo cpto.
1 061200001 0,26m PVC--Schlauch D12,0 x 3,0 Hose--PVC Flexible PVC Manguera PVC transparente
2 E559712 1 Dosierbehaelter Additive tank Réservoir d’additif Depósito de aditivo
3 E528964 1 Mannlochdeckel f. Dosierbehaelter Manhole cover f. water tank Regard de couverture f. Dos.Boca de hombre p. depósito aditivo
4 E548489 1 Druck/Vakuum Ventile DN50 INOX. Pressure/ vacuum valve Valve de pression / vide Válvula presión/ vacío
5 412004 2 Anschluss KW--Tank Schlauch 1/2” x 12 Connector water tank hose Piece de raccord Pieza conexión manguera
6 E528962 1 Gummischeibe D200x150x 3 Rubber disk Joint en caoutchouc Junta goma
7 E528963 1 Ansaug Deckel Kpl. Suction lid cpl. Couvercle d’aspiration cpl. Tapa aspiración cpta.
8 E528961 1 Ansaug Deckel D200 Suction lid Couvercle d’aspiration Tapa aspiración
9 E97374 1 Wasserleitungszuberhör 3/4” H. INOX. Water pipe accessories Accessoi. de conduite Accesorio de fontanería
10 036105005 8 Federring D8 DIN127 Washer lock Rondelle grower Arandela muelle
11 043730007 8 Scheibe 8,4 DIN125--A4 Washer flat Rondelle plate Arandela
12 032333004 8 Sechskantschraube M8x16 DIN933--8.8 Hexagon head cap screw Vis à tête hexagonale Tornillo de cabeza hexagonal
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
Dosierbehaelter Kpl.
Additive tank cpl.
Réservoir d’additif cpl
100 L
100 L
100 L
E559760
2 2
1.4
E05823--1206
Depósito de aditivo cpto. 100 L
428394 Wasserfilter kpl.
Water filter kpl.
Filtre d'eau kpl.
Filtro de agua kpl. 1 - 2
1.5
18573-1105
0 428394 1 Wasserfilter kpl. Water filter Filtre d'eau Filtro de agua
1 428391 1 .Gehäuse .Housing .Carter .Carcasa
2 428392 1 .Filtergehäuse .Filter housing .Carter de filtre .Carcasa de filtro
3 459062 1 .Adapter .Adapter .Adaptateur .Adaptador
4 042714008 1 ..O-Ring 25x2 DIN3771NBR70 ..O-ring ..Joint torique ..Junta tórica
5 457259 1 ..Adapter ..Adapter ..Adaptateur ..Adaptador
6 041364006 1 ..Usit-Ring ..Seal ring ..Joint d'étanchéité ..Junta de estanquidad
8 502325 2 .Ablaßhahn NW 14 3/8"AG; MS m. .Drain cock .Robinet purgeur .Grifo de purga
9 282475000 1 .Füllstandssonde M14x1,5; 9-36V .Fill-level sensor .Sonde de niveau .Sonda de nivel
10 042155007 1 .Usit-Ring .Seal ring .Joint d'étanchéité .Junta de estanquidad
11 458645 1 .Sechskantschraube M8 x60DIN 931-A4 .Hexagon head cap screw .Vis à tête hexagonale .Tornillo de cab.exagonal
12 041862003 1 .O-Ring 26x2 DIN3771NBR70 .O-ring .Joint torique .Junta tórica
14 416679 1 .Siebeinsatz .Sieve insert .Insert-tamis .Suplemento-tamiz
15 061376003 1 .O-Ring 43x2,5 DIN3771NBR70 .O-ring .Joint torique .Junta tórica
16 361684000 1 Befestigungsmittel PM-BLAU Glue Moyen de fixation Pegamento de fijación
17 063351000 1 Aktivator 100ml Activator Activateur Activador
428394 Wasserfilter kpl.

Water filter kpl.
Filtre d'eau kpl.
Filtro de agua kpl. 2 - 2
1.5
18573-1105
6, 9, 11, 23 21.1
21
20.2
18
12 22.2 24 9
(Pos 11 1.5--E15428)
? (Pos 8 1.5--E14745)
1/4”
1” 15
24 11
(Pos 11 20.1
1.5--E15428 2
(Pos 8) 1 1/2”
1.5--14745 22.1
5
23
1 1/2” 4
1”
10 2
14 13
16 1
(2-10)
17
19 6
8
3
7
18 (8-10)
1.5
15428-9812
Saugfilter
Suction filter
Filtre d’aspiration
294071007
1 2
1.5
E15428--1012
Filtro de aspiración
1 294071007 1 Saugfiltergehäuse Suction filter housing Carter filtre d’aspiratio Caja p.filtro de aspiración
2 016136007 2 .O--Ring 90x5 DIN3770NB70 .O--ring .Joint torique .Junto tórico
3 225579002 1 .O--Ring 120,25x3,53DIN3770NB .O--ring .Joint torique .Junto tórico
4 061510005 1 .Dichtung .Seal .Joint .Junta
5 262976008 1 .Ventilteller .Valve disc .Tête de soupape .Platillo de válvula
6 034105007 1 .Sechskantmutter, selbstsi. M8 DIN985--10 .Hexagonal nut, self--lock .Ecrou hexag.,freinage int. Tuerca hexagonal, autofrenante
7 294092002 1 .Deckel .Lid .Couvercle .Tapa
8 041334007 1 ..O--Ring 102x4 DIN3770NB70 ..O--ring ..Joint torique ..Junta tórica
9 034104008 1 ..Sechskantmutter, selbstsi. M6 DIN985--8 ..Hexagonal nut, self--lock ..Ecrou hexag.,freinage int. ..Tuerca hexagonal, autofrenante
10 268521004 1 ..Gewindestift M6x30 DIN913 ..Set screw ..Vis pointeau ..Varilla roscada
11 294073005 1 Filtereinsatz 10m Filter cartridge Filtre de rechange Filtro de recambio
12 060440008 1 Vakuummeter Vacuum gauge Manomètre à vide Vacuómetro
13 043713008 1 Verlängerung 3/8”x 50 GF526 Extension Allonge Pieza de prolongación
14 040111001 1 Winkel 45˚ 3/8” GF121 Elbow Coude Codo
15 041344000 3 Verschlußschraube VS--R3/8” WD Screw plug Bouchon obturateur Tapón roscado
16 203198007 1 Kugelhahn Ball cock Robinet boisseau sphér. Llave esférica
17 207570003 1 Außengewindetülle Nozzle, male thread Douille filetée Manguito rosca exterior
18 207496006 -- PVC--Gewebeschlauch Ø 10x3 PVC fabric ply hose Flexible à texture en PVC Tubo flexible textil PVC
19 066238007 1 Schlauchschelle Ø 18 Hose clip Collier de serrage Abrazadera de manguera
20.1 293253004 1 Distanzring Spacer ring Rondelle d’écartement Anillo distanciador
20.2 292237005 1 Distanzring Spacer ring Rondelle d’écartement Anillo distanciador
21 061510005 1 Dichtung Gasket Joint Junta
22.1 043555004 4 Stiftschraube M8x190 DIN835--8.8 Stud Goujon fileté Tornillo con pivote
22.2 254351000 4 Stiftschraube M8x75 DIN939--8.8 Stud Goujon fileté Tornillo con pivote
23 034105007 4 Sechskantmutter, selbstsi. M8 DIN985--10. Hexagonal nut, self--lock Ecrou hexagonale frein Tuerca hexagonal, autofrenante
24 E542592 1 Filtereinsatz f. Pumpe incluye: Pos 11 del 1.5--E15428 Filter set f. pump Jeu de filtres f. pumpe Juego filtros para bomba
Pos 8 del 1.5--E14745
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
Saugfilter
Suction filter
Filtre d’aspiration
294071007
1 2
1.5
E15428--1012
Filtro de aspiración
2 = 4 Nm (1-7) 0.2
Md z = 23 Nm (1-7) 0.1
y = 23 Nm 2.1
11606
4 10
(5-7) 11
2
7
1 (2,6,7)
3.1
8 3.2
z
9
6 1 (2,6,7)
5
y
2.1
11182--0202
TD: Schöneck
067344000, 067345009 4/2--Wegeventil

4/2--way valve
Distributeur à 4/2 voies 1 2
2.1
11182--0207
Válvula de 4/2 vías
0.1 067344000 1 4/2--Wegeventil 24V 4/2--way valve Distributeur à 4/2 voies Válvula de 4/2 vías
0.2 067345009 1 4/2--Wegeventil 12V 4/2--way valve Distributeur à 4/2 voies Válvula de 4/2 vías
1 267379008 1 .Polrohr .Pole tube .Tube polaire .Tubo polar
2 267380000 1 ..Mutter M22x1,5 ..Nut ..Ecrou ..Tuerca
042978006 1 ..O--Ring 17,17x1,78DIN3771NB7 ..O--ring ..Joint torique ..Junta tórica
016344006 1 ..O--Ring 22x3 DIN3771NB70 ..O--ring ..Joint torique ..Junta tórica
3.1 267377000 1 .Magnetspule 24V .Solenoid coil .Bobine d’electro--aimant .Carrete del electroiman
3.2 267378009 1 .Magnetspule 12V .Solenoid coil .Bobine d’electro--aimant .Carrete del electroiman
4 267376001 1 .Dichtsatz .Gasket set .Jeu de joints .Juego de juntas
5 042097000 4 ..O--Ring 9,25x1,78DIN3771NBR7 ..O--ring ..Joint torique ..Junta tórica
6 042978006 2 ..O--Ring 17,17x1,78DIN3771NB7 ..O--ring ..Joint torique ..Junta tórica
8 042787006 4 Zylinderschraube M5x50 DIN912--12.9 Socket head cap screw Vis à tête cylindrique Tornillo cilíndrico rosca
9 036116007 4 Federring 5 DIN7980 Spring ring Rondelle elastique Anillo elastico
10 267381009 1 Bügel Clamp Etrier Estribo
11 267382008 1 Ring Ring Bague Anillo
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
067344000, 067345009 4/2--Wegeventil

4/2--way valve
Distributeur à 4/2 voies 2 2
2.1
11182--0207
(1-7)
2 = 4 Nm
z = 23 Nm 0
Md
2.1
11606
10
11
4
(5-7)
2
7
1 (2,6,7)
3
8
z
9
6
1 (2,6,7)
2.1
15209--0202
TD: Schöneck
4/3--Wegeventil 24V
4/3--way valve 24V
Distributeur à 4/3 voies 24V
283864005
1 2
2.1
15209--0207
Válvula de 4/3 vías 24V
0 283864005 1 4/3--Wegeventil 24V 4/3--way valve Distributeur à 4/3 voies Válvula de 4/3 vías
1 267379008 2 .Polrohr .Pole tube .Tube polaire .Tubo polar
2 267380000 2 ..Mutter M22x1,5 ..Nut ..Ecrou ..Tuerca
042978006 2 ..O--Ring 17,17x1,78DIN3771NB7 ..O--ring ..Joint torique ..Junta tórica
016344006 2 ..O--Ring 22x3 DIN3771NB70 ..O--ring ..Joint torique ..Junta tórica
3 267377000 2 .Magnetspule 24V .Solenoid coil .Bobine d’electro--aimant .Carrete del electroiman
4 267376001 1 .Dichtsatz .Gasket set .Jeu de joints .Juego de juntas
5 042097000 4 ..O--Ring 9,25x1,78DIN3771NBR7 ..O--ring ..Joint torique ..Junta tórica
6 042978006 2 ..O--Ring 17,17x1,78DIN3771NB7 ..O--ring ..Joint torique ..Junta tórica
8 042787006 4 Zylinderschraube M5x50 DIN912--12.9 Socket head cap screw Vis à tête cylindrique Tornillo cilíndrico rosca
9 036116007 4 Federring 5 DIN7980 Spring ring Rondelle elastique Anillo elastico
10 267381009 2 Bügel Clamp Etrier Estribo
11 267382008 2 Ring Ring Bague Anillo
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
4/3--Wegeventil 24V
4/3--way valve 24V
Distributeur à 4/3 voies 24V
283864005
2 2
2.1
15209--0207
Válvula de 4/3 vías 24V
2.1
11606
2
3
4/3--Wegeventil
4/3--way valve
Distributeur à 4/3 voies
E472300
1 2
2.1
E05561--0709
1 E472300 4/3--Wegeventil 24V 180B 4/3--way valve Distributeur à 4/3 voies Válvula de 4/3 vías
2 E495575 1 Spule 12V Spool Bobine Bobina
3 E495576 1 Elektromagnet Solenoid Electro--aimant Solenoide
4 E495629 1 Ventilpatrone 140--180 Bar Valve cartridge Cartouche de soupape Cartucho de válvula
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
4/3--Wegeventil
4/3--way valve
Distributeur à 4/3 voies
E472300
2 2
2.1
E05561--0709
5
3.6
4
TD: Gonzalez
E560674, E560675 Hyd--Komp. Lenksysteme/ Bremse

Hydraulic system steering/ brake
Systéme hydraulique direction/ frein 1 2
2.1
E05835--1206
Componentes hidráulicos dirección/ freno
1 E99081 2 Bremsspeicher ELM 0,75L 50 Bar Accumulator Accumulateur Acumulador
2 E555724 1 Bremsepedal VB--220 60 Bar Brake pedal Pédale de frein Pedal freno
3 E463349 1 Prioritätsventil für Lenkeinheit OLSA 40 Priority valve f. orbitrol Soupape hidr. p. orbitrol Válvula p. orbitrol
4 E99060 1 Lenkeinheit OSPC 200 LS Steering unit Moteur hidr. orbitrol Motor orbitrol dirección 3.6 E05429
5 E472300 1 Wegeventil 4/3 24V 180Bar Way valve Soupape hidr. Válvula hidr. p. dirección 2.1 E05561
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
E560674, E560675 Hyd--Komp. Lenksysteme/ Bremse

Hydraulic system steering/ brake
Systéme hydraulique direction/ frein 2 2
2.1
E05835--1206
Componentes hidráulicos dirección/ freno
2.1
1, 2
TD: Gonzalez
Hyd--Komp. Trommel
Hydraulic system Drum
Systéme hydraulique Tambour 1 2
2.1
E05836--1206
Componentes hidráulicos Cuba
1 283864005 1 Wegeventil 4/3 DN6 24V Valve Distributeur Válvula hidr. 2.1 15209
2 266154004 1 Anschl. Platte DN6 3 R 1/2” Stop plate Plaque de base Placa conexión
3 266358004 1 Druckbegrenzungsventil 40--100Bar M18x1,5 Press. limit valve Limiteur de pression Válvula hidr. limitadora presión
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
Hyd--Komp. Trommel
Hydraulic system Drum
Systéme hydraulique Tambour 2 2
2.1
E05836--1206
Componentes hidráulicos Cuba
2.1
1
12.3
TD: Gonzalez
Hyd--Komp. Hochdruckwasserpumpe
Hydraulic system High pressure water pump
Systéme hydr. Pompe à eau haute press. 1 2
2.1
E05837--1206
Comp. hidr. Bomba agua alta presión
1 067344000 1 Wegevent. 4/2 DN 6 24V Valve safety Distributeur Válvula hidráulica 2.1 11182
2 227661002 1 Anschlussblock Ventil DN 6 1/2” Connection block Embase distrib. Bloque conexión
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
Hyd--Komp. Hochdruckwasserpumpe
Hydraulic system High pressure water pump
Systéme hydr. Pompe à eau haute press. 2 2
2.1
E05837--1206
Comp. hidr. Bomba agua alta presión
3 1
10 = 32 Nm 4
Md
1, 9 5 6
8
4
3
12
7 10
6
9
11 (10--12)
Ölkühler
Oil radiator
Radiateur à l’huile
E472949
1 2
2.4
E05563--0710
Radiador de aceite
1 066337005 1 Ölkühler 24V Oil radiator Radiateur à l’huile Radiador de aceite
2 444176 1 .Elektr.--Motor 24V .Electr. motor .Moteur électr. .Motor eléctr.
3 042859002 3 O--Ring 37,7x3,53 DIN3771NBR70 O--ring Joint torique Junta tórica
4 066335007 2 SAE--Flansch A 1 1/4” SAE flange Bride SAE Brida SAE
5 032359004 4 Sechskantschraube M10x35 DIN933--8.8 Hexagon head cap screw Vis à tête hexagonale Tornillo de cab.exagonal
6 036506002 8 Sicherungsscheibe VS10 Lock washer Rondelle d’arrêt Arandela de seguridad
7 032145001 4 Sechskantschraube M10x55 DIN931--8.8 Hexagon head cap screw Vis à tête hexagonale Tornillo de cab.exagonal
8 E25881700 1 SAE--Block 1 1/4” SAE connection block Bloc SAE Bloque SAE
9 267559006 1 Temperaturgeber 55˚C Temperature transmitter Transmett. de température Termotransmisor
10 067860005 1 .Temperaturgeber 55˚C; M14x1,5 .Temperature transmitter .Transmett. de température .Termotransmisor
11 261682005 1 .Kabelschutzkappe .Protecting cap for cable .Capuchon protect. d.câble .Tapa protectora p. cable
12 041363007 1 .Usit--Ring .Seal ring .Joint d’étanchéité .Junta de estanquidad
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
Ölkühler
Oil radiator
Radiateur à l’huile
E472949
2 2
2.4
E05563--0710
Radiador de aceite
1 = 30 Nm
Md 8 = 30 Nm 6 7
5
4
2
10
11
12
13
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ 14
TD: Schöneck
Temperaturgeber
Temperature transmitter
Transmett. de température 1 2
2.8
15683–9910
Termotransmisor
1 016964004 1 Temperaturgeber 90°C; M14x1,5 Temperature transmitter Transmett. de température Termotransmisor
2 261682005 1 Kabelschutzkappe Protecting cap for cable Capuchon protect. d.câble Tapa protectora p. cable
3 041363007 1 Usit–Ring Seal ring made of Cu Bague d’ etanch. (Cu) Anillo obtur. (Cu)
4 041792005 1 Überwurfmutter M 18L Union nut Ecrou borgne Tuerca de unión
5 086732004 1 Adapter für Thermofühler Adapter for thermoprobe Adaptat.p.sonde thermique Adaptador p. termosensor
6 043248007 1 Verschraubung BO–TV 18L Fitting Raccord à vis Racor 4.2 11479
7 295219004 1 Stutzen ELSD 25S Connection Manchon Racor
8 403405 1 Temperaturgeber 90°C; M14x1,5 Temperature transmitter Transmett. de température Termotransmisor
9 041363007 1 Usit–Ring Seal ring made of Cu Bague d’ etanch. (Cu) Anillo obtur. (Cu)
10 403651 1 Stutzen ELSD 25S Connection Manchon Racor
11 280456005 1 Rundsteckverbinder Round pin–socket connect. Connect. multibroche rond Conector enchuf. redondo
12 280457004 1 Buchsenkontakt Socket contact Contact de douille Contacto de casquillo
13 280458003 1 Abdichtung Sealing Etanchement Estancamiento
14 280459002 1 Kappe Cap Capuchon Cofia
Temperaturgeber
Temperature transmitter
Transmett. de température 1 2
2.8
15683–9910
Termotransmisor
3.6
E05429--0502
Hydraulikmotor Orbitrol
Hydraulic motor Orbitrol
Moteur hydraulique Orbitrol
E99060
1 2
3.6
E05429--0703
Motor hidráulico Orbitrol
1 E99060 1 Hydraulikmotor Orbitrol OSPC 200LS Hidraulic motor Orbitrol Moteur hydraulique Orbitrol Motor hidráulico Orbitrol
Hydraulikmotor Orbitrol
Hydraulic motor Orbitrol
Moteur hydraulique Orbitrol
E99060
2 2
3.6
E05429--0703
Motor hidráulico Orbitrol
RAD
Rohraußendurchmesser
Diameter of tube GEW
Exterieur tuyau GEW
Ext. tubo equivalente
GEW.
Gewinde GEW
Thread
Taraudage
Rosca
L Nr. / No. bar GEW Nr. / No. GEW Nr. / No. GEW Nr. / No.
300 063357004 0--60 G 1/4” 016372007 R 1/4” 063358003 G 1/2” 274621008
Nr./No. 400 063365009 0--160 G 1/4” 275726009 9,5x5,2x1,5 272672004
Artikel--Nr. 630 064095006 0--250 G 1/4” 016373006 R 1/2” 225358003
Part no.
Référence 1000 066611006 0--400 G 1/4” 017250005 17,5x6,2x2,5 272673003
Nº Refª 1500 253248004
2500 063352009
5000 063356005 RAD
L ( mm )
Länge ( mm )
Lenght ( mm )
Longueur ( mm )
Longitud ( mm )
GEW
DIN 3770
GEW NB 70
s GEW Nr. / No.
M 8x1 222092003
bar GEW Nr. / No.
M 14x1,5 231494003
0--250 G 1/4” 062901008 Ø
0--400 G 1/4” 016375004
RAD Øxs Nr. / No.
8L 063355006
8 6 x 1,5 043364004
L Nr. / No. 12 L 067544004
5000 066885007 12 S 233045007
12 10 x 1,5 043494000
15 L 063353008
15 13 x 1,5 043495009
18 L 241833007 Nr. / No.
Nr. / No. 18 16 x 1,5 042925004 063376001
4.2 063359002
10286--9408
TD: Schöneck
Minimess--Verschraubungen
Gauge port fittings
Raccords pour branchement de mesure 1
4.2
10286--9702
Racores para puntos de medición
Minimess--Verschraubungen
Gauge port fittings
Raccords pour branchement de mesure
4.2
10286--9702
Racores para puntos de medición
016433001 016435009 016436008 016438006 Hydr.-Schläuche
016439005 016440007 016444003 016445002
016447000 016448009 Hydr. hoses
Flexibles hydr.
Tubos flexibles hidr. 1 - 14
4.2
10295-0811
1 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
1.1 016511004 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 2ST DN6 8Lx350 Hydr. hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
016433001 016435009 016436008 016438006 Hydr.-Schläuche

016439005 016440007 016444003 016445002
016447000 016448009 Hydr. hoses
Flexibles hydr.
4.2
10295-0811
2 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
3 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
016433001 016435009 016436008 016438006 Hydr.-Schläuche

016439005 016440007 016444003 016445002
016447000 016448009 Hydr. hoses
Flexibles hydr.
4.2
10295-0811
4 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
4.1 481550 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SP DN10 12Lx3000 Hydr. hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
5 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
5.1 228531005 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 2ST DN10 12Sx400 Hydr. hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
016433001 016435009 016436008 016438006 Hydr.-Schläuche

016439005 016440007 016444003 016445002
016447000 016448009 Hydr. hoses
Flexibles hydr.
4.2
10295-0811
6 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
6.1 269620001 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SP DN10 12Sx550 Hydr. hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
016433001 016435009 016436008 016438006 Hydr.-Schläuche

016439005 016440007 016444003 016445002
016447000 016448009 Hydr. hoses
Flexibles hydr.
4.2
10295-0811
7 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
7.21 222352002 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SP DN12 15Lx1500 m.S Hydr. hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
7.23 222353001 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SP DN12 15Lx1600 m.S. Hydr. hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
016433001 016435009 016436008 016438006 Hydr.-Schläuche

016439005 016440007 016444003 016445002
016447000 016448009 Hydr. hoses
Flexibles hydr.
4.2
10295-0811
7.26 222351003 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SP DN12 15Lx1900 m.S Hydr. hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
8 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
016433001 016435009 016436008 016438006 Hydr.-Schläuche

016439005 016440007 016444003 016445002
016447000 016448009 Hydr. hoses
Flexibles hydr.
4.2
10295-0811
9 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
9.1 402777 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SH DN16 18Lx350 Hydr. hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
9.21 291401007 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SH DN16 18Lx1700 m.S. Hydr. hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
9.23 271437004 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SH DN16 18Lx1800 m.S. Hydr. hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
016433001 016435009 016436008 016438006 Hydr.-Schläuche

016439005 016440007 016444003 016445002
016447000 016448009 Hydr. hoses
Flexibles hydr.
4.2
10295-0811
10 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
10.1 494715 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SH DN19 25Sx550 Hydr. hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
016433001 016435009 016436008 016438006 Hydr.-Schläuche

016439005 016440007 016444003 016445002
016447000 016448009 Hydr. hoses
Flexibles hydr.
4.2
10295-0811
11 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
11.18 291402006 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SH DN25 30Sx1700 m.S. Hydr. hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
016433001 016435009 016436008 016438006 Hydr.-Schläuche

016439005 016440007 016444003 016445002
016447000 016448009 Hydr. hoses
Flexibles hydr.
4.2
10295-0811
11.20 271438003 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SH DN25 30Sx1800 m.S. Hydr. hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
12 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
016433001 016435009 016436008 016438006 Hydr.-Schläuche

016439005 016440007 016444003 016445002
016447000 016448009 Hydr. hoses
Flexibles hydr.
4.2
10295-0811
13 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
13.1 254943007 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 2ST DN10 12Lx500; 90° Hydr. hose Flexi ble hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
13.9 249488001 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 2ST DN10 12Lx1000; 90° Hydr. hose Flex ible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
13.17 498079 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 2ST DN10 12Lx2200; 90° Hyd r. hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
14 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
14.1 249495007 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SP DN12 15Lx700; 90° Hydr. hose Flexi ble hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
14.4 249498004 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SP DN12 15Lx1000; 90° Hydr. hose Flex ible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
14.5 417028 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SP DN12 15Lx2400; 90° Hydr . hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
14.6 433502 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SP DN12 15Lx2730;90° Hydr. hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
15 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
016433001 016435009 016436008 016438006 Hydr.-Schläuche

016439005 016440007 016444003 016445002
016447000 016448009 Hydr. hoses
Flexibles hydr.
4.2
10295-0811
15.1 224046002 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SP DN12 16Sx800; 90° Hydr. hose Flexi ble hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
15.2 224047001 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SP DN12 16Sx860; 90° Hydr. hose Flexi ble hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
15.3 224048000 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SP DN12 16Sx1000;90° Hydr. hose Flexi ble hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
16 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
16.1 487622 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SP DN16 18Lx250; 90° Hydr. hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
16.15 443747 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SP DN16 18Lx1500;90° Hydr . hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
16.17 415016 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SP DN16 18Lx1700; 90° Hyd r. hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
16.20 405653 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SP DN16 18Lx2000; 90° Hyd r. hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
17 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
17.1 435683 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SP DN19 25Sx550;90° Hydr. hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
17.3 489151 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SP DN19 25Sx850; 90° Hydr. hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
18 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
18.1 448048 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SH DN25 30Sx1150;90° Hydr. hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
016433001 016435009 016436008 016438006 Hydr.-Schläuche

016439005 016440007 016444003 016445002
016447000 016448009 Hydr. hoses
Flexibles hydr.
4.2
10295-0811
19 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
19.1 445133 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SP DN16 18Lx700; 2x90° Hyd r. hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
20 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
20.1 418807 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SH DN31 38Sx3240; 1x0°SAE Hydr. hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
21 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
21.1 065597008 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SP DN19 25Sx1000; 1x90°SAE Hydr. hos e Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
22 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
22.1 418808 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SH DN31 38Sx3300; 1x90°SA E Hydr. hose Flexible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
23 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
23.1 065596009 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SP DN19 x750; 2x90°SAE Hydr. hose Fle xible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
24 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
24.1 042571005 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SH DN25 x700; 2x90°SAE Hydr. hose Fle xible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
25 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
25.1 227327003 1 Hydr.-Schlauch 4SH DN31 x1200; 2x90°SAE Hydr. hose Fl exible hydr. Tubo flexible hidr.
26 043418002 1 O-Ring 6,5x1,5 DIN3771NBR70 O-ring Joint torique Junta tórica
28 043494000 1 O-Ring 10x1,5 DIN3771NBR70 O-ring Joint torique Junta tórica
29 043419001 1 O-Ring 13x2 DIN3771NBR70 O-ring Joint torique Junta tórica
016433001 016435009 016436008 016438006 Hydr.-Schläuche

016439005 016440007 016444003 016445002
016447000 016448009 Hydr. hoses
Flexibles hydr.
4.2
10295-0811
Benennung Abb. Sinnbild Typ Benennung Abb. Sinnbild Typ
Description Fig. Symbol Type Description Fig. Symbol Type
Désignation Fig. Symbole Désign. Désignation Fig. Symbole Désign.
Bördel--Anschußteile BO-- Einstellbare T--Verschraubung BO--
Connecting parts for flare tube fitting A Adjustable equal Tee ETVD
Pièces de raccordement pour raccords pour tube évasé
3 Té orientable
6
Zwischenring BO-- Winkel--Schwenkverschraubung BO--
Centre unit ZR Banjo coupling with one--piece bolt RSWV
Cône intermédiaire
3 Raccord orientable
6
Druckring BO-- Einstellbare L--Verschraubung BO--
Loose collar DR Adjustable male stud Tee--stud barrel ELVD
Manchette
3 Té renversé orientable
7
Überwurfmutter BO-- Gerade Einschraubstutzen EGESD
Nut M Stud standpipe adaptor
Ecrou
3 Raccord d’orientation
7
Gerade Einschraubverschraubung BO-- Gerade Verbindung SNV
Male stud coupling GEV Straight coupling
Union simple mâle
4 Union double
7
Winkel--Einschraubverschraubung BO-- Rückschlagventil, beidseitiger Rohranschluß BO--
Male stud elbow WEV
5 Non--return valve, tube connetion both ends RV 8
Equerre mâle Clapet anti--retour, raccord sur tube des deux côtés
T--Einschraubverschraubung BO-- Einschraub--Rückschlagventil Stömung vom Einschraubzapf. BO--
Equal tee stud elbow TEV
5 Non--return valve with male stud Flow from male stud end RVV 8
Equerre union té Clapet anti--retour mâle Sortie par l’embout mâle
Gerade--Verschraubung BO-- Einschraub--Rückschlagventil Stömung zum Einschraubzapf. BO--
Sraight coupling GV
5 Non--return valve with male stud Flow towards male stud end RVZ 8
Union double Clapet anti--retour mâle Ecoulement vers l’embout mâle
Winkel Verschraubung BO-- Reduzierverschraubung BO--
Equal elbow WV Reducing fitting REDVD.../
Union équerre
5 Raccord de réduction ...
9
T--Verschraubung BO-- Gerade--Flanschverschraubung BO--
Equal Tee TV Straight flange coupling GFV
Union té
5 Union simple à bride
9
Gerade Schottverschraubung BO-- Winkel--Flanschverschraubung BO--
Bulkhead coupling GSV Elbow flange coupling WFV
Union double de cloison
6 Union simple à bride en équerre;
9
Winkel Schottverschraubung BO-- Manometer--Aufschraubverschraubung BO--
Bulkhead elbow WSV Manometer coupling with sealing ring MAV
Equerre de cloison
6 Union simple femelle pour manomètre
M 9
Einstellbare Winkel--Verschraubung BO-- Einstellbarer Manometer--Aufschraubstutzen EMASD
Adjustable male stud elbow EWVD Adjustable manometer coupling
Equerre orientable
6 Raccord pour manomètre avec embout lisse;
M 9
Bördel--Rohrverschraubungen BO--
Flare tube fittings BO--
Raccords pour tubes évasés BO-- 1 10
4.2
11479--0207
Uniones para tubo rebordeado BO--
Benennung Abb. Sinnbild Typ
Description Fig. Symbol Type
Désignation Fig. Symbole Désign.
Verschlussstoppfen VS
Blanking plugs
Bouchons obturateur
9
Nahtloses Präzisionsstahlrohr
Seamless Precision steel tube
Tube de précision en acier sans soudure
10
Rohraußendurchmesser RAD
Diameter of tube
Exterieur tuyau
Material--Nr. Nr. / no.
Part no.
Référence
4.2
11479--9311
TD: Schöneck
4.2
11479--0207
BO--A... Bördel--Anschußteile / Connecting parts for flare tube fitting / Pièces de raccordement pour raccords pour tube évasé
RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
Nr. / No. 043331008 242910000 043332007 242911009 043333006 043401006 043334005 043335004 043336003 043337002 043338001
BO--ZR... Zwischenring; Centre unit; Cône intermédiaire
RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
Nr. / No. 044180009 044180009 044181008 044181008 044182007 044182007 044183006 044184005 044185004 044186003 044187002
∅ 0,8 281358005
∅ 1,0 241046001
∅ 1,2 239356004
∅ 1,3 242900007
∅ 1,5 240859008
∅ 2,0 241689002
∅ 2,1 276682003
∅ 2,2 276125007
∅ 2,5 242904003 265494008
∅ 3,0 246665005
∅ 3,2 204605007
∅ 5,0 235189000
∅ 6,0 248108007
∅ 6,5 251799005
∅ 7,5 251874001
∅ 8,0 404493
∅ 8,6 253462000
SA1 235186003 235187002 235188001
O--Ring / O--ring / Junto torique DIN 3771 NB 70
∅xS 4,5x1,5 4,5x1,5 6x1,5 6x1,5 10x1,5 10x1,5 13x1,5 16x1,5 22,3x2,4 27,3x2,4 35x2,5
Nr. / No. 043795000 043795000 043364004 043364004 043494000 043494000 043495009 042925004 043496008 043497007 043372009
∅xS 4,4x0,8 4,4x0,8 6x0,8 6x0,8 9,5x0,8 9,5x0,8 12,5x1 15x1 20x1 25x1 32x1,78
Nr. / No. 228703008 228703008 228704007 228704007 228705006 228705006 228706005 228707004 228708003 228709002 228716008
BO--DR... Druckring / Loose collar / Manchette
RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
Nr. / No. 044188001 044188001 044189000 044189000 044190002 044190002 044191001 044192000 044193009 044194008 044195007
BO--M... Überwurfmutter / Nut / Ecrou
RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
Nr. / No. 044196006 242908009 044197005 043519008 044198004 044201001 044199003 044200002 044202000 044203009 044204008
4.2
11479--0207
BO--GEV...M Gerade Einschraubverschraubung / Male stud coupling / Union simple mâle
RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
M 10x1 043213003
M 12x1,5 043722002 043214002 043630000 043385009
M 12x1,5 WD 223198003
M 14x1,5 223184004 043518009 043631009
M 16x1,5 043217009 043220009
M 18x1,5 043215001 043218008 043219007 043222007
M 22x1,5 043216000 043221008 043376005 043224005
M 26x1,5 043225004
M 33x2 043223006 247046005
M 42x2 043226003
M 48x2 245237007
BO--GEV...R Gerade Einschraubverschraubung / Male stud coupling / Union simple mâle

RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
R 1/8” 043200003
R 1/4” 043201002 043202001 043204009
R 3/8” 043203000 043205008 043208005
R 1/2” 043206007 043207006 043209004
R 1/2” ∅ 1,8 081995008
R 1/2” WD 043881008
R 3/4” 244479002 249825004 043375006
R 1” 043210006 043802003
R 1” WD 224069005
R 1 3/4” 043211005 043212004
BO--GEV...UNF Gerade Einschraubverschraubung / Male stud coupling / Union simple mâle

RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
7/16”--20 043227002 043400007
9/16”--18 229308004 220141008 043473005
9/16”--18 SA1 225565003
3/4”--16 043683002 224106007
7/8” 043228001
1 1/16--12 043229000 043900002
1 5/16”--12 043230002 220233000
1 5/8”--12 248368009
4.2
11479--0207
O--Ring / O--ring / Junto torique DIN 3771 NB
7/16”--20 060513003 ∅ 8,91x1,78
9/16”--18 041099009 ∅ 12x2
3/4”--16 271310008 ∅ 16,36x2,21
7/8” 060532000 ∅ 19,2x2,46
1 1/16”--12 226975003 ∅ 23,47x2,95
BO--WEV...MK / RK Winkel--Einschraubverschraubung / Male stud elbow / Equerre mâle

RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
M 10x1 043231001
M 12x1,5 043467008
M 22x1,5 043232000
R 1/4” 043233009
R 1/2” 043709009
BO--TEV...RK T--Einschraubverschraubung / Equal tee stud elbow / Equerre union té

RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
R ¼” 043466009
BO--GV... Gerade--Verschraubung / Sraight coupling / Union double

1 2 RAD 1/2 RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
Nr. / No. 043234008 043235007 043236006 043237005 043238004 043239003 225979000 232735004
12/6 L 262847001 RAD 2 RAD 1
15/12 L 043240005 RAD 2 RAD 1
18/15 L 043241004 RAD 2 RAD 1
BO--WV... Winkel Verschraubung / Equal elbow / Union équerre

RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
Nr. / No. 043242003 043243002 043244001 043387007 043386008 246163002 253761002
BO--TV... T--Verschraubung / Equal Tee / Union té

1 2
RAD 1/2/3 RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
3 Nr. / No. 043800005 043245000 043246009 043247008 043248007 043249006 267264003
8/8/12 L 249721001 RAD 1/2 RAD 3
15/15/8 L 043250008 RAD 3 RAD 1/2
15/15/12 L 242949000 RAD 3 RAD 1/2
18/12/12 L 242745000 RAD 1/2 RAD 3
18/18/12 L 043251007 RAD 3 RAD 1/2
4.2
11479--0207
BO--GSV... Gerade Schottverschraubung / Bulkhead coupling / Union double de cloison
RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
Nr. / No. 043748002 043252006 043253005 043254004 043255003 043256002 043257001 043258000
BO--WSV... Winkel Schottverschraubung / Bulkhead elbow / Equerre de cloison

RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
Nr. / No. 043259009 043260001 267009006 043261000 267263004 043262009 043263008 043388006 235098007 235097008
BO--EWVD... Einstellbare Winkel--Verschraubung / Adjustable male stud elbow / Equerre orientable

2
RAD 1/2 RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
1 Nr. / No. 043264007 043265006 043266005 043267004 043268003 043269002 043270004 043271003
18 L/ 25 S 019644004 RAD 1 RAD 2
BO--ETVD... Einstellbare T--Verschraubung / Adjustable equal Tee / Té orientable

RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
Nr. / No. 043272002 043273001 043274000 043275009 043276008 043277007 043278006 043279005
BO--RSWV...M--WD Winkel--Schwenkverschraubung / Banjo coupling with one--piece bolt / Raccord orientable

RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
M 10x1 043432004
M 12x1,5 043469006
M 14x1,5 043676006 043677005
M 16x1,5 043295005
M 18x1,5 043296004 043297003 043298002
M 22x1,5 043299001 043629008
M 33x2 043300000
M 42x2 043882007
BO--RSWV..R--WD Winkel--Schwenkverschraubung / Banjo coupling with one--piece bolt / Raccord orientable

RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
R 1/8” 043548008
R 1/4” 043422001 043579006 043291009
R 3/8” 043290000
R 1/2” 043292008
R 1/2” WD 208685007 043293007
R 1” 043294006 043807008
R 1 1/4” 043853007 224358004
4.2
11479--0207
3 BO--ELVD... Einstellbare L--Verschraubung / Adjustable male stud Tee--stud barrel / Té renversé orientable
2 RAD 1/2/3 RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
1 Nr. / No. 043280007 043281006 043282005 043283004 043284003 043285002 043286001 043287000
18 L/8 L/18 L 243442001 RAD 2 RAD 1/3
18 L/12 L/18 L 243443000 RAD 2 RAD 1/3
30 S/25 S/25 S 285446007 RAD 2/3 RAD 1
EGESD...M--WD Gerade Einschraubstutzen / Stud standpipe adaptor / Raccord d’orientation

RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
M 10x1 043378003
M 12x1,5 232566008
M 14x1,5 232193002 043377004
M 14x1,5 ∅2 083941005
M 16x1,5 043379002
M 18x1,5 235183006 232564000 043329007 043330009
EGESD..R--WD Gerade Einschraubstutzen / Stud standpipe adaptor / Raccord d’orientation

RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
R 1/4” 227205002 227411003 043326000 043196007
R 1/8” 210489000
R 3/8” 043624003 043328008
R 3/4” 412973
R 1/2” 043695003 254009006 043327009 043610004
R 1/2” ∅ 1,8 056731006
R 1/2” ∅ 2,1 273574004
R 1/2” ∅ 3,3 267370007
R 1” 222566005 286941006
R 1 1/4” 230670006
BO--SNV... Gerade Verbindung / Straight coupling / Union double

255527008 238121007 253840004 238122006 253841003 238123005 238124004 238125003 238126002 253763000
RAD 12/8 225566002 RAD 1 RAD 2
4.2
11479--0207
BO--RV... Rückschlagventil, beidseitiger Rohranschluß / Non--return valve, tube connetion both ends / Clapet anti--retour, raccord sur tube des deux côtés
RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
Nr. / No. 255525000 043305005 043306004 043307003 043308002 067777004
12 L 3 bar 043705003 x
15 L 0,5 bar 249360006 x
15 L 3 bar 043667002 x
15 L SA5 043774005 x
15 L 3 bar ∅ 1 228087009 x
18 L 3 bar 248918006 x
18 L SA5 043775004 x
25 S 3 bar 043694004 x
25 S 6 bar 043761005 x
BO--RVV...--WD Rückschlagventil. Strömung vom Einschraubzapfen/ Non--return valve, Flow from male stud end / Clapet anti--retour, Sortie par l’embout mâle
RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
M 16x1,5 043666003
M 22x1,5 SA5 248367000
R 1/2” SA5 043743007
R 1” 3 bar 253149006
BO--RVZ...--WD Rückschlagventil Strömung zum Einschraubzapfen/Non--return valve,Flow towards male stud end/Clapet anti--retour,Ecoulement vers l’embout mâle
RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
M 18x1,5 SA5 043186004
M 18x1,5 043158003
M 22x1,5 SA5 248591009
R 1/2” 226729000
R 1/2” SA5 041360000 043753000
R 1/2” SA3 HSV 043309001
R 1” 042637004
R 1” 3 bar 042479000
4.2
11479--0207
BO--REDVD.../... Reduzierverschraubung / Reducing fitting / Raccord de réduction
8 L/6 L 043508006 RAD 2 RAD 1
12 L/6 L 043316007 RAD 2 RAD 1
12 L/8 L 043317006 RAD 2 RAD 1
15 L/12 L 043319004 RAD 2 RAD 1
18 L/8 L 043320006 RAD 2 RAD 1
18 L/12 L 043321005 RAD 2 RAD 1
18L/15 L 043322004 RAD 2 RAD 1
18 L/25 S 043000009 RAD 2 RAD 1
25 S/8 L 289078002 RAD 2 RAD 1
25/12 L 400293 RAD 2 RAD 1
25 S/15 L 043324002 RAD 2 RAD 1
25 S/18 L 043323003 RAD 2 RAD 1
30 S/12 L 400294 RAD 2 RAD 1
30 S /25 S 043325001 RAD 2 RAD 1
38 S/25 S 043741009 RAD 2 RAD 1
38 S/30 S 043885004 RAD 2 RAD 1
BO--GFV... Gerade--Flanschverschraubung / Straight flange coupling / Union simple à bride

RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
Nr. / No. 043312001 043313000
BO--WFV... Winkel--Flanschverschraubung / Elbow flange coupling / Union simple à bride en équerre;

RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
Nr. / No. 043314009 043315008 043860003
O--Ring / O--ring / Junto torique DIN 3771 NB 70
∅xS 18x2,5 24x2,5 32x2,5
Nr. / No. 001177000 041976009 248865007
BO--MAV... Manometer--Aufschraubverschraubung / Manometer coupling with sealing ring / Union simple femelle pour manomètre
M RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
R 1/4” Nr. / No. 256139000 043301009 043302008
EMASD... Einstellbarer Manometer--Aufschraubstutzen / Adjustable manometer coupling / Raccord pour manomètre avec embout lisse;
M RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
R 1/4” Nr. / No. 043303007 248366001
VS... Verschlussstoppfen / Blanking plugs / Bouchons obturateur

RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
Nr. / No. 041754001 041754001 041755000 041755000 041757008 041757008 041758007 041759006 041761007 042821001 043790005
4.2
11479--0207
?
Nahtloses Präzisionsstahlrohr / Seamless Precision steel tube / Tube de précision en acier sans soudure St 37.4 (1.4571)
RAD 6L 6S 8L 8S 12 L 12 S 15 L 18 L 25 S 30 S 38 S
6x1 8x1,5 12x2 15x2,5 18x3 25x4 30x5
Nr. / No. 018381009 018075001 018081008 018084005 042504001 231699002 231449003
4.2
11479--0207
SAE--Adapter / Adapter SAE / Adaptateur SAE / Adaptador SAE
Ø SAE 1/2 ” 3/4 ” 1” 1 1/4 ” 1 1/2 ”
Y
psi 3000 3000 6000 3000 6000 3000 6000 6000
Y 47,6 47,6 50,8 52,4 57,2 58,7 66,7 79,4
Ø 10,5 10,5 10,5 10,5 13 10,5 / 12 15 17
X X 22,2 22,2 23,8 26,2 27,8 30,2 31,8 36,5
RAD SW GEW Pos. Nr./No. Pos. Nr./No. Pos. Nr./No. Pos. Nr./No. Pos. Nr./No. Pos. Nr./No. Pos. Nr./No. Pos. Nr./No.
25 41 M 36 x 2 2 232079003
SAE
SW 30 46 M 42 x 2 8 041228003 10 229306006 21 230119004 22 065213007
0˚ 38 55 M 52 x 2 9 065211009 23 065208009 30 442090
GEW
25 41 M 36 x 2 3 248600000
SAE
30 46 M 42 x 2 11 041231003 13 238787001 24 065212008
45˚ 38 55 M 52 x 2 12 065210000 14 232731008 25 065207000 31 446464
SW
GEW
15 24 M 22 x 1,5 1 064872009 6 245066003

SAE
18 32 M 26 x 1,5 4 234582006 15 234583005
90˚ 25 41 M 36 x 2 5 065313004 7 065594001 16 271302003
SW 30 46 M 42 x 2 17 041227004 19 065593002 26 066887005 28 065202005
GEW
38 55 M 52 x 2 18 065209008 20 220231002 27 065314003 29 065158007 32 240877006
O--Ring / O--ring / Joint torique / Junta tórica

s Pos. Nr./No. Pos. Nr./No. Pos. Nr./No. Pos. Nr./No. Pos. Nr./No. Pos. Nr./No. Pos. Nr./No. Pos. Nr./No.
33 041180002 34 043157004 34 043157004 35 013485007 35 013485007 36 042859002 36 042859002 37 019601005

Ø Øxs 18,64 x 3,53 24,99 x 3,53 24,99 x 3,53 32,9 x 3,5 32,9 x 3,5 37,7 x 3,53 37,7 x 3,53 47,22 x 3,53
4.2
12535--0310
TD: Schöneck
SAE--Adapter
Adapter SAE
Adaptateur SAE 1 4
4.2
12535--0410
Adaptador SAE
1 064872009 1 SAE--Adapter 1/2” 90˚ Adapter SAE Adaptateur SAE Adaptador SAE
8 041228003 1 SAE--Adapter 1” 0˚ Adapter SAE Adaptateur SAE Adaptador SAE
21 230119004 1 SAE--Adapter 1 1/4” 0˚ Adapter SAE Adaptateur SAE Adaptador SAE
SAE--Adapter
Adapter SAE
Adaptateur SAE 2 4
4.2
12535--0410
Adaptador SAE
RAD Adapter / Adapter / Adaptateur / Adaptador
Rohraußendurchmesser RAD GEW Pos. Nr./No.
Diameter of tube
Exterieur tuyau 30 M 42 x 2 38 065531006
Ext. tubo equivalente GEW
45˚ 38 M 52 x 2 39 067177002
GEW.
Gewinde GEW
Thread
Taraudage 30 M 42 x 2 40 065530007
Rosca GEW
90˚ 38 M 52 x 2 41 067176003
SW
Schlüsselweite GEW
Key width
Ouverture de cle
Liave fija
Nr./No.
Material--Nr.
Part no.
Référence
Nº Refª
SAE--Adapter
Adapter SAE
Adaptateur SAE 3 4
4.2
12535--0410
Adaptador SAE
38 065531006 1 Adapter M42x2 45˚ Adapter Adaptateur Adaptador
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
SAE--Adapter
Adapter SAE
Adaptateur SAE 4 4
4.2
12535--0410
Adaptador SAE
1 2 3
RAD GEW. RAD
Rohraußendurchmesser Gewinde
Diameter of tube Thread
GEW.
Exterieur tuyau Taraudage
Ext. tubo equivalente Rosca
Nr./No.
Artikel--Nr. RAD GEW. Nr./No. RAD Nr./No. RAD Nr./No.
Part no.
Référence 25 1” 248417002 25 042017006 25 061409006
Nº Refª 30 1” 248419000 30 066884008 30 002332006
1” 248421001
38 38 224418009 38 002334004
4 6 1 1/2 ” 248422000
GEW.
4
4 5 RAD 6 RAD
GEW. RAD 35
1 RAD 35 DIN 3770

RAD 35 NB70
RAD 35 RAD 35
5
RAD GEW. Nr./No. RAD Nr./No. RAD Nr./No. RAD Nr./No. Nr./No.
1 5/8 ”
35 259179009 35 262138008 25 249597002 25 248429003
--12UN
1 5/16 ”
35 261024003 38 249599000 30 248430005 248865007
--12UN
35 M30x1,5 262144005 38 248431004
35 M42x2 255534004
35 3/4 ” 248425007
3 35 1” 248426006
2 35 1 1/4 ” 248427005
35 1 1/2 ” 248428004
35 M33x2 266427003
4.2
13188--9411
TD: Schöneck
Hydraulikverschraubungen
Hydr. fittings
Raccords hydr. 1
4.2
13188--9708
Racores hidr.
Hydraulikverschraubungen
Hydr. fittings
Raccords hydr.
4.2
13188--9708
Racores hidr.
NG Pos.
RAD 0 55 39
Diameter of tube NG Pos. 1 55
Exterieur tuyau 2 56
Ext. tubo equivalente 1 24 3 57
2 25 44 45 4 58
3 26 5 59 36
NG Pos. 4 27 37
6 60 38
5 28
0 30
6 29
1 31
2 32 RAD
4 33 23
34
41
40
NG RAD Pos. NG RAD Pos.
42
43
1 8 5 0 6 1
1 12 6 0 8 2
2 15 7 0 10 3
2 16 8 0 12 4
2 18 9
3 20 10
3 22 11
3 25 12
4 28 13
4 30 14
5 32 15
5 33 16 46 49 52
5 33,7 17 47 50 53
18 35 48 51 54
5 35
5 38 19
5 40 20
6 48 21
4.2 6 50 22
15365--9811
TD: Braun
Rohrschelle kpl.
Pipe clamp cpl.
Collier cpl. 1 4
4.2
15365--0405
Abrazadera de tubo cpl.
1 021090002 -- Klemmhälftenpaar NG0 Ø 6 Pair of clamping halfs Paire de pinces Pareja de pinzas
17 435973 -- Klemmhälftenpaar NG5 Ø 33,7 Pair of clamping halfs Paire de pinces Pareja de pinzas
23 060543002 -- Deckplatte NG0 LDP0--W1 DIN3015 Cover plate Plaque de recouvrement Placa cubierta
30 245240007 -- Aufbauschraube LAS0--W1 DIN3015 Mounting screw Vis de montage Tornillo de montaje
34 255829007 -- Verdrehsicherung Anti--torsion safety dev. Sécurité anti--torsion Protección contra torsión
35 021113002 -- Tragschienenmutter LTM--W1 DIN3015 Nut Ecrou de fixation Tuerca de fijación
36 245397002 -- Doppelrohrschelle Ø6 Double pipe clamp Collier double Abrazadera de tubo doble
37 243432008 -- Doppelrohrschelle Ø 12 Double pipe clamp Collier double Abrazadera de tubo doble
Rohrschelle kpl.
Pipe clamp cpl.
Collier cpl. 2 4
4.2
15365--0405
NG Pos.
RAD 0 55 39
Diameter of tube NG Pos. 1 55
Exterieur tuyau 2 56
Ext. tubo equivalente 1 24 3 57
2 25 44 45 4 58
3 26 5 59 36
NG Pos. 4 27 37
6 60 38
5 28
0 30
6 29
1 31
2 32 RAD
4 33 23
34
41
40
NG RAD Pos. NG RAD Pos.
42
43
1 8 5 0 6 1
1 12 6 0 8 2
2 15 7 0 10 3
2 16 8 0 12 4
2 18 9
3 20 10
3 22 11
3 25 12
4 28 13
4 30 14
5 32 15
5 33 16 46 49 52
5 33,7 17 47 50 53
18 35 48 51 54
5 35
5 38 19
5 40 20
6 48 21
4.2 6 50 22
15365--9811
TD: Braun
Rohrschelle kpl.
Pipe clamp cpl.
Collier cpl. 3 4
4.2
15365--0405
38 223812004 -- Doppelrohrschelle Ø 16 Double pipe clamp Collier double Abrazadera de tubo doble
39 245398001 -- Deckplatte DP--B1 Cover plate Plaque de recouvrement Placa cubierta
40 237331005 -- Doppelrohrschelle kpl. Ø 12 Double pipe clamp cpl. Collier double cpl. Abrazad.de tubo doble cpl
44 036504004 -- Sicherungsscheibe VS6 Lock washer Rondelle d’arrêt Arandela de seguridad
45 036700002 -- Sicherungsblech 6,4 DIN463--ST Securing plate Tôle de sûreté Chapa de seguridad
46 066800008 -- Befestigungsschelle 1xØ 8 Fixing clamp Bride de fixation Abrazadera de fijacion
55 032110007 -- Sechskantschraube M6x30 DIN931--8.8 Hexagon head cap screw Vis à tête hexagonale Tornillo de cab.exagonal
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
Rohrschelle kpl.
Pipe clamp cpl.
Collier cpl. 4 4
4.2
15365--0405
001239003 001240005 001242003 001245000 Manometer
001246009 001247008 001248007 001249006
001250008 002244000 Pressure gauge
Manomètre
Manómetro 1 - 4
4.2
16672-1010
1 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
1.1 002244000 1 Manometer 0-6bar Pressure gauge Manomètre Manómetro
1.9 432919 1 Manometer 0-250bar, D0,5mm Pressure gauge Manomètre Manómetro
2 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
3 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
3.8 499808 1 Manometer 0-160bar, ATEX Pressure gauge Manomètre Manómetro
4 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
5 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
5.1 206188001 1 Manometer 0-2,5bar Pressure gauge Manomètre Manómetro
6 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
001239003 001240005 001242003 001245000 Manometer

001246009 001247008 001248007 001249006
001250008 002244000 Pressure gauge
Manomètre
Manómetro 2 - 4
4.2
16672-1010
7 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
8 * OPTION 0 --------- --------- --------- --------- ---------
8.6 245726000 1 Manometer 0-5800 psi Pressure gauge Manomètre Manómetro
001239003 001240005 001242003 001245000 Manometer

001246009 001247008 001248007 001249006
001250008 002244000 Pressure gauge
Manomètre
Manómetro 3 - 4
4.2
16672-1010
001239003 001240005 001242003 001245000 Manometer
001246009 001247008 001248007 001249006
001250008 002244000 Pressure gauge
Manomètre
Manómetro 4 - 4
4.2
16672-1010
Gew. Vakuummeter / Vacuum gauge / Manomètre à vide / Vacuómetro
Gewinde
Thread
Taraudage
Rosca
Nr./No.
Material--Nr.
Part no.
Référence
Nº Refª
Pos. ∅ bar Gew. Nr. / No. Pos. ∅ bar Gew. Nr. / No. Pos. ∅ bar Gew. Nr. / No.
1 50 -0,3 M10x1 021152005 2 63 -0,8 -- 1 G 1/4“ 060440008 3 63 -0,8 -- 1 G 1/4“ 230118005
4 63 -0,9 -- 1 G 1/4“ 234581007 5 63 -0,8 -- 1 G 1/4“ 244084002 6 63 -1 -- 0 G 1/4“ 251624002
7 40 -1 -- 0 G 1/8“ 251701006 8 63 +0,3 -- --1 G 1/4“ 400553 9 63 +0,3 -- --1 G 1/4“ 400556
TD: Schöneck
Vakuummeter
Vacuum gauge
Manomètre à vide 1 2
4.2
16673--0309
Vacuómetro
1 021152005 1 Vakuummeter 1/4”(H); --0,3bar Vacuum gauge Manomètre à vide Vacuómetro
2 060440008 1 Vakuummeter 1/4”(U), --0,8 -- 1bar Vacuum gauge Manomètre à vide Vacuómetro
3 230118005 1 Vakuummeter 1/4”(U); --0,8 -- 1bar; alufrei Vacuum gauge Manomètre à vide Vacuómetro
4 234581007 1 Vakuummeter 1/4”(H); --0,9 -- 1bar Vacuum gauge Manomètre à vide Vacuómetro
5 244084002 1 Vakuummeter 1/4”(H); --0,8 -- 1bar Vacuum gauge Manomètre à vide Vacuómetro
6 251624002 1 Vakuummeter 1/4”(H); --1 -- 0bar Vacuum gauge Manomètre à vide Vacuómetro
7 251701006 1 Vakuummeter 1/8”(H); --1 -- 0bar Vacuum gauge Manomètre à vide Vacuómetro
8 400553 1 Vakuummeter 1/4”(H); +0,3 -- --1bar Vacuum gauge Manomètre à vide Vacuómetro
9 400556 1 Vakuummeter 1/4”(U); +0,3 -- --1bar Vacuum gauge Manomètre à vide Vacuómetro
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
Vakuummeter
Vacuum gauge
Manomètre à vide 2 2
4.2
16673--0309
Vacuómetro
Schlauchtüllen Rücklauf
Hose nozzles, return line
Embouts à olive, retour 1 2
4.2
17591--0702
Portamangueras de retorno
1 485131 1 Schlauchtülle Rücklauf SAE 1 / DN25, 90˚ Hose nozzle, return line Embout à olive, retour Portamanguera de retorno
2 485134 1 Schlauchtülle Rücklauf SAE 1 1/4 / DN25, 90˚ Hose nozzle, return line Embout à olive, retour Portamanguera de retorno
4 485130 1 Schlauchtülle Rücklauf SAE 1 / DN25, 0˚ Hose nozzle, return line Embout à olive, retour Portamanguera de retorno
9 467218 1 Schlauchtülle Rücklauf 35L / DN25, 90˚ Hose nozzle, return line Embout à olive, retour Portamanguera de retorno
12 467221 1 Schlauchtülle Rücklauf 25S / DN25, 90˚ Hose nozzle, return line Embout à olive, retour Portamanguera de retorno
22 485139 1 Schlauchtülle Rücklauf 38S / DN38, 2x90˚ Hose nozzle, return line Embout à olive, retour Portamanguera de retorno
23 065703009 1 SAE--Flansch A 1” 3000PSI SAE flange Bride SAE Brida SAE
24 066335007 1 SAE--Flansch A 1 1/4” SAE flange Bride SAE Brida SAE
27 248865007 1 O--Ring 32x2,5 DIN3771NBR70 O--ring Joint torique Junta tórica
31 464097 1 Saugschlauch DN25 Suction hose Tuyau flex. d’aspiration Manguera de aspiración
34 466379 1 Schlauchschelle Ø 34--37 Hose clip Collier de serrage Abrazadera de manguera
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
Schlauchtüllen Rücklauf
Hose nozzles, return line
Embouts à olive, retour 2 2
4.2
17591--0702
Portamangueras de retorno
2
1
6
5
5
7
8
TD: Gonzalez
Beleuchtung
Lighting
Éclairage 1 2
5.1
E05814--1206
Alumbrado
1 E558792 1 Innen--Oval 24 V LED Inside oval light Lamp p. l’interieure Luz interior cabina
2 E512803 1 Magnet. Rotationslicht 24V 70W Magnetic turning light Lumiére rotative magnétiqu. Rotativo magnético
3 E558793 2 Arbeitsscheinwerfer Kabine 24V Power beam 1000 LED Working spotlight cabin Phare de travail cabine Foco trabajo cabina
4 E558793 2 Arbeitsscheinwerfer Trommel 24V Power beam 1000 LED Working spotlight drum Phare de travail cuba Foco trabajo cuba
5 E558793 4 Arbeitsscheinwerfer Chassis 24V Power beam 1000 LED Working spotlight chassis Phare de travail châssis Foco trabajo chasis
6 E558773 2 Blink-- und Positionsleuchten Vo.24 V LED Front light inter./pos. Pilote avant intermitt./pos. Piloto delantero intermitente + posición
7 E558778 2 Rueckleuchte 8--28 V LED Rear light pos./stop/indic. Feu arrière pos./freins/int. Piloto trasero posición + freno + intermit.
8 429893 4 KFZ--Leuchte Kpl. 24V ,0,96 W (6xLED) Side marker light cpl. Réflecteur du position cpl. Reflector gálibo cpto.
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
Beleuchtung
Lighting
Éclairage 2 2
5.1
E05814--1206
Alumbrado
5.2
1 5,6 3
4,6
2
5,6
5.1 5.2
7
9
(9)
8
TD: Gonzalez
Steuertableau (Kabine)
Control panel (cabin)
Tableau de commande (cabine) 1 2
5.2
E05815--1206
Panel de mando (cabina)
1 E558156 1 Bediengerät mit Display DP620 24 VDC Graphic terminal D’affichage Display
2 405197 1 Schalterbox Not--Aus Switch box, e--stop Boitier arret urgence Caja c/ pulsador emergencia 5.3 16153
3 E561505 1 Anbausatz f.Klimaanlage/Heiz. OPTIONAL Kit heating/AC driver’s cab Kit de climatisation cabine Kit climatización/AC cabina
4 435708 7 Kippschalter 15A 28V 2Cont. 3Pol Flip switch Interrupteur Interruptor
5 258632000 2 Kippschalter 12A 28V 4Wechs Toggle switch Interrupteur Interruptor
6 244354004 9 Gummikappe m. Dichtring TIP U851 Rubber cap w/ seal ring Capucho filete inter. + joint Capuchón prot. p. int. c/ enclavam.
7 E527306 1 Schalterbox “Rearme” Switch box “Rearme” Boitier arret “Rearme” Caja con pulsador “Rearme” 5.1 E05688
8 E569251 1 Flammstart--Schaltgerät 9G--7641 Heater starter switchgear Appareil de préchauffage Interruptor de arranque
9 E569252 1 Zündschlüssel 5P8500 Starting key La clé de contact Llave de arranque
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
Steuertableau (Kabine)
Control panel (cabin)
Tableau de commande (cabine) 2 2
5.2
E05815--1206
Panel de mando (cabina)
(1--7) 2,4,5,6,7
0
3,6,7
8
1,4,5,6,7
TD: Gonzalez
Steuertableau (Trommel)
Control panel (Drum)
Panneau de commande (Cuba)
E561777
1 2
5.2
E05833--1206
Cuadro de mando (Cuba)
0 E561777 1 Stuerchrank Drucktaster Kpl. Ccontrol box pushbutton cpl.Boîte contrôle a/ boutons Caja control con pulsadores cpto.
1 439224 7 Drucktaster schwarz M22--D--S Illuminated pushbutton black Bouton--poussoir noir Botón pulsador negro
2 E554615 1 Drucktaster rot M22--D--R Illuminated pushbutton red Bouton--poussoir rouge Botón pulsador rojo
3 E559468 2 Drucktaster weiss mit Pfeil 1NA, 1NC, 22mm Illum. pushbut. white arrow Bouton--poussoir cible flécheBotón pulsador blanco con flecha
4 439227 8 Kontaktelement 6A 24VDC1S 1XNA M22--K10 Contact element Elément de contact Contacto
5 E95735 8 Befestigungsadapter M22--A Mounting adapter Adaptateur de montage Adaptador montaje
6 E559470 10 Gummischutzkappe f. Drucktaste Rubber prot. cap f. pushb. Capuchon de protection Capuchón prot. p. pulsador
7 E559472 10 Etikettenhalter fl. Drucktaster 50x30mm Label holder f. pushbutton Porte--étiquettes Portaetiquetas para pulsador
8 E561974 1 Abdeckunghalter f. Drucktaster Protec. holder f. controlbox Soutien clavier Soporte protección p. caja control trasera
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
Steuertableau (Trommel)
Control panel (Drum)
Panneau de commande (Cuba)
E561777
2 2
5.2
E05833--1206
Cuadro de mando (Cuba)
2
(1-4) 0.1
(1-4) 0.2
5.3
16153--0305
© Putzmeister AG 2005
405197, 433369 Schalterbox

Switch box
Box d’interrupteur 1 2
5.3
16153--0512
Caja con interruptor
0.1 405197 1 Schalterbox Switch box Box d’interrupteur Caja con interruptor
0.2 433369 1 Schalterbox Switch box Box d’interrupteur Caja con interruptor
1 067155008 1 .Kunststoffgehäuse .Plastic housing .Carter en plastique .Carcasa plástica
2 402758 1 .Drucktaster .Press--button switch .Bouton poussoir .Pulsador
3 243732009 1 .Schaltglied für Taster 2Ö .Circuit element f. button .Elém. de circuit p.bouton .Elem. d.conex. p.pulsador
4 066870009 1 .Anzeigeschild für Taster .Sign for button .Plaque indicatr.p.bouton .Placa p.pulsador
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
405197, 433369 Schalterbox

Switch box
Box d’interrupteur 2 2
5.3
16153--0512
Caja con interruptor
6
14
12
16
18
(23--25)
15 22
11 23 25
3
5 16
20
11
19 24
13 17
2 (8)
7
(9)
7 21
1
10
4
TD: Gonzalez
Trommel
Drum
Tambour 1 2
8.0
E05827--1206
Cuba
1 E556834 1 Getriebe Trommel 568 L1T21 Drum gearbox Réducteur drum Reductora giro cuba
2 E555375 1 Hy.--Motor OMTS250 200Bar Hyd.--Motor Moteur hydraulique Motor hidráulico
3 E561435 1 Trommel Swt. 4 m3 Drum welded Tambour soudé Cuba soldada
4 E558949 1 Bolzen für Getriebe bolt for gearbox Boulon pour réducteur Bulón para reductora
5 E559367 1 Hinteren Handhebel f. Kreislauf Trommel Rear manual lever f. barrel Levier arrière p. tambour Palanca trasera p. giro de cuba
6 E561471 1 Vorne Handhebel f. Kreislauf Trommel Front manual lever f. barrel Levier avant p. tambour Palanca delantera p. giro de cuba
7 E562277 2 Rolle f. Trommel Kpl. Roller f. drum cpl. Rouleau cpl. Rodillo para cuba cpto.
8 E562004 1 Abdeckung Recht f. Trommel Rolle Right cover f. drum roller Couvercle droit p. rouleau Protección derecha para rodillo cuba
9 E564969 1 Abdeckung Links f. Trommel Rolle Left cover f. drum roller Couvercle gauche p. rouleauProtección izquierda para rodillo cuba
10 E561985 1 Halter f. Rollen Holder f. roller Support p. rouleau Soporte trasero para rodillos
11 E557863 2 Hydr.--Zylinder 79--40/20 Hydr.--Cylinder Vérin hidraulique Cilindro hidráulico
12 E561882 1 Spanner Kpl. f. Trommel Clamp cpl. f. drum Tensor p. drum Tensor cpto. para cuba
13 E561879 1 Auslauftrichter Discharge hopper Goulotte d’évacuation Tolva de descarga
14 E561994 1 Einlauftrichter Kpl. Charge hopper cpl. Trémie de chargement Tolva para carga cpta.
15 E562022 1 Verschlussdeckel Kpl. f. Trommel Closing lid cpl. f. drum Couvercle p. drum cpl. Tapa cierre cuba cpta.
16 E559739 2 Bolzen f. Cyl--Kappe/Schurre D35xd25x70mm Bolt f. cap--cil./chute Boulon p. couvercle de cyl. Bulón para cilindro tapa/canaleta
17 E559793 2 Bolzen f. Cyl--Kappe/Schurre D30xd20x70mm Bolt f. cap--cil./chute Boulon p. couvercle de cyl. Bulón para cilindro tapa/canaleta
18 E562021 1 Halter f. Einlauftrichter Kpl. Holder f. hopper cpl. Appui trémie cpl. Soporte para tolva cpto.
19 E561979 1 Hauphalter f. Aufgabeschurre Kpl. Holder base f. chute cpl. Prise en charge chaq. canal.Soporte base para canaleta cpto.
20 E561864 1 Halter f. Aufgabeschurre Turn holder f. discharge Décharge soutien rotation Soporte para giro canaleta descarga
21 E561870 1 Hinter Aufgabeschurre Rear dischrge chute Goulotte d’évacuation arrièr. Canaleta descarga trasera
22 E562031 1 Aufgabeschurre Zusatzlich Kpl. Auxiliary charge chute cpl. Goulotte d’évacuation aux.c Canaleta auxiliar de descarga cpta.
23 E561861 1 Aufgabeschurre Zusatzlich Auxiliary charge chute Goulotte d’évacuation aux. Canaleta auxiliar de descarga
24 E562030 1 Halter f. Aufgabeschurre Zusatzlich Holder f. auxiliary charge ch.Support p. goulotte d’évac. Soporte para canaleta auxiliar de descarga
25 E563154 4 Spannenverschluss Kpl. Quad E5--9 Southco Closing pressure cpl. Pression de fermeture cpl. Cierre presión cpto
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
Trommel
Drum
Tambour 2 2
8.0
E05827--1206
Cuba
5
(1-16) 6 7
0
13
8 4
17 16
12
14
19
20, 21
15
11
10 18
1
3
2
1
TD: Gonzalez
Türes, Haube
Door, hood
Porte, capot
E558816
1 2
9.0
E05826--1206
Puertas, capot
0 E558816 1 Türes, Haube Door, hood Porte, capot Puertas, capot
1 E558830 2 Untere Abeckung Lower cover Basse capot Tapa cierre inferior
2 E558829 1 Untere Frontabdeckung Lower front cover Basse capot avant Tapa cierre inferior delantera
3 E558828 1 Untere hintere Abdeckung Lower rear cover Basse capot arrière Tapa cierre inferior trasera
4 E558861 2 Breite Fahrgestell Beam chassis Largeur du châssis Larguero chasis
5 E558825 1 Obere hintere Verkleidung Upper rear hood Hautecapot arrière Capot superior trasero
6 E558826 1 Obere Fronthaube Upper front hood Capot avant supérieur Capot superior delantero
7 E558823 1 Rechte obere Verkleidung Upper right hood Capot droite supérieur Capot superior derecho
8 E558824 1 Linke obere Verkleidung Upper left hood Capot gauche supérieur Capot superior izquierdo
9 E559758 1 Halter f. Batterie Support f. battery Support de batterie Soporte para baterías
10 E558915 1 Tür vorn links Left front door Porte avant gauche Puerta frontal izquierda
11 E558925 1 Türn vorne rechts Right front door Porte avant droite Puerta frontal derecha
12 E558827 1 Heckscheibe Rear screen Écran arrière Rejilla trasera
13 E558927 1 Feste Ölfilter Tür Fixed oil filter door Fixe la porte filtre à huile Puerta filtro aceite fija
14 E558926 1 Legen Ölfilter Tür Insert oil filter door Insérez la porte du filtre à h. Puerta filtro aceite móvil
15 E559799 8 Unterlage f. Scharnier 87x25x3 Hinge support Platine Pletina supl. p. bisagra
16 E559798 8 Unterlage f. Schliesshaken 50x19x3 Plate f. closing hook Platine Pletina supl. p. gancho cierre
17 E558920 1 Rechte Klapptüre Kpl. Right door cpl. Porte droite cpl. Puerta lateral derecha cpta.
18 E558921 1 Linke Klapptüre Kpl. Left door cpl. Porte gauche cpl. Puerta lateral izquierda cpta.
19 E532740 10 Scharnier 180º 180x85x4 D8x5 Hinge Articulation à charnière Bisagra
20 H2405110501 9 Spannhalter 13X6X2,20 Hood closure Fermeture de capot Cierre capot
21 H2405110502 9 Schließhaken 4,5x1,80x2,80 Closing hook Crochet de fermenture Gancho de cierre
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
Türes, Haube
Door, hood
Porte, capot
E558816
2 2
9.0
E05826--1206
Puertas, capot
0.1, 0.2
0.2 (1--2)
0.1
TD: Gonzalez
E558076, E558027 Laufrad Kpl. 12R20

Wheel cpl. 12R20
Roue cpl. 12R20 1 2
9.1
E05816--1206
Rueda cpta. 12R20
0.1 E558027 1 Laufrad Kpl. 12R20 (MINE) NOKIAN Wheel cpl. Roue cpl. Rueda cpta.
0.2 E558076 1 Laufrad Kpl. 12R20 (X MINE D2) MICHELIN Wheel cpl. Roue cpl. Rueda cpta.
1 EMIN001 1 Reifen 12R20 Tyre Pneu Neumático
2 EMIN002 1 Felge 8” x 20” Beadlock Jante Llanta
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
E558076, E558027 Laufrad Kpl. 12R20

Wheel cpl. 12R20
Roue cpl. 12R20 2 2
9.1
E05816--1206
Rueda cpta. 12R20
5.1
5
18, 19
11,(12, 13)
4
14
17
5.2
16
9 6
10 15
7
2
(3)
3
1
TD: Gonzalez
Fahrerplatz--Fahrerkabine
Driver’s place--Cabin
Poste de conduite--Cabine 1 2
9.5
E05817--1206
Puesto de conducción--Cabina
1 E555724 1 Bremsepedal VB--220 60BAR Brake pedal Pédale d’frein Pedal de freno
2 E558056 1 Elektronikpedal MCS965--45º Electronic accelerator pedal Pédale d’accélérateur Pedal acelerador eléctrico
3 E558066 3m Gaszugseil f. pedal MCS965 Throttle cable f. pedal Tirette accel. p. pedal Cable acelerador p. pedal
4 E558793 2 Arb. Scheinwerfer 24V Power Beam 1000 LED Working spotlight Phare de travail Foco trabajo 5.1 E05814
5 E512803 1 Rundumleuchte 24V 70W Orange Flashing light Lumiére rotative Foco rotativo imán 5.1 E05814
6 E462111 1 Lenkrad D 362 Steering wheel Volant Volante
7 E471520 1 Lenksäule ohne signalkontakt OTPB 150 Steering column w. signal Biellette de direction Barra dirección s/ señal cont.
8 E522775 4 Konuslager 70 45 SH Cone silentbloc Silentbloc conique Silentbloc cónico
9 E558953 1 Schalthebel FNR 80910 Switching lever Levier de commande Mando 2 velocidades + bocina
10 E558950 1 Hebel f. Blinken 80877 Flashing lever Intermittent du levier Palanca intermitencia
11 E557796 1 Überwachungskamera Kpl. SERIE S--CMT HD Security camera cpl. Caméra sécurité a. moniteurCámara de seguridad c/ monitor cpta.
12 E557799 1 Monitor 7” SCMT704 Monitor Monitore Monitor
13 E557797 1 Überwachungskamera CMT88 HD Security camera Caméra sécurité Cámara de seguridad
14 E558792 1 Innen Oval 24 V LED Interior oval light Ovales de lumière intér. Luz interior ovalada 5.1 E05814
15 E561471 1 Vorne Handhebel f. Kreislauf Trommel Front manual lever f. barrel Levier avant p. tambour Palanca delantera p. giro de cuba
16 E563380 1 Fahrersitz f. Kabine Cabin seat Siège Asiento para cabina
17 E561505 1 Anbausatz f.Klimaanlage/Heiz. OPTIONAL Kit heating/AC driver’s cab Kit de climatisation cabine Kit climatización/AC cabina
18 E561495 1 Anbausatz f.Verglasung--KabineOPTIONAL Kit glasses driver’s cab Kit vitrage Kit acristalamiento y limpiaparabrisas
19 E561508 1 Anbausatz f.Schutzgitter--kabineOPTIONAL Kit protect. grid driver’s cab Kit Grille de protection Kit rejilla protección cabina
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
Fahrerplatz--Fahrerkabine
Driver’s place--Cabin
Poste de conduite--Cabine 2 2
9.5
E05817--1206
Puesto de conducción--Cabina
4.1, 4.2
5
4.2
4.1
3
(7--10)
6
10
2
7
4.1
4.2
TD: Gonzalez
Einbaukupplung
Assembly transmission
Transmission 1 2
9.5
E05824--1206
Transmisión
1 E556943 1 Vorderachse 212/975 Front axle Essieu avant Eje delantero
2 E556940 1 Hinterachse 212/976 Rear axle Essieu arrière Eje trasero
3 E557532 1 Hyd.--Motor ICVD GT--S1N--233V--164 Hyd. motor Moteur hidr. Motor hidráulico
4.1 E558027 4 Laufrad Kpl. 12R20 (MINE) NOKIAN Wheel cpl. Roue cpl. Rueda cpta. 9.1 E05816
4.2 E558076 4 Laufrad Kpl. 12R20 (X MINE D2) Wheel cpl. Roue cpl. Rueda cpta. 9.1 E05816
5 E560079 2 Anschlag Gummipuffer D150 x125 60SHORE Rubber buffer Blocs de caoutchouc Taco goma
6 E564217 1 Kardanwelle Kpl. Cardan shaft cpl. Transmission cpl. Eje cardan cpto.
7 E564100 1 Kardanwelle Lpm307 DIN120 Type1550 Cardan shaft Transmission Eje cardan trasero ICVD
8 E564102 1 Kardanwelle Lz545 DIN120 Type2030 Cardan shaft Transmission Eje cardan ICVD tramo horizontal
9 E564105 1 Kardanwelle L596 DIN120 Type2030 Cardan shaft Transmission Eje cardan tramo horizontal y soporte
10 E564107 1 Kardanwelle Lpm748 DIN120 Type2030 Cardan shaft Transmission Eje cardan delantero tramo horizontal
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
Einbaukupplung
Assembly transmission
Transmission 2 2
9.5
E05824--1206
Transmisión
1.1, 1.2
1.1
2.1
1.2
2.2
TD: Gonzalez
E559721, E559720 Koftlügel Rechts/ Links Hinter Kpl.

Right/ left mudguard rear cpl.
Droite/ gauche aile cpl. 1 2
9.7
E05831--1206
Guardabarros derecho/ izq. trasero cpto.
1.1 E559721 1 Abnehmbare Kotflügel hinten rechts Removable mudguard right Amovib.garde--b. arrieredroitGuardabarros trasero dch. desmontable
1.2 E559720 1 Abnehmbare Kotflügel hinten links Removable mudguard left Amovib.garde--b.arriere gaucGuardabarros trasero izq. desmontable
2.1 E558892 1 Steuerhaus Rechts Wheelhouse right Timonerie droite Paso de rueda derecho
2.2 E558836 1 Steruerhaus Links Wheelhouse left Timonerie gauche Paso de rueda izquierdo
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
E559721, E559720 Koftlügel Rechts/ Links Hinter Kpl.

Right/ left mudguard rear cpl.
Droite/ gauche aile cpl. 2 2
9.7
E05831--1206
Guardabarros derecho/ izq. trasero cpto.
2
(1--7)
0
4 (2--6)
1
3
4
5
4
7
4
6
4
4
TD: Gonzalez
Auspuffanlage m. Auspufftopf Kpl.

Exhaust system w. silencer cpl.
Echappement m. silenceur cpl.
E562541
1 2
9.8
E05818--1206
Instalación escape c/ silencioso cpto.
0 E562541 1 Auspuffanlage Kpl. Mixkret Exhaust system cpl. Echappement cpl. Sistema escape cpto
1 E560651 1 Auspuffanlage m. Auspufftopf Mixkret Exhaust system w. silencer Echappement cpl. Instalación escape c/ silencioso cpto
2 E559775 1 Buchse f. Eingang Auspuffanlage Bushing f. exhaust input Douille p. echappement Casquillo p. entrada escape
3 E560734 0,23m Abassrohr Flex. D90/95 L= 230mm Flexible tube f. exhaust syst.Tuyau flexible Tubo flexible para escape
4 E560733 6 Rundstahlbuegel mit Schelle 3 1/2” ALUM. Round steel elbow Etrier tuyau Abarcón c/ abrazadera
5 E559776 1 Sonderbogen 45º Angle elbow Coude Tubo acodado p. entrada catalizador
6 E560653 1 Abgas--Schalldaempf D100 Rework, silencer Silenceur p. Echappement Silencioso p. escape
7 E562008 1 Abgaskatalysator f. D. Motor DC8 Exhaust catalysator f. diesel Catalyseur p. mot. a deux Catalizador p. motor diesel C6.6
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
Auspuffanlage m. Auspufftopf Kpl.

Exhaust system w. silencer cpl.
Echappement m. silenceur cpl.
E562541
2 2
9.8
E05818--1206
Instalación escape c/ silencioso cpto.
0 024449003 1 Werkzeugkiste Tool box Caisse à outils Cajón de herramientas
1 018425004 1 .Schlosserhammer .Hammer .Marteau rivoir .Martillo de ajustador
2 016904006 1 .Einmaulschlüssel 46 DIN894 .Single end spanner .Clé à fourche simple .Llave de una boca
3 018426003 1 .Doppelmaulschlüssel 41/46 DIN895 .Double open ended span. .Clé à fourches doubles .Llave de dos bocas
11 446478 1 .Doppelringschlüssel 12/13 DIN838 .Double--ended ring spann. .Clé polygonale double .Llave doble de bocas des.
14 018435007 1 .Schraubendreher Nr.7 DIN5270 .Screw driver .Tournevis .Atornillador
15 018436006 1 .Flachmeißel 200mm .Flat chisel .Ciseau plat .Cincel plano
16 018439003 1 .Kreuzmeißel .Cross--cut chisel .Bec d’âne .Cincel agudo
17 018437005 1 .Spachtel 50MM .Stripping knife .Spatule .Espátula
18 041371002 1 .Sechskantstiftschlüssel SW4 DIN911 .Hex. socket head wrench .Clé mâle normale .Llave macho exagonal
25 016907003 1 .Kombi--Zange .Combination pliers .Pince universelle .Alicates universales
26 224584001 1 .Wasserpumpenzange 240mm DIN5231F .Water pump pliers .Pince multiprise .Tenazas p. bomba de agua
27 018440005 1 .Werkzeugkasten .Tool box .Caisse à outils .Cajón de herramientas
28 000111009 1 .Vorhängeschloß .Padlock .Cadenas .Candado
29 016110007 2 .Kegelschmiernippel BM10x1 DIN71412 .Conical lubr. nipple .Graisseur .Engrasador
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
© Putzmeister AG 2006
Werkzeugkiste
Tool box
Caisse à outils
024449003
1 2
12.1
17521--0701
Cajón de herramientas
Werkzeugkiste
Tool box
Caisse à outils
024449003
2 2
12.1
17521--0701
Cajón de herramientas
2
1
12.3
TD: Gonzalez
Wasser--System Kpl.
Water system cpl.
Sistème eau cpl. 1 2 3 4
12.1
E05832--1206
Sistema agua cpta.
1 E562705 1 Wasserpumpe Water pump Pompe à eau Bomba agua
2 E563271 1 Schlauchtrommel cpto. 21m / DN10 Inox Hoses drum cpl. Nettoyeur cpl. Enrollador manguera cpto.
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
Wasser--System Kpl.
Water system cpl.
12.1
E05832--1206
Sistema agua cpta.
2 10 2
6 6
6
5 5 5 1
9 4
2 1 2
4 3
1
2
8 5
TD: Gonzalez
Wasser--System Kpl.
Water system cpl.
12.1
E05832--1206
Sistema agua cpta.
1 E97377 5 Wasserleitungszubehör 1” M INOX. Waterpipe accessories Acessoires d conduit d’eau Accesorios de fontanería
2 E97362 2 Wasserleitungszubehör 1” 90_ INOX Waterpipe accessories Acessoires d conduit d’eau Accesorios de fontanería
3 E564992 1 Rohr 33,4x3,38x192 1” GAS DIN2440 Tube Tuyau Tubo
4 E98219 2 Kug.--Hahn 3/2 DN 25 20BAR R1Z M Valve Vanne Válvula neum. bola
5 E569692 5 Wasserleitungszubehör 1--3/4 INOX. Waterpipe accessories Acessoires d conduit d’eau Accesorios de fontanería
6 220206008 4 Ais--Gew--Tuelle LW 19R 3/4Z Sleeve Douille filetée Racor espiga
7 E97373 3 Wasserleitungszubehör 1” H INOX. Waterpipe accessories Acessoires d conduit d’eau Accesorios de fontanería
8 E01840900 1 Klauen.--A.Ge.Kuppl. KAM 34 DIN Coupling Acouplement Acoplamiento rápido
9 E569695 1 Wasserleitungszubehör 1” M --H INOX. Waterpipe accessories Acessoires d conduit d’eau Accesorios de fontanería
10 E564991 1 Rohr 33,4X3,38X515 1”GAS DIN2440 Tube Tuyau Tubo
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
Wasser--System Kpl.
Water system cpl.
12.1
E05832--1206
Sistema agua cpta.
432923 Hochdruckwasserpumpe
High pressure water pump
Pompe à eau haute press.
Bomba d.agua d.alta pres. 1 - 4
12.3
16526-0810
12.3
16526-0810
1 457254 1 Hochdruckwasserpumpe High pressure water pump Pompe à eau haute press. Bomba d.agua d.alta pres.
2 459051 1 .Hochdruckwasserpumpe .High pressure water pump .Pompe à eau haute press. .Bomba d.agua d.alta pres.
3 434534 1 .Hydr.-Motor .Hydr. motor .Moteur hydr. .Motor hidr.
4 459055 1 .LS-Druckentlastungsventil .Unloading pressure valve .Soupape d.sécurité accum. .LS-válv. descarga presión
5 440257 1 ..Druckfeder ..Pressure spring ..Ressort a pression ..Muelle de compression
6 459054 1 .Ventil .Valve .Clapet .Válvula
7 432919 1 .Manometer 0-250bar .Pressure gauge .Manomètre .Manómetro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB04-2-16672-0309
8 459053 1 .Pumpenkopf .Pump head .Tête de pompe .Cabezal de bomba
9 430351 1 .Ersatzteilpaket .Spare parts kit .Jeu de pièces de rech. .Juego d.piezas d.recambio
10 430353 1 .Dichtsatz .Seal set .Jeu de joints .Juego de juntas
11 468055 1 .Ölschauglas .Oil-level glass .Viseur de graissage .Mirilla d.nivel de aceite
12 468053 1 .O-Ring .O-ring .Joint torique .Junta tórica
13 428394 1 Wasserfilter Water filter Filtre d'eau Filtro de agua
14 428391 1 .Gehäuse .Housing .Carter .Carcasa
15 428392 1 .Filtergehäuse .Filter housing .Carter de filtre .Carcasa de filtro
17 042714008 1 ..O-Ring 25x2 DIN3771NBR70 ..O-ring ..Joint torique ..Junta tórica
18 457259 1 ..Adapter ..Adapter ..Adaptateur ..Adaptador
19 041364006 1 ..Usit-Ring ..Seal ring ..Joint d'étanchéité ..Junta de estanquidad
21 502325 2 .Ablaßhahn NW 14 3/8"AG; MS m. .Drain cock .Robinet purgeur .Grifo de purga
22 282475000 1 .Füllstandssonde M14x1,5; 9-36V .Fill-level sensor .Sonde de niveau .Sonda de nivel
24 458645 1 .Sechskantschraube M8 x60DIN 931-A4 .Hexagon head cap screw .Vis à tête hexagonale .Tornillo de cab.exagonal
25 041862003 1 .O-Ring 26x2 DIN3771NBR70 .O-ring .Joint torique .Junta tórica
27 416679 1 .Siebeinsatz .Sieve insert .Insert-tamis .Suplemento-tamiz
28 061376003 1 .O-Ring 43x2,5 DIN3771NBR70 .O-ring .Joint torique .Junta tórica
29 063351000 1 .Aktivator 100ml .Activator .Activateur .Activador
30 063347001 1 .Befestigungsmittel PM-BLAU .Glue .Moyen de fixation .Pegamento de fijación
31 429160 1 Adapterplatte Adapter plate Plaque d'adaptation Placa adaptador
32 455104 2 Außengewindetülle LW19 R 3/4" Nozzle, male thread Douille filetée Manguito rosca exterior
33 060502001 2 Schlauchschelle Ø 16-25 Hose clip Collier de serrage Abrazadera de manguera
34 063523003 1 PVC-Gewebeschlauch 19x4 PVC fabric ply hose Flexible à texture en PVC Tubo flexible textil PVC
35 040315001 1 Reduziernippel 1"-3/4" GF241 Reducing nipple Nipple de reduction Racor de reducción
36 435696 1 Kugelhahn Ball cock Robinet boisseau sphér. Llave esférica
12.3
16526-0810
37 040104005 1 Winkel 1" GF94 Elbow Coude Codo
38 426474 1 Verschraubung 1" GF331 Fitting Raccord à vis Racor
39 426475 1 Dichtring Seal ring Joint d'étanchéité Junta de estanquidad
40 427993 1 Winkel 3/8" Elbow Coude Codo
41 431809 1 Nippel Nipple Nipple Manguito
42 244080006 1 Stutzen GES 12L/R1/4"-WD Connection Manchon Racor
43 409447 3 Stutzen GES 15L G/38 WD Connection Manchon Racor
44 043328008 1 Stutzen EGESD 15L/R3/8"-WD Connection Manchon Racor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EB04-2-11479-0207
45 044072007 3 Stutzen EWSD 15L Connection Manchon Racor
46 430391 1 Senkbremsventil Flow control valve Soupape de freinage Válvula de frenada
47 044087005 2 Stutzen ELSD 15L Connection Manchon Racor
48 433121 1 Hydr.-Rohrsatz Set of hydraulic pipes Jeu tuyaux hydrauliques Juego tubos hidr.
49 044159001 2 Stutzen GES 15L/R1/2" WD Connection Manchon Racor
50 432939 1 Befestigungswinkel Mounting bracket Equerre de fixation Angulo de fijación
51 227661002 1 Anschlußblock NG6 Connection block Bloc de connexion Bloque conexión
52 067344000 1 4/2-Wegeventil 24V 4/2-way valve Distributeur à 4/2 voies Válvula de 4/2 vías . . . . . . . . EB02-1-11182-0207
53 032335002 2 Sechskantschraube M8x10 DIN933-8.8 Hexagon head cap screw Vis à tête hexagonale Tornillo de cab.exagonal
54 032333004 2 Sechskantschraube M8x16 DIN933-8.8 Hexagon head cap screw Vis à tête hexagonale Tornillo de cab.exagonal
55 037107002 4 Scheibe B8,4 DIN125-ST Washer Rondelle Arandela
56 031817000 2 Zylinderschraube M6x45 DIN912-8.8 Socket head cap screw Vis à tête cylindrique Tornillo cilíndrico rosca
57 445726 1 Kupplung Clutch Embrayage Embrague
58 445728 1 Kupplungsstecker Connecting plug Fiche de raccordement Acoplamiento rápido
59 063347001 1 Befestigungsmittel PM-BLAU Glue Moyen de fixation Pegamento de fijación
60 063351000 1 Aktivator 100ml Activator Activateur Activador
12.3
16526-0810
457254 Hochdruckwasserpumpe UDOR
High pressure water pump UDOR
Pompe à eau haute press. UDOR
Bomba d.agua d.alta pres. UDOR 1 - 2
12.3
18823-1112
0 457254 1 Hochdruckwasserpumpe UDOR High pressure water pump Pompe à eau haute press. Bomba d.agua d.alta pres.
1 459051 1 .Hochdruckwasserpumpe .High pressure water pump .Pompe à eau haute press. .Bomba d.agua d.alta pres.
2 434534 1 .Hydr.-Motor .Hydr. motor .Moteur hydr. .Motor hidr.
3 459055 1 .LS-Druckentlastungsventil .Unloading pressure valve .Soupape d.sécurité accum. .LS-válv. descarga presión
4 440257 1 ..Druckfeder ..Pressure spring ..Ressort a pression ..Muelle de compression
5 459054 1 .Ventil 1/2, 63°C .Valve .Clapet .Válvula
6 459053 1 .Pumpenkopf .Pump head .Tête de pompe .Cabezal de bomba
7 430351 1 .Ersatzteilpaket .Spare parts kit .Jeu de pièces de rech. .Juego d.piezas d.recambio
8 430353 1 .Dichtsatz .Seal set .Jeu de joints .Juego de juntas
9 468055 1 .Ölschauglas .Oil-level glass .Viseur de graissage .Mirilla d.nivel de aceite
10 468053 1 .O-Ring .O-ring .Joint torique .Junta tórica
457254 Hochdruckwasserpumpe UDOR

High pressure water pump UDOR
Pompe à eau haute press. UDOR
Bomba d.agua d.alta pres. UDOR 2 - 2
12.3
18823-1112
1 P--M... 7 P--GV... 13 P--GEV..M 19 ESLR...
3 1
RAD 1 2
RAD 2 P--R... 8 P--TV... 14 P--GEV..R 20 P--REDVD..

Diameter of tube
Exterieur tuyau 1 2
Ext. tubo equivalente 1 2
3
GEW.
Gewinde 3 VS... 9 P--KV... 15 EGESD..M
Thread
Taraudage
Rosca
RAD
Nr./No.
Artikel--Nr.
Part no. 4 P--GSV... 10 P--EWVD... 16 EGESD..R
Référence
Nº Refª
2
Drosseldurchmesser 1
Orifice diameter
Etrangleur de diameter
Estrangulador de diameter 5 P--WSV... 11 P--ELVD... 17 P--RSWV...M
Information
Information
Information
Informacion
6 P--WV... 12 P--ETVD... 18 P--RSWV...R
Profilring--Verschraubungen
Profile ring tube fittings
Raccords à bague profilée pour tubes 1 2 3 4
24.4
21499--9312
Anillo perfilado -- union roscada de tubos
1 3 6 9
RAD
RAD
RAD Nr. / No. RAD Nr. / No. RAD Nr. / No. RAD Nr. / No.
8S 246362007 6L 12 S 230097003 16 S 232565009
041754001
12 S 041799008 6S 16 S 227403008
16 S 041794003 8L 25 S 232561003
041755000
20 S 041795002 8S 30 S 253120009
25 S 041796001 12 L
041757008
30 S 042020006 12 S
38 S 043626001 16 S 230676000
10
20 S 041762006
25 S 041761007
7 1 2
1.1 DIN 3770
30 S 042821001 RAD
8S
Nr. / No.
227408003
38 S 043790005
NB 70 RAD 1/2 Nr. / No. 12 S 228426000
RAD Nr. / No. 8 L/6 L 248593007 16 S 227413001
6S 4,5x1,5 043795000 12 L/8 L 255064008 25 S 232569005
8S 6x1,5 043364004 12 S 228427009 30 S 230675001
12 S 10x1,5 043494000
4 16 S 228267007
16 S 14x2 019522003 25 S 253118008
20 S 17,2x2,4 041074008 RAD Nr. / No.
25 S 22,3x2,4 043496008 8S 252888009
30 S 27,3x2,4 043497007 12 S 228430009
38 S 35x2,5 043372009 16 S 227401000
8
25 S 232192003
11
30 S 231493004
2 38 S 232194001 RAD Nr. / No.
12 S 228429007 RAD Nr. / No.
16 S 227402009 8 S 253121008
RAD Nr. / No. 25 S 232196009 12 S 228425001
8L
5 30 S 230673003 16 S 227404007
243883000
8S 30 S 230668005
12 L RAD Nr. / No.
237941000
12 S 12 S 228428008
16 S 230677009 16 S 228424002
30 S 231492005
24.4
21499--9312
16 S/12 S 227417007
12 15 17 20 S/16 S
25 S/8 S
227418006
232563001
25 S/12 S 232197008
RAD Nr. / No. RAD GEW. Nr. / No. RAD GEW. Nr. / No. 25 S/16 S 044177009
8S 253042006 6S M 12x1,5 232566008 8S M14x1,5 228814007 25 S/18 L 044122009
12 S 232570007 8S M 14x1,5 232193002 25 S/15 L 044123008
16 S 230672004 12 L M 10x1 043378003 30 S/12 S 230669004
25 S 232568006 12 L M 14x1,5 043377004 30 S/16 S 231495002
30 S 231496001 12 L M 14x1,5 ∅2 083941005 30 S/25 S 232195000
12 L M 16x1,5 043379002 38 S/30 S 232199006
12 L
12 S
M 18x1,5
M 18x1,5
235183006
232564000
18 38 S/25 S 044148009
15 L M 18x1,5 043329007
13 18 L M 18x1,5 043330009 RAD

8S
GEW.
R1/4”
Nr. / No.
242262004
12 S R3/8” 242099002
RAD GEW. Nr. / No. 16 S R1/2” 253041007
8S M14x1,5 227406005 20 S R3/4” 227415009
12 S
25 S
M18x1,5
M33x2
227416008
232198007
16
3 1
RAD
8L
GEW.
R 1/4”
Nr. / No.
227205002
19
2
8S R 1/4” 227411003
14 12 L
12 L
R 1/4”
R 1/4”
043624003
043326000
RAD1/2/3
16S/8S/12S
Nr. / No.
234176001
12 L R 1/2” 043695003 16S/8S/16S 234677005
RAD GEW. Nr. / No. 12 S R 1/2” 254009006
8S R3/8” 252272000 15 L R 1/2” 043327009
8S
12 L
R1/4”
R1/4”
227409002
230674002
15 L
15 L
R 1/2”
R 3/8”
∅ 1,8 056731006
043328008
20 1 2
12 S R3/8” 232750005 16 S R 1/2” 229774007

16 S R3/8” 253040008 18 L R 1/2” 043610004 RAD 1/2 Nr. / No.
16 S R1/2” 227414000 18 L R 1/4” 043196007 12 S/6 S 232567007
20 S R3/4” 232042001 25 S R 1” 222566005 12 S/8 S 230096004
30 S R1 1/4” 230671005 30 S R 1 1/4” 230670006 12 S/12 L 064866002
16 S/8 S 227405006
16 S/12 L 222745004
Raccords à bague profilée pour tubes 1 2 3 4 24.4
21499--9312
24.4
21499--9312
1 K--M... 7 K--GV... 13 K--RSWV..M 19 K--TEV..M 25 K--WFV... 31 K--RVZ...
RAD 1 2
X
RAD 2 K--R... 8 K--TV... 14 K--RSWV..R 20 K--TEV..R 26 K--GEV..M 32 K--LEV..

Diameter of tube
Exterieur tuyau 1 2
Ext. tubo equivalente RAD
3
GEW.
Gewinde 3 VS... 9 K--REDV... 15 DKR..M 21 K--WEV..M 27 K--GEV..R
Thread
Taraudage
Rosca
RAD
1 2
Nr./No. GEW.
Artikel--Nr.
Part no. 4 K--GSV... 10 K--ELV... 16 DKR..R 22 K--WEV..R 28 K--GEV..UNF
Référence
Nº Refª
Drosseldurchmesser GEW.
Orifice diameter
Etrangleur de diameter
Estrangulador de diameter 5 K--WSV... 11 K--ETV... 17 EGESD..M 23 K--MAV... 29 K--RV...
Information
Information
Information
Informacion
6 K--WV... 12 K--EWV... 18 EGESD..R 24 K--GFV... 30 K--RVV...
2 2
1 X
1
Keilring--Verschraubungen
Tapered ring fittings
Raccords à bague conique 1 2 3 4 5 6
24.9
22412--9311
Racores con anillo cónico
15 L 041808009 10 L 018158009
1 RAD 18 L
22 L
041809008
041810000
4 12 L
15/12 L
016239001
016242001
25 S 041813007 15 L 013375007
RAD Nr. / No. 28 L 206001007 RAD Nr. / No. 18 L 041958001
6L 041797000 30 S 042021005 6L 018611009 22 L 018128000
6 LL 041787007 38 S 043627000 8L 016849006 25 S 018135006
8L 041798009 10 L 016829000
8 LL 041788006 12 L 018105007
8S 246362007 15 L 018133008
10 L 041789005 18 L 018159008
12 L 041790007 25 S 041193002
12 S 041799008 30 S 042071000
15 L 041791006
3 38 S 043146002
RAD
16 S 041794003
18 L 041792005
7 1 2
20 S 041795002 RAD Nr. / No.
22 L 041793004 6L
041754001
25 S 041796001 6S RAD 1/2 Nr. / No.
28 L
30 S
206000008
042020006
8L
8S
041755000 5 6L
6 LL
018152005
018171002
38 S 043626001 10 L 8L 016471005
041756009
10 S RAD Nr. / No. 10/8 L 013188003
12 L 6L 041196009 10 L 016468005
041757008 8L 018131000 12/8 L 018144000
12 S
2 RAD 15 L 041758007 10 L 041342002 12 L 016255001
16 S 230676000 12 L 041175004 15/12 L 016246007
18 L 041759006 15 L 018148006 15 L 016472004
RAD Nr. / No. 20 S 041762006 18 L 042368001 18/15 L 018147007
6L 22 L 041760008 38 S 043147001 18 L 018145009
041802005
6S 25 S 041761007 22/18 L 041984004
6 LL 041804003 30 S 042821001 22 L 206050003
8L 38 S 043790005 25 S 018136005
041803004 2
8S
8 LL 041805002
6 38 S 043145003
1
10 L
041806001
10 S RAD 1/2 Nr. / No.
12 L 6L 041203002
041807000 8L 018115000
12 S
24.9
22412--9311
25/12 S 016878006
1 2 2
8 25/16 S
25/22 S
041194001
043023002
12 14
3 25 S/12 L 042981006 1
RAD 1/2/3 Nr. / No. 25 S/15 L 041351006 RAD 1/2 Nr. / No. RAD GEW. Nr. / No.
6L 042269003 30/25 S 042270005 6L 018177006 6L R 1/4” 016823006
8L 016256000 30 S/15 L 041254006 8L 016840005 6 LL R 1/8” 018124004
10 L 018157000 10 L 018155002 8L R 1/8” 016834008
12 L 016240003 12 L 016826003 8 LL R 1/8” 018132009
15 L 016473003 15 L 016260009 8L R1/4” 016837005
18/18/12 L 042770000 18 L 013432003 10 L R 3/8” 018156001
18 L 041183009 22 L 208652001 12 L R1/4” 043031007
22 L
25 S
018127001
041768000
10 25 S
30 S
016877007
041970005
12 L
15 L
R3/8”
R1/2”
016864007
018137004
18 L R 1/2” 018166004
RAD Nr. / No. 25 S R 1” 016244009
6L 041973002 38 S R1 1/2” 041212006
9 1 2
8L
10 L
016234006
041991000
12 L 016832000
RAD 1/2 Nr. / No. 15 L 016238002
13
8/6 L
8/6 L--SV
042532002
255070005
18 L
25 S
018146008
042481001
15
GEW.
8/12 L 224684008 30 S 042480002 RAD GEW. Nr. / No.
10/8 L 016866005 6L M10x1 042766001 GEW. Nr. / No.
12/6 L 018607000 8L M14x1,5 018102000 M14x1,5 063880005
12/8 L 016842003 8 LL M10x1 041195000 M16x1,5 234090006
12/10 L
12/6 L--SV
043109007
255077008
11 8L
10 L
M12x1,5
M16x1,5
041391008
016850008
M18x1,5 064122005
15/6 L 018174009 12 L M16x1,5 016236004

15/8 L 016482007 RAD Nr. / No. 12 L M18x1,5 018123005
15/10 L
15/12 L
018108004
016247006
8L
12 L
016824005
018112003
12 S
15 L
M18x1,5
M18x1,5
041136001
016867004
16
GEW.
16 S/15 L 016248005 15 L 016259007 15 L M22x1,5 016253003
18/8 L 041353004 18 L 041250000 16 S M22x1,5 042022004 GEW. Nr. / No.
18/12 L 041182000 22 L 018134007 18 L M22x1,5 013493002 R 1/4” 041814006
18/15 L 013494001 25 S 041251009 22 L M26x1,5 018129009 R 1/2” 041815005
22/15 L 041327001 25 S M33x2 042307004
22/18 L 041816004
Raccords à bague conique 1 2 3 4 5 6 24.9
22412--9311
17 19 22 25
X
RAD GEW. Nr. / No. RAD GEW. Nr. / No. RAD GEW. Nr. / No. RAD X Nr. / No.
6S M 12x1,5 232566008 8L M 12x1,5 016465008 6L R 1/4” 041200005 15 L 35 018187009
8S M 14x1,5 232193002 6 LL R 1/4” 018176007 18 L 40 018188008
12 L M 10x1 043378003 8L R 1/4” 011131007 22 L 40 205838006
12 L M 14x1,5 043377004 8L R 1/2” 016241002
12 L
12 L
M 14x1,5
M 16x1,5
∅2 083941005
043379002
20 10 L
12 L
R 1/4”
R 3/8”
016460003
018107005 24.1
12 L M 18x1,5 235183006 12 L R 1/2” 018111004 25.1 DIN 3770
12 S M 18x1,5 232564000 RAD GEW. Nr. / No. 15 L R 1/2” 016458002 NB 70
15 L M 18x1,5 043329007 8L R 1/4” 016462001 25 S R 1” 016879005 RAD Nr. / No.
18 L M 18x1,5 043330009 12 L 18x2,5 001177000
15 L
18 L 24x2,5 041976009
21 22 L
18 RAD GEW. Nr. / No.

23
6L M 10x1 042386009
26
RAD GEW. Nr. / No. 6 LL M 10x1 018172001 RAD GEW. Nr. / No.
8L R 1/4” 227205002 6S M 12x1,5 018151006 8L R 1/4” 016486003 RAD GEW. Nr. / No.
8S R 1/4” 227411003 8L M 12x1,5 016490002 8S R 1/2” 018101001 6L M 10x1 042385000
12 L R 1/4” 043624003 8 LL M 10x1 042606006 10 L R 1/4” 016249004 6L M 12x1,5 018149005
12 L R 1/4” 043326000 8S M 14x1,5 016466007 12 L R 1/4” 016865006 6 LL M 10x1 018610000
12 L R 1/2” 043695003 12 L M 16x1,5 016479007 12 L R 1/2” 041359008 8L M 12x1,5 016258008
12 S R 1/2” 254009006 12 S M 18x1,5 016489000 8L M 14x1,5 064299006
15 L R 1/2” 043327009 15 L M 18x1,5 016459001 8L M 22x1,5 016250006
15 L R 1/2” ∅ 1,8 056731006 18 L M 22x1,5 041975000 8 LL M 10x1 041197008
15 L
16 S
R 3/8”
R 1/2”
043328008
229774007
22 L
25 L
M 26x1,5
M 22x1,5
018125003
016461002
24 10 L
10 S
M 14x1,5
M 16x1,5
041699001
016485004
18 L R 1/2” 043610004 X 12 L M 12x1,5 042523008
18 L R 1/4” 043196007 RAD X Nr. / No. 12 L M 14x1,5 016245008
25 S R 1” 222566005 12 L 35 042040002 12 L M 18x1,5 016243000
30 S R 1 1/4” 230670006 15 L 35 041163003 12 L M 18x1,5 016484005
18 L 40 041162004 12 S M 18x1,5 042573003
12 S M 18x1,5 042958000
24.9
22412--9311
RAD GEW. Nr. / No.
15 L
15 L
M 12x1,5
M 16x1,5
018182004
042285003
28 29 32
15 L M 18x1,5 016452008
15 L M 22x1,5 001041000 RAD GEW. Nr. / No. RAD Nr. / No. RAD GEW. Nr. / No.
16 S M 22x1,5 041328000 8L 7/16”--20 018181005 8L 016861000 8L R 1/4” 018366008
18 L M 18x1,5 041354003 12 L 3/4”--20 042095002 12 L 019562005 15 L M 18x1,5 016467006
18 L M 22x1,5 043602009 12 L 7/16”--20 042607005 15 L 018106006
22 L M 26x1,5 018126002 12 L 9/16”--18 041955004 15 L 0,1 bar 043559000
25 S M 22x1,5 018103009 15 L 9/16”--18 042666004 15 L 4 bar 061211003
25 S M 26x1,5 042697002 18 L 7/8”--14 013490005 18 L 042083001
25 S M 27x2 201562004 18 L 3/4”--16 042485007 18 L 0,1 bar 043560002
25 S M 33x2 042306005 25 S 1 1/16”--12 016857001 18 L 4 bar 041752003
30 S M 42x2 041971004 25 S 1 5/16”--12 042522009 25 S 042390006
25 S 7/8”--14 018154003 25 S 3 bar 042840008
27
30
RAD GEW. Nr. / No.
6L R 1/8” 042138008 RAD GEW. Nr. / No.
6L R 1/4” 018119006
28.1 DIN 3770 12 L M 16x1,5 041384002
6 LL R 1/8” 018118007 NB 70 15 L M 18x1,5 041765003
8L R 1/8” 016851007 RAD Nr. / No. 15 L R 1/2” 041198007
8L R 1/4” 016836006 8L 7/16”--20 8,91x1,78 060513003
8 LL R 1/8” 016455005 12 L 3/4”--20 12x2 041099009
10 L R 1/4” 016456004 12 L 7/16”--20 8,91x1,78 060513003
10 L
12 L
R 3/8”
R 3/8”
016862009
041860005
12 L
15 L
9/16”--18
9/16”--18
12x2
12x2
041099009
041099009
31
12 L R 3/8”--WD 016821008 18 L 7/8”--14 19,2x2,46 060532000
12 L R 1/4” 018153004 18 L 3/4”--16 12x2 041099009 RAD GEW. Nr. / No.
12 L R 1/2” 016852006 25 S 7/8”--14 19,2x2,46 060532000 6L M 10x1 208462000
15 L R 3/8” 018165005 8L R 1/4” 015516000
15 L R 1/2” 016451009 12 L R 3/8” 042005005
18 L R 1/2” 016453007 12 S R 3/8” 019640008
25 S R 3/4” 042931001 18 L R 1/2” 041368002
25 S R 1” 016454006 18 L R 1/2” 3 bar 201090000
30 S R 1 1/4” 041865000
24.9
22412--9311
24.9
22412--9311
1
5.3
5.3
5.3
TD: Gonzalez
Sicherung
Security system
Système d’assurance 1 2
28.2
E05830--1206
Sistema seguridad
1 405197 3 Schalterbox Not--Aus Switch box, e--stop Boitier arret urgence Caja c/ pulsador emergencia 5.3 16153
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
Sicherung
Security system
Système d’assurance 2 2
28.2
E05830--1206
Sistema seguridad
7
1 4
6
TD: Gonzalez
Komponenten der Maschine

Machine’s components
Composants de la machine 1 2
28.2
E05834--1206
Componentes de la máquina
1 E559517 1 Fahrerkabine Swt. Driver’s cab welded Soudé Cab Cabina soldada
2 E561435 1 Trommel Swt. 4 m3 Drum welded Tambour soudé Cuba soldada
3 E558816 1 Türes, Haube Door, hood Portes, capot Puertas, capot 9.0 E05826
4 E472051 1 Batterietrenschalter Battery switch Coupe de batterie Interruptor batería
5 E559370 2 Batterie 12V 100Ah / 900A Battery Batterie Batería
6 E558963 1 Neigungsgeber +--60º IS2D CAN Inclination Sensor Inclinomètre Inclinómetro
7 E522090 1 Feuerlöscher 6Kg ABC Fire exting Tuyau extinct. Extintor de polvo
8 E559753 1 Arbeitshinterbïhne f. Saubern Kpl. Rear cleaning platform cpl. Nettoyage du pont arrière Plataforma trasera para limpieza cpta.
-- ENDE -- -- END -- -- FIN -- -- FIN --
Komponenten der Maschine

Machine’s components
Composants de la machine 2 2
28.2
E05834--1206
Componentes de la máquina
SEBU8139-02
January 2011
Operation and
Maintenance
Manual
C6.6 Generator Set
SDA1-Up (Generator Set)
N6D1-Up (Generator Set)
SAFETY.CAT.COM
i03991620
Important Safety Information

Most accidents that involve product operation, maintenance and repair are caused by failure to observe
basic safety rules or precautions. An accident can often be avoided by recognizing potentially hazardous
situations before an accident occurs. A person must be alert to potential hazards. This person should also
have the necessary training, skills and tools to perform these functions properly.
Improper operation, lubrication, maintenance or repair of this product can be dangerous and
could result in injury or death.
Do not operate or perform any lubrication, maintenance or repair on this product, until you have
read and understood the operation, lubrication, maintenance and repair information.
Safety precautions and warnings are provided in this manual and on the product. If these hazard warnings
are not heeded, bodily injury or death could occur to you or to other persons.
The hazards are identified by the “Safety Alert Symbol” and followed by a “Signal Word” such as
“DANGER”, “WARNING” or “CAUTION”. The Safety Alert “WARNING” label is shown below.
The meaning of this safety alert symbol is as follows:

Attention! Become Alert! Your Safety is Involved.
The message that appears under the warning explains the hazard and can be either written or pictorially
presented.
A non-exhaustive list of operations that may cause product damage are identified by “NOTICE” labels
on the product and in this publication.
Caterpillar cannot anticipate every possible circumstance that might involve a potential hazard.
The warnings in this publication and on the product are, therefore, not all inclusive. You must
not use this product in any manner different from that considered by this manual without first
satisfying yourself that you have considered all safety rules and precautions applicable to the
operation of the product in the location of use, including site-specific rules and precautions
applicable to the worksite. If a tool, procedure, work method or operating technique that is not
specifically recommended by Caterpillar is used, you must satisfy yourself that it is safe for you
and for others. You should also ensure that the product will not be damaged or become unsafe by
the operation, lubrication, maintenance or repair procedures that you intend to use.
The information, specifications, and illustrations in this publication are on the basis of information that
was available at the time that the publication was written. The specifications, torques, pressures,
measurements, adjustments, illustrations, and other items can change at any time. These changes can
affect the service that is given to the product. Obtain the complete and most current information before you
start any job. Cat dealers have the most current information available.
When replacement parts are required for this

product Caterpillar recommends using Cat re-
placement parts or parts with equivalent speci-
fications including, but not limited to, physical
dimensions, type, strength and material.
Failure to heed this warning can lead to prema-

ture failures, product damage, personal injury or
death.
In the United States, the maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and
systems may be performed by any repair establishment or individual of the owner's choosing.
4 SEBU8139-02
Foreword
Foreword Use fuel consumption or service hours to determine

intervals. Calendar intervals shown (daily, annually,
etc.) may be used instead of service meter intervals
Literature Information if they provide more convenient schedules and
approximate the indicated service meter reading.
This manual contains safety, operation instructions,
lubrication and maintenance information. This Recommended service should be performed at the
manual should be stored in or near the engine area appropriate intervals as indicated in the Maintenance
in a literature holder or literature storage area. Read, Interval Schedule. The actual operating environment
study and keep it with the literature and engine of the engine also governs the Maintenance Interval
information. Schedule. Therefore, under extremely severe,
dusty, wet or freezing cold operating conditions,
English is the primary language for all Caterpillar more frequent lubrication and maintenance than is
publications. The English used facilitates translation specified in the Maintenance Interval Schedule may
and consistency in electronic media delivery. be necessary.
Some photographs or illustrations in this manual The maintenance schedule items are organized for
show details or attachments that may be different a preventive maintenance management program. If
from your engine. Guards and covers may have the preventive maintenance program is followed, a
been removed for illustrative purposes. Continuing periodic tune-up is not required. The implementation
improvement and advancement of product design of a preventive maintenance management program
may have caused changes to your engine which are should minimize operating costs through cost
not included in this manual. Whenever a question avoidances resulting from reductions in unscheduled
arises regarding your engine, or this manual, please downtime and failures.
consult with your Caterpillar dealer for the latest
available information.
Maintenance Intervals
Safety Perform maintenance on items at multiples of the
original requirement. Each level and/or individual
This safety section lists basic safety precautions. items in each level should be shifted ahead or back
In addition, this section identifies hazardous, depending upon your specific maintenance practices,
warning situations. Read and understand the basic operation and application. We recommend that
precautions listed in the safety section before the maintenance schedules be reproduced and
operating or performing lubrication, maintenance and displayed near the engine as a convenient reminder.
repair on this product. We also recommend that a maintenance record be
maintained as part of the engine's permanent record.
Operation
See the section in the Operation and Maintenance
Operating techniques outlined in this manual are Manual, “Maintenance Records” for information
basic. They assist with developing the skills and regarding documents that are generally accepted
techniques required to operate the engine more as proof of maintenance or repair. Your authorized
efficiently and economically. Skill and techniques Caterpillar dealer can assist you in adjusting your
develop as the operator gains knowledge of the maintenance schedule to meet the needs of your
engine and its capabilities. operating environment.
The operation section is a reference for operators. Overhaul

Photographs and illustrations guide the operator
through procedures of inspecting, starting, operating Major engine overhaul details are not covered in the
and stopping the engine. This section also includes a Operation and Maintenance Manual except for the
discussion of electronic diagnostic information. interval and the maintenance items in that interval.
Major repairs are best left to trained personnel or
Maintenance an authorized Caterpillar dealer. Your Caterpillar
dealer offers a variety of options regarding overhaul
The maintenance section is a guide to engine care. programs. If you experience a major engine failure,
The illustrated, step-by-step instructions are grouped there are also numerous after failure overhaul options
by fuel consumption, service hours and/or calendar available from your Caterpillar dealer. Consult with
time maintenance intervals. Items in the maintenance your dealer for information regarding these options.
schedule are referenced to detailed instructions that
follow.
SEBU8139-02 5
Foreword
California Proposition 65 Warning

Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents
are known to the State of California to cause cancer,
birth defects, and other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
6 SEBU8139-02
Safety Section
Safety Messages
Safety Section
i02439277
Safety Messages
SMCS Code: 1000; 7405
There may be several specific safety messages

on your generator set. The exact location and a
description of the safety messages are reviewed in
this section. Please become familiar with all safety
messages.
Ensure that all of the safety messages are legible.

Clean the safety messages or replace the safety
messages if the words cannot be read or if the
illustrations are not visible. Use a cloth, water,
and soap to clean the safety messages. Do not
use solvents, gasoline, or other harsh chemicals.
Solvents, gasoline, or harsh chemicals could loosen
the adhesive that secures the safety messages. The
safety messages that are loosened could drop off
of the engine.
Replace any safety message that is damaged or

missing. If a safety message is attached to a part
of the engine that is replaced, install a new safety
message on the replacement part. Your Caterpillar
dealer can provide new safety messages.
Do not operate or work on this engine unless you

have read and understand the instructions and
warnings in the Operation and Maintenance Man-
ual. Failure to follow the instructions or heed the
warnings could result in injury or death. Contact
any Caterpillar dealer for replacement manuals.
Proper care is your responsibility.
Illustrations 1 through 4 show one type of enclosed

generator set.
SEBU8139-02 7
Safety Section
Safety Messages
g01218859
Illustration 1
g01219063
Illustration 2
8 SEBU8139-02
Safety Section
Safety Messages
g01232868
Illustration 3
View of the inside of the enclosure
g01222980
Illustration 4
Illustrations 5 through 7 show another type of

enclosed generator set.
SEBU8139-02 9
Safety Section
Safety Messages
g01221813
Illustration 5
10 SEBU8139-02
Safety Section
Safety Messages
g01221851
Illustration 6
SEBU8139-02 11
Safety Section
Safety Messages
g01222036
Illustration 7
g01232868
Illustration 8
View of the inside of the enclosure
Illustrations 9 and 10 show an open generator set.

12 SEBU8139-02
Safety Section
Safety Messages
g01222927
Illustration 9
SEBU8139-02 13
Safety Section
Safety Messages
g01222960
Illustration 10
Illustration 11 shows the control panel and the

distribution panel.
14 SEBU8139-02
Safety Section
Safety Messages
g01223013
Illustration 11
SEBU8139-02 15
Safety Section
Safety Messages
Hot Fluid Under Pressure (1) Hot Surface (2)

This safety message is located on the top of the This safety message is located on top of the
enclosure by the radiator cap access cover on enclosure, the sides of the enclosure and the sides of
enclosed generator sets. This safety message is the generator on enclosed generator sets. This safety
located toward the top of the radiator by the filler neck message is located on the sides of the radiator and
on open generator sets. the sides of the generator on open generator sets.
g00930639 g01085603
Pressurized system! Hot coolant can cause seri- Hot surface! Do not touch!
ous burns, injury or death. To open the cooling
system filler cap, stop the engine and wait until
the cooling system components are cool. Loosen
the cooling system pressure cap slowly in order to
relieve the pressure. Read and understand the Op-
eration and Maintenance Manual before perform-
ing any cooling system maintenance.
16 SEBU8139-02
Safety Section
Safety Messages
Electrocution (3) Automatic Starting (4)

This safety message is located on the sides of the This safety message is located on the sides of the
enclosure on enclosed generator sets. This safety enclosure on enclosed generator sets. This safety
message is located on the sides of the terminal box message is located on the sides of the terminal box
on open generator sets. This safety message is also on open generator sets. This safety message is also
located on the enclosure for the control panel and located on the enclosure for the control panel and
the distribution panel on open generator sets and the distribution panel on open generator sets and
enclosed generator sets. enclosed generator sets.
g00928349 g01154070
DANGER: Shock/Electrocution Hazard-Do not op- When the engine is in the AUTOMATIC mode, the
erate this equipment or work on this equipment engine can start at any moment. To avoid personal
unless you have read and understand the instruc- injury, always remain clear of the the engine when
tions and warnings in the Operation and Mainte- the engine is in the AUTOMATIC mode.
nance Manual. Failure to follow the instructions or
heed the warnings will result in serious injury or
death.
Do not connect generator to a utility electrical dis-

tribution system unless it is isolated from the sys-
tem. Electrical feedback into the distribution sys-
tem can occur and could cause personal injury or
death.
Open and secure main distribution system switch,

or if the connection is permanent, install a double
throw transfer switch to prevent electrical feed-
back. Some generators are specifically approved
by a utility to run in parallel with the distribution
system and isolation may not be required. Always
check with your utility as to the applicable circum-
stances.
SEBU8139-02 17
Safety Section
Safety Messages
Lifting the Generator Set (5) Universal Warning (6)

This safety message is located on the sides of the This safety message is located on the door for access
enclosure toward the bottom of the enclosure on to the control panel on enclosed generator sets. This
enclosed generator sets. This safety message is safety message is located on the enclosure for the
located on the sides of the base on open generator control panel and the distribution panel on open
sets. generator sets and enclosed generator sets.
g00934493
Do not operate or work on this equipment unless

you have read and understand the instructions
g00928085 and warnings in the Operation and Maintenance
Manuals. Failure to follow the instructions or
heed the warnings could result in serious injury
or death.
Crushing Hazard! Improper lifting could cause se-
rious injury or death. Follow the lifting instruc-
tions in the Operation and Maintenance Manual for
safe lifting procedures.
18 SEBU8139-02
Safety Section
Additional Messages
Electrical Shock (7)

The safety message for electrical shock is located
on the enclosure for the control panel and the
distribution panel on open generator sets and
enclosed generator sets.
g01120247
WARNING! Shock/Electrocution Hazard! Read and

understand the instructions and warnings in the
Operation and Maintenance Manual. Failure to fol-
low the instructions or heed the warnings could
cause serious injury or death.
i02482102
Additional Messages
SMCS Code: 1000; 7405
There are several specific messages on these

machines. The exact location of the messages and
the description of the messages are reviewed in
this section. Please become familiarized with all
messages.
Make sure that all of the messages are legible.

Clean the messages or replace the messages if the
words or images are unreadable. When you clean
the messages, use a cloth, water and soap. Do not
use solvent, gasoline, or other harsh chemicals to
clean the messages. Solvents, gasoline, or harsh
chemicals could loosen the adhesive that secures the
messages. Loose adhesive will allow the messages
to fall.
Replace any message that is damaged, or missing.

If a message is attached to a part that is replaced,
install a message on the replacement part. Any
Caterpillar dealer can provide new messages.
SEBU8139-02 19
Safety Section
Additional Messages
g01233415
Illustration 12
This illustration shows one type of enclosed generator set.
20 SEBU8139-02
Safety Section
Additional Messages
g01233280
Illustration 13
This illustration shows another type of enclosed generator set.
SEBU8139-02 21
Safety Section
Additional Messages
g01233028
Illustration 14
This illustration shows an open generator set.
22 SEBU8139-02
Safety Section
Additional Messages
g01239864
Illustration 15
Typical example of a fuel tank
Lifting point (1)
g01034418
Illustration 16
Lift the package from this point. Refer to the following

topic:
• Operation and Maintenance Manual, “Product

Lifting”
Rating for lifting equipment (2)
This message is located on the side of the enclosure

near the bottom of the enclosure.
g01233472
Illustration 17
SEBU8139-02 23
Safety Section
Additional Messages
The lifting equipment that is used for lifting this type The lifting equipment that is used for lifting this type
of generator set must be rated for a total weight of of generator set must be rated for a total weight of
3000 kg (6,600 lb). 3000 kg (6,600 lb).
Rating for lifting equipment (3) Fuel tank vent (5)
This message is located on the side of the enclosure This message is located on the fuel tank by the vent.
near the bottom of the enclosure.
g01239683
Illustration 20
g01233040
Illustration 18
This generator tank has been pressure tested at
The lifting equipment that is used for lifting this type 20.6 kPa (3 psi) to 34.5 kPa (5 psi) for weld integrity.
of generator set must be rated for a total weight of However, it has not been designed as a pressure
4000 kg (8,800 lb). vessel and must be vented from supplied openings.
This tank was designed, manufactured and intended
Rating for lifting equipment (4) for diesel fuel only. This tank was intended for
stationary use only. Maximum load capacity 1180 kg
This message is located on the side of open (2601 lb) Fuel tank capacity 557 L (147 US gal).
generator sets on the base. When filling the via a pump, the overflow fitting of
this atmospheric day tank must be plumbed in a
continuous downward path toward the main fuel tank
without downsizing to prevent a potential fuel spillage.
To prevent fuel and compartment contamination, it is
recommended to use a 100 mesh fuel strainer for
incoming fuel.
g01233043
Illustration 19
24 SEBU8139-02
Safety Section
Additional Messages

20.6 kPa (3 psi) to 34.5 kPa (5 psi) for weld integrity.
However, it has not been designed as a pressure
vessel and must be vented from supplied openings.
for diesel fuel only. This tank was intended for
(4960 lb). Fuel tank capacity 1485 L (392 US gal).
When filling the via a pump, the overflow fitting of
continuous downward path toward the main fuel tank
without downsizing to prevent a potential fuel spillage.
recommended to use a 100 mesh fuel strainer for
incoming fuel.
Size of fuel tank vent (6)
This message is located on the fuel tank by the vent.
g01239658
Illustration 21

20.6 kPa (3 psi) to 34.5 kPa (5 psi) for weld integrity.
However, it has not been designed as a pressure
vessel and must be vented from supplied openings.
for diesel fuel only. This tank was intended for
(4960 lb). Fuel tank capacity 757 L (200 US gal).
When filling the via a pump, the overflow fitting of
continuous downward path toward the main fuel tank g01239936
without downsizing to prevent a potential fuel spillage. Illustration 23
recommended to use a 100 mesh fuel strainer for This tank requires emergency relief not less than
incoming fuel. 37900 cubic feet per hour.
g01239912
Illustration 24
This tank requires emergency relief not less than

54485 cubic feet per hour.
g01239678
Illustration 22
SEBU8139-02 25
Safety Section
General Hazard Information
g01239873 g01239958
Illustration 25 Illustration 28
This tank requires emergency relief not less than Maximum lift lug load 1025 kg (2260 lb)
80525 cubic feet per hour.
i02344741
Maximum Lift Lug Load (7)
This message is located on the fuel tank by the lifting

points. SMCS Code: 1000; 7405
g01239953
g00104545
Maximum lift lug load 623 kg (1373 lb) Attach a “Do Not Operate” warning tag or a similar
warning tag to the start switch or to the controls
before the engine is serviced or before the engine is
repaired. These warning tags (Special Instruction,
SEHS7332) are available from your Caterpillar
dealer. Attach the warning tags to the engine and to
each operator control station. When it is appropriate,
disconnect the starting controls.
Do not allow unauthorized personnel on the engine,

or around the engine when the engine is being
serviced.
Engine exhaust contains products of combustion

which may be harmful to your health. Always start the
g01239955 engine and operate the engine in a well ventilated
Illustration 27
area. If the engine is in an enclosed area, vent the
engine exhaust to the outside.
Maximum lift lug load 1000 kg (2205 lb)
26 SEBU8139-02
Safety Section
Cautiously remove the following parts. To help • Disconnect the batteries when maintenance
prevent spraying or splashing of pressurized fluids, is performed or when the electrical system is
hold a rag over the part that is being removed. serviced. Disconnect the battery ground leads.
Tape the leads in order to help prevent sparks.
• Filler caps
• Do not attempt any repairs that are not understood.
• Grease fittings Use the proper tools. Replace any equipment that
is damaged or repair the equipment.
• Pressure taps
Pressurized Air and Water
• Breathers
Pressurized air and/or water can cause debris
• Drain plugs and/or hot water to be blown out. This could result in
personal injury.
Use caution when cover plates are removed.
Gradually loosen, but do not remove the last two When pressurized air and/or pressurized water is
bolts or nuts that are located at opposite ends of
used for cleaning, wear protective clothing, protective
the cover plate or the device. Before removing the
shoes, and eye protection. Eye protection includes
last two bolts or nuts, pry the cover loose in order to goggles or a protective face shield.
relieve any spring pressure or other pressure.
The maximum air pressure for cleaning purposes
must be below 205 kPa (30 psi). The maximum
water pressure for cleaning purposes must be below
275 kPa (40 psi).
Fluid Penetration
Pressure can be trapped in the hydraulic circuit long
after the engine has been stopped. The pressure can
cause hydraulic fluid or items such as pipe plugs to
escape rapidly if the pressure is not relieved correctly.
Do not remove any hydraulic components or parts

until pressure has been relieved or personal injury
g00702020
Illustration 30 may occur. Do not disassemble any hydraulic
components or parts until pressure has been relieved
• Wear a hard hat, protective glasses, and other or personal injury may occur. Refer to the OEM
protective equipment, as required. information for any procedures that are required to
relieve the hydraulic pressure.
• When work is performed around an engine that is
operating, wear protective devices for ears in order
to help prevent damage to hearing.
• Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry that can snag

on controls or on other parts of the engine.
• Ensure that all protective guards and all covers are

secured in place on the engine.
• Never put maintenance fluids into glass containers.

Glass containers can break.
• Use all cleaning solutions with care.

g00687600
• Report all necessary repairs. Illustration 31
Unless other instructions are provided, perform

the maintenance under the following conditions:
• The engine is stopped. Ensure that the engine

cannot be started.
SEBU8139-02 27
Safety Section
Always use a board or cardboard when you check Use caution. Avoid inhaling dust that might be
for a leak. Leaking fluid that is under pressure can generated when you handle components that contain
penetrate body tissue. Fluid penetration can cause asbestos fibers. Inhaling this dust can be hazardous
serious injury and possible death. A pin hole leak can to your health. The components that may contain
cause severe injury. If fluid is injected into your skin, asbestos fibers are brake pads, brake bands, lining
you must get treatment immediately. Seek treatment material, clutch plates, and some gaskets. The
from a doctor that is familiar with this type of injury. asbestos that is used in these components is usually
bound in a resin or sealed in some way. Normal
handling is not hazardous unless airborne dust that
Containing Fluid Spillage contains asbestos is generated.
Care must be taken in order to ensure that fluids
If dust that may contain asbestos is present, there
are contained during performance of inspection,
maintenance, testing, adjusting and repair of the are several guidelines that should be followed:
engine. Prepare to collect the fluid with suitable
containers before opening any compartment or • Never use compressed air for cleaning.
disassembling any component that contains fluids.
• Avoid brushing materials that contain asbestos.
Refer to Special Publication, NENG2500, “Dealer
Service Tool Catalog” for the following items: • Avoid grinding materials that contain asbestos.
• Tools that are suitable for collecting fluids and • Use a wet method in order to clean up asbestos
equipment that is suitable for collecting fluids materials.
• Tools that are suitable for containing fluids and • A vacuum cleaner that is equipped with a high
equipment that is suitable for containing fluids efficiency particulate air filter (HEPA) can also be
used.
Obey all local regulations for the disposal of liquids.
• Use exhaust ventilation on permanent machining
jobs.
Asbestos Information
• Wear an approved respirator if there is no other
way to control the dust.
• Comply with applicable rules and regulations

for the work place. In the United States, use
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA) requirements. These OSHA requirements
can be found in “29 CFR 1910.1001”.
• Obey environmental regulations for the disposal

of asbestos.
• Stay away from areas that might have asbestos

particles in the air.
g00702022
Illustration 32
Caterpillar equipment and replacement parts that are

shipped from Caterpillar are asbestos free. Caterpillar
recommends the use of only genuine Caterpillar
replacement parts. Use the following guidelines
when you handle any replacement parts that contain
asbestos or when you handle asbestos debris.
28 SEBU8139-02
Safety Section
Burn Prevention
Dispose of Waste Properly Any contact with hot coolant or with steam can cause
severe burns. Allow cooling system components to
cool before the cooling system is drained.
Check the coolant level after the engine has stopped

and the engine has been allowed to cool.
Ensure that the filler cap is cool before removing the

filler cap. The filler cap must be cool enough to touch
with a bare hand. Remove the filler cap slowly in
order to relieve pressure.
Cooling system conditioner contains alkali. Alkali can

cause personal injury. Do not allow alkali to contact
the skin, the eyes, or the mouth.
g00706404
Illustration 33
Oils
Improperly disposing of waste can threaten the Hot oil and hot lubricating components can cause
environment. Potentially harmful fluids should be personal injury. Do not allow hot oil to contact the
disposed of according to local regulations. skin. Also, do not allow hot components to contact
the skin.
Always use leakproof containers when you drain
fluids. Do not pour waste onto the ground, down a
drain, or into any source of water. Batteries
Electrolyte is an acid. Electrolyte can cause personal
i02344742 injury. Do not allow electrolyte to contact the skin or
Burn Prevention the eyes. Always wear protective glasses for servicing
batteries. Wash hands after touching the batteries
and connectors. Use of gloves is recommended.
SMCS Code: 1000; 7405
Do not touch any part of an operating engine. i02328452

Allow the engine to cool before any maintenance is
performed on the engine. Fire Prevention and Explosion
Prevention
SMCS Code: 1000; 7405
Contact with high pressure fuel may cause fluid
penetration and burn hazards. High pressure fu-
el spray may cause a fire hazard. Failure to fol-
low these inspection, maintenance and service in-
structions may cause personal injury or death.
After the engine has stopped, you must wait for 60

seconds in order to allow the fuel pressure to be
purged from the high pressure fuel lines before any
service or repair is performed on the engine fuel lines.
Allow the pressure to be purged in the air system, in

the hydraulic system, in the lubrication system, or in
the cooling system before any lines, fittings or related
items are disconnected. Illustration 34
g00704000
Coolant All fuels, most lubricants, and some coolant mixtures

are flammable.
When the engine is at operating temperature, the
engine coolant is hot. The coolant is also under
pressure. The radiator and all lines to the heaters or
to the engine contain hot coolant.
SEBU8139-02 29
Safety Section
Fire Prevention and Explosion Prevention
Flammable fluids that are leaking or spilled onto hot

surfaces or onto electrical components can cause
a fire. Fire may cause personal injury and property
damage.
A flash fire may result if the covers for the engine
crankcase are removed within fifteen minutes after
an emergency shutdown.
Determine whether the engine will be operated in an After the engine has stopped, you must wait for 60
environment that allows combustible gases to be seconds in order to allow the fuel pressure to be
drawn into the air inlet system. These gases could purged from the high pressure fuel lines before any
cause the engine to overspeed. Personal injury, service or repair is performed on the engine fuel lines.
property damage, or engine damage could result.
Inspect all lines and hoses for wear or for
If the application involves the presence of combustible deterioration. The hoses must be properly routed.
gases, consult your Caterpillar dealer for additional The lines and hoses must have adequate support
information about suitable protection devices. and secure clamps. Tighten all connections to the
recommended torque. Leaks can cause fires.
Remove all flammable materials such as fuel, oil, and
debris from the engine. Do not allow any flammable Oil filters and fuel filters must be properly installed.
materials to accumulate on the engine. The filter housings must be tightened to the proper
torque.
Store fuels and lubricants in properly marked
containers away from unauthorized persons. Store
oily rags and any flammable materials in protective
containers. Do not smoke in areas that are used for
storing flammable materials.
Do not expose the engine to any flame.
Exhaust shields (if equipped) protect hot exhaust

components from oil or fuel spray in case of a line,
a tube, or a seal failure. Exhaust shields must be
installed correctly.
Do not weld on lines or tanks that contain flammable

fluids. Do not flame cut lines or tanks that contain
flammable fluid. Clean any such lines or tanks
thoroughly with a nonflammable solvent prior to
welding or flame cutting.
Wiring must be kept in good condition. All electrical

wires must be properly routed and securely attached.
Check all electrical wires daily. Repair any wires g00704059
Illustration 35
that are loose or frayed before you operate the
engine. Clean all electrical connections and tighten
Use caution when you are refueling an engine. Do
all electrical connections.
not smoke while you are refueling an engine. Do not
refuel an engine near open flames or sparks. Always
Eliminate all wiring that is unattached or unnecessary.
stop the engine before refueling.
Do not use any wires or cables that are smaller than
the recommended gauge. Do not bypass any fuses
and/or circuit breakers.
Arcing or sparking could cause a fire. Secure

connections, recommended wiring, and properly
maintained battery cables will help to prevent arcing
or sparking.
30 SEBU8139-02
Safety Section
Fire Prevention and Explosion Prevention
Do not store ether cylinders in living areas or in the

engine compartment. Do not store ether cylinders
in direct sunlight or in temperatures above 49 °C
(120 °F). Keep ether cylinders away from open
flames or sparks.
Dispose of used ether cylinders properly. Do not

puncture an ether cylinder. Keep ether cylinders
away from unauthorized personnel.
Do not spray ether into an engine if the engine is

equipped with a thermal starting aid for cold weather
starting.
Lines, Tubes and Hoses

Do not bend high pressure lines. Do not strike high
pressure lines. Do not install any lines that are bent
or damaged.
g00704135
Repair any lines that are loose or damaged. Leaks
Illustration 36 can cause fires. Consult your Caterpillar dealer for
repair or for replacement parts.
Gases from a battery can explode. Keep any open
flames or sparks away from the top of a battery. Do Check lines, tubes and hoses carefully. Do not use
not smoke in battery charging areas. your bare hand to check for leaks. Use a board or
cardboard to check for leaks. Tighten all connections
Never check the battery charge by placing a metal to the recommended torque.
object across the terminal posts. Use a voltmeter or
a hydrometer. Replace the parts if any of the following conditions
are present:
Improper jumper cable connections can cause
an explosion that can result in injury. Refer to • High pressure fuel line or lines are removed.
the Operation Section of this manual for specific
instructions. • End fittings are damaged or leaking.
Do not charge a frozen battery. This may cause an • Outer coverings are chafed or cut.
explosion.
• Wires are exposed.
The batteries must be kept clean. The covers
(if equipped) must be kept on the cells. Use the • Outer coverings are ballooning.
recommended cables, connections, and battery box
covers when the engine is operated. • Flexible part of the hoses are kinked.
Fire Extinguisher • Outer covers have embedded armoring.
Make sure that a fire extinguisher is available. Be • End fittings are displaced.
familiar with the operation of the fire extinguisher.
Inspect the fire extinguisher and service the fire Make sure that all clamps, guards, and heat shields
extinguisher regularly. Obey the recommendations are installed correctly. During engine operation, this
on the instruction plate. will help to prevent vibration, rubbing against other
parts, and excessive heat.
Ether
Ether is flammable and poisonous.
Use ether in well ventilated areas. Do not smoke

while you are replacing an ether cylinder or while you
are using an ether spray.
SEBU8139-02 31
Safety Section
Crushing Prevention and Cutting Prevention
i01359666 Before starting the engine, ensure that no one is on,

underneath, or close to the engine. Ensure that the
Crushing Prevention and area is free of personnel.
Cutting Prevention If equipped, ensure that the lighting system for the
SMCS Code: 1000; 7405 engine is suitable for the conditions. Ensure that all
lights work properly, if equipped.
Support the component properly when work beneath
the component is performed. All protective guards and all protective covers must
be installed if the engine must be started in order
Unless other maintenance instructions are provided, to perform service procedures. To help prevent an
never attempt adjustments while the engine is accident that is caused by parts in rotation, work
running. around the parts carefully.
Stay clear of all rotating parts and of all moving Do not bypass the automatic shutoff circuits. Do not
parts. Leave the guards in place until maintenance disable the automatic shutoff circuits. The circuits are
is performed. After the maintenance is performed, provided in order to help prevent personal injury. The
reinstall the guards. circuits are also provided in order to help prevent
engine damage.
Keep objects away from moving fan blades. The fan
blades will throw objects or cut objects. See the Service Manual for repairs and for
adjustments.
When objects are struck, wear protective glasses in
order to avoid injury to the eyes. i02344744
Chips or other debris may fly off objects when objects Engine Starting
are struck. Before objects are struck, ensure that no
one will be injured by flying debris. SMCS Code: 1000
i03560601
Before Starting Engine Do not use aerosol types of starting aids such as
ether. Such use could result in an explosion and
SMCS Code: 1000 personal injury.
NOTICE
If a warning tag is attached to the engine start switch
For initial start-up of a new or rebuilt engine, and for or to the controls DO NOT start the engine or move
start-up of an engine that has been serviced, make
the controls. Consult with the person that attached
provision to shut the engine off should an overspeed
the warning tag before the engine is started.
occur. This may be accomplished by shutting off the
air and/or fuel supply to the engine.
All protective guards and all protective covers must
be installed if the engine must be started in order
to perform service procedures. To help prevent an
accident that is caused by parts in rotation, work
around the parts carefully.
Engine exhaust contains products of combustion
which may be harmful to your health. Always start Start the engine from the operator's compartment or
and operate the engine in a well ventilated area from the engine start switch.
and, if in an enclosed area, vent the exhaust to the
outside. Always start the engine according to the procedure
that is described in the Operation and Maintenance
Inspect the engine for potential hazards. Manual, “Engine Starting” topic in the Operation
Section. Knowing the correct procedure will help to
Do not start the engine or move any of the controls prevent major damage to the engine components.
if there is a “DO NOT OPERATE” warning tag or Knowing the procedure will also help to prevent
similar warning tag attached to the start switch or to personal injury.
the controls.
32 SEBU8139-02
Safety Section
Engine Stopping
To ensure that the jacket water heater (if equipped) To help prevent sparks from igniting combustible
and/or the lube oil heater (if equipped) is working gases that are produced by some batteries, the
correctly, check the water temperature gauge negative “−” cable should be connected last from the
and/or the oil temperature gauge during the heater external power source to the negative “−” terminal
operation. of the starting motor. If the starting motor is not
equipped with a negative “−” terminal, connect the
Engine exhaust contains products of combustion cable to the engine block.
which can be harmful to your health. Always start the
engine and operate the engine in a well ventilated Check the electrical wires daily for wires that
area. If the engine is started in an enclosed area, are loose or frayed. Tighten all loose electrical
vent the engine exhaust to the outside. connections before the engine is started. Repair all
frayed electrical wires before the engine is started.
Note: The engine is equipped with a device for cold See the Operation and Maintenance Manual for
starting. If the engine will be operated in very cold specific starting instructions.
conditions, then an extra cold starting aid may be
required. Normally, the engine will be equipped with Grounding Practices
the correct type of starting aid for your region of
operation.
These engines are equipped with a glow plug starting

aid in each individual cylinder that heats the intake
air in order to improve starting.
i02328530
Engine Stopping
SMCS Code: 1000
To avoid overheating of the engine and accelerated

wear of the engine components, stop the engine
according to this Operation and Maintenance Manual,
“Engine Stopping” topic (Operation Section).
Use the Emergency Stop Button (if equipped)

ONLY in an emergency situation. DO NOT use the
Emergency Stop Button for normal engine stopping.
After an emergency stop, DO NOT start the engine g01162916
until the problem that caused the emergency stop Illustration 37
has been corrected. Typical example
(1) Starting motor to engine block
On the initial start-up of a new engine or an engine (2) Ground to starting motor
that has been serviced, make provisions to stop the (3) Ground to battery
engine if an overspeed condition occurs.
To stop an electronic controlled engine, cut the power

to the engine and/or the air supply to the engine.
i02234878
Electrical System
SMCS Code: 1000; 1400
Never disconnect any charging unit circuit or battery

circuit cable from the battery when the charging unit
is operating. A spark can cause the combustible
gases that are produced by some batteries to ignite.
SEBU8139-02 33
Safety Section
Generator Isolating for Maintenance
i01489970
Generator Isolating for

Maintenance
SMCS Code: 4450
When you service an electric power generation set

or when you repair an electric power generation set,
follow the procedure below:
1. Stop the engine.
g01162918
Illustration 38
Typical example
(4) Ground to engine
(5) Ground to battery
Correct grounding for the engine electrical system g00104545

is necessary for optimum engine performance Illustration 39
and reliability. Incorrect grounding will result in
uncontrolled electrical circuit paths and in unreliable 2. Attach a “DO NOT OPERATE” or similar warning
electrical circuit paths. tag to the engine prime mover starting circuit.
Disconnect the engine starting circuit.
Uncontrolled electrical circuit paths can result in
damage to the crankshaft bearing journal surfaces 3. Disconnect the generator from the distribution
and to aluminum components. system.
Engines that are installed without engine-to-frame 4. Lock out the circuit breaker. Attach a “DO NOT
ground straps can be damaged by electrical OPERATE” or similar warning tag to the circuit
discharge. breaker. Refer to the electrical diagram. Verify that
all points of possible reverse power flow have
To ensure that the engine and the engine electrical been locked out.
systems function correctly, an engine-to-frame
ground strap with a direct path to the battery must be 5. For the following circuitry, remove the transformer's
used. This path may be provided by way of a direct fuses:
engine ground to the frame.
• power
The connections for the grounds should be tight and
free of corrosion. The engine alternator must be • sensing
grounded to the negative “-” battery terminal with
a wire that is adequate to handle the full charging • control
current of the alternator.
6. Attach a “DO NOT OPERATE” or similar warning
The power supply connections and the ground tag to the generator excitation controls.
connections for the engine electronics should always
be from the isolator to the battery. 7. Remove the cover of the generator's terminal box.
8. Use an audio/visual proximity tester in order to

verify that the generator is de-energized. This
tester must be insulated for the proper voltage
rating. Follow all guidelines in order to verify that
the tester is operational.
34 SEBU8139-02
Safety Section
Generator Isolating for Maintenance
9. Determine that the generator is in a de-energized

condition. Add ground straps to the conductors
or terminals. During the entire work period, these
ground straps must remain connected to the
conductors and to the terminals.
SEBU8139-02 85
Maintenance Section
Maintenance Interval Schedule
i04194063 Cooling System Coolant Sample (Level 2) -

Obtain ................................................................. 94
Maintenance Interval Schedule Engine - Clean ...................................................... 95
(Standby Generator Sets) Engine Air Cleaner Element (Single Element) -
Replace ............................................................... 95
SMCS Code: 1000; 7500 Engine Mounts - Inspect ....................................... 98
Engine Oil Sample - Obtain .................................. 98
Ensure that all safety information, warnings, Engine Oil and Filter - Change ............................. 99
and instructions are read and understood before Fuel System Primary Filter (Water Separator)
any operation or any maintenance procedures Element - Replace ............................................ 103
are performed. The user is responsible for the Fuel System Secondary Filter - Replace ............ 108
performance of all maintenance including the Hoses and Clamps - Inspect/Replace ................. 114
following procedures: all adjustments, the use of Insulation - Test .................................................... 115
proper lubricants, fluids, filters, and the installation Rotating Rectifier - Check .................................... 119
of new components due to normal wear and aging . Starting Motor - Inspect ...................................... 120
The performance of this product may be diminished if Water Pump - Inspect ......................................... 123
proper maintenance intervals and procedures are not
followed. Components may experience accelerated Every 3 Years
wear if proper maintenance intervals and procedures
are not followed. Battery - Replace .................................................. 88
Cooling System Coolant Extender (ELC) - Add .... 91
Cooling System Water Temperature Regulator -
Note: Use whichever of the following that occurs
first in order to determine the maintenance intervals: Replace ............................................................... 94
fuel consumption, service hours, and calendar time
. Before each consecutive interval is performed, all Every 6 Years
maintenance from the previous intervals must be Cooling System Coolant (ELC) - Change ............. 90
performed.
Products that operate in severe operating conditions

may require more frequent maintenance.
When Required
Battery - Recycle .................................................. 88
Battery or Battery Cable - Disconnect .................. 89
Fuel System - Prime ........................................... 102
Generator - Dry .................................................... 111
Generator Load - Check ...................................... 113
Generator Set - Test ............................................ 113
Rotating Rectifier - Test ...................................... 120
Every Week
Battery Electrolyte Level - Check .......................... 89
Cooling System Coolant Level - Check ................ 92
Electrical Connections - Check ............................. 95
Engine Air Cleaner Service Indicator - Inspect ..... 96
Engine Oil Level - Check ...................................... 98
Fuel System Primary Filter/Water Separator -
Drain ................................................................. 107
Fuel Tank Water and Sediment - Drain ................ 110
Generator - Inspect .............................................. 111
Every 500 Service Hours

Engine Crankcase Breather Element - Replace ... 97
Rotating Rectifier - Check .................................... 119
Every Year
Alternator - Inspect ............................................... 88
Belts - Inspect/Adjust/Replace .............................. 89
86 SEBU8139-02
Maintenance Section
i04194060 Every 100 Service Hours or 3 Months

Maintenance Interval Schedule Insulation - Test .................................................... 115
(Prime Power Generator Sets) Every 250 Service Hours
SMCS Code: 1000; 7500 Cooling System Coolant Sample (Level 1) -
Obtain ................................................................. 93
Ensure that all safety information, warnings, Engine Oil Sample - Obtain .................................. 98
and instructions are read and understood before
any operation or any maintenance procedures Initial 500 Hours (for New Systems, Refilled
are performed. The user is responsible for the
Systems, and Converted Systems)
performance of all maintenance including the
following procedures: all adjustments, the use of Cooling System Coolant Sample (Level 2) -
proper lubricants, fluids, filters, and the installation Obtain ................................................................. 94
of new components due to normal wear and aging . Engine Valve Lash - Check ................................. 102
The performance of this product may be diminished if
proper maintenance intervals and procedures are not Every 500 Service Hours or 1 Year
followed. Components may experience accelerated
wear if proper maintenance intervals and procedures Battery Electrolyte Level - Check .......................... 89
are not followed. Belts - Inspect/Adjust/Replace .............................. 89
Engine Air Cleaner Element (Single Element) -
Note: Use whichever of the following that occurs Replace ............................................................... 95
first in order to determine the maintenance intervals: Engine Crankcase Breather Element - Replace ... 97
fuel consumption, service hours, and calendar time Engine Oil and Filter - Change ............................. 99
. Before each consecutive interval is performed, all Fuel System Primary Filter (Water Separator)
maintenance from the previous intervals must be Element - Replace ............................................ 103
performed. Fuel System Secondary Filter - Replace ............ 108
Hoses and Clamps - Inspect/Replace ................. 114
Products that operate in severe operating conditions
may require more frequent maintenance. Every 1000 Service Hours or 1 Year
When Required Engine Valve Lash - Check ................................. 102

Rotating Rectifier - Check .................................... 119
Battery - Recycle .................................................. 88
Battery - Replace .................................................. 88 Every 2000 Service Hours or 1 Year
Battery or Battery Cable - Disconnect .................. 89
Engine - Clean ...................................................... 95 Alternator - Inspect ............................................... 88
Fuel System - Prime ........................................... 102 Engine Mounts - Inspect ....................................... 98
Generator - Dry .................................................... 111 Starting Motor - Inspect ...................................... 120
Generator Set - Test ............................................ 113 Turbocharger - Inspect ........................................ 120
Rotating Rectifier - Test ...................................... 120
Every Year
Daily
Cooling System Coolant Sample (Level 2) -
Cooling System Coolant Level - Check ................ 92 Obtain ................................................................. 94
Electrical Connections - Check ............................. 95
Engine Air Cleaner Service Indicator - Inspect ..... 96 Every 3000 Service Hours or 2 Years
Engine Oil Level - Check ...................................... 98
Fuel System Primary Filter/Water Separator - Cooling System Water Temperature Regulator -
Drain ................................................................. 107 Replace ............................................................... 94
Generator Load - Check ...................................... 113 Water Pump - Inspect ......................................... 123
Walk-Around Inspection ...................................... 121
Every 6000 Service Hours or 3 Years
Every Week Cooling System Coolant Extender (ELC) - Add .... 91
Generator - Inspect .............................................. 111
Every 12 000 Service Hours or 6 Years
Every 50 Service Hours or Weekly Cooling System Coolant (ELC) - Change ............. 90
Fuel Tank Water and Sediment - Drain ................ 110
SEBU8139-02 87
Maintenance Section
Overhaul
Overhaul Considerations ..................................... 117
88 SEBU8139-02
Maintenance Section
Alternator - Inspect
i02676048 i02322315
Alternator - Inspect Battery - Replace

SMCS Code: 1405-040 SMCS Code: 1401-510
Caterpillar recommends a scheduled inspection

of the alternator. Inspect the alternator for loose
connections and proper battery charging. Inspect the Batteries give off combustible gases which can
ammeter (if equipped) during engine operation in explode. A spark can cause the combustible gas-
order to ensure proper battery performance and/or es to ignite. This can result in severe personal in-
proper performance of the electrical system. Make jury or death.
repairs, as required.
Ensure proper ventilation for batteries that are in
Check the alternator and the battery charger for an enclosure. Follow the proper procedures in or-
proper operation. If the batteries are properly der to help prevent electrical arcs and/or sparks
charged, the ammeter reading should be very near near batteries. Do not smoke when batteries are
zero. All batteries should be kept charged. The serviced.
batteries should be kept warm because temperature
affects the cranking power. If the battery is too cold,
the battery will not crank the engine. The battery will
not crank the engine, even if the engine is warm.
When the engine is not run for long periods of time The battery cables or the batteries should not be
or if the engine is run for short periods, the batteries removed with the battery cover in place. The bat-
may not fully charge. A battery with a low charge will tery cover should be removed before any servic-
freeze more easily than a battery with a full charge. ing is attempted.
i00993589 Removing the battery cables or the batteries with

the cover in place may cause a battery explosion
Battery - Recycle resulting in personal injury.
SMCS Code: 1401-561

1. Switch the engine to the OFF position. Remove
all electrical loads.
Always recycle a battery. Never discard a battery.
2. Turn off any battery chargers. Disconnect any
Always return used batteries to one of the following
battery chargers.
locations:
3. The NEGATIVE “-” cable connects the NEGATIVE
• A battery supplier “-” battery terminal to the NEGATIVE “-” terminal
on the starting motor. Disconnect the cable from
• An authorized battery collection facility the NEGATIVE “-” battery terminal.
• Recycling facility 4. The POSITIVE “+” cable connects the POSITIVE
“+” battery terminal to the POSITIVE “+” terminal
on the starting motor. Disconnect the cable from
the POSITIVE “+” battery terminal.
Note: Always recycle a battery. Never discard a

battery. Dispose of used batteries to an appropriate
recycling facility.
5. Remove the used battery.
6. Install the new battery.
Note: Before the cables are connected, ensure that

the engine start switch is OFF.
7. Connect the cable from the starting motor to the

POSITIVE “+” battery terminal.
SEBU8139-02 89
Maintenance Section
Battery Electrolyte Level - Check
8. Connect the NEGATIVE “-” cable to the NEGATIVE i02323088

“-” battery terminal.
Battery or Battery Cable -
i02724529
Disconnect
Battery Electrolyte Level - SMCS Code: 1402-029
Check
SMCS Code: 1401-535
The battery cables or the batteries should not be
When the engine is not run for long periods of time or removed with the battery cover in place. The bat-
when the engine is run for short periods, the batteries tery cover should be removed before any servic-
may not fully recharge. Ensure a full charge in order ing is attempted.
to help prevent the battery from freezing. If batteries
are properly charged, ammeter reading should be Removing the battery cables or the batteries with
very near zero,when the engine is in operation. the cover in place may cause a battery explosion
resulting in personal injury.
1. Turn the start switch to the OFF position. Turn the

All lead-acid batteries contain sulfuric acid which ignition switch (if equipped) to the OFF position
can burn the skin and clothing. Always wear a face and remove the key and all electrical loads.
shield and protective clothing when working on or
near batteries. 2. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. Ensure
that the cable cannot contact the terminal. When
four 12 volt batteries are involved, two negative
1. Remove the filler caps. Maintain the electrolyte connection must be disconnected.
level to the “FULL” mark on the battery.
3. Remove the positive connection.
If the addition of water is necessary, use distilled
water. If distilled water is not available use clean 4. Clean all disconnected connection and battery
water that is low in minerals. Do not use artificially terminals.
softened water.
5. Use a fine grade of sandpaper to clean the
2. Check the condition of the electrolyte with the terminals and the cable clamps. Clean the items
245-5829 Coolant Battery Tester Refractometer. until the surfaces are bright or shiny. DO NOT
remove material excessively. Excessive removal
3. Keep the batteries clean. of material can cause the clamps to not fit
correctly. Coat the clamps and the terminals with
Clean the battery case with one of the following a suitable silicone lubricant or petroleum jelly.
cleaning solutions:
6. Tape the cable connections in order to help
• Use a solution of 0.1 kg (0.2 lb) baking soda prevent accidental starting.
and 1 L (1 qt) of clean water.
7. Proceed with necessary system repairs.
• Use a solution of ammonium hydroxide.
8. In order to connect the battery, connect the
Thoroughly rinse the battery case with clean water. positive connection before the negative connector.
Use a fine grade of sandpaper to clean the

terminals and the cable clamps. Clean the items i04120321
until the surfaces are bright or shiny. DO NOT
remove material excessively. Excessive removal Belts - Inspect/Adjust/Replace
of material can cause the clamps to not fit properly.
SMCS Code: 1357-025; 1357-040; 1357-510
Coat the clamps and the terminals with 5N-5561
Silicone Lubricant, petroleum jelly or MPGM.
NOTICE
Ensure that the engine is stopped before any servicing
or repair is performed.
90 SEBU8139-02
Maintenance Section
Cooling System Coolant (ELC) - Change
To maximize the engine performance, inspect the belt • The fuel has entered the cooling system and the
(1) for wear and for cracking. Replace the belt if the coolant is contaminated.
belt is worn or damaged.
Note: When the cooling system is cleaned, only
• If the belt (1) has more than four cracks per clean water is needed when the ELC is drained and
25.4000 mm (1 inch), the belt must be replaced. replaced.
• Check the belt for the following items: cracks, Note: Inspect the water pump and the water
splits, glazing, grease, splitting, and broken ribs temperature regulator after the cooling system has
been drained. This is a good opportunity to replace
• Remove any deposits that are on the belt. the water pump, the water temperature regulator and
the hoses, if necessary.
Drain
Pressurized System: Hot coolant can cause seri-

ous burns. To open the cooling system filler cap,
stop the engine and wait until the cooling system
components are cool. Loosen the cooling system
pressure cap slowly in order to relieve the pres-
sure.
1. Stop the engine and allow the engine to cool.

Loosen the cooling system filler cap slowly in
order to relieve any pressure. Remove the cooling
system filler cap.
2. Open the cooling system drain valve (if equipped).

If the cooling system is not equipped with a drain
valve, remove the cooling system drain plugs.
Allow the coolant to drain.
NOTICE
Dispose of used engine coolant properly or recycle.
Illustration 82
g01347573 Various methods have been proposed to reclaim used
coolant for reuse in engine cooling systems. The full
Typical example
distillation procedure is the only method acceptable by
Caterpillar to reclaim the used coolant.
i02822203
Cooling System Coolant (ELC) For information regarding the disposal and the
recycling of used coolant, consult your Caterpillar
- Change dealer or consult Dealer Service Tools.
SMCS Code: 1350-070; 1395-044

Flush
Clean the cooling system and flush the cooling
1. Flush the cooling system with clean water in order
system before the recommended maintenance
interval if the following conditions exist: to remove any debris.
2. Close the drain valve (if equipped). Clean the

• The engine overheats frequently. drain plugs. Install the drain plugs. Refer to Torque
Specifications, SENR3130 for more information
• Foaming is observed. on the correct torques.
• The oil has entered the cooling system and the
coolant is contaminated.
SEBU8139-02 91
Maintenance Section
Cooling System Coolant Extender (ELC) - Add
4. Clean the cooling system filler cap. Inspect the

NOTICE gasket that is on the cooling system filler cap. If
Do not fill the cooling system faster than 5 L the gasket that is on the cooling system filler cap
(1.3 US gal) per minute to avoid air locks. is damaged, discard the old cooling system filler
cap and install a new cooling system filler cap. If
Cooling system air locks may result in engine damage. the gasket that is on the cooling system filler cap is
not damaged, use a 9S-8140 Pressurizing Pump
in order to pressure test the cooling system filler
3. Fill the cooling system with clean water. Install the cap. The correct pressure for the cooling system
cooling system filler cap. filler cap is stamped on the face of the cooling
system filler cap. If the cooling system filler cap
4. Start and run the engine at low idle until the does not retain the correct pressure, install a new
temperature reaches 49 to 66 °C (120 to 150 °F). cooling system filler cap.
5. Stop the engine and allow the engine to cool. 5. Start the engine. Inspect the cooling system for
Loosen the cooling system filler cap slowly leaks and for proper operating temperature.
in order to relieve any pressure. Remove the
cooling system filler cap. Open the drain valve
(if equipped) or remove the cooling system drain i02482066
plugs. Allow the water to drain. Flush the cooling
system with clean water. Close the drain valve (if Cooling System Coolant
equipped). Clean the drain plugs. Install the drain Extender (ELC) - Add
plugs. Refer to Torque Specifications, SENR3130
for more information on the correct torques. SMCS Code: 1352-045; 1395-081
Fill Cat ELC (Extended Life Coolant) does not require

the frequent additions of any supplemental cooling
additives which are associated with the present
NOTICE
conventional coolants. The Cat ELC Extender only
Do not fill the cooling system faster than 5 L
needs to be added once.
(1.3 US gal) per minute to avoid air locks.
Cooling system air locks may result in engine damage. NOTICE

Use only Cat Extended Life Coolant (ELC) Extender
with Cat ELC.
1. Fill the cooling system with Extended Life Coolant
(ELC). Refer to this Operation and Maintenance Do NOT use conventional supplemental coolant addi-
Manual, “Refill Capacities and Recommendations” tive (SCA) with Cat ELC. Mixing Cat ELC with conven-
topic (Maintenance Section) for more information tional coolants and/or conventional SCA reduces the
on cooling system specifications. Do not install the Cat ELC service life.
cooling system filler cap.
Check the cooling system only when the engine is
2. Start and run the engine at low idle. Increase the
stopped and cool.
engine rpm to high idle. Run the engine at high
idle for one minute in order to purge the air from
the cavities of the engine block. Stop the engine.
3. Check the coolant level. Maintain the coolant level

within 13 mm (0.5 inch) below the bottom of the
pipe for filling. Maintain the coolant level within
13 mm (0.5 inch) to the proper level on the sight
glass (if equipped).
92 SEBU8139-02
Maintenance Section
Cooling System Coolant Level - Check
i01197583
Cooling System Coolant Level

Personal injury can result from hot coolant, steam
and alkali. - Check
At operating temperature, engine coolant is hot SMCS Code: 1395-082
and under pressure. The radiator and all lines
to heaters or the engine contain hot coolant or Check the coolant level when the engine is stopped
steam. Any contact can cause severe burns. and cool.
Remove cooling system pressure cap slowly to

relieve pressure only when engine is stopped and
cooling system pressure cap is cool enough to
touch with your bare hand.
Do not attempt to tighten hose connections when

the coolant is hot, the hose can come off causing
burns.
Cooling System Coolant Additive contains alkali.

Avoid contact with skin and eyes.
NOTICE g00285520
Care must be taken to ensure that fluids are contained Illustration 83
during performance of inspection, maintenance, test- Cooling system filler cap
ing, adjusting and repair of the product. Be prepared to
collect the fluid with suitable containers before open-
ing any compartment or disassembling any compo-
nent containing fluids.
ous burns. To open the cooling system filler cap,
Refer to Special Publication, NENG2500, “Caterpillar
stop the engine and wait until the cooling system
Dealer Service Tool Catalog” for tools and supplies
suitable to collect and contain fluids on Caterpillar
products.
sure.
Dispose of all fluids according to local regulations and
mandates. 1. Remove the cooling system filler cap slowly in
order to relieve pressure.
1. Loosen the cooling system filler cap slowly in
order to relieve pressure. Remove the cooling 2. Maintain the coolant level within 13 mm (0.5 inch)
system filler cap. of the bottom of the filler pipe. If the engine is
equipped with a sight glass, maintain the coolant
2. It may be necessary to drain enough coolant from level to the proper level in the sight glass.
the cooling system in order to add the Cat ELC
Extender.
3. Add Cat ELC Extender according to the

requirements for your engine's cooling system
capacity. Refer to the Operation and Maintenance
Manual, “Refill Capacities and Recommendations”
article for more information.

gaskets on the cooling system filler cap. Replace
the cooling system filler cap if the gaskets are
damaged. Install the cooling system filler cap.
g00103639
Illustration 84
Typical filler cap gaskets
SEBU8139-02 93
Maintenance Section
Cooling System Coolant Sample (Level 1) - Obtain
3. Clean the cooling system filler cap and check the

condition of the filler cap gaskets. Replace the NOTICE
cooling system filler cap if the filler cap gaskets are Always use a designated pump for oil sampling, and
damaged. Reinstall the cooling system filler cap. use a separate designated pump for coolant sampling.
Using the same pump for both types of samples may
4. Inspect the cooling system for leaks. contaminate the samples that are being drawn. This
contaminate may cause a false analysis and an incor-
rect interpretation that could lead to concerns by both
i04035949
dealers and customers.
Cooling System Coolant
Sample (Level 1) - Obtain Note: Level 1 results may indicate a need for
Level 2 Analysis.
SMCS Code: 1350-008; 1395-008; 1395-554; 7542
Obtain the sample of the coolant as close as possible
Note: Obtaining a Coolant Sample (Level 1) is to the recommended sampling interval. In order to
optional if the cooling system is filled with Cat receive the full effect of S·O·S analysis, establish
ELC (Extended Life Coolant). Cooling systems filled a consistent trend of data. In order to establish
with Cat ELC should have a Coolant Sample (Level a pertinent history of data, perform consistent
2) that is obtained at the recommended interval as samplings that are evenly spaced. Supplies for
stated in the maintenance interval schedule. collecting samples can be obtained from your
Caterpillar dealer.
Note: Obtain a Coolant Sample (Level 1) if the
cooling system is filled with any other coolant Use the following guidelines for proper sampling of
instead of Cat ELC including the following the coolant:
coolants:
• Complete the information on the label for the
• Commercial long life coolants that meet the sampling bottle before you begin to take the
Caterpillar Engine Coolant Specification -1 samples.
(Caterpillar EC-1)
• Keep the unused sampling bottles stored in plastic
• Cat DEAC (Diesel Engine Antifreeze/Coolant) bags.
• Commercial heavy-duty coolant/antifreeze • Obtain coolant samples directly from the coolant
sample port. You should not obtain the samples
Table 22 from any other location.
Recommended Interval
• Keep the lids on empty sampling bottles until you
Type of Coolant Level 1 Level 2 are ready to collect the sample.
Cat DEAC
• Place the sample in the mailing tube immediately
Conventional after obtaining the sample in order to avoid
heavy duty- contamination.
coolant
Every 250 • Never collect samples from expansion bottles.
Commercial Every year(1)
service hours
coolant that
meets the • Never collect samples from the drain for a system.
requirements
of the Caterpillar Submit the sample for Level 1 analysis.
EC-1 standard
Cat ELC or
For additional information about coolant analysis,
conventional Optional Every year(1) see this Operation and Maintenance Manual, “Refill
EC-1 coolant Capacities and Recommendations” or consult your
(1)
Caterpillar dealer.
The Level 2 Coolant Analysis should be performed sooner if a
problem is suspected or identified.
94 SEBU8139-02
Maintenance Section
Cooling System Coolant Sample (Level 2) - Obtain
i04051750 i03645060
Cooling System Coolant Cooling System Water

Sample (Level 2) - Obtain Temperature Regulator -
SMCS Code: 1350-008; 1395-008; 1395-554; 7542
Replace
SMCS Code: 1355-510
NOTICE
Always use a designated pump for oil sampling, and Replace the water temperature regulator before
use a separate designated pump for coolant sampling. the water temperature regulator fails. This is a
Using the same pump for both types of samples may recommended preventive maintenance practice.
contaminate the samples that are being drawn. This Replacing the water temperature regulator reduces
contaminate may cause a false analysis and an incor- the chances for unscheduled downtime. Refer to this
rect interpretation that could lead to concerns by both Operation and Maintenance Manual, “Maintenance
dealers and customers. Interval Schedule” for the proper maintenance
interval.
NOTICE
A water temperature regulator that fails in a
Care must be taken to ensure that fluids are contained
during performance of inspection, maintenance, test- partially opened position can cause overheating or
overcooling of the engine.
ing, adjusting and repair of the product. Be prepared to
collect the fluid with suitable containers before open-
ing any compartment or disassembling any compo- A water temperature regulator that fails in the closed
position can cause excessive overheating. Excessive
nent containing fluids.
overheating could result in cracking of the cylinder
Refer to Special Publication, NENG2500, “Caterpillar head or piston seizure problems.
Dealer Service Tool Catalog” or refer to Special Pub-
A water temperature regulator that fails in the open
lication, PECJ0003, “Caterpillar Shop Supplies and
Tools Catalog” for tools and supplies suitable to col- position will cause the engine operating temperature
to be too low during partial load operation. Low
lect and contain fluids on Caterpillar products.
engine operating temperatures during partial loads
Dispose of all fluids according to local regulations and could cause an excessive carbon buildup inside the
cylinders. This excessive carbon buildup could result
mandates.
in an accelerated wear of the piston rings and wear
of the cylinder liner.
Refer to Operation and Maintenance Manual,
“Cooling System Coolant Sample (Level 1) - Obtain”
NOTICE
for the guidelines for proper sampling of the coolant.
Failure to replace your water temperature regulator
Submit the sample for Level 2 analysis. on a regularly scheduled basis could cause severe
engine damage.
For additional information about coolant
analysis, see Special Publication, SEBU6251, Caterpillar engines incorporate a shunt design cooling
system and require operating the engine with a water
“Caterpillar Commercial Diesel Engines Fluids
temperature regulator installed.
Recommendations” or consult your Caterpillar dealer.
If the water temperature regulator is installed incor-
rectly, the engine may overheat, causing cylinder head
damage. Ensure that the new water temperature reg-
ulator is installed in the original position. Ensure that
the water temperature regulator vent hole is open.
Do not use liquid gasket material on the gasket or

cylinder head surface.
Refer to two articles in the Disassembly and

Assembly Manual, “Water Temperature Regulators
- Remove and Water Temperature Regulators -
Install” for the replacement procedure of the water
temperature regulator, or consult your Caterpillar
dealer.
SEBU8139-02 95
Maintenance Section
Electrical Connections - Check
Note: If only the water temperature regulators are i02345750

replaced, drain the coolant from the cooling system to
a level that is below the water temperature regulator Engine - Clean
housing.
SMCS Code: 1000-070
i02398768
Electrical Connections - Check

Personal injury or death can result from high volt-
SMCS Code: 4459-535 age.
Moisture can create paths of electrical conductiv-

ity.
DANGER: Shock/Electrocution Hazard-Do not op-
Make sure that the electrical system is OFF. Lock
erate this equipment or work on this equipment
out the starting controls and tag the controls “DO
unless you have read and understand the instruc-
NOT OPERATE”.
tions and warnings in the Operation and Mainte-
nance Manual. Failure to follow the instructions or
heed the warnings will result in serious injury or NOTICE
death. Accumulated grease and oil on an engine is a fire haz-
ard. Keep the engine clean. Remove debris and fluid
Checking the electrical connections is an important spills whenever a significant quantity accumulates on
part of the maintenance for the generator set. the engine.
Improper connections may cause the generator set
to malfunction. Periodic cleaning of the engine is recommended.
Steam cleaning the engine will remove accumulated
Check all exposed electrical connections for oil and grease. A clean engine provides the following
tightness. benefits:
Check the following devices for loose mounting or
for physical damage:
• Easy detection of fluid leaks
• Maximum heat transfer characteristics
• Transformers
• Ease of maintenance
• Fuses
Note: Caution must be used in order to prevent
• Capacitors electrical components from being damaged by
excessive water when the engine is cleaned.
• Lightning arresters Pressure washers and steam cleaners should not be
directed at any electrical connectors or the junction of
Check the connections for the following components: cables into the rear of the connectors. Avoid electrical
components such as the alternator, the starter, and
• Load cables the ECM. Protect the fuel injection pump from fluids
in order to wash the engine.
• Cables for the generator
• Potential transformers i02242500
• Current transformers Engine Air Cleaner Element

(Single Element) - Replace
Check all lead wires and electrical connections for
proper clearance. Inspect all cables for chafing, SMCS Code: 1051; 1054-510
abrasion and corrosion.
NOTICE
Never service the air cleaner element with the engine
running since this will allow dirt to enter the engine.
96 SEBU8139-02
Maintenance Section
Engine Air Cleaner Service Indicator - Inspect
g00109823 g00103777
(1) Air cleaner element. (2) Clamp. Typical service indicator
1. Loosen clamp (2) which fastens air cleaner Observe the service indicator. The air cleaner
element (1) to the air inlet. Remove the dirty air element should be cleaned or the air cleaner element
cleaner element and clamp. should be replaced when one of the following
conditions occur:
2. Install clamp (2) on new air cleaner element (1).
• The yellow diaphragm enters the red zone.
3. Install new air cleaner element (1) to the air
inlet and tighten clamp (2). Refer to Torque • The red piston locks in the visible position.
Specifications, SENR3130 for the correct torque.
Test the Service Indicator
i02335405
Service indicators are important instruments.
Engine Air Cleaner Service
Indicator - Inspect • Check for ease of resetting. The service indicator
should reset in less than three pushes.
SMCS Code: 7452-040
• Check the movement of the yellow core when
the engine is accelerated to the engine rated
Some engines may be equipped with a different
speed. The yellow core should latch at the greatest
service indicator.
vacuum that is attained.
Some engines are equipped with a differential gauge
If the service indicator does not reset easily, or if the
for inlet air pressure. The differential gauge for inlet
yellow core does not latch at the greatest vacuum,
air pressure displays the difference in the pressure
the service indicator should be replaced. If the new
that is measured before the air cleaner element and
service indicator will not reset, the hole for the service
the pressure that is measured after the air cleaner
indicator may be restricted.
element. As the air cleaner element becomes dirty,
the pressure differential rises. If your engine is
The service indicator may need to be replaced
equipped with a different type of service indicator,
frequently in environments that are severely dusty.
follow the OEM recommendations in order to service
the air cleaner service indicator.
The service indicator may be mounted on the air

cleaner element or in a remote location.
SEBU8139-02 97
Maintenance Section
Engine Crankcase Breather Element - Replace
i02326553
Engine Crankcase Breather

Element - Replace
SMCS Code: 1317-510-FQ
g01156334
Illustration 87
The breather assembly
(1) The O-ring for the top cover (3) The O-ring for the filter element (5) The breather body
(2) The top cover (4) The filter element (6) The side cover
1. Remove all dirt and oil from the outside of the

NOTICE breather assembly. Remove the top cover (2) by
Ensure that the components of the breather assembly turning the top cover counterclockwise until the
are installed in the correct position. If installed incor- lugs disengage. The breather element includes
rectly, engine damage can result. an O ring (3). Remove the breather element (4)
by turning and lifting the element. Discard the
element. Clean the inner surfaces of the breather
Note: There are several vent holes under the top body (5). Clean the top cover and inspect the O
cover (2) and under the side cover (6). Keep the area ring (1) in the top cover. If the O ring in the top
around the vent holes clean. Do not restrict the vent cover is worn or damaged, replace the O ring.
holes.
98 SEBU8139-02
Maintenance Section
Engine Mounts - Inspect
2. Lubricate the O ring (3) in the new filter element Note: Ensure that the engine is either level or that
(4) with clean engine lubricating oil. Carefully the engine is in the normal operating position in order
insert the element into the breather body (5). to obtain a true level indication.
Lubricate the O ring (1) in the top cover with clean
engine lubricating oil. Carefully insert the top cover Note: After the engine has been switched OFF, wait
(2) into the breather body (5). Rotate the top cover for ten minutes in order to allow the engine oil to drain
clockwise until the lugs are fully engaged. to the oil pan before checking the oil level.
1. Maintain the oil level between the “ADD” mark (Y)

i02456872
and the “FULL” mark (X) on the engine oil dipstick.
Engine Mounts - Inspect Do not fill the crankcase above the “FULL” mark
(X).
SMCS Code: 1152-040
NOTICE
Inspect the engine mounts for deterioration and for Operating your engine when the oil level is above the
proper bolt torque. Engine vibration can be caused “FULL” mark could cause your crankshaft to dip into
by the following conditions: the oil. The air bubbles created from the crankshaft
dipping into the oil reduces the oil's lubricating char-
• Improper mounting of the engine acteristics and could result in the loss of power.
• Deterioration of the engine mounts 2. Remove the oil filler cap and add oil, if necessary.
Any engine mount that shows deterioration should be Clean the oil filler cap. Install the oil filler cap.
replaced. Refer to Special Publication, SENR3130,
“Torque Specifications” for the recommended i04041234
torques. Refer to the OEM recommendations for
more information. Engine Oil Sample - Obtain
SMCS Code: 1000-008; 1348-554-SM;
i02335785
7542-554-OC, SM
Engine Oil Level - Check In addition to a good preventive maintenance
SMCS Code: 1348-535-FLV program, Caterpillar recommends using S·O·S oil
analysis at regularly scheduled intervals. S·O·S oil
analysis provides infrared analysis, which is required
for determining nitration and oxidation levels.
Hot oil and hot components can cause personal
injury. Do not allow hot oil or hot components to Obtain the Sample and the Analysis
contact the skin.

injury. Do not allow hot oil or hot components to
contact the skin.
Before you take the oil sample, complete the Label,

PEEP5031 for identification of the sample. In order
to help obtain the most accurate analysis, provide
the following information:
• Engine model
• Service hours on the engine
g01165836
Illustration 88
(Y) “Min” mark. (X) “Max” mark.
• The number of hours that have accumulated since
the last oil change
NOTICE • The amount of oil that has been added since the
Perform this maintenance with the engine stopped. last oil change
SEBU8139-02 99
Maintenance Section
Engine Oil and Filter - Change
To ensure that the sample is representative of the oil

in the crankcase, obtain a warm, mixed oil sample. NOTICE
To avoid contamination of the oil samples, the tools during performance of inspection, maintenance, test-
and the supplies that are used for obtaining oil ing, adjusting and repair of the product. Be prepared to
samples must be clean. collect the fluid with suitable containers before open-
ing any compartment or disassembling any compo-
Caterpillar recommends using the sampling valve nent containing fluids.
in order to obtain oil samples. The quality and the
consistency of the samples are better when the Dispose of all fluids according to local regulations and
sampling valve is used. The location of the sampling mandates.
valve allows oil that is flowing under pressure to be
obtained during normal engine operation.
NOTICE
The 169-8373 Fluid Sampling Bottle is Keep all parts clean from contaminants.
recommended for use with the sampling valve. The
fluid sampling bottle includes the parts that are Contaminants may cause rapid wear and shortened
needed for obtaining oil samples. Instructions are component life.
also provided.
Do not drain the engine lubricating oil when the
NOTICE engine is cold. As the engine lubricating oil cools,
Always use a designated pump for oil sampling, and suspended waste particles settle on the bottom of
use a separate designated pump for coolant sampling. the oil pan. The waste particles are not removed with
Using the same pump for both types of samples may draining cold oil. Drain the oil pan with the engine
contaminate the samples that are being drawn. This stopped. Drain the oil pan with the oil warm. This
contaminate may cause a false analysis and an incor- draining method allows the waste particles that are
rect interpretation that could lead to concerns by both suspended in the oil to be drained properly.
dealers and customers.
Failure to follow this recommended procedure will
If the engine is not equipped with a sampling valve, cause the waste particles to be recirculated through
use the 1U-5718 Vacuum Pump. The pump is the engine lubrication system with the new oil.
designed to accept sampling bottles. Disposable
tubing must be attached to the pump for insertion Drain the Engine Lubricating Oil
into the sump.
Note: Ensure that the vessel that will be used is large
For instructions, see Special Publication, PEgj0047, enough to collect the waste oil.
“How To Take A Good S·O·S Oil Sample”. Consult
your Cat dealer for complete information and After the engine has been run at the normal operating
assistance in establishing an S·O·S program for your temperature, stop the engine. Use one of the
engine. following methods to drain the engine oil pan:
i02655561

SMCS Code: 1318-510; 1348-044

injury. Do not allow hot oil or hot components to
contact the skin.
100 SEBU8139-02
Maintenance Section
g00588944
Illustration 90
Element with debris
2. Cut the oil filter open with a 175-7546 Oil Filter

Cutter . Break apart the pleats and inspect the
oil filter for metal debris. An excessive amount
Illustration 89
g01333817 of metal debris in the oil filter may indicate early
wear or a pending failure.
Typical example
Use a magnet to differentiate between the ferrous

• If the engine is equipped with a drain valve, turn the metals and the nonferrous metals that are found in
drain valve knob counterclockwise in order to drain the oil filter element. Ferrous metals may indicate
the oil. After the oil has drained, turn the drain valve wear on the steel and cast iron parts of the engine.
knob clockwise in order to close the drain valve.
Nonferrous metals may indicate wear on the
• If the engine is not equipped with a drain valve, aluminum parts, brass parts or bronze parts of
remove oil drain plug (1) in order to allow the oil to the engine. Parts that may be affected include
drain. If the engine is equipped with a shallow oil the following items: main bearings, rod bearings,
pan, remove the bottom oil drain plugs from both turbocharger bearings, and cylinder heads.
ends of the oil pan.
Due to normal wear and friction, it is not
After the oil has drained, the oil drain plugs should be uncommon to find small amounts of debris in the
cleaned and installed. If necessary, replace the O oil filter. Consult your Caterpillar dealer in order
ring seal. Tighten the drain plug to 34 N·m (25 lb ft). to arrange for a further analysis if an excessive
amount of debris is found in the oil filter.
Replace the Oil Filter
NOTICE
Caterpillar oil filters are manufactured to Caterpillar
specifications. Use of an oil filter that is not recom-
mended by Caterpillar could result in severe damage
to the engine bearings, crankshaft, etc., as a result of
the larger waste particles from unfiltered oil entering
the engine lubricating system. Only use oil filters rec-
ommended by Caterpillar.
1. Remove the oil filter with a 1U-8760 Chain

Wrench.
Note: Some oil filters may be installed horizontally.
Note: The following actions can be carried out as

part of the preventive maintenance program.
SEBU8139-02 101
Maintenance Section
NOTICE
Do not fill the oil filters with oil before installing them.
This oil would not be filtered and could be contaminat-
ed. Contaminated oil can cause accelerated wear to
engine components.
5. Install the engine oil filter. Spin on the oil filter until
the O ring seal contacts the oil filter base. Rotate
the oil filter ¾ of a full turn.
Fill the Oil Pan

1. Remove the oil filler cap. Refer to this
Operation and Maintenance Manual, “Fluid
Recommendations” for more information on
suitable oils. Fill the oil pan with the correct
amount of new engine lubricating oil. Refer
to this Operation and Maintenance Manual,
“Refill Capacities” for more information on refill
g01333549
Illustration 91 capacities.
Typical example
NOTICE
3. Clean the sealing surface of the oil filter base (2). If equipped with an auxilliary oil filter system or a re-
mote filter system, follow the OEM or the filter manu-
4. Apply clean engine oil to the O ring seal (3) for facture's remonmendations. Under filling or over filling
the new oil filter. the crankcase with oil can cause engine damage.
Note: Some oil filters may be installed horizontally.
Refer to illustration 92. This type of oil filter assembly 2. Start the engine and run the engine at “LOW
can be drained before the filter is removed. The IDLE” for two minutes. Perform this procedure in
torque for this drain plug (4) is 12 N·m (8 lb ft). If order to ensure that the lubrication system has
necessary, install a new O ring seal (5). Start at step 1 oil and that the oil filters are filled. Inspect the oil
in order to remove the oil filter and install the oil filter. filter for oil leaks.
3. Stop the engine and allow the oil to drain back to

the oil pan for a minimum of ten minutes.
g01165836
Illustration 93
Typical example
Illustration 92
g01333818 4. Remove the engine oil level gauge in order to
check the oil level. Maintain the oil level between
Typical example
the “MIN” and “MAX” marks on the engine oil level
gauge.
102 SEBU8139-02
Maintenance Section
Engine Valve Lash - Check
i03964791 If air enters the fuel system, the air must be purged
from the fuel system before the engine can be
Engine Valve Lash - Check started. Air can enter the fuel system when the
following events occur:
SMCS Code: 1105-535
• The fuel tank is empty or the fuel tank has been
Note: Procedures for adjusting the valve lash can be partially drained.
found in Systems Operation/Testing and Adjusting,
“Valve Lash Adjustment”. Consult your Cat dealer • The low pressure fuel lines are disconnected.
for assistance.
• A leak exists in the low pressure fuel system.
• The fuel filter has been replaced.
Ensure that the engine cannot be started while this
maintenance is being performed. To help prevent Hand Fuel Priming Pump
possible injury, do not use the starting motor to
turn the flywheel. Use the following procedures in order to remove air
from the fuel system:
Hot engine components can cause burns. Allow
additional time for the engine to cool before mea- 1. Ensure that the fuel system is in working order.
suring/adjusting valve lash clearance. Check that the fuel supply valve (if equipped) is in
the “ON” position.
i02656266
Fuel System - Prime

SMCS Code: 1258-548

Refer to the Operation and Maintenance Manual ,

“General Hazard Information and High Pressure Fuel
Lines” before adjustments and repairs are performed.
Note: Refer to Testing and Adjusting Manual

, “Cleanliness of Fuel System Components”
g01333855
for detailed information on the standards of Illustration 94
cleanliness that must be observed during ALL Typical example
work on the fuel system.
2. Operate the fuel priming pump (1). Count the
Ensure that all adjustments and repairs are performed number of operations of the fuel priming pump.
by authorized personnel that have had the correct After 100 depressions of the fuel priming pump
training. stop.
NOTICE 3. The engine fuel system should now be primed and

Do not crank the engine continuously for more than the engine should now be able to start.
30 seconds. Allow the starting motor to cool for two
minutes before cranking the engine again. 4. Operate the engine starter and crank the engine.
After the engine has started, operate the engine at
low idle for a minimum of five minutes, immediately
after air has been removed from the fuel system.
SEBU8139-02 103
Maintenance Section
Fuel System Primary Filter (Water Separator) Element - Replace
Note: Operating the engine for this period of time will After the engine has stopped, you must wait for
help ensure that the fuel system is free of air. 60 seconds in order to allow the fuel pressure to
be purged from the high pressure fuel lines before
Note: Do not loosen the high pressure fuel line any service or repair is performed on the engine
in order to purge air from the fuel system. This fuel lines. If necessary, perform minor adjustments.
procedure is not required. Repair any leaks from the low pressure fuel system
and from the cooling, lubrication or air systems.
After the engine has stopped, you must wait for Replace any high pressure fuel line that has leaked.
60 seconds in order to allow the fuel pressure to Refer to Disassembly and assembly Manual, “Fuel
be purged from the high pressure fuel lines before Injection Lines - Install”.
any service or repair is performed on the engine
fuel lines. If necessary, perform minor adjustments. If you inspect the engine in operation, always use
Repair any leaks from the low pressure fuel system the proper inspection procedure in order to avoid
and from the cooling, lubrication or air systems. a fluid penetration hazard. Refer to Operation and
Replace any high pressure fuel line that has leaked. Maintenance Manual, “General hazard Information”.
Refer to Disassembly and assembly Manual, “Fuel
Injection Lines - Install”.
i03242661
If you inspect the engine in operation, always use

the proper inspection procedure in order to avoid
Fuel System Primary Filter
a fluid penetration hazard. Refer to Operation and (Water Separator) Element -
Maintenance Manual, “General hazard Information”. Replace
Electric Fuel Priming Pump SMCS Code: 1260-510-FQ; 1263-510-FQ
1. Ensure that the fuel system is in working order.

Check that the fuel supply valve (if equipped) is in
Type One Filter
the “ON” position.
NOTICE
The electric fuel priming pump will operate for 90 sec- Fuel leaked or spilled onto hot surfaces or elec-
onds. If necessary the electric fuel priming pump can trical components can cause a fire. To help pre-
be stopped during the 90 seconds of operation, by op- vent possible injury, turn the start switch off when
eration of the switch. changing fuel filters or water separator elements.
Clean up fuel spills immediately.
2. Turn the keyswitch to the “RUN” position. Operate
the switch for the electric priming pump. After Note: Refer to Testing and Adjusting Manual
90 seconds of the electric fuel priming pump , “Cleanliness of Fuel System Components”
operation the fuel system will be primed and the for detailed information on the standards of
electric fuel priming pump will turn off. cleanliness that must be observed during ALL
3. The engine should now be able to start.
NOTICE
4. Operate the engine starter and crank the engine. Ensure that the engine is stopped before any servicing
After the engine has started, operate the engine at or repair is performed.
low idle for a minimum of five minutes, immediately
after air has been removed from the fuel system.
After the engine has stopped, you must wait for
Note: Operating the engine for this period of time will 60 seconds in order to allow the fuel pressure to
help ensure that the fuel system is free of air. be purged from the high pressure fuel lines before
Note: Do not loosen the high pressure fuel line fuel lines. If necessary, perform minor adjustments.
in order to purge air from the fuel system. This Repair any leaks from the low pressure fuel system
procedure is not required. and from the cooling, lubrication or air systems.
Replace any high pressure fuel line that has leaked.
Injection Lines - Install”.
1. Turn the fuel supply valve (if equipped) to the OFF

position before performing this maintenance.
104 SEBU8139-02
Maintenance Section
2. Place a suitable container under the water

separator in order to catch any fuel that might
spill. Clean up any spilled fuel. Clean the outside
of the water separator.
g01333552
Illustration 96
Typical example
9. Lubricate the O ring seal (7) with clean engine oil

g01333866
Illustration 95 on the new canister.
Typical example
10. Install the new canister. Spin on the canister
3. Install a suitable tube onto the drain (1). Open until the O ring seal contacts the filter base. The
drain (1). Allow the fluid to drain into the container. canister will require a ¾ of a full turn or one full
Remove the tube. turn in order to tighten the canister correctly. Refer
to the information on the canister.
4. Tighten the drain (1) by hand pressure only.
11. Install new O ring seal (5) onto setscrew (2).
5. If equipped, remove the wiring harness from the Install new O ring seal (6) into the bowl (3).
sensor on the bottom of the bowl.
12. Align the bowl to the canister. Ensure that the
6. Hold bowl (3) and remove screw (2). Remove sensor (if equipped) is in the correct position.
bowl (3) from canister (4). Install setscrew (2). Tighten the setscrew to a
torque of 5 N·m (44 lb in).
7. Use a 1U-8760 Chain Wrench in order to remove
canister (4). Discard old seals (5 and 6) and the 13. If equipped, install the wiring harness to the
canister in a safe place. sensor.
8. Clean bowl (3). 14. Remove the container and dispose of the fuel in
a safe place.
15. The secondary filter must be replaced at the same

time as the primary filter. Refer to the Operation
and Maintenance Manual , “Fuel System Filter -
Replace”.
SEBU8139-02 105
Maintenance Section
Type Two Filter
Fuel leaked or spilled onto hot surfaces or elec-

trical components can cause a fire. To help pre-
vent possible injury, turn the start switch off when
changing fuel filters or water separator elements.

for detailed information on the standards of
cleanliness that must be observed during ALL
NOTICE

60 seconds in order to allow the fuel pressure to
fuel lines. If necessary, perform minor adjustments.
Repair any leaks from the low pressure fuel system g01372133
Illustration 97
Replace any high pressure fuel line that has leaked. typical example
Injection Lines - Install”. 3. Install a suitable tube onto the drain (1). Open the
drain (1). Allow the fluid to drain into the container.
1. Turn the fuel supply valve (if equipped) to the OFF Remove the tube.
position before performing this maintenance.
4. Tighten the drain (1) by hand pressure only.
2. Place a suitable container under the water
separator in order to catch any fuel that might 5. If equipped, remove the wiring harness from the
spill. Clean up any spilled fuel. Clean the outside sensor on the bottom of the bowl (3).
of the water separator.
106 SEBU8139-02
Maintenance Section
g01372134 g01372135
typical example typical example
6. Rotate the bowl (3) counterclockwise in order to 7. Use a 1U-8760 Chain Wrench in order to remove
remove the bowl. Remove the O ring seal (2). the old canister (4).
Clean the bowl.
SEBU8139-02 107
Maintenance Section
Fuel System Primary Filter/Water Separator - Drain
i02656272
Fuel System Primary

Filter/Water Separator - Drain
SMCS Code: 1260-543; 1263-543

vent possible injury, turn the start switch off when
changing fuel filters or water separator elements.
NOTICE
NOTICE
The water separator can be under suction during nor-
mal engine operation. Ensure that the drain valve is
tightened securely to help prevent air from entering
the fuel system.
g01372137
Illustration 100 1. Place a suitable container under the water
typical example separator in order to catch any fuel that might spill.
Clean up any spilled fuel.
8. Lubricate the O ring seal (5) with clean engine oil
on the new canister. Install the new canister (6).
Spin on the canister until the O ring seal contacts
the sealing surface. Then rotate the canister 360
degree in order to tighten the canister correctly.
9. Remove the cap (8) from the threaded end of the

new canister and remove the new O ring seal (7).
Install the new O ring seal into the bowl (3).
10. Lubricate the O ring seal (7) with clean engine oil.
Install the bowl onto the new canister. Tighten the
bowl to 15 N·m (11 lb ft).
11. If equipped, install the wiring harness to the

sensor. Open the fuel supply valve.
12. Remove the container and dispose of the fluid in

a safe place.
13. The secondary filter must be replaced at the same

time as the primary filter. Refer to the Operation g01334411
Illustration 101
and Maintenance Manual , “Fuel System Filter -
Replace”. Typical example
2. Install a suitable tube onto drain (1). Open drain

(1). Allow the fluid to drain into the container.
3. Tighten drain (1) by hand pressure only. Remove

the tube and dispose of the drained fluid in a safe
place.
108 SEBU8139-02
Maintenance Section
Fuel System Secondary Filter - Replace

NOTICE
This fuel filter can be identified by the six drain holes

in the filter. Refer to illustration 103.
g01371846
Illustration 102
Typical example
Note: Not all primary filters require vent screw (2).

This primary fuel filter that has a vent screw may be
installed on a fuel system that has a low fuel tank.
1. Install a suitable tube onto drain (1). Loosen vent

screw (2).
2. Open drain (1). Allow the fluid to drain into the

container.
g01375918
3. Tighten drain (1) by hand pressure only. Remove Illustration 103
the tube and dispose of the drained fluid in a safe Typical example
place.
4. Tighten vent screw to 6 N·m (53 lb in). 60 seconds in order to allow the fuel pressure to
i02656273
Fuel System Secondary Filter - Repair any leaks from the low pressure fuel system
Replace Replace any high pressure fuel line that has leaked.
SMCS Code: 1261-510-SE Injection Lines - Install”.
Type One Filter NOTICE

Do not allow dirt to enter the fuel system. Thoroughly
clean the area around a fuel system component that
will be disconnected. Fit a suitable cover over discon-
nected fuel system component.
vent possible injury, turn the start switch off when 1. Ensure that the fuel supply valve (if equipped) is in
changing fuel filters or water separator elements. the OFF position. Place a suitable container under
Clean up fuel spills immediately. the fuel filter in order to catch any fuel that might
spill. Clean up any spilled fuel.
SEBU8139-02 109
Maintenance Section
Fuel System Secondary Filter - Replace

NOTICE
This fuel filter can be identified by the 12 drain holes

in the filter. Refer to illustration 105.
g01333960
Illustration 104
Typical example
2. Clean the outside of the fuel filter. Use 1U-8760

Chain Wrench in order to remove canister (2) from
the engine and dispose of the canister in a safe
place.
3. Lubricate O ring seal (1) with clean engine oil.

Do not fill the new canister with fuel before the
canister is installed.
4. Do not use a tool in order to install the canister.

g01375926
Tighten the canister by hand. Illustration 105
Typical example
5. Install the new canister. Spin on the canister
until the O ring seal contacts the filter base. The After the engine has stopped, you must wait for
canister will require ¾ of a full turn or one full turn 60 seconds in order to allow the fuel pressure to
in order to tighten the canister correctly. Refer to be purged from the high pressure fuel lines before
information on the canister. any service or repair is performed on the engine
6. Remove the container and dispose of the fluid in a Repair any leaks from the low pressure fuel system
safe place. If equipped, open the fuel supply valve. and from the cooling, lubrication or air systems.
7. Prime the fuel system. Refer to the Operation and Refer to Disassembly and assembly Manual, “Fuel
Maintenance Manual, “Fuel System - Prime” for Injection Lines - Install”.
more information.
NOTICE
Type Two Filter Do not allow dirt to enter the fuel system. Thoroughly
clean the area around a fuel system component that
will be disconnected. Fit a suitable cover over discon-
nected fuel system component.
trical components can cause a fire. To help pre- 1. Ensure that the fuel supply valve (if equipped) is in
vent possible injury, turn the start switch off when the OFF position. Place a suitable container under
changing fuel filters or water separator elements. the fuel filter in order to catch any fuel that might
Clean up fuel spills immediately. spill. Clean up any spilled fuel.
110 SEBU8139-02
Maintenance Section
Fuel Tank Water and Sediment - Drain
i02348492
Fuel Tank Water and Sediment

- Drain
SMCS Code: 1273-543-M&S
NOTICE
during performance of inspection, maintenance, test-
ing, adjusting, and repair of the product. Be prepared
to collect the fluid with suitable containers before
opening any compartment or disassembling any com-
ponent containing fluids.
Dispose of all fluids according to local regulations and

mandates.
Fuel Tank
g01333960
Illustration 106 Fuel quality is critical to the performance and to the
Typical example service life of the engine. Water in the fuel can cause
excessive wear to the fuel system.
2. Clean the outside of the fuel filter. Use 1U-8760
Chain Wrench in order to remove canister (2) from Water can be introduced into the fuel tank when the
the engine and dispose of the canister in a safe fuel tank is being filled.
place.
Condensation occurs during the heating and cooling
3. Lubricate O ring seal (1) with clean engine oil. of fuel. The condensation occurs as the fuel passes
Do not fill the new canister with fuel before the through the fuel system and the fuel returns to the
canister is installed. fuel tank. This causes water to accumulate in fuel
tanks. Draining the fuel tank regularly and obtaining
4. Do not use a tool in order to install the canister. fuel from reliable sources can help to eliminate water
Tighten the canister by hand. in the fuel.
5. Install the new canister. Spin on the canister until Drain the Water and the Sediment
the O ring seal contacts the sealing surface. Then
rotate the canister 360 degree in order to tighten Fuel tanks should contain some provision for draining
the canister correctly. water and draining sediment from the bottom of the
fuel tanks.
6. Remove the container and dispose of the fluid in a
safe place. If equipped, open the fuel supply valve. Open the drain valve on the bottom of the fuel tank
in order to drain the water and the sediment. Close
7. Prime the fuel system. Refer to the Operation and the drain valve.
Maintenance Manual, “Fuel System - Prime” for
more information. Check the fuel daily. Allow five minutes after the
fuel tank has been filled before draining water and
sediment from the fuel tank.
Fill the fuel tank after operating the engine in

order to drive out moist air. This will help prevent
condensation. Do not fill the tank to the top. The
fuel expands as the fuel gets warm. The tank may
overflow.
SEBU8139-02 111
Maintenance Section
Generator - Dry
Some fuel tanks use supply pipes that allow water • Oven method
and sediment to settle below the end of the fuel
supply pipe. Some fuel tanks use supply lines that NOTICE
take fuel directly from the bottom of the tank. If Do not allow the winding temperature to exceed 85 °C
the engine is equipped with this system, regular (185.0 °F). Temperatures that are greater than 85 °C
maintenance of the fuel system filter is important. (185.0 °F) will damage the winding insulation.
Fuel Storage Tanks

Self-Circulating Air Method
Drain the water and the sediment from the fuel
storage tank at the following intervals: Note: Disable the excitation before using this method.
• Weekly Run the engine and disconnect the generator load.

This will help circulate air. Operate the generator
• Service intervals space heaters.
• Refill of the tank Oven Method

This will help prevent water or sediment from being Place the entire generator inside a forced air drying
pumped from the storage tank into the engine fuel oven for four hours at 65 °C (149 °F).
tank.
NOTICE
If a bulk storage tank has been refilled or moved Use a forced air type oven rather than a radiant type
recently, allow adequate time for the sediment to oven.
settle before filling the engine fuel tank. Internal
baffles in the bulk storage tank will also help trap Radiant type ovens can cause localized overheating.
sediment. Filtering fuel that is pumped from the
storage tank helps to ensure the quality of the fuel.
When possible, water separators should be used.
i02283395
i03642821
Generator - Inspect
Generator - Dry SMCS Code: 4450-040
SMCS Code: 4450-569
NOTICE Personal injury or death can result from improper

Do not operate the generator if the windings are wet. If troubleshooting and repair procedures.
the generator is operated when the windings are wet,
damage can occur due to insulation breakdown. The following troubleshooting and repair proce-
dures should only be performed by qualified per-
sonnel familiar with this equipment.
When moisture is present or when moisture is
suspected in a generator, the generator must be
dried before being energized.
If the drying procedure does not restore the insulation

The high voltage that is produced by an operating
resistance to an acceptable value, the winding should
generator set can cause severe injury or death.
be reconditioned.
Before performing any maintenance or repairs,
ensure that the generator will not start.
Note: For additional information, refer to Special
Instruction, SEHS9124 .
Place the engine control switch in the “OFF” posi-
tion. Attach “DO NOT OPERATE” tags to all start-
Drying Methods ing controls. Disconnect the batteries or disable
the starting system. Lock out all switchgear and
The following methods can be used for drying a automatic transfer switches that are associated
generator: with the generator.
• Self-circulating air method

112 SEBU8139-02
Maintenance Section
Generator - Inspect
Refer to Safety Section, “Generator Isolating for

Maintenance” for information regarding the procedure NOTICE
to safely isolate the generator. Do not use trichloroethane, perchlorethylene,
trichloroethane or any alkaline products to clean the
Proper maintenance of electrical equipment requires generator.
periodic visual examination of the generator and
periodic visual examination of the windings. Proper
maintenance of electrical equipment also requires Cleaning may be required at the point of installation.
appropriate electrical checks and appropriate thermal At this point, complete disassembly of the generator
checks. Insulation material should be examined for may not be necessary or feasible. In this case,
cracks. The insulation material should be examined a vacuum cleaner should be used to pick up the
for accumulations of dirt and dust. If there is an following items: dry dirt, dust, and carbon. This will
insulation resistance value that is below normal, a prevent the spreading of these contaminants.
conductive path may be present. This conductive
path may be made of one of the following materials: A small nonconductive tube may need to be
connected to the vacuum cleaner. This will allow the
• Carbon vacuum cleaner to clean the surfaces that are not
exposed. After most of the dust has been removed,
• Salt a small brush may be attached to the vacuum hose
in order to loosen dirt that is more firmly attached to
• Metal dust the surface.
• Dirt that is saturated with moisture After the initial cleaning with a vacuum, compressed
air may be used to remove the remaining dust and
These contaminants will develop a conductive path dirt. Compressed air that is used for cleaning should
which may produce shorts. Cleaning is advisable if be free of moisture and free of oil. Air pressure
heavy accumulations of dirt can be seen or if heavy should be a maximum of 210 kPa (30 psi) in order to
accumulations of dust can be seen. If excess dirt is prevent mechanical damage to the insulation. If the
the cause of a restriction in the ventilation, cleaning above cleaning procedures are not effective, consult
is also advisable. Restricted ventilation will cause a Caterpillar dealer.
excessive heating.
Cleaning (Disassembled
NOTICE Generators)
To avoid the possibility of deterioration to the genera-
tor windings, do not clean the generator unless there
is visual, electrical, or thermal evidence that dirt is NOTICE
present. Do not use water to clean the generator.
If harmful dirt accumulations are present, a variety NOTICE

of cleaning techniques are available. The cleaning Do not use trichloroethane, perchlorethylene,
procedure that is used may be determined by one of trichloroethane or any alkaline products to clean the
the items on the following list: generator.
• The extent of the cleaning procedure that is being An initial insulation resistance check should be
attempted
made on the generator in order to confirm electrical
integrity. A minimum reading of one megohm would
• The type of enclosure of the generator be expected with severely contaminated generators.
A zero megohm reading may indicate an insulation
• The voltage rating of the generator breakdown. An insulation breakdown requires more
than cleaning. An insulation breakdown requires
• The type of dirt that is being removed repair.
Cleaning (Assembled Generators) Use the following for cleaning the stator, the rotor, the
exciter and the diode bridge:
NOTICE
Do not use water to clean the generator. • Unleaded Gasoline
• Toluene
• Benzene
SEBU8139-02 113
Maintenance Section
Generator Load - Check
• Ciclohexare The power factor can be referred to as the efficiency

of the load. This can be expressed as the ratio of kVA
Avoid permitting the solvent to run into the slots. to actual kW. The power factor can be calculated by
Apply the solvent with a brush. Use a sponge on the dividing kW by kVA. Power factor is expressed as a
windings frequently in order to remove the debris. decimal. Power factor is used to mean the portion
Dry the winding with a dry cloth. Allow the solvent to of current that is supplied to a system that is doing
evaporate before reassembling the generator. useful work. The portion of the current that is not
doing useful work is absorbed in maintaining the
Allow the generator to dry at room temperature. magnetic field in motors. This current (reactive load)
Check the insulation resistance. The insulation can be maintained without engine power.
resistance should now be normal. If the insulation
resistance is not normal, repeat the procedure.
i01593517
Note: For more information on drying methods, refer

to Special Instructions, SEHS9124, “Cleaning and
Generator Set - Test
Drying of Electric Set Generators”. SMCS Code: 4450-081
i01878834
Generator Load - Check Personal injury or death can result from high volt-
age.
SMCS Code: 4450-535-LA
When power generation equipment must be in op-
eration to make tests and/or adjustments, high
voltage and current are present.
Personal injury or death can result from high volt-
age. Improper test equipment can fail and present a
high voltage shock hazard to its user.
When power generation equipment must be in op-
eration to make tests and/or adjustments, high Make sure the testing equipment is designed for
voltage and current are present. and correctly operated for high voltage and cur-
rent tests being made.
Improper test equipment can fail and present a
high voltage shock hazard to its user. When servicing or repairing electric power gener-
ation equipment:
Make sure the testing equipment is designed for
and correctly operated for high voltage and cur- • Make sure the unit is off-line (disconnected
rent tests being made. from utility and/or other generators power
service), and either locked out or tagged DO
NOT OPERATE.
During normal operation, monitor the power factor
and monitor generator loading.
• Make sure the generator engine is stopped.
When a three-phase generator is installed or when
a three-phase generator is reconnected, ensure that • Make sure all batteries are disconnected.
the total current in any one phase does not exceed
the nameplate rating. Each phase should carry the • Make sure all capacitors are discharged.
same load. This allows the three-phase generator
to work at the rated capacity. If one phase current Table 23
exceeds the nameplate amperage, an electrical Tools Needed
imbalance will occur. An electrical imbalance can
result in an electrical overload and an electrical Part Number Part Quantity
imbalance can result in overheating on three-phase Digital
generators. This is not applicable to single-phase 6V-7070 1
Multimeter
generators.
12 VDC battery 1
Potential
1
Transformer
114 SEBU8139-02
Maintenance Section
Hoses and Clamps - Inspect/Replace
The generator set functional test is a simplified test Inspect all hoses for leaks that are caused by the
that can be performed in order to determine if the following conditions:
generator is functional. The generator set functional
test should be performed on a generator set that is • Cracking
under load.
• Softness
The generator set functional test determines if the
following statements happen: • Loose clamps
• A phase voltage is being generated. Replace hoses that are cracked or soft. Tighten any
loose clamps.
• The phase voltages are balanced.
Check for the following conditions:
• The phase voltages change relative to engine
speed. • End fittings that are damaged or leaking
The generator set functional test consists of the • Outer covering that is chafed or cut
following steps:
• Exposed wire that is used for reinforcement
1. Stop the generator. Connect the potential
transformer's high voltage winding to the • Outer covering that is ballooning locally
generator terminals (T1) and (T2). Connect
the voltmeter to the low voltage winding. If two • Flexible part of the hose that is kinked or crushed
transformers are available, connect the high
voltage winding of the second transformer to the • Armoring that is embedded in the outer covering
generator terminals (T1) and (T3). Connect the
secondary terminals that correspond to generator A constant torque hose clamp can be used in place
terminal (T2) of both transformers together. of any standard hose clamp. Ensure that the constant
torque hose clamp is the same size as the standard
2. Disconnect wires “E+” and “E-” from the voltage clamp.
regulator. Disconnect the generator from the load.
Due to extreme temperature changes, the hose will
3. Connect a 12 VDC automotive battery to wires harden. Hardening of the hoses will cause hose
“E+” and “E-”. clamps to loosen. This can result in leaks. A constant
torque hose clamp will help to prevent loose hose
4. Measure the AC voltage across the low voltage clamps.
terminals of the transformer that correspond to the
following generator terminals: “T1” and “T2”, “T2” Each installation application can be different. The
and “T3”, and “T3” and “T1”. Record the voltages. differences depend on the following factors:
• Type of hose
i02349879
Hoses and Clamps - • Type of fitting material

Inspect/Replace • Anticipated expansion and contraction of the hose
SMCS Code: 7554-040; 7554-510 • Anticipated expansion and contraction of the
fittings
Replace the Hoses and the Clamps

penetration and burn hazards. High pressure fu- Refer to the OEM information for further information
el spray may cause a fire hazard. Failure to fol- on removing and replacing fuel hoses (if equipped).
structions may cause personal injury or death. The coolant system and the hoses for the coolant
system are not usually supplied by Perkins. The
following text describes a typical method of replacing
If you inspect the engine in operation, always use coolant hoses. Refer to the OEM information for
the proper inspection procedure in order to avoid further information on the coolant system and the
a fluid penetration hazard. Refer to Operation and
hoses for the coolant system.
Maintenance Manual, “General hazard Information”.
SEBU8139-02 115
Maintenance Section
Insulation - Test
i03878716
Insulation - Test
ous burns. To open the cooling system filler cap, SMCS Code: 4453-081; 4454-081; 4457-081;
stop the engine and wait until the cooling system 4470-081
sure.
1. Stop the engine. Allow the engine to cool. generator set can cause severe injury or death.
Before performing any maintenance or repairs,
2. Loosen the cooling system filler cap slowly in ensure that the generator will not start.
order to relieve any pressure. Remove the cooling
system filler cap. Place the engine control switch in the “OFF” posi-
Note: Drain the coolant into a suitable, clean ing controls. Disconnect the batteries or disable
container. The coolant can be reused. the starting system. Lock out all switchgear and
automatic transfer switches that are associated
3. Drain the coolant from the cooling system to a with the generator.
level that is below the hose that is being replaced.
Table 24
4. Remove the hose clamps.
TOOLS NEEDED
5. Disconnect the old hose. Part Number Tool Quantity
6. Replace the old hose with a new hose. 142-5055 Insulation Tester 1
Megohmmeter
7. Install the hose clamps with a torque wrench.
Note: For the correct coolant, see this Operation and

Maintenance Manual, “Fluid Recommendations”.
Personal injury or death can result from electro-
8. Refill the cooling system. Refer to the OEM cution.
information for further information on refilling the
cooling system. The megohmmeter is applying a high voltage to
the circuit.
cooling system filler cap's seals. Replace the To avoid electrocution, do not touch the instru-
cooling system filler cap if the seals are damaged. ment leads without first discharging them. When
Install the cooling system filler cap. finished testing also discharge the generator
windings.
10. Start the engine. Inspect the cooling system for
leaks. The following materials will cause the winding
insulation to deteriorate:
• moisture (water)
• dust
• grease
• other foreign matter within the generator
This deterioration reduces the resistance of the
insulation. This test will measure the resistance of
the winding insulation.
116 SEBU8139-02
Maintenance Section
Insulation - Test
The insulation tester (megohmmeter) produces a The specified insulation resistance is an approximate
high potential voltage between the test leads. During value. It can be possible to operate the generator with
the test, a small current flows. The tester converts less than the specified value. However, a generator
this current to a resistance reading. that has a low winding insulation resistance will be
more likely to have a failure.
The insulation test is performed as part of periodic
maintenance in order to detect the deterioration of the
winding insulation. When there is a rapid decrease
in the insulation resistance in a short amount of time,
the generator needs to be cleaned. Personal injury or death can result from improper
troubleshooting and repair procedures.
Note: For information on generator cleaning, refer to
Special Instruction, SEHS9124. The following troubleshooting and repair proce-
dures should only be performed by qualified per-
When generators have not been used for a period sonnel familiar with this equipment.
of time, moisture can accumulate. Therefore, the
insulation test should be performed on generators The insulation test gives accurate results only when
that have been idle. If moisture is known to exist, the generator windings are free of moisture and the
the windings must be dried prior to testing. Refer to generator windings are at room temperature.
Testing And Adjusting, “Generator - Dry”.
Each winding must have a minimum insulation
The insulation test should be performed on resistance of one megohm.
generators that are being used for the first time. The
insulation test should be performed more frequently
in the following cases: Main Armature (Stator L4)
1. Remove the load from the generator by either of
• The generator set is operating in a humid the following:
environment.
• The generator set is not protected from the • Open the line circuit breaker.
elements in an enclosed area.
• Open the following load connections: T1, T2,
T3, and T0.
• The generator set has not been run under load for
three months.
Prevent these wires from coming into contact
Note: Space heaters may need to be used around with each other and prevent these wires from
the generator set in the following cases: contacting ground.
2. Isolate the main armature (L4) from the voltage

• The generator set has not been run under load for regulator by disconnecting the wires for voltage
three months.
sensing. If generator lead (T0) is connected to the
generator frame or ground, open the connection.
• The generator set is exposed to a sea water
environment.
3. Connect one test lead of the insulation tester
(megohmmeter) to the generator enclosure
• The humidity is above 75 percent. (ground).
• A test result was below 3 megohms. 4. Connect the other test lead of the insulation tester
The winding needs to be reconditioned or the winding (megohmmeter) to generator lead (T0).
needs to be replaced in the following cases:
5. The insulation resistance must be one megohm
or more.
• The measured insulation resistance falls below the
specified amount. The cleanup procedure does not
correct the discrepancy. Exciter Field (Stator L1)
• The measured insulation resistance falls below the 1. Isolate exciter field (L1) from the voltage regulator
specified amount. The drying procedure does not by disconnecting wires 5+ and 6-. Prevent these
correct the discrepancy. wires from coming into contact with each other
and prevent these wires from contacting ground.
SEBU8139-02 117
Maintenance Section
Overhaul Considerations
2. Connect one test lead of the insulation tester Oil Consumption as an Overhaul
(megohmmeter) to the generator enclosure
(ground).
Indicator
Oil consumption, fuel consumption, and maintenance
information can be used to estimate the total
(megohmmeter) to exciter field lead (5+ or 6-).
operating cost for your Caterpillar engine. Oil
consumption can also be used to estimate the
4. Measure the resistance of the exciter field winding
required capacity of a makeup oil tank that is suitable
insulation to ground. The insulation resistance
for the maintenance intervals.
must be a minimum of 0.25 megohm (250000
ohms).
Oil consumption is in proportion to the percentage
of the rated engine load. As the percentage of the
Exciter Armature (Rotor L2) engine load is increased, the amount of oil that is
consumed per hour also increases.
1. Isolate exciter armature (L2) from the rectifier
circuit. Disconnect the three wires of the exciter The oil consumption rate (brake specific oil
armature from the rectifier blocks. consumption) is measured in grams per kW/h (lb per
bhp). The brake specific oil consumption (BSOC)
2. Connect one test lead of the insulation tester depends on the engine load. Consult your Caterpillar
(megohmmeter) to the rotor shaft. dealer for assistance in determining the typical oil
consumption rate for your engine.
(megohmmeter) to any one exciter field lead. When an engine's oil consumption has risen to three
times the original oil consumption rate due to normal
4. The insulation resistance must be a minimum of wear, an engine overhaul should be scheduled.
0.25 megohm (250000 ohms). There may be a corresponding increase in blowby
and a slight increase in fuel consumption.
i02299454
Overhaul Options
Before Failure Overhaul
SMCS Code: 7595-043
A planned overhaul before failure may be the best
Reduced hours of operation at full load will result in a value for the following reasons:
lower average power demand. A decreased average
power demand should increase both the engine • Costly unplanned downtime can be avoided.
service life and the overhaul interval.
• Many original parts can be reused according to the
The need for an overhaul is generally indicated by standards for reusable parts.
increased fuel consumption and by reduced power.
• The engine's service life can be extended without
The following factors are important when a decision the risk of a major catastrophe due to engine
is being made on the proper time for an engine failure.
overhaul:
• The best cost/value relationship per hour of
• The need for preventive maintenance extended life can be attained.
• The quality of the fuel that is being used After Failure Overhaul
• The operating conditions Many options are available if a major engine failure
occurs. An overhaul should be performed if the
• The results of the S·O·S analysis engine block or the crankshaft can be repaired.
If the engine block is repairable and/or the crankshaft

is repairable, the overhaul cost should be less than
the cost of a new engine with a similar exchange
core.
This lower cost can be attributed to these aspects:
• Caterpillar dealer exchange components

118 SEBU8139-02
Maintenance Section
• Caterpillar Inc. remanufactured exchange Inspection and/or Replacement

components
The following components may not last until the
Overhaul Recommendation second overhaul.
To minimize downtime, Caterpillar Inc. recommends • Piston rings

a scheduled engine overhaul by your Caterpillar
dealer before the engine fails. This will provide you • Thrust bearings
with the best cost/value relationship.
• Main bearings
Note: Overhaul programs vary according to the
engine application and according to the dealer that • Connecting rod bearings
performs the overhaul. Consult your Caterpillar
dealer for specific information about the available • Crankshaft seals
overhaul programs and about overhaul services for
extending the engine life. • Engine mounts
If an overhaul is performed without overhaul service • Hoses

from your Caterpillar dealer, be aware of the following
Caterpillar Inc. recommends the installation of new
maintenance recommendations.
parts at each overhaul period.
Rebuild or Exchange Inspect these parts while the engine is disassembled
for an overhaul.
These components should be inspected according to
the instructions that are found in various Caterpillar Inspect the crankshaft for any of the following
reusability publications. The Special Publication, conditions:
SEBF8029 lists the reusability publications that are
needed for inspecting the engine parts. • Deflection
If the parts comply with the established inspection • Damage to the journals
specifications that are expressed in the reusable
parts guideline, the parts should be reused. • Bearing material that has seized to the journals
Parts that are not within the established inspection Check the journal taper and the profile of the
specifications should be dealt with in one of the crankshaft journals. Check these components by
following manners: interpreting the wear patterns on the following
components:
• Salvaging
• Rod bearing
• Repairing
• Main bearings
• Replacing
Note: If the crankshaft is removed for any reason,
Using out-of-spec parts can result in the following use the magnetic particle inspection process to check
problems: for cracks in the crankshaft.
• Unscheduled downtime Inspect the camshaft for damage to the journals and
to the lobes.
• Costly repairs
Note: If the camshaft is removed for any reason, use
• Damage to other engine parts the magnetic particle inspection process to check for
cracks in the camshaft.
• Reduced engine efficiency
Inspect the following components for signs of wear or
• Increased fuel consumption for signs of scuffing:
Reduced engine efficiency and increased fuel • Camshaft bearings
consumption translates into higher operating costs.
Therefore, Caterpillar Inc. recommends repairing • Valve lifters
out-of-spec parts or replacing out-of-spec parts.
SEBU8139-02 119
Maintenance Section
Rotating Rectifier - Check
Testing A coolant analysis can be conducted in order to verify

the condition of the water that is being used in the
Test the following components during the overhaul. cooling system. A full water analysis can be obtained
by consulting your local water utility company or
• Fuel injection nozzles an agricultural agent. Private laboratories are also
available for water analysis.
• Fuel injection pump
Caterpillar Inc. recommends an S·O·S Coolant
Testing the fuel system during the overhaul will Analysis (Level II).
ensure that your engine operates at peak efficiency.
Your Caterpillar dealer can provide these services S·O·S Coolant Analysis (Level II)
and components in order to ensure that your
fuel system is operating within the appropriate An S·O·S Coolant Analysis (Level II) is a
specifications. comprehensive coolant analysis which completely
analyzes the coolant and the effects on the cooling
Cleaning system. An S·O·S Coolant Analysis (Level II) provides
the following information:
Caterpillar Inc. recommends the use of Hydrosolv
Liquid Cleaners. Table 25 lists the Hydrosolv Liquid • Complete S·O·S Coolant Analysis (Level I)
Cleaners that are available from your Caterpillar
dealer. • Visual inspection of properties
Table 25 • Identification of metal corrosion
HydrosolvLiquid Cleaners
• Identification of contaminants
Part
Description Size
Number • Identification of built up impurities (corrosion and
scale)
1U-8812 4 L (1 US gallon) S·O·S Coolant Analysis (Level II) provides a report of

the results of both the analysis and the maintenance
Hydrosolv4165 recommendations.
1U-5490 19 L (5 US gallon)
For more information about coolant analysis, see
8T-7570 208 L (55 US gallon) your Caterpillar dealer.
1U-8804 4 L (1 US gallon) i01880286

Hydrosolv100
1U-5492 19 L (5 US gallon) Rotating Rectifier - Check
8T-5571 208 L (55 US gallon) SMCS Code: 4465-535
Obtain Coolant Analysis

The concentration of supplemental coolant additive The high voltage that is produced by an operating
(SCA) should be checked regularly with test kits generator set can cause severe injury or death.
or with S·O·S Coolant Analysis (Level I). Further Before performing any maintenance or repairs,
coolant analysis is recommended when the engine ensure that the generator will not start.
is overhauled.
Place the engine control switch in the “OFF” posi-
For example, considerable deposits are found in the tion. Attach “DO NOT OPERATE” tags to all start-
water jacket areas on the external cooling system, but ing controls. Disconnect the batteries or disable
the concentrations of coolant additives were carefully the starting system. Lock out all switchgear and
maintained. The coolant water probably contained automatic transfer switches that are associated
minerals that were deposited on the engine over time. with the generator.
Check the exciter armature. Ensure that the rotating

rectifier is tight. If a failure of a rectifier is suspected,
refer to Maintenance Procedure, “Rotating Rectifier -
Test”.
120 SEBU8139-02
Maintenance Section
Rotating Rectifier - Test
i02290281 b. Place the black test lead on the negative “-”

terminal (1). Place the red test lead on the
Rotating Rectifier - Test following rectifier terminals: AC terminal (2), AC
terminal (3), and AC terminal (4). In all cases,
SMCS Code: 4465-081 the meter should read “OL” (overload).
3. To test the positive rectifier block, follow these

steps:
generator set can cause severe injury or death. a. Place the red test lead on the positive “+”
Before performing any maintenance or repairs, rectifier terminal (1). Place the black test lead
ensure that the generator will not start. on the following rectifier terminals: AC terminal
(2), AC terminal (3), and AC terminal (4). In all
Place the engine control switch in the “OFF” posi- cases, the meter should read “OL” (overload).
ing controls. Disconnect the batteries or disable b. Place the black test lead on the positive “+”
the starting system. Lock out all switchgear and rectifier terminal (1). Place the red test lead on
automatic transfer switches that are associated the following rectifier terminals: AC terminal
with the generator. (2), AC terminal (3), and AC terminal (4). All
readings on the meter should be between 0.4
and 1.0.
Note: A shorted diode can cause damage to the

exciter rotor. If a diode is shorted, check the exciter
rotor. Refer to the Testing and Adjusting, “Winding -
Test” and Testing and Adjusting, “Insulation - Test”.
Perform these tests.
i02348493
Starting Motor - Inspect

SMCS Code: 1451-040; 1453-040
g00992269 Caterpillar recommends a scheduled inspection of
Illustration 107
(1) Positive DC terminal or Negative DC terminal the starting motor. If the starting motor fails, the
(2) AC terminal engine may not start in an emergency situation.
(3) AC terminal
(4) AC terminal Check the starting motor for correct operation. Check
the electrical connections and clean the electrical
The following procedure tests all three diodes within connections. Refer to the Systems Operation, Testing
a block. Check the positive rectifier block and the and Adjusting Manual, “Electric Starting System -
negative rectifier block. If any meter reading does not Test” for more information on the checking procedure
fall within the given ranges, replace the rectifier block. and for specifications or consult your Caterpillar
dealer for assistance.
1. Set the digital multimeter on the diode range.
Remove all leads from the rectifier block.
i04219023
2. To test the negative rectifier block, follow these
steps: Turbocharger - Inspect
a. Place the red test lead on the negative “-” SMCS Code: 1052-040; 1052
terminal (1). Place the black test lead on the
following rectifier terminals: AC terminal (2), AC A regular visual inspection of the turbocharger is
terminal (3), and AC terminal (4). All readings recommended. If the turbocharger fails during engine
on the meter should be between 0.4 and 1.0. operation, damage to the turbocharger compressor
wheel and/or to the engine may occur. Damage to the
turbocharger compressor wheel can cause additional
damage to the pistons, the valves, and the cylinder
head.
SEBU8139-02 121
Maintenance Section
Walk-Around Inspection
The presence of oil may be the result of extended

NOTICE engine operation at low idle. The presence of oil
Turbocharger bearing failures can cause large quanti- may also be the result of a restriction of the line
ties of oil to enter the air intake and exhaust systems. for the intake air (clogged air filters), which causes
Loss of engine lubricant can result in serious engine the turbocharger to slobber.
damage.
4. Inspect the bore of the housing of the turbine
Minor leakage of oil into a turbocharger under extend- outlet for corrosion.
ed low idle operation should not cause problems as
long as a turbocharger bearing failure has not oc- 5. Fasten the air intake pipe and the exhaust outlet
cured. pipe to the turbocharger housing. Ensure that all
clamps are installed correctly and that all clamps
When a turbocharger bearing failure is accompanied are tightened securely.
by a significant engine performance loss (exhaust
smoke or engine rpm up at no load), do not continue
i03577563
engine operation until the turbocharger is renewed.
A visual inspection of the turbocharger can minimize
unscheduled downtime. A visual inspection of the SMCS Code: 1000-040
turbocharger can also reduce the chance for potential
damage to other engine parts. Inspect the Tube of the Crankcase
Breather
Removal and Installation
For options regarding the removal, installation, and
replacement, consult your Cat dealer. Refer to the
Disassembly and Assembly, “Turbocharger - Remove
and Turbocharger - Install” and Systems Operation,
Testing and Adjusting, “Turbocharger - Inspect” for
further information.
Inspecting
NOTICE
The compressor housing for the turbocharger must
not be removed from the turbocharger for inspection
or removed for the cleaning of the compressor.
1. Remove the pipe from the turbocharger exhaust

outlet and remove the air intake pipe to the
turbocharger. Visually inspect the piping for the
presence of oil. Clean the interior of the pipes g01905095
in order to prevent dirt from entering during Illustration 108
reassembly.
Inspect the breather tube (1) for damage. Ensure that
2. Check for obvious heat discoloration of the the outlet (2) is clean and free from any obstructions.
turbocharger. Check for any loose bolts or any Ice can cause obstructions in adverse weather
missing bolts. Check for damage to the oil supply conditions.
line and the oil drain line. Check for cracks in
the housing of the turbocharger. Ensure that the Inspect the Engine for Leaks and
compressor wheel can rotate freely.
for Loose Connections
3. Check for the presence of oil. If oil is leaking from
the back side of the compressor wheel, there is a A walk-around inspection should only take a few
possibility of a failed turbocharger oil seal. minutes. When the time is taken to perform these
checks, costly repairs and accidents can be avoided.
122 SEBU8139-02
Maintenance Section
For maximum engine service life, make a thorough • Inspect the wiring harness for damage.
inspection of the engine compartment before starting
the engine. Look for items such as oil leaks or coolant Belts for multiple groove pulleys must be replaced as
leaks, loose bolts, worn belts, loose connections and matched sets. If only one belt is replaced, the belt will
trash buildup. Make repairs, as needed: carry more load than the belts that are not replaced.
The older belts are stretched. The additional load on
• The guards must be in the correct place. Repair the new belt could cause the belt to break.
damaged guards or replace missing guards.
High Pressure Fuel Lines
• Wipe all caps and plugs before the engine is
serviced in order to reduce the chance of system
contamination.
NOTICE Contact with high pressure fuel may cause fluid

For any type of leak (coolant, lube, or fuel) clean up the penetration and burn hazards. High pressure fu-
fluid. If leaking is observed, find the source and correct el spray may cause a fire hazard. Failure to fol-
the leak. If leaking is suspected, check the fluid levels low these inspection, maintenance and service in-
more often than recommended until the leak is found structions may cause personal injury or death.
or fixed, or until the suspicion of a leak is proved to be
unwarranted. After the engine has stopped, you must wait for
10 minutes in order to allow the fuel pressure to
NOTICE be purged from the high pressure fuel lines before
Accumulated grease and/or oil on an engine is a fire any service or repair is performed on the engine
hazard. Remove the accumulated grease and oil. Re- fuel lines. If necessary, perform minor adjustments.
fer to this Operation and Maintenance Manual, “En- Repair any leaks from the low pressure fuel system
gine - Clean” for more information. and from the cooling, lubrication or air systems.
• Ensure that the cooling system hoses are correctly Injection Lines - Install”.
clamped and that the cooling system hoses are
tight. Check for leaks. Check the condition of all If you inspect the engine in operation, always use
pipes. the proper inspection procedure in order to avoid
a fluid penetration hazard. Refer to Operation and
• Inspect the water pump for coolant leaks. Maintenance Manual, “General hazard Information”.
Note: The water pump seal is lubricated by the Visually inspect the high pressure fuel lines for
coolant in the cooling system. It is normal for a small damage or signs of fuel leakage. Replace any
amount of leakage to occur as the engine cools down damaged high pressure fuel lines or high pressure
and the parts contract. fuel lines that have leaked.
Excessive coolant leakage may indicate the need to Ensure that all clips on the high pressure fuel lines
replace the water pump. Remove the water pump. are in place and that the clips are not loose.
Refer to Disassembly and Assembly , “Water Pump -
Remove and Install”. For more information, consult • Inspect the rest of the fuel system for leaks. Look
your Perkins dealer or your Perkins distributor. for loose fuel line clamps.
• Inspect the lubrication system for leaks at the front • Drain the water and the sediment from the fuel
crankshaft seal, the rear crankshaft seal, the oil tank on a daily basis in order to ensure that only
pan, the oil filters and the rocker cover. clean fuel enters the fuel system.
• Inspect the piping for the air intake system and the • Inspect the wiring and the wiring harnesses for
elbows for cracks and for loose clamps. Ensure loose connections and for worn wires or frayed
that hoses and tubes are not contacting other wires. Check for any loose tie-wraps or missing
hoses, tubes, wiring harnesses, etc. tie-wraps.
• Ensure that the areas around the rotating parts are • Inspect the ground strap for a good connection and
clear. for good condition.
• Inspect the alternator belts and any accessory

drive belts for cracks, breaks or other damage.
SEBU8139-02 123
Maintenance Section
Water Pump - Inspect
• Disconnect any battery chargers that are not

protected against the current drain of the starting
motor. Check the condition and the electrolyte level
of the batteries, unless the engine is equipped with
a maintenance free battery.
• Check the condition of the gauges. Replace any

gauges that are cracked. Replace any gauge that
can not be calibrated.
i02794230
Water Pump - Inspect

SMCS Code: 1361-040; 1361
A failed water pump might cause severe engine

overheating problems that could result in the following
conditions:
• Cracks in the cylinder head

• A piston seizure
• Other potential damage to the engine
Note: The water pump seal is lubricated by the
coolant in the cooling system. It is normal for a small
amount of leakage to occur as the engine cools down
and parts contract.
Visually inspect the water pump for leaks.
Note: If engine coolant enters the engine lubricating

system the lubricating oil and the engine oil filter must
be replaced. This will remove any contamination that
is caused by the coolant and this will prevent any
irregular oil samples.
The water pump is not a serviceable item. In order to

install a new water pump, refer to the Disassembly
and Assembly Manual, “Water Pump - Remove and
Install” or contact your Caterpillar dealer.
Service Parts List
Axle 212/975
APL-2221
February 2012
SPICER OFF-HIGHWAY AXLE DIVISION *212/975* 2139584315
Data rilascio
02/11/2011
N° foglio
1
Denominazione Gruppo tipo Modello Cliente: PUTZMEISTER IBERICA C.I. e data
Ponte differenziale sterzante con riduzioni finali epicicloidali 212 975 ultima
Cod.cliente: 150038 N° disegno 212.97.000.975 modifica
Quantità olio Macchina: MIXER MIXCRETE 4 R 1726
Note 02/11/2011
ATTENZIONE:
- I gruppi vanno spediti riempiti di olio
Flangia a flangia [mm] 1920.

Rapporto coppia conica 8:31
Rapporto riduzioni finali 1:6 - " HY " - 3 sat. LD - int.col.335
Sterzatura [gradi] 30
Denominazione Sottogruppo Caratteristiche N°Complessivo
Scatola e 212-01/07 212.01.000.01

coperchi
Differenziale 212-04/84 Senza blocco 112.04.000.05
Mozzo ruota 212-06/496 Colonnette M22 L=76 - Dadi piani 212.06.000.10

Flangia DIN 120 - 8f. Ø10
Freno 112-07/85 A disco in bagno d'olio 8 dischi Wellman + staz. a com. 212.07.000.06
negativo interno - Gioco 1 mm
Cilindro sterzo 212-24/86 Cilindro 180 BAR- Con sensore ottico 30°dietro - 212.24.000.02
conn.DEUTSCH-cavo L=500 - Alim.85°basso - M18x1,5
Particolari sciolti
212-01-0002
212/975 1
CENTRAL HOUSING 1/02/12
212 212-01/07
1 001.05.1178 3 ANELLO OR
JOINT OR
O - RING
O - RING
2 112.01.074.01 1 COPERCHIO
COUVERCLE
COVER
DECKEL
3 212.01.018.01 1 SCATOLA
CARTER
HOUSING
GEHAEUSE
4 171.01.015.04 1 TAPPO
BOUCHON
PLUG
STOPFEN
5 112.01.018.02 1 TAPPO SFIATO
RENIFLARD
VENT
ENTLUEFTER
6
7 112.01.610.01 1 TAPPO
BOUCHON
PLUG
STOPFEN
8 112.01.610.03 1 TAPPO MAGNETICO
BOUCHON MAGNETIQUE
MAGNET PLUG
MAGNETSTOPFEN
9 002.02.0088 1 ANELLO DI SICUREZZA
ARRETOIR
CIRCLIP
SICHERUNGSRING
212-04-0002
212/975 1
DIFFERENTIAL 1/02/12
212 212-04/84
1 001.05.3158 1 ANELLO OR
JOINT OR
O - RING
O - RING
2 013.01.3117 1 SPESSORE
013.01.3118 1 CALE
013.01.3119 1 SHIM
013.01.3120 1 PASS - SCHEIBE
013.01.4513 1
013.01.4514 1
3 112.04.510.08 1 COPPIA CONICA
COUPLE CONIQUE
BEVEL GEAR SET
KEGEL- UND TELLERRADPAAR
4 005.09.1039 2 CUSCINETTO A RULLI CONICI
ROULEMENT A R. CONIQUES
TAPER ROLLER BEARING
KEGELROLLENLAGER
5 112.04.016.02 2 GHIERA
ECROU
RING NUT
WELLENMUTTER
6 016.30.4289 4 VITE
VIS
BOLT
SCHRAUBE
7 016.30.4162 2 VITE
VIS
BOLT
SCHRAUBE
8 016.28.3390 12 VITE
VIS
BOLT
SCHRAUBE
9 112.04.007.01 2 RONDELLA DI RASAMENTO
RONDELLE
FRICTION WASHER
ANLAUFSCHEIBE
10 112.04.005.01 2 PLANETARIO
PLANETAIRE
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR
AUSGLEICHSWELLENRAD
212-04-0002
212/975 2
212 212-04/84
11 112.04.006.03 4 PERNO
AXE
PIN
BOLZEN
ARRETOIR
CIRCLIP
SICHERUNGSRING
RONDELLE
FRICTION WASHER
ANLAUFSCHEIBE
14 112.04.004.04 4 SATELLITE
SATELLITE
DIFFERENTIAL PINION
AUSGLEICHSKEGELRAD
15 112.04.001.04 1 SCATOLA DIFFERENZIALE
CARTER DIFFERENTIEL
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
DIFFERENTIALGEHAEUSE
KEGELROLLENLAGER
17 013.01.1279 1 SPESSORE
013.01.1281 1 CALE
013.01.3055 1 SHIM
013.01.3066 1 PASS - SCHEIBE
18 112.04.009.02 1 DISTANZIALE
ENTRETOISE
SPACER
DISTANZRING
19 953.04.012.01 1 GHIERA
ECROU
RING NUT
WELLENMUTTER
20 001.03.4328 1 ANELLO DI TENUTA
JOINT D'ETANCHEITE
SEAL
DICHTRING
212-04-0002
212/975 3
212 212-04/84
21
22 112.04.710.07 1 FLANGIA
BRIDE
FLANGE
FLANSCH
23 357.14.139.01 1 DADO
ECROU
NUT
MUTTER
ARRETOIR
CIRCLIP
SICHERUNGSRING
25 112.04.702.01 1 DIFFERENZIALE
DIFFERENTIEL
DIFFERENTIAL
DIFFERENTIAL
212-06-0001
212/975 1
HUB REDUCTION 1/02/12
212 212-06/496
1 006.03.0197 2 DADO
ECROU
NUT
MUTTER
2 016.13.3271 2 VITE
VIS
BOLT
SCHRAUBE
3 212.06.043.03 2 BRACCIO
CORPS D'ESSIEU
AXLE CASE
ACHSKOERPER
4 212.06.052.02 24 PRIGIONIERO
GOUJON
STUD
STIFTSCHRAUBE
5 011.17.2952 32 RONDELLA
RONDELLE
WASHER
SCHEIBE
6 212.06.700.01 2 BUSSOLA
MANCHON DE REDUCTION
REDUCTION BUSHING
ZWISCHENBUCHSE
7 729.06.009.01 2 ANELLO DI TENUTA
JOINT D'ETANCHEITE
SEAL
DICHTRING
8 005.01.0121 2 CUSCINETTO A SFERE
ROULEMENT A BILLES
BALL BEARING
RILLENKUGELLAGER
ARRETOIR
CIRCLIP
SICHERUNGSRING
10 001.05.1389 2 ANELLO OR
JOINT OR
O - RING
O - RING
212-06-0001
212/975 2
212 212-06/496
11 212.06.615.03 2 GIUNTO
JOINT
JOINT
GELENK
12 290.06.020.03 1 BRONZINA
1 DOUILLE
THRUST BUSHING
ANLAUFBUCHSE
13 212.06.023.03 2 BOCCOLA
DOUILLE
BUSHING
BUCHSE
14 016.28.3390 24 VITE
VIS
BOLT
SCHRAUBE
15 212.06.007.03 2 COPERCHIO
COUVERCLE
COVER
DECKEL
16 734.07.015.01 2 TAPPO
BOUCHON
PLUG
STOPFEN
17 008.01.0213 2 INGRASSATORE
2 GRAISSEUR
GREASE FITTING
KEGEL - SCHMIERNIPPEL
18 223.06.702.01 2 PERNO SNODO
PIVOT DE DIRECTION
PIVOT PIN
ACHSSCHENKELBOLZEN
19 223.06.701.02 2 PERNO SNODO
PIVOT DE DIRECTION
PIVOT PIN
ACHSSCHENKELBOLZEN
20 213.06.006.03 2 ANELLO PARAPOLVERE
2 BAGUE ANTI-POUSSIERE
DUST EXCLUDER
STAUBABWEHRRING
212-06-0001
212/975 3
212 212-06/496
21 290.06.016.01 2 CUSCINETTO
ROULEMENT
BEARING
LAGER
22 223.06.008.01 1 SCATOLA SNODO
BOITIER DE DIRECTION
STEERING CASE
GELENKGEHAEUSE
JOINT D'ETANCHEITE
SEAL
DICHTRING
24

BOUCHON MAGNETIQUE
MAGNET PLUG
MAGNETSTOPFEN
26 112.01.610.01 4 TAPPO
BOUCHON
PLUG
STOPFEN
27 223.06.009.01 1 SCATOLA SNODO
STEERING CASE
GELENKGEHAEUSE
JOINT D'ETANCHEITE
SEAL
DICHTRING
29 005.10.2742 4 CUSCINETTO
ROULEMENT
BEARING
LAGER
30 932.06.074.01 20 COLONNETTA
GOUJON DE ROUE
WHEEL STUD
RADBOLZEN
212-06-0001
212/975 4
212 212-06/496
31 112.06.053.02 2 MOZZO RUOTA
MOYEU DE ROUE
WHEEL HUB
RADNABE
32 001.05.1119 2 ANELLO OR
JOINT OR
O - RING
O - RING
33 290.06.010.07 2 CORONA DENTATA
COURONNE DENTEE
RING GEAR
ZAHNKRANZ
34 112.06.056.03 2 SUPPORTO PORTACORONA
SUPPORT PORTE COURONNE
RING GEAR SUPPORT
HOHLRADTRAEGER
35 750.06.019.01 6 ANELLO DI SICUREZZA
ARRETOIR
CIRCLIP
SICHERUNGSRING
36 750.06.009.03 6 SATELLITE
SATELLITE
DIFFERENTIAL PINION
AUSGLEICHSKEGELRAD
37
38 112.06.088.03 20 DADO
ECROU
NUT
MUTTER
39
40 016.06.0442 4 VITE A TESTA CONICA

VIS A TETE CONIQUE
COUNTERSUNK BOLT
SENKSCHRAUBE
212-06-0001
212/975 5
212 212-06/496
41 112.06.054.03 2 SUPPORTO SATELLITI
SUPPORT SATELLITES
PLANET GEAR CARRIER
PLANETENGEHAEUSE
42 112.06.025.02 20 PRIGIONIERO
GOUJON
STUD
STIFTSCHRAUBE
43 006.22.4380 20 DADO
ECROU
NUT
MUTTER
ARRETOIR
CIRCLIP
SICHERUNGSRING
45 750.06.037.01 4 VITE DI FERMO STERZO
VIS D'ARRET BRAQUAGE
STEERING ADJUST BOLT
LENKEINSCHLAGSCHRAUBE
46 006.05.1521 4 DADO
ECROU
NUT
MUTTER
47
48
49 112.06.046.02 2 LAMIERA DI SICUREZZA

TOLE DE SECURITE
LOCKING PLATE
SICHERUNGSBLECH
ARRETOIR
CIRCLIP
SICHERUNGSRING
212-06-0001
212/975 6
212 212-06/496
51
52
53
54
55
56 279.06.005.02 2 DISTANZIALE
ENTRETOISE
SPACER
DISTANZRING
57 212.06.026.01 2 SPESSORE
212.06.026.02 2 CALE
212.06.026.03 2 SHIM
PASS - SCHEIBE
58

SUPPORT SATELLITES
PLANET GEAR CARRIER
PLANETENGEHAEUSE
60
61
212-06-0001
212/975 7
212 212-06/496
62 001.05.1178 2 ANELLO OR
JOINT OR
O - RING
O - RING
63 212.06.044.01 8 PRIGIONIERO
GOUJON
STUD
STIFTSCHRAUBE
64 006.03.3208 32 DADO
ECROU
NUT
MUTTER
65
66 223.06.708.01 1 SCATOLA SNODO

STEERING CASE
GELENKGEHAEUSE
67 223.06.709.01 1 SCATOLA SNODO
STEERING CASE
GELENKGEHAEUSE
68
69
70 005.72.3590 6 CUSCINETTO
ROULEMENT
BEARING
LAGER
71 005.72.3547 6 CUSCINETTO
ROULEMENT
BEARING
LAGER
212-06-0001
212/975 8
212 212-06/496
72
73
74
75
76

RING GEAR SUPPORT
HOHLRADTRAEGER
78
79 279.06.005.01 2 DISTANZIALE
ENTRETOISE
SPACER
DISTANZRING
112-07-0006
212/975 1
BRAKES 1/02/12
112 112-07/85
1 212.07.013.01 1 DISTANZIALE
ENTRETOISE
SPACER
DISTANZRING
2 176.07.047.01 4 MOLLA
RESSORT
SPRING
FEDER
3 212.07.004.02 2 PISTONE
PISTON
PISTON
KOLBEN
4 001.05.1642 2 ANELLO OR
JOINT OR
O - RING
O - RING
5 001.05.0746 4 ANELLO OR
JOINT OR
O - RING
O - RING
6 212.07.007.01 4 ANELLO ANTIESTRUSIONE
BAGUE ANTIEXTRUSION
BACK - UP RING
ANTIEXTRUSIONSRING
7 212.01.013.01 2 COPERCHIO
COUVERCLE
COVER
DECKEL
8 001.05.0819 2 ANELLO OR
JOINT OR
O - RING
O - RING
BAGUE ANTIEXTRUSION
BACK - UP RING
ANTIEXTRUSIONSRING
10 212.07.008.02 2 PISTONE
PISTON
PISTON
KOLBEN
112-07-0006
212/975 2
BRAKES 1/02/12
112 112-07/85
11 212.07.005.02 2 DISCO FRENO INTERMEDIO
DISQUE INTERMEDIAIRE
INTERMEDIATE BRAKE DISC
GEGENLAMELLE
12 171.07.010.02 6 MOLLA
RESSORT
SPRING
FEDER
13 154.06.014.02 6 VITE REGISTRO
VIS DE REGLAGE
ADJUSTING BOLT
NACHSTELLSCHRAUBE
14 112.07.610.04 8 DISCO
DISQUE
DISC
SCHEIBE
GEGENLAMELLE
16 212.07.006.01 2 DISTANZIALE
ENTRETOISE
SPACER
DISTANZRING
17 212.07.009.03 4 VITE
VIS
BOLT
SCHRAUBE
18 112.07.037.14 6 VITE REGISTRO
VIS DE REGLAGE
ADJUSTING BOLT
NACHSTELLSCHRAUBE
19 112.07.002.03 6 MOLLA
RESSORT
SPRING
FEDER
20 006.05.0684 4 DADO
ECROU
NUT
MUTTER
112-07-0006
212/975 3
BRAKES 1/02/12
112 112-07/85
21 011.13.1227 4 ROSETTA
RONDELLE
LOCK WASHER
SCHEIBE
22 734.07.014.01 4 VITE SPURGO
VIS DE PURGE
BLEEDING BOLT
ABBLASESCHRAUBE
23 734.07.015.01 4 TAPPO
BOUCHON
PLUG
STOPFEN
24 013.01.3486 2 SPESSORE
013.01.3487 2 CALE
013.01.3488 2 SHIM
PASS - SCHEIBE
25 112.07.615.01 4 TAPPO
BOUCHON
PLUG
STOPFEN
212-24-0001
212/975 1
STEERING 1/02/12
212 212-24/86
1 016.30.4290 4 VITE
VIS
BOLT
SCHRAUBE
2 212.24.634.02 1 SENSORE OTTICO
CAPTEUR OPTIQUE
OPTICAL SENSOR
OPTISCHER SENSOR
3 016.30.4246 2 VITE
VIS
BOLT
SCHRAUBE
4 212.24.633.23 1 CILINDRO
CILINDRE
CYLINDER
ZYLINDER
5 212.24.628.46 2 ASTA
TIGE
BAR
STANGE
Copyright 2012 Dana Holding Corporation For product inquiries or support,
All content is subject to copyright by Dana and may not visit www.dana.com or call 419-887-6445
be reproduced in whole or in part by any means, For other service publications,
electronic or otherwise, without prior written approval. visit www.SpicerParts.com/literature.asp
THIS INFORMATION IS NOT INTENDED FOR SALE OR For online service parts ordering,
RESALE, AND THIS NOTICE MUST REMAIN ON ALL visit www.SpicerParts.com/order.asp
COPIES.
Service Parts List
Axle 212/976
APL-2222
February 2012
SPICER OFF-HIGHWAY AXLE DIVISION *212/976* 2139584316
Data rilascio
02/12/2011
N° foglio
1
Denominazione Gruppo tipo Modello Cliente: PUTZMEISTER IBERICA C.I. e data
Ponte differenziale sterzante con riduzioni finali epicicloidali 212 976 ultima
Cod.cliente: 150038 N° disegno 212.97.000.976 modifica
Quantità olio Macchina: MIXER MIXCRETE 4 R 1726
Note 02/12/2011
ATTENZIONE:
- I gruppi vanno spediti riempiti di olio
Flangia a flangia [mm] 1920.

Rapporto coppia conica 8:31 Corona elica sx - Pallinata
Rapporto riduzioni finali 1:6 - " HY " - 3 sat. LD - diam.335
Sterzatura [gradi] 30
Denominazione Sottogruppo Caratteristiche N°Complessivo
Scatola e 212-01/07 212.01.000.01

coperchi
Differenziale 212-04/88 Autobloccante 45% 112.04.000.02
Mozzo ruota 212-06/496 Colonnette M22 L=76 - Dadi piani 212.06.000.10 Flangia DIN 120 - 8f. Ø10
Freno 112-07/85 A disco in bagno d'olio 8 dischi Wellman + staz. a com. 212.07.000.06
negativo sblocco 15 BAR - Gioco 1 mm
Cilindro sterzo 212-24/86 Cilindro 180 BAR- Con sensore ottico 30°dietro - 212.24.000.02
conn.DEUTSCH-cavo L=500 - Alim.85°basso - M18x1,5
Supporti 212-25/01 212.25.000.01
oscillanti
Particolari sciolti
Proteggere dalla verniciatura
212-01-0002
212/976 1
CENTRAL HOUSING 1/02/12
212 212-01/07
1 001.05.1178 3 ANELLO OR
JOINT OR
O - RING
O - RING
2 112.01.074.01 1 COPERCHIO
COUVERCLE
COVER
DECKEL
3 212.01.018.01 1 SCATOLA
CARTER
HOUSING
GEHAEUSE
4 171.01.015.04 1 TAPPO
BOUCHON
PLUG
STOPFEN
5 112.01.018.02 1 TAPPO SFIATO
RENIFLARD
VENT
ENTLUEFTER
6
7 112.01.610.01 1 TAPPO
BOUCHON
PLUG
STOPFEN
BOUCHON MAGNETIQUE
MAGNET PLUG
MAGNETSTOPFEN
ARRETOIR
CIRCLIP
SICHERUNGSRING
212-04-0004
212/976 1
212 212-04/88
1 357.14.139.01 1 DADO
ECROU
NUT
MUTTER
2 112.04.710.07 1 FLANGIA
BRIDE
FLANGE
FLANSCH
3
4 001.03.4328 1 ANELLO DI TENUTA

JOINT D'ETANCHEITE
SEAL
DICHTRING
5 016.30.4289 4 VITE
VIS
BOLT
SCHRAUBE
ARRETOIR
CIRCLIP
SICHERUNGSRING
7 001.05.3158 1 ANELLO OR
JOINT OR
O - RING
O - RING
8 953.04.012.01 1 GHIERA
ECROU
RING NUT
WELLENMUTTER
9 112.04.009.02 1 DISTANZIALE
ENTRETOISE
SPACER
DISTANZRING
10 013.01.3117 1 SPESSORE
013.01.3118 1 CALE
013.01.3119 1 SHIM
013.01.3120 1 PASS - SCHEIBE
013.01.4513 1
013.01.4514 1
212-04-0004
212/976 2
212 212-04/88
11 013.01.1279 1 SPESSORE
013.01.1281 1 CALE
013.01.3055 1 SHIM
013.01.3066 1 PASS - SCHEIBE
KEGELROLLENLAGER
13 112.04.500.45 1 COPPIA CONICA
COUPLE CONIQUE
BEVEL GEAR SET
KEGEL- UND TELLERRADPAAR
14 016.30.4162 2 VITE
VIS
BOLT
SCHRAUBE
KEGELROLLENLAGER
16
17 112.04.005.08 2 PLANETARIO
PLANETAIRE
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR
AUSGLEICHSWELLENRAD
18 112.04.004.04 4 SATELLITE
SATELLITE
DIFFERENTIAL PINION
AUSGLEICHSKEGELRAD
19 112.04.006.03 4 PERNO
AXE
PIN
BOLZEN
ARRETOIR
CIRCLIP
SICHERUNGSRING
212-04-0004
212/976 3
212 212-04/88
RONDELLE
FRICTION WASHER
ANLAUFSCHEIBE
22
23 016.28.3390 12 VITE
VIS
BOLT
SCHRAUBE
24 112.04.016.02 2 GHIERA
ECROU
RING NUT
WELLENMUTTER
25
26
27 112.04.011.04 1 SCATOLA DIFFERENZIALE

CARTER DIFFERENTIEL
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
DIFFERENTIALGEHAEUSE
28 112.04.703.04 1 DIFF. AUTOBLOCCANTE
DIFF. AUTOBLOQUANT
LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
SELBSTSPERRDIFFERENTIAL
29 112.04.611.03 2 DISCO
DISQUE
DISC
SCHEIBE
212-06-0001
212/976 1
212 212-06/496
1 006.03.0197 2 DADO
ECROU
NUT
MUTTER
2 016.13.3271 2 VITE
VIS
BOLT
SCHRAUBE
3 212.06.043.03 2 BRACCIO
CORPS D'ESSIEU
AXLE CASE
ACHSKOERPER
4 212.06.052.02 24 PRIGIONIERO
GOUJON
STUD
STIFTSCHRAUBE
5 011.17.2952 32 RONDELLA
RONDELLE
WASHER
SCHEIBE
6 212.06.700.01 2 BUSSOLA
REDUCTION BUSHING
ZWISCHENBUCHSE
JOINT D'ETANCHEITE
SEAL
DICHTRING
8 005.01.0121 2 CUSCINETTO A SFERE
ROULEMENT A BILLES
BALL BEARING
RILLENKUGELLAGER
ARRETOIR
CIRCLIP
SICHERUNGSRING
10 001.05.1389 2 ANELLO OR
JOINT OR
O - RING
O - RING
212-06-0001
212/976 2
212 212-06/496
11 212.06.615.03 2 GIUNTO
JOINT
JOINT
GELENK
12 290.06.020.03 1 BRONZINA
1 DOUILLE
THRUST BUSHING
ANLAUFBUCHSE
13 212.06.023.03 2 BOCCOLA
DOUILLE
BUSHING
BUCHSE
14 016.28.3390 24 VITE
VIS
BOLT
SCHRAUBE
15 212.06.007.03 2 COPERCHIO
COUVERCLE
COVER
DECKEL
16 734.07.015.01 2 TAPPO
BOUCHON
PLUG
STOPFEN
2 GRAISSEUR
GREASE FITTING
18 223.06.702.01 2 PERNO SNODO
PIVOT DE DIRECTION
PIVOT PIN
ACHSSCHENKELBOLZEN
19 223.06.701.02 2 PERNO SNODO
PIVOT DE DIRECTION
PIVOT PIN
ACHSSCHENKELBOLZEN
20 213.06.006.03 2 ANELLO PARAPOLVERE
2 BAGUE ANTI-POUSSIERE
DUST EXCLUDER
STAUBABWEHRRING
212-06-0001
212/976 3
212 212-06/496
21 290.06.016.01 2 CUSCINETTO
ROULEMENT
BEARING
LAGER
22 223.06.008.01 1 SCATOLA SNODO
STEERING CASE
GELENKGEHAEUSE
JOINT D'ETANCHEITE
SEAL
DICHTRING
24

BOUCHON MAGNETIQUE
MAGNET PLUG
MAGNETSTOPFEN
26 112.01.610.01 4 TAPPO
BOUCHON
PLUG
STOPFEN
27 223.06.009.01 1 SCATOLA SNODO
STEERING CASE
GELENKGEHAEUSE
JOINT D'ETANCHEITE
SEAL
DICHTRING
29 005.10.2742 4 CUSCINETTO
ROULEMENT
BEARING
LAGER
30 932.06.074.01 20 COLONNETTA
GOUJON DE ROUE
WHEEL STUD
RADBOLZEN
212-06-0001
212/976 4
212 212-06/496
31 112.06.053.02 2 MOZZO RUOTA
MOYEU DE ROUE
WHEEL HUB
RADNABE
32 001.05.1119 2 ANELLO OR
JOINT OR
O - RING
O - RING
33 290.06.010.07 2 CORONA DENTATA
COURONNE DENTEE
RING GEAR
ZAHNKRANZ
RING GEAR SUPPORT
HOHLRADTRAEGER
ARRETOIR
CIRCLIP
SICHERUNGSRING
36 750.06.009.03 6 SATELLITE
SATELLITE
DIFFERENTIAL PINION
AUSGLEICHSKEGELRAD
37
38 112.06.088.03 20 DADO
ECROU
NUT
MUTTER
39
40 016.06.0442 4 VITE A TESTA CONICA

VIS A TETE CONIQUE
COUNTERSUNK BOLT
SENKSCHRAUBE
212-06-0001
212/976 5
212 212-06/496
SUPPORT SATELLITES
PLANET GEAR CARRIER
PLANETENGEHAEUSE
42 112.06.025.02 20 PRIGIONIERO
GOUJON
STUD
STIFTSCHRAUBE
43 006.22.4380 20 DADO
ECROU
NUT
MUTTER
ARRETOIR
CIRCLIP
SICHERUNGSRING
45 750.06.037.01 4 VITE DI FERMO STERZO
VIS D'ARRET BRAQUAGE
STEERING ADJUST BOLT
LENKEINSCHLAGSCHRAUBE
46 006.05.1521 4 DADO
ECROU
NUT
MUTTER
47
48
49 112.06.046.02 2 LAMIERA DI SICUREZZA

TOLE DE SECURITE
LOCKING PLATE
SICHERUNGSBLECH
ARRETOIR
CIRCLIP
SICHERUNGSRING
212-06-0001
212/976 6
212 212-06/496
51
52
53
54
55
56 279.06.005.02 2 DISTANZIALE
ENTRETOISE
SPACER
DISTANZRING
57 212.06.026.01 2 SPESSORE
212.06.026.02 2 CALE
212.06.026.03 2 SHIM
PASS - SCHEIBE
58

SUPPORT SATELLITES
PLANET GEAR CARRIER
PLANETENGEHAEUSE
60
61
212-06-0001
212/976 7
212 212-06/496
62 001.05.1178 2 ANELLO OR
JOINT OR
O - RING
O - RING
63 212.06.044.01 8 PRIGIONIERO
GOUJON
STUD
STIFTSCHRAUBE
64 006.03.3208 32 DADO
ECROU
NUT
MUTTER
65
66 223.06.708.01 1 SCATOLA SNODO

STEERING CASE
GELENKGEHAEUSE
67 223.06.709.01 1 SCATOLA SNODO
STEERING CASE
GELENKGEHAEUSE
68
69
70 005.72.3590 6 CUSCINETTO
ROULEMENT
BEARING
LAGER
71 005.72.3547 6 CUSCINETTO
ROULEMENT
BEARING
LAGER
212-06-0001
212/976 8
212 212-06/496
72
73
74
75
76

RING GEAR SUPPORT
HOHLRADTRAEGER
78
79 279.06.005.01 2 DISTANZIALE
ENTRETOISE
SPACER
DISTANZRING
112-07-0006
212/976 1
BRAKES 1/02/12
112 112-07/85
1 212.07.013.01 1 DISTANZIALE
ENTRETOISE
SPACER
DISTANZRING
2 176.07.047.01 4 MOLLA
RESSORT
SPRING
FEDER
3 212.07.004.02 2 PISTONE
PISTON
PISTON
KOLBEN
4 001.05.1642 2 ANELLO OR
JOINT OR
O - RING
O - RING
5 001.05.0746 4 ANELLO OR
JOINT OR
O - RING
O - RING
BAGUE ANTIEXTRUSION
BACK - UP RING
ANTIEXTRUSIONSRING
7 212.01.013.01 2 COPERCHIO
COUVERCLE
COVER
DECKEL
8 001.05.0819 2 ANELLO OR
JOINT OR
O - RING
O - RING
BAGUE ANTIEXTRUSION
BACK - UP RING
ANTIEXTRUSIONSRING
10 212.07.008.02 2 PISTONE
PISTON
PISTON
KOLBEN
112-07-0006
212/976 2
BRAKES 1/02/12
112 112-07/85
GEGENLAMELLE
12 171.07.010.02 6 MOLLA
RESSORT
SPRING
FEDER
13 154.06.014.02 6 VITE REGISTRO
VIS DE REGLAGE
ADJUSTING BOLT
NACHSTELLSCHRAUBE
14 112.07.610.04 8 DISCO
DISQUE
DISC
SCHEIBE
GEGENLAMELLE
16 212.07.006.01 2 DISTANZIALE
ENTRETOISE
SPACER
DISTANZRING
17 212.07.009.03 4 VITE
VIS
BOLT
SCHRAUBE
18 112.07.037.14 6 VITE REGISTRO
VIS DE REGLAGE
ADJUSTING BOLT
NACHSTELLSCHRAUBE
19 112.07.002.03 6 MOLLA
RESSORT
SPRING
FEDER
20 006.05.0684 4 DADO
ECROU
NUT
MUTTER
112-07-0006
212/976 3
BRAKES 1/02/12
112 112-07/85
21 011.13.1227 4 ROSETTA
RONDELLE
LOCK WASHER
SCHEIBE
22 734.07.014.01 4 VITE SPURGO
VIS DE PURGE
BLEEDING BOLT
ABBLASESCHRAUBE
23 734.07.015.01 4 TAPPO
BOUCHON
PLUG
STOPFEN
24 013.01.3486 2 SPESSORE
013.01.3487 2 CALE
013.01.3488 2 SHIM
PASS - SCHEIBE
25 112.07.615.01 4 TAPPO
BOUCHON
PLUG
STOPFEN
212-24-0001
212/976 1
STEERING 1/02/12
212 212-24/86
1 016.30.4290 4 VITE
VIS
BOLT
SCHRAUBE
2 212.24.634.02 1 SENSORE OTTICO
CAPTEUR OPTIQUE
OPTICAL SENSOR
OPTISCHER SENSOR
3 016.30.4246 2 VITE
VIS
BOLT
SCHRAUBE
4 212.24.633.23 1 CILINDRO
CILINDRE
CYLINDER
ZYLINDER
5 212.24.628.46 2 ASTA
TIGE
BAR
STANGE
212-25-0001
212/976 1
TRUNION 1/02/12
212 212-25/01
1 277.25.002.01 4 BUSSOLA
REDUCTION BUSHING
ZWISCHENBUCHSE
2 277.25.003.01 2 BRONZINA
DOUILLE
THRUST BUSHING
ANLAUFBUCHSE
3 277.25.001.02 2 SUPPORTO
SUPPORT
SUPPORT
HALTERUNG
GRAISSEUR
GREASE FITTING
5 734.07.015.01 2 TAPPO
BOUCHON
PLUG
STOPFEN
6 277.25.610.01 2 SUPPORTO
SUPPORT
SUPPORT
HALTERUNG
COPIES.
Service Manual
Axle
212S20
ASM-0025
August 2002
02).4%$).)4!,9
#OPYRIGHT"Y$!.!)4!,)!3P!
6IETATALARIPRODUZIONEANCHEPARZIALEDITESTOEDILLUSTRAZIONI
2EALIZZAZIONEACURADELL5FlCIO0UBBLICITÜEDELL5FlCIO0OST6ENDITADELLA$!.!)4!,)!3P!
)MPAGINAZIONE&/4/3(/002/&%33)/.!, 2IVADEL'ARDA
$ATASUBJECTTOCHANGEWITHOUTNOTICE7EDECLINEALLRESPONSABILITYFORTHEUSEOFNON ORIGINALCOMPONENTSORACCESSORIESWHICHHAVE

NOTBEENTESTEDANDSUBMITTEDFORAPPROVAL
$ATISOGGETTIAMODIlCHESENZAIMPEGNODIPREAVVISO3IDECLINAOGNIRESPONSABILITÜáPERLUTILIZZODICOMPONENTINONORIGINALIO
ACCESSORINONCOLLAUDATIEDAPPROVATI
ÇNDERUNGENOHNEVORHERIGE!NKÓNDINGUNGVORBEHALTEN%SWIRDJEDE6ERANTWORTUNGFÓRDIE6ERWENDUNGVON.ICHTORIGINALTEILENODER
NICHTABGENOMMENEMUNDGENEHMIGTEM:UBEHRABGELEHNT
,OSDATOSPUEDENSERMODIlCADOSSINAVISOPREVIO3EDECLINATODARESPONSABILIDADENELCASODEUSODECOMPONENTESNOORIGINALESO
BIENDEACCESORIOSNOENSAYADOSYAPROBADOS
,ECONSTRUCTEURSER£SERVELEDROITDAPPORTERDESMODIlCATIONSÜSAPRODUCTIONSANSPOURCELAETRETENUDENDONNERPR£AVIS
.OUSD£CLINONSTOUTERESPONSABILIT£POURLUTILISATIONDEPI£CESNONORIGINALESOUDACCESSOIRESNONTEST£SETHOMOLOGU£S
INDEX - INDICE - INHALTSVERZEICHNIS - INDICE - INDEX
INTRODUCTION ..........................................................5 PLANETARY REDUCTION

GB MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICANT . Disassembly.........................................................................40
. Definition of viewpoints............................................7 . Assembly .............................................................................48
. Data plate ..............................................................................7 STEERING CYLINDER
. Maintenance points ................................................................7 . Removal ..............................................................................56
. Maintenance intervals.............................................................8 . Installation ...........................................................................60
. Adjustment and checks ..........................................................8 . Disassembly.........................................................................66
. Conversion tables...................................................................9 . Assembly .............................................................................70
. Tightening torques .................................................................9 DIFFERENTIAL UNIT
. Screw-locking, sealing and lubricating materials ....................10 . Removal and disassembly ....................................................74
NOTES ON SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ........................................13 . Assembly, adjusting and installation......................................82
CHECKING WEAR AND REPLACING THE BRAKING DISKS BEVEL PINION
. Disassembly the braking units ..............................................14 . Removal ..............................................................................92
. Assembly the braking units ...................................................18 . Adjusting and installation ......................................................98
STEERING CASE SPECIAL TOOLS .................................................................... 110
. Removal and disassembly ....................................................22 TROUBLESHOOTING.............................................................. 117
. Assembly and installation .....................................................26 OPTIONALS ........................................................................... 127
U-JOINT
. Removal and disassembly ....................................................30
. Assembly and installation .....................................................36
INTRODUZIONE .......................................................5 RIDUTTORE EPICICLOIDALE

ITA MANUTENZIONE E LUBRIFICANTI . Smontaggio..........................................................................40
. Definizione viste ..................................................7 . Assemblaggio ......................................................................48
. Targa matricola ......................................................................7 CILINDRO DI STERZATURA
. Punti di manutenzione ............................................................7 . Rimozione............................................................................56
. Intervalli di manutenzione .......................................................8 . Installazione.........................................................................60
. Registrazione e controlli .........................................................8 . Smontaggio..........................................................................66
. Tabelle di conversione............................................................9 . Assemblaggio ......................................................................70
. Coppie di serraggio ................................................................9 GRUPPO DIFFERENZIALE
. Materiali per bloccaggio viti, tenuta e lubrificazione................10 . Rimozione e smontaggio.......................................................74
NOTE RIGUARDANTI LA SICUREZZA ......................................13 . Assemblaggio, registrazione ed installazione .........................82
CONTROLLO USURA E SOSTITUZIONE DISCHI FRENO PIGNONE CONICO
. Smontaggio gruppi di frenatura .............................................14 . Rimozione............................................................................92
. Assemblaggio dei gruppi di frenatura ....................................18 . Registrazione ed installazione...............................................98
SCATOLA SNODO ATTREZZI SPECIALI............................................................... 110
. Rimozione e smontaggio ......................................................22 RICERCA GUASTI................................................................... 117
. Assemblaggio ed installazione ..............................................26 OPZIONALI............................................................................. 127
DOPPIO GIUNTO CARDANICO
. Rimozione e smontaggio ......................................................30
. Assemblaggio ed installazione ..............................................36
VORAUSSETZUNG .................................................5 PLANETENGETRIEB

D WARTUNG UND SCHMIERSTOFFE . Abmontieren ........................................................................40
. Definition der Ansichten......................................7 . Montieren.............................................................................48
. Kennummernschild.................................................................7 LENKZYLINDER
. Wartungsstellen .....................................................................7 . Abmontieren ........................................................................56
. Wartungsintervalle..................................................................8 . Installieren ...........................................................................60
. Einstellungen und Kontrollen ..................................................8 . Abmontieren ........................................................................66
. Umrechnungstabellen.............................................................9 . Montieren.............................................................................70
. Anziehdrehmomente...............................................................9 DIFFERENTIAL
. Material zur Blockierung von Schrauben und . Abmontieren und zerlegen ....................................................74
fuÈr Dichtungen und Schmiermittel .........................................10 . Montieren und installieren.....................................................82
BEMERKUNGEN ZUR SICHERHEIT...........................................13 KEGELRAD
VERSCHLEISS KONTROLLIEREN UND BREMSSCHEIBEN . Abmontieren ........................................................................92
AUSWECHSELN . Installieren und einstellen .....................................................98
. Bremsaggregate abmontieren ...............................................14 SONDERWERZZEUGE ............................................................ 110
. Bremsaggregate montieren ...................................................18 FEHLERSUCHE....................................................................... 117
GELENKGEHAÈUSE OPTIONS................................................................................ 127
. Abmontieren ........................................................................22
. Montieren ............................................................................26
DOPPELGELENKWELLE
. Abmontieren ........................................................................30
. Montieren ............................................................................36
PROLOGO................................................................ 5 REDUCTOR EPICICLOIDAL

ESP MANTENIMIENTO Y LUBRICANTES . Desmontaje ......................................................................... 40
. Definicion vistas................................................... 7 . Montaje ............................................................................... 48
. Matricula ............................................................................... 7 CILINDRO DE DIRECCIOÂN
. Puntos de manutencion.......................................................... 7 . Remocion ............................................................................ 56
. Intervalos de manutencioÁn...................................................... 8 . Instalacion ........................................................................... 60
. Ajuste y controles .................................................................. 8 . Desmontaje ......................................................................... 66
. Tablas de conversion ............................................................. 9 . Montaje ............................................................................... 70
. Pares de torsion .................................................................... 9 GRUPO DIFERENCIAL
. Materiales para el bloqueo, estanqueidad y lubricacion ......... 10 . Remocion y desmontaje ....................................................... 74
NORMAS CONCERNIENTES A LA SEGURIDAD ....................... 13 . Montaje e instalacion ........................................................... 82
CONTROL DEL DESGASTE Y SUSTITUCION DE LOS PINÄON CONICO
DISCOS DEL FRENO . Remocion ............................................................................ 92
. Montaje de los grupos de frenado......................................... 14 . Instalacion y ajuste .............................................................. 98
. Desmontaje de los grupos de frenado................................... 18 HERRAMIENTAS ESPECIALES............................................... 110
CARTER DE ROTULA COMPLETO BUSQUEDA DE AVERIAS....................................................... 117
. Remocion ............................................................................ 22 OPCIONALES......................................................................... 127
. Montaje ............................................................................... 26
SEMIEJES
. Remocion ............................................................................ 30
. Instalacion ........................................................................... 36
INTRODUCTION ....................................................... 5 REDUCTEUR EPICYCLOIDAL

F ENTRETIEN ET LUBRIFIANTS . Desassemblage ................................................................... 40
. DeÂfinition vues ..................................................... 7 . Assemblage......................................................................... 48
. Plaque d'immatriculation ........................................................ 7 CYLINDRE DE BRAQUAGE
. Points d'entretien................................................................... 7 . Depose................................................................................ 56
. Intervalle de service ............................................................... 8 . Installation ........................................................................... 60
. Reglages et controles............................................................. 8 . Demontage .......................................................................... 66
. Tableaux de conversion ......................................................... 9 . Assemblage......................................................................... 70
. Couples de serrage................................................................ 9 GROUPE DIFFERENTIEL
. MateÂriaux pour le blocage vis, eÂtancheÂiteÂ et lubrification........ 10 . Depose et demontage .......................................................... 74
NOTES EN MATIERE DE SECURITE......................................... 13 . Assemblage et installation .................................................... 82
CONTROLE D'USURE ET SUBSTITUTION DES PIGNON CONIQUE
DISQUES DE FREINAGE . Depose................................................................................ 92
. Desassemblage des groupes de freinage .............................. 14 . Installation et reglage ........................................................... 98
. Assemblage des groupes de freinage ................................... 18 OUTILS SPECIAL ................................................................... 110
BOITIER ARTICULATION COMPLET RECHERCHE DES PANNES.................................................... 117
. Depose................................................................................ 22 OPTIONNELS ......................................................................... 127
. Assemblage......................................................................... 26
JOINT DE CARDAN DOUBLE
. Depose................................................................................ 30
. Installation ........................................................................... 36
INTRODUCTION - INTRODUZIONE - VORAUSSETZUNG - PROLOGO - INTRODUCTION
The efficiency and continued operation of mechan- martelli in plastica o rame, leve appropriate estrattori e chiavi
GB ical units depend on constant, correct maintenance specifiche, al fine di facilitare il lavoro salvaguardando nel
and also on efficient repair work, should there be a contempo le superfici lavorate e la sicurezza degli operatori.
break-down or malfunction. The instructions contained in this Prima di procedere al disassemblaggio delle parti e scaricare
manual have been based on a complete overhaul of the unit. l'olio, eÁ opportuno eseguire un'accurata pulizia del ponte,
However, it is up to the mechanic to decide whether or not it is asportando incrostazioni ed accumuli di grasso.
necessary to assemble only individual components, when
partial repair work is needed. The manual provides a quick PREMESSA: Tutti gli organi meccanici smontati, devono
and sure guide which, with the use of photographs and essere accuratamente puliti con prodotti appropriati, quindi
diagrams illustrating the various phases of the operations, ripristinati o sostituiti nel caso presentino danni, usura,
allows accurate work to be performed. incrinature, grippaggi, ecc. In particolare, verificare l'integritaÁ
All the information needed for correct disassembly, checks and di tutte quelle parti in movimento (cuscinetti, ingranaggi, coppia
assembly of each individual component is set out below. In conica, alberi) e di tenuta (anelli OR, paraolio), soggette a
order to remove the differential unit from the vehicle, the maggiori sollecitazioni ed usura. EÁ consigliabile, comunque, la
manuals provided by the vehicle manufacturer should be sostituzione degli organi di tenuta ogni qualvolta si proceda alla
consulted. In describing the following operations it is presumed revisione o riparazione dei componenti. Al momento del
that the unit has already been removed from the vehicle.
montaggio, gli anelli di tenuta devono essere lubrificati sui
IMPORTANT: In order to facilitate work and protect both bordi di tenuta. Nel caso della coppia conica, la sostituzione di
working surfaces and operators, it is advisable to use proper uno dei suoi ingranaggi comporta anche la sostituzione
equipment such as: trestles or supporting benches, plastic or dell'altro. In fase di montaggio sono da rispettare scrupolosa-
copper hammers, appropriate levers, pullers and specific mente i giochi, i precarichi e le coppie prescritte.
spanners or wrenches. Á : Il manuale fornisce le validitaÁ dei gruppi sotto forma
VALIDITA
Before going on to disassemble the parts and drain the oil, it is
di matricola. Al fine di una corretta interpretazione, le validitaÁ
best to thoroughly clean the unit, removing any encrusted or
sono indicate come:
accumulated grease.
= fino alla matricola
INTRODUCTORY REMARKS: All the disassembled mechan-
ical units should be thoroughly cleaned with appropriate = dalla matricola
products and restored or replaced if damage, wear, cracking or
seizing have occurred. Se non sono indicate validitaÁ, le operazioni di smontaggio ed
In particular, thoroughly check the condition of all moving parts assemblaggio sono comuni a tutte le versioni.
(bearings, gears, crown wheel and pinion, shafts) and sealing
parts (O-rings, oil shields) which are subject to major stress and MANUTENZIONE E RIPARAZIONE: Al fine di facilitare
wear. In any case, it is advisable to replace the seals every time interventi sui gruppi ponte differenziali e cambi di velocitaÁ la
a component is overhauled or repaired. During assembly, the SPICER CLARK-HURTH, ha ritenuto opportuno compilare
sealing rings must be lubricated on the sealing edge. In the queste istruzioni di manutenzione e riparazione. I disegni delle
case of the crown wheel and pinion, replacement of one attrezzature specifiche eventualmente necessarie per l'esecu-
component requires the replacement of the other one. During zione di interventi di manutenzione e riparazione possono
assembly, the prescribed pre-loading, backlash and torque of essere acquistati direttamente presso il costruttore; i ricambi
parts must be maintained. possono essere ordinati tramite il costruttore della macchina o
direttamente presso la SPICER CLARK-HURTH.
CLASSIFICATION: This manual classifies units according to
part numbers. For a correct interpretation, classification is
indicated as follows:
= up to the part number Die Leistung und Lebensdauer der mechanischen
D Teile haÈngt nicht nur von einer staÈndigen und
= from the part number on richtig durchgefuÈhrten Wartung sondern auch von
einem sofortigen Eingriff im StoÈrungsfall ab. Um dieses
When no classification is given, disassembly and assembly Handbuch zu erstellen sind wir von einer allgemeinen U È ber-
operations are the same for all versions. pruÈfung der Einheit ausgegangen, doch entscheidet der
Mechaniker ob die einzelnen Teile bei Reparaturen montiert
SPECIFIC EQUIPMENT AND SPARE PARTS: The drawings of werden muÈssen oder nicht. Das Handbuch ist schnell und
all specific tools required for maintenance and repair work can einfach nachzuschlagen und ermoÈglicht es anhand der Abbild-
be found at the end of this manual ; spare parts may be ordered ungen und der Zeichnungen, die die verschiedenen VorgaÈnge
either from the vehicle manufacturer or directly from the darstellen, gezielt einzugreifen. Nachstehend sind alle Infor-
Service Centers or Authorised Distributors of SPICER mationen und Hinweise aufgefuÈhrt, die zur Zerlegung, PruÈfung
CLARK-HURTH. und Montage der Einzelteile noÈtig sind. Um die Differentia-
lachse des Fahrzeugs abzumontieren, lesen Sie bitte die
Anweisungen in den HandbuÈchern des Fahrzeugherstellers.
Die nachstehenden Beschreibungen gehen davon aus, daû die
Il rendimento e la continuitaÁ degli organi meccanici Fahrzeugachse schon abmontiert worden ist.
ITA dipendono oltre che da una costante e corretta
manutenzione, anche dal tempestivo intervento, WICHTIG: Um die Arbeit zu erleichtern und gleichzeitig die
nell'eventualitaÁ di guasti o anomalie. verarbeiteten FlaÈchen zu schuÈtzen und die Sicherheit der
Nel proporre questo manuale si eÁ considerata l'ipotesi di una Arbeiter zu gewaÈhrleisten, empfehlen wir geeignete Werk-
revisione generale del gruppo ma eÁ il meccanico a valutare la zeuge wie BoÈcke, Tisch, Gummi- oder Kupferhammer, geeig-
necessitaÁ di montare solo i singoli componenti nel caso di nete Abzieher und SchluÈssel zu verwenden.
Bevor mit der Zerlegung der Teile begonnen und das O Èl
riparazione. Il manuale eÁ una guida rapida e sicura che
consente interventi precisi, tramite le fotografie ed i disegni abgelassen wird, muû die Achse sorgfaÈltig gereinigt und
prospettici che illustrano le varie fasi delle operazioni. Di Verkrustungen und Fettablagen abgetragen werden.
seguito sono riportate tutte quelle informazioni ed avvertenze VORAUSSETZUNG: Alle abmontierten mechanischen Teile
necessarie al corretto disassemblaggio, alle relative verifiche muÈssen sorgfaÈltig mit geeigneten Reinigungsmitteln gereinigt
ed all'assemblaggio dei singoli componenti. Per la rimozione oder, wenn beschaÈdigt, verschleiût, gerissen, festgefressen
del ponte differenziale dal veicolo, eÁ necessario consultare i usw. ausgewechselt werden. Insbesondere muû der einwand-
manuali forniti dal costruttore del veicolo. Nel descrivere le freie Zustand aller beweglichen Teile (Lager, ZahnraÈder,
operazioni seguenti, si presuppone che il ponte sia giaÁ stato Kegelradpaare, Wellen) und der Dichtungen (O-Ringe, O È lab-
rimosso dal veicolo. dichtungen), die am meisten beansprucht werden und ver-
schleiûen, kontrolliert werden. Wir empfehlen auf jeden Fall die
IMPORTANTE: In tutte le operazioni, eÁ consigliabile usare Abdichtungselemente immer auszuwechseln, wenn eine U È ber-
attrezzature idonee quali cavalletti o banchi di sostegno, holung oder eine Reparatur der Teile vorgenommen wird. Bei
5
INTRODUCTION - INTRODUZIONE - VORAUSSETZUNG - PROLOGO - INTRODUCTION
der Montage muÈssen die RaÈnder der Dichtringe geschmiert Si no ha sido indicada validez, las operacioÂn de desmontaje y
werden. Wenn beim Kegelradpaar ein Zahnrad ausgewechselt montaje son comunes a todas las versiones.
werden muû, muû auch das andere Zahnrad ausgewechselt
werden. Bei der Montage muÈssen die vorgeschriebenen HERRAMIENTAS ESPECIFICAS Y RECAMBIOS: Los planos
Spiele, Vorspannungen und Drehmomente strengstens ein- de las herramientas especificas necesarias para la ejecucioÂn
gehalten werden. de las intervenciones de mantenimiento figuran al final del
manual; los recambios se pueden pedir al fabricante de la
GUÈ LTIGKEIT: Das Handbuch gibt an zu welchen Kennummern maÂquina o directamente al Service Center o a Distribuidores
die Einheiten gehoÈren. Der Einfachheit halber sind die autorizados de SPICER CLARK-HURTH.
AngehoÈrigkeiten folgendermaûen aufgefuÈhrt:
= bis Kennummer
= ab Kennummer Le rendement et la continuiteÂ des organes meÂca-

F niques deÂpendent, non seulement d'une mainte-
Wenn keine AngehoÈrigkeit angegeben ist, verstehen sich die nance correcte et constante, mais eÂgalement de la
Arbeiten zur Zerlegung und Montage fuÈr alle AusfuÈhrungen rapiditeÂ d'intervention en cas de pannes ou d'anomalies. En
guÈltig. vous proposant ce manuel, on envisage l'hypotheÁse d'une
reÂvision geÂneÂrale du groupe, mais c'est au meÂcanicien
SPEZIFISCHE WERKZEUGE UND ERSATZTEILE: die Zeich- d'eÂvaluer la neÂcessiteÂ de monter ou non chacun des
nungen der fuÈr Wartungsarbeiten erforderlichen spezifischen composants en cas de reÂparation. Le manuel est un guide
Werkzeuge, sind am Ende des Handbuchs aufgefuÈhrt; Ersatz- rapide et suÃr consentant des interventions preÂcises, au travers
teile koÈnnen beim Fahrzeughersteller oder direkt bei der de photographies et de dessins prospectifs qui illustrent les
Kundendienststelle oder bei einem zugelassenen HaÈndler der diffeÂrentes phases des opeÂrations. Ensuite, sont reporteÂes
SPICER CLARK-HURTH bezogen werden. toutes les informations et preÂcautions neÂcessaires pour un
deÂmontage correct et les veÂrifications et assemblage de
chaque composant. En ce qui concerne le deÂplacement du
pont d'eÂtai du veÂhicule, il est neÂcessaire consulter les manuels
fournis par le constructeur du veÂhicule. En deÂcrivant les
El rendimiento y la duracioÂn de los oÂrganos
ESP opeÂrations suivantes, on preÂsume que le pont ait deÂjaÁ eÂteÂ
mecaÂnicos depende, ademaÂs que del constante y
enleveÂ du veÂhicule.
correcto mantenimiento, tambieÂn de la interven-
cioÂn inmediata en caso de averõÂas o anomalõÂas. IMPORTANT: Pour faciliter le travail en sauvegardant en
Al proponer este manual, ha sido considerada la suposicioÂn de meÃme temps les surfaces usineÂes et la seÂcuriteÂ des opeÂra-
una revisioÂn general del grupo, pero es el mecaÂnico quien tiene teurs, il est preÂconiseÂ d'utiliser des installations approprieÂes
que valorar la necesidad de montar cada uno de los telles que des eÂtais ou banc de support, maillets en plastique
componentes en caso de reparacioÂn. El manual es una guõÂa ou cuivre, leviers approprieÂs, extracteurs et cleÂs speÂcifiques.
raÂpida y segura que permite intervenciones precisas por medio Avant de proceÂder au deÂmontage des parties et vidanger
de fotografõÂas y de planos que muestran las distintas fases de l'huile, il vaut mieux nettoyer soigneusement le pont, en
las operaciones. A continuacioÂn figuran todas las informacio- enlevant incrustations et blocs de gras.
nes y advertencias necesarias para ejecutar un montaje
correcto, para las comprobaciones y el montaje de cada uno PRELIMINAIRE: Tous les organes meÂcaniques deÂmonteÂs
de los componentes. Para remover el puente diferencial del doivent eÃtre soigneusement nettoyeÂs aÁ l'aide de produits
vehõÂculo hay que consultar los manuales de los fabricantes del approprieÂs et reÂpareÂs ou remplaceÂs dans le cas ouÁ ils seraient
vehõÂculo. En la descripcioÂn de las operaciones siguientes se abõÃmeÂs, useÂs, feÃleÂs, grippeÂs, etc. VeÂrifier, l'inteÂgriteÂ, en
supone que el puente ya ha sido sacado del vahõÂculo. particulier, de toutes les parties en mouvement (paliers,
engrenages, couple conique, arbres) et l'eÂtancheÂiteÂ des
IMPORTANTE: Para facilitar el trabajo salvaguardando al bagues (bagues OR, parahuile), qui sont sujettes aÁ plus de
mismo tiempo las superficies mecanizadas y la seguridad de sollicitations et aÁ l'usure. Il est preÂconiseÂ, de toute facËon, de
los operadores, se aconseja que se usen equipos y herra- substituer les organes d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ, chaque fois que l'on
mientas adecuados como caballetes y bancos de soporte, effectue une reÂvision ou une reÂparation des composants. Au
martillos de plaÂstico o de cobre, palancas adecuadas, moment du montage, les bagues d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ doivent eÃtre
extractores y llaves especõÂficas. lubrifieÂes sur les bords eÂtanches. Dans le cas du couple
Antes de desmontar las partes y descargar el aceite, es conique, la substitution de l'un de ses engrenages comporte
conveniente que se haga una limpieza minuciosa del puente eÂgalement la substitution de l'autre. En phase de montage, il
sacando las incrustaciones y acumulaciones de grasa. faut respecter scrupuleusement les jeux, les preÂcharges et les
couples prescrits.
INTRODUCCION: Todos los oÂrganos mecaÂnicos desmontados
tienen que ser limpiados minuciosamente con productos VALIDITE: Le manuel fournit la validiteÂ des groupes sous
adecuados y restaurados o sustituidos en el caso de que forme de matricule. Pour une meilleure interpreÂtation, les
presenten danÄos, desgaste, rajaduras, agarrotamientos, etc. validiteÂs sont indiqueÂes comme:
En particular, comprobar la integridad de todas las partes en
movimiento (cojinetes, engranajes, par coÂnico, ejes) y de = jusqu'aÁ l'immatriculation
estanqueidad (anillos OR, detenedor de aceite) sujetas a
mayores solicitaciones y desgaste. = aÁ partir de l'immatriculation et apreÁs
Se aconseja, de todas formas, que se sustituyan los oÂrganos
de estanqueidad cada vez que se ejecute la revisioÂn o Si les validiteÂs ne sont pas indiqueÂes, les opeÂrations de
reparacioÂn de los componentes. deÂmontage et d'assemblage sont pareilles dans toutes les
Al volver a montar, los segmentos de compresioÂn tienen que versions.
estar lubricados en los bordes de estanqueidad. En el caso del
par coÂnico, la sustitucioÂn de uno de sus engranajes comporta INSTALLATIONS SPECIFIQUES ET PIECES DETACHEES:
tambieÂn la sustitucioÂn del otro. Al montar hay que tener en Les dessins des installations speÂcifiques neÂcessaires pour
cuenta escrupulosamente los juegos, las precargas y los pares effectuer des interventions d'entretien sont reporteÂes aÁ la fin du
descriptos. manuel, les pieÁces deÂtacheÂes peuvent eÃtre commandeÂes au
constructeur de la machine ou directement aux Centres de
VALIDEZ: El manual suministra la validez de los grupos en Services, ou Distributeurs agreÂeÂs de la SocieÂteÂ SPICER
forma de matrõÂcula. Para poder tener una interpretacioÂn CLARK-HURTH.
correcta, la validez estaÂ indicada:
= hasta la matrõÂcula
= desde la matrõÂcula en adelante
6
MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICANT - MANUTENZIONE E LUBRIFICANTI - WARTUNG UND SCHMIERSTOFFE
MANTENIMIENTO Y LUBRICANTES - ENTRETIEN ET LUBRIFIANTS
DEFINITION OF VIEWPOINTS - DEFINIZIONE VISTE - DEFINITION DER ANSICHTEN - DEFINICION VISTAS - DEÂFINITION VUES
LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE

LATO SINISTRO LATO DESTRO
LINKE SEITE RECHTE SEITE
LADO IZQUIERDO LADO DERECHO
COTE GAUCHE COTE DROITE
D1240027
DATA PLATE - TARGA MATRICOLA - KENNUMMERNSCHILD - MATRICULA - PLAQUE D'IMMATRICULATION
Type and model unit - modification index
1
Tipo e modello gruppo - indice di modifica
Typ und Modelleles Antriebes - AÈ nderungsverzeichnis
Tipo y modelo grupo - indice de modificacion
Type et modeÂle de ensemble - tableau des modifications
1 2 Serial number
2
Numero di serie
Seriennummer
3 NuÂmero de serie
Numero de serie
MFG. BY CLARK-HURTH COMPONENTS S.P.A. Lubricant
3
38062 Arco (Trento) Lubrificante
Schmieroel
MADE IN ITALY Lubricante
Lubrificant
D1240011
MAINTENANCE POINTS - PUNTI DI MANUTENZIONE - WARTUNGSSTELLEN - PUNTOS DE MANUTENCION - POINTS D'ENTRETIEN
3 1 2 4
3
4
2
4
1
Oil filling plug - Tappo di carico
EinfuÈllstopfen - Tapon de carga
Bouchon de ravitaillement
2
Oil draining plug - Tappo di scarico
Ablasstopfen - Tapon de descarga
Bouchon de vidange
3
Check level plug - Tappo controllo livello
È lpegelkontrolle -
Stopfen zur O
1 3 Tapon de contrl de nivel - Jauge de niveau
2
4
Grease nipples - Ingrassatori
Schmierer - Engrasadores
Graisseurs
D1240028
7
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS - INTERVALLI DI MANUTENZIONE - WARTUNGSINTERVALLE - INTERVALOS DE MANUTENCIOÁN - INTERVALLE DE SERVICE
OPERATION - OPERAZIONE - FREQUENCY - PERIODICITAÁ

LUBRICANTS - LUBRIFICANTI - SCHMIERSTOFFE -
ARBEITSVORGANG - - ZEITABSTAND -
LUBRICANTES - LUBRIFIANTS
OPERACION - OPERATION FRECUENCIA - PERIODICITE
Differential monthly
Differenziale mensile
Im differential monatlich . SAE85W90 (API GL4 - MIL L-2105)
. Check levels: Diferencial cada mes With additives for oil-bath brakes
. Controllo livelli: Differentiel mensuel Con additivi per freni a bagno d'olio
. È lstandkontrolle:
O Mit Zusatzmittel fuÈr Bremsen in OÈ lbad
. Control niveles: Planetary reduction every 200 hours
Con aditivos para frenos de banÄo de aceite
. ControÃle niveaux: Riduzione epicicloidale ogni 200 ore
Avec adjuvants pour freins en bain d'huile
Planetengetrieb alle 200 Std.
ReduccioÂn epicicloidal cada 200 horas . SAE85W90 (API GL5 - MIL 2105-B)
Reduction epicycloidale toutes les 200 heures With additives for oil-bath brakes, for units pre-
Differential every 800 hours ] senting hypoid crown wheel and pinion and /or
Differenziale ogni 800 ore self-locking differential gear
Im differential alle 800 Std. Per esecuzioni con coppia conica ipoide e/o con
Diferencial cada 800 horas differenziale autobloccante, con additivi per freni
Differentiel toutes les 800 heures a bagno d'olio
Bei AusfuÈhrungen mit Kegel- und Telleradpaar
. Oil change: Planetary reduction every 1000 hours ]
und/oder Selbstsperrdifferential, mit Zusatzmit-
. Cambio olio: Riduzione epicicloidale ogni 1000 ore È lbad
È lwechsel: teln fuÈr Bremsen in O
. O Planetengetrieb alle 1000 Std.
Para ejecuciones con par coÂnico hipoide y/o con
. Cambio aceite: ReduccioÂn epicicloidal cada 1000 horas
diferencial autobloqueante con aditivos para fre-
. Vidange huile: Reduction epicycloidale toutes les 1000 heures
nos de banÄo de aceite.
Self-locking differential gear every 700 hours ] r Pour exeÂcutions avec couple conique hypoõÈde et/
Differenziale autobloccante ogni 700 ore ou diffeÂrentiel autobloquant, avec adjuvants pour
Selbstsperrdifferential alle 700 Std. freins en bain d'huile
Diferencial autobloqueante cada 700 horas
Differentiel autobloquant toutes les 700 heures
] Initially after 100 working hours - Inizialmente dopo 100 ore di lavoro - Erstmals nach 100 Betriebstunden - Al principio, despueÂs de 100 horas
de trabajo - Initialement apreÁs 100 heures de travail
r When it starts sounding noisy - Anche ai primi cenni di rumorositaÁ - Auch falls ungewoÈhnliche GeraÈusche zu bemerken sind - TambieÂn al primer
indicio de ruido - MeÃme aux premiers signaux de bruit
OPERATION - OPERAZIONE - MEMBER - ORGANO - CONDITIONS - CONDIZIONI - FREQUENCY - PERIODICITAÁ - LUBRICANTS - LUBRIFICANTI -
ARBEITSVORGANG - ELEMENT - BEDINGUNG - ZEITABSTAND - SCHMIERSTOFFE -
OPERACION - OPERATION ORGANO - ORGANE CONDICIONES - CONDITIONS FRECUENCIA - PERIODICITE LUBRICANTES - LUBRIFIANTS
Normal work monthly
Lavori normali mensile
Normale Arbeit monatlich
Greasing Articulations Trabajos normales cada mes
Ingrassaggio Snodi TaÃches ordinaires mensuel
Schmieren Gelenk MOLIKOTE
Engrase RoÂtula Awkward work Weekly
Graissage Articulations Lavori gravosi Settimanale
Schwere Arbeit WoÈchentlich
Trabajos pesados Semanal
TaÃches extraordinaires Hebdomadaire
ADJUSTMENT AND CHECKS - REGISTRAZIONE E CONTROLLI - EINSTELLUNGEN UND KONTROLLEN - AJUSTE Y CONTROLES - REGLAGES ET CONTROLES
UNIT - GRUPPO - OPERATION - OPERAZIONE FREQUENCY - PERIODICITAÁ - SERVICE BRAKE CIRCUIT - CIRCUITO COMANDO FRENI -
AGGREGAT - ARBEITSVORGANG - ZEITABSTAND - BREMSKREISLAUF - CIRCUITO MANDOS FRENOS -
GRUPO - GROUPE OPERACION - OPERATION FRECUENCIA - PERIODICITE CIRCUIT DE COMMANDE DES FREINS
Negative brake Adjustment every 1000 hours ]
Freno negativo Registrazione ogni 1000 ore Only for mineral oil use e.g. ATF Dexron II. Make sure
Federspeicherbremse Einstellen alle 1000 Std. that master cylinder seals are suitable for mineral oil.
Freno negativo Ajuste cada 1000 horas Usare esclusivamente olio minerale ATF Dexron II. Ac-
Frein neÂgatif ReÂglage toutes les 1000 hours certarsi che le guarnizioni del cilindro master siano
adatte a questo olio.
Service brake Adjustment every 500 hours È l verwenden, z.B.: ATF Dexron II.
Nur mineralisches O
Freni di servizio Registrazione ogni 500 ore
Achtung: Dichtringe des Hauptbremszylinders muÈs-
Hilfsbremse Einstellen alle 500 Std. È l geeignet sein.
sen fuÈr dieses O
Frenos de ejercicio Ajuste cada 500 horas
Usar exclusivamente aceite mineral ATF Dexron II.
Freins de service ReÂglage toutes les 500 hours
Asegurarse de que las juntas del cilindro principal
Wheel nuts Tightening every 200 hours son adecuadas para este aceite.
Dadi ruota Serraggio - ogni 200 ore Utiliser exclusivement huile mineÂrale ATF Dexron II.
Radmuttern Festziehen alle 200 Std. VeÂrifier que les joints du maõÃtre-cylindre, soien compa-
Tuercas rueda Apriete cada 200 horas tibles avec cette huile.
Ecrous de roue Serrage toutes les 200 hours
] Initially after 100 working hours - Inizialmente dopo 100 ore di lavoro - Erstmals nach 100 Betriebstunden - Al principio, despueÂs de 100
horas de trabajo - Initialement apreÁs 100 heures de travail
8
CONVERSION TABLES - TABELLE DI CONVERSIONE - UMRECHNUNGSTABELLEN
TABLAS DE CONVERSION - TABLEAUX DE CONVERSION
Units of pressure - UnitaÁ di pressione - Druckeinheiten

Unidad de presioÂn - UniteÂs de pression: 1 Atm%1 bar%105 PA%14.4 PSi
Units of weight - UnitaÁ di peso - Gewichtseinheiten Units of torque - UnitaÁ di coppia - Drehmomenteinheiten
Unidad de peso - UniteÂs de poids Unidad de par - UniteÂs de couple
N daN kN kg lbs Nm daNm kNm kgm lb-in
1N 1 0,1 0,001 0,102 0,225 1Nm 1 0,1 0,001 0,102 8,854
1daN 10 1 0,01 1,02 2,25 1daNm 10 1 0,01 1,02 88,54
1kN 1000 100 1 102 225 1kNm 1000 100 1 102 8854
1kg 9,81 0,981 0,00981 1 2,205 1kgm 9,81 0,981 0,00981 1 86,8
1lb-in 0,1129 0,01129 0,0001129 0,01152 1
TIGHTENING TORQUES - COPPIE DI SERRAGGIO - ANZIEHDREHMOMENTE

PARES DE TORSION - COUPLES DE SERRAGE
Unit - UnitaÁ di misura - Meûeinheiten - Unidad de medida - UniteÂs de mesure: Nm

TYPE OF BOLT - TIPO VITE - GEWINDE - TIPO DE TORNILLO - TYPE DE VIS
SIZE OF BOLT
MISURA VITE
SCHRAUBENMASS 8.8 10.9 12.9
TAMAN Ä O TORNILLO
MESURE VIS Normali Normali Normali
+ Loctite 242 Loctite 270 + Loctite 242 Loctite 270 + Loctite 242 Loctite 270
M6 x 1 9,5-10,5 10,5-11,5 14,3-15,7 15,2-16,8 16,2-17,8 18,1-20,0
COARSE PITCH - PASSO GROSSO - GROûER
SCHRITT - PASO GRUESO - GROS PAS
M8 x 1,25 23,8-26,2 25,6-28,4 34,2-37,8 36,7-40,5 39,0-43,0 43,7-48,3

M10 x 1,5 48-53 52-58 68-75 73-81 80-88 88-97
M12 x 1,75 82-91 90-100 116-128 126-139 139-153 152-168
M14 x 2 129-143 143-158 182-202 200-221 221-244 238-263
M16 x 2 200-221 219-242 283-312 309-341 337-373 371-410
M18 x 2,5 276-305 299-331 390-431 428-473 466-515 509-562
M20 x 2,5 390-431 428-473 553-611 603-667 660-730 722-798
M22 x 2,5 523-578 575-635 746-824 817-903 893-987 974-1076
M24 x 3 675-746 732-809 950-1050 1040-1150 1140-1260 1240-1370
M27 x 3 998-1103 1088-1202 1411-1559 1539-1701 1710-1890 1838-2032
M30 x 3,5 1378-1523 1473-1628 1914-2115 2085-2305 2280-2520 2494-2757
M8 x 1 25,7-28,3 27,5-30,5 36,2-39,8 40,0-44,0 42,8-47,2 47,5-52,5

FINE PITCH - PASSO FINE - KLEINER SCHRITT
M10 x 1,25 49,4-54,6 55,2-61,0 71,5-78,5 78,0-86,0 86,0-94,0 93,0-103,0

M12 x 1,25 90-100 98-109 128-142 139-154 152-168 166-184
M12 x 1,5 86-95 94-104 120-132 133-147 143-158 159-175
PASO FINO - PAS FIN
M14 x 1,5 143-158 157-173 200-222 219-242 238-263 261-289

M16 x 1,5 214-236 233-257 302-334 333-368 361-399 394-436
M18 x 1,5 312-345 342-378 442-489 485-536 527-583 580-641
M20 x 1,5 437-483 475-525 613-677 674-745 736-814 808-893
M22 x 1,5 581-642 637-704 822-908 903-998 998-1103 1078-1191
M24 x 2 741-819 808-893 1045-1155 1140-1260 1235-1365 1363-1507
M27 x 2 1083-1197 1178-1302 1520-1680 1672-1848 1834-2027 2000-2210
M30 x 2 1511-1670 1648-1822 2138-2363 2332-2577 2565-2835 2788-3082
9
SCREW-LOCKING, SEALING AND LUBRICATING MATERIALS - MATERIALI PER BLOCCAGGIO VITI, TENUTA E LUBRIFICAZIONE - MATERIAL ZUR
BLOCKIERUNG VON SCHRAUBEN UND FUÈR DICHTUNGEN UND SCHMIERMITTEL - MATERIALES PARA EL BLOQUEO, ESTANQUEIDAD Y LUBRICACION -
MATEÂRIAUX POUR LE BLOCAGE VIS, EÂTANCHEÂITEÂ ET LUBRIFICATION
1 - Locking, sealing and lubricating materials referred to in this manual are the same used in the shop-floor.
I materiali per il bloccaggio, tenuta e lubrificazione specifica indicati nel manuale, sono quelli usati in fabbrica.
Die Materialien zur Blockierung von Schrauben, fuÈr Dichtungen und Schmiermittel, die im Handbuch aufgefuÈhrt sind, sind
dieselben die auch vom Hersteller verwendet werden.
Los materiales para el bloqueo, estanqueidad y lubricacioÂn especõÂfica indicados en el manual, son los que se usan en la faÂbrica
Les mateÂriaux de blocage, d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ et de lubrification speÂcifieÂs indiqueÂs dans ce manuel sont ceux employeÂs aÁ l'usine.
2 - The table below gives an account of the typical applications of each single material, in order to facilitate replacement with similar
products marketed by different brand names with different trade marks.
Di questi materiali, vengono riportate le applicazioni tipiche che li distinguono, in modo da poterli sostituire con prodotti similari
commercializzati da altre marche e quindi con altre sigle.
Von diesen Materialien werden die typischen Anwendungen genannt, um sie mit aÈhnlichen Materialien zu ersetzen, die unter
anderen Namen und Kennzeichnungen im Handel erhaÈltlich sind.
De estos materiales damos las aplicaciones tõÂpicas que los distinguen, de manera que se puedan sustituir con productos similares
comercializados por otras marcas y por tanto con otras siglas.
De ces mateÂriaux ne sont reporteÂes que les applications typiques qui les distinguent de telle sorte qu'ils puissent eÃtre substitueÂs
par des produits semblables se trouvant dans le commerce sous d'autres marques et par conseÂquent sous d'autres sigles.
DENOMINATION
DENOMINAZIONE
BEZEICHNUNG APPLICATION - APPLICAZIONE - ANWENDUNG - APLICACION - APPLICATION
DENOMINACION
DENOMINATION
. Anaerobic product apt to prevent the loosening of screws, nuts and plugs. Used for medium-strength loc-
king. Before using it, completely remove any lubricant by using the specific activator.
. Prodotto anaerobico adatto a prevenire l'allentamento di viti, dadi e tappi. Usato per la frenatura a media re-
sistenza. Deve essere usato dopo aver asportato ogni traccia di lubrificante con l'attivatore specifico.
. Anaerobes Produkt, um das Lockern von Schrauben, Muttern und Stopfen zu verhindern. FuÈr mittlere Wi-
derstandskraÈfte geeignet. Darf erst aufgetragen werden, wenn die FlaÈchen von Schmiermittel richtig sauber
Loctite 242
sind. Dazu das entsprechende Produkt verwenden.
. Producto anaeroÂbico apto para prevenir el aflojamiento de tornillos, tuerca y tapones. Usado para el frenado
de media resistencia. Tiene que ser usado soÂlo despueÂs de haber quitado todo residuo de lubricante con el
activador especõÂfico.
. Produit anareÂobic servant aÁ preÂvenir le relaÃchement des vis, eÂcrous et bouchons. UtiliseÂ pour le freinage
demi reÂsistant. Il doit eÃtre utiliseÂ apreÁs avoir enleveÂ toute trace de lubrifiant aÁ l'aide d'un activeur speÂcial.
. The oleocompatible alternative to 242. Does not require the activation of lubricated surfaces.
. Prodotto alternativo al 242 che, essendo oleocompatibile, non richiede l'attivazione di superfici lubrificate.
. Alternatives Produkt zu Loctite 242. Da es oÈlkompatibel ist muÈssen die geschmierten FlaÈchen nicht aktiviert
Loctite 243 werden.
. Producto alternativo al 242 que, siendo oleocompatible, no requiere la activacioÂn de superficies lubricadas.
. Produit en alternance avec le 242 lequel eÂtant oleÂocompatible ne requiert aucune activation des surfaces
lubrifieÂes.
. Anaerobic product for very-high strength locking of screws and nuts. Before using it, completely remove any
lubricant by using the specific activator. To remove parts, it may be necessary to heat them at 80ëC approx.
. Prodotto anaerobico adatto per la frenatura ad altissima resistenza di viti e dadi. Deve essere usato dopo aver
asportato ogni traccia di lubrificante con l'attivatore specifico.
La rimozione delle parti, puoÁ richiedere un riscaldamento a circa 80ëC.
. Anaerobes Produkt fuÈr hohe WiderstandskraÈfte fuÈr Schrauben und Muttern geeignet. Zuerst die FlaÈche sorg-
Loctite 270
faÈltig aktivieren. Um die FlaÈchen zu saÈubern, diese auf ca. 80ëC erwaÈrmen.
. Producto anaeroÂbico apto para el frenado de alta resistencia de tornillos y tuercas. tiene que ser usado de-
spueÂs de haber quitado todo residuo de lubricante con el activador especõÂfico.
La remocioÂn de las partes, puede requerir un calentamiento a unos 80ëC.
. Produit anareÂobic apte au freinage aÁ treÁs haute reÂsistance des vis et des eÂcrous. Il doit eÃtre utiliseÂ apreÁs avoir
enleveÂ toute trace de lubrifiant aÁ l'aide d'un activeur speÂcial.
. Anaerobic product suitable for high-strength locking and sealing of large threaded parts, bolts and stud bolts,
for pipe sealing and for protecting parts against tampering; suitable for sealing coupling surfaces with a max.
diametrical clearance of 0.25 mm.
. Prodotto anaerobico adatto per la frenatura e sigillatura ad alta resistenza di parti filettate, bulloni e prigionieri
di grandi dimensioni, protezione antimanomissione e sigillatura di tubazioni; puoÁ sigillare accoppiamenti con
gioco diametrale massimo di 0,25 mm.
. Anaerobes Produkt zum Bremsen und Siegeln von groûen Gewinden, Muttern und Stiftschrauben , sehr
Loctite 275 widerstandsfaÈhig, verschleierungsbestaÈndig, und zum Siegeln von Rohrleitungen geeignet; kann Kupplun-
gen mit einer maximalen Lagerluft von 0,25 mm siegeln.
. Producto anaerobico apto para el frenado y selladura a alta resistencia de tornillos, tuercas y prisioneros de
grandes dimensiones, protecion anti manomision y selladura de tubaciones ; puede sellar encolcados con
juego diametral.
. Produit anaeÂrobie adapteÂ au freinage et au scellage aÁ haute reÂsistance des parties fileteÂes, boulons et pri-
sonniers de grandes dimensions, protection anti-alteÂration et scellage de tuyauteries; il peut sceller des ac-
couplements ayant un jeu diameÂtral maximal de 0,25 mm.
10
DENOMINATION
DENOMINAZIONE
DENOMINACION
DENOMINATION
. Anaerobic product for the hermetic sealing of flanged units and screw holes communicating with fluids. Can
seal clearances between flanges up to 0.2 mm.
. Prodotto anaerobico adatto alla tenuta ermetica di fluidi tra assiemi flangiati e di viti a foro comunicante con i
fluidi. PuoÁ sigillare giochi tra le flange fino a 0,2 mm.
. Anaerobes Produkt zur Abdichtung von FluÈssigkeiten an Flanschen und Schrauben mit LoÈcher, die mit FluÈs-
Loctite 510
sigkeiten in Kontakt stehen. Kann ein Spiel zwischen Flanschen bis 0,2 mm abdichten.
. Producto anaeroÂbico apto para le estanqueidad de fluidos entre grupos bridados y de tornillos de orificio co-
municante con los fluidos. Puede sellar juegos entre las bridas hasta 0,2 mm.
. Produit anareÂobic apte aÁ la tenue eÂtanche des fluides entre les pieÁces aÁ brides et des vis aÁ trou en contact
avec les fluides. Il peut sceller un jeu parmi les flasques jusqu'aÁ 0,2 mm.
. Quick anaerobic sealant for sealing threaded portions of conical or cylindrical unions up to M80. Before using
it, remove any lubricant with the specific activator. After polymerisation, disassembly may result rather dif-
ficult, so heating may be necessary for larger diameters.
. Prodotto anaerobico sigillante rapido per la tenuta di filettature di raccordi conici o cilindrici fino a M80.
Deve essere usato dopo aver asportato ogni traccia di lubrificante con l'attivatore specifico.
Dopo la polimerizzazione presenta una moderata difficoltaÁ di smontaggio per cui puoÁ richiedere, per i diametri
maggiori, un riscaldamento.
. Anaerobes Produkt zum schnellen Siegeln und Abdichten von Kegel- oder Zylinderkupplungen bis M80.
Darf erst aufgetragen werden, nachdem mit einem spezifischen Wirkstoff jede Spur von Schmiermittel ab-
getragen worden ist.
Loctite 577
Nach der Polymerisation koÈnnte das Abmontieren etwas schwierig sein weshalb groÈûere Durchmesser
zuerst erhitzt werden muÈssen.
. Producto anaerobico sellante rapido para el estanqueido de tornillos de empalme conico o cilindrico hasta
M80. Debe de ser utilisado despues de haber quitado cada mancha de lubrificante con activador especifico.
Despues de la polimeracion presenta una moderada dificultaÁde desmontaje por lo tanto puede necesitar, para
los diametros majores, un calientamiento.
. Produit anaeÂrobie collage rapide assurant l'eÂtancheÂiteÂ des filetages des raccords coniques ou cylindriques
jusqu'aÁ M80. Il doit eÃtre utiliseÂ apreÁs qu'on ait enleveÂ toute trace de lubrifiant aÁ l'aide d'un activeur speÂcial.
Une certaine difficulteÂ de deÂmontage se preÂsente apreÁs la polymeÂrisation, on peut donc avoir la neÂcessiteÂ de
devoir chauffer preÂalablement pour de plus amples diameÁtres.
. Anaerobic adhesive for fast and high-strength gluing of cylindrical metal joints (hub on shaft). Can glue to-
gether parts with clearance ranging between 0.1 and 0.25 mm.
. Adesivo anaerobico per l'incollaggio rapido ad alta resistenza di giunti cilindrici in metallo (mozzo su albero).
PuoÁ incollare particolari con gioco tra 0,1 e 0, 25 mm.
. Anaerober Klebstoff fuÈr groûe WiderstandskraÈfte fuÈr Zylinderkupplungen aus Metall geeignet (Wellenna-
Loctite 638
ben). Kann Einzelteil mit einem Radialspiel zwischen 0,1 mm und 0,25 mm zusammenkleben.
. Adhesivo anaeroÂbico para el encolado raÂpido de alta resistencia de juntas cilõÂndricas de metal (cubo en el eje).
Puede encolar piezas con juego entre 0,1 mm y 0,25 mm.
. AdheÂsif anaeÂrobic servant aÁ un collage rapide et hautement reÂsistant des joints cylindriques en meÂtal
(moyeu sur l'arbre). Il peut servir aÁ coller des pieÁces avec un jeu allant de 0,1 aÁ 0,25 mm.
. Anaerobic adhesive for fast and medium-strength gluing of cylindrical metal joints (hub on shaft). Can glue
together parts with radial clearance below 0.1 mm.
. Adesivo anaerobico per l'incollaggio rapido a media resistenza di giunti cilindrici in metallo (mozzo su albero).
PuoÁ incollare particolari con gioco radiale inferiore a 0,1 mm.
. Anaerober Klebstoff fuÈr mittlere WiderstandskraÈfte fuÈr Zylinderkupplungen aus Metall geeignet (Wellenna-
Loctite 648 ben). Kann Einzelteil mit einem Radialspiel von weniger als 0,1 mm zusammenkleben.
. Adhesivo anaeroÂbico para encolado raÂpido de media resistencia juntas cilõÂndricas de metal (cubo en el eje).
Puede encolar piezas con juego radial inferior a 0,1 mm.
. AdheÂsif anaeÂrobic servant aÁ un collage rapide moyennement reÂsistant des joints cylindriques en meÂtal
(moyeu sur l'arbre).
Il peut servir aÁ coller des pieÁces avec un jeu radial infeÂrieur aÁ 0,1 mm.
. Solvent-based sealing compound for elastic seals, drying through evaporation. Used for sealing the outer
diameter of sealing rings for rotating shafts with outer metal reinforcement.
(AREXONS) . Mastice sigillante per guarnizioni elastiche a base di solvente, essicante per evaporazione.
Repositionable jointing
compound for seals Viene utilizzato per la tenuta sul diamentro esterno di anelli di tenuta per alberi rotanti con armatura metallica
Mastice per guarnizioni esterna.
riposizionabile . Klebstoff fuÈr Gummidichtung auf LoÈsemittelbasis, trocknet durch Verdampfung.
Klebstoff fuÈr verstellbare Wird am aÈuûeren Durchmesser von Dichtungsringe bei rotierenden Wellen mit Metallmantel verwendet.
Dichtungen . Pasta para juntas de sellado para juntas elaÂsticas a base de disolvente, deshidratante por evaporacioÂn.
Pasta para juntas Se utiliza para la estanqueidad en el diaÂmetro externo de segmentos de compresioÂn, para ejes giratorios con
reposicionable
armadura metaÂlica exterior.
Mastic pour garnitures aÁ
remettre en place . Mastic adheÂsif aÁ base de solvants pour garnitures eÂlastiques, seÂchant par eÂvaporation.
Il sert garder eÂtanche le diameÁtre exteÂrieur des bagues d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ des arbres rotatifs ayant une arma-
ture meÂtallique externe.
11
DENOMINATION
DENOMINAZIONE
DENOMINACION
DENOMINATION
. Semi-fluid adhesive material used for sealing and filling and to protect components from environmental and
physical elements. Polymerises with non-corrosive dampness.
Silicone . Materiale adesivo semifluido usato per sigillatura, riempimenti e per la protezione di componenti dagli elementi
Silicone ambientali e fisici. Polimerizza con umiditaÁ non corrosiva.
. HalbfluÈssiger Klebstoff zum Befestigen, FuÈllen und zum Schutz von Bestandteilen vor aÈuûeren Einwirkun-
Silikon
gen. Polymerisiert durch nicht korrosive Feuchtigkeit
Silicona . Material adhesivo semifluido usado para el sellado, llenado y para la proteccioÂn de componentes de elemen-
Silicone tos ambientales y fõÂsicos. Polimeriza con humedad no corrosiva.
. Produit adheÂsif semi-fluide utiliseÂ pour le scellage, remplissage et protection des eÂleÂments ambiants et phy-
siques. PolymeÂrise aÁ une humiditeÂ non corrosive.
. Highly adhesive synthetic grease, with silicone compounds added.
Applied to adjustment screws with hole communicating with oil-type fluids.
Used when frequent adjusting is required.
. Grasso sintetico con elevato grado di adesivitaÁ, additivato con composti siliconici.
(TECNO LUPE/101) Applicato su viti di registrazione a foro comunicante con fluidi di tipo oleoso.
Silicone-based grease Usato quando si richiedono frequenti interventi di registrazione.
Grasso al silicone . Synthetisches Fett mit hoher Haftfestigkeit, mit silikonhaltigen Stoffen legiert.
Wird auf Stellschrauben mit Loch, die mit oÈlhaltigen FluÈssigkeiten in Kontakt stehen, angebracht.
Silikonfett Wird verwendet, wenn die Schraub oÈfters eingestellt werden muû.
Grasa a la silicona . Grasa sinteÂtica con elevado grado de adhesioÂn, aditivada con componentes silicoÂnicos.
Graisse au silicone Aplicada en tornillos de ajuste de orificio comunicante con fluidos de tipo oleoso.
Se usa cuando se requieren frecuentes intervenciones de ajuste.
. Graisse syntheÂtique ayant un degreÂ d'adheÂsiviteÂ eÂleveÂ, adjuveÂ de composeÂs au silicone.
AppliqueÂ sur les vis de reÂglage aÁ trou communiquant avec des fluides du type huileux.
UtiliseÂ quand il y a besoin de reÂglages freÂquents.
. Lubricating compound containing molybdenum disulphide, used to lubricate articulation pins and to prevent
sticking and oxidation of parts that are not lubricated on a regular basis.
. Composto lubrificante contenente bisolfuro di molibdeno, usato per la lubrificazione di perni snodo e per pre-
venire incollamenti ed ossidazioni di particolari non lubrificati in modo continuo.
Molikote . Schmierstoff mit MolybidaÈndisulfid; wird zum Schmieren von Gelenkstiften und gegen Ankleben und Oxy-
(DOW CORNING) dation von nicht dauergeschmierten Einzelteilen verwendet.
. Compuesto lubricante que contiene bisulfuro de molibdeno, usado para la lubricacioÂn de roÂtulas y para pre-
venir encoladuras y oxidaciones de piezas no lubricadas de manera continua.
. ComposeÂ lubrifiant contenant du bisulfure de molybdeÁne, utiliseÂ pour lubrifier les axes d'articulation et preÂ-
venir collages et oxydations des pieÁces qui ne sont pas continuellement lubrifieÂes.
. Applied to bearings, sliding parts and used to lubricate seals or parts during assembly
(Lithium-based) Grease . Applicato a cuscinetti, parti scorrevoli e per lubrificare guarnizioni o pezzi in fase di montaggio.
Grasso (al Litio) . Wird auf Lager, Gleitteilen aufgetragen und zum Schmieren von Dichtungen oder von Teilen bei der Mon-
(Lithium) Fett tage verwendet.
Grasa (al Litio) . Aplicada a cojinetes, partes deslizables o para lubricar juntas o piezas en fase de montaje.
Graisse (au Lithium) . AppliqueÂ sur les paliers, parties coulissantes et pour lubrifier les garnitures ou pieÁces pendant la phase de
montage.
12
NOTES ON SAFETY PRECAUTIONS - NOTE RIGUARDANTI LA SICUREZZA - BEMERKUNGEN ZUR
SICHERHEIT - NORMAS CONCERNIENTES A LA SEGURIDAD - NOTES EN MATIERE DE SECURITE
1 - During all operations described in this manual, the LoÈsemittel muÈssen als SondermuÈll und auf jeden Fall laut den
GB axle should be fastened onto a trestle, while the oÈrtlich geltenden Vorschriften entsorgt werden.
other parts mentioned should rest on supporting 9- Zur Reinigung ausschlieûlich schwache LoÈsemittel wie Petroleum,
benches. Terpentin oder wasserhaltige LoÈsemittel verwenden. Auf keinen
2- When removing one of the arms, an anti-tilting safety trestle Fall TrichloraÈthylen, tuolol- oder xylolhlatige LoÈsemittel usw.
should be placed under the other arm. verwenden.
3- When working on an arm that is fitted on the machine, make sure 10 - Um die ArbeitsvorgaÈnge verstaÈndlich abzubilden, werden in
that the supporting trestles are correctly positioned and that the einigen Fotos die Aggregate ohne Einzelteile gezeigt, die sonst
machine is locked lengthways. bei der Arbeit nicht abmontiert werden muÈssen.
4- Do not admit any other person inside the work area; mark off the Nur die beschriebenen Teile abmontieren.
area, hang warning signs and remove the ignition key from the 11 - Unter RECHTS und LINKS versteht man in diesem Handbuch die
machine. Seite einer Person, die zur Achse schaut und zwar dem Antrieb
5- Use only clean, quality tools; discard all worn, damaged, low- entgegengesetzt.
quality or improvised wrenches and tools. Ensure that all 12 - Nach beendeten Arbeiten und um Rostbildungen zu vermeiden,
dynamometric wrenches have been checked and calibrated. die Teile an denen der Lack ggf. beschaÈdigt worden ist,
6- Always wear gloves and non-slip rubber shoes when performing anstreichen.
repair work. 1 - Las operaciones descritas se refieren al eje blo-
7- Should you stain a surface with oil, remove marks straight away. ESP queado en un caballete y a algunas partes apoyadas
8- Dispose of all lubricants, seals, rags and solvents once work has en el banco de trabajo.
been completed. Treat them as special waste and dispose of them 2- Cuando se saca un brazo del eje, colocar debajo del otro un
according to the relative law provisions obtaining in the country caballete de seguridad antivuelco.
where the axles are being overhauled. 3- Si se trabaja con un eje montado en la maÂquina, asegurarse de
9- Make sure that only weak solvents are used for cleaning haber colocado caballetes soporte y de haber inmovilizado
purposes; avoid using turpentine, dilutants and toluol-, xylol- longitudinalmente la maÂquina.
based or similar solvents; use light solvents such as Kerosene, 4- No permitir que personas extranÄas entren en la zona de trabajo;
mineral spirits or water-based, environment friendly solvents. delimitar esta zona, colgar carteles de aviso de hombres
10 - For the sake of clarity, the parts that do not normally need to be trabajando y sacar las llaves de arranque de la maÂquina.
removed have not been reproduced in some of the diagrams. 5- Usar soÂlo y exclusivamente herramientas limpias y de buena
11 - The terms RIGHT and LEFT in this manual refer to the position of cualidad; descartar llaves o herramientas gastadas o danÄadas, de
the operator facing the axle from the side opposite the drive. calidad mediocre o improvisadas. Asegurarse de que las llaves
12 - After repair work has been completed, accurately touch up any dinamomeÂtricas han sido controladas y calibradas.
coated part that may have been damaged. 6- Durante las operaciones de reparacioÂn, llevar siempre guantes y
calzado antideslizamiento.
1 - Le operazioni descritte sono riferite all'assale bloc- 7- Limpiar inmediatamente las zonas que pudieran estar sucias de
ITA cato su cavalletto ed alcuni particolari appoggiati su aceite.
un banco di lavoro.
8- Los lubricantes, las juntas, los trapos para la limpieza y los
2 - Quando si asporta un braccio dell'assale, sistemare sotto l'altro disolventes usados hay que eliminarlos como desechos especia-
braccio un cavalletto di sicurezza antiribaltamento. les y, de todas formas, de acuerdo con las normativas vigentes en
3 - Se si opera su un'assale montato sulla macchina, assicurarsi di el paõÂs en el que se revisan los ejes.
aver sistemato dei cavalletti di sostentamento e di aver immobi- 9- Para limpiar, utilizar soÂlo disolventes deÂbiles excluyendo en
lizzato longitudinalmente la macchina. absoluto tricloroetileno, diluyentes y disolventes a base de toluol,
4 - Non permettere che persone estranee entrino nella zona di lavoro; silol, etc.; usar soÂlo disolventes ligeros como queroseno, aguarraÂs
delimitare questa zona, appendere dei cartelli di avviso di lavori in minerales o disolventes ecoloÂgicos a base de agua.
corso ed asportare le chiavi di avviamento della macchina. 10 - Para que resulte clara la exposicioÂn y la ilustracioÂn, en las figuras
5 - Usare solo ed esclusivamente attrezzi puliti e di buona qualitaÁ; de algunos grupos faltan algunas piezas que por lo general se
scartare chiavi od attrezzi usurati o danneggiati, di bassa qualitaÁ pueden dejar montadas. Sacar soÂlo las partes descritas.
od improvvisati. Assicurarsi che le chiavi dinamometriche siano 11 - Las palabras DERECHA E IZQUIERDA usadas en el manual se
state controllate e tarate. refieren a la persona que mira el eje del lado opuesto a la toma de
6 - Durante le operazioni di riparazione, indossare sempre guanti e movimiento.
scarpe antiscivolo. 12 - Al final de las reparaciones, para evitar oxidaciones, retocar
7 - Pulire immediatamente le zone eventualmente imbrattate d'olio. cuidadosamente las partes pintadas que estuvieran danÄadas.
8 - I lubrificanti, le guarnizioni, gli eventuali stracci di pulizia ed i
solventi usati devono essere smaltiti come rifiuti speciali e 1 - Les opeÂrations deÂcrites se rapportent aÁ l'essieu
comunque secondo le normative vigenti nel Paese ove vengono F bloqueÂ sur chevalet et de quelques pieÁces poseÂes
revisionati gli assali. sur un eÂtabli de travail.
9 - Per la pulizia, usare solo solventi deboli escludendo categorica- 2- Quand on enleÁve un essieu monteÂ sur la machine, ajuster sous
mente trielina, diluenti e solventi a base di toluolo, xilolo, ecc.; l'autre bras un chevalet de seÂcuriteÂ contre tout basculement.
usare solo solventi leggeri quali cherosene, ragie minerali o 3- Si on oeuvre sur un essieu monteÂ sur la machine, s'assurer
solventi ecologici a base d'acqua. d'avoir ameÂnageÂ des chevalets de soutien et d'avoir bloqueÂ la
10 - Per chiarezza di illustrazione ed esposizione, sulle figure di alcuni machine en longueur.
gruppi mancano dei particolari che, normalmente, possono essere 4- Ne jamais permettre aÁ des eÂtrangers de peÂneÂtrer dans la zone de
lasciati montati. Rimuovere solo i particolari descritti. travail; deÂlimiter cette zone, mettre des pancartes de signalisation
11 - I termini DESTRA e SINISTRA usati nel manuale sono riferiti alla de travaux en cours et enlever les cleÂs de contact de la machine.
persona che guarda l'assale dal lato opposto alla presa di moto. 5- N'utiliser que des outils propres et de bonne qualiteÂ; eÂliminer cleÂ
12 - Al termine delle riparazioni, per evitare dannose ossidazioni, ou autres outils useÂs, abõÃmeÂs, de mauvaise qualiteÂ ou improviseÂs.
ritoccare con cura le parti verniciate eventualmente danneggiate. Veiller aÁ ce que les cleÂs dynamomeÂtriques aient eÂteÂ controÃleÂes et
calibreÂes.
1 - Die beschriebenen VorgaÈnge werden an der Achse 6- Pendant les opeÂrations de reÂparation, endosser toujours gants et
D vorgenommen, wenn diese auf einem Bock blockiert chaussures antideÂrapantes.
ist. Zur Bearbeitung der Einzelteile, werden diese 7- Nettoyer tout de suite les eÂventuelles zones souilleÂes d'huile.
auf die Werkbank gelegt. 8- Les lubrifiants, les garnitures, les eÂventuels chiffons servant au
2- Wenn eine Achse abgenommen wird, einen Sicherheitsbock unter nettoyage et les solvants utiliseÂs devront eÃtre reÂcolteÂs et traiteÂs
den zweiten Arm legen. comme rebut speÂcial conformeÂment aux lois en vigueur dans le
3- Werden Arbeiten an der Achse vorgenommen, wenn diese noch pays ouÁ les essieux sont en reÂvision.
an der Maschine montiert ist, BoÈcke zur Halterung unter die 9- Pour le nettoyage, n'utiliser que des solvants aÁ base de toluol,
Achse stellen und die Maschine der LaÈnge nach blockieren. xylol, etc.; n'utiliser que des solvants leÂgers tels que keÂroseÁne,
4- Es duÈrfen sich keine fremde Personen in der NaÈhe der Maschine essences mineÂrales, ou solvants eÂcologiques aÁ base d'eau.
waÈhrend der Arbeiten aufhalten; diesen Bereich absperren und 10 - En ce qui concerne la clarteÂ en matieÁre d'illustration et exposition,
mit Schilder kennzeichnen, die auf die laufenden Arbeiten sur les figures de certains groupes, il y a des pieÁces manquantes
hinweisen. ZuÈndschluÈssel von der Maschine abnehmen. qui normalement peuvent rester monteÂes.
5- Nur saubere Werkzeuge guter QualitaÈt verwenden; alte, beschaÈ- Enlever uniquement les pieÁces deÂcrites.
digte oder improvisierte Hilfsmittel nicht verwenden. Sicher- 11 - Les termes DROITE et GAUCHE utiliseÂs dans ce manuel se
stellen, daû die Dynamometer gepruÈft und geeicht worden sind. rapportent aÁ la personne regardant l'essieu du coÃteÂ opposeÂ aÁ celui
6- Bei Reparaturen, stets Handschuhe und rutschfeste Schuhe tragen. de la prise de mouvement.
7- Mit OÈ l beschmutzte Stellen, sofort reinigen. 12 - A la fin des opeÂrations, afin d'eÂviter un risque d'oxydation
8- Gebrauchte Schmiermittel, Dichtungen, Reinigungslappen und nuisible, retoucher soigneusement les parties vernies eÂventuelle-
ment abõÃmeÂes.
13
SYMBOLS - SIMBOLI - SYMBOLS
SIMBOLOS - SYMBOLES
Disassembly of assembly groups

Smontaggio di sottogruppi
Zerlegen von Baugruppen
Desmontaje de subgrupos
Demontage des sous-groupes
Reassemble to from assembly groups
Montaggio di sottogruppi
Zusasmmenbauen von Baugruppen
Ensamblaje de subgrupos
Montage des sous-groupes
Remove obstruction parts
Smontaggio di particolari ingombri
Abbauen-Ausbauen
Desmontaje de componentes abultados
Demontage des pieces encombrante
Reinstall-remount parts which had obstructed disassembly
Montaggio di particolari ingombri
Einbauen-Ausbauen
Montaje de componentes abultados
Montage des pieces encombrante
Attention ! Important notice
Attenzione, indicazione importante
Achtung, wichtiger Hinweis
¡ Cuidado ! IndicacioÂn importante
Attention, indication importante
Check - adjust e.g. torque, dimensions, pressures, etc.
Controllare - regolare p.e. coppie, misure, pressioni ecc.
PruÈfen - Einstellen z.B. Momente, Maûe, Drucke u.s.cs.
Controlar y ajustar, por ej. pares, medidas, presiones, etc.
Controler, regler p.e. couples, mesures, pressions ecc.
T=Special tool P=page
T=Attrezzature speciali P=Pagina
T=Spezialwerkzeug P=Seite
T=Herramientas especiales P=PaÂgina
T=Outils P=Page
Note direction of installation
Rispettare direzione di montaggio
Einbaurichtung beachten
Respetar la direccioÂn de ensamblaje
Respecter direction de montage
Visual inspection
Esaminare con controllo visuale
Kontrollieren -PruÈfen
Examinar mediante inspeccioÂn visual
Controler, examiner, controle visuel
Possibly still serviceable, renew if necessary
Eventualmente riutilizzare (sostituire se necessario)
Bedingt weiderverwendbar
Puede volver a utilizarse (reemplazar, si es preciso)
Eventuellement a utiliser a noveau (remplacer si neÂcessaire)
Renew at each reassembly
Sostituire ad ogni montaggio
Beim Zusammenbau immer erneuern
Puede reemplazarse a cada ensamblaje
Remplacer avec chaque montage
Unlock - lock e.g. split pin, locking plate, etc.
Togliere-mettere la sicura
Entsichern-Sichern
Quitar-colocar el seguro
Enlever-mettre la securite
Lock-adhere (liquid sealant)
Mettere la sicura, incollare (mastice liquido)
Sichern-Kleben (fluÈssige Dichtung)
Colocar el seguro, pegar (mastique lõÂquido)
Mettre la securite, coller (mastic liquide)
Guard against material damage, damage to parts
Evitare danni materiali, danni a pezzi
Materialschaden verhuÈten
Evitar danÄar los materials o las piezas
Eviter dommages au materiaux, dommages au pieces
Mark before disassembly, observe marks when reassembly
Marchiare prima dello smontaggio (per il montaggio)
Vor dem Ausbau markieren (fuÈr den Zusammenbau)
Marcar antes de desmontar (para facilitar el ensamblaje)
Marquer avant le demontage (pour le montage)
Filling - topping up - refilling e.g. oil, cooling water, etc.
Caricare - riempire (olio - lubrificante)
EinfuÈllen - AuffuÈllen - NachfuÈllen (OÈ l-Schmiermittel)
Cargar - llenar (aceite lubricante)
Charger - remplir (huile - lubrifiant)
Drain off oil, lubricant
Scaricare olio, lubrificante
OÈ l, bzw. Schmiermittel Ablassen
Descargar aceite lubricante
Vidanger, lubrifiant
Tighten
Tendere
Spannen
Tensar
Tendre
Apply pressure into hydraulic circuit
Inserire pressione nel circuito idraulico
Leitung unter Druck setzen
Introducir presioÂn en el circuito hidraÂulico
Inserer pression dans le circuit hydraulique
To clean
Pulire
Reinigen
Limpiar
Nettoyer
Lubricate - grease
Lubrificare - ingrassare
Schmieren - einfetten
Lubrificar - Engrasar
Lubrifier - Graisser
CHECKING WEAR AND REPLACING THE BRAKING DISKS - CONTROLLO USURA E SOSTITUZIONE DISCHI FRENO - VERSCHLEISS
KONTROLLIEREN UND BREMSSCHEIBEN AUSWECHSELN - CONTROL DEL DESGASTE Y SUSTITUCION DE LOS DISCOS DEL FRENO -
CONTROLE D'USURE ET SUBSTITUTION DES DISQUES DE FREINAGE
1
T1
S
F1240382 F1240383
GB a bar GB b
CAUTION! Perform all operations on both arms. Apply the brakes and, keeping them under pressure, check the
Remove the oil-level plug (1). linings "S" between the disks using tool T1.
Minimum "S": 4.5 mm.
CAUTION! Replace the braking disks and the intermediate disks
on both sides if necessary.
2 3
17
F1240384 F1240385
GB c GB d
Remove the swinging support (2) on the side opposite the drive. Disconnect the pins of the steering bars from the steering case
NOTE. If the bushing (17) is worn and needs replacing, note down (See «HOW TO REMOVE THE STEERING CYLINDER»).
the assembly side of the connection notch "A". Sling the arm (3) to be removed and put the rod under slight
tension.
4 5 6
3
3 F1240386 F1240387
GB e GB f
Unloose and remove the screws (4) and the washers (5) that fix the Remove the arm (3) together with the pack of the braking disks (7).
arm (3) to the central body (6). Place the arm on a bench.
14
ATTENZIONE! Eseguire tutte le operazioni per i due Eseguire una frenata e, mantenendo la pressione,
ITA bracci. ITA controllare con l'attrezzo T1 lo spessore "S" tra i
Asportare il tappo (1) di livello olio. dischi.
"S" minimo: 4,5 mm
ATTENZIONE! Se necessario, sostituire i dischi freno ed intermedi
di ambedue i lati.
ACHTUNG! Alle VorgaÈnge fuÈr beide Arme durch- Die Bremse einmal betaÈtigen und bei betaÈtigter
D fuÈhren. D Bremse mit dem T1 Werkzeug das DistanzstuÈck "S"
OÈ lpegelstopfen (1) abnehmen. zwischen den Scheiben kontrollieren.
"S" mindestens: 4,5 mm
a b ACHTUNG! Wenn noÈtig, die Bremsscheiben und die mittleren
Scheiben auf beiden Seiten auswechseln.
CUIDADO! Ejecutar todas las operaciones para los Ejecutar un frenado y, manteniendo la presioÂn,
ESP dos brazos. ESP controlar con la herramienta T1, el espesor "S" entre
Sacar el tapoÂn (1) de carga de nivel aceite. los discos.
"S" mõÂnimo: 4,5 mm
CUIDADO! Si fuera necesario, sustituir los discos del freno y los
intermedios a ambos lados.
ATTENTION! Effectuer toutes les opeÂrations sur les 2 Effectuer un freinage, puis en tenant sous pression,
F bras. F controÃler aÁ l'aide de l'outil T1 la cale "S" entre les
Enlever le bouchon de la jauge d'huile (1). disques.
"S" minimum: 4,5 mm.
ATTENTION! Si besoin, substituer les disques de freinage et les
intermeÂdiaires des deux coÃteÂs.
Rimuovere il supporto oscillante (2) del lato opposto Scollegare dalle scatole snodo i perni delle barre di
ITA alla presa di moto. ITA sterzatura (Vedere «RIMOZIONE DEL CILINDRO DI
NOTA. Se si deve sostituire la bronzina (17) percheÁ STERZATURA»).
usurata, annotare il senso di montaggio del taglio di giunzione "A". Imbragare il braccio (3) da asportare e mettere in leggera tensione
la fune.
Schwenkbare Halterung (2) an der der Zapfwelle Von den GelenkgehaÈusen die Stifte der Lenkstangen
D entgegensetzten Seite abnehmen. D abtrennen (Siehe «LENKZYLINDER ABMONTIEREN»).
BEMERKUNG. Soll das Bronzelager (17) wegen Arm (3) anschlagen und das Seil spannen.
Verschleiû ausgewechselt werden, Montagerichtung des Verbin-
c dungsschnitts "A" beachten. d
Remover el soporte oscilante (2) del lado opuesto a la Desconectar de los caÂrters de las roÂtulas los pernos de
ESP toma de movimiento. ESP las barras de direccioÂn (VeÂase «REMOCION DEL
NOTA. Si hay que sustituir la chumacera (17) porque CILINDRO DE DIRECCION»).
estaÂ gastada, anotar el sentido de montaje del corte de unioÂn "A". Eslingar el brazo (3) que hay que sacar y poner en tensioÂn ligera el
cable.
Enlever le support oscillant (2) du coÃteÂ opposeÂ aÁ celui DeÂbrancher des boõÃtiers articulation les tourillons des
F de la prise de mouvement. F barres de braquage (Voir «DEPOSE DU CYLINDRE
NOTE. Si on doit remplacer le coussinet (17) parce DE BRAQUAGE»).
qu'il est useÂ, prendre note du sens de montage de l'entaille de Elinguer le bras (3) aÁ extraire et mettre leÂgeÁrement en tension la
jonction "A". corde.
Allentare ed asportare le viti (4) e le rondelle (5) che Rimuovere il braccio (3) e con esso il pacco dei dischi
ITA fissano il braccio (3) al corpo centrale (6). ITA di frenatura (7).
Posizionare il braccio su un banco di lavoro.
Schrauben (4) mit den Unterlegscheiben (5) lockern Arm (3) samt Bremsscheiben (7) abnehmen.
D und abschrauben, die den Arm (3) am zentralen D Arm auf die Werkbank legen.
KoÈrper (6) befestigen.
e f
Aflojar y extraer los tornillos (4) y las arandelas (5) que Remover el brazo (3) y con el mismo el paquete de
ESP fijan el brazo (3) al cuerpo central (6). ESP discos de frenado (7).
Posicionar el brazo en un banco de trabajo.
Desserrer et enlever les vis (4), les rondelles (5) qui DeÂposer le bras (3) et avec ce dernier le paquet de
F fixent le bras (3) au corps central (6). F disques de freinage (7).
Placer le bras sur l'eÂtabli d'usinage.
15
CHECKING WEAR AND REPLACING THE BRAKING DISKS - CONTROLLO USURA E SOSTITUZIONE DISCHI FRENO - VERSCHLEISS
KONTROLLIEREN UND BREMSSCHEIBEN AUSWECHSELN - CONTROL DEL DESGASTE Y SUSTITUCION DE LOS DISCOS DEL FRENO -
CONTROLE D'USURE ET SUBSTITUTION DES DISQUES DE FREINAGE
8
9
18
7 8
F1240388 F1240389
GB a GB b
Remove the braking disks (7) and note down their order of Remove the reversal springs (8) from the piston (9).
assembly. NOTE. If the springs (8) are weak or deformed they must be
NOTE. 1 - If the disks do not need replacing, avoid switching their replaced.
position.
2 - Extract the u-joint (18).
10 9
F1240390 F1240391
GB c bar GB d
Remove the pin screws (10) guiding the piston (9). Slowly introduce compressed air through the connection of the
CAUTION! If the screws are to be replaced, note down the different braking circuit in order to extract the entire piston.
colours for the different brake gap. CAUTION! Hold on to the piston as it may be suddenly ejected and
(See «HOW TO ASSEMBLE THE BRAKING UNITS») damaged.
10
15
17
9
17 8
11
14 MAX 10°
16
2
1
3
13
12
6 18
GB e GB f
7
5
4
D1240037
16
Rimuovere i dischi di frenatura (7) annotando l'ordine Rimuovere le molle (8) di rientro del pistone (9).
ITA di montaggio. ITA
NOTA. Se le molle (8) risultano snervate o deformate,
NOTA. 1 - Se i dischi non vanno sostituiti, evitare lo devono essere sostituite.
scambio di posizione.
2 - Estrarre il doppio giunto cardanico (18).
Bremsscheiben (7) abnehmen und auf die Reihenfolge RuÈckzugsfedern (8) des Kolbens (9) abnehmen.
D der Montage achten. D
BEMERKUNG. Wenn die Federn (8) nachgesetzt oder
BEMERKUNG. 1 - Sollen die Scheiben nicht ausge- verformt sind, diese auswechseln.
wechselt werden, diese in der richtigen Reihenfolge zur Seite
a legen. b
2 - Doppelgelenkwelle (18) abnehmen.
Remover los discos de frenado (7) anotando el orden Remover los muelles (8) de vuelta del pistoÂn (9).
ESP de montaje. ESP
NOTA. Si los muelles (8) estaÂn desnervados o
NOTA. 1 - Si los discos no tienen que ser sustituidos, deformados, hay que sustituirlos.
evitar el intercambio de posicioÂn.
2 - Extraer el semieje (18).
Enlever les disques de freinage (7) en prenant note de Enlever les ressorts (8) de rentreÂe du piston (9).
F l'ordre de montage. F
NOTE. Si les ressorts (8) sont eÂnerveÂs ou deÂformeÂs, il
NOTE. 1 - Si les disques ne sont pas aÁ remplacer, faut les remplacer.
eÂviter le changement de position.
2 - Extraire le joint de cardan double (18).
Rimuovere le viti a perno (10) di guida del pistone (9). Immettere lentamente aria compressa attraverso
ITA ITA l'attacco del circuito frenante per estrarre il pistone
ATTENZIONE! Se le viti devono essere sostituite,
annotare la colorazione distintiva per i giochi freno completo.
(Vedere «ASSEMBLAGGIO GRUPPI DI FRENATURA»). ATTENZIONE! Trattenere il pistone che puoÁ essere espulso
velocemente ed essere danneggiato.
Die Stiftschraube (10) zur KolbenfuÈhrung (9) entfer- Langsam Druckluft in den Bremskreislauf blasen, um
D nen. D den kompletten Kolben herauszuziehen.
ACHTUNG! Sollen die Schrauben ausgewechselt ACHTUNG! Den Kolben mit der Hand halten, um zu
werden, auf die farbige Kennzeichnung fuÈr das Bremsenspiel vermeiden daû er zu schnell herausgestoûen und beschaÈdigt wird.
c achten (Siehe «ZUSAMMENBAU DER BREMSAGGREGATE»). d
Remover los pernos roscados (10) de guõÂa del pistoÂn Introducir lentamente aire comprimido a traveÂs de la
ESP (9). ESP unioÂn del circuito frenante para extraer el pistoÂn
CUIDADO! Si hay que sustituir los pernos, anotar el completo.
color distintivo para los juegos del freno (VeÂase «MONTAJE DE CUIDADO! Retener el pistoÂn porque puede ser expulsado
LOS GRUPOS DE FRENADO»). raÂpidamente y quedar danÄado.
Enlever les vis goujon (10) de guidage du piston (9). Injecter tout doucement de l'air comprimeÂ aÁ travers le
F F raccord du circuit freinant pour extraire le piston
ATTENTION! Si les vis doivent eÃtre remplaceÂes,
prendre note de la couleur de distinction des jeux de complet.
frein (Voir «ASSEMBLAGE DU GROUPE DE FREINAGE»). ATTENTION! Retenir le piston qui pourrait eÃtre eÂjecteÂ fortement et
s'abõÃmer.
ITA ITA
D D
e f
ESP ESP
F F
17
HOW TO ASSEMBLE THE BRAKING UNITS - ASSEMBLAGGIO DEI GRUPPI DI FRENATURA - BREMSAGGREGATE MONTIEREN -
MONTAJE DE LOS GRUPOS DE FRENADO - ASSEMBLAGE DES GROUPES DE FREINAGE
14
12
11
13
15
3
15 9
9
F1240392 F1240393
GB a GB b
Accurately clean the piston (9) and the seats of slide and seal. Insert the stroke automatic regulation springs (15); place them in
Replace the O-rings (11) and (12) and the anti-extrusion rings (13) line with the piston (9).
and (14); make sure that the assembly side is correct.
CAUTION! Accurately check the positioning of the anti-extrusion
rings (13) and (14).
9
9
F1240394 F1240395
GB c GB d
Lubricate the seals (11) and (12) and fit the piston (9) into the arm Assist the insertion of the piston (9) by lightly hammering around
(3). the edge with a plastic hammer.
CAUTION! Make sure that the piston seat fits into the stop pin (A)
inside the arm.
8
10 9
8
F1240390 F1240389
GB e GB f
Fit the pin screws (10) making sure that they are all of the same Fit the reversal springs (8) on the piston (9).
colour. White: 1 mm gap CAUTION! Pay due attention not to deform the connections of the
Yellow: 0.75 mm gap springs.
Blue: 0.5 mm gap
Apply Loctite 270 to the thread.
Torque wrench setting: 5±7 Nm.
18
Pulire accuratamente il pistone (9) e le sedi di Inserire a filo del pistone (9) le molle (15) per
ITA scorrimento e tenuta. ITA l'autoregolazione della corsa.
Sostituire le guarnizioni OR (11) e (12) e gli anelli
antiestrusione (13) e (14), rispettando il senso di montaggio.
ATTENZIONE! Controllare attentamente il posizionamento degli
anelli antiestrusione (13) e (14).
Kolben (9) sowie Gleit- und Dichtungssitze sorgfaÈltig Den Kolben (9) und die Federn (15) zur Selbstregelung
D reinigen. D des Hubs genau einsetzen.
O-Ringe (11) und (12) sowie die Halteringe (13) und
(14) auswechseln; dabei auf die Reihenfolge der Montage achten.
a ACHTUNG! Position der Halteringe (13) und (14) sorgfaÈltig b
kontrollieren.
Limpiar minuciosamente el pistoÂn (9) y los alojamien- Introducir a ras del pistoÂn (9) los muelles (15) para la
ESP tos de deslizamiento y estanqueidad. ESP autorregulacioÂn de la carrera.
Sustituir las juntas OR (11) y (12) y los anillos
antiextrusioÂn (13) y (14) teniendo en cuenta el sentido de montaje.
CUIDADO! Controlar atentamente el posicionamiento de los anillos
antiextrusioÂn (13) y (14).
Nettoyer soigneusement le piston (9), les logements Introduire, au fil du bord du piston (9) les ressorts (15)
F de coulissement et d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ. F pour l'autoreÂgulation de la course.
Remplacer les garnitures OR (11) et (12), les anneaux
anti-extrusion (13) et (14) en respectant le sens du montage.
ATTENTION! ControÃler soigneusement la position des anneaux
anti-extrusion (13) et (14).
Lubrificare le guarnizioni (11) e (12) e montare nel Aiutare l'inserimento del pistone (9) con leggeri colpi
ITA braccio (3) il pistone (9). ITA di mazzuolo in materiale plastico distribuiti lungo la
ATTENZIONE!: Controllare che la sede del pistone circonferenza.
imbocchi la spina di arresto (A) interna al braccio.
Dichtungen (11) und (12) schmieren und Arm (3) und Den Kolben (9) einsetzen; diesen dazu leicht mit
D Kolben (9) montieren. D einem Gummihammer entlang seiner Kreislinie schla-
ACHTUNG! Der Kolben muû den Anhaltestift (A) im gen.
Inneren des Arms aufnehmen.
c d
Lubricar las juntas (11) y (12) y montar en el brazo (3) Facilitar la insercioÂn del pistoÂn (9) con ligeros golpes
ESP el pistoÂn (9). ESP de martillo de material plaÂstico distribuidos en toda la
CUIDADO! Controlar que el alojamiento del pistoÂn circunferencia.
encaje en la clavija de tope (A) dentro del brazo.
Lubrifier les garnitures (11) et (12), puis monter dans le Accompagner l'introduction du piston (9) par de leÂgers
F bras (3) le piston (9). F coups de maillet en matieÁre plastique distribueÂs tout le
ATTENTION! ControÃler que le logement du piston long de la circonfeÂrence.
s'emboõÃte bien avec la broche d'arreÃt (A) aÁ l'inteÂrieur du bras.
Montare le viti a perno (10) controllando che siano Montare le molle (8) di ritorno del pistone (9).
ITA tutte dello stesso colore. Bianco: gioco 1 mm ITA
ATTENZIONE! Usare molta cautela per non deforma-
Giallo: gioco 0,75 mm re gli attacchi delle molle.
Azzurro: gioco 0,5 mm.
Spalmare la filettatura con Loctite 270.
Coppia di serraggio: 5v7 Nm
Die Stiftschrauben (10) einsetzen. Diese muÈssen alle Die RuÈckzugsfedern (8) des Kolbens (9) montieren.
D gleichfarbig sein. Weiû: Spiel 1 mm D
ACHTUNG! Sehr vorsichtig vorgehen, um die Federn
Gelb: Spiel 0,75 mm am Anschluû nicht zu verformen.
Hellblau: Spiel 0,5 mm.
e Das Gewinde mit Loctite 270 schmieren.
Anzugsmoment: 5v7 Nm.
f
Montar los pernos roscados (10) controlando que sean Montar los muelles (8) de retorno del pistoÂn (9).
ESP todos del mismo color. Blanco: juego 1 mm ESP
CUIDADO! Tener mucho cuidado a fin de no deformar
Amarillo: juego 0,75 mm las uniones de los muelles.
Azul: juego 0,5 mm.
Pasar en la rosca Loctite 270.
Par de torsioÂn: 5v7 Nm.
Monter les vis aÁ tourillon (10) en controÃlant si elles sont Monter les ressorts (8) de retour du piston (9).
F toutes de ma meÃme couleur. Blanc: jeu 1 mm F
ATTENTION! Faire treÁs attention aÁ ne pas deÂformer
Jaune: jeu 0,75 mm les raccords des ressorts.
Bleu ciel: jeu 0,5 mm.
Enduire le filetage de Loctite 270.
Couple de serrage: 5v7 Nm.
19
HOW TO ASSEMBLE THE BRAKING UNITS - ASSEMBLAGGIO DEI GRUPPI DI FRENATURA - BREMSAGGREGATE MONTIEREN -
MONTAJE DE LOS GRUPOS DE FRENADO - ASSEMBLAGE DES GROUPES DE FREINAGE
7
16
F1240398 F1240387
GB a GB b
Slightly lubricate the braking disks (7) and fit them in the arm Check that the positioning of the sealing ring (16) on the arm is
following the correct sequence; orient them so that the oil intact; install the complete arm. Lock it into position using two
circulation holes and the marks "B" are perfectly lined up. facing screws (4) and washers (5).
NOTE. When installing the steel discs, the slot corresponding to
the oil level cap should always be kept free.
T2
F1240400
GB c GB d
Check the flatness of the arms using tool T2 and finally lock the
arms with the screws (4) and the washer (5) using the cross-
tightening method.
Torque wrench setting: 298 Nm
GB e GB f
20
Lubrificare leggermente i dischi di frenatura (7) e Verificare l'integritaÁ ed il posizionamento dell'anello di
ITA montarli nel braccio con la giusta sequenza, orientati ITA tenuta (16) del braccio; installare il braccio completo.
in modo che i fori di circolazione dell'olio ed i Fissarlo in posizione con due viti (4) e rondelle (5)
contrassegni "B" siano perfettamente allineati. contrapposte.
NOTA. I dischi in acciaio devono essere montati lasciando libera la
cava corrispondente al tappo livello olio.
Die Bremsscheiben (7) leicht schmieren und in der Kontrollieren ob der Kolbenring (16) unbeschaÈdigt und
D richtigen Reihenfolge auf den Arm montieren. Dabei D auf den Arm richtig montiert ist; den kompletten Arm
È lleitungsloÈcher
muÈssen sie so orientiert sein, daû O montieren.
genau mit den Kennzeichnungen "B" uÈbereinstimmen. In seiner Position mit zwei Schrauben (4) und den entgegen-
a BEMERKUNG. Bei der Montage der Stahlscheiben die dem
È lfuÈllstopfen entspricht, freilassen.
b gesetzten Unterlegscheiben (5) befestigen.
O
Lubricar ligeramente los discos de frenado (7) y Comprobar la integridad y el posicionamiento del
ESP montarlos en el brazo con la secuencia exacta, ESP segmento de compresioÂn (16) del brazo; instalar el
orientados de manera que los orificios de circulacioÂn brazo completo.
del aceite y las marcas "B" esteÂn perfectamente alineados. Fijarlo en su posicioÂn con dos tornillos (4) y arandelas (5)
NOTA. Los discos en acero deben de ser asemblados dejando contrapuestas.
libre el nicho correspondiente a la tapa de nivel aceite.
Lubrifier leÂgeÁrement les disques de freinage (7), puis VeÂrifier le bon eÂtat et la position de la bague
F monter ceux-ci dans le bras aÁ la juste seÂquence, F d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (16) du bras, installer le bras complet.
orienteÂs de telle sorte aÁ ce que les trous de circulation Fixer celui-ci aÁ sa place aÁ l'aide des deux vis (4) et des
de l'huile et ceux marqueÂs "B" soient parfaitement aligneÂs. rondelles (5) superposeÂes.
NOTE. Les disques en acier doivent eÃtre monteÂs sans deÂranger la
rainure du bouchon du niveau de l'huile.
Controllare la planaritaÁ dei bracci con l'attrezzo T2 e

ITA fissarli definitivamente con le viti (4) e le rondelle (5) ITA
con il metodo del serraggio incrociato.
Coppia di serraggio: 298 Nm
Die Ebenheit der Arme mit dem Werkzeug T2 kontroll-

D ieren und die Arme endguÈltig mit den Schrauben (4) D
und Unterlegscheiben (5) abwechselnd und gegen-
seitig festschrauben.
c Anzugsmoments: 298 Nm d
Controlar la planaridad de los brazos utilizando la
ESP herramienta T2 y fijarlos definitivamente con los ESP
tornillos (4) y las arandelas (5) con el meÂtodo de
torsioÂn cruzado.
Par de torsioÂn: 298 Nm
ControÃler l'uniformiteÂ des bras aÁ l'aide de l'outil T2

F puis fixer deÂfinitivement ces derniers avec les vis (4) et F
les rondelles (5) par le biais du mode de serrage
croiseÂ.
Couple de serrage: 298 Nm
ITA ITA
D D
e f
ESP ESP
F F
21
(/74/2%-/6%4(%#/-0,%4%34%%2).'#!3% 2)-/:)/.%3#!4/,!3./$/#/-0,%4!
+/-0,%44%3'%,%.+'%(!53%!"-/.4)%2%. 2%-/#)/.#!24%2$%2/45,!#/-0,%4/
$%0/3%$5"/)4)%2!24)#5,!4)/.#/-0,%4
8 5
9 4
3
10
2
1
18
12 13
10
14
15
16
17

'" E '" F
5NLOOSEANDREMOVETHElTTINSCREWS FROMTHEARTICULATION 2EMOVETHEBOTTOMARTICULATION PINCOMPLETEWITHFRONT
PIN SEALINGRING
22
!LLENTAREEDASPORTARELEVITIDIRITEGNO DEL 2IMUOVEREILPERNOSNODOINFERIORE COMPLETODI
)4! PERNOSNODO )4! ANELLODITENUTAFRONTALE
3CHRAUBEN DESOBEREN'ELENKSTIFTES 5NTEREN'ELENKSTIFT SAMTFRONTALEM+OLBENRING

$ LOCKERNUNDABSCHRAUBEN $ ABNEHMEN
E F
!mOJARYSACARLOSTORNILLOSDERETENCIÒN DELA 2EMOVERLARÒTULAINFERIOR COMPLETADESEGMENTO
%30 RÒTULA %30 DECOMPRESIÒNFRONTAL
$ESSERRERETENLEVERLESVISDElXATION DU %NLEVERLETOURILLONINF£RIEURDARTICULATION £QUIPá

& TOURILLONDARTICULATION & DELABAGUEDáTANCH£IT£FRONTALE
23
(/74/2%-/6%4(%#/-0,%4%34%%2).'#!3% 2)-/:)/.%3#!4/,!3./$/#/-0,%4!
+/-0,%44%3'%,%.+'%(!53%!"-/.4)%2%. 2%-/#)/.#!24%2$%2/45,!#/-0,%4/
$%0/3%$5"/)4)%2!24)#5,!4)/.#/-0,%4

UPPERARTICULATIONPIN UNDERARTICULATIONPIN
'" A '" B
5SINGTWOLEVERSREMOVETHETOPARTICULATIONPIN COMPLETE
WITHFRONTSEAL ANDSHIMS
0AYATTENTIONNOTTODAMAGETHESURFACES
'" C
2EMOVETHECOMPLETESTEERINGCASE
24
5TILIZZANDODUELEVERIMUOVEREILPERNOSNODO
)4! SUPERIORE COMPLETODIGUARNIZIONEFRONTALE E
SPESSORI
0RESTAREATTENZIONEPERNONROVINAREIPIANI
-IT(ILFEVONZWEI(EBELNOBEREN'ELENKSTIFT SAMT

$ FRONTALEM+OLBENRING UND3CHEIBE ABNEHMEN
!CHTUNGDIE&LACHENNICHTVERKRATZEN
A 5TILIZANDODOSPALANCASREMOVERLARÒTULASUPERIOR
%30 COMPLETADEJUNTAFRONTAL YESPESORES
4ENERCUIDADOAlNDENOESTROPEARLASSUPERlCIES
!LAIDEDEDEUXLEVIERSENLEVERLETOURILLONSUP£RIEUR
& DARTICULATION £QUIP£DELAGARNITUREFRONTALE ET
CALE
&AIRETR£SATTENTIONDENEPASABµMERLESPLATEAUX
2IMUOVEREILGRUPPOSNODOCOMPLETO
)4!
+OMPLETTES'ELENKAGGREGAT ABNEHMEN
$
C 2EMOVERELGRUPORÒTULACOMPLETO
%30
%NLEVERLEGROUPEDARTICULATIONCOMPLET
&
25
(/74/).34!,,4(%#/-0,%4%34%%2).'#!3% -/.4!'')/3#!4/,!3./$/#/-0,%4!
+/-0,%44%3'%,%.+'%(!53%-/.4)%2%. ).34!,!#)/.#!24%2$%2/45,!#/-0,%4/
).34!,,!4)/.$5"/)4)%2!24)#5,!4)/.#/-0,%4
,UBRICATE PP

'" A '" B
,UBRICATETHETERMINALOFTHEU JOINTANDINSTALLTHESTEERING 0REPAREASERIESOFSHIMS OFMM4OBEASSEMBLEDUNDER
CASE THEUPPERPIN
0AYDUEATTENTIONNOTTODAMAGETHEDUSTCOVERRINGSANDTHE
SEALINGRINGS
1P

UPPERARTICULATIONPIN
'" C '" D
&ITANEWSEAL ONTOTHETOPARTICULATIONPIN ,UBRICATEAND ,UBRICATEANDTHEUNITINTHESTEERINGCASE
INSTALLTHEUNITINTHESTEERINGCASE0OSITIONTHESCREWS AND
TIGHTWRENCH.M
#HECKTHECORRECTASSEMBLYSIDEOFTHESEAL
1P

UNDERARTICULATIONPIN
'" E '" F
&ITTHEUNIT INTHESTEERINGCASE 0OSITIONTHESCREWS 4IGHTENTHENEWlTTINSCREWS OFTOPANDBOTTOMARTICULATION
ANDTIGHTLYTIGHTEN PINSINSEQUENCEUSINGTHECROSSTIGHTENINGMETHOD
#HECKFORTHECORRECTASSEMBLYSIDEOFTHESEAL 4ORQUEWRENCHSETTING.M
26
,UBRIlCAREILTERMINALEDELDOPPIOGIUNTOCARDANICO 0REPARAREUNASERIEDISPESSORIDAMM DA
)4! EMONTAREILGRUPPOSCATOLASNODO )4! MONTARESOTTOILPERNOSUPERIORE
0RESTAREMOLTAATTENZIONEPERNONDANNEGGIAREGLI
ANELLIPARAPOLVEREEDITENUTA

$AS%NDSTUáCKDER$OPPELGELENKWELLESCHMIEREN %INE2EIHEVON5NTERLEGSCHEIBENMM ZUR

$ UNDDAS'ELENKGEHA£USE !GGREGAT MONTIEREN $ -ONTAGEUNTERDENOBEREN"OLZEN VORBEREITEN
6ORSICHT3TAUBSCHUTZRINGEUND$ICHTUNGSRINGENICHT
BESCHA£DIGEN
A B
,UBRICARELTERMINALDELSEMIEJEYMONTARELGRUPO 0REPARARUNASERIEDEESPESORES DEMM
%30 CAJADERÒTULA %30 PARAPONERDEBAJODELPERNOSUPERIOR
4ENERMUCHOCUIDADOAlNDENODANÜRLOSSEGMENTOS
DEPROTECCIÒN
,UBRIlERLEXTR£MIT£DEJOINTDECARDANDOUBLE 0REPARERUNJEUDECALES MMPUORLES

& PUISMONTERLEGROUPEDUBOµTIERARTICULATION & MONTERSOUSLETOURILLONSUPERIEUR
&AIRETRáSATTENTIONÜNEPASABÒMERLESBAGUESANTI
POUSSI£REETD£TANCH£ITá
-ONTARESULPERNO DIFULCROSNODOSUPERIOREUNA ,UBRIlCAREEMONTAREILGRUPPONELLASCATOLASNODO

)4! NUOVAGUARNIZIONE LUBRIlCAREEMONTAREILGRUPPO )4!
NELLASCATOLASNODO-ONTARELEVITI ESERRARLEA
.M#ONTROLLAREILSENSODIMONTAGGIODELLAGUARNI
ZIONE
!UFDEN:ENTRIERSTIFT DESOBEREN'ELENKSEINE 3CHMIERENUNDDAS!GGREGATINDAS'ELENKGEHEAUSE

$ NEUE$ICHTUNG MONTIERENSCHMIERENUNDDAS $ MONTIEREN
!GGREGATINDAS'ELENKGEHAáUSEMONTIEREN$IE
3CHRAUBEN ANBRINGENUNDZUSCHRAUBEN.M
C -ONTARENELPERNO DECENTRODELARÒTULASUPERIOR
D ,UBRICARYMONTARELGRUPOENLACJADELAROTULA
%30 UNAJUNTANUEVA LUBRICARYMONTARELGRUPOENLA %30
RÒTULA-ONTARLOSTORNILLOS YAPRETARLOS.M
#ONTROLARELSENTIDODEMONTAJEDELAGUARNICIÒN
-ONTERSURLETOURILLON DUPOINTDAPPUIARTICULATION ,UBRIlERETMONTERLEGROUPEDANSBOITIERARTICULATION

& SUPáRIEURUNEGARNITURENEUVE LUBRIlERETMONTER &
LEGROUPEDANSBOµTIERARTICULATION-ONTERLESVIS
ETSERRER.M
#ONTRÒLERLESENSDEMONTAGEDELAGARNITURE
-ONTAREILGRUPPO NELLASCATOLASNODO -ON 3ERRAREINSEQUENZACONILMETODOINCROCIATOLENUOVE

)4! TARELEVITI ESERRARLELEGGERMENTE )4! VITI DIRITEGNODEIPERNISNODOINFERIOREESUPE
#ONTROLLAREILSENSODIMONTAGGIODELLAGUARNIZIONE RIORE
#OPPIADISERRAGGIO.M
3CHMIERENUNDDAS!GGREGAT %NTGEGENGESETZTUNDABWECHSELNDDIE3CHRAUBEN
$ INDAS'ELENKGEHA£USE MONTIEREN$IE3CHRAUBEN $ DERUNTERENUNDOBEREN'ELENKSTIFTENFESTSCHRAU
ANBRINGENUNDLEICHTZUSCHRAUBEN BEN
-ONTAGERICHTUNGDER$ICHTUNGEN KONTROLLIEREN !NZUGSMOMENT.M
E F
,UBRICARYMONTARELGRUPO ENLARÒTULA !PRETARENSECUENCIACONELM£TODOCRUZADOLOS
%30 -ONTARLOSTORNILLOS YAPRETARLOSLIGERAMENTE %30 TORNILLOS DERETENCIÒNDELASRÒTULASINFERIORY
#ONTROLARELSENTIDODEMONTAJEDELAGUARNICIÒN SUPERIOR
0ARDETORSIÒN.M
,UBRIlERETMONTERLEGROUPE DANSBOµTIERARTICU 3ERRERDANSLORDREPARLEBIAISDUMODECROISá

& LATION -ONTERLESVIS ETSERRERL£G£REMENT & LESVIS DElXATIONDESTOURILLONSDARTICULATION
#ONTRÒLERLESENSDEMONTAGEDELAGARNITURE INF£RIEURETSUP£RIEUR
#OUPLEDESERRAGE.M
27
(/74/).34!,,4(%#/-0,%4%34%%2).'#!3% -/.4!'')/3#!4/,!3./$/#/-0,%4!
+/-0,%44%3'%,%.+'%(!53%-/.4)%2%. ).34!,!#)/.#!24%2$%2/45,!#/-0,%4/
).34!,,!4)/.$5"/)4)%2!24)#5,!4)/.#/-0,%4
1P
'" A '" B
#HECKBYMEANSOFALEVERTHATTHEREISNOVERTICALGAP #HECKTHETORQUEOFTHEPINSWHICHHASTOBEBETWEENAND
)NCASETHEREISANYGAPDETERMINETHEWIDTHANDREDUCEITBY .M)FTHEPRELIMINARYMEASUREDVALUEISTOOHIGHTHESHIMS
REMOVINGSHIMS HAVETOBEINCREASED
28
#ONLAIUTODIUNALEVAVERIlCARECHEILGIOCOVERTICALE 6ERIlCARELACOPPIADIROTAZIONEDEIPERNI .M
)4! SIANULLO )4! 3EáTROPPOALTOáNECESSARIOAUMENTAREGLISPESSORI
3ENON£NULLORILEVAREILVALOREDELGIOCOERIDURLO
TOGLIENDOSPESSORI
-IT(ILFEEINES(EBELSAUFVERTIKALE3PIELFREIHEITÓBER $REHMOMENTZUM$URCHDREHENDER"OLZENPRÓFEN
$ PRÓFEN $ %SMUZWISCHENUND.MBETRAGEN
&ALLSESNICHT.ULLISTDIE'REDES3PIELSMESSEN &ALLSESZUNÛCHSTZUHOCHISTMÓSSENDIE5NTERLEG
UNDDURCH%NTFERNENVON5NTERLEGSCHEIBENREDUZIE SCHEIBENVERSTÛRKTWERDEN
A (ACIENDOPALANCAVERIlCARQUENOEXISTAJUEGOVERTI
B 6ERIlCARELPARDEROTACIÒNDELOSPERNOSQUE
%30 CAL3IEXISTIESEREDUCIRLOSESPESORESYACOLOCADOS %30 DEBESERDEA.M3IFUESEDEMASIADOALTO
AUMENTARLOSESPESORES
!LAIDEDUNLEVIERVERIlERQUELEJEUVERTICALSOITNUL 6ERIlERLACOUPLEDEROTATIONDESTOURILLONSDEA
& 3IESTPASNULRELEVERLAVALEURDUJEUETREDUIRE & .M
ENMOINSAVECLESCALES 3ILEPRECHARGEMISUREEESTTROPHAUTILFAUTAUGMEN
TERLESCALES
29
HOW TO REMOVE THE U-JOINT - RIMOZIONE DOPPIO GIUNTO CARDANICO - DOPPELGELENKWELLE ABMONTIEREN -
REMOCION SEMIEJES - DEPOSE DE JOINT DE CARDAN DOUBLE
3
2 3
F1240365 F1240366
GB a GB b
Unloose and remove the top and bottom check nuts (2) from the Remove top and bottom check dowels (3) from the flange (5) or
dowels (3). bush (13).
30
NOTES - NOTE - BEMERKUNG - NOTAS - NOTE
GB The u-joint can only be removed after extraction of the 3 - Achse mit mechanisch gesteuerten Bremsen: in diesem Fall
steering case has been performed (See: «REMOVING muÈssen die aÈuûeren Steuerhebel untereinander unter Span-
THE STEERING CASE»). Different procedures need to nung gesetzt werden.
be followed depending on the kind of repair operation needed and
the type of axle: 4 - Zum Abmontieren, Arm auf die Werkbank legen.
1 - Axle without parking brakes: compressed air (7 bar approx.) Die ErlaÈuterungen beziehen sich auf das Abmontieren an der
should be introduced in the braking circuit in order to hold the Werkbank, wobei die VorgaÈnge fuÈr alle anderen LoÈsungen oder
braking disks in position. AusfuÈhrungen gleich sind.
2 - Axle with negative brake: does not require any preparation as
the disks are mechanically locked in position. La remocioÂn de los semiejes se puede ejecutar
ESP solamente despueÂs de la remocioÂn del caÂrter de la
3 - Axle with mechanical brake: requires that the external control roÂtula (VeÂase «REMOCION CAJA DE ROTULA») y de
levers are put under tension in relation to each other. manera diversificada en funcioÂn del tipo de reparacioÂn que hay que
4 - Disassembly to be carried out with the arm resting on the bench. ejecutar y del tipo de eje:
The explanations reported herewith refer to removal operations 1 - Eje sin frenos de estacionamiento: es necesario hacer entrar
carried out on the bench; the different stages of u-joint removal also aire comprimido (aproximadamente 7 bares) en el circuito de
apply to all other solutions or versions. frenado para mantener en posicioÂn los discos de los frenos.
2 - Eje con freno negativo: no requiere ninguna preparacioÂn puesto
que los discos quedan bloqueados mecaÂnicamente.
La rimozione del doppio giunto cardanico puoÁ essere
ITA eseguita solo dopo la rimozione della scatola snodo 3 - Eje con freno de mando mecaÂnico: requiere la puesta en tensioÂn
(Vedere «RIMOZIONE SCATOLA SNODO») ed in modo entre sõÂ de las palancas exteriores de mando.
diversificato, in funzione del tipo di riparazione da eseguire e del 4 - Desmontaje ejecutado con el brazo apoyado en el banco.
tipo di assale:
Las explicaciones que aquõÂ figuran se refieren a la remocioÂn
1 - Assale senza freni di stazionamento: eÁ necessario immettere ejecutada en el banco y las fases son comunes para otras
aria compressa (circa 7 bar) nel circuito di frenatura per tenere in soluciones o versiones.
posizione i dischi freni.
2 - Assale con freno negativo: non richiede alcuna preparazione in
quanto i dischi restano bloccati meccanicamente. La deÂpose de joint de cardan double ne peut eÃtre
F effectueÂe qu'apreÁs la deÂpose du boõÃtier articulation
3 - Assale con freno a comando meccanico: richiede di mettere in (Voir, DEPOSE DU BOITIER ARTICULATION), d'une
tensione tra loro le leve esterne di comando. facËon diversifieÂe, en fonction du type de reÂparation aÁ effectuer et du
4 - Smontaggio eseguito con il braccio appoggiato sul banco. type d'essieu:
Le spiegazioni riportate si riferiscono alla rimozione eseguita al 1 - Essieu sans freins de stationnement: il faut introduire de l'air
banco e le fasi sono comuni alle altre soluzioni o versioni. comprimeÂ (environ 7 bar) dans le circuit de freinage pour
maintenir les disques de freinage en place.
2 - Essieu aÁ frein neÂgatif: ne requiert aucune preÂparation parce que
les disques meÂcaniquement restent bloqueÂs.
Die Doppelgelenkwelle koÈnnen erst abmontiert werden,
D wenn das GelenkgehaÈuse schon abgenommen worden 3 - Essieu aÁ frein de commande meÂcanique: requiert de mettre sous
ist (Siehe, «GELENKGEHAÈUSE ABMONTIEREN»). Der tension des leviers externes de commande entre-eux.
Vorgang ist je nach benoÈtigter Reparatur und je nach Achsentyp 4 - DeÂmontage effectueÂ et bras deÂposeÂ sur l'eÂtabli.
unterschiedlich:
1 - Achse ohne Feststellbremse: die Bremsanlage mit ca. 7 bar Les explications reporteÂes se reÂfeÁrent aÁ la deÂpose effectueÂe sur
unter Druck setzen, um die Bremsscheiben in ihrer Position l'eÂtabli, les phases sont les meÃmes que pour les autres solutions ou
festzuhalten. versions.
2 - Achse mit negativer Bremse: benoÈtigt keinerlei Vorbereitung, da
die Scheiben mechanisch blockiert bleiben.
Allentare ed asportare i dadi superiori ed inferiori (2) di Asportare i grani superiore ed inferiore (3) di ritegno
ITA bloccaggio dei grani (3). ITA flangia (5) o della bussola (13).
Obere und untere Muttern (2) die die Stifte (3) blok- Obere und untere Stifte (3), die den Flansch (5) oder
D kieren, abschrauben. D die Buchse (13) halten, abnehmen.
a b
Aflojar y sacar las tuercas superiores e inferiores (2) Sacar la espigas superior y la inferior (3) de retencioÂn
ESP que bloquean las espigas (3). ESP de la brida (5) o del manguito (13).
Desserrer puis enlever les eÂcrous supeÂrieurs et Enlever les grains supeÂrieurs et infeÂrieurs (3) de
F infeÂrieurs (2) de blocage des grains (3). F fixation de la flasque (5) ou de la douille (13).
31
FLANGED VERSION - VERSIONE A FLANGIA - AUSFUÈHRUNG MIT FLANSCH - VERSION A BRIDA - VERSION A FLASQUE
9
F1240576 F1240368
GB a GB b
Remove the u-joint (4). Remove the snap ring (9) from the bearing as well as the packing
NOTE. To remove the u-joint use, if necessary, a plastic hammer or ring (5).
a lever.
5
7
5
F1240369 F1240370
GB c GB d
Position the entire u-joint (4) under a press and remove the bearing Extract the sealing ring of the shaft from the flange (5).
(8) and the ring (5) simultaneously. NOTE. Note down the assembly side of the ring.
COUPLING VERSION - VERSIONE A MANICOTTO - AUSFUÈHRUNG MIT MUFFE - VERSION A MANGUITO - VERSION A MANCHON
13
4 9
F1240367 F1240371
GB e GB f
Remove the entire u-joint (4). Remove the snap ring (9) from the bushing unit (13).
NOTE. To remove the u-joint use, if necessary, a plastic hammer or
a lever.
32
Estrarre il doppio giunto cardanico (4) completo. Asportare l'anello di ritegno (9) del cuscinetto e
ITA ITA dell'anello porta guarnizioni (5).
NOTA. Se necessario, per l'estrazione del doppio
giunto cardanico usare un mazzuolo in materiale
plastico od una leva.
Komplette Doppelgelenkwelle (4) heraus ziehen. Den Haltering (9) des Lagers und des Dichtungsrings
D D (5) abnehmen.
BEMERKUNG. Wenn noÈtig, einen Gummihammer
oder einen Hebel verwenden, um die Doppelgelen-
kwelle heraus zu ziehen.
a b
Extraer el semieje (4) completo. Sacar el anillo de retencioÂn (9) del cojinete y del anillo
ESP ESP porta juntas (5).
NOTA. Si fuera necesario, para extraer el semieje,
utilizar un martillo de material plaÂstico o una palanca.
Extraire le joint de cardan double (4) complet. Enlever la bague de retenue (9) du palier, puis la
F F bague porte-garniture (5).
NOTE. Si besoin, pour l'extraction du joint de cardan
double, utiliser un maillet en matieÁre plastique ou un
levier.
Sistemare il doppio giunto cardanico completo (4) Estrarre dalla flangia (5) l'anello di tenuta dell'albero.
ITA sotto una pressa e rimuovere il cuscinetto (8) e ITA
NOTA. Annotare il senso di montaggio dell'anello.
contemporaneamente l'anello (5).
Die komplette Doppelgelenkwelle (4) unter eine Vom Flansch (5) den Wellenkolbenring abnehmen.
D Presse setzen und gleichzeitig das Lager (8) und D
BEMERKUNG. Auf die Montagerichtung des Ringes
den Ring (5) abnehmen. achten.
c d
Colocar el semieje completo (4) debajo de una prensa Extraer de la brida (5) el segmento de compresioÂn del
ESP y remover el cojinete (8) y al mismo tiempo el anillo (5). ESP eje.
NOTA. Anotar el sentido de montaje del anillo.
Ajuster le joint de cardan double complet (4) sous une Extraire de la flasque (5) la bague d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ de
F presse puis enlever le palier (8) et la bague (5) en F l'arbre.
meÃme temps. NOTE. Prendre note du sens de montage de la bague.
Estrarre il doppio giunto cardanico (4) completo. Asportare l'anello elastico di ritegno (9) del gruppo
ITA ITA bussola (13).
NOTA. Se necessario, per l'estrazione del doppio
giunto cardanico usare un mazzuolo in materiale
plastico od una leva.
Komplette Doppelgelenkwelle (4) heraus ziehen. Haltering (9) von der Buchse (13) abnehmen.
D D
BEMERKUNG. Wenn noÈtig, einen Gummihammer
oder einen Hebel verwenden, um die Doppelgelen-
kwelle heraus zu ziehen.
e f
Extraer el semieje (4) completo. Sacar el anillo elaÂstico de retencioÂn (9) del grupo del
ESP ESP manguito (13).
NOTA. Si fuera necesario, para extraer el semieje,
utilizar un martillo de material plaÂstico o una palanca.
Extraire le joint de cardan double (4) complet. Enlever l'anneau eÂlastique de retenue (9) du groupe
F F de douille (13).
NOTE. Si besoin, pour l'extraction du joint de cardan
double, utiliser un maillet en matieÁre plastique ou un
levier.
33
13 10
11 11 12
F1240375 F1240372
GB a GB b
Position the entire u-joint (4) under a press and remove the Remove the snap ring (10) from the bearing (11). Use a puller to
complete bush (13). remove the bearing (11), the sealing ring (12) and the O-ring (14).
NOTE. Note down the assembly side of the ring (12).
1 3
FLANGED VERSION
VERSIONE A FLANGIA
AUSFUÈHRUNG MIT FLANSCH
VERSION A BRIDA
9 VERSION A FLASQUE
8
7
6
5
GB c GB d
4
2
3 9
10
11
12
13
COUPLING VERSION
VERSIONE A MANICOTTO 14
AUSFUÈHRUNG MIT MUFFE
VERSION A MANGUITO D1240039
VERSION A MANCHON
GB e GB f
34
Sistemare il doppio giunto cardanico completo (4) Asportare l'anello elastico di ritegno (10) del cuscinet-
ITA sotto una pressa e rimuovere la bussola (13) completa. ITA to (11).
Con un estrattore, rimuovere il cuscinetto (11) e
l'anello di tenuta (12) e la guarnizione OR (14).
NOTA. Annotare il senso di montaggio dell'anello (12).
Die komplette Doppelgelenkwelle (4) unter eine Haltering (10) des Lagers (11) abnehmen.
D Presse setzen und die komplette Buchse (13) ab- D Mit dem Abzieher, das Lager (11) und den Dichtring
nehmen. (12) sowie den O-Ring (14) abnehmen.
BEMERKUNG. Auf die Montagerichtung des Ringes (12) achten.
a b
Colocar el semieje completo (4) debajo de una prensa Sacar el anillo de retencioÂn (10) del cojinete (11).
ESP y remover el manguito (13) completo. ESP Utilizando un extractor, remover el cojinete (11) y el
segmento de compresioÂn (12) y la junta OR (14).
NOTA. Anotar el sentido de montaje del anillo (12).
Ajuster le joint de cardan double complet (4) sous une Enlever l'anneau de retenue (10) du palier (11).
F presse, puis enlever la douille (13) compleÁte. F A l'aide d'un extracteur, enlever le palier (11) et la
bague d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (12) puis la garniture OR (14).
NOTE. Prendre note du sens de montage de la bague (12).
ITA ITA
D D
c d
ESP ESP
F F
ITA ITA
D D
e f
ESP ESP
F F
35
INSTALLATION OF U-JOINT - INSTALLAZIONE DOPPIO GIUNTO CARDANICO - DOPPELGELENKWELLE INSTALLIEREN -
INSTALACION SEMIEJES - INSTALLATION DE JOINT DE CARDAN DOUBLE
FLANGED VERSION - VERSIONE A FLANGIA - AUSFUÈHRUNG MIT FLANSCH - VERSION A BRIDA - VERSION A FLASQUE
6 5
7
5
T5 8
F1240373 F1240374
GB a GB b
Insert the sealing ring (7) of the shaft in the flange (5), using tool T5. Fit the flange (5) onto the u-joint (4).
NOTE. Carefully check the assembly side. Also replace the outer Heat the bearing (8) at an approx. temperature of 100ë C, fit it on
O-ring (6). the u-joint and fasten.
9
F1240368
GB c GB d
Fit the snap ring (9) on the bearing (8).
COUPLING VERSION - VERSIONE A MANICOTTO - AUSFUÈHRUNG MIT MUFFE - VERSION A MANGUITO - VERSION A MANCHON
T5 T6
10
11
12 11
13 13
F1240376 F1240377
GB e GB f
Using tools T5 and T6, insert the sealing ring (12) and the bearing Fit the snap ring (10) on the bearing (11).
(11) in the bush (13).
NOTE. Carefully check the assembly side of the seal (12).
36
Utilizzando l'attrezzo T5 inserire nella flangia (5) Infilare la flangia (5) sul doppio giunto cardanico (4).
ITA l'anello di tenuta (7) dell'albero. ITA Scaldare il cuscinetto (8) a circa 100ëC, infilarlo sul
NOTA. Controllare attentamente il senso di montaggio. doppio giunto cardanico e mandarlo in battuta.
Sostituire anche l'anello OR esterno (6).
Mit dem Werkzeug T5, den Kolbenring (7) in den Flansch (5) in die Doppelgelenkwelle (4) einsetzen.
D Flansch (5) montieren. D Lager (8) auf ca. 100ëC erhitzen und auf die
BEMERKUNG. Montagerichtung sorgfaÈltig kontrollie- Doppelgelenkwelle setzen; bis zum Anschlag schie-
ren. Den aÈuûeren O-Ring (6) auswechseln. ben.
a b
Utilizando la herramienta T5 introducir en la brida (5) Introducir la brida (5) en el semieje (4).
ESP el segmento de compresioÂn (7) del eje. ESP Calentar el cojinete (8) a unos 100ëC, introducirlo en
NOTA. Controlar atentamente el sentido de montaje. el semieje hasta el tope.
Sustituir tambieÂn el anillo OR exterior (6).
A l'aide d'un outil T5 introduire dans la flasque (5) la Enfiler la flasque (5) sur le joint de cardan double (4).
F bague d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (7) de l'arbre. F Chauffer le palier (8) aÁ environ 100ëC, enfiler celui-ci
NOTE. ControÃler soigneusement le sens de montage. sur le joint de cardan double et l'envoyer en buteÂe.
Remplacer eÂgalement la garniture OR (6).
Montare l'anello elastico (9) di ritegno del cuscinetto (8).

ITA ITA
Haltering (9) auf das Lager (8) montieren.

D D
c d
Montar el anillo elaÂstico (9) de retencioÂn del cojinete (8).
ESP ESP
Monter l'anneau eÂlastique (9) de retenue du palier (8).

F F
Utilizzando gli attrezzi T5 e T6 inserire nella bussola Montare l'anello elastico (10) di ritegno del cuscinetto (11).
ITA (13) l'anello di tenuta (12) ed il cuscinetto (11). ITA
NOTA. Controllare attentamente il senso di montaggio
della guarnizione (12).
Mit den Werkzeugen T5 und T6 den Haltering (12) und Haltering (10) des Lagers (11) montieren.
D das Lager (11) in die Buchse (13) setzen. D
BEMERKUNG. Montagerichtung der Dichtung (12)
aufmerksam kontrollieren.
e f
Utilizando las herramientas T5 y T6, introducir en el Montar el anillo elaÂstico (10) de retencioÂn del cojinete (11).
ESP manguito (13) el segmento de compresioÂn (12) y el ESP
cojinete (11).
NOTA. Controlar atentamente el sentido de montaje de la junta
(12).
A l'aide des outils T5 et T6 introduire dans la douille Monter l'anneau eÂlastique (10) de retenue du palier (11).
F (13) la bague d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (12) et le palier (11). F
NOTE. ControÃler soigneusement le sens de montage
de la garniture (12).
37
INSTALLATION OF U-JOINT - INSTALLAZIONE DOPPIO GIUNTO CARDANICO - DOPPELGELENKWELLE INSTALLIEREN -
INSTALACION SEMIEJES - INSTALLATION DE JOINT DE CARDAN DOUBLE
14
13
13
4
9
F1240378 F1240371
GB a GB b
Heat the bearing in oil at an approx. temperature of 100ëC and fit Fit the check ring (9) on the bushing unit (13); also put the O-ring
the entire bush (13) on the u-joint (4). (14) into position.
2
2
F1240379 F1240380
GB c GB d
Insert the u-joint and tighten the top and bottom dowels (2). Apply Loctite 242 to the jutting parts of the dowels (2).
Torque wrench setting: Max. 15 Nm.
NOTE. For u-joint coming with a bush, centre the point of the check
dowels in the slot.
3 2 3 2
3
D1240082
F1240381
GB e GB f
Screw the check nuts (3) of the dowels (2) and lock them using a
dynamometric wrench.
Torque wrench setting: 122 Nm
38
Scaldare in olio il cuscinetto a circa 100ëC ed infilare Montare l'anello di ritegno (9) del gruppo bussola (13);
ITA sul doppio giunto cardanico (4) la bussola completa ITA posizionare anche la guarnizione OR (14).
(13).
Lager in OÈ l auf ca. 100ëC erhitzen und auf die Haltering (9) des Buchsenaggregats (13) montieren;
D Doppelgelenkwelle (4) die komplette Buchse (13) D O-Ring (14) ebenfalls montieren.
schieben.
a b
Calentar en aceite el cojinete a unos 100ëC e Montar el anillo de retencioÂn (9) del grupo del
ESP introducir en el semieje (4) el manguito completo (13). ESP manguito (13); posicionar tambieÂn la junta OR (14).
Chauffer dans l'huile aÁ environ 100ëC le palier puis Monter l'anneau de retenue (9) du groupe douille (13):
F enfiler sur le joint de cardan double (4) la douille F placer eÂgalement la garniture OR (14).
compleÁte (13).
Infilare il doppio giunto cardanico e serrare i grani Spalmare con Loctite 242 le porzioni sporgenti dei
ITA superiore ed inferiore (2). ITA grani (2).
Coppia di serraggio: Max. 15 Nm.
NOTA. Per il doppio giunto cardanico con bussola, centrare la
punta dei grani di ritegno nella cava.
Doppelgelenkwelle einsetzen und obere und untere Mit Loctite 242 die herausragenden Stifte (2) schmie-
D Stifte (2) festschrauben. D ren.
Anzugsmoment: Max. 15 Nm
BEMERKUNG. Bei der Doppelgelenkwelle mit Buchse, Stiftspitze
c genau zentrieren. d
Introducir el semieje y apretar la espiga superior y la Pasar Loctite 242 en las partes salientes de las
ESP inferior (2). ESP espigas (2).
Par de torsioÂn: MaÂx. 15 Nm.
NOTA. Para el semieje con manguito, centrar la punta de las
espigas de retencioÂn en la ranura.
Enfiler le joint de cardan double et serrer les grains Enduire de Loctite 242 les parties saillantes des grains (2).
F supeÂrieurs et infeÂrieurs (2). F
Couple de serrage: Max. 15 Nm.
NOTE. Pour le joint de cardan double aÁ douille, centrer la pointe
des grains de fixation dans le creux.
Avvitare i dadi (3) di bloccaggio dei grani (2) e bloccarli

ITA con chiave dinamometrica. ITA
Coppia di serraggio: 122 Nm
Muttern (3) zur Befestigung der Stifte (2) zuschrauben

D und mit einem MomentenschluÈssel blockieren. D
Anzugsmoment: 122 Nm
e f
Atornillar las tuercas (3) de bloqueo de las espigas (2)
ESP y bloquearlas con llave dinamomeÂtrica. ESP
Par de torsioÂn: 122 Nm
Visser les eÂcrous (3) de blocage des grains (2), puis

F bloquer aÁ l'aide d'une cleÂ dynamomeÂtrique. F
Couple de serrage: 122 Nm
39
HOW TO DISASSEMBLE THE PLANETARY REDUCTION - SMONTAGGIO RIDUTTORE EPICICLOIDALE - PLANETENGETRIEB ABMONTIEREN -
DESMONTAJE REDUCTOR EPICICLOIDAL - DESASSEMBLAGE DU REDUCTEUR EPICYCLOIDAL
1
3
2
1
F1240437 F1240438
GB a GB b
Disconnect the steering bars from the steering case (3). Disjoint the planetary carrier cover (2) from the steering case (3) by
For details, see «HOW TO REMOVE THE COMPLETE STEERING alternatively forcing a screwdriver into the appropriate slots.
CASE».
Remove the securing screws (1) from the planetary carrier cover
(2).
2
5
4
F1240439 F1240440
GB c GB d
Remove the complete planetary carrier cover (2). Unloose and remove the tightening nuts (4) from the crown flange
(5).
5
6
F1240441 F1240442
GB e GB f
Remove the safety flange (6). Using a puller, remove the complete crown flange (5) by acting on
the stud bolts.
40
Scollegare dalla scatola snodo (3) le barre di sterza- Utilizzando un cacciavite inserito alternativamente
ITA tura. ITA nelle cave predisposte, staccare il coperchio portasa-
Per i dettagli, vedere «RIMOZIONE SCATOLA SNO- telliti (2) dalla scatola snodo (3).
DO COMPLETA».
Asportare le viti (1) di fissaggio del coperchio portasatelliti (2).
GelenkgehaÈuse (3) von den Lenkstangen trennen. Mit einem Schraubenzieher den Planetenradhalter-
D Siehe «KOMPLETTES GELENKGEHAÈUSE ABMON- D deckel (2) vom GelenkgehaÈuse (3) trennen. Dazu den
TIEREN». Schraubenzieher abwechselnd in die vorgesehenen
Befestigungsschrauben (1) vom Planetenradhalterdeckel (2) ab- Nuten stecken und anheben.
a schrauben. b
Separar de la caja de roÂtula (3) las barras de direccioÂn. Utilizando un destornillador introducido alternativa-
ESP Para los detalles, veÂase «REMOCION CAJA DE ESP mente en las ranuras predispuestas, desprender la
ROTULA COMPLETA». tapa portasateÂlites (2) de la caja de la roÂtula (3).
Sacar los tornillos (1) de fijacioÂn de la tapa portasateÂlites (2).
DeÂbrancher, du boõÃtier articulation (3), les barres de A l'aide d'un tournevis introduit au fur et aÁ mesure
F braquage. F dans les creux preÂdisposeÂs, deÂcrocher le couvercle
Pour de plus amples deÂtails, voir «DEPOSE DU porte-satellites (2) du boõÃtier articulation (3).
BOITIER D'ARTICULATION COMPLET».
Enlever les vis de fixation (1) du couvercle porte-satellites (2).
Asportare il coperchio portasatelliti (2) completo. Allentare ed asportare i dadi (4) che fissano la flangia
ITA ITA portacorona (5).
Kompletter Planetenradhalterdeckel (2) abnehmen. Befestigungsmuttern (4) des Kranzhalterflansches (5)

D D lockern.
c d
Sacar la tapa portasateÂlites (2) completa. Aflojar y quitar las tuercas (4) que fijan la brida
ESP ESP portacorona (5).
Enlever le couvercle porte-satellites (2) complet. Desserrer et enlever les eÂcrous (4) de fixation de la
F F flasque porte-couronne (5).
Rimuovere la flangia di sicurezza (6). Utilizzando un estrattore e, facendo reazione sui

ITA ITA prigionieri, rimuovere la flangia portacorona (5) com-
pleta.
Sicherheitsflansch (6) abnehmen. Durch einen Abzieher uÈber die Stiftschrauben, den
D D kompletten Kranzhalterflansch (5) abnehmen.
e f
Remover la brida de seguridad (6). Utilizando un extractor y apalancando los prisioneros,
ESP ESP remover la brida portacorona (5) completa.
Enlever la flasque de seÂcuriteÂ (6). En utilisant l'extracteur et en faisant reÂagir les

F F prisonniers, enlever la flasque porte-couronne (5)
compleÁte.
41
8
7
F1240443 F1240444
GB a GB b
Partially extract the hub (7) using a plastic hammer. Remove the external bearing (8).
NOTE. Alternately hammer on several equidistant points.
7
3
F1240445 F1240446
GB c GB d
By hand remove the complete hub (7). Remove the pins and remove the steering case (3).
For details, see «HOW TO REMOVE THE COMPLETE STEERING
CASE»
10
9
F1240447 F1240448
GB e GB f
Remove the snap rings (9). With the help of a puller, remove the planet wheel gears (10).
NOTE. Note down the assembly side of planet wheels.
42
Utilizzando un mazzuolo in materiale plastico, sfilare Asportare il cuscinetto esterno (8).
ITA parzialmente il mozzo portaruota (7). ITA
NOTA. Battere alternativamente in piuÁ punti equidi-
stanti.
Mit einem Gummihammer, die Radhalternabe (7) AÈuûeres (8) Lager abnehmen.
D etwas heraus schieben. D
BEMERKUNG. Abwechselnd an verschiedenen,
gleich entfernten Stellen schlagen.
a b
Utilizando un martillo de material plaÂstico, extraer Sacar el cojinete exterior (8).
ESP parcialmente el cubo portarruedas (7). ESP
NOTA. Golpear alternativamente en varios puntos
equidistantes.
A l'aide d'un maillet en matieÁre plastique, extraire Enlever le palier externe (8).
F partiellement le moyeu porte-roue (7). F
NOTE. Frapper sur plusieurs points aÁ la meÃme
distance.
Sfilare il mozzo portaruota (7). Asportare i perni e rimuovere la scatola snodo (3).
ITA ITA Per i dettagli di rimozione dei perni, vedere «RIMO-
ZIONE SCATOLA SNODO COMPLETA».
Radhalternabe (7) herausziehen. Stifte und GelenkgehaÈuse (3) entfernen.

D D Siehe «KOMPLETTES GELENKGEHAÈUSE ABMON-
TIEREN».
c d
Extraer el cubo portarruedas (7). Sacar los pernos y remover la caja de la roÂtula (3).
ESP ESP Para los detalles de remocioÂn de los pernos, veÂase
«REMOCION CAJA DE ROTULA COMPLETA».
Extraire le moyeu porte-roue (7). Enlever les tourillons, enlever le boõÃtier articulation (3).
F F Pour de plus amples deÂtails, voir «DEPOSE DU
BOITIER ARTICULATION COMPLET».
Asportare gli anelli elastici (9). Utilizzando un estrattore, asportare gli ingranaggi
ITA ITA satelliti (10).
NOTA. Annotare il senso di montaggio dei satelliti.
Die Kolbenringe (9) entfernen. Mit einem Abzieher, die PlanetenraÈder (10) heraus
D D nehmen.
BEMERKUNG. Montagerichtung der PlanetenraÈder
beachten.
e f
Sacar los anillos elaÂsticos (9). Utilizando un extractor, sacar los engranajes sateÂlites
ESP ESP (10).
NOTA. Anotar el sentido de montaje de los sateÂlites.
Enlever les anneaux eÂlastiques (9). A l'aide d'un extracteur, extraire les engrenages
F F satellites (10).
NOTE. Prendre note du sens de montage des
satellites.
43
12 5
13
F1240450 F1240451
GB a GB b
Remove the snap ring (12) from the crown (13). Remove the crown flange (5).
14 15
F1240452 F1240453
GB c GB d
Remove the sealing ring from the hub (14). Remove the internal bearing (15).
16
17
16 17 18
7 18
F1240454 F1240455
GB e GB f
Remove the external thrust blocks from the bearings (8) and (15) Use a puller to remove the centring ring (16), the sealing ring (17)
forcing a pin-driver into the appropriate slots on the hub (7). and the bearing (18) from the steering case (3).
NOTE. Hammer in an alternate way so as to avoid crawling or NOTE. Note down the orientation of both centring ring (16) and
deformation of the thrust blocks. sealing ring (17).
44
Asportare l'anello elastico (12) di ritegno della corona Rimuovere la flangia portacorona (5).
ITA (13). ITA
Den Kolbenring (12) vom Kranz (13) abnehmen. Kranzhalterflansch (5) abnehmen.
D D
a b
Sacar el anillo elaÂstico (12) de retencioÂn de la corona Remover la brida portacorona (5).
ESP (13). ESP
Enlever l'anneau eÂlastique (12) de retenue de la DeÂposer la flasque porte-couronne (5).

F couronne (13). F
Rimuovere dal mozzo portaruota (14) l'anello di Rimuovere il cuscinetto interno (15).
ITA tenuta. ITA
Von der Radhalternabe (14) den Kolbenring abneh- Inneres Lager (15) abnehmen.
D men. D
c d
Remover del cubo portarruedas (14) el segmento de Remover el cojinete interior (15).
ESP compresioÂn. ESP
Enlever, du moyeu porte-roue (14), la bague d'eÂtan- Enlever le palier interne (15).
F cheÂiteÂ. F
Rimuovere le ralle esterne dei cuscinetti (8) e (15) Utilizzando un estrattore, asportare dalla scatola
ITA utilizzando un cacciaspine inserito nelle cave predi- ITA snodo (3), l'anello centratore (16), l'anello di tenuta
sposte sul mozzo (7). (17) e la bronzina (18).
NOTA. Battere in modo alternato per evitare impuntamenti e NOTA. Annotare gli orientamenti dell'anello centratore (16) e
deformazione delle ralle. dell'anello di tenuta (17).
Die aÈuûeren Scheiben der Lager (8) und (15) mit einem Mit einem Abzieher das GelenkgehaÈuse (3), den
D DuÈbel durch die NabenloÈcher (7) herausschlagen. D Zentrierring (16), den Kolbenring (17) und das Bron-
BEMERKUNG. Abwechselnd herausschlagen, um zelager (18) abnehmen.
Verformungen zu vermeiden. BEMERKUNG. Auf die Montagerichtung des Zentrierringes (16)
e f und des Kolbenringes (17) achten.
Remover las ranguas exteriores (8) y (15) de los Utilizando un extractor, sacar de la caja de la roÂtula (3)
ESP cojinetes utilizando un extractor para clavijas inser- ESP el anillo de centraje (16), el segmento de compresioÂn
tado en las ranuras predispuestas en el cubo (7). (17) y la chumacera (18).
NOTA. Golpear de manera alternada para evitar danÄos y NOTA. Anotar las orientaciones del anillo de centraje (16) y del
deformaciones de las ranguas. segmento de compresioÂn (17).
Enlever les crapaudines externes des paliers (8) et (15) A l'aide d'un extracteur, extraire le boõÃtier articulation
F aÁ l'aide d'une chasse-goupilles placeÂ dans les creux F (3), l'anneau de centrage (16), la bague d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ
speÂcialement concËus aÁ cet effet sur le moyeu (7). (17) et le coussinet (18).
NOTE. Taper d'une manieÁre alterneÂe afin d'eÂviter talonnage et NOTE. Prendre note du sens de l'anneau de centrage (16) et de la
deÂformation des crapaudines. bague d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (17).
45
19
16
18
3
17
GB a GB b
7
14 12
15 5
9
10
8
20
13 11
6
4
9
10
1
2 D1240040
GB c GB d
GB e GB f
46
ITA ITA
D D
a b
ESP ESP
F F
ITA ITA
D D
c d
ESP ESP
F F
ITA ITA
D D
e f
ESP ESP
F F
47
ASSEMBLING THE PLANETARY REDUCTION - ASSEMBLAGGIO RIDUTTORE EPICICLOIDALE - PLANETENGETRIEB MONTIEREN -
MONTAJE REDUCTOR EPICICLOIDAL - ASSEMBLAGE DU REDUCTEUR EPICYCLOIDAL
3 T7
16 17 T8
18
F1240456 F1240457
GB a GB b
Lubricate the bushing (18) and the seat of the steering case (3). Lubricate the outer surface of the sealing ring (17) and centring ring
Install the bushing (18), using tool T7. (16); fit them into their seat using tool T8.
8 15
T9A T9A
F1240458 F1240459
GB c GB d
Position the lower part of tool T9A and the thrust block of the Lubricate the seats of the bearings and position the hub (7) on tool
external bearing (8) under the press. T9A; position the thrust block of the internal bearing (15).
NOTE. Check that the thrust block is correctly oriented.
15
T9B
F1240460 F1240461
GB e GB f
Position the upper part of tool T9B and press the thrust blocks into Fit the bearing (15) into the internal thrust block.
the hub (7) all the way down.
48
Lubrificare la bronzina (18) e la sede della scatola Lubrificare la superficie esterna dell'anello di tenuta
ITA snodo (3). ITA (17) e dell'anello centratore (16); montarli in sede
Utilizzando l'attrezzo T7 montare la bronzina (18). utilizzando l'attrezzo T8.
Das Bronzelager (18) und das GelenkgehaÈuse (3) Die aÈuûere FlaÈche des Kolbenringes (17) und des
D schmieren. D Zentrierringes (16) schmieren; die beiden Ringe mit
Mit einem Werkzeug T7 das Bronzelager (18) montie- einem Werkzeug T8 montieren.
ren.
a b
Lubricar la chumacera (18) y el alojamiento de la caja Lubricar la superficie exterior del segmento de
ESP de la roÂtula (3). ESP compresioÂn (17) y del anillo de centraje (16); montarlos
Montar la chumacera (18) utilizando la herramienta en un alojamiento utilizando la herramienta T8.
T7.
Lubrifier le coussinet (18) et le logement du boõÃtier Lubrifier la surface externe de la bague d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ
F articulation (3). F (17), et de l'anneau de centrage (16), puis monter
A l'aide de l'outil T7 monter le coussinet (18). ceux-ci dans leur logement aÁ l'aide de l'outil T8.
Posizionare sotto la pressa la parte inferiore dell'at- Lubrificare le sedi dei cuscinetti e posizionare sull'at-
ITA trezzo T9A e la ralla del cuscinetto esterno (8). ITA trezzo T9A il mozzo portaruota (7); posizionare la ralla
del cuscinetto interno (15).
NOTA. Controllare l'orientamento della ralla.
Unter einer Presse den unteren Teil des Werkzeugs Die Lagersitze schmieren und am Werkzeug T9A die
D T9A und die Scheibe des aÈuûeren Lagers (8) D Radhalternabe (7) positionieren; die Scheibe des
positionieren. inneren Lagers (15) positionieren.
BEMERKUNG. Die Position der Scheibe beachten.
c d
Posicionar debajo de la prensa la parte inferior de la Lubricar los alojamientos de los cojinetes y posicionar
ESP herramienta T9A y la rangua del cojinete exterior (8). ESP en la herramienta T9A el cubo portarruedas (7);
posicionar la rangua del cojinete interior (15).
NOTA. Controlar la orientacioÂn de la rangua.
Placer sous la presse la partie infeÂrieure de l'outil T9A Lubrifier le logement des paliers et placer sur l'outil
F et la crapaudine du palier externe (8). F T9A le moyeu porte-roue (7); placer la crapaudine du
palier interne (15).
NOTE. ControÃler les sens de la crapaudine.
Posizionare la parte superiore dell'attrezzo T9B e Montare il cuscinetto (15) nella ralla interna.
ITA pressare a fondo le ralle nel mozzo portaruota (7). ITA
Das obere Teil des Werkzeugs T9B positionieren und Lager (15) in die innere Scheibe montieren.
D die Scheiben in die Radhalternabe (7) fest eindruÈcken. D
e f
Posicionar la parte superior de la herramienta T9B y Montar el cojinete (15) en la rangua interior.
ESP presionar a fondo las ranguas en el cubo portarruedas (7). ESP
Placer la partie supeÂrieure de l'outil T9B, puis presser aÁ Monter le palier (15) dans la crapaudine interne.
F fond les crapaudines du moyeu porte-roue (7). F
49
T10
14
7 14
F1240462 F1240463
GB a GB b
Apply a repositionable jointing compound for seals to the outer Position tool T10 and press the sealing ring (14) into its seat.
surface of the sealing ring (14). Position the sealing ring (14) in the
hub (7).
NOTE. Check that the ring (14) is correctly oriented.
12
13
5
13
F1240451 F1240465
GB c GB d
Insert the flange (5) in the crown (13). Insert the snap ring (12) in order to fix the flange (5) in the crown
(13).
NOTE. Carefully check that ring (12) is properly inserted in the slot
of the crown (13)
T11
9
10 10
F1240467 F1240447
GB e GB f
With the help of tool T11, insert the planet wheel gears (10) into the Lock the gears (10) into position by fitting the snap rings (9).
cover (2).
Accurately check the orientation.
50
Spalmare la superficie esterna dell'anello di tenuta Posizionare l'attrezzo T10 e pressare in sede l'anello
ITA (14) con mastice per guarnizioni riposizionabile. ITA di tenuta (14).
Posizionare l'anello di tenuta (14) nel mozzo (7).
NOTA. Controllare l'orientamento dell'anello (14).
Die aÈuûere FlaÈche des Kolbenringes (14) mit Klebstoff Das Werkzeug T10 positionieren und den Kolbenring
D fuÈr verstellbare Dichtungen schmieren. D (14) in seinen Sitz pressen.
Den Kolbenring (14) in die Nabe (7) montieren.
BEMERKUNG. Richtung des Ringes (14) beachten.
a b
Pasar sobre la superficie exterior del anillo de Posicionar la herramienta T10 y presionar en su
ESP compresioÂn (14) un pasta para juntas reposicionable. ESP alojamiento el segmento de compresioÂn (14).
Posicionar el segmento de compresioÂn (14) en el
cubo (7).
NOTA. Controlar la orientacioÂn del anillo (14).
Enduire la surface externe de la bague d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ Placer l'outil T10 et presser dans son logement la
F (14) avec mastic pour garnitures aÁ remettre en place. F bague d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (14).
Placer la bague d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (14) dans le moyeu (7).
NOTE. ControÃler le sens de la bague (14).
Inserire la flangia (5) nella corona (13). Inserire l'anello elastico (12) per fissare la posizione
ITA ITA della flangia (5) nella corona (13).
NOTA. Controllare attentamente l'inserimento dell'a-
nello (12) nella cava della corona (13).
Flansch (5) in den Kranz (13) montieren. Den Kolbenring (12) einsetzen, um die Position des
D D Flansches (5) im Kranz (13) zu sichern.
BEMERKUNG. SorgfaÈltig kontrollieren, ob der Ring
(12) in der Nut des Kranzes (13) richtig eingesetzt ist.
c d
Introducir la brida (5) en la corona (13). Introducir el anillo elaÂstico (12) para fijar la posicioÂn de
ESP ESP la brida (5) en la corona (13).
NOTA. Controlar atentamente la insercioÂn del anillo
(12) en la ranura de la corona (13).
Introduire la flasque (5) dans la couronne (13). Introduire l'anneau eÂlastique (12) pour fixer la position
F F de la flasque (5) dans la couronne (13).
NOTE. ControÃler soigneusement l'introduction de la
bague (12) dans le creux de la couronne (13).
Utilizzando l'attrezzo T11 inserire nel coperchio (2) gli Bloccare la posizione degli ingranaggi (10) montando
ITA ingranaggi satelliti (10). ITA gli anelli elastici di ritegno (9).
Controllare attentamente l'orientamento.
Mit dem Werkzeug T11 in den Deckel (2) die Die Position der RaÈder (10) mit den Halteringen (9)
D PlanetenraÈder (10) einsetzen. D blockieren.
Die Position sorgfaÈltig kontrollieren.
e f
Utilizando la herramienta T11 introducir en la tapa (2) Bloquear la posicioÂn de los engranajes (10) montando
ESP los engranajes sateÂlites (10). ESP los anillos elaÂsticos de retencioÂn (9).
Controlar atentamente la orientacioÂn.
A l'aide de l'outil T11 introduire dans le couvercle (2) Bloquer la position des engrenages (10) en montant
F les engrenages satellites (10). F les anneaux eÂlastiques de retenue (9).
ControÃler attentivement le sens.
51
19
F1240446 F1240425
GB a GB b
Fit the steering case (3) onto the U-joint (19) and install the Connect the steering bars.
articulation pins. For pin assembly details, see «HOW TO For details, see «HOW TO INSTALL THE COMPLETE STEERING
ASSEMBLE THE COMPLETE STEERING CASE». CASE».
7 8
F1240445 F1240444
GB c GB d
Install the hub (7). Install the external bearing (8).
NOTE. Using a plastic hammer, drive the bearing to the limit stop
by lightly hammering around the edge.
5
6
5
F1240470 F1240441
GB e GB f
Fit the complete crown flange (5). Apply Tecnolube Seal 101 grease to the surface of the safety
NOTE. In order to fasten the flange (5), use a plastic hammer and flange (6) which touches the crown flange (5).
alternately hammer on several equidistant points. Fit the safety flange (6).
52
Infilare la scatola snodo (3) sul doppio giunto (19) e Collegare le barre di sterzatura.
ITA montare i perni snodo. ITA Per i dettagli, vedere «INSTALLAZIONE SCATOLA
Per i dettagli di montaggio dei perni snodo, vedere SNODO COMPLETA».
«ASSEMBLAGGIO SCATOLA SNODO COMPLETA».
GelenkgehaÈuse (3) auf die Doppelkupplung (19) Lenkstangen anschlieûen.

D setzen und die Gelenkstifte montieren. D Siehe «KOMPLETTES GELENKGEHAÈUSE INSTAL-
Siehe zur Montage der Gelenkstifte «KOMPLETTES LIEREN».
GELENKGEHAÈUSE ZUSAMMENBAUEN».
a b
Introducir la caja de la roÂtula (3) en la junta doble (19) y Conectar las barras de direccioÂn.
ESP montar las roÂtulas. ESP Para los detalles, veÂase «INSTALACION CAJA DE
Para los detalles de montaje de las roÂtulas, veÂase ROTULA COMPLETA».
«MONTAJE DE LA CAJA DE ROTULA COMPLETA».
Introduire le boõÃtier articulation (3) sur le double joint Relier les barres de braquage.
F (19), puis monter les tourillons d'articulation. F Pour de plus amples deÂtails voir «INSTALLATION DU
Pour de plus amples deÂtails sur le montage des BOITIER ARTICULATION COMPLET».
tourillons d'articulation, voir «ASSEMBLAGE DU BOITIER ARTI-
CULATION COMPLET».
Montare il mozzo portaruota (7). Montare il cuscinetto esterno (8).

ITA ITA
NOTA. Mandare a fondo corsa il cuscinetto con
leggeri colpi di mazzuolo distribuiti su tutta la
circonferenza.
Radhalternabe (7) montieren. AÈuûeres Lager (8) montieren.

D D
BEMERKUNG. Das Lager bis zum Anschlag ein-
setzen; dazu einen Gummihammer verwenden und
entlang der Kreislinie einschlagen.
c d
Montar el cubo portarruedas (7). Montar el cojinete exterior (8).
ESP ESP
NOTA. Llevar al fondo de carrera el cojinete con
ligeros golpes de martillo distribuidos en toda la
circunferencia.
Monter le moyeu porte-roue (7). Monter le palier externe (8).

F F
NOTE. Envoyer le palier en fin de course avec des
petits coups de maillet distribueÂs sur toute la circonfeÂ-
rence.
Montare la flangia portacorona (5) completa. Lubrificare con grasso Tecnolube Seal 101 la superfi-
ITA ITA cie della flangia di sicurezza (6) a contatto con la
NOTA. Per mandare in battuta la flangia (5), usare un
mazzuolo in materiale plastico battuto alternativamen- flangia portacorona (5).
te in piuÁ punti equidistanti. Montare la flangia di sicurezza (6).
Kompletter Kranzhlaterflansch (5) montieren. Mit Fett Typ Tecnolube Seal 101 die OberflaÈche des
D D Sicherheitsflansch (6) schmieren, der am Kranzhalter-
BEMERKUNG. Um den Flansch (5) bis zum Anschlag
einzusetzen, einen Gummihammer verwenden und flansch (5) anliegt.
abwechselnd an gleich entfernten Stellen einschlagen. Sicherheitsflansch (6) montieren.
e f
Montar la brida portacorona (5). Lubricar con grasa Tecnolube Seal 101 la superficie
ESP ESP de la brida de seguridad (6) en contacto con la brida
NOTA. Para llevar a tope la brida (5) usar un martillo
de material plaÂstico golpeaÂndolo alternativamente en portacorona (5).
varios puntos equidistantes. Montar la brida de seguridad (6).
Monter la flasque porte-couronne (5) compleÁte. Lubrifier avec du gras Tecnolube Seal 101 la surface
F F de la flasque de seÂcuriteÂ (6) en contact avec la flasque
NOTE. Pour envoyer la flasque (5) en buteÂe, utiliser un
maillet en matieÁre plastique en battant sur plusieurs porte-couronne (5).
points eÂquidistants. Monter la flasque de seÂcuriteÂ (6).
53
F1240472 F1240473
GB a GB b
Apply Loctite 242 to the studs and fit in the nuts (4). Cross tighten the nuts (4) in two stages.
Initial torque wrench setting: 120 Nm
Final torque wrench setting: 255±285 Nm
20
3
1
2
2
F1240439 F1240475
GB c GB d
Fit the planetary carrier cover (2) onto the hub (3). Lock the planetary carrier cover (2) by tightening the screws (1).
CAUTION! Check that the O-ring (20) is in good condition and in Torque wrench setting for screws: 40±50 Nm
position.
GB e GB f
54
Spalmare i prigionieri con Loctite 242 e montare i dadi Serrare i dadi (4) in due tempi e con il metodo del
ITA (4). ITA serraggio incrociato.
Coppia di serraggio iniziale: 120 Nm
Coppia di serraggio finale 255v285 Nm
Die Stiftschrauben mit Loctite 242 schmieren und die Die Mutter (4) abwechseln und entgegengesetzt fest-
D Muttern (4) montieren. D schrauben.
AnfaÈnglicher Anzugsmoment: 120 Nm
EndguÈltiger Anzugsmoment: 255v285 Nm
a b
Pasar en los prisioneros Loctite 242 y montar las Apretar las tuercas (4) en dos tiempos y siempre con el
ESP tuercas (4). ESP meÂtodo de torsioÂn cruzada.
Par de torsioÂn inicial: 120 Nm
Par de torsioÂn final 255v285 Nm
Enduire les prisonniers avec du Loctite 242 puis Serrer les eÂcrous (4) en deux temps par le biais du
F monter les eÂcrous (4). F mode de serrage croiseÂ.
Couple de serrage initial: 120 Nm
Couple de serrage final: 255v285 Nm
Montare il coperchio portasatelliti (2) sul mozzo Bloccare il coperchio portasatelliti (2) con le viti (1).
ITA portaruota (3). ITA Coppia di serraggio viti: 40v50 Nm
ATTENZIONE! Controllare lo stato e la posizione della
guarnizione OR (20).
Planetenradhalterdeckel (2) auf die Radhalternabe (3) Planetenhalterdeckel (2) mit den Schraube (1) fest-
D montieren. D schrauben.
ACHTUNG! Den Zustand und die Position des O- Anzugsmoment der Schrauben: 40v50 Nm
Ringes (20) kontrollieren.
c d
Montar la tapa portasateÂlites (2) en el cubo portarrue- Bloquear la tapa portasateÂlites (2) con los tornillos (1).
ESP das (3). ESP Par de torsioÂn tornillos: 40v50 Nm
CUIDADO! Controlar el estado y la posicioÂn de la junta
OR (20).
Monter le couvercle porte-satellites (2) sur le moyeu Bloquer le couvercle porte-satellites (2) avec les vis
F porte-roue (3). F (1).
ATTENTION! ControÃler l'eÂtat et la position de la Couple de serrage vis: 40v50 Nm
garniture OR (20).
ITA ITA
D D
e f
ESP ESP
F F
55
HOW TO REMOVE THE STEERING CYLINDER - RIMOZIONE CILINDRO DI STERZATURA - LENKZYLINDER ABMONTIEREN -
REMOCION CILINDRO DE DIRECCIOÂN - DEPOSE DU CYLINDRE DE BRAQUAGE
1
2
6
3
F1240401 F1240402
GB a GB b
Remove the centring sensor (1) of the steering piston (2), if Remove the safety cotter pins (3) from the articulation pins (4) of
supplied. the steering bars (5).
CAUTION! Dispose of used cotter pins.
4 5
7
F1240403 F1240404
GB c GB d
Remove the castellated nuts (6) that lock the articulation pins (4). Disconnect the tapered pins of the articulation (4) from the steering
case (7) by means of a puller.
13 2
F1240405 F1240406
GB e GB f
If the connection of the steering bars includes a safety collar (13), Disconnect left and right steering bars (5) from the piston (2).
raise the border.
56
Se eÁ previsto rimuovere il sensore (1) di centraggio Asportare le copiglie (3) di sicurezza perni snodo (4)
ITA della corsa del pistone di sterzatura (2). ITA delle barre di sterzatura (5).
ATTENZIONE! Scartare le copiglie usate.
Wenn vorgesehen, Sensor (1) zur Zentrierung des Splint (3) der Gelenkstifte (4) der Lenkstangen (5)
D Hubs des Lenkkolbens (2) abnehmen. D abnehmen.
ACHTUNG! Verbrauchte Splinte nicht verwenden.
a b
Si ha sido previsto, remover el sensor (1) de centraje Sacar las clavijas (3) de seguridad de la roÂtulas (4) de
ESP de la carrera del pistoÂn de direccioÂn (2). ESP las barras de direccioÂn (5).
CUIDADO! Tirar las clavijas usadas.
Si preÂvu, enlever le capteur (1) de centrage de la Enlever la goupille (3) de suÃreteÂ des tourillons
F course du piston de braquage (2). F d'articulation (4) des barres de braquage (5).
ATTENTION! Eliminer les goupilles useÂes.
Rimuovere i dadi ad intaglio (6) di ritegno perni snodo Utilizzando un estrattore, scollegare i perni conici
ITA (4). ITA dello snodo sterzo (4) dalla scatola snodo (7).
Kronenmutter (6) von den Gelenkstiften (4) abnehmen. Mit einem Abzieher, die Kegelstifte des Gelenks (4)
D D von dem GelenkgehaÈuse (7) abnehmen.
c d
Remover las tuercas ranuradas (6) de retencioÂn de las Utilizando un extractor, desconectar los pernos
ESP roÂtulas (4). ESP coÂnicos de la roÂtula de direccioÂn (4) del caÂrter de la
roÂtula (7).
Enlever les eÂcrous canneleÂs (6) de fixation des A l'aide d'un extracteur, deÂbrancher les pivots
F tourillons d'articulation (4). F coniques d'articulation de braquage (4) du boõÃtier
articulation (7).
Se il collegamento delle barre di sterzatura prevede il Scollegare dal pistone (2) le barre di sterzatura destra
ITA collare di sicurezza (13) rialzare la bordatura. ITA e sinistra (5).
Falls die Lenkstangen mit einem Sicherheitsbund (13) Vom Kolben (2) die rechte und linke Lenkstange (5)
D versehen sind, den Rand anheben. D abnehmen.
e f
Si la conexioÂn de las barras de direccioÂn preveÂ el Desconectar del pistoÂn (2) las barras de direccioÂn
ESP collarõÂn de seguridad (13) elevar los rebordes. ESP derecha e izquierda (5).
Si le raccordement des barres de braquage est eÂquipeÂ DeÂsassembler du piston (2) les barres de braquage
F de collet de seÂcuriteÂ (13) rehausser la bordure. F droite et gauche (5).
57
HOW TO REMOVE THE STEERING CYLINDER - RIMOZIONE CILINDRO DI STERZATURA - LENKZYLINDER ABMONTIEREN -
REMOCION CILINDRO DE DIRECCIOÂN - DEPOSE DU CYLINDRE DE BRAQUAGE
F1240407 F1240408
GB a GB b
Remove the securing screws (8) from the steering cylinder (9). Extract the cylinder (9) using a plastic hammer.
NOTE. For cylinder disassembly, refer to «HOW TO DISASSEM-
BLE THE STEERING CYLINDER».
7 15
5 9
11
1 10 2
15
4
6 GB c 8GB d
3
14 7
12
4
12
14
6 13
3
13
6
3
6
3 D1240041
GB e GB f
58
Asportare le viti (8) di fissaggio del cilindro di Estrarre il cilindro (9) utilizzando un mazzuolo in
ITA sterzatura (9). ITA materiale plastico.
NOTA. Per lo smontaggio del cilindro, vedere
«SMONTAGGIO CILINDRO DI STERZATURA».
Die Befestigungsschrauben (8) des Lenkzylinders (9) Den Zylinder (9) mit einem Gummihammer heraus-
D abnehmen. D schlagen.
BEMERKUNG. Um den Zylinder abzumontieren, siehe
«LENKZYLINDER ABMONTIEREN».
a b
Sacar los tornillos (8) que fijan el cilindro de direccioÂn Extraer el cilindro (9) utilizando un martillo de material
ESP (9). ESP plaÂstico.
NOTA. Para desmontar el cilindro, veÂase «DESMON-
TAJE CILINDRO DE DIRECCIO Â N».
Enlever les vis (8) de fixation du cylindre de braquage Extraire le cylindre (9) aÁ l'aide d'un maillet en matieÁre
F (9). F plastique.
NOTE. Pour deÂmonter le cylindre, voir «DEMONTAGE
DU CYLINDRE DE BRAQUAGE».
59
HOW TO INSTALL THE STEERING CYLINDER - INSTALLAZIONE CILINDRO DI STERZATURA - LENKZYLINDER INSTALLIEREN -
INSTALACION CILINDRO DE DIRECCIOÂN - INSTALLATION DU CYLINDRE DE BRAQUAGE
9 8
9
F1240409 F1240410
GB a GB b
Check that the O-rings (15) of the axle unit are in good condition; Lock the cylinder by cross- tightening the screws (8).
lubricate the seats of the seals (15) and fit the steering cylinder (9) Torque wrench setting: 116±128 Nm
into its seat.
13
F1240411 F1240412
GB c GB d
Apply Loctite 242 to the thread and connect the steering bars by Insert the pins (4) in the steering case (7) and lock into position
screwing the terminals onto the piston stem. using a torque wrench setting of 260±290 Nm.
Torque wrench setting: 240±270 Nm Find the position of the notching in relation to the hole of the cotter
NOTE. Versions with coupling require that the rim of the pins and tighten the nut (6) further.
articulation (13) is riveted onto the surfaces of the piston stem. CAUTION! Check that rubber guards (A) are intact.
10
6 3
F1240413 F1240401
GB e GB f
Insert the cotter pins (3) and bend the safety stems. Install the proximity (1) for checking piston centring - if applicable -
CAUTION! Use new cotter pins. and tighten the screws (10).
Torque wrench setting: 5±6 Nm
60
Controllare lo stato delle guarnizioni OR (15) del corpo Bloccare il cilindro con le viti (8) serrate con il metodo
ITA assale; lubrificare le sedi di tenuta delle guarnizioni ITA incrociato.
(15) e montare in sede il cilindro di sterzatura (9). Coppia di serraggio: 116v128 Nm
O-Ringe (15) des AchsenkoÈrpers kontrollieren; die Zylinder mit den Schrauben (8) blockieren; dabei die
D Sitze der Dichtungen (15) schmieren und den Lenk- D Schrauben entgegengesetzt und abwechselnd fest-
zylinder (9) in seinen Sitz montieren. schrauben.
Anzugsmoment 116v128 Nm
a b
Controlar el estado de las juntas OR (15) del cuerpo Bloquear el cilindro con los tornillos (8) apretados con
ESP del eje; lubricar los alojamientos de estanqueidad de ESP el meÂtodo cruzado.
las juntas (15) y montar en el alojamiento el cilindro de Par de torsioÂn: 116v128 Nm
direccioÂn (9).
ControÃler le bon eÂtat des garnitures OR (15) du corps Bloquer le cylindre aÁ l'aide des vis (8) serreÂes par le
F d'essieu, lubrifier les logements d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ des F biais du mode croiseÂ.
garnitures (15), puis monter le logement du cylindre Couple de serrage: 116v128 Nm
de braquage (9).
Spalmare la filettatura con Loctite 242 e collegare le Inserire nella scatola snodo (7) i perni (4) e bloccare la
ITA barre di sterzatura avvitando nello stelo del pistone i ITA posizione serrandoli con una coppia di 260v290 Nm.
terminali. Ricercare la posizione dell'intaglio rispetto al foro delle
Coppia di serraggio: 240v270 Nm copiglie serrando ulteriormente il dado (6).
NOTA. Per la versione a manicotto, ribadire il bordo dello snodo ATTENZIONE! Controllare l'integritaÁ delle protezioni in gomma (A).
(13) sui piani dello stelo del pistone.
Das Gewinde mit Loctite 242 schmieren und die In das GelenkgehaÈuse (7) die Stifte (4) einsetzen und
D Lenkstangen verbinden; dabei die EndstuÈcke auf D mit einem Anzugsmoment von 260v290 Nm fest-
den Kolbenschaft festschrauben. schrauben. Die Position des Schnitts zum Loch der
Anzugsmoment: 240v270 Nm Splinte suchen, und die Mutter (6) nochmals festziehen.
c BEMERKUNG. Bei der AusfuÈhrung mit Muffe, den Gelenkrand (13) d ACHTUNG! Kontrollieren ob die Gummiringe (A) in Ordnung sind.
an den KolbenschaftflaÈchen boÈrdeln.
Pasar por la rosca Loctite 242 y conectar las barras de Introducir en el caÂrter de la roÂtula (7) los pernos (4) y
ESP direccioÂn atornillando en el vaÂstago del pistoÂn los ESP bloquear la posicioÂn apretaÂndolos con un par de
terminales. 260v290 Nm.
Par de torsioÂn: 240v270 Nm Buscar la posicioÂn de la ranura con respecto al orificio de las
NOTA. Para la versioÂn de manguito, rebordear el borde de la roÂtula clavijas apretando auÂn la tuerca (6).
(13) en las superficies maÂs importantes del vaÂstago del pistoÂn. CUIDADO! Controlar la integridad de las protecciones de goma (A).
Enduire le filetage avec du Loctite 242 et brancher la Introduire dans le boõÃtier articulation (7) les tourillons
F barre de braquage en vissant les embouts dans la tige F (4), puis bloquer dans la position en serrant ceux-ci aÁ
du piston. un couple de 260v290 Nm.
Couple de serrage: 240v270 Nm Chercher la position de l'entaille par rapport au trou de la goupille
NOTE. Dans la version aÁ manchon, river le bord de l'articulation en serrant encore l'eÂcrou (6).
(13) sur les plans cleÂ de la tige du piston. ATTENTION! ControÃler le bon eÂtat des protections en caoutchouc (A).
Inserire le copiglie (3) e piegare i gambi di sicurezza. Se eÁ previsto, installare il sensore di prossimitaÁ (1) per
ITA ITA il controllo della centratura del pistone e serrare le viti
ATTENZIONE! Usare copiglie nuove.
(10).
Coppia di serraggio: 5v6 Nm
Die Splinte (3) einsetzen und die beiden Sicherheits- Wenn vorgesehen, den NaÈherungsschalter (1) zur
D stifte knicken. D Kontrolle der Kolbenzentrierung installieren und mit
ACHTUNG! Neue Splinte verwenden. den Schrauben (10) festschrauben.
Anzugsmoment: 5v6 Nm
e f
Introducir las clavijas (3) y doblar las patas de Si ha sido previsto, instalar el sensor de proximidad (1)
ESP seguridad. ESP para el control del centraje del pistoÂn y apretar los
CUIDADO! Usar clavijas nuevas. tornillos (10).
Par de torsioÂn: 5v6 Nm
Introduire les goupilles (3) et plier les tiges de seÂcuriteÂ. Si preÂvu, installer le capteur de proximiteÂ (1) de
F F controÃle de centrage piston et serrer les vis (10).
ATTENTION! Utiliser des goupilles neuves.
Couple de serrage: 5v6 Nm
61
1
T12
T12
F1240415 F1240416
bar GB a GB b
CAUTION. Eliminate the action of the negative brake, if fitted. Connect the sensor (1) to the inspection device according to either
Apply tools T12 to the hubs and lock them. diagram.
Using a level "B", check that tools are perfectly flat and parallel to
each other.
I max=0,80 A I max=0,80 A
NERO NERO
BLACK BLACK
CONNETTORE CONNETTORE
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR BATTERIA
2 BATTERY
2 BLU
1 3
BLU
-- 1 3
BLUE
--
4 BLUE 4
BATTERIA
BATTERY
MARRONE MARRONE
BROWN
+ BROWN
+
2A 2A
D1240029 D1240030
GB c GB d
Sensor connection card, STANDARD version. Sensor connection card, OPTIONAL version.
= =
C
F1240550 F1240418
GB e GB f
Centre the piston by slowly moving it first in one direction then in Inspect jut "C" on one side of the piston and note down the size for
the other and position it half way on the stroke, which is determined checking later adjustments.
by the switching on and off of the signal lamp of the inspection NOTE. If cylinders come without a sensor, the centring of the
device in the reversal stage. piston must be carried out on the basis of the maximum stroke.
62
ATTENZIONE! Se previsto, eliminare l'azione del Collegare il sensore (1) al dispositivo di controllo
ITA freno negativo. ITA secondo uno dei due schemi.
Applicare sui mozzi portaruota gli attrezzi T12 e
bloccarli.
Controllare con una livella "B" che gli attrezzi siano perfettamente
in piano e paralleli tra loro.
ACHTUNG! Wenn vorgesehen, Wirkung der Negativ- Sensor (1) mit der Kontrollvorrichtung nach einem der
D bremse beseitigen. D beiden PlaÈne verbinden.
An den Radhalternaben die T12 Werkzeuge anbrin-
gen und blockieren.
a Mit einer Libelle "B" kontrollieren, ob die Werkzeuge livelliert und
parallel liegen.
b
CUIDADO! Si ha sido previsto, eliminar la accioÂn el Conectar el sensor (1) al dispositivo de control seguÂn
ESP freno negativo ESP uno de los dos esquemas.
Aplicar en los cubos portarruedas las herramientas
T12 y bloquearlas.
Controlar utilizando un nivel "B" que las herramientas esteÂn
perfectamente niveladas y paralelas entre sõÂ.
ATTENTION! Si preÂvu, eÂliminer l'action du frein Connecter le capteur (1) au dispositif de controÃle aÁ
F neÂgatif. F l'aide de l'un des deux scheÂmas.
Appliquer sur les moyeux des roues les outils T12 puis
bloquer.
ControÃler aÁ l'aide d'un niveau "B" que les outils soient parfaitement
aÁ plat et paralleÁles entre-eux.
Scheda collegamento sensore versione STANDARD. Scheda collegamento sensore versione OPZIONALE.
ITA ITA
Verbindungskarte fuÈr Sensor STANDARD AusfuÈh- Verbindungskarte fuÈr Sensor OPTION AusfuÈhrung.
D rung. D
c d
Tarjeta de conexioÂn sensor versioÂn ESTAÂNDAR. Tarjeta de conexioÂn sensor versioÂn OPCIONAL.
ESP ESP
Carte de connexion du capteur version STANDARD. Carte de connexion du capteur version OPTIONNEL.
F F
Eseguire la centratura spostando lentamente il pistone Controllare la sporgenza "C" del pistone su un lato ed
ITA prima in un senso e poi nell'altro, posizionandolo a ITA annotare la misura per il controllo delle regolazioni
metaÁ della corsa determinata dalle accensioni e dallo successive.
spegnimento in fase di ritorno, della lampada di segnalazione del NOTA. Per i cilindri senza sensore, la centratura del pistone deve
dispositivo di controllo. essere eseguita in base alla corsa massima.
Die Zentrierung vornehmen, dabei den Kolben zuerst Den Vorsprung "C" des Kolbens an einer Seite
D leicht in die eine, dann in die andere Richtung drehen D kontrollieren und das Maû zur Kontrolle der nachfol-
und auf halbem Hubweg positionieren. Dieser halber genden Einstellungen notieren.
Weg liegt zwischen dem Ein- und Ausschalten der Kontrolleuchte BEMERKUNG. FuÈr Zylinder ohne Sensor, erfolgt die Kolbenzen-
e der Kontrollvorrichtung. f trierung aufgrund des maximalen Hubs.
Ejecutar el centraje desplazando lentamente el pistoÂn Controlar la parte saliente de "C" del pistoÂn en un lado
ESP primero en un sentido y despueÂ s en el otro, ESP y anotar la medida para el control de las regulaciones
posicionaÂndolo a mitad de la carrera determinada sucesivas.
por el encendido y el apagado en fase de retorno, de la laÂmpara de NOTA. Para los cilindros sin sensor, el centraje del pistoÂn tiene que
senÄalizacioÂn del dispositivo de control. ser ejecutado de acuerdo con la carrera maÂxima.
Effectuer le centrage en deÂplacËant lentement le piston ControÃler la saillie "C" d'un coÃteÂ du piston et prendre
F d'abord dans un sens, puis dans l'autre, en le placËant F note de la mesure pour controÃler les reÂgulations
aÁ mi-course qui est deÂtermineÂe par la lampe-teÂmoin suivantes.
qui s'allume et qui s'eÂteint pendant la phase de retour et qui se NOTE. Pour les cylindres sans capteur, le centrage du piston doit
trouve sur le dispositif de controÃle. eÃtre effectueÂ en se basant sur la course maximale.
63
5 14
T12
T12
F1240419 F1240420
GB a GB b
Without moving the piston, check front and rear size at the edge of If necessary, adjust convergency without moving the centring of
tools T12. the piston and adjust the length of the steering bars (5) or (14).
Max. difference: 0.6±0.7 mm NOTE. With a half turn of screw, the front size is reduced by about
NOTE. In order to check the rear size, rotate the bevel pinion and 3 mm, whereas the rear one is increased by about 3 mm.
check that tools T12 are flat.
12 16
F1240421 F1240422
GB c GB d
CONVERGENCY ADJUSTMENT ON UNITS WITH COLLAR Rotate the ball-and-socket joints (16) until convergency has been
Unloose the nuts on the collars (12). obtained.
Check that articulations move easily and lock the collars (12).
Torque wrench setting for nuts: 42±52 Nm
15
15 11
11
F1240423 F1240424
GB e GB f
CONVERGENCY ADJUSTMENT ON ALTERNATIVE VERSIONS Hold the articulations still and rotate the ball-and-socket joints (15).
Unloose the nuts (11) and screw them onto the ball-and-socket Once the convergency has been adjusted, lock the nuts (11).
joints (15). Torque wrench setting for nuts: 298±328 Nm
64
Senza spostare il pistone controllare la misura Se necessario, regolare la convergenza senza spo-
ITA anteriore e posteriore all'estremitaÁ degli attrezzi T12. ITA stare la centratura del pistone, regolando la lunghezza
Differenza max: 0,6v0,7 mm delle barre di sterzatura (5) o (14).
NOTA. Per controllare la misura posteriore, far ruotare il pignone NOTA. Mezzo giro di avvitamento restringe la misura anteriore di
conico e controllare planaritaÁ e parallelismo degli attrezzi T12. circa 3 mm ed allarga la posteriore di circa 3 mm.
Ohne den Kolben zu verstellen, das vordere und hintere Wenn noÈtig, die Konvergenz einstellen, ohne die
D Maû am EndstuÈck der Werkzeuge T12 kontrollieren. D Kolbenzentrierung zu verstellen; dazu die LaÈnge der
Max. Unterschied: 0,6v0,7 mm Lenkstangen (5) oder (14) einstellen.
BEMERKUNG. Um das hintere Maû zu kontrollieren, das Kegelrad BEMERKUNG. Eine halbe Umdrehung verringert das Vordermaû
a drehen und kontrollieren ob die Werkzeuge T12 eben und parallel b um ca. 3 mm und erweitert das hintere Maû um ca. 3 mm.
liegen.
Sin desplazar el pistoÂn, controlar la medida anterior y Si fuera necesario, regular la convergencia sin
ESP posterior en los extremos de las herramientas T12. ESP desplazar el centraje del pistoÂn, regulando la longitud
Diferencia maÂx.: 0,6v0,7 mm de las barras de direccioÂn (5) o (14).
NOTA. Para controlar la medida posterior, hacer girar el pinÄoÂn NOTA. Media vuelta de atornillado restringe la medida anterior en
coÂnico y controlar la planaridad y el paralelismo de las herramien- aproximadamente 3 mm y ensancha la posterior en aproximada-
tas T12. mente 3 mm.
Sans deÂplacer le piston, controÃler les mesures avant Si besoin, reÂgler la convergence sans deÂplacer le
F et arrieÁre de l'extreÂmiteÂ des outils T12. F centrage du piston, en reÂglant la longueur des barres
DiffeÂrence max.: 0,6v0,7 mm de braquage (5) ou (14).
NOTE. Pour controÃler la mesure arrieÁre, faire tourner le pignon NOTE. Un demi-tour de vis diminue la mesure avant d'environ 3
conique et controÃler l'uniformiteÂ et le paralleÂlisme des outils T12. mm et eÂlargit celle de derrieÁre d'environ 3 mm.
REGOLAZIONE CONVERGENZA PER VERSIONI Ruotare i perni sferici (16) fino ad ottenere la
ITA CON COLLARE ITA convergenza.
Allentare i dadi dei collari (12). Controllare la libertaÁ di movimento degli snodi e
bloccare i collari (12).
Coppia di serraggio dadi: 42v52 Nm
KONVERGENZ BEI DEN AUSFU È HRUNGEN MIT Die kugeligen Stifte (16) drehen, bis die Konvergenz
D BUND EINSTELLEN D erreicht worden ist.
Die Bundmuttern (12) lockern. Die freie Bewegung der Gelenke uÈberpruÈfen und mit
den Bunden (12) blockieren.
c d Anzugsmoment der Muttern: 42v52 Nm
REGULACIO Â N CONVERGENCIA PARA VERSIONES Girar los pernos esfeÂricos (16) hasta obtener la
ESP CON COLLARIÂN ESP convergencia.
Aflojar las tuercas de los collarines (12). Controlar la libertad de movimiento de las roÂtulas y
bloquear los collarines (12).
Par de torsioÂn de las tuercas: 42v52 Nm
REGLAGE DE CONVERGENCE DES VERSION A Tourner les tourillons spheÂriques (16) jusqu'aÁ obtenir
F COLLIER DE SERRAGE F la convergence.
Desserrer les eÂcrous des colliers de serrage (12). ControÃler le libre mouvement des articulations et
bloquer les colliers de serrage (12).
Couple de serrage des eÂcrous: 42v52 Nm
REGOLAZIONE CONVERGENZA PER VERSIONE Mantenendo fermi gli snodi, ruotare i perni sferici (15).
ITA ALTERNATIVA ITA A convergenza regolata, bloccare i dadi (11).
Allentare i dadi (11) ed avvitarli sui perni sferici (15). Coppia di serraggio dadi: 298v328 Nm
KONVERGENZ BEI DEN ALTERNATIVEN AUSFU È H- Die Gelenke festhalten und die kugeligen Stifte (15)
D RUNGEN EINSTELLEN D drehen.
Die Muttern (11) lockern und auf die kugeligen Stifte Wenn die Konvergenz eingestellt ist, die Muttern (11)
(15) festschrauben. blockieren.
e f Anzugsmoment der Muttern: 298v328 Nm
REGULACIO Â N CONVERGENCIA PARA VERSIO ÂN Manteniendo firmes las roÂtulas, girar los pernos
ESP ALTERNATIVA ESP esfeÂricos (15).
Aflojar las tuercas (11) y atornillarlas en los pernos Una vez regulada la convergencia, bloquear las
esfeÂricos (15). tuercas (11).
Par de torsioÂn de las tuercas: 298v328 Nm
REGLAGE DE LA CONVERGENCE EN VERSION Tout en maintenant fermement les articulations,

F ALTERNATIVE F tourner les tourillons spheÂriques (15).
Desserrer les eÂcrous (11) puis visser les tourillons Lorsque la convergence est reÂgleÂe, bloquer les eÂcrous
spheÂriques (15). (11).
Couple de serrage des eÂcrous: 298v328 Nm
65
Pos. 2 Pos. 4
Pos. 3 Pos. 1
34%%2).' #9,).$%2
STEERING CYLINDER
#),).$2/34%2:/
CILINDRO STERZ O
,%.+:9,).$%2
LENKZYLINDER
#),).$2/$%$%36)/
CILINDRO DE DESVIO
#9,).$2%$%$)2%#4)/.
CYLINDRE DE DIRECTION
'" A '" B
!$*534).'4(%34%%2).'!.',% 0ERFORMONEFULLSTEERINGOPERATIONUNTILTHEADJUSTEDSCREWLEANS
./4%0ERFORMTHESAMEOPERATIONSONBOTHSIDESSEEDIA AGAINSTTHEARMSTOP
GRAM
,OOSENTHENUTOFONEOFTHEADJUSTINGSREWSONCYLINDERSIDE
'" C '" D
0ERFORMONEFULLSTEERINGOPERATIONUNTILTHEADJUSTEDSCREWLEANS !SYOUHOLDTHEADJUSTEDSCREWINPOSITIONAGAINSTTHEARMSTOP
AGAINSTTHEARMSTOP ADJUSTTHESCREWOPPOSITEONNON CYLINDERSIDEUNTILITLEANS
AGAINSTTHEARMSTOP
34%%2).'!.',%
!.'/,/$)34%2:!452!
%).3(,!'7).+%,
!.'5,!#)/.$%$%36)/
!.',%$%"2!15!'%
$)34!.#% @"
$)34!.:! MM
!"34!.$
$)34!.#)!
$)34!.#%
'" E
)-0/24!.44HESCREWSMUSTLEANAGAINSTTHERESPECTIVEARM
STOPSALLATTHESAMETIME
66
2%')342!:)/.%!.'/,/$)34%2:!452! %SEGUIREUNASTERZATURACOMPLETAlNOAFARAPPOG
)4! %SEGUIRELESTESSEOPERAZIONIPERIDUELATICONLA )4! GIARELAVITEREGOLATA SULLARRESTONELBRACCIO
SEQUENZADELLOSCHENA
!LLENTAREILDADODIlSSAGGIOh!vDELLAVITEDIREGISTRA
ZIONE
%).34%,,5.'$%3%).3#(,!'7).+%,3"%-% $IEVOLLSTAENDIGE,ENKUNGDURCHFUERENBISDIEEIN

$ 2+5.' $ GESTELLTE3CHRAUBEANDER!RMSPERREANGLIET
$IESELBEN6ORGAENGEFUERBEIDE3EITENINDERSELBEN
2EIHENFOLGEDES3CHEMASVORNEHMEN$IE-UTTER
EINERDERBEIDEN3TELLSCHRAUBENANDER:YLINDERSEITE
A LOCKERN B
2%')342!#)/.!.'5,!#)/.$%$%36)/ %FECTUARUNDESVIOCOMPLETOHASTAHACERAPOYARLOS
%30 ./4%%FECTUARLASMISMASOPERATIONSPARALOSDOS %30 TORNILLOSREGULADASOBREELPARODELEJE
LADOSCONLASEQUENCIADELESQUEMA
!mOJARLATUERCADEUNODELOSDEUXVISDEREGLAGE
2%',!'%!.',%$%"2!15!'% %XáCUTERUNBRAQUAGECOMPLETJUSQUÜÂLABUTEEDE
& ./4%%XáCUTERLESMEMESPOPERATIONSDESDEUX & LAVISR£GL£ESURLARRETDUBRAS
CÒTESDANSLASEQUENCEDUSCHEMA
$ESSERRERLECROUDUNEDESDEUXVISDáREGLAGECÒT£
CYLINDRE
%SEGUIREUNASTERZATURACOMPLETAlNOAFARAPPOG -ANTENENDOLAPOSIZIONEDIAPPOGGIODELLAVITEREGO
)4! GIARELAVITEREGOLATA SULLARRESTONELBRACCIO )4! LATA
REGISTRARELAVITECONTRAPPOSTODELLATOOPPSTOCILINDRO
lNOALSUOAPPOGGIOSULLARRESTODELBRACCIO
$IEVOLLSTAENDIGE,ENKUNGDURCHFUERENBISDIEEIN )NDIESER0OSITIONDEREINGESTELLEN3CRAUBEDIEENT

$ GESTELLTE3CHRAUBEANDER!RMSPERREANGLIET $ GEGENSETZTE3CHRAUBEANDER:YLIDERSEITEEINSTELLEN
BISSIEANDER!RMSPERREANLIEGT
C %FECTUARUNDESVIOCOMPLETOHASTAHACERAPOYARLOS
D -ANTENIENDOLAPOSICIONDEAPOYODELTORNILLOREG
%30 TORNILLOSREGULADASOBREELPARODELEJE %30 ULADOREGISTRARELTORNILLOCONTRAPUESTODELLADO
OPUESTOCILINDROHASTASUAPOYESOBREELPARODEL
EJE
%XáCUTERUNBRAQUAGECOMPLETJUSQUÜÂLABUTEEDE %NCONSERVANTLAPOSITIONDAPPUIDELAVISRáGLáE
& LAVISR£GL£ESURLARRETDUBRAS
& R£GLERLAVISOPPOS£DUCYLINDREJUSQUÜSABUTEESUR
LARR£TDUBRAS
)-0/24!.4%,EVITIDEVONOAPPOGGIARECONTEMPO
)4! RANEAMENTESUIRISPETTIVIARRESTI
7)#(4)'$IE3CHRAUBENUNMUESSENGLEICHZEITIG
$ ANDENENTSPRECHENDEN3PERRENANGLIEGEN
E
)-0/24!.4%,OSTORNILLOSDEBEDEAPOYARSECON
%30 TEMPORANEAMENTESOBRELARESPCTIVASPARADAS
)-0/24!.4,ESVISDOIVENTSAPPUYERSIMULTANE
& MENTÜLEURSBUT£ESCORRESPONDANTES
67
HOW TO DISASSEMBLE THE STEERING CYLINDER - SMONTAGGIO CILINDRO DI STERZATURA - LENKZYLINDER ABMONTIEREN -
DESMONTAJE CILINDRO DE DIRECCION - DEMONTAGE DU CYLINDRE DE BRAQUAGE
2
3
F1240354 F1240355
GB a GB b
Remove the snap ring (1) from the cylinder head (2). With the help of a plastic hammer, push the head (2) inside the
cylinder (3).
NOTE. The head should line up with the edge of the cylinder.
5
3
2
F1240356 F1240357
GB c GB d
With the help of a drift, apply pressure to the stop ring (4) that is Hammer the piston (5) on the rear of the head (2) using a plastic
placed inside the cylinder (3) and extract the ring using a hammer.
screwdriver. Continue hammering until the head (2) is ejected from the cylinder
(3).
A F1240358
GB e GB f
Disassemble the cylinder unit (3) by extracting first the head (2), Remove all seals, anti-extrusion rings and scraper rings from head
then the piston (5). (2), cylinder (3) and piston (5).
CAUTION! Note down the assembly side of the piston (5). The NOTE. 1 - All seals must be replaced every time the unit is
bevelled part "A" of the piston is oriented towards the head (2). disassembled. 2 - Particular attention must be paid not to damage
the seats of both seals and piston slide.
68
Rimuovere l'anello elastico (1) di ritegno della testata (2). Con leggeri colpi di un mazzuolo in materiale plastico,
ITA ITA spingere la testata (2) verso l'interno del cilindro (3).
NOTA. Inserire la testata fino a filo del cilindro.
Kolbenring (1) vom Kopf (2) abnehmen. Mit einem Gummihammer den Kopf (2) leicht zum
D D Zylinder (3) hin schlagen.
BEMERKUNG. Den Kopf bis an den Zylinderrand
hinein schlagen.
a b
Remover el anillo elaÂstico (1) de retencioÂn de la culata (2). Con ligeros golpes de martillo de material plaÂstico,
ESP ESP empujar la culata (2) dentro del cilindro (3).
NOTA. Introducir la culata hasta que quede a ras del
cilindro.
Enlever l'anneau eÂlastique (1) de retenue de la Avec de leÂgers coups de maillet en matieÁre plastique,
F culasse (2). F pousser la culasse (2) aÁ l'inteÂrieur du cylindre (3).
NOTE. Introduire la culasse jusqu'au bord du cylindre.
Utilizzando un punteruolo, forzare l'anello di arresto Con un mazzuolo in materiale plastico, mandare in
ITA (4) interno al cilindro (3) ed estrarlo utilizzando un ITA battuta il pistone (5) a ridosso della testata (2).
cacciavite. Proseguire fino all'espulsione della testata (2) dal
cilindro (3).
Mit einem DuÈbel den Sprengring (4) in den Zylinder (3) Mit einem Gummihammer den Kolben (5) bis zum
D ausdruÈcken und mit einem Schraubenzieher heraus- D Anschlag des Kopfes (2) bringen.
nehmen. Weiter schlagen, bis der Kopf (2) aus dem Zylinder (3)
geschlagen worden ist.
c d
Utilizando un punzoÂn, forzar el anillo de tope (4) Con un martillo de material plaÂstico, mandar a tope el
ESP dentro del cilindro (3) y extraerlo utilizando un ESP pistoÂn (5) detraÂs de la culata (2).
destornillador. Continuar hasta la expulsioÂn de la culata (2) del
cilindro (3).
A l'aide d'un pointeau forcer l'anneau de buteÂe (4) aÁ A l'aide d'un maillet en matieÁre plastique, envoyer en
F l'inteÂrieur du cylindre (3), extraire ce dernier aÁ l'aide F buteÂe le piston (5) aÁ l'abri de la culasse (2).
d'un tournevis. Continuer jusqu'aÁ l'eÂjection de la culasse (2) hors du
cylindre (3).
Scomporre il gruppo cilindro (3) estraendo nell'ordine Rimuovere dalla testata (2), dal cilindro (3) e dal
ITA la testata (2) ed il pistone (5). ITA pistone (5) tutte le guarnizioni, gli anelli antiestrusione
ATTENZIONE! Annotare il senso di montaggio del e gli anelli raschiatori.
pistone che ha la parte smussata "A" orientata verso la testata (2). NOTA. 1 - Tutte le tenute devono essere sostituite ad ogni
smontaggio. 2 - Prestare molta attenzione per non rovinare le sedi
delle guarnizioni e dello scorrimento del pistone.
Das Zylinderaggregat (3) zerlegen; dazu der Reihen- Vom Kopf (2), vom Zylinder (3) und vom Kolben (5) alle
D folge nach den Kopf (2) und den Kolben (5) abnehmen. D Dichtungen, Halteringe und Abschaber wegnehmen.
ACHTUNG! Montagerichtung des Kolbens beachten: BEMERKUNG. 1 - Alle Dichtungen muÈssen jedesmal
das abgerundete Teil "A" muû zum Kopf (2) gerichtet sein. gewechselt werden, wenn der Zylinder zerlegt wird. 2 - Sehr
e f vorsichtig vorgehen, um die Dichtungs- und Kolbensitze nicht zu
beschaÈdigen.
Descomponer el grupo cilindro (3) extrayendo en su Remover de la culata (2) del cilindro (3) y del pistoÂn (5)
ESP orden la culata (2) y el pistoÂn 5. ESP todas las juntas, los anillos antiextrusioÂn y los anillos
ATENCION! Anotar el sentido de montaje del piston raspadores.
que tiena la parte descantillada "A" orientada hacia culata (2). NOTA. 1 - Todas las estanqueidades tienen que ser sustituidas a
cada desmontaje. 2 - Tener mucho cuidado a fin de no danÄar los
alojamientos de las juntas y del deslizamiento del pistoÂn.
DeÂcomposer le groupe cylindre (3) en extrayant dans Enlever de la culasse (2), du cylindre (3) et du piston
F l'ordre d'abord la culasse (2), puis le piston (5). F (5), toutes les garnitures, anneaux anti-extrusion et les
ATTENTION! Prendre note du sens de montage du anneaux racleurs.
piston, la partie arrondie "A" tourneÂe vers la culasse (2). NOTE. 1 - Toutes les eÂtancheÂiteÂs doivent eÃtre remplaceÂes aÁ
chaque deÂmontage. 2 - Faire treÁs attention aÁ ne pas abõÃmer les
logements des garnitures et de coulissement du piston.
69
HOW TO ASSEMBLE THE STEERING CYLINDER - ASSEMBLAGGIO CILINDRO DI STERZATURA - LENKZYLINDER MONTIEREN - MONTAJE
CILINDRO DE DIRECCION - ASSEMBLAGE DU CYLINDRE DE BRAQUAGE
6 7 8 8 7 6
D1240031 D1240032
GB a GB b
After applying grease, install the sealing ring (6) of the shaft, the After applying grease, install the sealing ring (6) of the shaft, the
anti-extrusion ring (7) and the scraper ring (8) inside the cylinder anti-extrusion ring (7) and the scraper ring (8) in the head (2).
(3). CAUTION! Thoroughly check that positioning of the anti-extrusion
CAUTION! Thoroughly check that positioning of the anti-extrusion (7) ring is correct.
ring (7) is correct.
9 11
13 10
12 5
D1240033 D1240034
GB c GB d
Fit the seal (9) onto the outside of the head (2). Prepare the piston (5) by fitting it with the guide ring (10), the
CAUTION! magnetic ring (11), the O-ring (12) and the seal (13).
1 - In order to facilitate assembly, apply grease to the outer surface CAUTION!
of the piston. 1 - In order to facilitate assembly, apply grease.
2 - Do not roll the seal (9) up. 2 - If a centring sensor is not fitted, then the magnetic ring (11)
should be replaced by another guide ring (10).
T18
5
5
3
F1240359 F1240360
GB e GB f
Apply tool T18 to the shaft on the opposite side of the head (2) and Push the piston (5) into the cylinder for 100 mm using a plastic
centre it on the cylinder (3) so that it fits into the piston (5). hammer.
NOTE. Apply a little grease to seals and cylinder.
70
Lubrificare con grasso ed installare nel cilindro (3) Lubrificare con grasso ed installare nella testata (2)
ITA l'anello di tenuta (6) dello stelo, l'anello antiestrusione ITA l'anello di tenuta (6) dello stelo, l'anello antiestrusione
(7) e l'anello raschiatore (8). (7) e l'anello raschiatore (8).
ATTENZIONE! Controllare attentamente il posizionamento dell'a- ATTENZIONE! Controllare attentamente il posizionamento dell'a-
nello antiestrusione (7). nello antiestrusione (7).
Mit Fett die Dichtung (6) des Schaftes, den Haltering Mit Fett die Dichtung (6) des Schaftes, den Haltering
D (7) und den Abschaber (8) schmieren und in den D (7) und den Abschaber (8) schmieren und in den Kopf
Zylinder (3) montieren. (2) montieren.
ACHTUNG! SorgfaÈltig die Position des Halterings (7) kontrollieren. ACHTUNG! SorgfaÈltig die Position des Halterings (7) kontrollieren.
a b
Lubricar con grasa e instalar en el cilindro (3) el Lubricar con grasa e instalar en la culata (2) el
ESP segmento de compresioÂn (6) del vaÂstago, el anillo ESP segmento de compresioÂn (6), el anillo antiextrusioÂn (7)
antiextrusioÂn (7) y el anillo raspador (8). y el anillo raspador (8).
CUIDADO! Controlar atentamente el posicionamiento del anillo CUIDADO! Controlar atentamente el posicionamiento del anillo
antiextrusioÂn (7). antiextrusioÂn (7).
Lubrifier avec du gras et installer dans le cylindre (3) la Lubrifier avec du gras et installer dans le cylindre (2) la
F bague d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (6) de la tige, l'anneau anti- F bague d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (6) de la tige, l'anneau anti-
extrusion (7) et l'anneau racleur (8). extrusion (7) et l'anneau racleur (8).
ATTENTION! ControÃler attentivement le positionnement de l'an- ATTENTION! ControÃler attentivement le positionnement de l'an-
neau anti-extrusion (7). neau anti-extrusion (7).
Montare all'esterno della testata (2) la guarnizione (9). Preparare il pistone (5) montando l'anello di guida (10),
ITA ITA l'anello magnetico (11), l'OR (12) e la guarnizione (13).
ATTENZIONE!
1 - Per facilitare il montaggio, lubrificare con grasso la ATTENZIONE! 1 - Per facilitare il montaggio, lubrificare con grasso.
superficie esterna del pistone. 2 - Se non eÁ previsto il sensore di centratura, l'anello magnetico
2 - Non arrotolare la guarnizione (9). (11) eÁ sostituito con un secondo anello di guida (10).
Auûen am Kopf (2) die Dichtung (9) montieren. Den Kolben (5) mit dem FuÈhrungsring (10), dem
D D magnetischen Ring (11), den O-Ring (12) und der
ACHTUNG!
1 - Um die Montage zu erleichtern, die aÈuûere Dichtung (13) vorbereiten.
KolbenflaÈche mit Fett schmieren. ACHTUNG! 1 - Um die Montage zu erleichtern, mit Fett schmieren.
c 2 - Die Dichtung (9) nicht wickeln. d 2 - Wenn kein Zentrierungssensor vorgesehen ist, ist der magne-
tische Ring (11) mit einem zweiten FuÈhrungsring (10) ersetzt.
Montar fuera de la culata (2) la junta (9). Preparar el pistoÂn (5) montando el anillo de guõÂa (10),
ESP ESP el anillo de imaÂn (11), el OR (12) y la junta (13).
CUIDADO!
1 - Para facilitar el montaje, lubricar con grasa la CUIDADO!1 - Para facilitar el montaje, lubricar con
superficie exterior del pistoÂn. grasa.
2 - No enrollar la junta (9). 2 - Si no ha sido previsto el sensor de centraje, el anillo de imaÂn
(11) es sustituido por un segundo anillo de guõÂa (10).
Monter aÁ l'exteÂrieur de la culasse (2) la garniture (9). PreÂparer le piston (5) en montant l'anneau de guidage
F F (10), l'anneau magneÂtique (11), la OR (12) et la
ATTENTION!
1 - Pour rendre plus aiseÂ le montage, lubrifier avec du garniture (13).
gras la surface externe du piston. ATTENTION! 1 - Pour rendre plus aiseÂ le montage, lubrifier avec du
2 - Ne pas enrouler les garnitures (9). gras. 2 - Si le capteur de centrage n'est pas preÂvu, l'anneau
magneÂtique (11) est remplaceÂ par un second anneau de guidage (10).
Applicare l'attrezzo T18 sullo stelo lato opposto Con un mazzuolo in materiale plastico, inserire il
ITA testata (2) e centrarlo nel cilindro (3) fino ad imboccare ITA pistone (5) nel cilindro per circa 100 mm.
il pistone (5).
NOTA. Lubrificare leggermente con grasso le guarnizioni ed il
cilindro.
Das Werkzeug T18 auf den Schaft an der dem Kopf (2) Mit einem Gummihammer, den Kolben (5) in den
D entgegengesetzten Seite anbringen und auf den D Zylinder 100 mm lang schlagen.
Zylinder (3) zentrieren, bis es auf dem Kolben (5) sitzt.
BEMERKUNG. Die Dichtungen und den Zylinder leicht mit Fett
e schmieren. f
Aplicar la herramienta T18 sobre el vastago lado Con un martillo de material plaÂstico, introducir el
ESP opuesto culata (2) y centrarlo en el cilindro (3) hasta ESP pistoÂn (5) en el cilindro unos 100 mm.
entrar en el piston. (5).
NOTA. Lubrificar ligermente con grasa las juntas y el cilindro.
Appliquer l'outil T18 sur la tige du coÃteÂ opposeÂ aÁ la A l'aide d'un maillet en matieÁre plastique, introduire le
F culasse (2) et centrer celui-ci dans le cylindre (3) F piston (5) d'environ 100 mm dans le cylindre.
jusqu'aÁ engager le piston (5).
NOTE. Lubrifier leÂgeÁrement les garnitures et le cylindre avec du
gras.
71
HOW TO ASSEMBLE THE STEERING CYLINDER - ASSEMBLAGGIO CILINDRO DI STERZATURA - LENKZYLINDER MONTIEREN -
MONTAJE CILINDRO DE DIRECCION - ASSEMBLAGE DU CYLINDRE DE BRAQUAGE
T18 2
T18
5
2 5
F1240361 F1240362
GB a GB b
Remove tool T18 and apply it to the opposite side of the piston (5). Apply grease to head (2) seals, fit the head onto the piston and
push it into the cylinder (3) using a plastic hammer.
NOTE. Insert the head as to line it up with the edge of the cylinder.
2
3
F1240363 F1240364
GB c GB d
Insert the stop ring (4) ensuring that it fits into the seat of the Apply pressure to the head using two screwdrivers or levers until
cylinder (3). the head is fastened onto the stop ring (4).
F1240354
GB e
Fit the snap ring (1) on the head (2).
CAUTION! Make sure that the snap ring (1) is securely fastened in
its seat.
If necessary, force it into its seat using a drift and a hammer.
72
Rimuovere l'attrezzo T18 ed applicarlo sul lato Lubrificare con grasso le guarnizioni della testata (2),
ITA opposto del pistone (5). ITA infilarla sul pistone e, con un mazzuolo in materiale
plastico, inserirla nel cilindro (3).
NOTA. Inserire la testata fino a filo del cilindro.
Werkzeug T18 abnehmen und an der anderen Die Dichtungen des Kopfes (2) mit Fett schmieren.
D Kolbenseite (5) anbringen. D Den Kopf auf den Kolben schieben und mit einem
Gummihammer in den Zylinder (3) schlagen.
BEMERKUNG. Den Kopf bis zum Zylinderrand hinein schlagen.
a b
Remover la herramienta T18 y aplicarla en el lado Lubricar con grasa las juntas de la culata (2),
ESP opuesto del pistoÂn (5). ESP introducirla en el pistoÂn y, utilizando un martillo de
material plaÂstico, introducirla en el cilindro (3).
NOTA. Introducir la culata hasta nivel del cilindro.
Enlever l'outil T18 et appliquer ce dernier sur le coÃteÂ Lubrifier avec du gras les garnitures de la culasse (2).
F opposeÂ du piston (5). F Enfiler celle-ci sur le piston, et aÁ l'aide d'un maillet en
matieÁre plastique, introduire dans le cylindre (3).
NOTE. Introduire la culasse jusqu'au bord du cylindre.
Inserire l'anello di arresto (4) assicurandosi che si Utilizzando due cacciaviti o leve, forzare la testata fino
ITA assesti nella sede del cilindro (3). ITA alla battuta sull'anello di arresto (4).
Den Haltering (4) einsetzen und kontrollieren, ob er Mit zwei Schraubenzieher oder Hebeln, den Kopf bis
D richtig im Sitz des Zylinders (3) sitzt. D zum Anschlag des Sprengrings (4) schieben.
c d
Introducir el anillo de tope (4) aseguraÂndose de que se Utilizando dos destornilladores o palancas, forzar la
ESP ajuste en el alojamiento del cilindro (3). ESP culata hasta el tope en el anillo de tope (4).
Introduire l'anneau de buteÂe (4) en s'assurant qu'il A l'aide de deux tournevis ou leviers, envoyer en buteÂe
F s'ajuste bien dans le logement du cylindre (3). F la teÃte sur l'anneau de buteÂe (4).
Montare l'anello elastico (1) di ritegno della testata (2).

ITA
ATTENZIONE! Assicurarsi che l'anello elastico (1) sia
impegnato a fondo nella sede.
Se necessario, forzarlo in sede con un punteruolo ed
un martello.
Den Kolbenring (1) des Kopfes (2) montieren.

D
ACHTUNG! Kontrollieren ob der Kolbenring (1) in
seinem Sitz richtig sitzt.
Wenn noÈtig, in seinen Sitz mit einem DuÈbel und einen
e Hammer schlagen.
Montar el anillo elaÂstico (1) de retencioÂn de la culata

ESP (2).
CUIDADO! Asegurarse de que el anillo elaÂstico (1)
estaÂ colocado a fondo en la sede.
Si fuera necesario, forzarlo en el alojamiento utilizan-
do un punzoÂn y un martillo.
Monter l'anneau eÂlastique (1) de retenue de la culasse

F (2).
ATTENTION! S'assurer que l'anneau eÂlastique (1) soit
engageÂ aÁ fond dans le logement.
Si besoin, forcer dans le logement aÁ l'aide d'un poincËon et d'un
marteau.
73
HOW TO REMOVE AND DISASSEMBLE THE DIFFERENTIAL UNIT - RIMOZIONE E SMONTAGGIO GRUPPO DIFFERENZIALE - DIFFERENTIAL
ABMONTIEREN UND ZERLEGEN - REMOCION Y DESMONTAJE GRUPO DIFERENCIAL - DEPOSE ET DEMONTAGE DU GROUPE DIFFERENTIEL
REMOVING - RIMOZIONE - ABMONTIEREN - REMOCION - DEPOSE
1
F1240385 F1240478
GB a GB b
Remove the complete arms. Mark the position of the ring nuts (1). Remove the fittin screws (3)
For details, see «CHECKING WEAR AND REPLACING THE from the ring nuts (1).
BRAKING DISKS».
1 T13
F1240479 F1240480
GB c GB d
Uniformly heat the ring nuts (1) up to a temperature of 80ë C. Apply tool T13 and remove the ring nuts.
NOTE. Accurately clean the threaded portions on ring nuts of body
and cover.
4 5 6
5
4
F1240481 F1240482
GB e GB f
Remove the fittin screws (4) from the middle cover (5). Insert a screw-driver in the opposing slots then force and remove
the middle cover (5) and the complete differential unit (6).
NOTE. Support the pieces using a rod.
74
Rimuovere i bracci completi. Contrassegnare la posizione delle ghiere (1).
ITA Per i dettagli, vedere «CONTROLLO USURA E ITA Rimuovere le viti (3) di ritegno delle ghiere (1).
SOSTITUZIONE DISCHI FRENO».
Die kompletten Arme abmontieren. Position der Nutmutter (1) markieren. Schrauben (3)
D Siehe «VERSCHLEISS KONTROLLIEREN UND D der Nutmutter (1) abschrauben.
BREMSSCHEIBEN AUSWECHSELN».
a b
Remover los brazos completos. Marcar la posicioÂn de las virolas (1).
ESP Para los detalles, veÂase «CONTROL DEL DESGASTE ESP Remover los tornillos (3) de retencioÂn de las virolas (1).
Y SUSTITUCION DE LOS DISCOS DEL FRENO».
DeÂposer les bras complets. Marquer la position des colliers de serrage (1). Enlever
F Pour de plus amples deÂ tails voir «CONTROLE F les vis (3) de fixation des colliers de serrage (1).
D'USURE ET SUBSTITUTION DES DISQUES DE
FREINAGE».
Scaldare le ghiere (1) in modo uniforme fino ad una Applicare l'attrezzo T13 ed asportare le ghiere.
ITA temperatura di circa 80ëC. ITA
NOTA. Pulire accuratamente le filettature delle ghiere
del corpo e del coperchio.
Nutmutter (1) gleichmaÈûig auf ca. 80ëC erhitzen. Werkzeug T13 anbringen und Nutmutter entfernen.
D D
BEMERKUNG. SorgfaÈltig das Gewinde der Nutmutter,
des KoÈrpers und des Deckels reinigen.
c d
Calentar las virolas (1) de manera uniforme hasta un Aplicar la herramienta T13 y sacar las virolas.
ESP temperatura de unos 80ëC. ESP
NOTA. limpiar con cuidado las roscas de las virolas
del cuerpo y de la tapa.
Chauffer les colliers de serrage (1) de facËon uniforme Appliquer l'outil T13 et enlever les anneaux de
F jusqu'aÁ une tempeÂrature d'environ 80ëC. F fixation.
NOTE. Nettoyer soigneusement le filetage des an-
neaux de fixation, du corps et du couvercle.
Asportare le viti (4) di ritegno del coperchio intermedio Forzare con un cacciavite introdotto nei vani contrap-
ITA (5). ITA posti e rimuovere il coperchio intermedio (5) ed il
gruppo differenziale completo (6).
NOTA. Sostenere i pezzi con un'asta.
Schrauben (4) des mittleren Deckels (5) abschrauben. Einen Schraubenzieher in die HohlraÈume stecken und
D D anheben, um den mittleren Deckel (5) und das
komplette Differentialaggregat (6) zu entfernen.
BEMERKUNG. Die Teile mit einem Stab halten.
e f
Sacar los tornillos (4) de retencioÂn de la tapa Forzar utilizando un destornillador introducido en los
ESP intermedia (5). ESP compartimentos contrapuestos y remover la tapa
intermedia (5) y el grupo diferencial completo (6).
NOTA. Sostener las piezas utilizando una varilla.
Enlever les vis (4) de fixation du couvercle intermeÂ- Forcer aÁ l'aide d'un tournevis, introduit dans les creux
F diaire (5). F interposeÂs, enlever le couvercle intermeÂdiaire (5) et le
groupe diffeÂrentiel complet (6).
NOTE. Soutenir les pieÁces avec une tige.
75
2 8 10
7
5 9
F1240483 F1240484
GB a GB b
If the bearings need replacing, extract the external thrust blocks of Remove the top plug (10).
the bearings (7) and (8) from middle cover (5) and central body (2).
NOTE. Accurately check the O-ring (9).
DISASSEMBLING - SMONTAGGIO - ZERLEGEN - DESMONTAJE - DESASSEMBLAGE
11
12 12
F1240485 F1240486
GB c GB d
Remove the fittin screws (11) from the crown (12). If the bearing need replacing, extract the bearing (7) and remove
the crown (12).
13
14
8
15
F1240487 F1240488
GB e GB f
Remove the shim washer (13) and the planetary gear (14). If the bearing need replacing, extract the bearing (8) from the
differential carrier (15).
76
Se si devono sostituire i cuscinetti, estrarre dal Rimuovere il tappo superiore (10).
ITA coperchio intermedio (5) e dal corpo centrale (2) le ITA
NOTA. Il tappo deve essere sostituito ad ogni
ralle esterne dei cuscinetti (7) e (8). rimozione.
NOTA. Controllare attentamente l'anello OR (9).
Wenn Lager ausgewechselt werden muÈssen, vom Oberer Stopfen (10) entfernen.
D mittleren Deckel (5) und vom zentralen KoÈrper (2) die D
aÈuûeren Scheiben der Lager (7) und (8) entfernen.
BEMERKUNG. O-Ring (9) sorgfaÈltig kontrollieren.
a b
Si hay que sustituir los cojinetes, extraer de la tapa Remover el tapoÂn superior (10).
ESP intermedia (5) y del cuerpo central (2) las ranguas ESP
exteriores (7) y (8) de los cojinetes.
NOTA. Controlar atentamente el anillo OR (9).
Si on doit remplacer les paliers, extraire du couvercle Enlever le bouchon supeÂrieur (10).
F intermeÂdiaire (5) et du corps central (2), les crapau- F
dines externes des paliers (7) et (8).
NOTE. ControÃler attentivement la garniture OR (9).
Rimuovere le viti (11) di ritegno della corona (12). Se si deve sostituire, estrarre il cuscinetto (7) e
ITA ITA rimuovere la corona (12).
Die Schrauben (11) des Kranzes (12) abschrauben. Falls das Lager ausgewechselt werden muû, Lager (7)
D D heraus nehmen und Kranz (12) entfernen.
c d
Remover los tornillos (11) de retencioÂn de la corona Si hay que sustituirlo, extraer el cojinete (7) y remover
ESP (12). ESP la corona (12).
Enlever les vis (11) de fixation de la couronne (12). Extraire le palier (7) et deÂposer la couronne (12) en cas
F F que le premier doit eÃtre remplaceÂ.
Rimuovere la rondella di rasamento (13) e l'ingranag- Se si deve sostituire, estrarre il cuscinetto (8) dalla
ITA gio planetario (14). ITA scatola differenziale (15).
Zwischenlegscheibe (13) und Planetenrad (14) entfer- Wenn das Lager ausgewechselt werden muû, Lager
D nen. D (8) aus dem DifferentialgehaÈuse (15) nehmen.
e f
Remover la arandela de espesor (13) y el engranaje Si hay que sustituirlo, extraer el cojinete (8) de la caja
ESP planetario (14). ESP del diferencial (15).
Enlever la rondelle de rasage (13) et l'engrenage Extraire le palier (8) du boõÃtier diffeÂrentiel (15) en cas
F planeÂtaire (14). F que le premier doit eÃtre remplaceÂ.
77
T14
18 18
16 17
F1240489 F1240490
GB a GB b
Remove the snap rings (16) from the two pins (17) of the planet Insert tool T14 between the planet wheel gears (18).
wheel gears (18).
T16B
T15
T16B
17
15 15
17
F1240491 F1240492
GB c GB d
Force tool T14 in-between the planet wheel gears (18) using two Place the differential carrier (15) under a press, position bush T15
pin-drivers. and insert gudgeon T16A. Press T16A pin to limit position.
CAUTION! Make sure that tool T14 is perfectly lined up with the
pins (17) when locked.
T16A
T15
15
F1240493 F1240491
GB e GB f
Remove gudgeon T16A and bush T15. Remove tool T14 together with the pin (17) of the planet wheel.
NOTE. In this condition the tool T14 contains pin (17).
78
Rimuovere gli anelli elastici (16) dai perni (17) degli Inserire tra gli ingranaggi satelliti (18) l'attrezzo T14.
ITA ingranaggi satelliti (18). ITA
Kolbenringe (16) von den Stiften (17) der PlantenraÈder Zwischen den PlanetenraÈdern (18) das Werkzeug T14
D (18) entfernen. D einsetzen.
a b
Remover los anillos elaÂsticos (16) de los dos pernos Introducir entre los engranajes sateÂlites (18) la
ESP (17) de los engranajes sateÂlites (18). ESP herramienta T14.
Enlever les anneaux eÂlastiques (16) des tourillons (17) Introduire entre les engrenages satellites (18) l'outil
F des engrenages satellites (18). F T14.
Operando con due cacciaspine, forzare l'attrezzo T14 Sistemare il corpo differenziale (15) sotto una pressa,
ITA tra gli ingranaggi satelliti (18). ITA posizionare la boccola T15 ed inserire lo spinotto
ATTENZIONE! Controllare attentamente che l'attrez- T16A. Pressare lo spinotto T16A fino a fondo corsa.
zo T14 rimanga allineato ai perni (17) quando eÁ bloccato.
Mit zwei DuÈbeln, das Werkzeug T14 zwischen den Das DifferentialgehaÈuse (15) unter eine Presse legen
D PlanetenraÈdern (18) fest einsetzen. D und die Buchse T15 positionieren; Bolzen T16A
ACHTUNG: SorgfaÈltig darauf achten, daû das blok- einsetzen. DruÈcken, bis der Bolzen T16A.
kierte Werkzeug T14 mit den Stiften (17) fluchtgerecht ist.
c d
Trabajando con dos extractores de clavijas, forzar la Colocar la caja del diferencial (15) debajo de una
ESP herramienta T14 entre los engranajes sateÂlite (18). ESP prensa; posicionar el casquillo T15 e introducir la
CUIDADO! Controlar atentamente que la herramienta cruceta T16A. Presionar la cruceta T16A.
T14 quede alineada con los pernos (17) cuando estaÂ bloqueada.
En oeuvrant avec deux chasse-goupilles, forcer l'outil Ajuster le boõÃtier diffeÂrentiel (15) sous la presse, placer
F T14 entre les engrenages satellites (18). F la bague T15 et introduire le goujon T16A.
ATTENTION! ControÃler attentivement si l'outil T14 Presser le goujon T16A.
reste aligneÂ aux tourillons (17) quand il est bloqueÂ.
Asportare lo spinotto T16A e la bussola T15. Rimuovere l'attrezzo T14 e con esso il perno (17) del
ITA ITA satellite.
NOTA. In questa condizione, il perno (17) eÁ contenuto
nell'attrezzo T14.
Bolzen T16A und die Buchse T15 abnehmen. Das Werkzeug T14 und damit den Stift (17) des
D D Planetenrades abnehmen.
BEMERKUNG. In diesem Zustand, ist der Stift (17) im
Werkzeug T14 enthalten.
e f
Sacar la cruceta T16A y el manguito T15. Remover la herramienta T14 y con ella el perno (17)
ESP ESP del sateÂlite.
NOTA. En esta condicioÂn el perno (17) se encuentra
en la herramienta T14.
Enlever le goujon T16A et la douille T15. Enlever l'outil T14 et, avec ce dernier, le tourillon (17)
F F du satellite.
NOTE. Dans cette condition le tourillon (17) se trouve
dans l'outil T14.
79
T14 18 14
13
15
18
F1240490 F1240494
GB a GB b
Leave the released planetary gear in position and again lock tool Remove tool T14 and remove the last two planet wheel gears (18),
T14. the 2nd differential unit gear (14) and the relative shim washer (13)
Repeat the operations for the extraction of the pin of the 2nd planet from the differential carrier.
wheel (17).
Repeat the operations for all other pins.
4
3 5 16
1
20
9 11
17
19
20
17 16
19
18
13
GB c GB d
14
7 13
15 10
12 18 8
2
19
17
20 19
16
17
20
6
16
3
1
GB e GB f
D1240036
80
Lasciando in posizione l'ingranaggio satellite che si eÁ Rimuovere l'attrezzo T14 ed asportare dal corpo
ITA liberato, bloccare nuovamente l'attrezzo T14. ITA differenziale gli ultimi due ingranaggi satelliti (18), il
Ripetere le operazioni di estrazione del perno del 2ë ingranaggio planetario (14) e la relativa rondella di
secondo perno satellite (17). rasamento (13).
Ripetere le operazioni per gli altri perni.
Das nun freie Planetenrad in seiner Position lassen Werkzeug T14 entfernen und vom DifferentialgehaÈuse
D und das Werkzeug T14 wieder blockieren. D die letzten beiden PlanetenraÈder (18), das 2. Differen-
Die VorgaÈnge fuÈr das Herausnehmen des Stiftes des tialrad (14) und die Zwischenlegscheibe (13) abneh-
2. Planetenrades (17) wiederholen. men.
a Die VorgaÈnge auch fuÈr die anderen Stifte wiederholen. b
Dejando en posicioÂn el engranaje sateÂlite que ha Remover la herramienta T14 y sacar de la caja del
ESP quedado libre, bloquear otra vez la herramienta T14. ESP diferencial los uÂltimos dos engranajes sateÂlite (18), el
Repetir las operaciones de extraccioÂn del perno del 2ë engranaje diferencial (14) y la arandela de espesor
segundo perno sateÂlite (17). correspondiente (13).
Repetir las operaciones con los demaÂs pernos.
En maintenant la position de l'engrenage satellite Enlever l'outil T14 et extraire du boõÃtier diffeÂrentiel les
F deÂgageÂ, bloquer de nouveau l'outil T14. F deux derniers engrenages satellites (18), le 2ë
ReÂpeÂter les opeÂrations d'extraction du tourillon du 2ë engrenage du diffeÂrentiel (14) et la relative rondelle
satellite (17). de rasage (13).
ReÂpeÂter les opeÂrations pour les autres tourillons.
81
HOW TO ASSEMBLE AND INSTALL THE DIFFERENTIAL UNIT - ASSEMBLAGGIO ED INSTALLAZIONE GRUPPO DIFFERENZIALE -
DIFFERENTIALAGGREGAT MONTIEREN UND INSTALLIEREN - MONTAJE E INSTALACION DEL GRUPO DIFERENCIAL -
ASSEMBLAGE ET INSTALLATION DU GROUPE DIFFERENTIEL
ASSEMBLING - ASSEMBLAGGIO - MONTIEREN - MONTAJE - MONTAGE
18
14
19
13
15 T16C
F1240494 F1240495
GB a GB b
Insert the shim washer (13) and the planetary gear (14) in the Position the shim washer (19) and the first planet wheel gear (18).
differential carrier (15). Hold them in position using bar T16C.
18 T14
T16A
19 15
T16C
T16C
F1240496 F1240497
GB c GB d
With the help of gudgeon T16A, position the second planet wheel Insert tool T14 between the two planetary gears (18). Line up the
gear (18) and the relative shim washer (19). entire unit by pushing bar T16C all the way down until gudgeon
T16A is ejected.
T14 20 17
18 18
F1240490 F1240498
GB e GB f
Lock tool T14 behind the planet wheel gears (18). Fit the snap rings (20) onto the pins (17).
After locking, remove bar T16C.
82
Inserire nel corpo differenziale (15), la rondella di Posizionare la rondella di rasamento (19), il primo
ITA rasamento (13) e l'ingranaggio planetario (14). ITA ingranaggio satellite (18).
Tenerli in posizione con la barra T16C.
Das DifferentialgehaÈuse (15), die Zwischenlegscheibe Die Zwischenlegscheibe (19) und das erste Planeten-
D (13) und das Planetenrad (14) einsetzen. D rad (18) positionieren.
Mit dem Stab T16C diese in ihrer Position halten.
a b
Introducir en la caja del diferencial (15) la arandela de Posicionar la arandela de espesor (19), el primer
ESP espesor (13) y el engranaje planetario (14). ESP engranaje sateÂlite (18).
Mantenerlos en posicioÂn por medio de la barra T16C.
Introduire, dans le boõÃtier du diffeÂrentiel (15), la Placer la rondelle de rasage (19) et le premier
F rondelle de rasage (13) et l'engrenage planeÂtaire (14). F engrenage satellite (18).
Maintenir ceux-ci en place aÁ l'aide de la barre T16C.
Utilizzando lo spinotto T16A, posizionare il secondo Inserire tra i due ingranaggi satelliti (18) l'attrezzo T14.
ITA ingranaggio satellite (18) e la relativa rondella di ITA Allineare tutto il gruppo inserendo a fondo la barra
rasamento (19). T16C fino ad espellere lo spinotto T16A.
Mit dem Bolzen T16A das zweite Planetenrad (18) und Zwischen den beiden PlanetenraÈder (18) das Werk-
D die entsprechende Zwischenlegscheibe (19) positio- D zeug T14 einsetzen.
nieren. Das gesamte Aggregat fluchten; dazu den Stab T16C
ganz einschieben bis die Bolzen T16A herausgestoûen worden
c d sind.
Utilizando la cruceta T16A, posicionar el segundo Introducir entre los dos engranajes sateÂlite (18) la
ESP engranaje sateÂlite (18) y la arandela de espesor ESP herramienta T14.
correspondiente (19). Alinear todo el grupo introduciendo a fondo la barra
T16C hasta expulsar la cruceta T16A.
A l'aide du goujon T16A placer le second engrenage Introduire entre les deux engrenages satellites (18)
F satellite (18) et sa relative rondelle de rasage (19). F l'outil T14.
Aligner tout le groupe en inseÂrant aÁ fond la barre T16C
jusqu'aÁ eÂjecter le goujon T16A.
Bloccare l'attrezzo T14 a ridosso degli ingranaggi Montare sui perni (17) gli anelli elastici (20).
ITA satelliti (18). ITA
Dopo il bloccaggio, rimuovere la barra T16C.
Werkzeug T14 an den PlanetenraÈdern (18) anliegend, Auf die Stifte (17) die Kolbenringe (20) montieren.
D blockieren. D
Danach Stab T16C entfernen.
e f
Bloquear la herramienta T14 detraÂs de los engranajes Montar en los pernos (17) los anillos elaÂsticos (20).
ESP sateÂlite (18). ESP
DespueÂs de bloquearlos, remover la barra T16C.
Bloquer l'outil T14 aÁ l'abri des engrenages satellites Monter sur les tourillons (17) les anneaux eÂlastiques
F (18). F (20).
ApreÁs avoir bloqueÂ, enlever la barre T16C.
83
T16B 17
17
T15
T15
T16B
17
F1240499 F1240500
GB a GB b
Place the differential carrier (15) under the press, position bush Put gudgeon T16B on top of the planet wheel pin (17).
T15 and insert the planet wheel pin (17).
T16B
T15
T16B
16
17
17
15
F1240492 F1240502
GB c GB d
Press T16B pin all the way down. Remove gudgeon T16B, bush T15 and fit the snap ring (16) on the
pin (17).
CAUTION! Make sure that the snap ring centres the seat and that it
rests on the surface of the differential carrier.
Repeat the operations on the other planet wheel pin or planet
wheel axle.
13
14
12
15
F1240487 F1240504
GB e GB f
Position the second planetary gear (14) in the differential carrier Position the shim washer (13) on the crown (12).
(15). NOTE. In order to hold the shim washer (13) in position, apply
grease to it.
84
Posizionare sotto la pressa il corpo differenziale (15), Sovrapporre al perno satellite (17) lo spinotto T16B.
ITA sistemare la boccola T15 ed inserire il perno satellite ITA
(17).
Unter der Presse das DifferentialgehaÈuse (15) positio- È ber den Planetenradstift (17) den Bolzen T16B
U
D nieren, die Buchse T15 anbringen und den Planeten- D anbringen.
radstift (17) einsetzen.
a b
Posicionar debajo de la prensa la caja del diferencial Superponer al perno sateÂlite (17) la cruceta T16B.
ESP (15), colocar el casquillo T15 e introducir el engranaje ESP
sateÂlite (17).
Placer sous la presse le boõÃtier diffeÂrentiel (15), ajuster Juxtaposer sur le tourillon satellite (17) le goujon
F la bague T15 et introduire le tourillon satellite (17). F T16B.
Pressare lo spinotto T16B a fondo. Rimuovere lo spinotto T16B, la boccola T15 e montare
ITA ITA sul perno (17) l'anello elastico (16).
ATTENZIONE! Assicurarsi che l'anello elastico centri
la sede e che appoggi sul piano del corpo differenziale.
Ripetere le operazioni per l'altro perno satellite e per l'altro asse
satelliti.
Den Stift T16B fest hinein druÈcken. Bolzen T16B, Buchse T15 entfernen und auf den Stift
D D (17) den Kolbenring (16) montieren.
ACHTUNG! Der Kolbenring muû im Sitz zentriert sein
und an der FlaÈche des DifferentialgehaÈuses anliegen.
c d Dieselben VorgaÈnge fuÈr den anderen Planetenradstift und die
andere Planetenradachse wiederholen.
Apretar la cruceta T16B a hondo. Remover la cruceta T16B, el casquillo T15 y montar
ESP ESP en el perno (17) el anillo elaÂstico (16).
CUIDADO! Asegurarse de que el anillo elaÂstico esteÂ
centrado en el alojamiento y que esteÂ apoyado en la superficie de
la caja del diferencial. Repetir las operaciones en el otro perno
sateÂlite y en el otro eje sateÂlite.
Presser aÁ fond sur l'axe T16B. Enlever le goujon T16B de la douille T15 puis monter
F F sur le tourillon (17) l'anneau eÂlastique (16).
ATTENTION! S'assurer que l'anneau eÂlastique est
bien centreÂ dans son logement et qu'il repose sur le plan du boõÃtier
diffeÂrentiel. ReÂpeÂter ces meÃmes opeÂrations pour l'autre tourillon
satellite et pour l'autre axe satellites.
Posizionare il secondo ingranaggio planetario (14) nel Posizionare la rondella di rasamento (13) sulla corona
ITA corpo differenziale (15). ITA (12).
NOTA. Per mantenere la posizione, spalmare la
rondella di rasamento (13) con grasso.
Das zweite Planetenrad (14) im DifferentialkoÈrper (15) Zwischenlegscheibe (13) auf den Kranz (12) positio-
D positionieren. D nieren.
BEMERKUNG. Um die Position zu sichern, die
Zwischenlegscheibe (13) mit Fett einschmieren.
e f
Posicionar el segundo engranaje planetario (14) en el Posicionar la arandela de espesor (13) en la corona
ESP cuerpo del diferencial (15). ESP (12).
NOTA. Para mantener la posicioÂn, pasar grasa en la
arandela de espesor (13).
Placer le second engrenage planeÂtaire (14) dans le Placer la rondelle de rasage (13) sur la couronne (12).
F corps diffeÂrentiel (15). F
NOTE. Pour maintenir cette position, enduire la
rondelle de rasage (13) avec du gras.
85
11 12 T17 8
T17 7
15
F1240505 F1240506
GB a GB b
Position the crown (12) on the differential carrier (15) and lock it Install the bearings (7) and (8) using tool T17.
with screws (11) applied with Loctite 242.
Torque wrench setting for screws: 128±142 Nm
NOTE. Secure the screws using the cross-tightening method.
F1240507
GB c
If the bearings are replaced, insert the external thrust blocks in the
middle cover (5) and in the central body (2).
INSTALLING - INSTALLAZIONE - INSTALLIEREN - INSTALACION - INSTALLATION
1 2 9 4
5 5
4
4
F1240482 F1240852
GB e GB f
Position the differential unit (6) in the central body (2) with the help Lock the middle cover (5) with screws (4).
of a bar and fit the middle cover (5). Torque wrench setting for screw: 23.8±26.2 Nm
NOTE. Thoroughly check the state of the O-ring (9) and make sure
that the cover is fitted with the oil discharge in the lower position.
86
Posizionare la corona (12) sul corpo differenziale (15) Utilizzando l'attrezzo T17, montare i cuscinetti (7) e
ITA e bloccarla con le viti (11) spalmate con Loctite 242. ITA (8).
Coppia di serraggio viti: 128v142 Nm
NOTA. Serrare le viti con il metodo del serraggio incrociato.
Den Kranz (12) auf den DifferentialkoÈrper (15) positio- Mit dem Werkzeug T17 die Lager (7) und (8)
D nieren und mit den Schrauben (11) blockieren. D montieren.
Anzugsmoment der Schrauben: 128v142 Nm
BEMERKUNG. Die Schrauben abwechselnd und entgegengesetzt
a festschrauben. b
Posicionar la corona (12) en el cuerpo del diferencial Utilizando la herramienta T17, montar los cojinetes (7)
ESP (15) y bloquearla con los tornillos (11) pasarles Loctite ESP y (8).
242.
Par de torsioÂn: 128v142 Nm
NOTA. Apretar los tornillos con el meÂtodo de torsioÂn cruzado.
Placer la couronne (12) sur le corps du diffeÂrentiel (15) A l'aide de l'outil T17 monter les paliers (7) et (8).
F puis bloquer avec les vis (11) enduites avec Loctite F
242.
Couple de serrage des vis: 128v142 Nm.
NOTE. Serrer les vis par le biais du mode de serrage croiseÂ.
Se vengono sostituiti i cuscinetti, inserire nel coper-

ITA chio intermedio (5) e nel corpo centrale (2) le ralle
esterne.
Falls die Lager ausgewechselt werden sollen, in den

D mittleren Deckel (5) und in den zentralen KoÈrper (2) die
aÈuûeren Scheiben einsetzen.
c
Si se sustituyen los cojinetes, introducir en la tapa
ESP intermedia (5) y en el cuerpo central (2) las ranguas
exteriores.
Si les paliers doivent eÃtre remplaceÂs, introduire dans

F le couvercle intermeÂdiaire (5) et, dans le corps central
(2), les crapaudines externes.
Utilizzando una barra, posizionare il gruppo differen- Bloccare il coperchio intermedio (5) con le viti (4).
ITA ziale (6) nel corpo centrale (2) e montare il coperchio ITA Coppia di serraggio viti: 23,8v26,2 Nm
intermedio (5).
NOTA. Controllare attentamente la condizione dell'anello OR (9) e
che il coperchio venga montato con lo scarico olio nella posizione
inferiore.
Mit einem Stab das Differentialaggregat (6) in den Mit den Schrauben (4) blockieren den mittleren Deckel
D zentralen KoÈrper (2) positionieren und den mittleren D (5).
Deckel (5) montieren. Anzugsmoment der Schrauben: 23,8v26,2 Nm
BEMERKUNG. SorgfaÈltig den Zustand des O-Ringes (9) kontroll-
e ieren und sicherstellen, daû der Deckel mit dem O È lablaûstopfen f
nach unten gerichtet montiert wird.
Utilizando una barra, posicionar el grupo diferencial Bloqueare la tapa intermedia (5) con los tornillos (4).
ESP (6) en el cuerpo central (2) y montar la tapa intermedia ESP Par de torsioÂn tornillos: 23,8v26,2 Nm
(5).
NOTA. Controlar atentamente las condicioÁnes del segmento OR (9)
y que la tapa venga montada con el descarge aceite en la posicioÁn
inferior.
A l'aide d'une barre, placer le groupe diffeÂrentiel (6) Bloquer le couvercle intermeÂdiaire (5) dernier avec les
F dans le corps central (2) et monter le couvercle F vis (4).
intermeÂdiaire (5). Couple de serrage des vis: 23,8v26,2 Nm
NOTE. ControÃler attentivement les conditions de l'anneau torique
(9) te que le couvercle soit monteÂ avec le bouchon de vidange pour
l'huile dans la position infeÂrieure.
87
T13 T19
F1240509 F1240510
GB a GB b
NOTE. If the ring nuts (1) are removed, spread them with Loctite Pre-set the bearings by means of the ring nut situated on the
242. opposite side of the crown, so as to increase pinion torque up to
Tighten ring nuts on the crown side until clearance between pinion 140v210 Ncm.
and crown is zero, then lock the crown; go back 1/4v1/2 turn. CAUTION! If bearings are not new, check the static torque; if
bearings are new, check the continuous torque.
12 A A
F1240511 F1240512
GB c GB d
Introduce a comparator with rotary key "A" through the top plug Manually move the crown (12) in both directions in order to check
hole (10). Position the comparator on the centre of one of the teeth the existing backlash between the pinion and the crown.
of the crown (12), pre-set it to 1mm and reset it.
RATIO - RAPPORTO CLEARANCE - GIOCO - SPIEL

VERHAÈ LTNIS JUEGO - JEU
RAPORTE - RAPPORT MIN. MAX.
9v34 0,18 0,23
T13 9v35 0,13 0,18
11v31 0,20 0,28
11v35 0,13 0,18
12v35 0,13 0,18
12v41 0,15 0,20
14v32 0,18 0,23
14v36 0,15 0,20
14v41 0,15 0,20
15v32 0,18 0,23
F1240509
15v47 0,13 0,18
Difference between MIN and MAX clearance for whole circumference should
GB e not exceed 0.09 mm. GB f
La differenza tra gioco MIN e MAX rilevata sull'intera circonferenza non deve
superare il valore di 0,09 mm.
Adjust the backlash between the pinion and the crown by Der Unterschied zwischen dem MIN e MAX Spiel der gesamten Kreislinie darf
unloosing one of the ring nuts (1) and tightening the opposite to den Wert von 0,09 mm nicht uÈberschreiten.
compensate. La diferencia entre el juego Min y Max determinada sobre la entera
Normal backlash: see table. circonferencia no debe de superar el valor de 0,09 mm.
La diffeÂrence de jeu entre MIN et MAX releveÂe sur toute la circonfeÂrence ne
doit pas aller au-delaÁ de la valeur de 0,09 mm.
88
NOTA. Se le ghiere (1) vengono rimosse, spalmarle Precaricare i cuscinetti tramite la ghiera lato opposto
ITA con Loctite 242. ITA corona per incrementare la coppia di rotazione
Serrare le ghiere dal lato corona fino ad azzerare i pignone fino a 140v210 Ncm.
giochi tra pignone e corona e bloccarla; ritornare indietro di circa ATTENZIONE! Con cuscinetti usati, controllare la coppia di spunto;
1/4v1/2 giro. con cuscinetti nuovi, controllare la coppia di rotazione continua.
BEMERKUNG. Wenn die Nutmuttern (1) ausgewech- Lager durch die Nutmutter an der dem Kranz ent-
D selt werden, diese mit Loctite 242 schmieren. D gegengesetzten Seite vorladen, um das Gegenmo-
Nutmuttern an der Kranzseite fest ziehen bis kein ment des Rades auf 140v210 Ncm zu bringen.
Spiel mehr zwischen Rad und Kranz uÈbrig bleibt ; danach um 1/ ACHTUNG! Bei verbrauchten Lagern, das Anlaufdrehmoment kontroll-
a 4v1/2 Umdrehung wieder aufschrauben. b ieren; bei neuen Lagern, das kontinuierliche Drehmoment kontrollieren.
NOTA. Si se remueven las virolas (1) pasarles Loctite Precargar los cojinetes atraves la virola lado opuesto
ESP 242. ESP corona para incrementar el par de rotacion pinon
Apretar las virolas del lado corona hasta acerar los hasta 140v210 Ncm.
juegos entre el pinon y la corona y bloquearla, volver atras de 1/ CUIDADO! Con cojinetes usados, controlar el par de inicio, con
4v1/2 giro approx. cojinetes nuevos, controlar el par de rotacioÂn continua.
NOTE. Si les anneaux (1) sont enleveÂs, les enduire PreÂcharger les paliers au moyen d'anneaux de fixation
F avec du Loctite 242. F du coÃteÂ opposeÂ de la couronne pour augmenter le
Serrer les anneaux de fixation du coÃteÂ couronne couple de rotation pignon jusqu'aÁ 140v210 Ncm.
jusqu'aÁ mettre aÁ zeÂro les jeux entre pignon et couronne et bloquer: ATTENTION! Avec les paliers useÂs, controÃler le couple de pointe;
revenir en arrieÁre d'environ 1/4v1/2 tour. avec les paliers neufs, controÃler le couple de rotation continu.
Posizionare, attraverso il foro per il tappo superiore Muovere manualmente nei due sensi la corona (12)
ITA (10), un comparatore a tasto orientabile "A". ITA per controllare il gioco esistente tra pignone e corona.
Posizionarlo sul centro di un dente della corona (12),
precaricarlo di circa 1 mm ed azzerarlo.
Durch das Loch des oberen Stopfens (10) eine Den Kranz (12) von Hand in beide Richtungen
D schwenkbare Meûuhr "A" in der Mitte eine Kranzzah- D bewegen und das Spiel zwischen Rad und Kranz
nes (12) anbringen. Die Meûuhr auf 1 mm vorladen pruÈfen.
und auf Null stellen.
c d
Posicionar, a traveÂs del orificio para el tapoÂn superior Mover manualmente en los dos sentidos la corona (12)
ESP (10), un comparador de tecla orientable "A". ESP para controlar el juego que hay entre el pinÄoÂn y la
Posicionarlo en el centro de un diente de la corona corona.
(12), precargarlo de aproximadamente 1 mm y ponerlo a cero.
Placer, par le trou du bouchon supeÂrieur (10), un DeÂplacer la couronne (12) manuellement dans les
F comparateur aÁ touche orientable "A". F deux sens pour controÃler le jeu existant entre pignon
Placer ce dernier au centre d'une dent de la couronne et couronne.
(12), preÂcharger d'environ 1 mm, puis le mettre aÁ zeÂro.
Regolare il gioco tra pignone e corona allentando una

ITA ghiera (1) e serrando la ghiera opposta in egual
misura.
Gioco normale: vedere tabella.
Das Spiel zwischen Rad und Kranz einstellen; dazu

D eine Nutmutter (1) lockern und die entgegengesetzte
Nutmutter auf dieselbe Weise zuschrauben.
Normales Spiel: siehe Tabelle.
e
Regular el juego entre el pinÄoÂn y la corona aflojando
ESP una virola (1) y apretando la virola opuesta en la
misma medida.
Juego normal: veÂase la tabla.
ReÂgler le jeu entre pignon et couronne en desserrant

F un collier de serrage (1) puis en serrant le collier de
serrage opposeÂ avec la meÃme mesure de jeu.
Jeu normal: voir tableau.
89
10
3 3
F1240513 F1240385
GB a GB b
Apply Loctite 242 to the screws (3), fit them into one of the two Re-install the complete arms.
holes and tighten. For details, see «CHECKING WEAR AND REPLACING THE
Torque wrench setting: 23.8±26.2 Nm BRAKING DISKS».
Fit the top plug (10) after applying repositionable jointing
compound for seals to the rims.
90
Spalmare le viti (3) con Loctite 242 ed avvitarle in uno Rimontare i bracci completi.
ITA dei due fori predisposti. ITA Per i dettagli, vedere «CONTROLLO USURA E
Coppia di serraggio: 23,8v26,2 Nm SOSTITUZIONE DISCHI FRENO».
Montare il tappo superiore (10) dopo aver spalmato i bordi con
mastice per guarnizioni riposizionabile.
Die Schrauben (3) mit Loctite 242 schmieren und in Die beiden kompletten Arme montieren.
D eines der beiden vorgesehenen LoÈcher schrauben. D Siehe «VERSCHLEISS KONTROLLIEREN UND
Anzugsmoment: 23,8v26,2 Nm BREMSSCHEIBEN AUSWECHSELN».
Die RaÈnder des oberen Stopfens (10) mit Klebstoff fuÈr verstellbare
a Dichtungen schmieren und den Stopfen montieren. b
Pasar Loctite 242 en los tornillos (3) y atornillarlos en Volver a montar los brazos completos.
ESP uno de los dos orificios predispuestos. ESP Para los detalles, veÂase «CONTROL DEL DESGASTE
Par de torsioÂn: 23,8v26,2 Nm Y SUSTITUCION DE LOS DISCOS DEL FRENO».
Montar el tapoÂn superior (10) despueÂs de repasar los bordes con
pasta para juntas reposicionable.
Enduire les vis (3) avec du Loctite 242, puis visser Remonter les bras complets.
F celles-ci dans l'un des deux trous preÂdisposeÂs. F Pour de plus amples deÂtails, voir «CONTROLE
Couple de serrage: 23,8v26,2 Nm USURE ET SUBSTITUTION DES DISQUES DE
Monter le bouchon supeÂrieur (10) apreÁs avoir enduit les bords avec FREINAGE».
mastic pour garnitures aÁ remettre en place.
91
HOW TO REMOVE THE BEVEL PINION - RIMOZIONE PIGNONE CONICO - KEGELRAD ABMONTIEREN -
REMOCION PINÄON CONICO - DEPOSE DU PIGNON CONIQUE
F1240385 F1240514
GB a GB b
Remove the complete arms and the differential unit. If disassembly is awkward, heat the check nut (1) of the flange (2) at
For details, see «CHECKING WEAR AND REPLACING THE 80ëC.
BRAKING DISKS» and «REMOVING THE DIFFERENTIAL UNIT». NOTE. Heating is meant to unloose the setting of Loctite on the nut
(1).
T20A
(T20B)
3 2
F1240515 F1240516
GB c GB d
Position tool T20A (or T20B), so as to avoid pinion rotation. Remove the flange (2) complete with guard (4) by means of a
Unloose and remove the nut (1); also remove the O-ring (3). puller.
F1240517 F1240518
GB e GB f
Remove the swinging support (5). Remove the sealing ring (6).
92
Rimuovere i bracci completi ed il differenziale. Se lo smontaggio risulta faticoso, scaldare a circa
ITA Per i dettagli, vedere «CONTROLLO USURA E ITA 80ëC il dado (1) di ritegno della flangia (2).
SOSTITUZIONE DISCHI FRENO» e «RIMOZIONE NOTA. Il riscaldamento ha lo scopo di allentare la
GRUPPO DIFFERENZIALE». presa del Loctite di bloccaggio del dado (1).
Komplette Arme und Differential abnehmen. Wenn das Abmontieren schwierig ist, die Mutter (1)
D Siehe «VERSCHLEISS KONTROLLIEREN UND D zur Halterung des Flansches (2) auf ca. 80ëC erwaÈr-
BREMSSCHEIBEN AUSWECHSELN» und «DIFFE- men.
RENTIALAGGREGAT ABMONTIEREN». BEMERKUNG. Durch das Erhitzen wird das Fett aufgeweicht, das
a b die Mutter (1) blockiert.
Remover los brazos completos y el diferencial. Si el desmontaje resulta difõÂcil, calentar a unos 80ëC la
ESP Para los detalles veÂase «CONTROL DESGASTE Y ESP tuerca (1) de retencioÂn de la brida (2).
SUSTITUCION DE LOS DISCOS DEL FRENO» y NOTA. El calentamiento tiene la finalidad de aflojar la
«REMOCION GRUPO DIFERENCIAL». adhesioÂn del Loctite de bloqueo de la tuerca (1).
Enlever compleÁtement les bras complets et le diffeÂ- Si deÂmonter est difficile, chauffer l'eÂcrou (1) de fixation
F rentiel. F de la flasque (2) aÁ environ 80ëC.
Pour de plus amples deÂtails, voir «CONTROLE NOTE. Le chauffage aÁ pour objet de ralentir la prise du
USURE ET SUBSTITUTION DES DISQUES DE FREINAGE» et Loctite de blocage de l'eÂcrou (1).
«DEPOSE DU GROUPE DIFFERENTIEL».
Applicare l'attrezzo T20A (oppure T20B) ed impe- Utilizzando un estrattore, rimuovere la flangia (2)
ITA gnarlo in modo da evitare la rotazione del pignone. ITA completa della protezione (4).
Allentare ed asportare il dado (1); asportare anche
l'anello OR (3).
Werkzeug T20A (T20B) so anbringen, daû das Rad Mit einem Abzieher, Flansch (2) samt Schutzteil (4)
D nicht mehr drehen kann. D abnehmen.
Mutter (1) lockern und abschrauben; O-Ring (3)
ebenfalls abnehmen.
c d
Aplicar la herramienta T20A (T20B) y bloquearla a fin Utilizando un extractor, remover la brida (2) completa
ESP de evitar la rotacioÂn del pinÄoÂn. ESP con la proteccioÂn (4).
Aflojar y sacar la tuerca (1); sacar tambieÂn el anillo OR
(3).
Appliquer l'outil T20A (ou T20B) engager ce dernier A l'aide d'un extracteur, enlever la flasque (2)
F de manieÁre aÁ eÂviter la rotation du pignon. F compleÁte de la protection (4).
RelaÃcher et enlever l'eÂcrou (1) enlever eÂgalement la
garniture OR (3).
Rimuovere il supporto oscillante (5). Rimuovere l'anello di tenuta (6).

ITA ITA
Schwenkbare Halterung (5) entfernen. Kolbenring (6) entfernen.

D D
e f
Remover el soporte oscilante (5). Remover el segmento de compresioÂn (6).
ESP ESP
Enlever le support oscillant (5). Enlever la bague d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (6).

F F
93
12
T23
7
8
T21
T22
F1240519 F1240520
GB a GB b
Position wrench T22 onto the ring nut (7) and apply bar hold T21 to Apply blocks T23 and, with the help of a puller, extract the pinion
the pinion (8). (8) complete with the internal bearing (9), the distance piece (10)
Stop wrench T22 and rotate the pinion so as to release and remove and shims (11).
the ring nut (7). NOTE. The thrust blocks of the bearings remain in the central body
NOTE. If disassembly proves awkward, weld the ring nut at approx. (12).
80ëC.
10
8
8
9
11
F1240543 F1240578
GB c GB d
Remove the pinion (8), shims (11) and distance piece (10). Using a puller and a press, remove the inner bearing (9) from the
pinion (8).
13
14
9
F1240521 F1240522
GB e GB f
Remove the thrust block of the external bearing (13). Insert a drift in the appropriate holes and remove the thrust block of
the internal bearing (9) as well as the shim washers (14).
94
Impegnare la chiave speciale T22 sulla ghiera (7) ed Applicare i blocchi T23 e con un estrattore, estrarre il
ITA applicare sul pignone (8) il codolo T21. ITA pignone (8) completo del cuscinetto interno (9), del
Fermare la chiave T22 e ruotare il pignone per distanziale (10) e degli spessori (11).
allentare ed asportare la ghiera (7). NOTA. Le ralle dei cuscinetti rimangono nel corpo centrale (12).
NOTA. Se lo smontaggio risulta faticoso, scaldare la ghiera a circa
80 ëC.
Den speziellen SchluÈssel T22 in die Nutmutter (7) Die BloÈcke T23 anbringen und mit einem Abzieher das
D setzen und am Rad (8) den Schaft T21 anbringen. D Rad (8) samt dem inneren Lager (9), DistanzstuÈck (10)
SchluÈssel T22 festhalten und das Rad drehen, um die und der Scheiben (11) herausziehen.
Nutmutter (7) zu lockern und abzunehmen. BEMERKUNG. Die Lagerscheiben bleiben im zentralen KoÈrper (12)
a BEMERKUNG. Falls die Nutmutter zu fest sitzt, diese auf ca. 80ëC b sitzen.
erhitzen.
Bloquear la llave especial T22 en la virola (7) y aplicar Aplicar los bloqueos T23 y con un extractor, extraer el
ESP en el pinÄoÂn (8) el mango T21. ESP pinÄoÂn (8) con su cojinete interior (9) del separador (10)
Bloquear la llave T22 y girar el pinÄoÂn para aflojar y y de los posibles espesores (11).
extraer la virola (7). NOTA. Las ranguas de los cojinetes quedan en el cuerpo central
NOTA. Si el desmontaje resulta difõÂcil, calentar la virola a unos (12).
80ëC.
Engager la cleÂ speÂciale T22 sur le collier de serrage Appliquer les blocs T23 et aÁ l'aide d'un extracteur,
F (7) et appliquer sur le pignon (8) le coÃne T21. F extraire le pignon (8) complet du palier interne (9), du
Bloquer la cleÂ T22, tourner le pignon pour relaÃcher et diffeÂrentiel (10) et des eÂventuelles cales (11).
enlever le collier de serrage (7). NOTE. Les crapaudines des paliers demeurent dans le corps
NOTE. Si le deÂsassemblage est rendu difficile, chauffer la bague aÁ central (12).
une chaleur de 80ëC.
Asportare il pignone (8), gli spessori (11) ed il Utilizzando un estrattore ed una pressa, rimuovere dal
ITA distanziale (10). ITA pignone (8) il cuscinetto interno (9).
Rad (8), Unterlegscheibe (11) und DistanzstuÈck (10) Mit einem Abzieher und einer Presse, vom Rad (8) das
D abnehmen. D innere Lager (9) abnehmen.
c d
Sacar el pinÄoÂn (8), los espesores (11) y el separador Utilizando un extractor y una prensa, remover del
ESP (10). ESP pinÄoÂn (8) el cojinete interior (9).
Enlever le pignon (8), les cales (11) et l'entretoise (10). A l'aide de l'extracteur et d'une presse, oÃter du pignon
F F (8) le palier interne (9).
Rimuovere la ralla del cuscinetto esterno (13). Con un punzone inserito nelle cave predisposte,
ITA ITA rimuovere la ralla del cuscinetto interno (9) e gli
spessori di rasamento (14).
Scheibe vom aÈuûeren Lager (13) abnehmen. Einen DuÈbel in die vorgesehenen Nuten stecken und
D D die Scheibe des inneren Lagers (9) und die Zwischen-
legscheiben (14) entfernen.
e f
Remover la rangua del cojinete exterior (13). Utilizando un punzoÂn introducido en las ranuras
ESP ESP predispuestas, remover la rangua del cojinete interior
(9) y los espesores (14).
Enlever la crapaudine du palier externe (13). A l'aide d'un poussoir introduit dans le creux
F F preÂdisposeÂ, enlever la crapaudine du palier interne
(9) et les cales de rasage (14).
95
14
GB a GB b
12
10
13
6
5
11
7
3
1 4
2 D1240042
GB c GB d
GB e GB f
96
97
HOW TO INSTALL AND ADJUST THE BEVEL PINION - INSTALLAZIONE E REGISTRAZIONE PIGNONE CONICO - KEGELRAD INSTALLIEREN
UND EINSTELLEN - INSTALACION Y AJUSTE DEL PINÄON CONICO - INSTALLATION ET REGLAGE DU PIGNON CONIQUE
DG DG
T24
9
F1240523 F1240524
GB a GB b
Using a surface plate, reset a centesimal comparator "DG" and Bring the internal bearing (9), complete with its thrust block, under
place it on the measurement ring T24 (with a thickness of 30.2 the comparator "DG".
mm). Determine overall thickness "D" of the bearing checking the
Preset the comparator to approx. 2 mm. discrepancy between this size and the size of the measurement
ring.
CAUTION! Press the thrust block in the centre and take several
measurements while rotating the thrust block.
T25B T24 T25C T25A
13
T25C
T25A 13
F1240525 F1240526
GB c GB d
Partially insert the thrust block of the external bearing (13). Install tension rod T25C, measurement ring T24 and front guide
tool T25A on the thrust block of the external bearing (13).
T26C T24 T26B

13
F1240527 F1240528
GB e GB f
Connect the tension rod to the press and move the thrust block of Insert tool T26B complete with external bearing (13), measurement
the external bearing (13) into its seat. ring T24 and gauged ring nut T26C.
Disconnect the press and remove the tension rod. Manually tighten.
NOTE. Before starting the next stage, make sure that the thrust
block has been completely inserted into its seat.
98
Utilizzando un piano di riscontro, azzerare sull'anello Portare sotto il comparatore "DG" il cuscinetto interno
ITA di misura T24 (di spessore conosciuto pari a 30,2 mm) ITA (9) completo di ralla.
un comparatore centesimale "DG". Determinare lo spessore totale "D" del cuscinetto
Precaricare il comparatore di circa 2 mm. controllando lo scostamento rispetto la misura dell'anello di misura.
ATTENZIONE! Premere la ralla in modo centrato ed eseguire piuÁ
volte la misurazione ruotando la ralla.
Mit Hilfe eines Anschlags am Meûring T24 (bekannte Unter die Meûuhr "DG" das innere Lager (9) samt
D StaÈrke 30,2 mm) eine hundertteilige Meûuhr "DG" auf D Scheibe legen.
Null stellen. Gesamte StaÈrke "D" des Lagers messen und die
Meûuhr auf 2 mm vorladen. Abweichung im VerhaÈltnis zum Meûring kontrollieren.
a b ACHTUNG! Die Scheibe muû zentriert sein und den Meûvorgang
mehrmals bei gedrehter Scheibe wiederholen.
Utilizando una superficie para la comparacioÂn, poner Poner debajo del comparador "DG" el cojinete interior
ESP a cero en el anillo de medida T24 (del que se conoce ESP (9) con la rangua.
el espesor igual a 30,2 mm) un comparador centesi- Determinar el espesor total "D" del cojinete controlan-
mal "DG". do la diferencia con respecto al tamanÄo del anillo de medida.
Precargar el comparador en 2 mm aproximadamente. CUIDADO! Presionar la rangua de manera centrada y ejecutar
varias veces la medida girando la rangua.
A l'aide d'un plan de comparaison, mettre aÁ zeÂro sur Amener sous le comparateur "DG" le palier interne (9)
F l'anneau de mesurage T24 (d'une eÂpaisseur connue F eÂquipeÂ de crapaudine.
eÂgale aÁ 30,2 mm), un comparateur centeÂsimal "DG". DeÂfinir l'eÂpaisseur totale "D" du palier en controÃlant
PreÂcharger le comparateur d'environ 2 mm. l'eÂcart par rapport aÁ celle mesureÂe par l'anneau de mesurage.
ATTENTION! Presser la crapaudine vers le centre, puis en
effectuer plusieurs fois le mesurage en tournant la crapaudine.
Inserire parzialmente nel corpo centrale (12) la ralla Montare il tirante T25C, l'anello di misura T24, ed
ITA del cuscinetto esterno (13). ITA infine l'attrezzo anteriore T25A di guida della ralla (13)
del cuscinetto esterno.
Auf den zentralen KoÈrper (12) die Scheibe des Die Spannstange T25C, den Meûring T24, und zuletzt
D aÈuûeren Lagers (13). D das vordere Werkzeug T25A zur FuÈhrung der Scheibe
(13) des aÈuûeren Lagers montieren.
c d
Introducir parcialmente en el cuerpo central (12) la Montar el tirante T25C, el anillo de medida T24, y por
ESP rangua el cojinete exterior (13). ESP uÂltimo la herramienta anterior T25A guõÂa de la rangua
(13) del cojinete exterior.
Introduire, partiellement dans le corps central (12), la Monter la tringle T25C, l'anneau de mesurage T24, et
F crapaudine du palier externe (13). F enfin l'outil anteÂrieur T25A de guidage de la crapau-
dine (13) du palier externe.
Collegare il tirante alla pressa e mandare in sede la Inserire l'attrezzo T26B completo di cuscinetto ester-
ITA ralla del cuscinetto esterno (13). ITA no (13) anello di misura T24 e ghiera di altezza
Scollegare la pressa e rimuovere il tirante. calibrata T26C.
NOTA. Prima di proseguire, assicurarsi dell'inserimento totale Serrare a fondo manualmente.
della ralla.
Spannstange mit der Presse verbinden und die Werkzeug T26B mit dem aÈuûeren Lager (13), Meûring
D Scheibe in ihren Sitz im aÈuûeren Lager (13) einsetzen. D T24 und in der HoÈhe kalibrierte Nutmutter T26C
Von der Presse abnehmen und Spannstange ab- einsetzen.
nehmen. Von Hand festschrauben.
e BEMERKUNG. SorgfaÈltig kontrollieren, ob die Scheibe richtig f
eingesetzt worden ist.
Conectar el tirante a la prensa y colocar en el Introducir la herramienta T26B con el cojinete exterior
ESP alojamiento la rangua del cojinete exterior (13). ESP (13), el anillo de medida T24 y la virola de altura
Sacar la prensa y remover el tirante. calibrada T26C.
NOTA. Antes de continuar, asegurarse de que la rangua estaÂ Apretar a fondo manualmente.
completamente insertada.
Brancher la tringle aÁ la presse, puis envoyer dans son Introduire l'outil T26C eÂquipeÂ du palier externe (13),
F logement la crapaudine du palier externe (13). F l'anneau de mesurage T24 et le collier de serrage de
DeÂbrancher la presse et enlever la tringle. hauteur taraudeÂ T26C.
NOTE. Avant de continuer, s'assurer que la crapaudine est Serrer aÁ fond manuellement.
compleÁtement inseÂreÂe.
99
DG1
T26A T26C
GB
GB T26A
A
F1240529 F1240530
GB a GB b
Fit a centesimal comparator "DG1" with long stem into bar T26A; Lay bar T26A on gauged nut T26C and take the size "A" at about
when the bar rests on two size- blocks "GB" of 57 mm, reset the 57 mm corresponding to the maximum diameter of arms centring.
comparator.
Preset the comparator to approx. 2 mm and reset.
T24
T26C 8
X
R115
T26B
A Y
30.2 61
(61-A)+115+30.2=B B D1240070
F1240531
GB c GB d
Calculate size "B" which will be the first useful value for calculating Check the nominal size (X) marked on the pinion and add or
the size of the shims (14) that are to be inserted under the thrust subtract the indicated variation (Y) so as to obtain size "Z".
block of the internal bearing (9). e.g.: Z= 118 + 0.1 = 118.1
Z= 118 ± 0.2 = 117.8
B-C=S
14
(14) S
D Z
C=Z+D C
D1240069
F1240541
GB e GB f
Calculate size "C" which represents the second value for Calculate the difference between sizes "B" and "C" so as to obtain
calculating the size of the shims "S" that are to be placed under the size "S" of the shim (14) that will go under the thrust block of the
the thrust block of the internal bearing (9). internal bearing (9).
100
Montare un comparatore centesimale "DG1" con stelo Appoggiare la barra T26A sulla ghiera calibrata T26C
ITA prolungato, nella barra T26A; azzerare il comparatore ITA e rilevare la misura "A" circa 57mm in corrispondenza
quando la barra appoggia su due blocchetti "GB" del diametro massimo della centratura dei bracci.
calibrati da 57 mm.
Precaricare il comparatore di circa 2 mm ed azzerarlo.
Die hundertteilige Meûuhr "DG1" mit dem VerlaÈng- Stab T26A auf die kalibrierte Nutmutter T26C legen
D erungsstift in den Stab T26A montieren; die Meûuhr D und das Maû "A" bei ca. 57 mm am maximalen
auf Null stellen, nachdem der Stab auf zwei kalibrierte Durchmesser der Armzentrierung messen.
BloÈcke "GB" zu 57 mm gelegt worden ist.
a Meûuhr auf 2 mm vorladen und auf Null stellen. b
Montar un comparador centesimal "DG1" con vaÂstago Apoyar la barra T26A en la virola calibrada T26C y
ESP prolongado en la barra T26A; poner a cero el ESP registrar la medida "A" unos 57 mm en correspon-
comparador cuando la barra estaÂ apoyada en dos dencia del diaÂmetro maÂximo del centraje de los
bloques "GB" calibrados de 57 mm. brazos.
Precargar el comparador en 2 mm aproximadamente y ponerlo a
cero.
Monter un comparateur centeÂsimal "DG1" muni de Poser la barre T26A sur le collier de serrage taraudeÂ
F tige de prolongation dans la barre T26A; mettre le F T26C, relever la mesure "A" aÁ environ 57 mm en
comparateur aÁ zeÂro lorsque la barre poseÂe sur les correspondance du diameÁtre de centrage maximal des
deux blocs calibreÂs "GB" est aÁ 57 mm. bras.
PreÂcharger le comparateur aÁ environ 2 mm et remettre aÁ zeÂro.
Eseguire il calcolo per ottenere la prima misura utile Controllare la misura nominale (X) segnata sul
ITA "B", per il calcolo degli spessori (14) da inserire sotto ITA pignone e sommare o sottrarre ad essa la variazione
la ralla del cuscinetto interno (9). indicata: (Y) per ottenere la misurazione "Z".
Es: Z=118+0,1=118,1
Z=118 ± 0,2=117,8
Das Maû "B" ausrechnen, das zur Ermittlung der Das Nennmaû (X), das am Rad markiert ist, kontroll-
D DistanzstuÈcke (14) dient, die unterhalb der Scheibe D ieren und die Abweichung addieren oder abziehen. (Y)
des inneren Lagers (9) eingesetzt werden sollen. fuÈr das Maû "Z".
Beisp.: Z= 118 + 0,1 = 118,1
c d Z= 118 ± 0,2 = 117,8
Ejecutar el caÂlculo para obtener la primera medida uÂtil Controlar la medida nominal (X) marcada en el pinÄoÂn y
ESP "B" para el caÂlculo de los espesores (14) que hay que ESP sumarle o restarle la variacioÂn indicada (Y) para
insertar debajo de la rangua del cojinete interior (9). obtener la medida "Z".
Ej.: Z= 118 + 0,1 = 118,1
Z= 118 ± 0,2 = 117,8
Faire le calcul pour obtenir la premieÁre mesure utile ControÃler la mesure nominale (X) marqueÂe sur le
F "B" pour calculer les cales (14) aÁ introduire au- F pignon et additionner ou soustraire aÁ celle-ci la
dessous de la crapaudine du palier interne (9). variation indiqueÂe (Y) pour obtenir le mesurage "Z".
Exp. Z= 118 + 0,1 = 118,1
Z= 118 ± 0,2 = 117,8
Calcolare la seconda misura utile "C" per il calcolo Eseguire la differenza tra le misure "B" e "C" per
ITA dello spessore "S" da inserire sotto la ralla del ITA stabilire la misura "S" dello spessore (14) da inserire
cuscinetto interno (9). sotto la ralla del cuscinetto interno (9).
Das zweite Maû "C" fuÈ r das DistanzstuÈ ck "S" Den Unterschied zwischen Maû "B" und "C" ausrech-
D ausrechnen, das unter die Scheibe des inneren D nen, um das DistanzstuÈck "S" (14) auszurechnen, das
Lagers (9) eingesetzt werden soll. unter die Scheibe des inneren Lagers (9) eingesetzt
werden soll.
e f
Calcular la segunda medida uÂtil "C" para el caÂlculo del Sacar la diferencia entre las medidas "B" y "C" para
ESP espesor "S" a insertar debajo de la rangua del cojinete ESP establecer la medida "S" del espesor (14) a insertar
interior (9). debajo de la rangua del cojinete interior (9).
Calculer la seconde mesure utile "C" pour calculer la Effectuer la diffeÂrence entre les mesures "B" et "C"
F cale "S" aÁ introduire au-dessous de la crapaudine du F pour eÂtablir la mesure "S" de la cale (14) aÁ introduire
palier interne (9). au-dessous de la crapaudine du palier interne (9).
101
14
T25C T25A
9
F1240533 F1240534
GB a GB b
Insert shim "S" (14) and the thrust block of the internal bearing (9) Position tool T25A and tension rod T25C.
in the central body. Connect the tension rod to the press, fasten the thrust block and
NOTE. To hold shim "S" (14) in position, apply grease. then remove the tools.
NOTE. Before going on to the next stage, make sure that the thrust
block has been completely inserted.
DDG
T26C 9 13
T26B
F1240535 F1240536
GB c GB d
Position tools T26C and T26B complete with tapered bearings (9) Insert the stem of a depth comparator "DDG" in either side hole of
and (13); manually tighten until a rolling torque has been obtained. tool T26C; reset the comparator with a presetting of approx. 3 mm.
H
DDG
T26C 9
10 13
T26B
9 T26C
13
T26B
F1240574 F1240537
GB e GB f
Remove the comparator and release tools and bearings from the Insert depth comparator "DDG" into tool T26B-T26C and measure
central body. variation "H" in relation to the zero setting performed back at point
Re-install all and insert the distance piece (10) between bearings d.
(9) and (13); manually tighten the whole pack.
102
Inserire nel corpo centrale lo spessore "S" (14) e la Montare l'attrezzo T25A ed il tirante T25C.
ITA ralla del cuscinetto interno (9). ITA Collegare il tirante alla pressa, mandare in battuta la
NOTA. Per tenere in posizione lo spessore "S" (14), ralla e quindi smontare gli attrezzi.
spalmarlo leggermente con grasso. NOTA. Prima di proseguire, assicurarsi dell'inserimento totale
della ralla.
In den zentralen KoÈrper das DistanzstuÈck "S" (14) und Werkzeug T25A und Spannstange T25C montieren.
D die Scheibe des inneren Lagers (9) einsetzen. D Spannstange mit der Presse verbinden und die
BEMERKUNG. Um das DistanzstuÈck "S" (14) in seiner Scheibe bis zum Anschlag einsetzen. Danach die
Position festzuhalten, dieses leicht mit Fett schmieren. Werkzeuge abmontieren.
a b BEMERKUNG. SorgfaÈltig kontrollieren ob die Scheibe richtig
eingesetzt worden ist.
Introducir en el cuerpo central el espesor "S" (14) y la Montar la herramienta T25A y el tirante T25C.
ESP rangua del cojinete interior (9). ESP Conectar el tirante a la prensa, llevar a tope la rangua
NOTA. Para mantener en su posicioÂn el espesor "S" y luego desmontar las herramientas.
(14), pasarle ligeramente un poco de grasa. NOTA. Antes de continuar, asegurarse de que la rangua ha sido
totalmente introducida.
Introduire dans le corps central la cale "S" (14) et la Monter l'outil T25A et la tringle T25C.
F cale du palier interne (9). F Relier la tringle aÁ la presse, envoyer en buteÂe la
NOTE. Enduire leÂgeÁrement celle-ci de gras pour la crapaudine, puis deÂmonter les outils.
maintenir dans sa position. NOTE. Avant de continuer, s'assurer que la crapaudine est
entieÁrement inseÂreÂe.
Inserire gli attrezzi T26C e T26B completi dei Inserire in uno dei due fori laterali dell'attrezzo T26C lo
ITA cuscinetti conici (9) e (13); serrare manualmente fino ITA stelo di un comparatore di profonditaÁ "DDG"; azzerare
ad avere sicuramente una coppia di rotolamento. il comparatore con un precarico di circa 3 mm.
Die Werkzeuge T26C und T26B samt Kegellager (9) In eines der beiden seitlichen LoÈcher des Werkzeugs
D und (13) einsetzen; von Hand zudrehen bis ein D T26C den Stift der Meûuhr "DDG" stecken; die Meûuhr
Drehmoment erreicht worden ist. auf 3 mm vorladen und auf Null stellen.
c d
Introducir las herramientas T26C y T26B con sus Introducir en uno de los dos orificios laterales de la
ESP cojinetes coÂnicos (9) y (13); apretar manualmente ESP herramienta T26C el vaÂstago de un comparador de
hasta obtener con seguridad un par de rodamiento. profundidad "DDG"; poner a cero el comparador con
una precarga de aproximadamente 3 mm.
Introduire les outils T26C et T26B eÂquipeÂs des paliers Introduire dans l'un des deux trous lateÂraux de l'outil
F coniques (9) et (13); serrer manuellement jusqu'aÁ eÃtre F T26C, la tige d'un comparateur de profondeur "DDG",
suÃr d'avoir un couple de roulement. mettre le comparateur aÁ zeÂro avec une preÂcharge
d'environ 3 mm.
Rimuovere il comparatore e smontare dal corpo Inserire nell'attrezzo T26B-T26C il comparatore di

ITA centrale il gruppo attrezzi e cuscinetti. ITA profonditaÁ "DDG" e rilevare lo scostamento "H"
Rimontare il tutto inserendo tra i cuscinetti (9) e (13) il rispetto l'azzeramento eseguito al punto d.
distanziale (10); serrare manualmente l'intero pacco.
Die Meûuhr abnehmen und vom zentralen KoÈrper die In das Werkzeug T26B-T26C die Meûuhr "DDG" fuÈr
D Werkzeuge und Lager abmontieren. D die Tiefe einsetzen und die Abweichung "H" im
Das ganze wieder montieren und dabei zwischen den VerhaÈltnis zur unter Punkt d vorgenommenen Null-
Lagern (9) und (13) das DistanzstuÈck (10) einsetzen; von Hand das stellung messen.
e Ganze festschrauben. f
Remover el comparador y desmontar del cuerpo Introducir en la herramienta T26B-T26C el compara-
ESP central el grupo de las herramientas y cojinetes. ESP dor de profundidad "DDG" y relevar el alejamiento "H"
Volver a montar todo introduciendo entre los cojinetes respecto al aceramiento efectuado al punto d.
(9) y (13) el separador (10); apretar manualmente todo el paquete.
Enlever le comparateur et deÂmonter du corps central Introduire l'outil T26B-T26C le comparateur de pro-
F le groupe outils et paliers. F fondeur "DDG" et relever l'eÂcart "H" par rapport aÁ la
Remonter le tout en inseÂrant entre les paliers (9) et mise aÁ zeÂro effectueÂ au point d.
(13), l'entretoise (10); serrer tout le paquet aÁ la main.
103
H+0,12÷ 0,13=S1
11 S1
F1240541 F1240542
GB a GB b
The variation is to be added to a set value of 0.12±0.13 mm., so as Position the internal bearing (9) and the pinion (8) under a press;
to obtain the size of shim "S1" (11) which will be inserted between force the bearing onto the pinion.
the external bearing (13) and the distance piece (10) and
subsequently, to determine the preload for the bearings.
12
10
8 9 11 10
13
11
F1240543 F1240538
GB c GB d
Fit the pinion (8), shim "S1" (11) and distance piece (10) in the main Insert the external bearing (13) in the central body in order to
body (12). complete the pack arranged as in the figure.
NOTE. The finer shims must be placed in- between the thicker
ones
8
8
7
F1240575 F1240539
GB e GB f
Connect the pinion (8) to the tie rod T28A and T28B; connect the Apply Loctite 242 to the thread of the ring nut (7) and screw the nut
tie rod T28C (see special tools) to the press and block. onto the pinion (8).
104
Lo scostamento rilevato eÁ da sommare ad una misura Posizionare il cuscinetto interno (9) e pignone (8) sotto
ITA fissa di 0,12v0,13 mm, per ottenere lo spessore "S1" ITA una pressa; forzare sul pignone il cuscinetto.
(11) da inserire tra cuscinetto esterno (13) e distanziale
(10) e quindi, determinare il precarico stabilito per i cuscinetti.
Die ermittelte Abweichung wird dem festen Maû von Das innere Lager (9) und das Rad (8) unter eine
D 0,12v0,13 mm hinzu gerechnet, um das DistanzstuÈck D Presse setzen; auf das Rad das Lager druÈcken.
"S1" (11) zu ermitteln, das zwischen dem aÈuûeren
Lager (13) und das DistanzstuÈck (10) eingesetzt werden soll und
a folglich die benoÈtigte Vorbelastung der Lager festzulegen. b
La separacioÂn registrada hay que sumarla a una Posicionar el cojinete interior (9) y el pinÄoÂn (8) debajo
ESP medida fija de 0,12v0,13 mm para obtener el espesor ESP de una prensa; forzar en el pinÄoÂn el cojinete.
"S1" (11) que hay que introducir entre el cojinete
exterior (13) y el separador (10) y luego, determinar la precarga
establecida para los cojinetes.
L'eÂcart releveÂ est aÁ additionner aÁ une mesure fixe de Placer le palier interne (9) et le pignon (8) sous presse;
F 0,12v0,13 mm pour obtenir la cale "S1" (11) aÁ F forcer sur pignon et palier.
introduire entre le palier externe (13) et entretoise
(10) et par conseÂquent deÂterminer la preÂcharge preÂconiseÂe pour les
paliers.
Montare nel corpo centrale (12), il pignone (8), gli Inserire nel corpo centrale il cuscinetto esterno (13) in
ITA spessori "S1" (11) e il distanziale (10). ITA modo da completare il pacco come composto in figura.
NOTA. Gli spessori piuÁ fini devono essere contenuti
tra quelli piuÁ spessi.
Zentralen KoÈrper (12), Rad (8), Unterlegscheibe "S1" In den zentralen KoÈrper das aÈuûere Lager (13)
D (11) und DistanzstuÈck (10) montieren. D einsetzen wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.
BEMERKUNG. Die duÈnneren Unterlegscheiben muÈs-
sen zwischen den staÈrkeren gelegt werden.
c d
Montar en el cuerpo central (12) el pinÄoÂn (8) los Introducir en el cuerpo central el cojinete exterior (13)
ESP espesores "S1" (11) y el separador (10). ESP de manera que el paquete quede completo como ha
NOTA. Los espesores maÂs delgados tienen que sido formado en la figura.
colocarse entre los maÂs gruesos.
Monter le corps central (12), le pignon (8), les cales Introduire dans le corps central, le palier externe (13),
F "S1" (11) et l'entretoise (10). F de manieÁre aÁ compleÂter le paquet comme composeÂ
NOTE. Les cales plus minces doivent eÃtre intercaleÂes sur la figure.
parmi les plus eÂpaisses.
Collegare il pignone (8) al tirante T28A e T28B; Spalmare la filettatura della ghiera (7) con Loctite 242
ITA collegare il tirante T28C (Vedere attrezzature speciali) ITA ed avvitarla sul pignone (8).
alla pressa e mandare in blocco.
Ritzel (8) mit der Zugstange T28A und T28B ver- Das Gewinde der Nutmutter (7) mit Loctite 242
D binden; Zugstange T28C (siehe SpezialausruÈstung) D schmieren und auf das Rad (8) schrauben.
mit der Presse verbinden und blockieren.
e f
Conectar el pignon (8) al tirante T28A y T28B; Pasar sobre la rosca de la virola (7) Loctite 242 y
ESP conectar el tirante T28C (Vease herramientas espe- ESP atornillarla en el pinÄoÂn (8).
ciales) a la prensa y bloquear.
Brancher le pignon (8) aÁ la tringle T28A et T28B; relier Enduire le filetage du collier de serrage (7) avec du
F la tringle T28C (voir installations speÂciales) aÁ la presse F Loctite 242, puis visser celui-ci sur le pignon (8).
puis envoyer en buteÂe.
105
T21 T19
T22
F1240540 F1240510
GB a GB b
Apply special wrench T22 to the ring nut (7) and bar-hold T21 to the Apply onto the pinion (8) the bar-hold and with the help of a torque
pinion (8). metre, check the torque of the pinion (8).
Lock the wrench T22 and rotate the pinion using a dynamometric Torque: 120±170 Ncm
wrench, up to a minimum required torque setting of 500 Nm. CAUTION! If torque exceeds the maximum value, then the size of
shim "S1" (11) between the bearing (13) and the distance piece (10)
needs to be increased.
If torque does not reach the set value, increase the torque setting
of the ring nut (7) in different stages to obtain a maximum value of
570 Nm.
CAUTION! If torque does not reach the minimum value, then the
size of shim "S1" (11) needs to be reduced.
CAUTION! When calculating the increase or decrease in size of
shim "S1", bear in mind that a variation of shim (11) of 0.01 mm
corresponds to a variation of 60 Ncm in the torque of the pinion (8).
106
Impegnare la chiave speciale T22 sulla ghiera (7) ed Applicare sul pignone (8) il codolo T19 e con un
ITA applicare il codolo T21 sul pignone (8). ITA torsiometro, controllare la coppia di rotazione del
Fermare la chiave T22 e ruotare il pignone con una pignone.
chiave dinamometrica fino alla coppia minima richiesta di 500 Nm. Coppia di rotazione: 120v170 Ncm
ATTENZIONE! Se la coppia supera il valore massimo bisogna
aumentare lo spessore "S1" (11) tra cuscinetto (13) e distanziale
(10).
Den speziellen SchluÈssel T22 auf die Nutmutter (7) Se la coppia di rotazione non raggiunge il valore stabilito,
D setzen und den Schaft T21 auf das Rad (8) montieren. aumentare la coppia di serraggio della ghiera (7) in piuÁ tempi fino
Den SchluÈssel T22 festhalten und das Rad mit einem a raggiungere il valore massimo ammesso di 570 Nm.
MomentenschluÈssel drehen bis das mindeste Anzugsmoment von
a 500 Nm erreicht worden ist. ATTENZIONE! Se la coppia di rotazione non raggiunge il valore
minimo, eÁ necessario diminuire lo spessore "S1" (11).
ATTENZIONE! Al fine di poter calcolare gli incrementi o la
Colocar la llave especial T22 en la virola (7) y aplicar el diminuzione dello spessore "S1", eÁ necessario considerare che la
ESP mango T21 en el pinÄoÂn (8). variazione dello spessore (11) di 0,01 mm, fa variare la coppia di
Parar la llave T22 y girar el pinÄoÂn con una llave rotazione del pignone (8) di 60 Ncm.
dinamomeÂtrica hasta el par mõÂnimo requerido de 500 Nm.
Engager la cleÂ speÂciale T22 sur le collier (7) et

F appliquer la queue T21 sur le pignon (8).
Bloquer la cleÂ T22, tourner le pignon avec une cleÂ
dynamomeÂtrique jusqu'au couple minimum requis de 500 Nm.
Den Shaft T19 montieren auf das Rad (8) und mit
D einem Drehungsmesser das Drehmoment des Rads
kontrollieren.
Drehmoment: 120v170 Ncm
ACHTUNG! Falls das Drehmoment groÈûer als der maximale Wert
sein sollte, muû ein groÈûeres DistanzstuÈck "S1" (11) zwischen
Lager (13) und DistanzstuÈck (10) eingesetzt werden.
Falls das Drehmoment den benoÈtigten Wert nicht erreicht, muû das
Drehmoment der Nutmutter (7) stufenweise erhoÈht werden, bis der
maximal zugelassene Wert von 570 Nm erreicht worden ist.
ACHTUNG! Falls das Drehmoment den minimalen Wert nicht
erreicht, muû das DistanzstuÈck "S1" (11) kleiner gewaÈhlt werden.
ACHTUNG! Um die ErhoÈhungen oder Verringerungen des Distanz-
stuÈcks "S1" ausrechnen zu koÈnnen, muû beachtet werden, daû ein
Unterschied von 0,01 mm des DistanzstuÈcks (11), das Drehmoment
des Rads (8) um 60 Ncm veraÈndert.
Aplicar el mango T19 en el pinÄoÂn (8) y con un

ESP torsioÂmetro, controlar el par de rotacioÂn del pinÄoÂn.
Par de rotacioÂn: 120v170 Ncm
CUIDADO! Si el par supera el valor maÂximo, hay que aumentar el
espesor "S1" (11) entre el cojinete (13) y el separador (10).
Si el par de rotacioÂn no alcanza el valor establecido, aumentar el
par de torsioÂn de la virola (7) varias veces hasta alcanzar el valor
maÂximo admitido de 570 Nm.
CUIDADO! Si el par de rotacioÂn no alcanza el valor mõÂnimo, hay
que disminuir el espesor "S1" (11).
CUIDADO! A fin de poder calcular los incrementos o la disminucioÂn
del espesor "S1", hay que considerar que el espesor (11) de 0,01
mm hace variar el par de rotacioÂn del pinÄoÂn (8) en 60 Ncm.
Appliquer la queue T19 sur le pignon (8) et l'aide d'un

F torsiomeÁtre, controÃler le couple de rotation du pignon.
Couple de rotation: 120v170 Ncm
ATTENTION! Si le couple deÂpasse la valeur maximale, il faut
augmenter la cale "S1" (11) entre palier (13) et entretoise (10).
Si le couple de rotation n'atteint pas la valeur eÂtablie, augmenter le
couple de serrage du collier de serrage (7) en plusieurs fois jusqu'aÁ
atteindre la valeur maximale preÂconiseÂe de 570 Nm.
ATTENTION! Si le couple de rotation n'atteint pas la valeur
minimale, il faut diminuer la cale "S1" (11).
ATTENTION! Pour pouvoir calculer l'increÂmentation ou la diminu-
tion de la cale "S1", il faut tenir compte que la variation de la cale
(11) de 0,01 mm, modifie le couple de rotation du pignon (8) de 60
Ncm.
107
5
6
T27 12
F1240545 F1240517
GB a GB b
Lubricate the outer surface of the new sealing ring (6) and fit it onto Install the swinging support (5).
the central body (12) using tool T27. NOTE. Check that it is properly oriented.
T20A
(T20B)
2 4
F1240546 F1240547
GB c GB d
Fit the flange (2) complete with the guard (4) and fasten it. Apply Loctite 242 to the threaded part of the pinion (8).
For keying the flange (2), use a plastic hammer if necessary. Position tool T20A (or T20B) and fasten it in order to avoid rotation.
NOTE. Make sure that the guard (4) is securely fastened onto the Insert O-ring (3) the nut (1) and tighten it using a dynamometric
flange and that it is not deformed. wrench.
Torque wrench setting: 280±310 Nm
T23
F1240579
GB e
Remove blocks T23 (used for extracting the pinion) and re-install
the arms.
For details, see «CHECKING WEAR AND REPLACING THE
BRAKING DISKS».
108
Lubrificare la superficie esterna del nuovo anello di Montare il supporto oscillante (5).
ITA tenuta (6) e montarlo nel corpo centrale (12) utilizzan- ITA
NOTA: Controllare attentamente l'orientamento.
do l'attrezzo T27.
Die aÈuûere FlaÈche des neuen Ringes (6) schmieren Die schwenkbare Halterung (5) montieren.
D und den zentralen KoÈrper (12) mit Hilfe des Werk- D
BEMERKUNG. Richtung sorgfaÈltig kontrollieren.
zeugs T27 montieren.
a b
Lubricar la superficie exterior del nuevo segmento de Montar el soporte oscilante (5).
ESP compresioÂn (6) y montarlo en el cuerpo central (12) ESP
NOTA. Controlar atentamente la orientacioÂn.
utilizando la herramienta T27.
Lubrifier la surface externe de la bague d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ Monter le support oscillant (5).

F neuve (6), puis monter celle-ci dans le corps central F
NOTE. ControÃler attentivement le sens.
(12) aÁ l'aide de l'outil T27.
Montare la flangia (2) completa della protezione (4) e Spalmare la porzione filettata del pignone (8) con
ITA mandarla in battuta. ITA Loctite 242.
Se necessario, per il calettamento della flangia (2), Montare l'attrezzo T20A (oppure T20B) ed impegnarlo
usare un mazzuolo in materiale plastico. per evitare la rotazione. Montare l'anello OR (3) ed il dado (1);
NOTA. Controllare che la protezione (4) sia ben forzata sulla serrare con chiave dinamometrica.
flangia e che non sia deformata. Coppia di serraggio: 280v310 Nm
Flansch (2) samt Schutzteil (4) montieren und bis zum Das Gewinde des Rads (8) mit Loctite 242 schmieren.
D Anschlag bringen. D Das Werkzeug T20A (T20B) montieren und blok-
Wenn noÈtig, den Flansch (2) mit einem Gummi- kieren, damit es nicht drehen kann.
hammer einschieben. O-Ring (3) und Mutter (1) montieren und mit einem Momenten-
c BEMERKUNG. Kontrollieren ob das Schutzteil (4) richtig auf dem
Flansch sitzt und nicht verformt ist.
d schluÈssel festschrauben.
Anzugsmoment: 280v310 Nm
Montar la brida (2) con su proteccioÂn (4) y llevarla Pasar en la parte roscada del pinÄoÂn (8) Loctite 242.
ESP hasta el tope. ESP Montar la herramienta T20A (o T20B) y bloquearla
Si fuera necesario, para ensamblar de la brida (2) usar para evitar la rotacioÂn.
un martillo de material plaÂstico. Montar el anillo OR (3) y la tuerca (1) y apretarlos con llave
NOTA. Controlar que la proteccioÂn (4) estaÂ bien forzada en la brida dinamomeÂtrica.
y que no estaÂ deformada. Par de torsioÂn: 280v310 Nm
Monter la flasque (2) eÂquipeÂe de protection (4), puis Enduire la partie fileteÂe du pignon (8) avec du Loctite
F envoyer celle-ci en buteÂe. F 242. Monter et fixer l'outil T20A (ou T20B) pour eÂviter
Si besoin, pour caler la flasque (2) utiliser un maillet en la rotation.
matieÁre plastique. Monter le OR (3) et l'eÂcrou (1), puis serrer aÁ l'aide de la cleÂ
NOTE. Veiller aÁ ce que la protection (4) est bien forceÂe sur la dynamomeÂtrique.
flasque et qu'elle n'est pas deÂformeÂe. Couple de serrage: 280v310 Nm
Asportare i blocchi T23 montati per l'estrazione del

ITA pignone e rimontare i bracci.
Per i dettagli, vedere «CONTROLLO USURA E
SOSTITUZIONE DISCHI FRENO».
BloÈcke T23 abnehmen, die zum Herausnehmen des

D Rads montiert wurden und Arme wieder montieren.
Siehe «VERSCHLEISS KONTROLLIEREN UND
BREMSSCHEIBEN AUSWECHSELN».
e
Sacar los bloques T23 montados para la extraccioÂn
ESP del pinÄoÂn y volver a montar los brazos.
Para los detalles, veÂase «CONTROL DEL DESGASTE
Y SUSTITUCION DE LOS DISCOS DEL FRENO».
Enlever les blocs T23 monteÂs pour l'extraction des

F pignons, puis remonter les bras.
Pour de plus amples deÂtails, voir «CONTROLE DE
L'USURE ET SUBSTITUTION DES FREINS».
109
SPECIAL TOOLS - ATTREZZI SPECIALI - SONDERWERZZEUGE
HERRAMIENTAS ESPECIALES - OUTILS SPECIAL
4.3 T1 T2
45°
20
25
1
32
32
=
200
=
90
= =
50
160
110
120± 0.1
120± 0.1
32
32
25
1
840
45 °
10 4.5 930
D1240043
D1240046
2313 2305
Ø25 T3 T4 Ø54,5 -- 00.1 T5

Ø30 Ø30
3 x45°
R35
50
2 x45°
0.8
46
50
70
Proteggere da
cementazione
14 10
150
Proteggere da
cementazione
0.8
0.8
2,5 -- 00.2
150
180
169
0.8
3 x15°
7
0.8
Ø54 + 00.1
Ø79
1.5x45°
Ø90 -- 0.15
.5
R5
R7
D1240047
1.5
3342
0.4 10
20 10
19 +-- 0.15
0.8 0.8
R2
9
Ø64 T7
0.8
3x15°
Ø35 ---- 0.08

0.12 Ø67
D1240045 Ø25
Ø50 D1240044
3364 2302
3x15°
50
Ø30 T6
Proteggere da
cementazione
3x45°
30
150
cementazione
Proteggere da
213
2 x45°
130
R1
155
3-- 00.2
0
13
1.5 x45°
0.8
.
0.8
R1
0
R1
52
50
10
R1 0.8
5x15°
Ø35
0.8
49.5
Ø50 ---- 0.1
0.2
89 D1240049
2301 D1240048 2303
110
Ø75 T8 Ø158.5
] Ø158.5
T9
Ø25
Ø50 H7 20° Ø35
Ø30
3x45°
0.8
50
16
0.8
R3
113
-- 0.3
-- 0.5
129
117
R3
148
102
Proteggere da
cementazione
Ø132
R5 20°
100
150
25
R3
8x15°
Ø40
Ø140
233
Ø50---- 0.12
0.08
Ø150
]
0
R1
Ø200 ±0.03
3-- 00.2
13
Ø95
0.8
0.8
] é148 For Timken thrust block
Per ralla TIMKEN
75
FuÈr TIMKEN scheibe

70
Para rangua TIMKEN

Pour ralla TIMKEN
é150 For Koyo thrust block
Per ralla KOYO
Ø35
5x15°
FuÈr KOYO scheibe

0.8
Ø50 ---- 0.1

0.2 Para rangua KOYO
Pour ralla KOYO
Ø56
D1240058
Ø64 D1240050
3363 3354
Ø40
T10 Ø35 T11
2 x45°
2x45°
120
1x45°
175
0.8
1---- 0.2
0.3
41
26
19
0.8 0.8
5.5
5x15°
0.8
0
Ø139.5 -- 0.1
R3
Ø153
10 15
Ø168
0.8
25
Ø180 D1260052
2x15°
Ø39 0.8
Ø50
3502 2304
D1260051
T12
R110
100
50
R1
5 5x45°
27.5 ±0.2
55 500
555
17±0.1
Ø23
125
D1260053
1867 125
111
Ø125 T13 T14
10x15°
Ø35.5 ---- 0.1
0.2 Ø41
0.8
Ø25
Ø20 + 00.2
1x45°
Ø15H7-n6
Ø5.5
R1
0.8
100
Ø14
2 x15°
5
8
0.8
36
31
26
24
20
17
20
238
0
R1 Ø25
0.8
Ø10
Ø35 M26X1.5
123
125
33
36
Ø5.5
18
22.5
0.8
33
Ø37H7-n6
6 9
10.5
Ø47
1 x45°
6
0.8
Ø106 ± 0.1
Ø20 + 00.2
R30
25
Ø25
Ø41 D1240055
D1240054
3333 3708
T15 T16A T16B

T16
3x30° 2x30°
24.5 ⫾ 0.0.1
Ø28.5 ± 0.2
-- 0.1
Ø19.9 +-- 0.1

+0
0
Ø19.9
Ø30
8.5
0.8
Ø6
5
10 46.45 ± 0.1 ± 0.5
15° 10 19.6
56.6 29.6 0.5x45°
Ø20 ++ 0.08
0.12
Ø27 ---- 0.1
0.2
T16C
Ø23
Ø30
0.8
Ø19.9 +-- 0.1
0
D1240056
1x30°
175
3424 2306 D1240057
T17 Ø45 ---- 0.05

0.10 T18
0.8
M8x1.25
1.5x45°
R2 5°
.5
0.8
15
30
3
1
44
68
0.8
14
75
6
7
38
1
1x45
30°
0.8
-- 0.1
Ø38.5 -- 0.2
Ø55 Ø6.5
Ø63 Ø20.4-- 00.05
Ø65 D1240059
Ø43.6 + 00.05
3332 2724 D1240072
112
T19 T20
T20A Ø185 ± 0.2
] 38x1.25x29 DIN 5480
Ø105 ± 0.2
120
80
Ø75
Ø55 ---- 0.08

0.12
]
Ø105 ± 0.2
25
5x15
Tornito Ø 125
0.8
32,25
10
15
125
25
35
Ø10
60
15
14
Ø34.5--+ 00.2
Ø50 2307
48
59
T20B 135 ±0.5

R5
30
97
73
M6
5
61.5
Ø20
61.5
Ø40H7-n6 1/4”
85
Ø44
126 12
Ø32 150
10
15
100
D1240060
3317/4 2308 Ø45 D1240061
T21 Ø85
T22
] 38x1.25x29 DIN 5480
Ø66
Ø55H7
Ø75
0.8
Ø55 –– 0.08
0.12
0.8
]
22
5 x15
Tornito Ø
0.8
75
32,25
7
10
35
6
60
15
14
34
60
6
3/4"
Ø15H7-n6
20
40
20
15°
60
100
275
D1240064
3317/3 D1240063
3317/A
113
99.5 T23 Ø30.2 ± 0.001 T24
Ø17
5X45°
25
Ø88.8 ± 0.005
131
Ø42
20
2309 2310
D1240066
D1240065
T25
T25A
Ø19.55H7
21°
0.8
R5
R2
T25B
23
Ø83
Ø40
Ø88
3x15°
R2
0.8
0.8
T25C
Ø20 +-- 00.1
0.8 T25C T25B

T25B T25A
T25A
21°
Ø89 ---- 0.12

0.08
Ø55
Ø83
0.8
23 40 R2
3329/2 73
0.8
R2
10 56
66 2311
T25C
Ø19.5 ---- 0.12
0.08
Ø16.5---- 0.2
0.1
M18x1.5
M18x1.5
473.5
433.5
0.8 0.8 0.8
Ø35
Ø40
15°
5 5x15°
11 30
45
3329/3 D1240067
T26 T27
4 x45°
Ø50
T26A
5x45°
15
14
63
40 300
87
T26B
74
Ø20 Ø110
R5
2 -- 0.2
Ø65
0
M14 x1
M14 x1
12
20
25 25
0.8
12
50
61-- 0.02
-- 0.01
3x15°
R5
41
0.8
30
Ø37.75 ++ 0.08
0.8
Ø41.2 +-- 0.03

0
Ø20 0.12
195
Ø9
T26C
95
Ø55 ---- 0.2

0.3
Ø89
Ø11
35
Ø99
Ø80
10
50
D1240073
Ø6.5
2312 D1240075
3327
114
T28
ENERPAC Mod. RCH-123 T28C T28B T28A
23
3x15°
R2
0.8
64 0.8
0.8
R3
21°
Ø89 ---- 0.08

0.12
Ø55
Ø83
Ø40
Ø40H8
Ø70
Ø54
0.8 R2
R2
10 56
66
312
M18X1.5
M18X1.5
267
50 5x15° 0.8
0.8
15°
Ø40H8
R3
-- 0.2
-- 0
Ø19
17min.
30
D1240074
3329
Ø28 ---- 0.08

0.12
T29 T31 T32
3x15°
-- 0.08
Ø24
0.8
-- 0.12
5x45°
10
5x45°
0.8
15
65 Ø30
Proteggere da
cementazione
30
50
30
Proteggere da
cementazione
110
140.5
130
120
5°
3x45°
152
Ø26
R5
0.5
Ø33 D1240093
3543
2x45°
15
R5
0.8
3
0.8
3x15°
T30
15
12 10
Ø50
0.8
M12x1.25
Ø64 + 0.2
0
1
0.8
Ø84.5
15
0.8
18
2x15°
Ø94.5 Ø55 ---- 0.2

0.3
Ø110 Ø60
35
D1240097
Ø72 ---- 0.2
0.3
17
D1240099
Ø16.2 -- 00.1
Ø17 ++ 0.2
0.1 D1240096
2316 3739 2317
115
116
TROUBLESHOOTING - RICERCA GUASTI - FEHLERSUCHE - BUSQUEDA DE AVERIAS -
RECHERCHE DES PANNES
PROBLEM - PROBLEMA - PROBLEM - CAUSE - CAUSE - URSACHE - CORRECTION - RIMEDI - ABHILFE -

PROBLEMA - PROBLEME CAUSAS - CAUSE REMEDIOS - REMEDE
Insufficient braking 1. Incorrect adjustment Inspect disc thickness and if discs are usable read-
just brakes to the specifications in the vehicle's man-
Frenatura insufficiente ual.
UngeneÈgende Bremswirkung 1. Incorretta registrazione Controllare lo spessore dei dischi freno e, se i dischi
Frenado insuficiente freno possono essere riutilizzati, registrarli come da
istruzioni del manuale del veicolo.
Freinage insuffisant
1. Fehlerhafte Einstellung BremsscheibenstaÈrke uÈberpruÈfen, koennen die
Bremscheiben noch verwendet werden, Spiel neu
einstellen gemaÈû Anweisungen im Handbuch des
Fahrzeuges.
1. Ajuste incorrecto Controlar el espesor de los discos del freno y, si los
discos del freno pueden volver a utilizarse, ajustarlos
de acuerdo con las instrucciones del manual del ve-
hõÂculo.
1. Mauvais reglage Inspecter l'eÂpaisseur des disques frein et, si les dis-
ques frein sont en bon etat, regler selon les instruc-
tions du manuel du vehicule.
2. Brake discs worn out Inspect disc thickness and replace if necessary.
2. Dischi freno usurati Controllare lo spessore dei dischi freno e, se neces-
sario, sostituirli.
2. Bremsscheiben verschlissen BremsscheibenstaÈrke uÈberpruÈfen und falls erforder-
lich ersetzen.
2. Discos del freno gastados Controlar el espesor de los discos del freno y, si fuera
necesario, sustituirlos.
2. Disques frein useÂs Inspecter l'eÂpaisseur des disques frein et si neÂces-
saire remplacer les disques.
Replace all seals in axle and master cylinder that

3. Incorrect brake fluid have made contact with the incorrect fluid and all
brake hoses.
If incorrect fluid leaked into axle oil, seals and o-rings
in axle must be replaced.
3. Fluido non idoneo nel circuito Sostituire tutti gli anelli di tenuta del ponte e del cilin-
dro master che sono venuti a contatto con il fluido
non idoneo noncheÂ i tubi flessibili.
Se il fluido non idoneo eÁ entrato nel ponte e si eÁ me-
scolato con il lubrificante devono essere sostituiti tutti
gli anelli di tenuta ed gli O-rings.
3. Ungeeignete Fluessigkeit in der Alle Dichtringe und GummischlaÈuche die mit der fal-
Bremsanlage schen FluÈssigkeit in Kontakt gekommen sind, in der
Achse und im Hauptbremszylinder ersetzen.
Sollte diese FluÈssigkeit auch in die Achse gelaugt
sein, sind auch saÈmtliche O-Ringe und Dichtringe
der Achse zu ersetzen.
3. Fluido no adecuado para el circuito Sustituir todos los segmentos de compresioÂn del
puente y del cilindro principal que han estado en con-
tacto con el fluido no adecuado como asõÂ tambieÂn los
tubos flexibles.
Si el fluido no adecuado ha entrado en el puente y se
ha mezclado con el lubricante, hay que sustituir to-
dos los segmentos de compresioÂn y los O-Rings.
3. Fluide inadeÂquat dans le circuit Substituer tous les joints d'eÂtencheiteÂ du pont et du
maõÃtre-cylindre qui ont eÂteÂ en contact avec ce fluide
mais aussi les tubes flexibles.
Si le fluide incorrect est entreÂ dans le pont et s'est
melange avec le lubrifiant tous les joints d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ
et o-ring doivent eÃtre changeÂs.
117
TROUBLESHOOTING - RICERCA GUASTI - FEHLERSUCHE - BUSQUEDA DE AVERIAS - RECHERCHE DES PANNES

Insufficient braking 4. Loss of brake fluid Inspect for and repair any leaks in outside circuit or
master cylinder.
Frenatura insufficiente If caused by incorrect brake fluid see correction N. 3.
UngeneÈgende Bremswirkung If leak is to the outside replace the o-rings between
the center and intermediate housings.
Frenado insuficiente If leak is to the inside replace above o-rings and brake
Freinage insuffisant piston o-rings.
4. Perdita del fluido dal circuito freno Controllare e riparare tutte le perdite del circuito ester-
no o del circuito master.
Se la causa eÁ dovuta al fluido non idoneo vedere rime-
dio n. 3.
Se la perdita eÁ verso l'esterno del ponte sostituire gli
O-ring tra la scatola centrale ed il coperchio interme-
dio.
Se la perdita eÁ verso l'interno del ponte, sostituire gli
O-ring sopra menzionati e quelli del pistone freno.
4. Verlust von BremsfluÈssigkeit AÈussere Bremsanlage und Hauptbremszylinder auf
OÈ lverluste pruÈfen.
Sollte der Verlust auf ungeeignete Bremsfluessigkeit
zuruÈckzufuÈhren sein, siehe Abhilfe N.3.
Sollte der Verlust nach aussen sein, die O-Ringe zwi-
schen dem AchsmittengehaÈuse und den Zwischen-
gehaÈuse ersetzen.
Sollte der Verlust nach innen sein, oben genannte O-
Ringe und jene der Bremskolben ersetzen.
4. PeÂrdida del fluido del circuito Controlar y reparar todas las peÂrdidas del circuito ex-
del freno terior o del cilindro principal.
Si la causa se debe al fluido no idoÂneo, veÂase el reme-
dio në3.
Si la peÂrdida es hacia fuera del puente, sustituir los O-
Ring entre la caja central y la tapa intermedia.
Si la peÂrdida es hacia el interior del puente, sustituir
los O-Ring mencionados maÂs arriba y los del pistoÂn
del freno.
4. FluideÂ dans le circuit de freinage Inspecter et reÂparer toutes les fuites du circuit ex-
terne ou du maõÃtre-cylindre.
Si la cause est duÃe aÁ l'utilisation d'un fluide non in-
dique voir remeÁde N. 3.
Si la fruite est vers l'exterieur du pont, substituer les
o-rings entre le carter central et les carters interme-
diaires.
Si la fruite est vers l'interieur du pont substituer les o-
rings mentionneÂs ci-dessus et ceux des pistons frein.
5. Overheated axle causing brake See «overheating» problem.

fluid to vaporize.
(Brake return when axle cools)
5. Surriscaldamento del ponte con va- Vedere problema: Surriscaldamento.
porizzazione del fluido.
(I freni ritornano quando il ponte si
raffredda)
5. Verdunstung der Bremsflussigkeit È berhitzung.
Siehe Problem: U
wegen UÈ berhitzung.
(Im abgekuÈhlten Zustand ist die
Bremswirkung wieder hergestellt)
5. Sobrecalentamiento del puente con VeÂase el problema: Sobrecalentamiento.
vaporizacioÂn del fluido.
(Los frenos vuelven a funcionar
cuando se enfrõÂa el puente)
5. Surchauffe du pont avec vaporisa- Voir probleme: Surchauffe.
tion du fluide.
(Les freins fonctionnent aÁ nouveau
quand le fluide se refroidit).
118
Soft brake pedal 6. Air in brake circuit Bleed brakes as described in the vehicle's service
manual.
Pedale del freno non risponde
6. Aria nel circuito frenante Spurgare il circuito frenante come da istruzioni di spur-
Leichtes Bremspedal go del manuale del veicolo.
El pedal del freno no funciona 6. Luft in der Bremsanlage Bremsen entluÈften gemaÈû Anweisungen im Hand-
Pedale du frein ne repond pas buch des Failrzeuges.
6. Aire en el circuito frenante Purgar el circuito frenante se acuerdo con las instruc-
ciones de purga del manual del vehõÂculo.
6. Air dans le circuit Purger le circuit de frein selon «instructions de purge»
du manuel du veÂhicule.
Ineffective safety brake 7. Incorrect adjustment See correction N. 1.

Freno negativo inefficiente 7. Registrazione incorretta Vedere rimedio N. 1.
Federspeicherbremse ohne 7. Fehlerhafte Einstellung des Siehe Abhilfe N. 1.
Funktion. Bremsscheibenspieles
Freno negativo ineficiente 7. Ajuste incorrecto VeÂase remedio N.1.
Inefficacite du frein negatif 7. Mauvais reglage Voir remeÁde N. 1.
8. Brake disc worn out See correction N. 2.

8. Dischi freno usurati Vedere rimedio N. 2.
8. Bremslamellen verschlissen Siehe Abhilfe N. 2.
8. Discos del freno gastados VeÂase remedio N. 2.
8. Usure disques frein Voir remeÁde N. 2.
Overheating 9. Oil level wrong Drain, flush and refill oil to proper level.
Surriscaldamento 9. Livello olio non corretto Scaricare, eseguire un lavaggio e riempire d'olio fino a
È berhitzung livello.
U
È lspiegel-Falscher
9. Niedriger O OÈ l ablassen, reinigen und richtigen O
È lstand wieder
Sobrecalentamiento È lstand
O herstellen.
Surchauffe 9. Nivel de aceite no correcto Descargar, ejecutar un lavado y llenar con aceite has-
ta el nivel.
9. Niveau d'huile pas incorrect Vidanger, rincer et refaire le niveau d'huile.
10. Too small of a brake gap Readjust brakes to the specifications in the vehicle's
service manual.
10. Poco gioco tra i dischi freno Registrare il freno come istruzioni da manuale del vei-
colo.
10. Zu wenig Spiel zwischen den Spiel gemaÈû Anweisungen im Handbuch des Fahr-
Bremslamellen zeuges herstellen.
10. Poco juego entre los discos del Ajustar el freno de acuerdo con las instrucciones del
freno manual del vehõÂculo
10. Peu de jeu entre les disques frein Regler le frein selon les instructions du manuel du veÂ-
hicule.
11. Park brake dragging Unlock the brake and adjust the correct gap.
11. Freno di parcheggio in trazione Sbloccare il freno ripristinando il gioco corretto.
11. Feststellbremse zieht Bremsen loÈsen und richtiges Lamellenspiel einstel-
len.
11. Freno de estacionamiento en Desbloquear el freno restableciendo el juego correcto.
traccioÂn
11. Frein de parc mal reÂgleÂ DeÂbloquer le frein et reÂgler le jeu.
119

Overheating 12. Incorrect brake fluid in system See correction N. 3.

Surriscaldamento 12. Fluido non idoneo nel circuito Vedere rimedio N. 3.
È berhitzung
U 12. Ungeeignete FluÈssigkeit in der Siehe Abhilfe N. 3.
Bremsanlage
Sobrecalentamiento
12. Fluido no adecuado en el circuito VeÂase remedio N. 3
Surchauffe
12. Fluide incorrect dans le circuit Voir remeÁde N. 3.
13. No free-pedal at master cylinder Readjust brake pedal as described in the vehicle's
service manual.
13. Non c'eÁ corsa a vuoto sul cilindro Registrare il pedale del freno come istruzioni da ma-
master nuale del veicolo.
13. Kein Leerweg am Bremspedal Bremspedal gemaÈû Anweisungen im Handbuch des
Fahrzeuges einstellen.
13. No hay carrera en vacõÂo en el Ajustar el pedal del freno de acuerdo con las instruc-
cilindro principal ciones del manual del vehõÂculo.
13. Pas de garde sur la pedale du ReÂgler la pedale du frein selon les instructions du ma-
maõÃtre-cylindre nuel du veÂhicule.
14. Restriction in brake lines Inspect for and replace damage lines.
14. Restringimento sul circuito del Controllare e riparare i condotti ammaccati o piegati.
freno
14. Verengung in der Bremsanlage Anlage uÈberpruÈfen und verbeulte oder geknickte Lei-
tungen ersetzen.
14. Circuito del freno restringido Controlar y reparar los conductos golpeados o plega-
dos.
14. Reglage sur circuit du frein Inspecter et reÂparer les conduites endommageÂes.
15. Restriction in return line of brake Inspect for and replace damaged return line.
Servo system Inspect for and remove any filter, tee'd in line or any
other source of back pressure from the return line.
15. Restringimento sul condotto di Controllare e riparare il condotto ammaccato o piegato.
ritorno del sistema servo Controllare e sostituire tutti i filtri e raccordi sul circuito o
qualsiasi altro ostacolo nel condotto di ritorno.
15. Verengung in der RuÈckflussleitung Anlage uÈberpruÈfen und verbeulte oder geknickte Lei-
des Servobremssystems tungen ersetzen.
Alle Filter und Abzweigungen in der Anlage uÈberpruÈ-
fen, saÈmtliche Hindernisse fuÈr den freien Durchfluû
entfernen.
15. Conducto de retorno del sistema Controlar y reparar el conducto golpeado o plegado.
servo restringido Controlar y sustituir todos los filtros y empalmes en el
circuito o cualquier otro obstaÂculo en el conducto de
retorno.
15. Etranglement sur la conduite de Inspecter et reÂparer la conduite endommageÂe.
retour du servo-frein Inspecter et changer tous les filtres, raccords en «T»
ou autre obstacle sur le circuit de retour.
16. Incorrect lubricant Change the retaining rings of the brake circuit and
brake pump.
16. Lubrificante non idoneo Sostituire gli anelli di tenuta del circuito freno e della
pompa freno.
16. Ungeeignetes Schmieroel Die Abdichtungsringe des Bremskreislaufs der Brem-
spumpe ersetzen.
16. Lubricante no adecuado Sustituir los segmentos de compresioÂn del circuito del
freno y de la bomba del freno.
16. Lubrifiant incorrect Replacer les anneaux d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ du circuit et de la
pompe de frein.
120
Diff-lock inoperative 17. If manual control, loose or misadju- Inspect and correct linkage and readjust as indicated
sted linkage in vehicle's service manual.
Il blocco differenziale non
funziona 17. Se il comando eÁ manuale: comando Controllare, riparare e registrare il comando indicato
scollegato o registrato male nel manuale del veicolo.
Differentialsperre ohne
Wirkung 17. Bei mechanisch betaÈtigter Sperre, Hebel uÈberpruÈfen und gemaÈû Anweisungen im Hand-
loser oder schlecht eingestellter buch des Fahrzeuges einstellen.
El bloque del diferencial Hebel
no funciona
17. Si el mando es manual: mando des- Controlar, reparar y ajustar el mando indicado en el
Mauvais fonctionnement du conectado o mal ajustado manual del vehõÂculo.
blocage du diffeÂrentiel
17. Si la commande est manuel: com- Inspecter, reÂparer er reÂgler la commande selon le ma-
mande deÂconnecteÂe ou mal reÂgleÂe nuel du veÂhicule.
18. If hydraulic control, problems in the Refer to the service manual for the vehicle.
hydraulic or electrical circuits of the
vehicle
18. Se il comando eÁ idraulico: problemi Fare riferimento alle istruzioni nel manuale del veicolo.
nel circuito elettrico del veicolo
18. Bei hydraulisch betaÈtigter Sperre, Siehe Anweisungen im Handbuch des Fahrzeuges.
Probleme in der hydraulischen oder
elektrischen Anlage des Fahrzeuges
18. Si el mando es hidraÂulico: problemas Consultar las instrucciones del manual del vehõÂculo.
en el circuito eleÂctrico del vehõÂculo
18. Si la commande est hydraulique: Voir instructions dans manuel du veÂhicule.
probleÁme dans le circuit eÂlectrique
dans le veÂhicule
19. If hydraulic control: problems in ac- Rebuilt cylinder.

tuating cylinder (noteable through
loss of hydraulic oil or increase of
the oillevel in axle)
19. Se il comando eÁ idraulico: problemi Controllare e riparare il cilindro.
nell'attuatore (caratterizzati da per-
dite del fluido idraulico o da aumen-
to del livello d'olio nel ponte)
19. Bei hydraulisch betaÈtigter Sperre, È berpruÈfen und Zylinder reparieren.
U
OÈ lverlust im BetaÈtigungszylinder
(erkentlich durch Verlust von hy-
draulisch Fluessigkeit oder Anstieg
des Oelniveaus in der Achse)
19. Si el mando es hidraÂulico: proble- Controlar y reparar el cilindro.
mas en el actuador (caracterizados
por peÂrdidas del fluido hidraÂulico o
por un aumento del nivel del aceite
en el puente)
19. Si la commande est hydraulique: Inspecter et reparer le cylindre.
probleÁmes dans le veÂrin (caracteri-
seÂs par des fuites de fluide hydrau-
lique ou augmentation du niveau
d'huile dans le pont)
20. If with lim. slip differential, worn Replace discs.

discs
20. Se il differenziale eÁ del tipo Sostituire i dischi.
autobloccante, dischi usurati
20. Wenn mit Selbstsperrdifferential, Scheiben ersetzen.
Scheiben verschlissen
20. Si el diferencial es del tipo autoblo- Sustituir los discos.
queante: discos gastados
20. Si avec diffeÂrentiel aÁ glissement Remplacer les disques.
limiteÂ, usure sur les disques
121

Oil coming out of breather 21. Leak in internal brake system See correction N. 2 and 3.
Olio fuoriesce dallo sfiato 21. Perdita di fluido idraulico dal siste- Vedere rimedio N. 2 e 3.
È laustritt aus dem EntluÈfter ma frenante
O
21. Verlust von hydraulisch FluÈssigkeit Siehe Abhilfe N. 2 und 3.
El aceite sale del purgador der Bremsanlage
Huile sort du reniflard 21. PeÂrdida de fluido hidraÂulico del sis- VeÂanse remedios N. 2 y 3.
tema frenante
21. Fuite de fluide hydraulique du sys- Voir remeÁde N. 2 et 3.
teme de freinage
22. Leak in diff-lock actuating cylinder See correction N. 19.

22. Perdita d'olio idraulico dal circuito Vedere rimedio N. 19.
del blocco differenziale
22. Verlust von Hydraulisch FluÈssigkeit Siehe Abhilfe N. 19.
der hydraulisch Anlage der Diffe-
rentialsperre
22. PeÂrdida de aceite hidraÂulico del cir- VeÂase remedio N. 19.
cuito del bloque del diferencial
22. Fuite d'huile hydraulique du circuit Voir remeÁde N. 19.
de blocage du diffeÂrentiel
NoSpin indexing noise when 23. Unequal tire pressure left anal right Inflate tires to the recommended pressure in the ser-
driving straight vice manual, or until the rolling radius is equal.
CAUTION! With NoSpin, fatigue
damage can occur on the side 23. Pressione disuguale nei pneumatici Gonfiare i pneumatici alla pressione raccomandata nel
with the larger tire. sui due lati manuale o comunque fino ad ottenere un raggio stati-
co uguale.
Il NoSpin eÁ rumoroso viaggian-
do sul rettilineo 23. UngleichmaÈssiger Reifendruck Reifen vorschriftsgemaÈû auf pumpen bis ein gleich-
ATTENZIONE! Con il NoSpin links und rechts groûer statischer Halbmesser erreicht wird.
possono verificarsi avarie da fa- 23. PresioÂn desigual en los neumaÂticos Hinchar los neumaÂticos a la presioÂn recomendada en
tica sul lato con il pneumatico a ambos lados el manual o, de todas formas, hasta obtener un rayo
piuÁ grande.
estaÂtico igual.
NoSpin macht GeraÈusche bei
Geracheausfahrt 23. Pressions diffeÂrentes dans les Gonfler les pneumatiques selon la pression recom-
ACHTUNG! Mit NoSpin koÈnnen
pneumatiques sur les deux cotes mandeÂe dans le manuel os jusq'aÁ obtenir le meÃme
auf der Seite mit dem groÈsseren du veÂhicule rayon sous charge.
Reifenradius ErmuÈdungsschaÈ-
den auftreten.
24. Different style, size or brand of tires Change tires to make the rolling radius equal.
El NoSpin hace ruido andando between left and right hand side Vary the tire pressure within the specifications until
en un rectilõÂneo the rolling radius is equal.
CUIDADO! con el No Spin se
pueden producir averõÂas por fa- 24. Pneumatico di disegno, marca o co- Cambiare pneumatici o rendere i raggi statici dei pneu-
tiga en un lado en el neumaÂtico struttore diversi sui due lati matici eguali.
maÂs grande. Variare la pressione dei pneumatici nei campi di tolle-
ranza prescritti dai costruttori dei pneumatici stessi, fi-
Le No-Spin fait du bruit en rou- no ad ottenere un raggio statico uguale.
lant en ligne droite
ATTENTION! Avec le NoSpin, 24. Unterschiedliche Reifen, -groÈûen - Reifen ersetzen sodaû ein gleich-groûer Statischer
des ruptures de fatigue peu- marken, links und rechts Halbmesser erreicht wird.
vent se produire du coÃteÂ des Reifendruck im Bereich der Vorschriften aÈndern bis
pneumatiques les plus grands. ein gleichgroûer Halbmesser erreicht wird.
24. NeumaÂticos de disenÄo, marca o fa- Cambiar los neumaÂticos o hacer que los rayos estaÂti-
bricante distintos a los dos lados cos de los neumaÂticos sean iguales.
Variar la presioÂn de los neumaÂticos en los campos de
tolerancia prescritos por los fabricantes de dichos
neumaÂticos, hasta obtener un radio estaÂtico igual.uÁ
24. Pneumatiques de sculptures ou de Changer les pneumatiques ou rendre les rayons sans
constructeurs differents sur les charge des pneumatiques eÂgaux.
deux coÃtes du vehicule Modifier la pression des pneumatiques dans les toleÂ-
rances prescrites par les constructeurs de ces me-
mes pneumatiques, jusq'aÁ obtenir un rayon sous
charge identique.
122
Noise during coast and under

power the same
25. Wheel bearings damaged Replace and adjust.
RumorositaÁ uguale sia in tiro
che in rilascio 25. Cuscinetti dei mozzi danneggiati Sostituire i particolari in avaria.
GeraÈusch im Zug und im 25. Lager der Radnaben beschaÈdigt BeschaÈdigte Teile gemaÈû Anweisungen.
Schub gleich stark 25. Cojinetes de los cubos danÄados Sustituir las piezas averiadas.
Ruido igual tanto en traccioÂn 25. Roulements des moyeux endom- Remplacer les pieÁces endommageÂes.
como en inercia mageÂs
Bruit en traction ou en retenue
Noise under power greater 26. Low oil level Refill oil to proper level.
than during coast
26. Livello olio basso Ripristinare il livello olio.
RumorositaÁ piuÁ elevata in tiro È lstand È lstand wieder
26. Niedriger O SchmieroÈl nachfuÈllen bis richtiger O
piuttosto che in rilascio
hergestellt ist.
GeraÈeusch staÈerker im Zug als
26. Nivel de aceite bajo Restablecer el nivel del aceite.
im Schub
26. Niveau d'huile insuffisant Refaire le niveau d'huile.
Ruido maÂs elevado en traccioÂn
que en inercia
Bruit pus eÂleve en traction 27. Incorrect lubricant See correction N. 16.
qu'en retenue. 27. Olio non idoneo Vedere rimedio N. 16.
27. Ungeeignetes SchmieroÈl Siehe Abhilfe N. 16.
27. Aceite no adecuado VeÂase remedio N. 16.
27. Huile incorrect Voir remeÁde N. 16.
28. Ring and pinion worn Inspect through top cover. Replace and adjust.
28. Coppia conica usurata Controllare attraverso il coperchio superiore.
Sostituire la coppia conica.
28. Kegel- und Tellerrad verschlissen Durch die obere Bohrung uÈberpruÈfen. Kegel- und Tel-
lerrad ersetzen.
28. Par coÂnico gastado Controlar a traveÂs de la tapa superior.
Sustituir el par coÂnico.
28. Usure du couple conique Inspectioner au travers du couvercle superieur.
Remplacer le couple conique.
29. Worn ring and pinion bearings Replace and adjust.

29. Cuscinetti della coppia conica Sostituire i particolari in avaria.
usurati
29. Kegelrollenlager des Kegel- und BeschaÈdigte Teile ersetzen.
Tellerradpaares verschlissen
29. Cojinetes del par coÂnico gastados Sustituir las piezas averiadas.
29. Usure des roulements du couple Remplacer les pieÁces endommageÂes.
conique
30. Worn planetary gears or bearings Replace.

30. Planetari o cuscinetti dell'epicicloi- Sostituire i particolari in avaria.
dale usurati
30. PlanetenraÈder oder Lager der Pla- BeschaÈdigte Teile ersetzen.
netenabtriebe verschlissen
30. Planetarios y cojinetes del epicicloi- Sustituir las piezas averiadas.
dal gastados
30. Usure des planeÂtaires ou roule- Remplacer les pieÁces endommageÂes.
ment de l'eÂpicycloõÈdale
123

Noise during coast greater 31. Loose pinion nut Inspect ring, pinion and pinion bearings. If unda-
than under power maged, retighten nut.
RumorositaÁ piuÁ elevata in rilas- 31. Ghiera pignone allentata Controllare la coppia conica ed i rispettivi cuscinetti,
cio piuttosto che in tiro se non fossero danneggiati serrare la ghiera.
GeraÈeusch staÈerker im Schub 31. Wellenmutter des Kegelritzels lose Kegel- und Tellerrad und Lager uÈberpruÈfen. Sollten
als im Zug diese nicht beschaÈdigt sein, Wellenmutter anziehen.
Ruido maÂs elevado en inercia 31. Virola del pinÄoÂn floja Controlar el par coÂnico y los cojinetes correspondientes.
que en traccioÂn
31. Ecrou du pinion deÂvisseÂ Inspecter le couple conique et les roulements et si
Bruit plus eÂleve en retenue rien n'est endommageÂ, resserrer l'ecrou.
qu'en traction
See correction N. 29.
32. Only pinion bearing damaged
32. Solo un cuscinetto del pignone eÁ
Vedere rimedio N. 29.
danneggiato
32. Nur eines der Lager des Kegelrit-
Siehe Abhilfe N. 29.
zels ist beschaÈdigt
32. SoÂlo un cojinete del pinÄoÂn estaÂ da-
VeÂase remedio N. 29.
nÄado
32. Seulement un roulement du pignon
Voir remeÁde N. 29.
est endommageÂ
Noise during turn

(without NoSpin) 33. Worn spider and/or side gears Replace.
Rumore sotto sterzo 33. Satelliti e/o planetari del differenzia- Sostituire i particolari danneggiati.
(senza NoSpin) le danneggiati
GeraÈusch waÈhrend der 33. Ausgleich kegelraÈder und/oder BeschaÈdigte Teile ersetzen.
Kurvenfahrt (ohne NoSpin) welleraÈder verschlissen
Ruido en la direccioÂn 33. SateÂlites y/o planetarios del diferen- Sustituir las piezas danÄadas.
(sin NoSpin) cial danÄados
Bruit en braquage 33. Satellites et/ou planeÂtaires du diffeÂ- Remplacer les pieÁces endommageÂes.
(sans NoSpin) rentiel endommageÂes
A «Stick slip» noise when 34. Worn or damaged cardanshaft Inspect and replace as described in vehicle's service
going from forward to reverse manual.
Un rumore tipo «Stick slip» si 34. Giunto cardanico danneggiato Controllare e sostituire il giunto come indicato nel ma-
manifesta durante l'inversione nuale del veicolo.
di marcia È berpruÈfen und Kardanwelle gemaÈû. Anweisungen
34. Kardanwelle beschaÈdigt U
«Stick slip» -GeraÈusch bei AÈn- im Handbuch des Fahrzeuges ersetzen.
derung der Fahrtrichtung
34. Junta cardaÂnica danÄada Controlar y sustituir la junta como se indica en el ma-
Un ruido tipo «Stick slip» se nual del vehõÂculo.
manifiesta al invertir la marcha
34. Joint cardan endommageÂ Inspecter et remplacer le joint cardan selon les indi-
Un bruit type «Stick slip» se cations du manuel du veÂhicule.
manifeste pendant l'inversion
35. Loose wheel Inspect for wheel and wheel stud damage. Replace if
needed and retorque lugnuts.
35. Ruota allentata Ispezionare eventuali danni al disco ed alle colonnette
del mozzo ruota, se necessario sostituire i particolari
danneggiati e serrare i dadi alla coppia prescritta.
35. Rad lose Eventuelle SchaÈden an der Felge und an den Radbol-
zen uÈberpruÈfen. Falls erforderlich beschaÈdigte Teile
ersetzen und Radmuttern gemaÈû vorgeschriebenem
Drehmoment anziehen.
35. Rueda floja Inspeccionar los posibles danÄos al disco y a las colum-
nas del cubo de la rueda; si fuera necesario, sustituir las
piezas danÄadas y apretar las tuercas al par prescrito.
35. Roue deÂvisseÂe Inspecter les eÂventuels dommages au disque et aux
goujons du moyeu de rue. Si neÂcessaire remplace les
pieces endommageÂes et serrer les eÂcrous au couple
prescrit.
124
A «Stick slip» noise when 36. Articulation box joint and achsel Inspect and replace.
going from forward to reverse shaft damaged
Un rumore tipo «Stick slip» si 36. Giunti della scatola snodo, semiassi Ispezionare e sostituire i particolari danneggiati.
manifesta durante l'inversione o snodi di sterzatura danneggiati
di marcia È berpruÈfen und beschaÈdigte Teile ersetzen.
36. Kupplung des GelenkgehaÈuseg, U
«Stick slip» -GeraÈusch bei AÈn- Halbachse beschaÈdigt
derung der Fahrtrichtung
36. Juntas de la caja de la roÂtula, semie- Inspeccionar y sustituir las piezas danÄadas.
Un ruido tipo «Stick slip» se je o perno de direccioÂn danÄados
manifiesta al invertir la marcha
36. Joint boõÃtier d'articulation, demi-es- Inspecter et remplacer les pieÁces endommageÂes.
Un bruit type «Stick slip» se sieu endommageÂ
manifeste pendant l'inversion
37. Spider pins loose in diff-carrier Inspect through top cover. Replace.
37. Satelliti liberi nella scatola differen- Controllare attraverso il coperchio superiore, sostituire
ziale i particolari danneggiati.
37. Ausgleich kegelraÈder im Differen- Durch die obere Bohrung uÈberpruÈfen. BeschaÈdigte
tial lose Teile ersetzen.
37. SateÂlites libres en la caja del dife- Inspectioner au travers du couvercle superieur.
rencial
37. Satellites libres dans le carter cen- Remplacer les pieÁces endommageÂes.
tral
38. Damaged or missing spider and/or See correction N. 33.

side gear washers
38. Rondelle di rasamento del differen- Vedere rimedio N. 33.
ziale usurate
38. Anlaufscheiben im Differential ver- Siehe Abhilfe N. 33.
schlissen
38. Arandelas de espesor del diferen- VeÂase remedio N. 33.
cial gastadas
38. Usure des rondelles du diffeÂrentiel Voir remeÁde N. 33.
125
OPTIONAL DEVICES
GB MECHANICAL PARKING BRAKE 4" INCOMING BRAKE (2 AND 3 FUNCTION VERSIONS)
. Removal and disassembly ................................... 128 . Disassembly....................................................................... 164
. Assembly and installation ................................................... 132 . Assembly ........................................................................... 174
EXTERNAL HYDRAULIC NEGATIVE BRAKE LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL UNIT (25% AND 45%)
. Removal and disassembly .................................................. 136 . Disassembly....................................................................... 184
EXTERNAL HYDRAULIC NEGATIVE BRAKE WITH QUICK RELEASE HYDRAULIC DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
INCOMING DRUM BRAKE INCORPORATED REDUCTION GEAR AND PINION (602)
DISPOSITIVI OPTIONALI
ITA FRENO DI STAZIONAMENTO A COMANDO MECCANICO FRENO IN ENTRATA DA 4" (A 2 E 3 FUNZIONI)
. Rimozione e smontaggio.................................... 128 . Smontaggio........................................................................ 164
. Assemblaggio ed installazione ............................................ 132 . Assemblaggio .................................................................... 174
FRENO NEGATIVO IDRAULICO ESTERNO DIFFERENZIALE A SLITTAMENTO LIMITATO (25% E 45%)
. Rimozione e smontaggio .................................................... 136 . Smontaggio........................................................................ 184
FRENO NEGATIVO IDRAULICO ESTERNO CON SBLOCCAGGIO RAPIDO BLOCCAGGIO DIFFERENZIALE A COMANDO IDRAULICO
FRENO A TAMBURO IN ENTRATA RIDUTTORE INTEGRATO (602)
OPTIONEN
D FESTSTELLBREMSE MIT MECHANISCHER STEUERUNG BREMSE AM EINGANG ZU 4" (MIT 2 UND 3 FUNKTIONEN)
. Entfernen und abmontieren............................... 128 . Abmontieren ...................................................................... 164
. Zusammenbau und Installation ........................................... 132 . Zusammenbau ................................................................... 174
AÈUûERE HYDRAULISCHE NEGATIVBREMSE È GEN (25% UND 45%)
DIFFERENTIAL MIT BEGRENZTEM GLEITVERMO
. Entfernen und abmontieren................................................. 136 . Abmontieren ...................................................................... 184
AÈUûERE HYDRAULISCHE NEGATIVBREMSE MIT SCHNELLENTSICHERUNG DIFFERENTIALBLOCKIERUNG MIT HYDRAULISCHER STEUERUNG
TROMMELBREMSE AM EINGANG INTEGRIERTER REDUZIERER (602)
DISPOSITIVI OPTIONALI
ESP GRUPO FRENO ESTACIONAMIENTO MECANICO FRENO EN ENTRADA DE 4" (A 2 Y 3 FUNCIOONES)
. Remocion y desmontaje.................................... 128 . Desmontaje........................................................................ 164
. Asemblaje y instalacion ...................................................... 132 . Instalacion ......................................................................... 174
FRENO NEGATIVO HYDRAULICO EXTERIOR DIFERENCIAL A DESLIZAMIENTO LIMITADO (25% Y 45%)
. Remocion y desmontaje ..................................................... 136 . Desmontaje........................................................................ 184
FRENO NEGATIVO HYDRAULICO ESTERNO CON SBLOQUEO RAPIDO BLOQUEO DIFERENCIAL A MANDO HYDRAULICO
FRENO DE TAMBOR EN ENTRADA REDUCTOR ENCORPORADO Y PINON (602)
DISPOSITIFS OPTIONNELS
F FREIN DE STATIONNEMENT MECANIQUE FREIN EN ENTREE 4" (A 2 ET 3 FONCTIONS)
. Enlever et deÂmonter ......................................... 128 . DeÂmonter........................................................................... 164
. Assemblage et installation .................................................. 132 . Assembler.......................................................................... 174
FREIN NEGATIF HYDRAULIQUE EXTERNE DIFFERENTIEL A GLISSEMENT REDUIT (25% ET 45%)
. Enlever et deÂmonter ........................................................... 136 . DeÂmonter........................................................................... 184
FREIN NEGATIF HYDRAULIQUE EXTERNE AVEC DEBLOCAGE RAPIDE BLOCAGE DIFFERENTIEL A COMMANDE HYDRAULIQUE
FREIN A TAMBOUR EN ENTREE REDUCTEUR INTEGRE (602)
126
(9$2!5,)#.%'!4)6%"2!+% &2%./.%'!4)6/)$2!5,)#/
'" 2EMOVALANDDISASSEMBLY )4! 2IMOZIONEESMONTAGGIO
!SSEMBLYANDINSTALLATION !SSEMBLAGGIOEDINSTALLAZIONE
(9$2!5,)3#(%.%'!4)6"2%-3% &2%./.%'!4)6/(9$2!5,)#/
$ %NTFERNENUNDABMONTIEREN %30 2EMOCIONYDESMONTAJE
:USAMMENBAUUND)NSTALLATION !SEMBLAJEYINSTALACION
&2%)..%'!4)&(9$2!5,)15%
& %NLEVERETD£MONTER
!SSEMBLAGEETINSTALLATION
127
HOW TO DISASSEMBLE THE MECHANIC PARKING BRAKE UNIT - SMONTAGGIO GRUPPO FRENO DI STAZIONAMENTO A COMANDO
MECCANICO - MECHANISQUE HANDBREMSE ABMONTIEREN - DESMONTAJE GRUPO FRENO ESTACIONAMIENTO MECANICO -
DEMONTAGE DU FREIN DE STATIONNEMENT MECANIQUE
2
3
F1240657 F1240658
GB a GB b
NOTE. The same disassembly procedure applies to both arms and Draw out the screw (1) locking the washer (2) that stops the lever
may only be carried out when levers (3) are released. (3).
Disconnect the tension bar from the steering case. For details, see
«HOW TO REMOVE THE STEERING CYLINDER».
6
2
4 3 7
12 13
F1240659
5 F1240660
GB c GB d
Remove washer (2), lever (3) and O-rings (4). Draw out the screws (5) and remove bush (6) along with O-ring (7).
Mark the positions of levers (3) in relation to the thrust levers (12)
and (13).
10
8 F1240641
9 F1240661
GB e GB f
Connect the whole arm (8) to the hoist and put the rod under light Remove the braking disks (9) and the whole piston (10).
tension. For details, see «CHECKING AND REPLACING THE BRAKING
Remove the whole arm; for details, see «CHECKING AND DISKS».
REPLACING THE BRAKING DISKS».
128
NOTA. Lo smontaggio eÁ uguale per i due bracci e puoÁ Asportare la vite (1) di bloccaggio della rondella (2) di
ITA essere eseguito solo a leve (3) libere. ITA ritegno della leva (3).
Scollegare dalla scatola snodo il tirante di sterzatura.
Per i dettagli, vedere «RIMOZIONE CILINDRO DI STERZATURA».
BEMERKUNG. Beide Arme werden auf dieselbe Die Schraube (1) zur Befestigung der Unterlegscheibe
D Weise abmontiert; dies kann jedoch nur erfolgen, D (2) des Hebels (3) abschrauben.
wenn die Hebel (3) frei sind.
Spannstange vom GelenkgehaÈuse abtrennen.
a Weitere Einzelheiten im Paragraph «LENKZYLINDER ABMONTIE-
REN».
b
NOTA El desmontaje es ugual por los dos brazos y Sacar el tornillo (1) de bloqueo de la arandela (2) de
ESP puede ser efectuado solo a palancas (3) libres. ESP retencion palanca (3).
Desconectar del carter de las rotulas el tirante de
direccion.
Para los detalles, vease «REMOCION CILINDRO DE DIRECCION».
NOTE. Le deÂmontage est pareil pour les deux bras et Enlever la vis (1) de blocage de la rondelle (2) de
F ne peut eÃtre effectueÂ que lorsque les leviers (3) sont F fixation du levier (3).
libres.
DeÂbrancher de la boõÃte articulation la tringle de braquage.
Pour tout deÂtail, voir «DEPOSE CYLINDRE DE BRAQUAGE».
Rimuovere la rondella (2), la leva (3) e le guarnizioni Asportare le viti (5) e rimuovere la boccola (6) completa
ITA OR (4). ITA di guarnizione OR (7).
Contrassegnare le posizioni delle leve (3) rispetto le
leve di spinta (12) e (13).
Unterlegscheibe (2), Hebel (3) und O-Ringe (4) ab- Schrauben (5) abschrauben und Buchse (6) samt O-
D nehmen. D Ring (7) abnehmen.
Die Positionen der Hebel (3) im VerhaÈltnis zu den
Druckhebeln (12) und (13) kennzeichnen.
c d
Remover la arandela (2), la palanca (3) y las Sacar los tornillos (5) y remover el casquillo (6)
ESP guarniciones OR (4). ESP completo de guarniciones OR (7).
Senalar las posicioÁnes de las palancas (3) respecto a
las palancas de empuje (12)
Enlever la rondelle (2), le levier (3) et les garnitures OR Enlever les vis (5) et extraire la douille (6) eÂquipeÂe de
F (4). F garnitures OR (7).
Marquer les positions des leviers (3) par rapport aux
leviers (12) et (13).
Agganciare il braccio completo (8) ad un mezzo di Rimuovere i dischi freni (9) ed il pistone completo (10).
ITA sollevamento e mettere il leggera tensione la fune. ITA Per i dettagli, vedere «CONTROLLO E SOSTITUZIO-
Rimuovere il braccio completo; per i dettagli, vedere NE DISCHI FRENI».
«CONTROLLO E SOSTITUZIONE DISCHI FRENI».
VollstaÈndigen Arm (8) mit einem Hebekarren anheben Bremsscheiben (9) und den ganzen Kolben (10)
D bis das Seil gespannt ist. D abnehmen. Weitere Einzelheiten im Paragraph
VollstaÈndigen Arm abtrennen; weitere Einzelheiten im «BREMSSCHEIBEN KONTROLLIEREN UND AUS-
Paragraph «BREMSSCHEIBEN KONTROLLIEREN UND AUS- WECHSELN».
e WECHSELN». f
Enganchar el brazo completo (8) y un medio de Remover los discos frenos (9) y el piston completo
ESP levantamiento y poner en ligera tension el cable. ESP (10).
Remover el brazo completo; por los detalles, vease Por los detalles, vease «CONTROL Y SUSTITUCION
«CONTROL Y SUSTITUCION DISCOS FRENOS». DISCOS FRENOS».
Accrocher le bras complet (8) aÁ un moyen de relevage Enlever les disques freins (9) et le piston complet (10).
F et mettre la corde leÂgeÁrement en tension. F Pour tout deÂtail, voir «CONTROLE ET SUBSTITUTION
Enlever le bras complet: pour tout deÂ tail, voir DES DISQUES FREINS».
«CONTROLE ET SUBSTITUTION DES DISQUES FREINS».
129
HOW TO DISASSEMBLE THE MECHANIC PARKING BRAKE UNIT - SMONTAGGIO GRUPPO FRENO DI STAZIONAMENTO A COMANDO
MECCANICO - MECHANISQUE HANDBREMSE ABMONTIEREN - DESMONTAJE GRUPO FRENO ESTACIONAMIENTO MECANICO -
DEMONTAGE DU FREIN DE STATIONNEMENT MECANIQUE
10
8
11
14 12 13
F1240662 F1240663
GB a GB b
If pins (11) need replacing, block the piston (10) into a vice whose If thrust levers (12) and (13) need replacing, remove the U-joint (14)
jaws are covered in smooth material and remove the pins. before removing the arms (8).
For details, see «HOW TO REMOVE THE U-JOINT».
1
16 2
15 4
3
4
5 6
GB c 12 GB d
13
11
10
8 14
9
11
F1240079
GB e GB f
130
Se si devono sostituire i puntali (11), bloccare il Se si devono sostituire le leve di spinta (12) e (13),
ITA pistone (10) in una morsa con ganasce in materiale ITA prima di rimuovere i bracci (8) rimuovere il giunto
tenero e rimuovere i puntali. cardanico (14).
Per i dettagli, vedere «RIMOZIONE DEL DOPPIO GIUNTO
CARDANICO».
Falls die Schafte (11) ausgewechselt werden sollen, Falls die Druckhebel (12) und (13) ausgewechselt
D Kolben (10) in einem Spannbackenpaar aus weichem D werden sollen, zuerst die Doppelgelenkwelle (14) und
Material blockieren und Schafte abnehmen. dann die Arme (8) abnehmen. Weitere Einzelheiten im
Paragraph «DOPPELGELENKWELLE INSTALLIEREN».
a b
Si se deben cambiar las puntas (11), bloquear el Si se deben cambiar las palancas de empuje (12) y
ESP piston (10) en un corchete con mordazas en material ESP (13), antes de remover los brazos (8) remover los
tierno y remover las puntas. semiejes (14).
Por los detalles, vease «REMOCION DE LOS SEMIEJES».
Si l'on doit substituer les tiges (11), bloquer le piston Si l'on doit substituer les leviers de pousseÂe (12) et
F (10) dans un eÂtau aÁ maÃchoire en mateÂriel tendre, puis F (13), avant d'enlever les bras (8) enlever le joint de
enlever les tiges. cardan double (14).
Pour tout deÂtail, voir «DEPOSE DE JOINT DE CARDAN DOUBLE».
ITA ITA
D D
c d
ESP ESP
F F
ITA ITA
D D
e f
ESP ESP
F F
131
HOW TO ASSEMBLE THE MECHANIC PARKING BRAKE UNIT - ASSEMBLAGGIO GRUPPO FRENO DI STAZIONAMENTO A COMANDO
MECCANICO - MECHANISQUE HANDBREMSE MONTIEREN - ASEMBLAJE GRUPO FRENO ESTACIONAMIENTO MECANICO -
ASSEMBLAGE DU FREIN DE STATIONNEMENT MECANIQUE
10
11
14 12 13
F1240663 F1240664
GB a GB b
Install thrust levers (12) and (13), then install the U-joint (14). For Apply Loctite 270 to the threaded portion of the pins (11) and fit
details, see «HOW TO INSTALL THE U-JOINT». them onto the piston (10).
Block them: torque wrench setting 30 ± 35 Nm.
10
9 F1240661
8 F1240641
GB c GB d
Re-install the piston (10) and the braking disks (9). For details, see Install the arms (8) into the main body; check flatness and block
«HOW TO ASSEMBLE THE BRAKING UNITS». arms following the appropriate procedures illustrated in section
«HOW TO ASSEMBLE THE BRAKING UNITS».
6
1
3
5
F1240665 F1240666
GB e GB f
Install the bush (6) complete with O-ring (7) and block it with screws Install in sequence the lower O-ring (4), the lever (3) and the washer
(5). Tighten screws with a torque wrench setting of 23.8 ± 26.2 Nm. (2) with the relative O-ring (4). Block with screw (1) and tighten
using a torque wrench setting of 23.8 ± 26.2 Nm.
CAUTION! Refer and keep to the positions marked during
disassembly.
132
Montare le leve di spinta (12) e (13) e successivamente Spalmare la filettatura dei puntali (11) con Loctite 270
ITA il doppio giunto cardanico (14). ITA e montarli sul pistone (10).
Per i dettagli di montaggio del doppio giunto cardani- Bloccarli con una coppia di serraggio di 30v35 Nm.
co, vedere «INSTALLAZIONE DEL DOPPIO GIUNTO CARDANI-
CO».
Druckhebel (12) und (13) montieren; danach Doppel- Schafte (11) mit Loctite 270 schmieren und auf den
D gelenkwelle (14) montieren. D Kolben (10) montieren.
Weitere Einzelheiten im Paragraph «DOPPELGELEN- Anzugsmoment: 30v35 Nm.
KWELLE INSTALLIEREN».
a b
Montar la palancas de empuje (12) y (13) y al final los Pasar la rosca de las puntales (11) con Loctite 270 y
ESP semiejes (14). ESP montarlas sobre los pistones (10).
Por los detalles de montaje de los semiejes, vease Bloquearlos con un par de torsion de 30v35 Nm.
«INSTALACION DE LOS SEMIEJES».
Monter les leviers de pousseÂe (12) et (13) et ensuite le Enduire le filetage des tiges (11) avec du Loctite 270
F joint de cardan double (14). F puis les monter sur le piston (10).
Pour tout deÂtail, voir «DEPOSE DE JOINT DE Bloquer aÁ un couple de serrage de 30v35 Nm.
CARDAN DOUBLE».
Rimontare il pistone (10) ed i dischi freno (9). Montare i bracci (8) sul corpo centrale; controllare il
ITA Per i dettagli, vedere «ASSEMBLAGGIO DEI GRUPPI ITA livellamento e quindi bloccarli con le modalitaÁ descritte
DI FRENATURA». per l'«ASSEMBLAGGIO DEI GRUPPI DI FRENATU-
RA».
Kolben (10) und Bremsscheiben (9) wieder montieren. Die Arme (8) auf den zentralen KoÈrper montieren;
D Weitere Einzelheiten im Paragraph «ZUSAMMENBAU D danach abrichten und laut Anweisungen des Para-
DER BREMSAGGREGATE». graphs «ZUSAMMENBAU DER BREMSAGGREGAT»
blockieren.
c d
Remontar los pistones (10) y los discos frenos (9). Montar los brazos (8) sobre el cuerpo central, controlar
ESP Por los detalles, vease «ASEMBLAJE DE LOS ESP el nivelamiento y entonces bloquearlos con las
GRUPOS DE FRENADURA». modalidades descritas por «ASEMBLAJE DE LOS
GRUPOS DE FRENADURA».
Remonter le piston (10) et les disques freins (9). Monter les bras (8) sur le corps central; controÃler le
F Pour tout deÂtail, voir «ASSEMBLAGE DES GROUPES F niveau, puis bloquer en suivant le mode deÂcrit dans
DE FREINAGE». l'«ASSEMBLAGE DES GROUPES DE FREINAGE».
Montare la boccola (6) completa di guarnizione OR (7) Montare nell'ordine la guarnizione OR inferiore (4), la
ITA e bloccarla con le viti (5). ITA leva (3) e la rondella (2) completa della relativa
Serrare le viti con una coppia di 23,8v26,2 Nm. guarnizione OR (4).
Bloccarla con la vite (1) serrata ad una coppia di 23,8v26,2 Nm.
ATTENZIONE! Rispettare le posizioni contrassegnate in fase di
smontaggio.
Buchse (6) samt O-Ring (7) montieren und mit den Der Reihenfolge nach den unteren O-Ring (4), Hebel
D Schrauben (5) festschrauben. D (3) und Unterlegscheibe (2) samt O-Ring (4) montieren.
Anzugsmoment der Schrauben: 23,8v26,2 Nm. Mit der Schraube (1) festschrauben. Anzugsmoment
der Schraube: 23,8v26,2 Nm.
e f ACHTUNG! Die beim Abmontieren markierten Positionen einhal-
ten.
Montar el casquillo (6) completa de guarnicion OR (7) y Montar en el orden la guarnicion OR inferior (4), la
ESP bloquearla con tornillos (5). ESP palanca (3) y la arandela (2) completa de la relativa
Apretar los tornillos con un par de 23,8v26,2 Nm. guarnicion OR (4).
Bloquearla con el tornillo (1) apretada a un par de 23,8v26,2 Nm.
ATENCION! Respectar las posicioÁnes senaladas en fase de
montaje.
Monter la douille (6) eÂquipeÂe de garniture OR (7) et Monter dans l'ordre la garniture OR infeÂrieure (4), le
F bloquer cette dernieÁre avec les vis (5). F levier (3) et la rondelle (2) eÂquipeÂe de sa relative
Serrer les vis aÁ un couple de serrage de 23,8v26,2 garniture OR (4).
Nm. Bloquer celle-ci avec la vis (1) serrer aÁ un couple de 23,8v26,2 Nm.
ATTENTION! Respecter les positions noteÂes en phase de
deÂmontage.
133
HOW TO ASSEMBLE THE MECHANIC PARKING BRAKE UNIT - ASSEMBLAGGIO GRUPPO FRENO DI STAZIONAMENTO A COMANDO
MECCANICO - MECHANISQUE HANDBREMSE MONTIEREN - ASEMBLAJE GRUPO FRENO ESTACIONAMIENTO MECANICO -
ASSEMBLAGE DU FREIN DE STATIONNEMENT MECANIQUE
16 6
3
16
15
8÷10 N
3 (0,8÷1 kg)
F1240936 F1240938
GB a GB b
Connect the braking circuit and apply maximum working pressure Apply a force of 8 ± 10 N (0.8 ± 1 kg) to lever (3). Direct the force
to set the disks. towards the braking direction in order to eliminate the idle stroke.
Release the pressure, loosen nut (15) and unscrew dowel (16) by a While the force is being applied, tighten dowel (16) until it is caused
few turns. to rest onto bush (6).
16
15
F1240936
GB c GB d
Lock dowel (16) in this position with nut (15). CAUTION! After connecting the control cable, check that when
Torque wrench setting: 20 ± 25 Nm. brakes are released both dowels (16) do lean against bush (6).
CAUTION! The idle stroke should be eliminated without preloading
thrust levers (12) and (13).
GB e GB f
134
Collegare il circuito frenante ed inserire la massima Applicare alla leva (3) una forza di 8v10 N (0,8v1 kg),
ITA pressione di lavoro per assestare i dischi. ITA diretta nel senso di frenatura per eliminare la corsa a
Rilasciare la pressione, allentare il dado (15) e svitare vuoto.
di qualche giro il grano (16). Mantenendo la forza, avvitare il grano (16) fino all'appoggio sulla
boccola (6).
Den Bremskreislauf anschlieûen und den maximale Auf den Hebel (3) eine Kraft von 8v0 N (0,8v1 kg) in
D Arbeitsdruck einlassen, um die Scheiben zu setzen. D die Bremsrichtung anbringen, um den leeren Lauf
Den Druck ablassen, die Mutter (15) lockern und den auszuschlieûen.
Stift (16), um einige Umdrehungen aufschrauben. Bei angebrachter Kraft, Stift (16) aufschrauben, bis er an der
a b Buchse (6) anliegt.
Conectar el circuito frenante y introducir la maxima Aplicar a la palanca (3) una fuerza de 8v10 N (0,8v1
ESP presioÁn de trabajo para ajustar los discos. ESP kg), directa en el sentido de frenadura para eliminar la
Soltar la presion, aflojar las tuercas (15) y destornillar carrera a vacio.
de algun giro la espiga (16). Manteniendo la fuerza, atornillar la espiga (16) hasta el apoyo
sobre el casquillo (6).
Brancher le circuit freinant et inseÂrer le maximum de Appliquer au levier (3) une contrainte de 8v10 N
F pression d'usinage pour ajuster les disques. F (0,8v1 kg), orienteÂe dans le sens du freinage pour
RelaÃcher la pression, desserrer l'eÂcrou (15) et deÂvisser eÂliminer la course aÁ vide.
le grain (16) de quelques tours. En maintenant la contrainte, visser le grain (16) jusqu'aÁ ce qu'il se
pose sur le fourreau (6).
Bloccare il grano (16) in questa posizione con il dado (15). ATTENZIONE! Dopo il collegamento del cavo di coman-
ITA Coppia di serraggio: 20v25 Nm. ITA do, controllare che in fase di rilascio dei freni, ambedue i
ATTENZIONE! La corsa a vuoto va eliminata senza grani (16) vadano in appoggio sulla boccola (6).
precaricare le leve di spinta (12) e (13).
Stift (16) in dieser Position mit der Mutter (15) blok- ACHTUNG! Nach dem Anschluû des Steuerkabels,
D kieren. D kontrollieren, ob beim Loslassen der Bremsen, beide
Anzugsmoment: 20v25 Nm. Stifte (16) an der Buchse anliegen (6).
ACHTUNG! Der leere Lauf muû beseitigt werden ohne die
c Druckhebel (12) und (13) vorzuladen. d
Bloquear la espiga (16) en esta colocacion con la ATENCION! Despues de la conexion del cable de
ESP tuerca (15). ESP mando, controlar que en fase de suelte de los frenos,
Par de torsion: 20v25 Nm. las dos espigas (16) vayan en apoyo sobre el
ATENCION! La carrera a vacio debe de ser eliminada sin precargar casquillo (6).
las palancas de impulso (12) y (13).
Bloquer le grain (16) dans cette position aÁ l'aide de ATTENTION! ApreÁs avoir brancheÂ le caÃ ble de
F l'eÂcrou (15). F commande, controÃler que pendant la phase de
Couple de serrage: 20v25 Nm. relaÃchement des freins, les deux grains (16) aillent
ATTENTION! La course aÁ vide doit eÃtre eÂlimineÂe sans preÂcharger se poser sur l'embout (6).
les leviers d'appui (12) et (13).
ITA ITA
D D
e f
ESP ESP
F F
135
HOW TO REMOVE AND DISASSEMBLE THE EXTERNAL HYDRAULIC NEGATIVE BRAKE - RIMOZIONE E SMONTAGGIO FRENO NEGATIVO
IDRAULICO ESTERNO - AÈUûERE HYDRAULISCHE NEGATIVBREMSE ABMONTIEREN - REMOCION Y DESMONTAJE FRENO NEGATIVO
HYDRAULICO EXTERIOR - ENLEVER ET DEMONTER DU FREIN NEGATIF HYDRAULIQUE EXTERNE
F1240947 F1240951
bar GB a GB b
Insert pressure into cylinder (4) in order to release the brakes. Loosen and remove the external nut (7).
NOTE. If the machine hydraulic system cannot be used, use an
external manual pump.
3
8
4
2
F1240948 F1240949
GB c GB d
Release the pressure in the cylinder and disconnect the pressure Remove the snap ring (1) that checks the support (8) and remove
delivery tube. the distance piece (2).
Remove the fulcrum pin (3) from the cylinder (4).
4 D
6 5
9
4 13
12
8 10
F1240950 F1240747
GB e GB f
Remove the cylinder assembly (4) complete with rod (5), internal Place cylinder (4) into a vice with the spring seat side (10) engaged
nut (6) and support (8). in it and, using a bar "D", loosen and remove the cylinder unit (9)
complete with piston (13) and spring (12).
136
Immettere pressione nel cilindro (4) per sbloccare i Allentare ed asportare il dado esterno (7).
ITA freni. ITA
NOTA. Se non eÁ possibile utilizzare l'impianto
idraulico macchina, utilizzare una pompa manuale esterna.
Den Druck in den Zylinder (4) lassen, um die Bremsen Die aÈuûere Mutter (7) abschrauben.
D frei zu machen. D
BEMERKUNG: Falls die hydraulische Anlage der
Maschine nicht verwendet werden kann, eine manuelle getrennte
a Pumpe verwenden. b
Meter presioÁn en el cilindro (4) para bloquear los Aflojar y sacar la tuerca esterna (7).
ESP frenos. ESP
NOTA. Si no es posible utilisar el equipo hydralico
maquina, utilisar una pompa manual exterior.
Envoyer de la pression dans le cylindre (4) pour Desserrer et enlever l'eÂcrou externe (7).
F deÂbloquer les freins. F
NOTE. Si utiliser l'installation hydraulique de la
machine n'est pas possible, utiliser une pompe manuelle externe.
Rilasciare la pressione del cilindro e scollegare il tubo Rimuovere l'anello elastico (1) di ritegno supporto (8)
ITA di mandata della pressione. ITA ed asportare il distanziale (2).
Rimuovere il perno di fulcro (3) del cilindro (4).
Den Druck vom Zylinder ablassen und die Druck- Den Kolbenring (1) der Halterung (8) abnehmen und
D leitung abtrennen. D das DistanzstuÈck (2) abnehmen.
Den Zentrierstift (3) des Zylinders (4) abnehmen.
c d
Solter la presioÁn del cilindro y desconectar el tubo de Remover el anillo elastico (1) de retencion suporte (8) y
ESP ida de la presioÁn. ESP sacar el distancial (2).
Remover la rotula (3) del cilindro (4).
RelaÃcher la pression du cylindre et deÂbrancher le tube Enlever l'anneau aÁ ressort (1) de retenue au support
F de refoulement de pression. Enlever l'axe du point F (8), puis enlever l'entretoise (2).
d'appui (3) du cylindre (4).
Rimuovere il gruppo cilindro (4), completo di asta (5), Fissare il cilindro (4) in una morsa dal lato sede molla
ITA dado interno (6) e supporto (8). ITA (10) e, utilizzando una barra "D", allentare ed
asportare il corpo cilindro (9) completo di pistone (13)
e la molla (12).
Das Zylinderaggregat (4) samt Stab (5), innere Mutter Den Zylinder (4) in einem Spannstock an der Feder-
D (6) und Halterung (8) abnehmen. D seite (10) einklemmen und mit dem Stab "D" den
ZylinderkoÈrper (9) lockern und samt Kolben (13) und
Feder (12) abnehmen.
e f
Remover el grupo cilindro (4), completo de varilla (5), Fijar el cilindro (4) en un corchete del lado muelle (10)
ESP tuerca interna (6) y suporte (8). ESP y, utilizando un varilla "D", aflojar y sacar el cuerpo
cilindro (9) completo de piston (13) y el muelle (12).
Enlever le groupe cylindre (4), complet de tige (5), Fixer le cylindre (4) dans un eÂtau du coÃteÂ du sieÁge
F eÂcrou interne (6) et support (8). F ressort (10), puis aÁ l'aide dune barre "D", desserrer et
enlever le corps cylindre (9) complet du piston (13) et
du ressort (12).
137
HOW TO REMOVE AND DISASSEMBLE THE EXTERNAL HYDRAULIC NEGATIVE BRAKE - RIMOZIONE E SMONTAGGIO FRENO NEGATIVO
IDRAULICO ESTERNO - AÈUûERE HYDRAULISCHE NEGATIVBREMSE ABMONTIEREN - REMOCION Y DESMONTAJE FRENO NEGATIVO
HYDRAULICO EXTERIOR - ENLEVER ET DEMONTER DU FREIN NEGATIF HYDRAULIQUE EXTERNE
14 15 14
15 14
14
13 9
13
F1240748 F1240749
bar GB a GB b
Gently introduce the union piece of the cylinder unit (9) so as to Remove seals (14) and guide ring (15) from the piston (13).
eject the piston (13). NOTE. Note down seals direction of assembly.
CAUTION! Hold the piston as it may be forced out rapidly and be
damaged.
10
11
F1240750
GB c GB d
ONLY IF NECESSARY
Remove the guide ring (11) from the spring seat (10).
CAUTION! If the guide ring (11) is removed, it must be replaced.
11 10
6 12
7
8 16
15
5 13
14
17 9
18 3
4
19
GB e GB f
2
1 4
D1240101
138
Immettere lentamente il raccordo del corpo cilindro (9) Rimuovere dal pistone (13) le guarnizioni (14) e
ITA per espellere il pistone (13). ITA l'anello di guida (15).
ATTENZIONE! Trattenere il pistone che puoÁ essere NOTA. Annotare il senso di montaggio delle guarni-
espulso velocemente ed essere danneggiato. zioni.
Langsam das AnschluûstuÈck des ZylinderkoÈrpers (9) Den Kolben (13), die Dichtungen (14) und den
D einsetzen, um den Kolben (13) auszustoûen. D FuÈhrungsring (15) abnehmen.
ACHTUNG! Den Kolben halten, denn er koÈnnte BEMERKUNG. Montagerichtung der Dichtungen be-
ploÈtzlich herausspringen und beschaÈdigt werden. merken.
a b
Meter lentamente el empalme del cuerpo cilindro (9) Remover del piston (13) las guarniciones (14) y el
ESP para la expulsion del piston (13). ESP anillo de guõÁa (15).
ATENCION! Tener el piston que puede ser expulso NOTA. Anotar el sentido de desmontaje de las
rapidamente y danarse. guarniciones.
Introduire lentement le raccord du corps cylindre (9) et Enlever du piston (13) les garnitures (14) et la bague
F expulser le piston (13). F de guidage (15).
ATTENTION! Retenir le piston qui expulseÂ rapide- NOTE. Prendre note du sens de montage des
ment peut par conseÂquent s'endommager. garnitures.
SOLO SE NECESSARIO
ITA Rimuovere dalla sede molla (10) l'anello di guida (11). ITA
ATTENZIONE! Se l'anello di guida (11) viene smonta-
to, deve essere sostituito.
NUR WENN NOTWENDIG

D Aus dem Federsitz (10) den FuÈhrungsring (11) D
nehmen.
ACHTUNG! Falls der FuÈhrungsring (11) abmontiert wird, muû er
c ausgewechselt werden. d
SOLO SI NECESARIO
ESP Remover de la sede muelle (10) el anillo de guõÁa (11). ESP
ATENCION! Si el anillo de guõÁa (11) viene desmon-
tado, debe de ser sobstituido.
SEUL SI BESOIN
F Enlever du sieÁge ressort (10), la bague de guidage F
(11).
ATTENTION! Si la bague de guidage (11) est deÂmonteÂe, il faut la
substituer.
ITA ITA
D D
e f
ESP ESP
F F
139
HOW TO ASSEMBLE AND INSTALL THE EXTERNAL HYDRAULIC NEGATIVE BRAKE - ASSEMBLAGGIO ED INSTALLAZIONE FRENO NEGATIVO
IDRAULICO ESTERNO - AÈUûERE HYDRAULISCHE NEGATIVBREMSE MONTIEREN - ASEMBLAJE Y INSTALACION FRENO NEGATIVO
HYDRAULICO EXTERIOR - ASSEMBLAGE ET INSTALLATION DU FREIN NEGATIF HYDRAULIQUE EXTERNE
14 15 14
13 9
15 14
14
13
F1240749 F1240751
GB a GB b
Install guide ring (15) and seals (14) onto the piston (13). Lubricate the seals (14) and the inside of the cylinder (9); introduce
CAUTION! Carefully check seals assembly direction. the whole piston and move it to end of stroke.
10
12 9
11
10
F1240750 F1240752
GB c GB d
If guide ring has been removed, insert a new one (11) into the seat Position the spring seat (10) in a vice and insert spring (12).
of the spring. Lubricate the thread. Assemble the whole cylinder (9).
Lubricate the guide ring.
5
4
10
F1240753 F1240958
GB e GB f
Screw the cylinder (9) into the spring seat (10) and lock it using a Apply Loctite 270 to the rod (5) and screw it in the piston (13) as far
bar "D". as it will go.
140
Montare sul pistone (13) l'anello di guida (15) e le Lubrificare le guarnizioni (14) e l'interno del cilindro
ITA guarnizioni (14). ITA (9); inserire il pistone completo e mandarlo a fine
ATTENZIONE! Controllare attentamente il senso di corsa.
montaggio delle guarnizioni.
Auf den Kolben (13) den FuÈhrungsring (15) und die Dichtungen (14) und das Zylinderinnere (9) schmieren;
D Dichtungen (14) montieren. D den vollstaÈndigen Kolben einsetzen und bis zum
ACHTUNG! Auf die Montagerichtung der Dichtungen Anschlag einschieben.
sorgfaÈltig achten.
a b
Montar sobre el piston (13) el anillo de guõÁa (15) y las Lubrificar las guarniciones (14) y el interno del cilindro
ESP guarniciones (14). ESP (9); introducir el piston completo y mandarlo a final de
ATENCION! Controlar atentamente el sentido de carrera.
montaje de las guarniciones.
Monter sur le piston (13) la bague de guidage (15) et Lubrifier les garnitures (14) aÁ l'inteÂrieur du cylindre (9);
F les garnitures (14). F y introduire le piston complet et l'envoyer en fin de
ATTENTION! ControÃler attentivement le sens du course.
montage des garnitures.
Se eÁ stato smontato, inserire il nuovo anello di guida Posizionare la sede molla (10) in una morsa ed inserire
ITA (11) nella sede molla (10). ITA la molla (12).
Lubrificare l'anello di guida. Lubrificare la filettatura. Montare il cilindro completo (9).
Falls der FuÈhrungsring (11) abmontiert worden ist, Federsitz (10) in einen Spannbock einklemmen und
D diesen in den Federsitz (10) einsetzen. D die Feder (12) einsetzen.
Den FuÈhrungsring schmieren. Gewinde schmieren. Den vollstaÈndigen Zylinder (9)
montieren.
c d
Si ha sido desmontado, introducir el nuevo anillo de Colocar la sede muelle (10) en un corchete y introducir
ESP guõÁa (11) en la sede muelle (10). ESP un muelle (12).
Lubrificar el anillo de guõÁa. Lubrificar la rosca. Montar el cilindro completo (9).
Si elle a eÂteÂ deÂmonteÂe, introduire la bague de guidage Placer le sieÁge ressort (10) dans un eÂtau et y introduire
F neuve (11) dans le sieÁge ressort (10). F le ressort (12).
Lubrifier la bague de guidage. Lubrifier le filetage. Monter le cylindre complet (9).
Avvitare il cilindro (9) nella sede molla (10) e bloccarlo Spalmare l'asta (5) con Loctite 270 ed avvitarla a
ITA utilizzando una barra "D". ITA fondo nel pistone (13).
Den Zylinder (9) in den Sitze der Feder (10) schrauben Den Stab (5) mit Loctite 270 schmieren und in den
D und mit Hilfe des Stabs "D" blockieren. D Kolben (13) festschrauben.
e f
Atornillar el cilindro (9) en la sede muelle (10) y Pasar la varilla (5) con Loctite 270 y aternillarla a fondo
ESP bloquearlo utilizando una varilla "D". ESP en el piston (13).
Visser le cylindre (9) dans le sieÁge ressort (10), puis Enduire la tige (5) avec du Loctite 270 et visser celle-ci
F bloquer celui-ci aÁ l'aide d'une barre "D". F aÁ fond dans le piston (13).
141
HOW TO ASSEMBLE AND INSTALL THE EXTERNAL HYDRAULIC NEGATIVE BRAKE - ASSEMBLAGGIO ED INSTALLAZIONE FRENO NEGATIVO
IDRAULICO ESTERNO - AÈUûERE HYDRAULISCHE NEGATIVBREMSE MONTIEREN - ASEMBLAJE Y INSTALACION FRENO NEGATIVO
HYDRAULICO EXTERIOR - ASSEMBLAGE ET INSTALLATION DU FREIN NEGATIF HYDRAULIQUE EXTERNE
19 2
8÷10 N
(0,8÷1 kg)
1
17 18
F1240756 F1240949
GB a GB b
Loosen nuts (17) and set braking levers (19) clearances to zero by Install distance piece (2) and insert the pin of support (10) into the
turning dowels (18); lock nuts (17) with a torque wrench setting of right-hand braking lever. Fit the second distance piece (2) and snap
20 ± 25 Nm. ring (1).
CAUTION! Clearances should be set to zero without causing any
preloading.
4 3
5
5
6
F1240947 F1240757
bar
GB c GB d
Install cylinder (4) complete with rod (5) and internal nut (6). Centre the hole of fulcrum pin (3).
Apply Loctite 242 to the pin thread, screw and tighten pin with a
dynamometric wrench set at 25 ± 30 Nm.
18 7 18
6 4 ÷ 5 mm 4
A
5
8 19
19 13
F1240951 D1240100
GB e GB f
Introduce pressure into the cylinder (4) and whilst holding both Check that, when the brakes are released (pressure inserted),
levers (19) back against the adjusting screws (18), move nuts (6) levers (19) do lean against the screws (18) without prestressing
and (7) so that they are made to rest against support (8); lock the them and make sure that a clearance "A" is left between cylinder
nuts with a torque wrench setting of 50 ± 60 Nm. (4) and lever (19).
Also check that when pressure is released, piston (13) projects out
by 4 ± 5 mm.
142
Allentare i dadi (17) ed azzerare i giochi delle leve di Montare il distanziale (2) ed infilare il perno del
ITA frenatura (19) con i grani (18); bloccare i dadi (17) ad ITA supporto (10) nella leva di frenatura destra. Montare
una coppia di 20v25 Nm. il secondo distanziale (2) e l'anello elastico (1).
ATTENZIONE! I giochi devono risultare azzerati senza provocare
precarico.
Muttern (17) lockern und die Spiele der Bremshebel Das DistanzstuÈck (2) montieren und den Halterungs-
D (19) mit den Stiften (18) zuruÈckstellen; die Mutter (17) D stift (10) in den rechten Bremshebel einsetzen. Das
bei einem Anzugsmoment von 20v25 Nm bockieren. zweite DistanzstuÈck (2) in den Kolbenring (1) montie-
ACHTUNG! Die Spiele muÈssen zuruÈckgestellt werden, ohne das ren.
a Teil vorzuladen. b
Aflojar las tuercas (17) y poner a zero los juegos de las Montar el distancial (2) y insertar el perno del suporte
ESP palancas de frenadura (19) con las espigas (18); ESP (10) en la palanca de frenadura derecha. Montar el
bloquear las tuercas (17) a un par de 20v25 Nm. segundo distancial (2) y el anillo elastico.
ATENCION! Los guegos deben de resultar a zero sin provocar
precarga.
Desserrer les eÂcrous (17) et mettre aÁ zeÂro les jeux des Monter l'entretoise (2), puis introduire l'axe du support
F leviers de freinage (19) avec les grains (18); bloquer F (10) dans le levier de freinage droit. Monter la
les eÂcrous (17) aÁ un couple de 20v25 Nm. deuxieÁme entretoise (2) et l'anneau aÁ ressort (1).
ATTENTION! Les jeux doivent eÃtre mis aÁ zeÂro sans provoquer de
preÂcharge.
Montare il cilindro (4) completo di asta (5) e del dado Centrare il foro del perno di fulcro (3).
ITA interno (6). ITA Spalmare la filettatura del perno (3) con Loctite 242,
avvitarlo e serrarlo con chiave dinamometrica tarata a
25v30 Nm.
Den Zylinder (4) samt Stab (5) und innere Mutter (6) Das Loch des Zentrierstiftes (3) zentrieren.
D montieren. D Das Stiftgewinde (3) mit Loctite 242 schmieren und mit
einem MomentenschluÈssel bei 25v30 Nm fest ziehen.
c d
Montar el cilindro (4) completo de varilla (5) y de la Centrar el agujero de la rotula del fulcro (3).
ESP tuerca interna (6). ESP Pasar la rosca de la rotula (3) con Loctite 242,
atornillarlo y apretarlo con llave dinamometrica tarada
a 25v30 Nm.
Monter le cylindre (4) eÂquipeÂ de la tige (5) et de l'eÂcrou Centrer le trou de l'axe du fourreau (3).
F interne (6). F Enduire le filetage de l'axe (3) avec du Loctite 242,
visser et serrer celui-ci aÁ l'aide d'une cleÂ dynamomeÂ-
trique calibreÂe aÁ 25v30 Nm.
Immettere pressione nel cilindro (4) e, mantenendo Controllare che a freni sbloccati (pressione inserita), le
ITA entrambe le leve (19) appoggiate alle viti di registro ITA leve (19) vadano in appoggio sulle viti (18) senza
(18), mandare in appoggio i dadi (6) e (7) sul supporto precaricarle e che tra cilindro (4) e leva (19) rimanga
(8); bloccare i dadi con una coppia di 50v60 Nm. un gioco "A".
Controllare anche che a pressione rilasciata, il pistone (13) abbia
una sporgenza di 4v5 mm.
Den Druck in den Zylinder (4) einlassen. Beide Hebel Kontrollieren, ob bei freien Bremsen (eingelassener
D (19) an den Stellschrauben (18) anliegen lassen und D Druck), die Hebel (19) an den Schrauben (18) an-
die Muttern (6) und (7) bis zum Anschlag der Halterung liegen, ohne sie vorzuladen und ob zwischen Zylinder
(8) bringen; die Muttern mit einem Anzugsmoment von 50v60 Nm (4) und Hebel (19) ein Spiel "A" besteht.
e fest ziehen. f Kontrollieren, ob bei abgelassenem Druck, der Kolben (13) um 4v5
mm herausragt.
Meter presioÁn en el cilindro 4)y, manteniendo las dos Controlar que a frenos bloqueados (presioÁn insertada),
ESP palancas (19) en apoyo a las tuercas de registro (18), ESP las palancas (19) vayan en apoyo sobre los tornillos
mandasr en apoyo las tuercas (6) y (7) sobre el suporte (18) sin precargarlas y que entre el cilindro (4) y la
(8); bloquear las tuercas con un par de 50v60 Nm. palanca (19) haya un juego "A".
Controlar tambien que a presioÁn soltada el piston (13) tenga una
resalte de 4v5 m/m.
Emettre de la pression dans le cylindre (4), puis en ControÃler que lorsque les freins sont deÂbloqueÂs
F maintenant les deux leviers (19) poseÂs sur les vis de F (pression introduite), les leviers (19) aillent se poser
reÂglage (18), envoyer les eÂcrous (6) et (7) en appui sur sur les vis (18) sans preÂcharger ces dernieÁres, et
le support (8); bloquer les eÂcrous aÁ un couple de 50v60 Nm. qu'entre cylindre (4) et levier (19) il y ait un jeu "A".
ControÃler eÂgalement que lorsque la pression est relaÃcheÂe, le piston
(13) ait une saillie de 4v5 mm.
143
HOW TO DISASSEMBLE THE EXTERNAL HYDRAULIC NEGATIVE BRAKE WITH QUICK RELEASE - SMONTAGGIO FRENO NEGATIVO IDRAULICO ESTERNO CON
SBLOCCAGGIO RAPIDO - AÈUûERE HYDRAULISCHE NEGATIVBREMSE MIT SCHNELLENTSICHERUNG ABMONTIEREN - DESMONTAJE FRENO NEGATIVO
HYDRAULICO ESTERNO CON SBLOQUEO RAPIDO - ENLEVER ET DEMONTER DU FREIN NEGATIF HYDRAULIQUE EXTERNE AVEC DEBLOCAGE RAPIDE
F1240761 F1240738
GB a GB b
CAUTION! Before starting any operation on the assembly, disable Remove snap ring (1) and extract distance piece (2).
the cylinder by giving a light hammer blow to the external ring of
the check unit.
3 4
4
F1240739 F1240740
GB c GB d
Remove the fulcrum pin (3) from the cylinder (4). Remove the complete cylinder set (4).
9
10 7
5 6
8
7
9
F1240741 F1240742
GB e GB f
Remove snap ring (5) from stem (6) and extract the check unit (7). Remove snap ring (8) and washer (9) and separate support (10) and
second washer (9) from the check unit (7).
144
ATTENZIONE! Prima di intervenire nel gruppo, Rimuovere l'anello elastico (1) ed asportare il distan-
ITA disattivare l'azione del cilindro con un leggero colpo ITA ziale (2).
di mazzuolo sull'anello esterno del gruppo di ritegno.
ACHTUNG! Bevor am Aggregat gearbeitet wird, die Den Kolbenring (1) entfernen und das DistanzstuÈck (2)
D Zylinderwirkung mit einem leichten Hammerschlag auf D abnehmen.
den aÈuûeren Ring des Halteaggregats loÈschen.
a b
ATENCION! Antes de intervenir en el grupo, desco- Remover el anillo elastico (1) y sacar el distancial (2).
ESP nectar la accioÁn del cilindro con un lijero golpe de ESP
martillo sobre el anillo esterior del grupo de retencioÁn.
ATTENTION! Avant d'intervenir dans le groupe, Enlever l'anneau aÁ ressort (1), puis enlever l'entretoise
F deÂsactiver l'action du cylindre par un leÂger coup de F (2).
maillet sur l'anneau externe du groupe de fixation.
Rimuovere il perno di fulcro (3) del cilindro (4). Asportare il gruppo cilindro completo (4).
ITA ITA
Den Zentrierstift (3) des Zylinders (4) abnehmen. Gesamtes Zylinderaggregat (4) abnehmen.
D D
c d
Remover la rotula de fulcro (3) del cilindro (4). Sacar el grupo cilindro completo (4).
ESP ESP
Enlever l'axe du fourreau (3) du cylindre (4). Enlever le groupe cylindre complet (4).
F F
Rimuovere l'anello elastico (5) dallo stelo (6) e sfilare il Asportare l'anello elastico (8), la rondella (9) e
ITA gruppo di ritegno (7). ITA separare dal gruppo di ritegno (7) il supporto (10) e
la seconda rondella (9).
Den Kolbenring (5) vom Schaft (6) abnehmen und das Den Kolbenring (8), die Unterlegscheibe (9) abnehmen
D Halteaggregat (7) abziehen. D und das Halteaggregat (7) von der Halterung (10) und
der Unterlegscheibe (9) trennen.
e f
Remover el anillo elastico (5) del vastago (6) y deshilar Sacar el anillo elastico (8), la arandela (9) y separar del
ESP el grupo de retencioÁn (7). ESP grupo de retencioÁn (7) el suporte (10) y la segunda
arandela (9).
Enlever l'anneau aÁ ressort (5) de la tige (6) et extraire Enlever l'anneau aÁ ressort (8), la rondelle (9) et
F le groupe de retenue (7). F seÂparer du groupe de retenue (7) le support (10) et
la deuxieÁme rondelle (9).
145
C
A 11 B
7 12
F1240743 F1240744
GB a GB b
Introduce an M14x100 screw "A" into the hole of the check unit (7) Rotate snap ring (12) until ring ends match slot "C".
and screw a nut "B" until the spring seat (11) is moved to the end of Remove snap ring (12).
stroke.
NOTE. Use a T.C.E.I. screw.
14 18
15 16 17
11
13 6
14
11 B
F1240745 F1240746
GB c GB d
Slowly release nut "B" and disassemble the check unit. Loosen nut (17) and remove stem (6) from the cylinder (18).
19
23 19
19 23
22
20
F1240747 F1240748
GB e bar
GB f
Place the cylinder in a vice with the spring seat (20) side engaged Slowly introduce air through the union piece of the cylinder unit (19)
in it and, using a bar "D", loosen and remove the cylinder unit (19) to expel the piston (23).
complete with piston (23) and spring (22). CAUTION! Hold the piston as it may be rapidly ejected and
damaged.
146
Inserire nel foro del gruppo di ritegno (7) una vite "A" Far ruotare l'anello elastico (12) fino a portare le
ITA da M14x100 ed avvitare un dado "B" fino a mandare a ITA estremitaÁ in corrispondenza della nicchia "C".
fondo corsa la sede molla (11). Rimuovere l'anello elastico (12).
NOTA. Usare una vite T.C.E.I.
In das Loch des Halteaggregats (7) eine Schraube "A" Den Kolbenring (12) drehen, bis die Enden die Nische
D M14x100 einsetzen und eine Mutter "B" bis zum D "C" erreichen.
Federsitz (11) einschrauben. Kolbenring (12) abnehmen.
BEMERKUNG. Eine T.C.E.I. Schraube verwenden.
a b
Insertar en el agujero del grupo de retencioÁn (7) un Hacer girar el anillo elastico (12) hasta llevar las
ESP tornillo "A" de M14x100 y atornillar una tuerca "B" ESP extremidades en corrispondencia del nicho "C".
hasta mandar a fondo carrera el alojamiento muelle Remover el anillo elastico (12).
(11).
NOTA. Usar un tornillo T.C.E.I.
Introduire dans le trou du groupe de fixation (7) une vis Faire tourner l'anneau aÁ ressort (12) jusqu'aÁ en
F "A" de M 14 x 100 et visser un eÂcrou "B" jusqu'aÁ F amener l'extreÂmiteÂ face aÁ la niche "C".
envoyer en fin de course le sieÁge ressort (11). Enlever l'anneau aÁ ressort (12).
NOTE. Utiliser une vis T.C.E.I.
Rilasciare lentamente il dado "B" e scomporre il Allentare il dado (17) e rimuovere dal cilindro (18) lo
ITA gruppo di ritegno. ITA stelo (6).
Langsam die Mutter "B" abschrauben und das Mutter (17) lockern und den Schaft (6) vom Zylinder
D Halteaggregat auseinander nehmen. D (18) abnehmen.
c d
Dejar lentamente la turca "B" y descomponer el grupo Aflojar la tuerca (17) y remover del cilindro (18) el
ESP de retencioÁn. ESP vastago (6).
Desserrer lentement l'eÂcrou "B" et deÂsassembler le Desserrer l'eÂcrou (17), puis enlever le cylindre (18) la
F groupe de retenue. F tige (6).
Fissare il cilindro (18) in una morsa dal lato sede molla Immettere lentamente aria attraverso il raccordo del
ITA (20) e, utilizzando una barra "D", allentare ed ITA corpo cilindro (19) per espellere il pistone (23).
asportare il corpo cilindro (19) completo di pistone ATTENZIONE! Trattenere il pistone che puoÁ essere
(23) e la molla (22). espulso velocemente ed essere danneggiato.
Den Zylinder (18) in einem Spannbock an der Langsam Luft durch das AnschluûstuÈck des Zylinder-
D Federseite (20) einklemmen und mit Hilfe des Stabs D koÈrpers (19) einlassen, um den Kolben (23) auszu-
"D" den ZylinderkoÈrper (19) lockern und samt Kolben stoûen.
(23) und Feder (22) abnehmen. ACHTUNG! Den Kolben halten, denn er koÈnnte ploÈtzlich heraus-
e f springen und beschaÈdigt werden.
Fijar el cilindro (18) en un corchete del lado de Meter lentamente aire atraves del empalme del cuerpo
ESP alojamiento de varilla "D", aflojar y sacar el cuerpo ESP cilindro (19) para expulsar el pistoÁn (23).
cilindro (19) completo de piston (23) y el muelle (22). ATENCION! Tener el pistoÁn que puede ser expulso
rapidamente y ser danado.
Fixer le cylindre (18) dans un eÂtau du coÃteÂ du sieÁge Emettre lentement de l'air aÁ travers le raccord du
F ressort (20), puis, aÁ l'aide d'une barre "D", desserrer et F corps cylindre (19) et expulser le piston (23).
enlever le corps cylindre (19) complet de piston (23), ATTENTION! Retenir le piston qui expulseÂ rapide-
puis le ressort (22). ment peut par conseÂquent s'endommager.
147
25 24
20
25 24
24
21
23
F1240749 F1240750
GB a GB b
Remove seals (24) and guide ring (25) from the piston (23). ONLY IF NECESSARY
NOTE. Note down seals installation direction. Remove guide ring (21) from spring seat (20).
CAUTION! If guide ring (21) is taken out, it must be replaced.
21
20
22
25 18
23
5 24
7
12
11 GB c GB d
19
13
14 4
16
9
10
14 6
15
9
8
17 3
26
27
28
2
4
GB 1 e GB f
D1240091
148
Rimuovere dal pistone (23) le guarnizioni (24) e SOLO SE NECESSARIO
ITA l'anello di guida (25). ITA Rimuovere dalla sede molla (20) l'anello di guida (21).
NOTA. Annotare il senso di montaggio delle guarni- ATTENZIONE! Se l'anello di guida (21) viene smonta-
zioni. to, deve essere sostituito.
Den Kolben (23) und die Dichtungen (24) sowie den NUR WENN NO È TIG
D FuÈhrungsring (25) abnehmen. D Vom Federsitz (20) den FuÈhrungsring (21) abnehmen.
BEMERKUNG. Montagerichtung der Dichtungen be- ACHTUNG! Wird der FuÈhrungsring (21) abmontiert,
merken. muû er ausgewechselt werden.
a b
Remover del pistoÁn (23) las guarniciones (24) y el SOLO SI FUERA NECESARIO
ESP anillo de guõÁa (25). ESP Remover del alojamiento muelle (20) el anillo de guõÁa
NOTA. Anotar el sentido de desmontaje de las (21).
guarniciones. ATENCION! Si el anillo de guõÁa (21) viene desmontado, debe de
ser sobstituido.
Enlever le piston (23), les garnitures (24) et la bague SEULEMENT SI BESOIN

F de guidage (25). F Enlever du sieÁge ressort (20) la bague de guidage (21).
NOTE. Noter le sens du montage des garnitures ATTENTION! Une fois la bague de guidage (21)
deÂmonteÂe, elle doit eÃtre substitueÂe.
ITA ITA
D D
c d
ESP ESP
F F
ITA ITA
D D
e f
ESP ESP
F F
149
HOW TO ASSEMBLE THE EXTERNAL HYDRAULIC NEGATIVE BRAKE WITH QUICK RELEASE - ASSEMBLAGGIO FRENO NEGATIVO IDRAULICO ESTERNO CON
SBLOCCAGGIO RAPIDO - AÈUûERE HYDRAULISCHE NEGATIVBREMSE MIT SCHNELLENTSICHERUNG MONTIEREN - ASEMBLAJE FRENO NEGATIVO
HYDRAULICO ESTERNO CON SBLOQUEO RAPIDO - ASSEMBLAGE ET INSTALLATION DU FREIN NEGATIF HYDRAULIQUE EXTERNE AVEC DEBLOCAGE RAPIDE
25 24
23 19
25 24
24
23
F1240749 F1240751
GB a GB b
Fit guide ring (25) and seals (24) onto the piston (23). Lubricate seals (24) and the inside part of the cylinder (19);
CAUTION! Carefully check seals installation direction. introduce the whole piston and move it to end of stroke.
20
22 18
21
20
F1240750 F1240752
GB c GB d
It the guide ring has been taken out, fit a new one (21) into the Position the spring seat (20) in a vice and insert spring (22).
spring seat (20). Lubricate the thread. Install the whole cylinder (18).
Lubricate the guide ring.
D
17
18 6
20
F1240753 F1240754
GB e GB f
Screw the cylinder (18) into the spring seat (20) and lock it using a Screw stem (6) into the piston without locking the nut (17).
bar "D".
150
Montare sul pistone (23) l'anello di guida (25) e le Lubrificare le guarnizioni (24) e l'interno del cilindro
ITA guarnizioni (24). ITA (19); inserire il pistone completo e mandarlo a fine
ATTENZIONE! Controllare attentamente il senso di corsa.
montaggio delle guarnizioni.
Auf den Kolben (23) den FuÈhrungsring (25) und die Dichtungen (24) und das Zylinderinnere (19) schmie-
D Dichtungen (24) montieren. D ren; den vollstaÈndigen Kolben einsetzen und bis zum
ACHTUNG! Montagerichtung der Dichtungen sorgfaÈl- Anschlag einschieben.
tig kontrollieren.
a b
Montar sobre el piston (23) el anillo de guõÁa (25) y las Lubrificar las guarniciones (24) y el interno del cilindro
ESP guarniciones (24). ESP (19); introducir el piston completo y mandarlo a final de
ATENCION! Controlar atentamente el sentido de carrera.
montaje de las guarniciones.
Monter sur le piston (23) la bague de guidage (25) et Lubrifier les garnitures (24) et l'inteÂrieur du cylindre
F les garnitures (24). F (19); introduire le piston complet et envoyer celui-ci en
ATTENTION! ControÃler attentivement le sens de fin de course.
montage des garnitures.
Se eÁ stato smontato, inserire il nuovo anello di guida Posizionare la sede molla (20) in una morsa ed inserire
ITA (21) nella sede molla (20). ITA la molla (22).
Lubrificare l'anello di guida. Lubrificare la filettatura. Montare il cilindro completo
(18).
Falls der FuÈhrungsring (21) abmontiert worden ist, Federsitz (20) in einen Spannbock einklemmen und
D diesen in den Federsitz (20) einsetzen. D die Feder (22) einsetzen.
Den FuÈhrungsring schmieren. Gewinde schmieren. Den vollstaÈndigen Zylinder (18)
montieren.
c d
Si ha sido desmontado, introducir un nuevo anillo de Colocar el alojamiento muelle (20) en un corchete y
ESP guõÁa (21) en el alojamiento muelle (20). ESP introducir la muelle (22).
Lubrificar el anillo de guõÁa. Lubrificar la rosca. Montar el cilindro completo (18).
Si elle a eÂteÂ deÂmonteÂe, introduire la bague de guidage Placer le sieÁge ressort (20) dans un eÂtau et y introduire
F neuve (21) dans le sieÁge ressort (20). F le ressort (22).
Lubrifier la bague de guidage. Lubrifier le filetage. Monter le cylindre (18) complet.
Avvitare il cilindro (18) nella sede molla (20) e bloccarlo Avvitare lo stelo (6) nel pistone senza bloccare il dado
ITA utilizzando una barra "D". ITA (17).
Den Zylinder (18) in den Federsitz (20) montieren und Den Schaft (6) in den Kolben schrauben, ohne die
D mit Hilfe eines Stabs "D" blockieren. D Mutter (17) zu blockieren.
e f
Atornillar el cilindro (18) en el alojamiento muelle (20) y Atornillar el vastago (6) en el piston sin bloquear la
ESP bloquearlo utilizando una varilla "D". ESP tuerca (17).
Visser le cylindre (18) dans le sieÁge ressort (20) puis Visser la tige (6) dans le piston sans bloquer l'eÂcrou
F bloquer celui-ci aÁ l'aide d'une barre "D". F (17).
151
14
15 16
6
11 7
13
14
11 B
F1240745 F1240755
GB a GB b
Assemble the check unit (7) by inverting the steps followed in the Using a plastic hammer, install the check unit (7) onto the stem (6).
disassembly procedure.
5 6
7
F1240741
GB c GB d
Fit the safety snap ring (5) onto the stem (6). CAUTION! In case the braking disks have been replaced or if brake
pistons have been removed: before adjusting the negative braking
unit, apply the brakes several times at maximum pressure in order
to set clearances.
10
28
8÷10 N
2
(0,8÷1 kg)
1
26 27
F1240756 F1240738
GB e GB f
Loosen nuts (26) and apply a force of 8 ± 10 N (0.8 ± 1 kg) to levers Fit the distance piece (2) and insert the pin of support (10) in the
(28). Direct the force towards the braking direction to eliminate the right-hand braking lever. Fit the snap ring (1).
clearances by using dowels (27); lock nuts (26) to a torque wrench
setting of 20 ± 25 Nm.
CAUTION! The idle stroke should be eliminated without causing
any preloading.
152
Assemblare il gruppo di ritegno (7) seguendo la Utilizzando un mazzuolo in materiale plastico, monta-
ITA procedura di smontaggio in senso inverso. ITA re il gruppo di ritegno (7) sullo stelo (6).
Halteaggregat (7) in umgekehrter Reihenfolge als Mit einem Gummihammer das Halteaggregat (7) auf
D beim Abmontieren, wieder zusammenbauen. D den Schaft (6) montieren.
a b
Asemblar el grupo de retencioÁn (7) siguiendo la Utilizando un martillo de plastica, montar el grupo de
ESP procedura de desmontaje en sentido invertido. ESP retencioÁn (7) sobre el vastago (6).
Assembler le groupe de retenue (7) en suivant la A l'aide d'un maillet en matieÁre plastique, monter le
F proceÂdure du deÂmontage mais dans le sens contraire. F groupe de retenue (7) sur la tige (6).
Montare sullo stelo (6) l'anello elastico di sicurezza (5). ATTENZIONE! Se sono stati sostituiti i dischi di
ITA ITA frenatura o sono stati smontati i pistoni dei freni,
prima di registrare il gruppo freno negativo eseguire
piuÁ frenate alla massima pressione per assestare i giochi.
Auf den Schaft (6) den Sicherheitskolbenring (5) ACHTUNG! Falls die Bremsscheiben ausgewechselt
D montieren. D oder die Bremskolben abmontiert worden sind, mehr-
mals bei maximalen Druck bremsen, um das Spiel zu
setzen, bevor das Bremsaggregat eingestellt wird.
c d
Montar sobre vastago (6) el anillo elastico de seguri- ATENCION! Si han sido sobstituidos los discos de
ESP dad (5). ESP frenadura o han sido desmontados los pistones de los
frenos, antes de registrar el grupo freno negativo
ejecutar mas frenadas a la maxima presioÁn para asestar los juegos.
Monter sur la tige (6) l'anneau aÁ ressort de seÂcuriteÂ (5). ATTENTION! Si les disques de freinage ont eÂteÂ
F F remplaceÂs ouÁ que les pistons des freins ont eÂteÂ
deÂmonteÂs, avant de reÂgler le groupe frein neÂgatif,
effectuer quelques freinages au max. de la pression pour ajuster
les jeux.
Allentare i dadi (26) ed applicare alle leve (28) una Montare il distanziale (2) ed infilare il perno del
ITA forza di 8v10 N (0,8v1 kg) diretta nel senso di ITA supporto (10) nella leva di frenatura destra. Montare
frenatura per eliminare i giochi utilizzando i grani (27); l'anello elastico (1).
bloccare i dadi (26) ad una coppia di 20v25 Nm.
ATTENZIONE! La corsa a vuoto deve essere eliminata senza
provocare precarico.
Muttern (26) lockern und an den Hebeln (28) eine Kraft Das DistanzstuÈck (2) montieren und den Stift der
D von 8v10 N (0,8v1 kg) in die Bremsrichtung an- D Halterung (10) in den rechten Bremshebel montieren.
bringen, um die Spiele der Stifte (27) zu beseitigen; die Den Kolbenring (1) montieren.
Muttern (26) bei einem Anzugsmoment von 20v25 Nm blockieren.
e ACHTUNG! Der leere Lauf muû beseitigt werden, ohne das Teil f
vorzuladen.
Aflojar las tuercas (26) y aplicar a las palancas (28) Montar el distancial (2) y introducir la rotula del
ESP una fuerza de 8v10 N (0,8v1 kg) directa en el sentido ESP suporte (10) en la palanca de frenadura derecha.
de frenadura para eliminar los juegos utilizando las Montar el anillo elastico (1).
espigas (27); bloquear las tuercas (26) a un par de 20v25 Nm.
ATENCION! La carrera a vacio debe de ser eliminada sin provocar
precarga.
Desserrer les eÂcrous (26), puis appliquer aux leviers Monter l'entretoise (2) et introduire l'axe du support
F (28) une contrainte de 8v10 N (0,8v1 kg) orienteÂe F (10) dans le levier de freinage droit. Monter l'anneau aÁ
dans le sens du freinage pour eÂliminer les jeux aÁ l'aide ressort (1).
des grains (27); bloquer les eÂcrous (26) aÁ un couple de 20v25 Nm.
ATTENTION! La course aÁ vide doit eÃtre eÂlimineÂe sans provoquer
de preÂcharge.
153
27
18
3
A
28
6
D1240094
F1240757
GB a GB b
Rotate stem (6) to centre the hole of the fulcrum pin (3). Check that a clearance "A" is left between the lever (28) on the
Apply Loctite 242 to the thread of the fulcrum pin (3), screw and cylinder side (resting against the adjustment dowel) and cylinder
tighten pin with a dynamometric wrench set to 25 ± 30 Nm. (18).
If necessary, remove the lever, turn it by one tooth in relation to the
spline and repeat idle stroke elimination procedure.
4
23
6
7
27
17
28
F1240940 F1240941
bar
GB c GB d
Introduce pressure into the cylinder (4) and, with the levers (28) Lock nut (17) in position against the stem of the piston (23).
resting against the adjustment dowels (27), screw rod (6) to engage Torque wrench setting for the nut: max. 40 Nm.
the quick release (7) in the slot.
4÷5 mm 18
7
4
23
23
F1240760 F1240761
GB e bar
GB f
Release the pressure and check that piston (23) returns and stops Release the check unit (7) by giving a hammer blow to the external
in a position where it projects out from the cylinder head (4) by 4 ± 5 ring.
mm. Introduce pressure again and check that at the end of piston
stroke, the check unit (7) is actually engaged onto the rod (6).
154
Ruotare lo stelo (6) fino a centrare il foro del perno di Controllare che tra la leva (28) lato cilindro (in
ITA fulcro (3). ITA appoggio sul grano di registrazione) ed il cilindro (18)
Spalmare la filettatura del perno di fulcro (3) con rimanga un gioco "A".
Loctite 242, avvitarlo e serrarlo con chiave dinamometrica tarata a Se necessario, rimuovere la leva, ruotarla di un dente rispetto al
25v30 Nm. profilo scanalato e ripetere l'eliminazione della corsa a vuoto.
Den Schaft (6) drehen bis das Loch des Zentrierstifts Kontrollieren, ob zwischen dem Hebel (28) an der
D (3) zentriert ist. D Zylinderseite (am Stellstift anliegend) und dem Zylin-
Das Gewinde des Zentrierstiftes (3) mit Loctite 242 der (18) ein Spiel "A" uÈbrig bleibt.
schmieren und mit einem MomentenschluÈssel bei 25v30 Nm fest Wenn noÈtig, den Hebel abnehmen, um einen Zahn drehen und den
a ziehen. b Vorgang wiederholen.
Girar el vastago (6) hasta centrar el agujero de la Controlar que entre la palanca (28) lado cilindro (en
ESP rotula de fulcro (3). ESP apoyo sobre la espiga de registracioÁn) y el cilindro (18)
Pasar la rosca de la rotula del fulcro (3) con Loctite quede un juego "A".
242, atornillarla y apretarla con llave dinamometrica tarata a 25v30 Si necesario, remover la palanca, girar de un diente respecto al
Nm. perfil rayado y repetir la eliminacioÁn de la carrera a vacio.
Tourner la tige (6) jusqu'aÁ centrer le trou de l'axe du ControÃler qu'entre le levier (28) du coÃteÂ cylindre (poseÂ
F fourreau (3). F sur le grain de reÂglage) et le cylindre (18) il y ait un jeu
Enduire le filetage de l'axe du fourreau (3) avec du "A".
Loctite 242, visser celui-ci aÁ l'aide de la cleÂ dynamomeÂtrique Si besoin, enlever le levier, tourner celui-ci d'une dent par rapport
calibreÂe aÁ 25v30 Nm. au profil canneleÂ et eÂliminer de nouveau la course aÁ vide.
Inserire pressione nel cilindro (4) e, mantenendo le Bloccare il dado (17) contro lo stelo del pistone (23).
ITA leve (28) appoggiate ai grani di registro (27), avvitare ITA Coppia di serraggio dado: max. 40 Nm.
l'asta (6) fino ad agganciare lo sblocco rapido (7) nella
cava.
Druck in den Zylinder (4) einlassen. Die Hebel (28) am Mutter (17) gegen den Kolbenschaft (23) blockieren.
D Stellstift (27) anliegen lassen und den Stab (6) D Anzugsmoment fuÈr die Mutter: max. 40 Nm.
festschrauben, bis er im der Schnellentsicherung (7)
der Nut einrastet.
c d
Introducir presioÁn en el cilindro (4) y, manteniendo las Bloquear la tuerca (17) contra el vastago del piston
ESP palancas (28) en apoyo a las espigas del registro (27), ESP (23).
atornillar la varilla (6) hasta enganciar el bloqueo Par de torsion tuerca: max. 40 Nm.
rapido (7) en el nicho.
Introduire de la pression dans le cylindre (4), puis en Bloquer l'eÂcrou (17) contre la tige du piston (23).
F maintenant le levier (28) poseÂ sur les grains de reÂglage F Couple de serrage eÂcrou: max. 40 Nm.
(27), visser la tige (6) jusqu'aÁ accrocher le deÂblocage
rapide (7) dans le creux.
Rilasciare la pressione e controllare che il pistone (23) Sbloccare il gruppo di ritegno (7) con un colpo di
ITA rientri fino ad avere una sporgenza di 4v5 mm rispetto ITA mazzuolo sull'anello esterno.
la testata del cilindro (4). Inserire nuovamente pressione e controllare che a fine
corsa del pistone avvenga l'aggancio del gruppo di ritegno (7)
sull'asta (6).
Den Druck ablassen und kontrollieren, ob der Kolben Das Halteaggregat (7) mit einem Hammerschlag am
D (23) zuruÈck faÈhrt bis er um 4v5 mm im VerhaÈltnis zum D aÈuûeren Ring entsichern.
Zylinderkopf (4) herausragt. Nochmals Druck einlassen und kontrollieren, ob am
Hubende des Kolbens das Halteaggregat (7) im Stab (6) einrastet.
e f
Dejar la presioÁn y controlar que el piston (23) vuelva Sbloquear el grupo de retencioÁn (7) con un golpe de
ESP hasta tener un resalte de 4v5 mm respecto la culata ESP martillo sobre el anillo elatico.
del cilindro (4). Introducir de nuevo presioÁn y controlar que a final
carrera del piston suceda el enganche del grupo de retencioÁn (7)
sobre la varilla (6).
RelaÃcher la pression et controÃler que le piston (23) DeÂbloquer le groupe de retenue (7) par un coup de
F rentre jusqu'aÁ ce qu'il y ait une saillie de 4v5 mm par F maillet sur l'anneau externe.
rapport aÁ la culasse du cylindre (4). Introduire de nouveau de la pression et controÃler qu'aÁ
la fin de course du groupe piston, il y ait un accrochage du groupe
de retenue (7) sur la tige (6).
155
DISASSEMBLING THE INCOMING DRUM BRAKE - SMONTAGGIO FRENO A TAMBURO IN ENTRATA - TROMMELBREMSE AM EINGANG
ABMONTIEREN - DESMONTAJE FRENO DE TAMBOR EN ENTRADA- DEMONTAGE DU FREIN D'ENTREE A TAMBOUR
1 2
F1240551 F1240552
GB a GB b
Pull out the drum (1) and remove dust from friction surfaces. Hold the upper shoe into position (2) and release the spring (3)
CAUTION! Use only brush-type vacuum cleaners.
5 8
7
4 6
F1240553 F1240554
GB c GB d
Remove the shoe assembly (4). Remove the snap ring (7) from its seat around the screws (8).
If necessary, remove the snap ring (5) and pull out the lever (6) Remove the screws (8).
T20A
9 (T20B) 10
11
9
F1240555 F1240556
GB e GB f
Fit tool T20A (T20B), engage the stop rod and loosen the check nut Remove parts in the following sequence: nut (9), O-ring (11), flange
(9) of the flange (10). (10) and stop ring (7).
156
Rimuovere il tamburo (1) ed asportare la polvere delle Tenendo in posizione la ganascia superiore (2),
ITA guarnizioni di attrito. ITA sganciare la molla (3).
ATTENZIONE! Usare solo aspirapolvere e pennello.
Trommel (1) abnehmen und die Reibungsdichtungen Die obere Backe (2) festhalten und Feder (3) ab-
D vom Staub reinigen. D nehmen.
ACHTUNG! Nur mit einem Staubsauger und einem
Pinsel.
a b
Remover el tambor (1) y sacar el polvo de las juntas de Manteniendo en posicioÂn la mordaza superior (2),
ESP roce. ESP desenganchar el muelle (3).
CUIDADO! Usar soÂlo aspirador y pincel.
DeÂplacer le tambour (1) et enlever la poussieÁre des En tenant bien en place la maÃchoire supeÂrieure (2)
F garnitures de frottement. F deÂcrocher le ressort (3).
ATTENTION! Utiliser seulement un aspirateur et un
pinceau.
Rimuovere il gruppo ganasce (4). Rimuovere dalla sede l'anello elastico (7) di ritegno in
ITA Se necessario, rimuovere l'anello elastico (5) e sfilare ITA posizione delle viti (8).
la leva (6). Asportare le viti (8).
Backeneinheit (4) abnehmen. Wenn noÈtig Federring Federring (7) von den Schrauben (8) abnehmen.
D (5) abnehmen und Hebel (6) heraus ziehen. D Schrauben (8) abschrauben.
c d
Remover el grupo mordazas (4). Remover de su alojamiento el anillo elaÂstico (7) de
ESP Si fuera necesario, remover el anillo elaÂstico (5) y ESP retencioÂn en posicioÂn de los tornillos (8).
sacar la palanca (6) Sacar los tornillos (8).
Enlever le groupe maÃchoire (4). Extraire de son logement l'anneau aÁ ressort (7) fixeÂ sur
F Si besoin, enlever l'anneau ressort (5) et extraire le F les vis (8).
levier (6). Enlever les vis (8).
Montare l'attrezzo T20A (oppure T20B), impegnare Asportare nell'ordine, il dado (9), la guarnizione OR
ITA l'asta di arresto ed allentare il dado (9) di ritegno della ITA (11), la flangia (10) e l'anello di arresto (7).
flangia (10).
Werkzeug T20A (T20B) montieren und Sperrstab Der Reihe nach Mutter (9), O-Ring (11), Flansch (10)
D einsetzen; Mutter (9) zur Befestigung des Flansches D und Sperring (7) abnehmen.
(19) lockern.
e f
Montar la herramienta T20A (T20B), bloquear la Sacar en su orden, la tuerca (9), la junta OR (11), la
ESP varilla de tope y aflojar la tuerca (9) de retencioÂn de ESP brida (10) y el anillo de tope (7).
la brida (10).
Monter l'outil T20A (T20B) engager la tige de buteÂe et Enlever dans l'ordre, l'eÂcrou (9), la garniture OR (11),
F desserrer l'eÂcrou (9) de fixation de la flasque (10). F la flasque (10) et la bague de buteÂe (7).
157
DISASSEMBLING THE INCOMING DRUM BRAKE - SMONTAGGIO FRENO A TAMBURO IN ENTRATA - TROMMELBREMSE AM EINGANG
ABMONTIEREN - DESMONTAJE FRENO DE TAMBOR EN ENTRADA- DEMONTAGE DU FREIN D'ENTREE A TAMBOUR
12
12 14
13
F1240557 F1240558
GB a GB b
Remove the seal (12) and discard it. Remove the securing screws (13) from brake support (14).
NOTE. Note down assembly direction.
14
16
15
F1240559 F1240560
GB c GB d
Remove brake support (14). Remove the distance piece (15).
NOTE. If operations are to be carried out the bevel pinion, see the
specific axle section.
17 16
14
4
8 13
1 11 15
GB e GB f
5
12 3 6
7
10
9
D1240077
158
Rimuovere l'anello di tenuta (12) e scartarlo. Rimuovere le viti (13) di fissaggio del supporto freno
ITA ITA (14).
NOTA. Annotare il senso di montaggio.
Dichtung (12) abnehmen und nicht mehr verwenden. Schrauben (13) zur Befestigung der Bremsenhalte-
D D rung (14) abschrauben.
BEMERKUNG. Montagerichtung bemerken.
a b
Remover la junta (12) y descartarla. Remover los tornillos (13) de fijacioÂn del soporte del
ESP ESP freno (14).
NOTA. Anotar el sentido de montaje.
Enlever la garniture (12) puis l'eÂliminer. Enlever les vis (13) de fixation du support du frein (14).
F F
NOTE. Prendre note du sens du montage.
Rimuovere il supporto freno (14). Rimuovere il distanziale (15).

ITA ITA
NOTA. Se si deve intervenire sul gruppo pignone
conico, vedere il paragrafo specifico dell'assale.
Bremsenhalterung (14) abnehmen. DistanzstuÈck (15) abnehmen.

D D
BEMERKUNG. Falls Eingriffe am Kegelrad noÈtig sind,
siehe entsprechender Abschnitt betreffend Achsen.
c d
Remover el soporte del freno (14). Remover el separador (15).
ESP ESP
NOTA. Si hay que intervenir en el grupo pinÄoÂn coÂnico,
veÂase el apartado especõÂfico del eje.
Enlever le support du frein (14). Enlever l'entretoise (15).

F F
NOTE. Si on doit intervenir sur le groupe pignon
conique, voir le paragraphe concernant speÂcifique-
ment l'essieu.
ITA ITA
D D
e f
ESP ESP
F F
159
ASSEMBLING THE INCOMING DRUM BRAKE - ASSEMBLAGGIO FRENO A TAMBURO IN ENTRATA - TROMMELBREMSE AM EINGANG
MONTIEREN - MONTAJE DEL FRENO DE TAMBOR EN ENTRADA - ASSEMBLAGE DU FREIN D'ENTREE A TAMBOUR
14
16
15
F1240560 F1240559
GB a GB b
Fit the distance piece (15) onto the pinion (16). Lubricate the coupling surfaces and position brake support (14).
Check that the O-ring (17) is intact.
12
14
13
T27
F1240561 F1240562
GB c GB d
Apply Loctite 242 to the screws (13) and tighten using the criss- Lubricate the outer part of the seal (12) and insert it into the brake
cross method. Torque wrench setting: 34.2 ± 37.8 Nm support (14) using tool T27.
NOTE. Carefully check assembly direction.
10 T20A
11 (T20B)
9
9
F1240556 F1240563
GB e GB f
Install parts in the following sequence: flange (10), O-ring (11) and Fit tools T20A (or T20B), engage the stop rod and tighten the nut
nut (9). Spread Loctite 242 on the threaded portion of the pinion (9). Torque wrench setting: 280 ± 310 Nm
(16)
160
Montare sul pignone (16) il distanziale (15). Lubrificare le superfici di accoppiamento e posizionare
ITA ITA il supporto freno (14).
Controllare l'integritaÁ della guarnizione OR (17).
DistanzstuÈck (15) auf das Rad (16) montieren KupplungsflaÈchen schmieren und Bremsenhalterung
D D (14) positionieren.
Zustand des O-Rings (17) kontrollieren.
a b
Montar en el pinÄoÂn (16), el separador. Lubricar las superficies de acoplamiento y posicionar
ESP ESP el soporte del freno (14).
Controlar la integridad de la junta OR (17).
Monter sur le pignon (16) l'entretoise (15). Lubrifier les surfaces d'accouplement et mettre en
F F place le support du frein (14).
ControÃler le bon eÂtat de la garniture OR (17).
Spalmare le viti (13) con Loctite 242 ed avvitarle Lubrificare l'esterno dell'anello di tenuta (12) ed
ITA serrandole con il metodo incrociato. ITA inserirla nel supporto freno (14) con l'attrezzo T27.
Coppia di serraggio: 34,2v37,8 Nm NOTA. Controllare attentamente il senso di montaggio.
Schrauben (13) mit Loctite 242 schmieren und im Dichtung (12) auûen schmieren und in die Bremsen-
D Kreuz anziehen. D halterung (14) mit dem Werkzeug T27 einsetzen.
Anzugsmoment: 34,2v37,8 Nm BEMERKUNG. Montagerichtung pruÈfen.
c d
Pasar sobre los tornillos (13) Loctite 242 y atornillarlos Lubricar la parte externa de la junta (12) e introducirla
ESP apretaÂndolos con el meÂtodo cruzado. ESP en el soporte del freno (14) con la herramienta T27.
Par de torsioÂn: 34,2v37,8 Nm. NOTA. Controlar atentamente el sentido de montaje.
Enduire les vis (13) avec du Loctite 242, et les visser Lubrifier la partie externe de la garniture (12) puis
F en les serrant avec la meÂthode croiseÂe. F l'inseÂrer dans le support du frein (14) aÁ l'aide de l'outil
Couple de serrage: 34,2v37,8 Nm T27.
NOTE. ControÃler soigneusement le sens du montage.
Montare nell'ordine la flangia (10), la guarnizione OR Montare gli attrezzi T20A (oppure T20B), impegnare
ITA (11) ed il dado (9). ITA l'asta di arresto e serrare il dado (9).
Spalmare il filetto del pignone (16) con Loctite 242. Coppia di serraggio: 280v310 Nm
Der Reihe nach Flansch (10), O-Ring (11) und Mutter Werkzeug T20A (oder T20B) montieren, Sperrstab
D (9) montieren. D einsetzen und Mutter (9) anziehen.
Radgewinde (16) mit Loctite 242 schmieren. Anzugsmoment: 280v310 Nm
e f
Montar en su orden la brida (10), la junta OR (11) y la Montar la herramienta T20A (o T20B), bloquear la
ESP tuerca (9). ESP varilla de tope y apretar la tuerca (9).
Pasar en la rosca del pinÄoÂn (16) Loctite 242. Par de torsioÂn: 280v310 Nm.
Monter dans l'ordre la flasque (10), la garniture OR Monter l'outil T20A (ou T20B), engager la tige de
F (11) et l'eÂcrou (9). F buteÂe et serrer l'eÂcrou (9).
Enduire le filet du pignon (16) avec du Loctite 242. Couple de serrage: 280v310 Nm
161
ASSEMBLING THE INCOMING DRUM BRAKE - ASSEMBLAGGIO FRENO A TAMBURO IN ENTRATA - TROMMELBREMSE AM EINGANG
MONTIEREN - MONTAJE DEL FRENO DE TAMBOR EN ENTRADA - ASSEMBLAGE DU FREIN D'ENTREE A TAMBOUR
8 5
7
4 6
F1240554 F1240553
GB a GB b
Insert the screws (8) and hold them in position with the snap ring If the lever (6) has been removed, install it and hold it in position
(7). with the snap ring (5). Fit the shoes assembly (4).
NOTE. Make sure that the ring is properly set in its seat.
F1240552 F1240564
GB c GB d
Make sure that the shoes (4) centre the slot of the fulcrum pin and Fit the drum (1).
rest on the surface of the lever (6). NOTE. Make sure that the friction surface of the drum carries no
trace of grease and is perfectly clean.
GB e GB f
162
Inserire le viti (8) e mantenerle in posizione con Se eÁ stata rimossa, montare la leva (6) e mantenerla in
ITA l'anello elastico (7). ITA posizione con l'anello elastico (5).
NOTA. Assicurarsi che l'anello elastico sia perfetta- Montare il gruppo ganasce (4).
mente in sede.
Schraube (8) einsetzen und mit dem Federring (7) Falls der Hebel (6) abmontiert worden ist, diesen
D positionieren. D wieder montieren und mit dem Federring (5) positio-
BEMERKUNG. Sicherstellen, daû der Federring richtig nieren.
sitzt. Backeneinheit (4) montieren.
a b
Introducir los tornillos (8) y mantenerlos en posicioÂn Si ha sido quitada, montar la palanca (6) y mantenerla
ESP por medio del anillo elaÂstico(7). ESP en posicioÂn con el anillo elaÂstico (5).
NOTA. Asegurarse de que el anillo elaÂstico se Montar el grupo mordazas (4).
encuentra perfectamente en sede.
InseÂrer les vis (8) et les tenir en place avec l'anneau Si enleveÂ, remonter le levier (6) et le tenir en place aÁ
F ressort (7). F l'aide de l'anneau ressort (5).
NOTE. S'assurer que l'anneau soit parfaitement dans Monter le groupe maÃchoires (4).
son logement.
Assicurarsi che le ganasce (4) centrino la cava del Montare il tamburo (1).
ITA perno di fulcro ed appoggino sui piani della leva (6). ITA
NOTA. Assicurarsi che la superficie di attrito del
Aiutandosi con un cacciavite, impegnare la molla (3). tamburo sia perfettamente sgrassata e pulita.
Kontrollieren ob die Backen (4) in der Nut des Trommel (1) montieren.
D Zentrierstiftes zentriert sind und auf die FlaÈchen des D
BEMERKUNG. Kontrollieren ob die ReibungsflaÈche
Hebels (6) anliegen. der Trommel richtig entfettet und sauber ist.
Mit Hilfe eines Schraubenziehers, Feder (3) einhaken.
c d
Asegurarse de que las mordazas (4) centren la ranura Montar el tambor (1).
ESP del perno de fulcro y apoyen sobre las superficies de ESP
NOTA. Asegurarse de que la superficie de roce del
la palanca (6). tambor estaÂ perfectamente desengrasada y limpia.
AyudaÂndose con un destornillador, bloquear el muelle (3).
S'assurer que les maÃchoires (4) sont au centre du Monter le tambour (1).
F creux de l'axe du point d'appui et qu'elles reposent F
NOTE. S'assurer que la surface de frottement du
sur les surfaces du levier (6). tambour est bien deÂgraisseÂe et propre.
A l'aide d'un tournevis, engager le ressort (3).
ITA ITA
D D
e f
ESP ESP
F F
163
HOW TO DISASSEMBLE THE 4" INCOMING BRAKE (2 AND 3 FUNCTION VERSIONS) - SMONTAGGIO FRENO IN ENTRATA DA 4" (A 2 E 3
FUNZIONI) - BREMSE AM EINGANG ZU 4" (MIT 2 UND 3 FUNKTIONEN) ABMONTIEREN - DESMONTAJE FRENO EN ENTRADA DE 4" (A 2 Y 3
FUNCIOONES) - DESMONTAJE FREIN EN ENTREE 4" (A 2 ET 3 FONCTIONS)
1
2
F1240763 F1240764
GB a GB b
Remove movement sensor (1), if fitted. Loosen the two nuts and remove lubrication tube (2).
3 7 6
F1240765 F1240766
GB c GB d
Remove nut (3), O-ring (4) and flange (5). Loosen screws (6) in an alternate and criss-cross manner until the
NOTE. If disassembly is awkward, heat nut (3) at about 80ÊC. action of Belleville washers (11) becomes null.
Remove screws (6) and spring washers of cover (8).
8 11
12
9 10
F1240767 F1240768
GB e bar
GB f
Pull out cover (8), shims (9) separating ring (10) and Belleville Slowly introduce compressed air through the negative brake
washers (11). connection point in order to extract the piston (12).
NOTE. Take note of the assembly direction of: shims (9) and CAUTION! Hold piston (12) as it may be rapidly ejected and
Belleville washers (11). damaged.
164
Se eÁ montato, rimuovere il sensore di movimento (1). Allentare i due dadi e rimuovere il tubo (2) della
ITA ITA lubrificazione.
Wenn montiert, den Bewegungsgeber (1) abnehmen. Die beiden Muttern lockern und die Schmierleitung (2)
D D abnehmen.
a b
Si ha sido montado, remover el sensor de movimiento Aflojar las dos tuercas y remover el tubo (2) de la
ESP (1). ESP lubrificacioÁn.
S'il est monteÂ, enlever le capteur de deÂplacement (1). DeÂvisser le deux eÂcrous et enlever le tuyau (2) pour la
F F lubrification.
Rimuovere il dado (3), la guarnizione OR (4) e la Allentare in modo alternato ed incrociato le viti (6) fino
ITA flangia (5). ITA ad annullare l'azione delle molle a tazza (11).
NOTA. Se lo smontaggio risulta difficoltoso, scaldare il Rimuovere le viti (6) e le rondelle elastiche di ritegno
dado (3) a circa 80ëC. coperchio (8).
Die Mutter (3), den O-Ring (4) und den Flansch (5) Abwechselnd und im Kreuz die Schrauben (6) lockern,
D abnehmen. D bis die Wirkung der Tellerfeder (11) gleich Null ist.
BEMERKUNG. Falls das Abmontieren schwer sein Schrauben (6) und Federscheiben des Deckels (8)
sollte, die Mutter (3) bis auf ca. 80ëC erwaÈrmen. abnehmen.
c d
Remover la tuerca (3), la guarnicion OR (4) y la brida Aflojar de manera alterna y cruzada los tornillos (6)
ESP (5). ESP hasta anular la acioÁn de los muelles a taza (11).
NOTA. Si el desmontaje resulta dificil, calentar la Remover los tornillos (6) y las arandelas elasticas de
tuerca (3) a 80ëC approx. retencioÁn tapa (8).
Enlever l'eÂcrou (3), la garniture OR (4) et la flasque (5). DeÂvisser alternativement et de facËon croiseÂe les vis (6)
F NOTE. Si le deÂmontage est difficile, chauffer l'eÂcrou F jusqu'aÁ annuler l'action des ressorts belleville (11).
(3) aÁ environ 80ëC. Enlever les vis (6) et les rondelles aÁ segment de
fixation du couvercle (8).
Asportare il coperchio (8), i rasamenti (9), l'anello di Immettere lentamente aria compressa attraverso
ITA battuta (10) e le molle a tazza (11). ITA l'attacco per il freno negativo per estrarre il pistone
NOTA. Annotare il senso di montaggio dei rasamenti (12).
(9) e delle molle (11). ATTENZIONE! Trattenere il pistone (12) che puoÁ essere espulso
Deckel (8), Scheiben (9), Anschlagring (10) und Langsam Druckluft durch den Anschluû fuÈr die
D Tellerfedern (11) abnehmen. D Negativbremse einlassen, um den Kolben (12) auszu-
BEMERKUNG. Montagerichtung der Scheiben (9) und stoûen.
der Federn (11) bemerken. ACHTUNG! Den Kolben (12) halten, denn er koÈnnte ploÈtzlich
e f herausspringen und beschaÈdigt werden.
Quitar la tapa (8), las raspaduras (9), el anillo de tope Introducir lentamente aire comprimida atraves el
ESP (10) y los muelles a taza (11). ESP ataque para el freno negativo para extraer el piston
NOTA. Anotar el sentido de las raspaduras (9) y de los (12).
muelles (11). ATENCION! Tener el piston (12) que puede ser expulso rapida-
mente y ser danado.
Enlever le couvercle (8), les rasages (9), l'anneau de Emettre lentement de l'air comprimeÂ aÁ travers le point
F buteÂe (10) et les ressorts belleville (11). F d'enclenchement du frein neÂgatif pour en extraire le
NOTE. Noter le sens de montage des rasages (9) et piston (12).
des ressorts (11). ATTENTION! Retenir le piston (12) qui eÃtre expulseÂ rapidement
peut par conseÂquent s'endommager.
165
18
17
17 19
18
F1240769 F1240770
GB a GB b
Remove check screws (17) from cylinder (18). Remove cylinder (18) complete with guide pin (19) of piston (12).
NOTE. Take note of direction of assembly.
23 25 26
24
27
F1240771 F1240772
GB c GB d
With the help of a lever, prize off the distance piece (23) complete Remove friction discs (25), (26) and hub (27).
with O-ring (24).
NOTE. Thoroughly clean the face of bevel pinion support where
the hub rests, check the O-ring (24) and replace it if necessary.
28 29
31
28 29
30
F1240773 F1240774
GB e GB f
3-FUNCTION VERSION ONLY 3-FUNCTION VERSION ONLY
Loosen nuts (28) (no. 3) and unscrew dowels (29) (no. 3) to retract Loosen and remove the pin-type screws (31).
the adjustment points (30). NOTE. Loosen screws (31) in an alternate and criss-cross manner.
NOTE. Loosen dowels (29) in an alternate manner until the piston
comes to end of backstroke.
ONLY IF NECESSARY. Remove points (30).
166
Rimuovere le viti (17) di ritegno del cilindro (18). Rimuovere il cilindro (18) completo della spina (19) di
ITA ITA guida del pistone (12).
Die Schrauben (17) zur Halterung des Zylinders (18) Den Zylinder (18) samt Stift (19) zur FuÈhrung des
D abnehmen. D Kolbens (12) abnehmen.
BEMERKUNG. Montagerichtung bemerken.
a b
Sacar los tornillos (17) di retencioÁn del cilindro (18). Sacar el cilindro (18) completo de espina (19) de guõÁa
ESP ESP del piston (12).
NOTA. Anotar el sentido de montaje.
Enlever les vis (17) de fixation du cylindre (18). Enlever le cylindre (18) complet de broche (19) de
F F guidage du piston (12).
NOTE. Prendre note du sens de montage.
Forzando con una leva, rimuovere il distanziale (23) Asportare i dischi di frizione (25), (26) ed il mozzo (27).
ITA completo di OR (24). ITA
NOTA. Pulire accuratamente la superficie di appoggio
al mozzo di supporto pignone conico, controllare l'OR (24) e, se
necessario, sostituirlo.
Mit Hilfe eines Hebels, das DistanzstuÈck (23) samt O- Kupplungsscheiben (25), (26) und Nabe (27) abneh-
D Ring (24) entfernen. D men.
BEMERKUNG. SorgfaÈltig die AuflageflaÈche an der
Nabe des kegeligen Kolbenhalters reinigen und O-Ring (24)
c kontrollieren. Wenn noÈtig, auswechseln. d
Haciendo fuerza con una palanca, sacar el distancial Sacar los discos de fricioÁn (25), (26) y el cubo (27).
ESP (23) completo de OR (24). ESP
NOTA. Limpiar con atencioÁn la superficie de apoyo al
cubo de suporte pinon conico, controlar el OR (24) y, si necesario,
sobstituirlo.
En forcËant sur le levier, enlever l'entretoise (23) Enlever les disques de friction (25), (26) et le moyeu
F complet de OR (24). F (27).
NOTE. Nettoyer soigneusement la surface d'appui du
moyeu de support du pignon conique, controÃler la OR (24) et si
besoin, la remplacer.
SOLO PER VERSIONE A 3 FUNZIONI SOLO PER VERSIONE A 3 FUNZIONI

ITA Allentare i dadi (28) (në 3) e svitare i grani (29) (në 3) ITA Allentare ed asportare le viti a perno (31).
per far rientrare i puntali di registro (30). NOTA. Allentare le viti (31) in modo alternato ed
NOTA. Allentare i grani (29) in modo alternato fino a fine corsa di incrociato.
ritorno del pistone.
SOLO SE NECESSARIO. Asportare i puntali (30).
NUR FU È R AUSFU È HRUNG MIT 3 FUNKTIONEN NUR FU È R AUSFUÈ HRUNG MIT 3 FUNKTIONEN
D Muttern (28) (3 St.) lockern und Stifte (29) (3 St.) D Stiftschrauben (31) abschrauben.
abschrauben. StellschaÈfte (30) zuruÈck zu fahren. BEMERKUNG. Schrauben (31) abwechselnd und im
BEMERKUNG. Stifte (29) abwechselnd bis zum RuÈcklaufende des Kreuz abschrauben.
e Kolbens lockern.
È TIG. SchaÈfte (30) abnehmen.
f
NUR WENN NO
SOLO POR VERSION A 3 FUNCIONES SOLO POR VERSION A 3 FUNCIONES

ESP Aflojar los dados (28) (në3) y destornillar las espigas (29) ESP Aflojar y sacar los tornillos a rotula (31).
(në3) para hacer entrar los puntales de registro (30). NOTA. Aflojar los tornillos (31) de manera alternada y
NOTA. Aflojar las espigas (29) de manera alternada hasta final cruzada.
carrera de vuelta del piston.
SOLO SI NECESARIO. Sacar los puntales (30).
SEULEMENT DANS LES VERSIONS A 3 FONCTIONS. SEULEMENT DANS LES VERSIONS A 3 FONCTIONS.
F Desserrer les eÂcrous (28) (në3) et deÂvisser les grains F Desserrer et enlever les vis aÁ cheville (31).
(29) (në3) pour faire rentrer les tringles de reÂglage (30). NOTE. Desserrer les vis (31) de facËon alterneÂe et
NOTE. Desserrer les grains (29) de facËon alterneÂe jusqu'au retour croiseÂe.
de fin de course du piston.
SEULEMENT SI BESOIN. Enlever les tringles (30).
167
32 33
33
F1240775 F1240776
GB a GB b
Remove springs (32) of piston (33) backward movement. Slowly introduce compressed air through the connection point of
the service brake to extract the piston (33).
CAUTION! Hold piston (33) as it may be rapidly ejected and
damaged.
39
38
F1240777 F1240778
GB c GB d
2-FUNCTION VERSION ONLY Remove sealing ring (38) from cover (8).
Remove the distance piece (39). NOTE. Take note of direction of assembly of ring (38) and replace
ring every time the unit is disassembled.
14 13 35 34
36 37
13 14
15 16
33
34 35 36 37
15 16 12
F1240942 F1240943
GB e GB f
Remove sealing rings (13) and (15) and anti-extrusion rings (14) 3-FUNCTION VERSION ONLY
and (16) from the piston (12). Remove sealing rings (34) and (36) and anti-extrusion rings (35)
NOTE. Sealing rings (13) and (15) and anti-extrusion rings (14) and and (37) from piston (33).
(16) must be replaced each time the unit is disassembled. NOTE. Sealing rings (34), (36) and anti-extrusion rings (35), (37)
must be replaced each time the unit is disassembled.
168
ITA Rimuovere le molle (32) di ritorno del pistone (33). ITA Immettere lentamente aria compressa attraverso l'at-
tacco del freno di servizio per estrarre il pistone (33).
ATTENZIONE! Trattenere il pistone (33) che puoÁ essere espulso
NUR FU È R AUSFU È HRUNG MIT 3 FUNKTIONEN NUR FUÈ R AUSFU È HRUNG MIT 3 FUNKTIONEN
D RuÈckzugsfeder (32) des Kolbens (33) abnehmen. D Langsam Druckluft durch den Anschluû der Hilfs-
bremse einlassen, um den Kolben (33) auszustoûen.
ACHTUNG! Den Kolben (33) halten, denn er koÈnnte ploÈtzlich
a b herausgestoûen und beschaÈdigt werden.

ESP Sacar los muelles (32) de vuelta del piston (33). ESP Introducir lentamente aire comprimida atraves el
ataque del freno de servicio para sacar el piston (33).
ATENCION. Tener el piston (33) que puede ser expulso rapida-
mente y ser danado.
F Enlever les ressorts (32) de retour du piston (33). F Emettre lentement de l'air comprimeÂ aÁ travers le point
de montage du frein de service pour en extraire le
piston (33).
ATTENTION! Retenir le piston (33) qui expulseÂ rapidement peut
eÃtre par conseÂquent endommageÂ.
SOLO PER VERSIONE A 2 FUNZIONI Rimuovere dal coperchio (8) l'anello di tenuta (38).
ITA Asportare il distanziale (39). ITA
NOTA. Annotare il senso di montaggio dell'anello (38)
e sostituirlo ad ogni smontaggio.
NUR FU È R AUSFU È HRUNG MIT 2 FUNKTIONEN Vom Deckel (8) den Dichtring (38) abnehmen.
D DistanzstuÈck (39) abnehmen. D
BEMERKUNG. Montagerichtung des Ringes (38)
bemerken und beim Abmontieren jedesmal auswech-
seln.
c d
SOLO POR VERSION A 3 FUNCIONES Remover de la tapa (8) el segmento de compresioÁn
ESP Sacar el distancial (39). ESP (38).
NOTA. Anotar el sentido de montaje del segmento
(38) y sobstituirlo cada desmontaje.
SEULEMENT DANS LES VERSIONS A 2 FONCTIONS. Enlever du couvercle (8) la bague d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (38).
F Enlever l'entretoise (39). F
NOTE. Prendre note du sens de montage de la bague
(38), la remplacer aÁ chaque deÂmontage.
Rimuovere dal pistone (12) gli anelli di tenuta (13) e SOLO PER VERSIONE A 3 FUNZIONI
ITA (15) e gli anelli antiestrusione (14) e (16). ITA Rimuovere dal pistone (33) gli anelli di tenuta (34) e
NOTA. Gli anelli di tenuta (13), (15) ed antiestrusione (36) e gli anelli antiestrusione (35) e (37).
(14), (16) devono essere sostituiti ad ogni smontaggio. NOTA. Gli anelli di tenuta (34), (36) ed antiestrusione (35), (37)
devono essere sostituiti ad ogni smontaggio.
Vom Kolben (12) Dichtringe (13) und (15) sowie die NUR FU È R AUSFU È HRUNG MIT 3 FUNKTIONEN
D Halteringe (14) und (16) abnehmen. D Vom Kolben (33) die Dichtringe (34) und (36) sowie die
BEMERKUNG. Die Dichtringe (13), (15) und Halterin- Halteringe (35) und (37) abnehmen.
ge (14). (16) muÈssen bei jedem Abmontieren ausgewechselt BEMERKUNG. Die Dichtringe (34), (36) und Halteringe (35), (37)
e werden. f jedesmal auswechseln, wenn sie abmontiert werden.
Sacar el piston (12) los segmentos de compresion (13) SOLO POR VERSION DE 3 FUNCIONES
ESP y (15) y los segmentos anti-extrusioÁn (14) y (16). ESP Remover del piston (33) los segmentos de compresioÁn
NOTA. Los segmentos de compresioÁn (13) y (15) y (34) y (36) y los segmentos anti-extrusioÁn (35) y (37).
anti-axtrusioÁn (14), (16) deben de ser cambiados cada desmontaje. NOTA. Los segmentos de compresion (34), (36) y anti-extrusioÁn
(35), (37) deben de ser sobstituidos a cada desmontaje.
Enlever le piston (12) les bagues d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (13) et SEULEMENT DANS LES VERSIONS A 3 FONCTIONS.
F (15) et les anneaux anti-extrusion (14), et (16). F Enlever du piston (33) les bagues d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (34) et
NOTE. Les bagues d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (13), (15) et anti- (36) et les anneaux anti-extrusion (35) et (37).
extrusion (14), (16) doivent eÃtre remplaceÂes aÁ chaque deÂmontage. NOTE. Les bagues d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (34), (36) et anti-extrusion (35),
(37) doivent eÃtre remplaceÂes aÁ chaque deÂmontage.
169
26 A 25
A minimo =1,36 mm
D1240083 D1240095
GB a GB b
CAUTION! Always check the thickness of braking discs (26), even BRAKING DISCS PACK CONTENTS
if the braking unit is being disassembled for other reasons than The braking discs pack is comprised of: 11 braking discs and 12
this. steel counterdiscs.
If thickness "A" of one of the discs (26) is close to the minimum
admissible size of 1.36 mm, replace the whole pack.
9 10 11
42
41
D1240084 D1240085
GB c GB d
CAUTION! If the braking discs unit is replaced, shims (9) - which ONLY WHEN REPLACEMENT IS NECESSARY
determine the preloading of Belleville washers (11) - must to be Remove the union pieces (41) and (42) connecting the lubrication
restored. tube (2).
NOTE. During the assembly stage, union pieces (41) and (42) must
be coated with Loctite 577 and tightened to a torque wrench setting
of 35 ± 50 Nm.
GB e GB f
170
ATTENZIONE! Anche se il gruppo freno viene COMPOSIZIONE PACCO DISCHI DI FRENATURA
ITA smontato solo per motivi diversi, controllare lo spes- ITA Il pacco dei dischi di frenatura comprende: në 11
sore dei dischi di frenatura (26). dischi di frenatura e në 12 controdischi in acciaio.
Se lo spessore "A" di un solo disco (26) si avvicina alla misura
minima ammessa di 1,36 mm, sostituire l'intero pacco.
ACHTUNG! Jedesmal wenn das Bremsaggregat aus DER SATZ DER BREMSSCHEIBEN BESTEHT AUS
D irgend einem Grund abmontiert wird, die StaÈrke der D 11 Bremsscheiben und 12 Gegenscheiben aus Stahl.
Bremsscheiben (26) kontrollieren.
Falls die StaÈrke "A" auch nur einer Scheibe (26) dem Mindestmaû
a nah liegt, den ganzen Satz auswechseln. b
ATENCION! Tambien si el grupo freno viene desmon- COMPOSICION PAQUETE DISCOS DE FRENADU-
ESP tado solo por motivos diferentes, controlar el espesor ESP RA
de los discos de frenadura (26). El paquete de los discos de frenadura se compone de:
Si el espesor "A" de un solo disco (26) se acerca a la medida në11 discos de frenadura y në12 contra-discos en acero.
minima admetida de 1,36 mm, sobstituir el intero paquete.
ATTENTION! MeÃme si le groupe frein est deÂmonteÂ COMPOSITION DU PAQUET DE DISQUES DE FREI-
F pour des raisons diverses, controÃler les cales des F NAGE
disques de freinage (26). Le paquet de disques de freinage comprend: në 11
Si la cale "A" d'un seul disque (26) se rapproche de la mesure disques de freinage et në 12 contre-disques en acier.
minimum consentie de 1,36 mm, substituer tout le paquet.
ATTENZIONE! Nel caso venga sostituito il gruppo dei SOLO SE EÁ NECESSARIA LA SOSTITUZIONE
ITA dischi di frenatura, eÁ necessario ripristinare gli ITA Rimuovere i raccordi (41), (42) di attacco del tubo di
spessori (9) determinanti il precarico delle molle a lubrificazione (2).
tazza (11). NOTA. In fase di montaggio, i raccordi (41), (42) devono essere
spalmati con Loctite 577 e serrati con una coppia di 35v50 Nm.
ACHTUNG! Falls das Bremscheibenaggregat ausge- NUR WENN DAS AUSWECHSELN NO È TIG IST
D wechselt wird, die DistanzstuÈck wieder (9) wieder D AnschluÈsse (41), (42) der Schmierleitung (2) abneh-
einsetzen, die die Tellerfedern (11) vorladen. men.
BEMERKUNG. Bei der Montage, die AnschluÈsse (41), (42) mit
c d Loctite 577 schmieren und mit einem Anzugsmoment von 35v50
Nm fest zeihen.
ATENCION! En el caso venga sobstituido el grupo de SOLO SI NECESARIA LA SOBSTITUCION

ESP los discos de frenadura, es necesario restablecer los ESP Remover los empalmes (41), (42) de ataque del tubo
espesores (9) determinados la precarga de los muelles de lubrificacioÁn (2).
a taza (11). NOTA. En fase de montaje, los empalmes (41), (42) deben de ser
pasados con Loctite 577 y cerrados con un par de 35v50 Nm.
ATTENTION! Dans le cas ouÁ le groupe des disques SEULEMENT QUAND LA SUBSTITUTION EST NE-
F de freinage est substitueÂ, remettre les cales (9) qui F CESSAIRE
deÂterminent la preÂcharge des ressorts belleville (11). Enlever les raccords (41), (42) de branchement du
tube de lubrification (2).
NOTE. En phase de montage, les raccords (41), (42) doivent eÃtre
enduits avec du Loctite 577 et serreÂs aÁ un couple de 35v50 Nm.
ITA ITA
D D
e f
ESP ESP
F F
171
VARIANT FOR 2-FUNTION VERSION

VARIANTE PER 2 FUNZIONI
È R 2 FUNKTIONEN
VARIANTE FU
VARIANTE POR 2 FUNCIONES
VARIANTE POUR 2 FONCTIONS
18 39
17
19
14 20 21
13 22
12
GB 11 a GB b
10
9
40 16
8 38 15 28 1
29
5
30
3 4
] 32
] 31 ] 35 ] 34
7 ] 33
6
24
26 ] 37
] 36
26
26
GB c 41
GB 42 d
25 23
27 2
25
RKZA0040
] 3-FUNTION VERSION ONLY

D1240088
25 SOLO PER VERSIONE A 3 FUNZIONI
È R AUSFU
NUR FU È HRUNG MIT 3 FUNKTIONEN
SOLO POR VERSION A 3 FUNCIONES
SEULEMENT POUR VERSIONS A 3 FONCTIONS
GB e GB f
172
ITA ITA
D D
a b
ESP ESP
F F
ITA ITA
D D
c d
ESP ESP
F F
ITA ITA
D D
e f
ESP ESP
F F
173
HOW TO ASSEMBLE THE 4" INCOMING BRAKE (2 AND 3 FUNCTION VERSIONS) - ASSEMBLAGGIO FRENO IN ENTRATA DA 4" (A 2 E 3
FUNZIONI) - BREMSE AM EINGANG ZU 4" (MIT 2 UND 3 FUNKTIONEN) MONTIEREN - ASEMBLAJE FRENO EN ENTRADA DE 4" (A 2 Y 3
FUNCIONES) - MONTAJE DEL FREIN EN ENTREE 4" (A 2 ET 3 FONCTIONS)
35 34 14 13
36 37
13 14
15 16
33
34 35 36 37
15 16 12
F1240943 F1240942
GB a GB b
3-FUNCTION VERSION ONLY Fit the sealing rings (13), (15) and the anti-extrusion rings (14), (16)
Fit the sealing rings (34), (36) and the anti-extrusion rings (35), (37) onto the piston (12) of the negative brake.
onto the piston (33) of the service brake. NOTE. Carefully check the assembly position of the anti-extrusion
NOTE. Carefully check the assembly position of anti-extrusion rings.
rings.
T31 A1
38
8
12
F1240781 F1240782
GB c GB d
Lubricate sealing ring (38) and, using tool T31, fit it into the cover 3-FUNCTION VERSION ONLY
(8). Measure size "A1" of piston (12) and note it down.
NOTE. Carefully check the direction of ring (38).
10
10 9
B1
S
8
D1240086
F1240783
GB e GB f
Fit the separating ring (10) of Belleville washers onto the cover (8), Using the measurements just taken, calculate thickness "S" of
measure size "B1" and note it down. shims (9) as follows: S=(A1+1.5)±(B1+18.4) where:
S=Shim thickness - 1.5 mm=fixed measure of braking discs
clearance - 18.4 mm=fixed measure of Belleville washers.
174
SOLO PER VERSIONE A 3 FUNZIONI Montare sul pistone (12) del freno negativo gli anelli di
ITA Montare sul pistone (33) del freno di servizio gli anelli ITA tenuta (13), (15) e gli anelli antiestrusione (14), (16).
di tenuta (34), (36) e gli anelli antiestrusione (35), (37). NOTA. Controllare attentamente la posizione di
NOTA. Controllare attentamente la posizione di montaggio degli montaggio degli anelli antiestrusione.
anelli antiestrusione.
NUR FU È R AUSFU È HRUNG MIT 3 FUNKTIONEN Auf den Kolben (12) der Negativbremse die Dichtringe
D Auf den Kolben (33) der Hilfsbremse die Dichtringe D (13), (15) und die Halteringe (14), (16) montieren.
(34), (36) und die Halteringe (35), (37) montieren. BEMERKUNG. SorgfaÈltig die Montagerichtung der
BEMERKUNG. SorgfaÈltig die Montagerichtung der Halteringe Halteringe pruÈfen.
a pruÈfen. b
SOLO POR VERSION A 3 FUNCIONES Monter sobre el piston (12) del freno negativo los
ESP Montar sobre el piston (33) del freno de servicio los ESP segmentos de compresioÁn (13), (15) y los segmentos
segmentos de compresion (34), (36) y los segmentos anti-extrusion (14), (16).
de anti-extrusion (35), (37). NOTA. Controlar con cuidado la colocacioÁn ce montaje de los
NOTA. Controlar con cuidado la colocacioÁn de montaje de los segmentos anti-extrusion.
segmentos anti-extrusioÁn.
SEULEMENT DANS LES VERSIONS A 3 FONCTIONS. Monter sur le piston (12) du frein neÂgatif les bagues
F Monter sur le piston (33) du frein de service les bagues F d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (13), (15) et les anneaux anti-extrusion
d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (34), (36) et les anneaux anti-extrusion (14), (16).
(35), (37). NOTE. ControÃler attentivement la position du montage des
NOTE. ControÃler attentivement la position du montage des anneaux anti-extrusion.
anneaux anti-extrusion.
Lubrificare l'anello di tenuta (38) e, utilizzando SOLO PER VERSIONE A 3 FUNZIONI

ITA l'attrezzo T31, montarlo nel coperchio (8). ITA Rilevare la misura "A1" del pistone (12) e trascriverla.
NOTA. Controllare attentamente l'orientamento del-
l'anello (38).
Dichtring (38) schmieren und mit Hilfe des Werkzeugs NUR FUÈ R AUSFUÈ HRUNG MIT 3 FUNKTIONEN
D T31 den Deckel (8) montieren. D Maû "A1" des Kolbens (12) messen und anmerken.
BEMERKUNG. SorgfaÈltig die Montagerichtung des
Ringes (38) pruÈfen.
c d
Lubrificar el segmento de compresioÁn (38) y utilizando SOLO POR VERSION A 3 FUNCIONES
ESP la herramienta T31, montarlo sobre la tapa (8). ESP Relevar la medida "A1" del piston (12) y registrarla.
NOTA. Controlar con cuidado la direccioÁn del seg-
mento (38).
Lubrifier la bague d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (38), puis aÁ l'aide de SEULEMENT DANS LES VERSIONS A 3 FONCTIONS.
F l'outil T31, monter celle-ci dans le couvercle (8). F Relever la mesure "A1" du piston (12) et enregistrer
NOTE. ControÃler attentivement l'orientation de la cette dernieÁre.
bague (38).

ITA Montare sul coperchio (8) l'anello di battuta (10) delle ITA Utilizzando le misure rilevate, determinare lo spessore
molle a tazza, rilevare la misura "B1" e trascriverla. "S" dei rasamenti (9) con il seguente calcolo:
S=(A1+1,5)±(B1+18,4) ove:
S=Spessori rasamenti - 1,5 mm=misura fissa del gioco dischi
freno - 18,4 mm=misura fissa delle molle a tazza.
NUR FUÈ R AUSFU È HRUNG MIT 3 FUNKTIONEN NUR FUÈ R AUSFU È HRUNG MIT 3 FUNKTIONEN
D Auf den Deckel (8) den Anschlagring (10) der Tellerfe- D Anhand der ermittelten Maûe die StaÈrke "S" der
dern montieren. Das Maû "B1" messen und anmerken. Scheiben (9) folgendermaûen ausrechnen:
S=(A1+1,5)±(B1+18,4) wo:
e f S=ScheibenstaÈrke - 1,5 mm=feste Maû fuÈr das Spiel der Brems-
scheiben - 18,4 mm=feste Maû fuÈr Tellerfedern.

ESP Montar sobre la tapa (8) el segmento a tope (10) de los ESP Utilisando las medidas relevadas, determinar el espe-
muelles a taza, relevar la medida "B1" y registrarla. sor "S" de las raspaduras (9) con el siguiente calcolo:
S=(A1+1,5)±(B1+18,4) donde:
S=espesor raspaduras - 1,5 mm=medida fija del juego discos
freno - 18,4 mm=medida fija de los muelles a taza.
F Monter sur le couvercle (8) l'anneau de buteÂe (10) des F A l'aide de la mesure releveÂe, deÂfinir la cale "S" des
ressorts Belleville, relever la mesure "B1" et enregis- rasages (9) par le calcul suivant:
trer cette dernieÁre. S=(A1+1,5)±(B1+18,4) ou:
S=Cales rasages - 1,5 mm=mesure fixe du jeu des disques
frein - 18,4 mm=mesure fixe des ressorts Belleville.
175
33 32 33
30
F1240784 F1240775
GB a GB b
Lubricate the O-rings and install the whole piston (33). Orient the Insert springs (32) for piston (33) backward movement.
piston with the help of a lever and push it to end of stroke with a
plastic hammer.
CAUTION! Check that the adjusting stakes (30) are thoroughly
inserted and make sure they perform a sliding motion in relation to
each other.
31
31
31
F1240774 F1240785
GB c GB d
Apply Loctite 242 to the thread of screws (31) and tighten. Lock screws (31) in a criss-cross manner by using a dynamometric
NOTE. Tighten the screws with a normal wrench in an alternate wrench set to a max. torque of 10 Nm.
and criss-cross manner. CAUTION! Do not exceed the specified torque setting.
12 23
18
25 26
27
F1240786 F1240787
GB e GB f
Lubricate seals (13), (15) and fit the piston (12) into the cylinder Lightly lubricate the braking discs (25), (26) and fit them onto the
(18). Engage piston on the pin (19). For the assembly, use a plastic hub (27).
hammer and push the piston (12) to end of stroke. Align discs (25) and fit the distance piece (23).
NOTE. The braking discs pack starts and ends with steel discs
(25).
176
ITA Lubrificare le guarnizioni OR e montare il pistone (33) ITA Inserire le molle (32) di ritorno del pistone (33).
completo. Orientare il pistone con una leva e mandarlo
a fondo corsa con un mazzuolo in materiale plastico.
ATTENZIONE! Controllare che i pioli di registro (30) siano inseriti a
fondo e che scorrano tra loro.
NUR FU È R AUSFUÈ HRUNG MIT 3 FUNKTIONEN NUR FU È R AUSFUÈ HRUNG MIT 3 FUNKTIONEN
D O-Ringe schmieren und den vollstaÈndigen Kolben (33) D RuÈckzugsfedern (32) in den Kolben (33) einsetzen.
montieren. Den Kolben mit einem Hebel orientieren
und bis zum Hubende mit einem Gummihammer schlagen.
a ACHTUNG! Kontrollieren, ob die Regelungspole (30) bis zum b
Anschlag eingesetzt sind und verschiebt werden koÈnnen.

ESP Lubrificar las guarniciones OR y montar el piston (33) ESP Introducir los muelles (32) de vuelta del piston (33).
completo. Orientar el piston con una palanca y
mandarlo a final carrera con un martillo en material plastico.
ATENCION! Controlar que las extremidades de registro (30) sean
introducidas a fondo y que deslizen entre ellas.
F Lubrifier les garnitures OR et monter le piston (33) F Introduire les ressorts (32) de retour du piston (33).
complet. Orienter le piston aÁ l'aide d'un levier puis
l'envoyer en fin de course aÁ l'aide d'un maillet en matieÁre plastique.
ATTENTION! ControÃler, que les poÃles de reÂgistration (30) soient
inseÂreÂs aÁ fond et qu'ils puissent glisser.

ITA Spalmare il filetto delle viti (31) con Loctite 242 ed ITA Bloccare le viti (31) in modo incrociato utilizzando una
avvitarle. chiave dinamometrica tarata ad una coppia massima
NOTA. Mandare in battuta le viti con una chiave normale con il di 10 Nm.
metodo alternato ed incrociato. ATTENZIONE! Non superare la coppia di serraggio indicata.
NUR FUÈ R AUSFU È HRUNG MIT 3 FUNKTIONEN NUR FU È R AUSFUÈ HRUNG MIT 3 FUNKTIONEN
D Schraubengewinde (31) mit Loctite 242 schmieren und D Die Schrauben (31) im Kreuz mit einem Momenten-
Schrauben fest schrauben. schluÈssel und einem Anzugsmoment von 10 Nm fest
schrauben.
c d ACHTUNG! Das angegebene Moment nicht uÈberschreiten.

ESP Pasar la rosca de los tornillos (31) con Loctite 242 y ESP Bloquear los tornillos (31) de manera cruzada utilizan-
atornillarlas. do una llave dinamometrica tarada a un par maximo
NOTA. Mandar a tope los tornillos con una llave normal de manera de 10 Nm.
alternada y cruzada. ATENCION! No superar el par de torsion indicado.
F Enduire le filet des vis (31) avec du Loctite 242, puis F Bloquer les vis (31) de manieÁre croiseÂe aÁ l'aide d'une cleÂ
visser. dynamomeÂtrique calibreÂe aÁ un couple max. de 10 Nm.
NOTE. Envoyer en buteÂe les vis aÁ l'aide d'une cleÂ normale avec la ATTENTION! Ne jamais deÂpasser le couple de serrage indiqueÂ.
meÂthode alterneÂe, croiseÂe.
Lubrificare le guarnizioni (13), (15) e montare nel Lubrificare leggermente i dischi di frenatura (25), (26)
ITA cilindro (18) il pistone (12) orientandolo sulla spina (19). ITA e montarli sul mozzo (27).
Per il montaggio, utilizzare un mazzuolo in materiale Allineare i dischi (25) e montare il distanziale (23).
plastico e mandare il pistone (12) a fondo corsa. NOTA. La composizione del pacco dei dischi di frenatura inizia e
termina con i dischi di acciaio (25).
Dichtungen (13), (15) schmieren und in en Zylinder Bremsscheiben (25), (26) leicht schmieren und auf die
D (18) den Kolben (12) montieren und auf den Stift (19) D Nabe (27) montieren.
orientieren. Zur Montage einen Gummihammer ver- Scheiben (25) ausrichten und DistanzstuÈck (23)
wenden, um den Kolben (12) bis zum Hubende zu schlagen. montieren.
e f BEMERKUNG. Der Satz der Bremsscheiben beginnt und endet mit
den Stahlscheiben (25).
Lubrificar las guarnicioÁnes (13), (15) y montar en el Lubrificar ligermente los discos de frenadura (25), (26)
ESP cilindro (18) el piston (12) dirijiendolo sobre la espina ESP y montarlos sobre el cubo (27).
(19). Alinear los discos (25) y montar el distancial (23).
Para el montaje, utilizar un martillo en material plastico y mandar el NOTA. La composicioÁn del paquete de los discos de frenadura
piston (12) a final carrera. empieza y termina con los discos en acero (25).
Lubrifier les garnitures (13), (15) puis monter dans Lubrifier leÂgeÁrement les disques de freinage (25), (26)
F cylindre (18) le piston (12) en l'orientant sur la broche F et monter ceux-ci sur le moyeu (27).
(19). Aligner les disques (25) et monter l'entretoise (23).
Pour le montage, utiliser un maillet en matieÁre plastique et envoyer NOTE. La composition du paquet des disques de freinage
le piston (12) en fin de course. commence et s'acheÁve par des disques en acier (25).
177
18
23
12 24
F1240788 F1240789
GB a GB b
Apply Loctite 510 on the face of the distance piece (23). Lubricate the O-ring (24) and fit cylinder (18) complete with piston
Fit the discs-hub-distance piece assembly prepared in the previous (12).
stages onto the pinion and engage it.
17
12
17
F1240790 F1240791
GB c GB d
Introduce screws (17) and tighten in a criss-cross manner: use a 3-FUNCTION VERSION ONLY
torque wrench setting of 9.5 ± 10.5 Nm. Using a plastic hammer, push the piston (12) to the end of stroke.
NOTE. Before giving the final tightening, align the external
surfaces of the components.
10
10
A B
9
F1241069 F1240793
GB e GB f
2-FUNCTION VERSION ONLY Lightly lubricate the shims (9) required according to calculations
Fit the separating ring (10) of Belleville washers onto the cover (8), and the separating ring (10) of the Belleville washers.
measure size "B" and note it down. Fit shims and ring on the cover (8).
Measure size "A" which you will need for calculating the shims (9) NOTE. Position the larger shim so that it leans against the cover.
according to the following:
S=A±(B+18.4) where: S=Shim thickness - 18.4 mm=fixed mea-
sure of Belleville washers.
178
Spalmare il piano di appoggio del distanziale (23) con Lubrificare la guarnizione OR (24) e montare il cilindro
ITA Loctite 510. ITA (18) completo di pistone (12).
Montare sul pignone il gruppo dischi-mozzo-distanzia-
le preparato nelle fasi precedenti e mandarlo in battuta.
Die AuflageflaÈche des DistanzstuÈckes (23) mit Loctite O-Ring (24) schmieren und den Zylinder (18) samt
D 510 schmieren. D Kolben (12) montieren.
Auf den Kolben das Aggregat Scheiben-Nabe-Distanz-
stuÈck montieren, das zuvor vorbereitet wurden und bis zum
a Anschlag einsetzen. b
Pasar la superficie de apoyo del distancial (23) con Lubrificar la guarnicion OR (24) y montar el cilindro
ESP Loctite 510. ESP (18) completo de piston (12).
Montar sobre el pinoÁn el grupo discos-cubo-distancial
preparado en la fase precedente y mandarlo a tope.
Enduire le plan d'appui de l'entretoise (23) avec du Lubrifier la garniture OR (24) et monter le cylindre (18)
F Loctite 510. F eÂquipeÂ du piston (12).
Monter sur le pignon le groupe disques-moyeu-
entretoise preÂpareÂ lors des phases preÂceÂdentes et l'envoyer en
buteÂe.
Inserire le viti (17) ed avvitarle a fondo in modo SOLO PER VERSIONE A 2 FUNZIONI
ITA incrociato; serrarle con una coppia di 9,5v10,5 Nm. ITA Utilizzando un mazzuolo in materiale plastico, manda-
NOTA. Prima del serraggio finale, allineare le superfici re a fondo corsa il pistone (12).
esterne dei componenti.
Schrauben (17) einsetzen und bis zum Anschlag im NUR FU È R AUSFU

È HRUNG MIT 2 FUNKTIONEN
D Kreuz mit einem Anzugsmoment von 9,5v10,5 Nm D Mit einem Gummihammer den Kolben (12) bis zum
fest schrauben. Anschlag schlagen.
BEMERKUNG. Bevor die Teile endguÈltig festgezogen werden, die
c aÈuûeren FlaÈchen ausrichten. d
Introducir los tornillos (17) y atornillarlos a tope de SOLO POR VERSION A 2 FUNCIONES
ESP manera cruzada; apretarlos con un par de 9,5v10,5 Nm. ESP Utilizando un martillo en material plastico, mandar a
NOTA. Antes de apretarlos definitivamente, alinear final carrera el piston (12).
las superficies exteriores de los componentes.
Introduire les vis (17) et visser aÁ fond de facËon croiseÂe; SEULEMENT DANS LES VERSIONS A 2 FONCTIONS.
F serrer celles-ci aÁ un couple de 9,5v10,5 Nm. F A l'aide du maillet en matieÁre plastique, envoyer le
NOTE. Avant le serrage final, aligner les surfaces piston (12) en fin de course.
externes des composants.
SOLO PER VERSIONE A 2 FUNZIONI Lubrificare leggermente gli spessori (9) calcolati e
ITA Montare sul coperchio (8) l'anello di battuta (10) delle ITA l'anello (10) di battuta delle molle a tazza.
molle a tazza, rilevare la misura "B" e trascriverla. Montare spessori ed anello sul coperchio (8).
Rilevare la misura "A" necessaria al calcolo dei rasamenti (9) con la NOTA. Posizionare lo spessore maggiore a ridosso del coperchio.
formula: S=A±(B+18,4) ove: S=Spessori rasamenti - 18,4
mm=misura fissa delle molle a tazza.
NUR FU È R AUSFU È HRUNG MIT 2 FUNKTIONEN Die Scheiben (9) und den Anschlagring (10) der
D Auf den Deckel (8) den Anschlagring (10) der Tellerfe- D Tellerfedern leicht schmieren.
dern montieren. Das Maû "B" messen und anmerken. Scheiben und Ring auf den Deckel (8) montieren.
Das Maû "A" messen, das zur Rechnung der Scheiben (9) mit BEMERKUNG. Die groÈûere Scheibe sollte am Deckel anliegen.
e nachstehender Formel noÈtig ist: S=A±(B+18,4) wo:
S=ScheibenstaÈrke - 18,4 mm=feste Maû fuÈr Tellerfedern.
f
SOLO POR VERSION A 2 FUNCIONES Lubrificar ligermente los espesores (9) calculados y el
ESP Montar sobre la tapa (8) el segmento a tope (10) de los ESP segmento (10) a tope de los muelles a taza.
muelles a taza, relevar la medida "B" y registrarla. Montar el espesor major detras de la tapa.
Relevar la medida "A" necesaria al calculo de las raspaduras (9) NOTA. Colocar el espesor major detras de la tapa.
con la formula: S=A±(B+18,4) donde: S=espesor raspaduras -
18,4 mm=medida fija de los muelles a taza.
SEULEMENT DANS LES VERSIONS A 2 FONCTIONS. Lubrifier leÂgeÁrement les cales (9) calculeÂes et l'anneau
F Monter sur le couvercle (8) l'anneau de buteÂe (10) des F (10) de buteÂe des ressorts belleville.
ressorts Belleville, relever la mesure "B" et enregistrer Monter cales et anneau sur le couvercle (8).
cette dernieÁre. Relever la mesure "A" neÂcessaire pour calculer les NOTE. Placer la cale la plus grande au-dessus du couvercle.
rasages (9) avec la formule: S=A±(B+18,4) ou: S=Cales
rasages - 18,4 mm=mesure fixe des ressorts Belleville.
179
11
38
10 11
8 9
8
40
5
F1240794 F1240795
GB a GB b
Check the state of the O-ring (40). Fit the Belleville washers (11) onto the cover (8), thoroughly
Lubricate sealing ring (38) and fit flange (5) into the cover (8). checking washers orientation.
40 8
6 7
F1240796 F1240797
GB c GB d
Lubricate the O-ring (40) and install the cover assembly (8). Fit screws (6) and washers (7); lock the cover with a torque wrench
setting of 116 ± 128 Nm.
NOTE. Tighten in an alternate and criss-cross manner.
F1240798 F1240764
GB e GB f
Apply Loctite 242 to the threaded portion of the pinion, fit O-ring (4) Install the lubrication tube (2).
and nut (3); tighten the nut with a dynamometric wrench set to
280 ± 310 Nm.
NOTE. Use tools T21-T22.
180
Controllare lo stato dell'anello OR (40). Montare sul coperchio (8) le molle a tazza (11)
ITA Lubrificare l'anello di tenuta (38) e montare la flangia ITA controllandone attentamente l'orientamento.
(5) nel coperchio (8).
Zustand des O-Rings (40) kontrollieren. Auf den Deckel (8) die Tellerfeder (11) montieren und
D Dichtring (38) schmieren und Flansch (5) in den Dek- D sorgfaÈltig auf die Montagerichtung achten.
kel (8) montieren.
a b
Controlar el estado del anillo OR (40). Montar sobre la tapa (8) los muelles a taza (11)
ESP Lubrificar el anillo de compresioÁn (38) y montar la ESP controlando con cuidado la direccioÁn.
brida (5) sobre la tapa (8).
ControÃler l'eÂtat de la garniture OR (40). Monter sur le couvercle (8) les ressorts belleville (11)
F Lubrifier la bague d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (38) et monter la F en controÃlant attentivement leur orientation.
flasque (5) dans le couvercle (8).
Lubrificare l'anello OR (40) ed installare il gruppo Montare le viti (6) e le rondelle (7); bloccare il
ITA coperchio (8). ITA coperchio con una coppia di 116v128 Nm.
NOTA. Eseguire il serraggio in modo alternato ed
incrociato.
O-Ring (40) schmieren und Deckelaggregat (8) instal- Schrauben (6) und Unterlegscheiben (7) montieren; den
D lieren. D Deckel mit einem Anzugsmoment von 116v128 Nm
blockieren.
BEMERKUNG. Schrauben abwechselnd und im Kreuz fest
c d schrauben.
Lubrificar el anillo OR (40) y montar el grupo tapa (8). Montar los tornillos (6) y las arandelas (7); bloquear la
ESP ESP tapa con un par de 116v128 Nm.
NOTA. Apretar de manera alternada y cruzada.
Lubrifier la garniture OR (40) et installer le groupe Monter les vis (6) et les rondelles (7); bloquer le
F couvercle (8). F couvercle aÁ un couple de 116v128 Nm.
NOTE. Effectuer le serrage de facËon alterneÂe et
croiseÂe.
Spalmare la porzione filettata del pignone con Loctite Montare il tubo (2) della lubrificazione.
ITA 242, montare l'anello OR (4) ed il dado (3); serrare il ITA
dado con chiave dinamometrica tarata a 280v310 Nm.
NOTA. Utilizzare gli attrezzi T21-T22.
Das Gewinde des Kolbens mit Loctite 242 schmieren Schmierleitung (2) montieren.
D und den O-Ring (4) und die Mutter (3) montieren; die D
Mutter mit einem Anzugsmoment von 280v310 Nm
fest schrauben.
e BEMERKUNG. Werkzeuge T21-T22 verwenden. f
Pasar la parte roscada del pinoÁn con Loctite 242, Montar el tubo (2) de la lubrificacioÁn
ESP montar el segmento OR (4) y la tuerca (3); apretar la ESP
tuerca con llave dinamometrica tarada a 280v310 Nm.
NOTA. Utilizar las herramientas T21-T22.
Enduire la partie fileteÂe du pignon avec du Loctite 242, Monter le tube (2) de lubrification.
F monter la garniture OR (4) et l'eÂcrou (3); serrer l'eÂcrou F
aÁ l'aide d'une cleÂ dynamomeÂ trique calibreÂ e aÁ
280v310 Nm.
NOTE. Utiliser les outils T21-T22.
181
28 29
33 30
29 30
F1240944 F1240945
bar GB a bar
GB b
Connet the service and negative brakes to an external pump; Screw dowels (29) until pins (30) position themselves against the
introduce pressure up to a value of 20 ± 25 Nm. piston (33), then unscrew dowels by one turn to obtain a 1.5 mm
NOTE. Check that pressure is kept stable for at least 5 minutes and stroke.
make sure there are no leaks. Lock dowels (29) into position with the nuts (28) tightened at 15
Nm.
Release pressure.
0,8÷1,2mm
1
F1240801 F1240763
bar
GB c GB d
Check negative brake release by introducing a pressure of 16v35 Fit the movement sensor (1) and screw it up to the limit stop.
bar and by manually rotating the flange (5). Unscrew sensor by 3/4 turn and lock into position with nut. Locking
Release pressure. torque: MAX 30 Nm.
CAUTION! Do not exceed the specified torque setting.
17 mm
21 22
D1240098
F1240802
GB e GB f
CAUTION! To release the negative brake during an emergency, When the emergency is over, loosen the dowels in an alternate
(lack of pressure due to vehicle breakdown), loosen nuts (22) and manner until a 17 mm projection is obtained; lock into position with
screw dowels (21) in an alternate and gradual manner until you the nuts (22) tightened to15 Nm.
notice some preloading; continue by giving another 1.5 turns.
182
ITA Collegare i freni di servizio e negativo ad una pompa ITA Avvitare i grani (29) fino all'appoggio dei pioli (30) sul
esterna; immettere pressione fino ad un valore di pistone (33) e quindi svitarli di 1 giro per creare una
20v25 Nm. corsa del pistone di 1,5 mm.
NOTA. Controllare che la pressione rimanga stabile per almeno 5 Bloccare la posizione dei grani (29) con i dadi (28) serrati a 15 Nm.
minuti e quindi non vi siano perdite. Rilasciare la pressione.
NUR FU È R AUSFUÈ HRUNG MIT 3 FUNKTIONEN NUR FU È R AUSFU È HRUNG MIT 3 FUNKTIONEN
D Die Hilfsbremse und Negativbremse an eine getrennte D Stifte (29) bis zum Anschlag der Sprossen (30) am
Pumpe schlieûen; Druck bis zu einem Wert von 20v25 Kolben (33) schrauben und dann um 1 Umdrehung
Nm einlassen. aufdrehen, um einen Hub von 1,5 mm herzustellen.
a BEMERKUNG. Kontrollieren, ob der Druck mindestens 5 Minuten b Die Position der Stifte (29) mit den Muttern (28) bei einem
Anzugsmoment von 15 Nm blockieren. Druck ablassen.
lang stabil bleibt und nirgends austritt.

ESP Conectar los frenos de servicio y negativo a una pompa ESP Atornillar las espigas (29) hasta el apoyo de las
externa; introducir hasta un valor de 20v25 Nm. extremidades (30) sobre el piston (33) y ahora destorni-
NOTA. Controlar que la presion quede estabil por lo menos por 5 llarlos de 1 giro para averiguar una carrera del pistoÁn de 1,5 mm.
minutos y que no hayan perdidas. Bloquear la posicioÁn de las espigas (29) con las tuercas (28)
apretadas a 15 Nm. Dejar la presioÁn.
F Brancher les freins de service et neÂgatif aÁ une pompe F Visser les grains (29) jusqu'aÁ la deÂpose des chevilles
externe; eÂmettre de la pression jusqu'aÁ une valeur de (30) sur le piston (33), puis deÂvisser ceux-ci d'un tour
20v25 Nm. pour creÂer une course du piston de 1,5 mm.
NOTE. ControÃler que la pression soit stable pendant 5 minutes au Bloquer la position des grains (29) avec les eÂcrous (28) serreÂs aÁ
moins et qu'il n'y ait pas de fuites. 15 Nm. RelaÃcher la pression.
Controllare lo sblocco del freno negativo immettendo Montare il sensore di movimento (1) ed avvitarlo
ITA una pressione di 16v35 bar e ruotando manualmente ITA manualmente a fondo corsa. Svitarlo di 3/4 di giro e
la flangia (5). bloccare la posizione con il dado. Coppia di bloccag-
Rilasciare la pressione. gio: MAX 30 Nm.
ATTENZIONE! Non superare la coppia indicata.
Kontrollieren ob, beim einlassen von einem Druck von Den Bewegungsgeber (1) montieren und von Hand bis
D 16v35 bar die Negativbremse entsichert und von D zum Anschlag montieren. Dann um 3/4 Umdrehung
Hand den Flansch (5) drehen. aufdrehen und die Position mit der Mutter blockieren.
Druck ablassen. Anzugsmoment: max. 30 Nm.
c d ACHTUNG! Das Anzugsmoment nicht uÈberschreiten.
Controlar el bloqueo del frenonegativo indroduciendo Montar el sensor de movimiento (1) y atornillarlo
ESP una presioÁn de 16v35 bar y ruotando manualmente la ESP manualmente a final carrera. Destornillarlo de 3/4 de
brida (5). vuelta y bloquear la posicioÁn con la tuerca.
Dejar la presioÁn. Par de bloqueo: Max 30 Nm.
ATENCION! No superar la mesura indicada.
ControÃler le deÂbrayage du frein neÂgatif en eÂmettant de Monter le capteur de deÂplacement (1) et visser celui-ci
F la pression aÁ 16v35 bar et en tournant la flasque (5) F aÁ la main en fin de course. DeÂvisser encore celui-di de
manuellement. 3/4 de tour et bloquer sa position avec l'eÂcrou. Couple
RelaÃcher la pression. de blocage: MAX. 30 Nm.
ATTENTION! Ne jamais deÂpasser le couple indiqueÂ.
ATTEZIONE! Per sbloccare il freno negativo in fase di Dopo l'emergenza svitare i grani in modo alternato
ITA emergenza (mancanza di pressione per avaria del ITA fino ad ottenere una sporgenza di 17 mm; bloccare la
veicolo), allentare i dadi (22) ed avvitare in modo posizione con i dadi (22) serrati a 15 Nm.
progressivo alternato, i grani (21) fino ad avvertire un precarico;
proseguire ulteriormente per 1,5 giri.
ACHTUNG! Um die Negativbremse im Notfall zu Nach dem Notfall, die Stifte abwechselnd aufschrau-
D entsichern (Druck bleibt wegen einer StoÈrung am D ben, bis ein Vorsprung von 17 mm erreicht wird; die
Fahrzeug aus), die Muttern (22) lockern und ab- Position mit den Muttern (22) bei einem Anzugsmo-
wechseln die Stifte (21) fest schrauben bis sie vorgeladen sind; ment von 15 Nm blockieren.
e um weitere 1,5 Umdrehungen fest drehen. f
ATENCION! Para sbloquear el freno negativo en fase Despues de una emergencia destornillar las espigas
ESP de emergencia (falta de presioÁn por gaste del veiculo), ESP de manera alternada hasta obtener una parte saliente
aflojar las tuercas (22) y atornillar de manera progre- de 17 mm, bloquear la posicioÁn con las tuercas (22)
siva alternada, las espigas (21) hasta averiguar una precarga, apretadas a 15 Nm.
seguir ulteriormente por 1,5 giros.
ATTENTION! Pour deÂgager le frein neÂgatif en cas ApreÁs l'eÂmergence deÂvisser les grains de facËon
F d'eÂmergence (manque de pression en cas de panne F alterneÂe jusqu'aÁ obtenir une saillie de 17 mm; bloquer
du veÂhicule) desserrer les eÂcrous (22) et visser de la position aÁ l'aide des eÂcrous (22) serreÂs aÁ 15 Nm.
facËon progressive alterneÂe, les grains (21) jusqu'aÁ avertir une
preÂcharge; faire encore 1,5 tour.
183
HOW TO DISASSEMBLE THE LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL UNIT (25% AND 45%) - SMONTAGGIO DIFFERENZIALE A SLITTAMENTO LIMITATO
(25% E 45%) - DIFFERENTIAL MIT BEGRENZTEM GLEITVERMOÈGEN (25% UND 45%) ABMONTIEREN - DESMONTAJE DIFERENCIAL A
DESLIZAMIENTO LIMITADO (25% Y 45%) - DESMONTAJE DIFFERENTIEL A GLISSEMENT REDUIT (25% ET 45%)
F1240804 F1240485
GB a GB b
Remove the whole differential unit (2) from the central axle unit (1). Remove the check screws (3) of the crown (4).
For details, see «REMOVING THE DIFFERENTIAL UNIT». NOTE. Note down the position of the niches of the central hole in
relation to the protrusions of the friction unit steel discs.
7
5
6
4
F1240806 F1240803
GB c GB d
If bearing (5) needs replacing, remove it; remove crown (4). Remove the planetary gear (6) and the whole friction unit (7).
8
10 11
9
F1240807 F1240489
GB e GB f
If bearing (8) needs replacing, extract it from the differential unit (9). Remove the snap rings (10) from the pins (11) of the planet gears
(12).
184
Asportare dal corpo centrale assale (1) il gruppo Rimuovere le viti (3) di ritegno della corona (4).
ITA differenziale (2) completo. ITA
NOTA. Annotare la posizione delle nicchie del foro
Per i dettagli, vedere «RIMOZIONE GRUPPO DIFFE- centrale rispetto alle sporgenze dei dischi d'acciaio
RENZIALE». dei gruppi di frizione.
Vom zentralen AchsenkoÈrper (1) das vollstaÈndige Die Schrauben (3) zur Halterung des Kranzes (4)
D Differentialaggregat (2) abnehmen. D abnehmen.
Weitere Einzelheiten, siehe «DIFFERENTIALAGGRE- BEMERKUNG. Die Position der Nischen des zentralen
GAT ABNEHMEN». Lochs im VerhaÈltnis zu den Stahlscheiben der Kupplungsaggre-
a b gate anmerken.
Sacar del cuerpo central axial (1) el grupo diferencial Remover los tornillos (3) de retencioÁn de la corona (4).
ESP (2) completo. ESP
NOTA. Anotar la colocacioÁn de los nichos del agujero
Por los detalles, vease «REMOCION GRUPO DIFE- central respecto a las partes salientes de los discos de
RENCIAL». acero de los grupos de fricioÁn.
Enlever le corps central essieu (1) le groupe diffeÂren- Enlever les vis (3) de fixation de la couronne (4).
F tiel (2) complet. F
NOTE. Prendre note de la position des logements du
Pour tout deÂtail, voir «DEPOSE DU GROUPE DIFFE- trou central par rapport aÁ la saillie des disques d'acier
RENTIEL». des groupes de friction.
Se si deve sostituire, estrarre il cuscinetto (5); Rimuovere l'ingranaggio planetario (6) ed il gruppo
ITA rimuovere la corona (4). ITA frizione (7) completo.
Wenn es ausgewechselt werden muû, das Lager (5) Das Planetengetriebe (6) und das vollstaÈndige Kup-
D heraus nehmen; Kranz (4) abnehmen. D plungsaggregat (7) abnehmen.
c d
Si se debe de sobstituir, extraer el cojinete (5); Remover el engranaje planetario (6) y el grupo fricioÁn
ESP remover la corona (4). ESP (7) completo.
Si on doit substituer, extraire le palier (5); enlever la Enlever l'engrenage planeÂtaire (6) et le groupe de
F couronne (4). F friction (7) complet.
Se si deve sostituire, estrarre il cuscinetto (8) dal corpo Rimuovere gli anelli elastici (10) dai perni (11) degli
ITA differenziale (9). ITA ingranaggi satelliti (12).
Wenn es ausgewechselt werden muû, das Lager (8) Die Kolbenringen (10) von den Stiften (11) der
D vom DifferentialkoÈrper (9) heraus nehmen. D Planetengetriebe (12) abnehmen.
e f
Si se debe de sobstituir, extraer el cojinete (8) del Remover los segmentos elasticos (10) de los pernos
ESP cuerpo diferencial (9). ESP (11) de los engranajes satelites (12).
Si on doit substituer, extraire le palier (8) du corps Enlever les anneaux aÁ ressort (10) des axes (11) des
F diffeÂrentiel (9). F engrenages satellites (12).
185
T14
12 12
11
F1240809 F1240491
GB a GB b
Introduce tool T14 in-between the planet gears (12). Using two pin-drivers, engage tool T14 in between the planet gears
(12).
CAUTION! Carefully check that tool T14 keeps in an aligned
position with the pins (11) when locked.
T16A T16A
T15 T15
T16A
11
F1240492 F1240493
bar
GB c GB d
Place the differential unit (9) under a press, position bush T15 and Remove gudgeon T16A and bush T15.
insert gudgeon T16A. Press gudgeon T16A to end of stroke. NOTE. In this state, the pin (11) is contained within tool T14.
T14
12
12
9
F1240491 F1240809
GB e GB f
Remove tool T14 and planet pin (11) with it. Leaving the released planet in its position, lock again tool T14.
Repeat pin extraction operation on the second planet pin (11).
Repeat the same operations on the remaining pins.
186
Inserire tra gli ingranaggi satelliti (12) l'attrezzo T14. Operando con due cacciaspine, forzare l'attrezzo T14
ITA ITA tra gli ingranaggi satelliti (12).
ATTENZIONE! Controllare attentamente che l'attrez-
zo T14 rimanga allineato ai perni (11) quando eÁ bloccato.
Zwischen den Planetengetriebe (12) das Werkzeug Mit zwei DuÈbeln das Werkzeug T14 zwischen den
D T14 stecken. D ZahnraÈdern des Planetengetriebes (12) forcieren.
ACHTUNG! SorgfaÈltig kontrollieren, ob das Werkzeug
T14 mit den Stiften (11) ausgerichtet ist, nachdem es blockiert
a b worden ist.
Introducir entre los engranajes satelites (12) la Obrando con dos extractores de clivijas, hacer fuerza
ESP herramienta T14. ESP sobre la herramienta T14 entre los engranajes
satelites (12).
ATENCION! Controlar con cuidado que la herramienta T14 quede
en linea a los pernos (11) cuando esta bloqueado.
Introduire entre les engrenages satellites (12) l'outil En oeuvrant avec deux dispositifs arrache-broches,
F T14. F forcer l'outil T14 entre les engrenages satellites (12).
ATTENTION! ControÃler attentivement que l'outil T14
demeure aligneÂ aux axes (11) quand il est bloqueÂ.
Sistemare il corpo differenziale (9) sotto una pressa, Asportare lo spinotto T16A e la bussola T15.
ITA posizionare la boccola T15 ed inserire lo spinotto ITA
NOTA. In questa condizione, il perno (11) eÁ contenuto
T16A. Pressare lo spinotto T16A fino a fondo corsa. nell'attrezzo T14.
Den DifferentialkoÈrper (9) unter eine Presse legen, die Den Bolzen T16A und die Buchse T15 abnehmen.
D Buchse T15 positionieren und den Bolzen T16A D
BEMERKUNG. In diesem Zustand befindet sich der
einsetzen. Den Bolzen T16A bis zum Anschlag Stift (11) im Werkzeug T14.
einpressen.
c d
Sistemar el cuerpo diferencial (9) bajo una presa, Sacar la cruceta T16A y el manguito T15.
ESP colocar el carquillo T15 y introducir la cruceta T16A. ESP
NOTA. En esta condicion, el perno (11) esta contenido
Empujar la cruceta T16A a tope. en la herramineta T14.
Ajuster le corps diffeÂrentiel (9) sous une presse, placer Enlever la cheville T16A et la bague T15.
F l'embout T15 et introduire la cheville T16A. Presser la F
NOTE. Dans ces conditions, l'axe (11) est contenu
cheville T16A jusqu'en fin de course. dans l'outil T14.
Rimuovere l'attrezzo T14 e con esso il perno (11) del Lasciando in posizione l'ingranaggio satellite che si eÁ
ITA satellite. ITA liberato, bloccare nuovamente l'attrezzo T14.
Ripetere le operazioni di estrazione del perno del
secondo perno satellite (11).
Ripetere le operazioni per gli altri perni.
Das Werkzeug T14 und damit auch den Stift (11) des Das Planetengetriebe, das sich freigesetzt hat, in
D Planetengetriebes abnehmen. D seiner Position lassen, und Werkzeug T14 wieder
blockieren.
Die VorgaÈnge zum Abnehmen des zweiten Stiftes des Planeten-
e f getriebes (11) wiederholen.
Die VorgaÈnge fuÈr alle anderen Stifte wiederholen.
Remover la herramienta T14 y con esta el perno (11) Dejando en posicioÁn el engranaje satelite que se ha
ESP del satelite. ESP librado, bloquear de nuevo la herramienta T14.
Repetir las operaciones de extracioÁn del perno de
segundo perno satelite (11).
Repetir las operacioÁnes para los otros pernos.
Enlever l'outil T14 et avec celui-ci l'axe (11) du En laissant dans sa position l'engrenage satellite qui
F satellite. F s'est deÂgageÂ, bloquer de nouveau l'outil T14.
ReÂpeÂter les opeÂrations pour extraire l'axe du deu-
xieÁme axe satellite (11).
ReÂpeÂter les opeÂrations pour les autres axes.
187
F1240814
GB a GB b
Remove tool T14 and extract from the differential unit (9) the two
final planet gears (12), the 2nd planet gear (6) and the whole friction
assembly concerned (7).
45% VERSION
15 VERSIONE 45%
AUSFUÈ HRUNG 45%
3 13 VERSION 45%
VERSION 45%
5 10
4
19
16 13
11
14
17 18 15
16 7
14
12 18 11 6
6
14
GB c 19 10 GB d
15 7 16
14
13 16
7 17
12 9
13 8
18 1
11 15
19 7
10
18
11
19
10
2
e f
D1240090
GB GB
188
Rimuovere l'attrezzo T14 ed asportare dal corpo
ITA differenziale (9) gli ultimi due ingranaggi satelliti (12), ITA
il 2ë ingranaggio planetario (6) ed il relativo gruppo di
frizione (7) completo.
Das Werkzeug T14 abnehmen und vom Differential-

D koÈrper (9) die letzten beiden ZahnraÈder des Planeten- D
getriebes (12), das 2. Planetengetriebe und das
entsprechende Kupplungsaggregat (7) abnehmen.
a b
Remover la herramienta T14 y sacar del cuerpo
ESP diferencial (9) los ultimos dos engranajes satelites ESP
(12), el 2ë engranaje planetario (6) y el relativo grupo
de fricioÁn (7) completo.
Enlever l'outil T14 puis extraire du corps diffeÂrentiel

F (9) les deux derniers engrenages satellites (12), le 2ë F
engrenage planeÂtaire (6) et le groupe de friction relatif
(7) complet.
ITA ITA
D D
c d
ESP ESP
F F
ITA ITA
D D
e f
ESP ESP
F F
189
HOW TO ASSEMBLE THE LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL UNIT (25% AND 45%) - ASSEMBLAGGIO DIFFERENZIALE A SLITTAMENTO LIMITATO
(25% E 45%) - DIFFERENTIAL MIT BEGRENZTEM GLEITVERMOÈGEN (25% UND 45%) MONTIEREN - ASEMBLAJE DIFERENCIAL A
DESLIZAMIENTO LIMITADO (25% Y 45%) - MONTAJE DIFFERENTIEL A GLISSEMENT REDUIT (25% ET 45%)
18,2 ± 0,1
6
6 13
14
7
6 17
9
15
16
F1240814
25% F1240815
GB a GB b
Place a friction unit (7) - suitable for the specific type of slipping - 25% FRICTION UNIT COMPOSITION
and planetary gear (6) into the differential unit (9). Friction ring with increased shim (13), steel rings (14) and friction
The composition of the unit is illustrated in the points below. rings (15) alternated, end ring (16) and distance piece (17).
CAUTION! As to rings (13) and (16), the side without notches must
face outwards.
18,2 ± 0,1
6 12
6
13 14 18
T16C
15
16
45% F1240816 F1240495
GB c GB d
45% FRICTION UNIT COMPOSITION Position shim washer (18) and the first planet gear (12).
Friction ring with increased shim (13), steel rings (14) and friction Hold them in position with bar T16C.
rings (15) alternated, end ring (16) and distance piece (17).
CAUTION! As to rings (13) and (16), the side without notches must
face outwards.
12 T14
T16A
18 9
T16C
T16C
F1240496 F1240497
GB e GB f
Using gudgeon T16A, position the second planet gear (12) and Insert tool T14 in-between the two planet gears (12). Align the
relative shim washer (18). whole unit, pushing bar T16C in as far as it will go, until gudgeon
T16A is expelled.
190
Inserire nel corpo differenziale (9), il gruppo di frizione COMPOSIZIONE GRUPPO DI FRIZIONE 25%
ITA (7) specifico per il tipo di slittamento e l'ingranaggio ITA Anello di frizione con spessore maggiorato (13), anelli
planetario (6). d'acciaio (14) ed anelli di frizione (15) alternati, anello
La composizione del gruppo di frizione eÁ indicata in seguito. terminale (16), anello distanziatore (17).
ATTENZIONE! Gli anelli (13) e (16) devono avere la parte senza
intagli rivolta verso l'esterno.
In den DifferentialkoÈrper (9) das fuÈr die Gleitungsart ZUSAMMENBAU DES KUPPLUNGSAGGREGATS 25%
D und das Planetengetriebe (6) geeignete Kupplungsag- D Kupplungsringe mit groÈûerer StaÈrke (13), Stahlringe
gregat (7) einsetzen. (14) und Kupplungsringe (15), Abschluûring (16),
Die Zusammensetzung des Kupplungsaggregats ist nachstehend Distanzscheibe (17).
a beschrieben. b ACHTUNG! Die Ringe (13) und (16) muÈssen die glatte Seite nach
auûen gerichtet haben.
Introducir en el cuerpo diferencial (9), el grupo de COMPOSICION GRUPO DE FRICION 25%

ESP fricioÁn (7) especifico por el tipo de deslizamiento y el ESP Segmento de fricioÁn con espesor major (13), segmen-
engranaje planetario (6). to de acero (14) y segmento de fricioÁn (15) alternados,
La composicioÁn del grupo de fricioÁn es indicada a seguir. segmento terminal(16), segmento distancial (17).
ATENCION! Los segmentos (13) y (16) deben de tener la parte sin
ranaduras hacia el esterno.
Introduire dans le corps diffeÂrentiel (9), le groupe de COMPOSITION DU GROUPE DE FRICTION 25%
F friction (7) speÂcifique pour le type de patinage et F Garniture de friction avec cale majoreÂe (13), anneaux
l'engrenage planeÂtaire (6). d'acier (14) et garniture de friction (15) alterneÂs,
La composition du groupe de friction est indiqueÂe ci-dessous. anneau terminal (16), bague entretoise (17).
ATTENTION! Les garnitures (13) et (16) doivent avoir la partie sans
entailles tourneÂe vers l'exteÂrieur.
COMPOSIZIONE GRUPPO DI FRIZIONE 45% Posizionare la rondella di rasamento (18), il primo

ITA Anello di frizione con spessore maggiorato (13), anelli ITA ingranaggio satellite (12).
d'acciaio (14) ed anelli di frizione (15) alternati, anello Tenerli in posizione con la barra T16C.
terminale (16).
ATTENZIONE! Gli anelli (13) e (16) devono avere la parte senza
intagli rivolta verso l'esterno.
ZUSAMMENBAU DES KUPPLUNGSAGGREGATS 45% Die Zwischenlegscheibe (18) und das erste Planeten-
D Kupplungsringe mit groÈûerer StaÈrke (13), Stahlringe D getriebe (12) positionieren.
(14) und Kupplungsringe (15), Abschluûring (16). In dieser Position mit dem Stab T16C halten.
ACHTUNG! Die Ringe (13) und (16) muÈssen die glatte Seite nach
c auûen gerichtet haben. d
COMPOSICION GRUPO DE FRICION 45% Colocar la arandela de raspadura (18), el primer
ESP Segmento de fricioÁn con espesor major (13), segmen- ESP engranaje satelite (12).
to de acero (14) y anillo de fricioÁn (15) alternados, Tenerlos en posicioÁn con la barra T16C.
segmento terminal (16).
ATENCION! Los segmentos (13) y (16) deben tener la parte sin
ranaduras hacia el esterno.
COMPOSITION DU GROUPE DE FRICTION 45% Mettre la rondelle de rasage (18) en place, puis le
F Garniture de la friction avec cale majoreÂe (13), F premier engrenage satellite (12).
anneaux d'acier (14) et garniture de friction (15) Maintenir ceux-ci en place avec la barre T16C.
alterneÂs, anneau terminal (16).
ATTENTION! Les garnitures (13) et (16) doivent avoir la partie sans
entailles tourneÂe vers l'exteÂrieur.
Utilizzando lo spinotto T16A, posizionare il secondo Inserire tra i due ingranaggi satelliti (12) l'attrezzo T14.
ITA ingranaggio satellite (12) e la relativa rondella di ITA Allineare tutto il gruppo inserendo a fondo la barra
rasamento (18). T16C fino ad espellere lo spinotto T16A.
Mit einem Bolzen T16A das zweite Planetengetriebe Die beiden Planetengetriebe (12) mit dem Werkzeug
D (12) und die Zwischenlegscheibe (18) positionieren. D T14 einsetzen. Das ganze Aggregat ausrichten indem
der Stab T16C eingesetzt wird, bis der Bolzen T16A
ausgestoûen wird.
e f
Utilizando la cruceta T16A, colocar el segundo Introducir entre los dos engranajes satelites (12) la
ESP engranaje satelite (12) y la relativa arandela de ESP herramienta T14.
raspadura (18). Alinear todo el grupo introduciendo a tope la barra
T16C hasta sacar la cruceta T16A.
A l'aide de la cheville T16C, mettre en place le Introduire entre les deux engrenages satellites (12)
F deuxieÁme engrenage satellite (12) et sa rondelle de F l'outil T14.
rasage (18). Aligner tout le groupe en introduisant la barre T16C aÁ
fond jusqu'aÁ expulser la cheville T16A.
191
T14 19 11
6 6
F1240809 F1240498
GB a GB b
Lock tool T14 behind the planet gears (12). Fit snap rings (19) onto the pins (11).
After locking the tool, remove bar T16C.
T16B 11
11
T15
T15
T16B
11
9
F1240499 F1240500
bar
GB c GB d
Position the differential unit (9) under the press, position bush T15 Place gudgeon T16B on top of the planet pin (11).
and insert the planet pin (11).
T16A
T15
T16A
10
11
11
9
F1240492 F1240502
bar
GB e GB f
Press gudgeon T16B as far down as it will go. Remove gudgeon T16B, bush T15, and fit the snap ring (10) onto
the pin (11).
CAUTION! Make sure that the snap ring centers the seat and
positions itself on the differential unit face.
Repeat the operations on the other planet pin and on the other
planet unit.
192
Bloccare l'attrezzo T14 a ridosso degli ingranaggi Montare sui perni (11) gli anelli elastici (19).
ITA satelliti (12). ITA
Dopo il bloccaggio, rimuovere la barra T16C.
Das Werkzeug T14 am Anschlag der Planetengetriebe Auf die Stifte (11) die Kolbenringe (19) montieren.
D (12) blockieren. D
Danach Stab T16C abnehmen.
a b
Bloquear la herramienta T14 detras de los engranajes Montar sobre los pernos (11) los segmentos elasticos
ESP satelites (12). ESP (19).
Despues del bloqueo, remover la barra T16C.
Bloquer l'outil T14 au-dessus des engrenages satel- Monter sur les axes (11) les anneaux aÁ ressort (19).
F lites (12). F
ApreÁs le blocage, enlever la barre T16C.
Posizionare sotto la pressa il corpo differenziale (9), Sovrapporre al perno satellite (11) lo spinotto T16B.
ITA sistemare la boccola T15 ed inserire il perno satellite ITA
(11).
Unter einer Presse den DifferentialkoÈrper (9) positio- Auf den Planetenstift (11) den Bolzen T16B legen.
D nieren, die Buchse T15 einlegen und den Planetenstift D
(11) einsetzen.
c d
Colocar bajo la prensa el cuerpo diferencial (9), Sobreponer al perno satelite (11) la cruceta T16B.
ESP colocar el casquillo T15 y introducir el perno satelite ESP
(11).
Placer le corps diffeÂrentiel (9) sous la presse, ajuster Poser sur l'axe satellite (11) la cheville T16B.
F l'embout T15 et inseÂrer l'axe satellite (11). F
Pressare lo spinotto T16B a fondo. Rimuovere lo spinotto T16B, la boccola T15 e montare
ITA ITA sul perno (11) l'anello elastico (10).
ATTENZIONE! Assicurarsi che l'anello elastico centri
la sede e che appoggi sul piano del corpo differenziale.
Ripetere le operazioni per l'altro perno satellite e per l'altro asse
satelliti.
Den Bolzen T16B fest einpressen. Den Bolzen T16B, die Buchse T15 abnehmen und auf
D D den Stift (11) den Kolbenring (10) montieren.
ACHTUNG! Kontrollieren, ob der Kolbenring im Sitz zentriert ist
und auf der FlaÈche der FlaÈche des DifferentialkoÈrpers liegt.
e f Die VorgaÈnge fuÈr den anderen Planetenstift und die andere
Planetenachse wiederholen.
Apretar la cruceta T16B a tope. Remover la cruceta T16B, el casquillo T15 y montar
ESP ESP sobre el perno (11) el segmento elastico (10).
ATENCION! Averiguar que el segmento elastico sea centrado en su
alojamiento y que apoye sobre la superficie del cuerpo diferencial.
Repetir las operacioÁnes para el otro perno satelite y para el otro eje
satelite.
Presser la cheville T16B aÁ fond. Enlever la cheville T16B, l'embout T15 et monter sur
F F l'axe (11) l'anneau aÁ ressort (10).
ATTENTION! S'assurer que l'anneau aÁ ressort soit
bien centreÂ sur le sieÁge et poseÂ sur la surface du corps diffeÂrentiel.
ReÂpeÂter les opeÂrations pour l'autre axe satellite et l'autre essieu
satellite.
193
3
4
6
9
9
F1240803 F1240946
GB a GB b
Check that planets have a light clearance in relation to the first Line the lubrication holes up with the slots in the differential carrier.
planet gear. Orient the holes of the crown (4) towards the protrusions of the
Position the second planetary gear (6) and the second friction unit braking unit.
(7) into the differential unit (9). Position the crown (4) on the differential unit (9) and lock it with the
screws (3) previously coated with Loctite 242.
Torque wrench setting for screws: 128 ± 142 Nm.
NOTE. Tighten screws using the criss-cross method.
T17 8
T17 5
F1240506 F1240804
GB c GB d
If bearings (5) and (8) have been removed, install them using tool Install the whole differential assembly (2) into the central body (1).
T17. For details, see «INSTALLING THE DIFFERENTIAL UNIT».
GB e GB f
194
Controllare che i satelliti abbiano un leggero gioco Allineare i fori di lubrificazione della corona (4) con le
ITA rispetto il primo ingranaggio planetario. ITA cave della scatola differenziale sulle sporgenze del
Posizionare il secondo ingranaggio planetario (6) ed il gruppo di frenatura. Posizionare la corona (4) sul corpo
secondo gruppo di frizione (7) nel corpo differenziale (9). differenziale (9) e bloccarla con le viti (3) spalmate con Loctite 242.
Coppia di serraggio viti: 128v142 Nm
NOTA. Serrare le viti con il metodo del serraggio incrociato.
Kontrollieren, ob die Planetengetriebe etwas Spiel im Die SchmierloÈcher des Kranzes (4) der Differential-
D VerhaÈltnis zum ersten Planetengetriebe haben. D schachtel mit den VorspruÈngen des Bremsaggregats
Das zweite Planetengetriebe (6) und das zweite ausrichten. Den Kranz (4) auf den DifferentialkoÈrper (9) positionieren
Kupplungsaggregat (7) in den DifferentialkoÈrper (9) einsetzen. und mit den Schrauben (3), die zuvor mit Loctite 242 geschmiert
a b wurden, blockieren. Anzugsmoment der Schrauben: 128v142 Nm.
BEMERKUNG. Sie Schrauben im Kreuz fest schrauben.
Controlar que los satelites tengan un ligero juego Alinear los agujeros de lubrificar de la corona con los
ESP respecto al primero engranaje planetario. ESP nichos de la caja diferencial (4) sobre las partes
Colocar el segundo engranaje planetario (6) y el salientes del grupo de frenadura.
segundo grupo de fricioÁn (7) en el cuerpo diferencial (9). Colocar la corona (4) sobre el cuerpo diferencial (9) y bloquearla
con los tornilloss: 128v142 Nm.
NOTA. Apretar los tornillos de manera cruzada.
ControÃler que les satellites aient un peu de jeu par Aligner les trous de lubrification de la couronne (4) avec
F rapport au premier engrenage planeÂtaire. F les creux du carter diffeÂrentiel sur les saillies du groupe
Mettre le deuxieÁme engrenage planeÂtaire (6) en place de freinage. Placer la couronne (4) sur le corps diffeÂrentiel
ainsi que le second groupe de friction (7) du corps diffeÂrentiel (9). (9) et bloquer celle-ci avec les vis (3) enduites de Loctite 242.
Couple de serrage des vis: 128v142 Nm.
NOTE. Serrer les vis avec la meÂthode de serrage croiseÂe.
Se sono stati rimossi, montare i cuscinetti (5) e (8) Installare nel corpo centrale (1) il gruppo differenziale
ITA utilizzando l'attrezzo T17. ITA (2) completo.
Per i dettagli, vedere «INSTALLAZIONE GRUPPO
DIFFERENZIALE».
Falls sie abmontiert wurden, die Lager (5) und (8) mit In den zentralen KoÈrper (1) das vollstaÈndige Differen-
D dem Werkzeug T17 montieren. D tialaggregat (2) installieren.
FuÈr weitere Einzelheiten, siehe «INSTALLATION DES
DIFFERENTIALAGGREGATS».
c d
Si han sido removidos, montar los cojinetes (5) y (8) Introducir en el cuerpo central (1) el grupo diferencial
ESP utilizando la herramienta T17. ESP (2) completo.
Para los detalles, vease «INSTALACION GRUPO
DIFERENCIAL»
S'ils ont eÂteÂ enleveÂs, remonter les paliers (5) et (8) aÁ Installer dans le corps central (1) le groupe diffeÂrentiel
F l'aide de l'outil T17. F (2) complet.
Pour tout deÂtail, voir «INSTALLATION DU GROUPE
DIFFERENTIEL».
ITA ITA
D D
e f
ESP ESP
F F
195
HOW TO DISASSEMBLE THE HYDRAULIC DIFFERENTIAL LOCK - SMONTAGGIO BLOCCAGGIO DIFFERENZIALE A COMANDO IDRAULICO -
DIFFERENTIALBLOCKIERUNG MIT HYDRAULISCHER STEUERUNG ABMONTIEREN - DESMONTAJE BLOQUEO DIFERENCIAL A MANDO
HYDRAULICO - DESMONTAJE BLOCAGE DIFFERENTIEL A COMMANDE HYDRAULIQUE
F1240385 F1240827
GB a GB b
Remove the arms. Remove the top cap (1).
For details, see «CHECKING WEAR AND REPLACING THE NOTE. The cap must be replaced each time the unit is
BRAKING DISCS». disassembled.
5 4
2
F1240828 F1240829
GB c GB d
Remove the microswitch (2), signalling differential lock operation. Loosen the lock nut (4) of fork (5) by about 2 turns.
NOTE. Check the state of the O-ring (3).
5
6 6
F1240830 F1240831
GB e GB f
Using a metal punch and a hammer, disengage fork (5) from piston Using two wrenches, lock piston (6) and remove nut (4).
cone (6).
196
Asportare i bracci. Rimuovere il tappo superiore (1).
ITA Per i dettagli, vedere «CONTROLLO USURA E ITA
NOTA. Il tappo deve essere sostituito ad ogni
SOSTITUZIONE DISCHI FRENO». smontaggio.
Die Arme abnehmen. Unterer Stopfen (1) abnehmen.

D FuÈr weitere Einzelheiten, siehe «VERSCHLEISS D
BEMERKUNG. Der Stopfen muû jedesmal ausge-
KONTROLLIEREN UND BREMSSCHEIBEN AUS- wechselt werden, wenn er abmontiert wird.
WECHSELN».
a b
Sacar los brazos. Remover la tapa superior (1).
ESP Para los detalles, vease «CONTROL DESGASTE Y ESP
NOTA. La tapa debe de ser sobstituida a cada
SOBSTITUCION DISCOS FRENOS». desmontaje.
Enlever les bras. Enlever le bouchon supeÂrieur (1).

F Pour tout deÂtail, voir «CONTROLE DE L'USURE ET F
NOTE. Le bouchon doit eÃtre remplaceÂ aÁ chaque
SUBSTITUTION DES DISQUES FREIN». deÂmontage.
Rimuovere il microinterruttore (2) di segnalazione Allentare il dado (4) di bloccaggio della forcella (5) di
ITA inserimento bloccaggio differenziale. ITA circa 2 giri.
NOTA. Controllare lo stato della guarnizione OR (3).
Den Mikroschalter (2) abnehmen, der den Einsatz der Mutter (4) zur Blockierung der Gabel (5) um ca. 2
D Differentialblockierung meldet. D Umdrehungen lockern.
BEMERKUNG. Zustand des O-Rings (3) kontrollieren.
c d
Remover el microinterruptor (2) de senalacioÁn intro- Aflojar la tuerca (4) de bloqueo de la horquilla (5) de 2
ESP ducioÁn bloqueo diferencial. ESP giros approx.
NOTA. Controlar el estado de la guarnicioÁn OR (3).
Enlever le microinterrupteur (2) qui signale l'insertion Desserrer l'eÂcrou (4) de blocage de la fourchette (5)
F du blocage diffeÂrentiel. F d'environ 2 tours.
NOTE. ControÃler l'eÂtat des garnitures OR (3).
Utilizzando un punzone metallico ed un mazzuolo, Utilizzando due chiavi, bloccare il pistone (6) ed
ITA sbloccare la forcella (5) dal cono del pistone (6). ITA asportare il dado (4).
Mit einem Metallstift und einem Hammer die Gabel (5) Mit Hilfe von zwei SchluÈsseln, den Kolben (6) blok-
D von dem Kolbentrichter (6) freisetzen. D kieren und die Mutter (4) abnehmen.
e f
Utilizando un punzon metalico y un martillo, bloquear Utilizando dos llaves, bloquear el pistoÁn (6) y sacar la
ESP l'horquilla (5) del cono del pistoÁn (6). ESP tuerca (4).
A l'aide d'un poussoir meÂtallique et d'un maillet, A l'aide de deux cleÂs, bloquer le piston (6) et enlever
F deÂbloquer la fourchette (5) du coÃne du piston (6). F l'eÂcrou (4).
197
14 13 5
15
F1240832 F1240833
GB a GB b
Remove screws (14) and remove the intermediate cover (13). Disconnect fork (5) from piston (6). While holding the fork up,
NOTE. Support the differential unit with a lever. remove the differential unit (15).
5 6
12
F1240834 F1240835
GB c GB d
Extract fork (5). Remove snap ring (12) and whole piston (6).
6
11
9
10
7
8
9
F1240836 F1240837
GB e GB f
Remove guide ring (11) and O-ring (10). Remove snap ring (9) and take piston unit (6) apart. Remove all
NOTE. The guide ring (11) and O-ring (10) must be replaced each component parts.
time the unit is disassembled.
198
Rimuovere le viti (14) e rimuovere il coperchio Scollegare dal pistone (6) la forcella (5) e, tenendola
ITA intermedio (13). ITA sollevata, rimuovere il gruppo differenziale (15).
NOTA. Sostenere il gruppo differenziale con una leva.
Die Schrauben (14) abnehmen und den mittleren Dek- Vom Kolben (6) die Gabel (5) abtrennen. Die anheben
D kel (13) entfernen. D und des Differentialaggregat (15) entfernen.
BEMERKUNG. Das Differentialaggregat mit einem
Hebel stuÈtzen.
a b
Remover los tornillos (14) y remover la tapa intermedia Desconectar del pistoÁn (6) la horquilla y, teniendola
ESP (13). ESP levantada, remover el grupo diferencial (15).
NOTA. Sostener el grupo diferencial con una palanca.
Enlever les vis (14) puis enlever le couvercle inter- DeÂbrancher du piston (6) la fourchette (5) et en tenant
F meÂdiaire (13). F cette dernieÁre souleveÂe, enlever le groupe diffeÂrentiel
NOTE. Soutenir le groupe diffeÂrentiel aÁ l'aide d'un (15).
levier.
Estrarre la forcella (5). Rimuovere l'anello elastico (12) ed il pistone completo

ITA ITA (6).
Die Gabel (5) heraus nehmen. Den Kolbenring (12) und den vollstaÈndigen Kolben (6)
D D abnehmen.
c d
Extraer la harquilla (5). Remover el segmento elastico (12) y el pistoÁn
ESP ESP completo (6).
Extraire la fourchette (5). Enlever l'anneau aÁ ressort (12) et le piston complet (6).
F F
Asportare l'anello di guida (11) e la guarnizione OR Rimuovere l'anello elastico (9) e scomporre il gruppo
ITA (10). ITA pistone (6) in tutti i suoi componenti (7), (8).
NOTA. L'anello di guida (11) e la guarnizione (10)
devono essere sostituiti ad ogni smontaggio.
Den FuÈhrungsring (11) und den O-Ring (10) ab- Den Kolbenring (9) abnehmen und das Kolbenaggre-
D nehmen. D gat (6) auseinander nehmen, um die Teile (7) und (8)
BEMERKUNG. Der FuÈhrungsring (11) und die Dich- frei zu setzen.
tung (10) muÈssen jedesmal ausgewechselt werden, wenn sie
e abmontiert werden. f
Sacar el segmento de guõÁa (11) y la guarnicioÁn OR Remover el segmento elastico (9) y descomponer el
ESP (10). ESP grupo pistoÁn (6) en todos sus componentes (7) y (8).
NOTA. El segmento de guõÁa (11) y la guarnicioÁn (10)
deben de ser sobstituidos a cada desmontaje.
Enlever la bague de guidage (11) et la garniture OR Enlever l'anneau aÁ ressort (9) et deÂsassembler le
F (10). F groupe piston (6) de tous ses composants (7), (8).
NOTE. La bague de guidage (11) et la garniture (10)
doivent eÃtre substitueÂes aÁ chaque deÂmontage.
199
21
19
18 15
16
17 20
F1240838 F1240839
GB a GB b
Remove bearing (16) from the differential carrier (17) as well as the ONLY IF NECESSARY
stop ring (18), the coupling (19) and the spheres (20). Remove the coupling guide key (21) and disassemble the
NOTE. Note down the direction of assembly of the stop ring (18). differential unit (15).
(For details, see «HOW TO DISASSEMBLE THE DIFFERENTIAL
UNIT».
14
2
13
3
23 4
5
15 20 12
8
7
6
10
11
9
21 1
GB c GB d
22
17
19
18
16
D1240092
GB e GB f
200
Rimuovere il cuscinetto (16) dalla scatola differenziale SOLO SE NECESSARIO
ITA (17), l'anello di arresto (18), il manicotto (19) e le sfere ITA Rimuovere la chiavetta (21) di guida del manicotto e
(20). smontare il gruppo differenziale (15).
NOTA. Annotare il senso di montaggio dell'anello di arresto (18). (Per i dettagli, vedere «SMONTAGGIO GRUPPO DIFFERENZIA-
LE»).
Lager (16) von der Differentialschachtel (17), den NUR FALLS NOTWENDIG
D Sperring (18), die HuÈlse (19) und die Kugeln (20) D Den Keil (21) zur FuÈhrung der HuÈlse entfernen und
entfernen. das Differentialaggregat (15) abmontieren.
BEMERKUNG. Montagerichtung des Sperrings (18) bemerken. (FuÈr weitere Einzelheiten, siehe «DIFFERENTIALAGGREGAT AB-
a b MONTIEREN»).
Remover los cojinetes (16) de la caja diferencial (17), SOLO SI NECESARIO

ESP el segmento de paro (18) el manguito (19) y las ESP Remover la Laave (21) de guõÁa del manguito y
espheras (20). desmontar el grupo diferencial (15).
NOTA. Anotar el sentido de montaje del segmento de paro (18). Para los detalles, vease «DESMONTAJE GRUPO DIFERENCIAL».
Enlever le palier (16) du carter diffeÂrentiel (17), la SEULEMENT SI BESOIN

F bague de buteÂe (18), le manchon (19) et les spheÁres F Enlever la clavette (21) de guidage du manchon et
(20). deÂmonter le groupe diffeÂrentiel (15).
NOTE. Prendre note du sens de montage de la bague de buteÂe (Pour tout deÂtail, voir «DEMONTAAGE DU GROUPE DIFFEREN-
(18). TIEL».
ITA ITA
D D
c d
ESP ESP
F F
ITA ITA
D D
e f
ESP ESP
F F
201
HOW TO ASSEMBLE THE HYDRAULIC DIFFERENTIAL LOCK - ASSEMBLAGGIO BLOCCAGGIO DIFFERENZIALE A COMANDO IDRAULICO -
DIFFERENTIALBLOCKIERUNG MIT HYDRAULISCHER STEUERUNG MONTIEREN - ASEMBLAJE BLOQUEO DIFERENCIAL A MANDO
HYDRAULICO - MONTAJE BLOCAGE DIFFERENTIEL A COMMANDE HYDRAULIQUE
21 18
19
15
20
F1240839 F1240840
GB a GB b
ONLY IF PREVIOUSLY DISASSEMBLED Install spheres (20), coupling (19) and stop ring (18).
Assemble the differential unit (15). NOTE. Pay great attention to ring orientation (18).
(For details, see «HOW TO ASSEMBLE THE DIFFERENTIAL
UNIT»).
Position the guide key (21) of coupling (19).
11 10
6
16
17
T29
F1240841 F1240842
GB c GB d
Fit bearing (16) onto the differential carrier (17). Fit O-ring (10) and guide ring (11) onto the piston (6). Lubricate
NOTE. Make sure that the bearing is well set in the differential seals and insert the assembly into tool T29.
carrier.
7 T30
T29 22
8 6
F1240843 D1240089
GB e GB f
Insert tool T29 in the central unit (22) and push the piston (6) into Fit spring (7) and washer (8) on the piston (6) and install tool T30.
the seat.
Remove tool T29.
202
SOLO SE EÁ STATO SMONTATO Montare le sfere (20), il manicotto (19) e l'anello di
ITA Assemblare il gruppo differenziale (15). ITA arresto (18).
(Per i dettagli, vedere «ASSEMBLAGGIO GRUPPO NOTA. Controllare attentamente l'orientamento del-
DIFFERENZIALE»). l'anello (18).
Posizionare la chiavetta (21) di guida del manicotto (19).
NUR WENN ES ABMONTIERT WURDE Die Kugeln (20), die HuÈlse (19) und den Sperring (18)
D Differentialaggregat (15) zusammenbauen. D montieren.
(FuÈr weitere Einzelheiten, siehe «DIFFERENTIALAG-
GREGAT ZUSAMMENBAUEN»).
a Den Keil (21) auf die FuÈhrung der HuÈlse (19) positionieren. b
SOLO SI ESTA DESMONTADO Montar las espheras (20), el manguito (19) y el
ESP Asemblar el grupo diferencial (15). ESP segmento de paro (18).
(Para los detalles, vease «ASEMBLAJE GRUPO NOTA. Controlar atentamente la direccioÁn del seg-
DIFERENCIAL»). mento (18).
Colocar la llave (21) de guõÁa del manguito (19).
SEULEMENT SI DEMONTE Monter les spheÁres (20), le manchon (19) et l'anneau

F Assembler le groupe diffeÂrentiel (15). F de buteÂe (18).
(Pour tout deÂtail, voir «ASSEMBLAGE DU GROUPE NOTE. ControÃler attentivement l'orientation de l'an-
DIFFERENTIEL»). neau (18).
Mettre la clavette (21) de guidage du manchon (19) en place.
Montare sulla scatola differenziale (17) il cuscinetto Montare sul pistone (6) l'anello OR (10) e l'anello di
ITA (16). ITA guida (11). Lubrificare le guarnizioni ed inserire il
NOTA. Assicurarsi che il cuscinetto vada in sicura gruppo nell'attrezzo T29.
battuta sulla scatola differenziale.
Auf die Diffenrentialschachtel (17) das Lager (16) Auf den Kolben (6) den O-Ring (10) und den
D montieren. D FuÈhrungsring (11) montieren. Die Dichtungen Schmie-
BEMERKUNG. Sicherstellen, daû das Lager richtig in ren und das Aggregat in das Werkzeug T29 setzen.
der Differentialschachtel anschlaÈgt.
c d
Montar sobre la caja diferencial (17) el cojinete (16). Montar sobre el piston (6) el segmento OR (10) y el
ESP ESP segmento de guõÁa (11). Lubrificar las guarnicioÁnes y
NOTA. Asegurarse que el cojinete vaya seguramente
a tope sobre la caja diferencial. insertar el grupo en la herramienta T29.
Monter sur le carter du diffeÂrentiel (17) le palier (16). Monter sur le piston (6) la garniture OR (10) et la
F F bague de guidage (11). Lubrifier les garnitures et
NOTE. S'assurer que le palier aille en buteÂe sur le
carter du diffeÂrentiel. introduire le groupe dans l'outil T29.
Inserire l'attrezzo T29 nel corpo centrale (22) e Montare sul pistone (6) la molla (7) e la rondella (8) e
ITA spingere il pistone (6) nella sede. ITA montare l'attrezzo T30.
Rimuovere l'attrezzo T29.
Das Werkzeug T19 in den zentralen KoÈrper (22) Auf den Kolben (6) die Feder (7) und die Scheibe (8)
D setzen und den Kolben (6) in den Sitz druÈcken. D montieren und das Werkzeug T30 montieren.
Das Werkzeug T29 entfernen.
e f
Introducir la herramienta T29 en el cuerpo central (22) Montar sobre el pistoÁn (6) el muelle (7) y la arandela (8)
ESP y empujar el pistoÁn (6) en su alojamiento. ESP y montar la herramienta T30.
Remover la herramienta T29.
Introduire l'outil T29 dans le corps central (22) et Monter sur le piston (6) le ressort (7) et la rondelle (8)
F pousser le piston (6) dans son sieÁge. F puis monter l'outil T30.
Enlever l'outil T29.
203
HOW TO ASSEMBLE THE HYDRAULIC DIFFERENTIAL LOCK - ASSEMBLAGGIO BLOCCAGGIO DIFFERENZIALE A COMANDO IDRAULICO -
DIFFERENTIALBLOCKIERUNG MIT HYDRAULISCHER STEUERUNG MONTIEREN - ASEMBLAJE BLOQUEO DIFERENCIAL A MANDO
HYDRAULICO - MONTAJE BLOCAGE DIFFERENTIEL A COMMANDE HYDRAULIQUE
6
12
T30
F1240844 F1240845
GB a GB b
Screw tool T30 on the thread of the piston (6) to compress spring Fit the snap ring (12) of the unit.
(7) and vacate the seat for introducing the snap ring (12). Remove tool T30 and fit the snap ring (9) of spring (7).
5 14 13 23
22
15
F1240833 F1240850
GB c GB d
Insert the fork (5) and the differential unit (15) into the central unit Fit the intermediate cover (13) and lock it with screws (14). Tighten
(22). screws using a torque wrench setting of 23.8 ± 26.2 Nm.
Engage the fork (5) in the coupling (19) and on the piston (6). NOTE. Carefully check the state of the O-ring (23).
4 1
F1240846 F1240847
GB e GB f
Fit the lock nut (4) of the fork (5) and lock it with a dynamometric Fit the microswitch (2) complete with O-ring; torque wrench setting:
wrench set to a torque of 70 ± 75 Nm. max. 30 Nm.
If necessary, adjust differential unit clearances. (see «DIFFEREN-
TIAL UNIT ASSEMBLY»).
Fit the top cap (1) and the arms. (For details, see «CHECKING
WEAR AND REPLACING THE BRAKING DISKS»).
204
Avvitare l'attrezzo T30 sul filetto del pistone (6) per Montare l'anello elastico (12) di ritegno del gruppo.
ITA comprimere la molla (7) e liberare la sede per l'anello ITA Rimuovere l'attrezzo T30 e montare l'anello elastico
elastico (12). (9) di ritegno molla (7).
Das Werkzeug T30 auf das Kolbengewinde (6) Den Kolbenring (12) zur Halterung des Aggregats
D schrauben, um die Feder (7) zu komprimieren und D montieren.
den Sitz fuÈr den Kolbenring (12) freizusetzen. Das Werkzeug T30 abnehmen und den Kolbenring (9)
zur Halterung der Feder (7) montieren.
a b
Atornillar la herramienta T30 sobre la rosca del pistoÁn IMontar el segmento elastico (12) de compresioÁn del
ESP (6) para comprimir el muelle (7) y dejar libre el ESP grupo.
alojamiento para el anillo elastico(12). Removerla herramienta T30 y montar el segmento
elastico (9) de compresion muelle (7).
Visser l'outil T30 sur le filet du piston (6) pour Monter l'anneau aÁ ressort (12) de retenue du groupe.
F comprimer le ressort (7) et deÂgager le sieÁge pour F Enlever l'outil T30 et monter l'anneau aÁ ressort (9) de
l'anneau aÁ ressort (12). retenue ressort (7).
Inserire nel corpo centrale (22) la forcella (5) ed il Montare il coperchio intermedio (13) e bloccarlo con le
ITA gruppo differenziale (15). ITA viti (14) serrate con una coppia di 23,8v26,2 Nm.
Impegnare la forcella (5) nel manicotto (19) e sul NOTA. Controllare attentamente la condizione dell'a-
pistone (6). nello OR (23).
In den zentralen KoÈrper (22) die Gabel (5) und das Den mittleren Deckel (13) montieren und mit den
D Differentialaggregat (15) einsetzen. D Schrauben (14) mit einem Anzugsmoment von
Die Gabel (5) in der HuÈllse (19) und auf den Kolben (6) 23,8v26,2 Nm blockieren.
einsetzen. BEMERKUNG. Zustand des O-Ringes (23) sorgfaÈltig kontrollieren.
c d
ntroducir en el cuerpo (22) la horquilla (5) y el grupo Montar la tapa intermedia (13) y bloquearla con
ESP diferencial (15). ESP tornillos (14) apretadas con un par de 23,8v26,2 Nm.
Insertar la horquilla (5) en el manguito (19) y sobre el NOTA. Controlar con cuidado la condicioÁn del
pistyoÁn (6). segmento OR (23).
Introduire dans le corps central (22) la fourchette (5) et Monter le couvercle intermeÂdiaire (13) et bloquer celui-
F le groupe diffeÂrentiel (15). F ci avec les vis (14) serreÂes aÁ un couple de 23,8v26,2
Engager la fourchette (5) dans le manchon (19) puis Nm.
sur le piston (6). NOTE. ControÃler attentivement l'eÂtat de la garniture OR (23).
Montare il dado (4) di ritegno forcella (5) e bloccarlo Montare il microinterruttore (2) completo di guarnizione OR;
ITA con una chiave dinamometrica tarata ad una coppia di ITA coppia di serraggio: max. 30 Nm.
70v75 Nm. Se necessario, registrare i giochi differenziale. (Vede-
re «ASSEMBLAGGIO DIFFERENZIALE»).
Montare il tappo superiore (1) ed i bracci. (Per i dettagli, vedere
«CONTROLLO USURA E SOSTITUZIONE DISCHI FRENO»).
Die Mutter (4) zur Halterung der Gabel (5) montieren Die Mikroschalter (2) samt O-Ring montieren. Anzu-
D und mit einem MomentenschluÈssel und einem Anzu- D gsmoment: max. 30 Nm.
gsmoment von 70v75 Nm blockieren. Wenn noÈtig, die Differentialspiele einstellen (Siehe «DIFFEREN-
TIAL ZUSAMMENBAUEN»). Den unteren Stopfen (1) und die Arme
e f montieren. (FuÈr weitere Einzelheiten, sieh «VERSCHLEISS KON-
TROLLIEREN UND BREMSSCHEIBEN AUSWECHSELN»).
Montar la tuerca (4) de compresioÁn horquilla (5) y Montar el microinterruptor (2) completo de guarnicioÁn
ESP bloquearla con un llave dinamometrica tarada a un par ESP OR; par de torsion: max. 30 Nm.
de 70v75 Nm. Si necesario, registrar los juegos diferenciales.
(Vease «ASEMBLAJE DIFERENCIAL»):
Montar la tapa superior (1) y los ejes. (Para los detalles, vease
«CONTROL DESGASTE Y SOBSTITUCION DISCOS FRENOS»).
Monter l'eÂcrou (4) de fixation fourchette (5) et bloquer Monter le microinterrupteur (2) eÂquipeÂ de garniture
F celui-ci aÁ l'aide d'une cleÂ dynamomeÂtrique calibreÂe aÁ F OR; couple de serrage: max. 30 Nm.
un couple de 70v75 Nm. Si besoin, reÂgler les jeux du diffeÂrentiel (Voir «ASSEM-
BLAGE DU DIFFERENTIEL»). Monter le bouchon supeÂrieur (1) et
les bras. (Pour tout deÂtail, voir «CONTROLE DE L'USURE ET
SUBSTITUTION DES DISQUES FREIN»).
205
HOW TO DISASSEMBLE INCORPORATED REDUCTION GEAR AND PINION - SMONTAGGIO RIDUTTORE INTEGRATO (602) - INTEGRIERTER
REDUZIERER ABMONTIEREN (602) - DESMONTAJE REDUCTOR ENCORPORADO Y PINON (602) - DESMONTAJE REDUCTEUR INTEGRE (602)
2
2
F1240625 F1240626
GB a GB b
The figure shows the axle with incorporated reduction gear with Unloose the check nuts on upper (1) and lower (2) flange.
Mechanic flanges; disassembly and assembly procedures also
apply to DIN flanges.
5
1
4
3
F1240627 F1240628
GB c GB d
Draw out nuts (3) and O-rings (4). Remove the upper flange (2) together with dust ring (5).
2
F1240629 F1240630
GB e GB f
Remove the snap ring (6) and discard it. Remove the lower flange (2)
206
La figura illustra l'assale con riduttore incorporato, con Allentare i dadi di ritegno delle flange superiore (1) ed
ITA flange Mecchanic; lo smontaggio e l'assemblaggio ITA inferiore (2).
sono uguali anche per le flange DIN.
Die Abbildung zeigt die Achse mit eingebautem Befestigungsmuttern der oberen Flanschen (1) und
D Reduzierer und Mecchanic Flanschen; das Abmontie- D der unteren Flanschen (2) lockern.
ren und Zusammenbauen erfolgt wie fuÈr die Flan-
schen DIN.
a b
La figura ilustra el eje con reductor encorporado, con Aflojar las tuercas de retencion de las bridas superior
ESP bridas Mechanic; el desmontaje y el asemblaje son ESP (1) y inferior (2).
uguales tambien por las bridas DIN.
La figure illustre l'essieu aÁ reÂducteur incorporeÂ, avec Desserrer les eÂcrous de fixation des flasques supeÂri-
F Flasque Mecchanic; le deÂmontage et l'assemblage F eures (1) et infeÂrieures (2).
sont pareils meÃme pour les flasques DIN.
Asportare i dadi (3) e le guarnizioni OR (4). Rimuovere la flangia superiore (1) completa di anello
ITA ITA parapolvere (5).
Muttern (3) abschrauben und O-Ringe (4) abnehmen. Den oberen Flansch (1) samt Staubdichtungsring (5)
D D abnehmen.
c d
Sacar las tuercas (3) y las guarniciones OR (4). Remover la brida superior (1) completa de segmento
ESP ESP parapolvos (5).
Enlever les eÂcrous (3) et les garnitures OR (4). Enlever la flasque supeÂrieure (1) eÂquipeÂe d'anneau
F F anti-poussieÁre (5).
Rimuovere l'anello di tenuta (6) e scartarlo. Rimuovere la flangia inferiore (2).

ITA ITA
Kolbenring (6) abnehmen und entsorgen. Unteren Flansch abnehmen (2).

D D
e f
Remover el segmento de compresion (6) y descartarlo. Remover la brida inferior (2).
ESP ESP
Enlever la bague d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (6) et la jeter. Enlever la flasque infeÂrieure (2).

F F
207
REDUZIERER ABMONTIEREN (602) - DESMONTAJE REDUCTOR ENCORPORADO Y PINON - DESMONTAJE REDUCTEUR INTEGRE (602)
9 10
8
11
7
F1240631 F1240632
GB a GB b
Remove check screws (7), (8) and relative washers (10) from cover In turn, insert a punch in the slots provided and, tapping lightly with
(9). a hammer, separate the cover (9) from the body of the reduction
gear (11).
9
11 9
F1240633 F1240634
GB c GB d
Insert two levers in the provided slots and move the cover (9) away Lightly tap with a hammer to disengage cover (9) from upper gear
from the body of the reduction gear (11). (12).
9 12
13
F1240635 F1240636
GB e GB f
Draw out cover (9) and remove any sealant left. Remove lower gear (13).
208
Rimuovere le viti (7), (8) di ritegno del coperchio (9) e le Inserire alternativamente nelle cave predisposte uno
ITA relative rondelle (10). ITA spintore e, con leggeri colpi di martello, separare il
coperchio (9) dal corpo riduttore (11).
Befestigungsschrauben (7) und (8) des Deckels (9) mit Abwechselnd, in die Nuten einen StoÈûel stecken und
D den Unterlegscheiben (10) abschrauben. D diesen mit einem Hammer leicht schlagen, bis sich der
Deckel (9) vom ReduziererkoÈrper (11) loÈst.
a b
Remover los tornillos (7), (8) de retencion de la tapa (9) Introducir alternativamente en los orificios propuestas
ESP y las relativas arandelas (10). ESP un empuje y, con ligeros golpes de martillo, separar la
tapa (9) del cuerpo reductor (11).
Enlever les vis (7), (8) de fixation du couvercle (9) et Introduire alternativement dans les creux preÂdisposeÂs
F ses relatives rondelles (10). F un poussoir et, aÁ l'aide de leÂgers coups de maillet,
seÂparer le couvercle (9) du corps reÂducteur (11).
Inserire due leve nelle cave predisposte ed allontanare Battere leggeri colpi con un mazzuolo per disimpe-
ITA il coperchio (9) dal corpo riduttore (11). ITA gnare il coperchio (9) dall'ingranaggio superiore (12).
Zwei Hebel in die Nuten stecken und den Deckel (9) Mit leichten HammerschlaÈgen, den Deckel (9) vom
D vom ReduziererkoÈrper (11) abheben. D oberen Zahnrad (12) trennen.
c d
Introducir dos palancas en los orificios propuestas un Golpear con ligeros golpes con un martillo para
ESP empuje y alejar la tapa (9) del cuerpo reductor (11). ESP desconectar la tapa (9) del engranaje superior (12).
introduire deux leviers dans les creux preÂdisposeÂs et Donner de leÂgers coups de maillet pour deÂgager le
F eÂloigner le couvercle (9) du corps reÂducteur (11). F couvercle (9) de l'engrenage supeÂrieur (12).
Asportare il coperchio (9) e rimuovere ogni traccia di Asportare l'ingranaggio inferiore (13).
ITA sigillante. ITA
Deckel (9) abnehmen und Dichtungsmaûe vollstaÈndig Das untere Zahnrad (13) entfernen.
D entfernen. D
e f
Introducir la tapa (9) y remover cada mancha de cola. Sacar el engranaje inferior (13).
ESP ESP
Enlever le couvercle (9) et nettoyer toute trace de Enlever l'engrenage infeÂrieur (13).
F colle. F
209
14
12
15 9
F1240637 F1240638
GB a GB b
Remove upper gear assembly (12) complete with bearings (14). Using a puller, remove snap ring (15) from cover (9) and discard it.
NOTE. Note down direction of installation.
14
14
16
12
12
14
14
12
F1240639 F1240640
GB c GB d
Remove inner bearing (14) from gear assembly (12). Remove outer bearing (14) and distance piece (16).
17
18
F1240641 F1240642
GB e GB f
Disjoin from the steering case the steering bar located by the side Remove the intermediate cover (17) and the whole differential unit
of the intermediate cover (17). (18).
Remove the complete arm. For details, see «HOW TO REMOVE THE DIFFERENTIAL UNIT».
For details, see «CHECKING WEAR AND REPLACING THE
BRAKING DISCS».
210
Rimuovere il gruppo ingranaggio superiore (12) Utilizzando un estrattore, rimuovere dal coperchio (9)
ITA completo di cuscinetti (14). ITA l'anello di tenuta (15) e scartarlo.
Das obere Zahnradaggregat (12) samt Lager (14) Mit einem Abzieher, vom Deckel (9) den Kolbenring
D entfernen. D (15) abnehmen und entsorgen.
BEMERKUNG. Auf die Montagerichtung achten.
a b
Remover el grupo engranaje superior (12) completo de Utilizando un estractor, remover la tapa (9) el
ESP cojinetes (14). ESP segmento de compresion (15) y descartarlo.
NOTA Anotar el sentido de montaje.
Enlever le groupe engrenage supeÂrieur (12) eÂquipeÂ A l'aide de l'extracteur, enlever le couvercle (9) la
F des paliers (14). F bague d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (15) et l'eÂliminer.
NOTE. Prendre note du sens de montage.
Rimuovere dal gruppo ingranaggio (12) il cuscinetto Rimuovere il cuscinetto esterno (14) ed il distanziale
ITA interno (14). ITA (16).
Vom Zahnradaggregat (12) das innere Lager (14) Das aÈuûere Lager (14) und das DistanzstuÈck (16)
D abnehmen. D entfernen.
c d
Remover del grupo engranaje (12) el cojinete interior Remover el cojinete esterior (14) y el distancial (16).
ESP (14). ESP
Enlever le groupe engrenage (12) le palier interne (14). Enlever le palier (14) et l'entretoise (16).
F F
Scollegare dalla scatola snodo la barra di sterzatura Rimuovere il coperchio intermedio (17) ed il differen-
ITA del lato del coperchio intermedio (17). ITA ziale completo (18).
Rimuovere il braccio completo. Per i dettagli, vedere «RIMOZIONE GRUPPO DIFFE-
Per i dettagli, vedere «CONTROLLO USURA E SOSTITUZIONE RENZIALE».
DISCHI FRENO».
Vom GelenkgehaÈuse die Lenkstange an der Seite des Den mittleren Deckel (17) und das ganze Differential
D mittleren Deckels (17) abmontieren. D (18) abnehmen.
Den ganzen Arm abnehmen. Weitere Einzelheiten im Paragraph «DIFFERENTIA-
Weitere Einzelheiten im Paragraph «VERSCHLEISS KONTROLL- LAGGREGAT ABNEHMEN».
e IEREN UND BREMSSCHEIBEN AUSWECHSELN». f
Desconectar del carter de las rotulas la barra de Remover la tapa intermedia (17) y el diferencial
ESP direccion del lado de la tapa intermedia (17). ESP completo (18).
Remover el brazo completo. Por los detalles, vease «REMOVER GRUPO DIFE-
Para los detalles, vease «CONTROL DESGASTE Y SUBSTITU- RENCIAL».
CION DISCOS FRENO».
DeÂbrancher la boõÃte d'articulation de la barre de Enlever le couvercle intermeÂdiaire (17) et le diffeÂrentiel

F braquage du coÃteÂ couvercle intermeÂdiaire (17). F complet (18).
Enlever le bras complet. Pour les deÂtails, voir «DEPOSE DU GROUPE DIFFE-
Pour les deÂtails, voir «CONTROLE USURE ET SUBSTITUTION RENTIEL».
DES DISQUES FREINS».
211
T29
T30
19
F1240643 F1240644
GB a GB b
Heat the ring nut (19) at approx. 80ëC. Engage special wrench T30 on the ring nut (19) and apply bar-hold
T29 on the pinion (20).
11
20
19
F1240645 F1240646
GB c GB d
Remove ring nut (19) Using a puller, extract pinion (20) complete with inner bearing (21),
distance piece (22) and distance washers.
NOTE. The thrust blocks of the bearings remain in the central body
(11).
25
20
F1240647 F1240648
GB e GB f
Remove the complete pinion (20). Using a punch and a hammer, extract the snap ring (25).
NOTE. Carefully check and note direction of installation of NOTE. Note direction of installation of snap ring (24).
distance piece.
212
Scaldare a circa 80ëC la ghiera (19). Impegnare la chiave speciale T30 sulla ghiera (19) ed
ITA ITA applicare sul pignone (20) il codolo T29.
Fermare la chiave T30 e ruotare il pignone (20) per
allentare la ghiera (19).
Nutmutter (19) bis auf ca. 80ëC erwaÈrmen. SpezialschluÈssel T30 in die Nutmutter (19) stecken
D D und auf das Rad (20) den Schaft T29 anbringen.
Den SchluÈssel T30 festhalten und das Rad (20)
drehen, um die Nutmutter (19) zu lockern.
a b
Calentar hasta aproximadamente 80ëC la virola (19). Empenar la llave especial T30 sobre la virola (19) y
ESP ESP aplicar sobre el pinon (20) el mango T29.
Parar la llave T30 y girar el pinon (20) para aflojar la
virola (19).
Chauffer l'anneau (19) aÁ environ 80ëC. Engager la cleÂ speÂciale T30 sur l'anneau de fixation
F F (19) et appliquer sur le pignon (20) l'embout T29.
ArreÃter la cleÂ T30 et tourner le pignon (20) pour
desserrer l'anneau de fixation (19).
Asportare la ghiera (19). Utilizzando un estrattore, estrarre il pignone (20)

ITA ITA completo del cuscinetto interno (21), del distanziale
(22) e degli spessori (23) e (24).
NOTA. Le ralle dei cuscinetti rimangono nel corpo centrale (11).
Nutmutter (19) entfernen. Mit einem Abzieher, Rad (20) samt inneres Lager (21),
D D DistanzstuÈck (22) und Unterlegscheiben (23) und (24)
herausnehmen.
BEMERKUNG. die Scheiben der Lager bleiben im ZentralkoÈrper
c d (11) sitzen.
Sacar la virola (19). Utilizando un estractor, estraer el pinon (20) completo

ESP ESP de cojinete interno (21), del distancial (22) y de los
espesores (23) y (24).
NOTA. Las ranguas de los cojinetes quedan en el cuerpo central
(11).
Enlever l'anneau (19). A l'aide d'un extracteur extraire le pignon (20) eÂquipeÂ
F F de palier interne (21), de l'entretoise (22) et des cales
(23) et (24).
NOTE. Les crapaudines des paliers demeurent dans le corps
central (11).
Rimuovere il pignone completo (20). Utilizzando uno spintore ed un mazzuolo, estrarre

ITA ITA l'anello di tenuta (25).
NOTA. Controllare attentamente ed annotare il senso
di montaggio del distanziale (22). NOTA. Annotare il senso di montaggio dell'anello di
tenuta (24).
Das gesamte Rad (20) abnehmen. Mit einem StoÈûel und einem Hammer, den Kolbenring
D D (25) herausnehmen.
BEMERKUNG. SorgfaÈltig die Montagerichtung des
DistanzstuÈckes (22) kontrollieren. BEMERKUNG. Montagerichtung des Kolbenrings (24)
beachten.
e f
Remover el pinon completo (20). Utilizando un empuje y un martillo, estaer el segmento
ESP ESP de compresion (25).
NOTA. Controlar con cuidado y anotar el sentido de
montaje del distancial (22). NOTA. Anotar el sentido de montaje del segmento de
compresion (24).
Enlever le pignon complet (20). A l'aide d'un poussoir et d'un maillet, extraire la bague
F F d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (25).
NOTE. ControÃler attentivement et prendre note du
sens de montage de l'entretoise (22). NOTE. Prendre note du sens du montage de la bague
d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (24).
213
20
14 21
24
12 23
16
GB
14 a GB b
10
8 9
6 11
5 22
1 25
21
4 19
3 18
13
15 17
10
4 2 7
3 F1240078
GB c GB d
GB e GB f
214
GB CAUTION! 1 - If disassembly has been carried out ESP CUIDADO! 1 - Si el desmontaje ha sido efectuado
only as a means to replace the snap ring (24), solo por la sustitucion del segmento de compresion
position the new ring and reassemble the unit by keeping to the (24), remontar el grupo respectando los pares de torsion
torque wrench settings indicated in the following section and indicadas en el capitulo siguiente y utilizando los productos de
using the prescribed locking products. bloque descritos.
2 - If disassembly is carried out in order to replace crown wheel 2 - Si el desmontaje viene efectuado para la sustitucion del par
and pinion, bearings, or planetary gear, break up distance conico, de los cojinetes o de los engranajes satelites, proceder
washers and calculate clearances as indicated in the sections a la descomposicion y a la busqueda de los espesores y de los
regarding removal, disassembly, assembly and installation of juegos como indicados en los capitulos concernientes la
differential unit and bevel pinion. remocioÁn, el desmontaje, el asemblaje y la instalacion del
diferencial y del pinoÁn conico.
ITA ATTENZIONE! 1 - Se lo smontaggio eÁ stato ese-

guito solo per la sostituzione dell'anello di tenuta ATTENTION! 1 - Si le deÂmontage n'a eu lieu que
(24), procedere al posizionamento del nuovo anello e rimontare F
pour la substitution de la bague d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (24),
il gruppo rispettando le coppie di serraggio indicate nel positionner la bague d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ et remonter le groupe en
paragrafo seguente ed utilizzando i prodotti di bloccaggio respectant les couples de serrage indiqueÂs dans le paragraphe
prescritti. suivant et en utilisant les produits de blocage preÂconiseÂs.
2 - Se lo smontaggio viene eseguito per la sostituzione della 2 - Si le deÂmontage a lieu pour substituer le couple conique, les
coppia conica, dei cuscinetti o degli ingranaggi satelliti, paliers ou les engrenages satellites, deÂsassembler et recher-
procedere alla scomposizione ed alla ricerca degli spessori e cher les cales et les jeux comme indiqueÂ dans les paragraphes
dei giochi come indicato nei paragrafi riguardanti la rimozione, ayant trait aÁ la deÂpose, au deÂmontage, aÁ l'assemblage et aÁ
lo smontaggio, l'assemblaggio e l'installazione del differenziale l'installation du diffeÂrentiel et du pignon conique.
e del pignone conico.
D ACHTUNG! 1 - Falls die Teile nur abmontiert wor-

den sind, um den Kolbenring (24) auszuwechseln,
den neuen Kolbenring einsetzen und das Aggregat wieder
zusammenbauen; dabei die im nachfolgenden Paragraph
angegebene Anzugsmomente beachten und die vorgeschrie-
benen Befestigungsprodukte verwenden.
2 - Falls die Teile abmontiert worden sind, um den Kegelrad-
trieb, die Lager oder die Planetengetriebe auszuwechseln, die
Unterlegscheiben auseinander nehmen und die Spiele beach-
ten, die in den Paragraphen zum Entfernen, Abmontieren,
Zusammenbau und zur Installation des Differentials und des
Kegelrads angegeben sind.
215
HOW TO ASSEMBLE INCORPORATED REDUCTION GEAR AND PINION - ASSEMBLAGGIO RIDUTTORE INTEGRATO (602) - INTEGRIERTER
REDUZIERER MONTIEREN (602) - ASEMBLAJE REDUCTOR INCORPORADO Y PINON - MONTAJE REDUCTEUR INTEGRE (602)
11
22
T7
F1240649 F1240650
GB a GB b
Find the value of the distance washers (23) and (24) and insert Assemble the pinion assembly as shown in the picture,
the thrust blocks of the conical bearing of the pinion into the checking that distance piece (22) is correctly oriented.
body of the reduction gear (11) (See «HOW TO INSTALL AND NOTE. Apply grease to the outer surface of the distance piece
ADJUST THE BEVEL PINION»). (22).
Using tool T7 insert the snap ring (25) previously lubricated
with grease.
T29
T30
20
F1240651 F1240652
GB c GB d
With tools T28C, T28D and T28B connected to a press, insert Apply Loctite 242 to the thread of the pinion and screw the ring
the complete pinion assembly (20). nut (19). Engage special wrench T30 on the ring nut and apply
bar-hold T29 to the pinion (20). Tighten the ring nut (19)
following the appropriate procedure (See «HOW TO INSTALL
AND ADJUST THE BEVEL PINION») and check that torque is
170 ± 220Ncm.
T32 T32
14 6
12 15
F1240653
9 9 F1240654
GB e GB f
Using a press, fit the bearings (14) and the distance piece (16) Grease snap rings (15) and (6); position the snap rings in the
on the upper gear (12). cover (9) using tool T32.
CAUTION! The distance piece (16) must be positioned
between the outer bearing and the gear.
216
Ricercare il valore degli spessori (23) e (24) ed inserire Comporre il gruppo pignone come in figura, control-
ITA nel corpo riduttore (11) le ralle dei cuscinetti conici del ITA lando che il distanziale (22) sia orientato correttamen-
pignone (Vedere «INSTALLAZIONE E REGISTRAZIO- te.
NE PIGNONE CONICO»). NOTA. Lubrificare con grasso la superficie esterna del distanziale
Utilizzando l'attrezzo T7 inserire l'anello di tenuta (25) dopo averlo (22).
lubrificato con grasso.
Die GroÈûen der Unterlegscheiben (23) und (24) Das Radaggregat wie in der Abbildung gezeigt
D kontrollieren und in den ReduziererkoÈrper (11) die D zusammenbauen; dabei uÈberpruÈfen ob das Distanz-
Lagerscheiben des Rades einsetzen (Siehe «INSTAL- stuÈck (22) auch richtig orientiert ist.
LATION UND EINSTELLUNG DES KEGELRADES»). BEMERKUNG. Die aÈuûere FlaÈche des DistanzstuÈckes (22) mit Fett
a Mit Hilfe des Werkzeugs T7 den zuvor eingefetteten Kolbenring
(25) einsetzen.
b schmieren.
Buscar el valor de los espesores (23) y (24) y Componer el grupo pinon como en figura, controlando
ESP introducir en el cuerpo reductor (11) las ranguas de ESP que el distancial (22) sea orientado correctamente.
los cojinetes conicos del pinon (Vease «INSTALACION NOTA. Lubrificar con grasa la superficie exterior del
Y REGISTRACION PINON CONICO»). distancial (22).
Utilizando la herramienta T7 introducir el segmento de compresion
(25) despues de haberlo lubrificado con grasa.
Chercher la valeur des cales (23) et (24), puis Composer le groupe pignon comme sur la figure,
F introduire dans le corps reÂducteur (11) les crapaudines F controÃler si l'entretoise (22) est orienteÂe correctement.
des paliers coniques du pignon (voir «INSTALLATION NOTE. Lubrifier avec du gras la surface externe de
ET REGLAGE DU PIGNON CONIQUE»). l'entretoise (22).
A l'aide de l'outil T7 introduire la bague d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (25) apreÁs
l'avoir lubrifieÂe avec du gras.
Utilizzando gli attrezzi T28C, T28D e T28B collegati Spalmare la filettatura del pignone con Loctite 242 ed
ITA ad una pressa, inserire il gruppo pignone (20) ITA avvitare la ghiera (19). Impegnare la chiave speciale
completo. T30 sulla ghiera ed applicare il codolo T29 sul
pignone (20). Serrare la ghiera (19) con le modalitaÁ prescritte
(Vedere «INSTALLAZIONE E REGISTRAZIONE PIGNONE CONI-
CO») e controllare che la coppia di rotazione sia di 170v220 Ncm.
Mit Hilfe der an einer Presse angeschlossenen Werk- Radgewinde mit Loctite 242 schmieren und die Nut-
D zeuge T28C, T28D und T28B, das ganze Radaggre- D mutter (19) zuschrauben. Den SpezialschluÈssel T30 in
gat (20) einsetzen. die Nutmutter setzen und den Schaft T29 auf das Rad
(20) setzen. Nutmutter (19) laut Anweisungen fest ziehen (Siehe
c d «INSTALLATION UND EINSTELLUNG DES KEGELRADES») und
das Gegenmoment kontrollieren, das 170v220 Ncm betragen muû.
Utilizando las herramientas T28C, T28D y T28B Pasar sobre la rosca del pinon Loctite 242 y entornillar
ESP conectar a un prensa, insertar el grupo pinon (20) ESP la virola (19). Empenar la llave especial T30 sobre la
completo. virola y aplicar el mango T29 sobre el pinon (20).
Apretar la virola (19) con las modalidades prescritas (Vease
«INSTALACION Y REGISTRACION PINON CONICO») y controlar
que el par de rotacion sea de 170v220 Ncm.
A l'aide des outils T28C, T28D et T28B relieÂs aÁ une Enduire le filetage du pignon avec du Loctite 242 et
F presse, introduire le groupe pignon (20) complet. F visser l'anneau (19). Engager la cleÂ speÂciale T30 sur
l'anneau et appliquer l'embout T29 sur le pignon (20).
Serrer l'anneau (19) de la facËon preÂconiseÂe (voir «INSTALLATION
ET REGLAGE DU PIGNON CONIQUE») et controÃler que le couple
de rotation est de 170v220 Ncm.
Utilizzando una pressa, montare sull'ingranaggio Lubrificare con grasso gli anelli di tenuta (15) e (6);
ITA superiore (12) i cuscinetti (14) ed il distanziale (16). ITA posizionarli nel coperchio (9) utilizzando l'attrezzo
ATTENZIONE! Il distanziale (16) va posizionato tra il T32.
cuscinetto esterno e l'ingranaggio.
Mit Hilfe einer Presse, die Lager (14) und das Die Kolbenringe (15) und (6) mit Fett schmieren; diese
D DistanzstuÈck (16) auf das obere Zahnrad (12) montie- D mit dem Werkzeug T32 auf den Deckel (9) positionie-
ren. ren.
ACHTUNG! Das DistanzstuÈck (16) muû zwischen dem aÈuûeren
e Lager und das Zahnrad liegen. f
Utilizando una prensa, montar sobre el engranaje Lubrificar con grasa los segmento de compresion (15)
ESP superior (12) los cojinetes (14) y el distancial (16). ESP y (16); colocarlos en la tapa (9) utilizando la herra-
CUIDADO. El distancial (16) viene colocado entre el mienta T32.
cojinete exterior y el engranaje.
A l'aide d'une presse, monter sur l'engrenage Lubrifier avec du gras les bagues d'eÂtancheÂiteÂ (15) et
F supeÂrieur (12) les paliers (14) et l'entretoise (16). F (16): placer ces dernieÁres dans le couvercle (9) aÁ l'aide
ATTENTION! L'entretoise doit eÃtre placeÂe entre le de l'outil T32.
palier et l'engrenage.
217
17
18
F1240642 F1240641
GB a GB b
Re-install the differential unit (18) and the intermediate cover Re-install the complete arm checking flatness and blocking the
(17). arm by keeping to the appropriate procedures illustrated in
CAUTION! If the crown has been replaced, reinstate clear- section «HOW TO ASSEMBLE THE BRAKING UNITS».
ances. Also connect the steering bar.
For details, see «HOW TO ASSEMBLE AND ADJUST THE
DIFFERENTIAL UNIT».
12
11
20
13
F1240636 F1240637
GB c GB d
Fit the lower gear (13) onto the pinion (20). Insert the upper gear unit (12) into the body of the reduction
gear (11).
9 12 9
8
10
F1240635 F1240655
GB e GB f
Apply Loctite 510 to the locking surface of the body of the Block cover (9) with screws (7) and (8) and relative washers
reduction gear (11). (10). Tighten using the criss-cross method.
Lubricate snap rings (6) and (15); fit cover (9) and set cover (if Torque wrench setting: 82 ± 91 Nm
necessary) by lightly tapping with a plastic hammer.
218
Rimontare il gruppo differenziale (18) ed il coperchio Rimontare il braccio completo, controllando la plana-
ITA intermedio (17). ITA ritaÁ e bloccandolo con le modalitaÁ indicate nel
ATTENZIONE! Se eÁ stata sostituita la corona, ristabi- paragrafo «ASSEMBLAGGIO DEI GRUPPI DI FRE-
lire i giochi. NATURA».
Per i dettagli, vedere «ASSEMBLAGGIO ED INSTALLAZIONE Collegare anche la barra di sterzatura.
GRUPPO DIFFERENZIALE».
Das Differentialaggregat (18) und den mittleren Deckel Den gesamten Arm wieder montieren und Ebenheit
D (17) wieder montieren. D laut Anweisungen des Paragraphs «ZUSAMMENBAU
ACHTUNG! Falls der Kranz ausgewechselt worden ist, DER BREMSAGGREGATE» kontrollieren.
Spiele wieder herstellen. Lenkstange ebenfalls anschlieûen.
a Weitere Einzelheiten im Paragraph «ZUSAMMENBAU UND IN- b
STALLATION DES DIFFERENTIALAGGREGATS».
Remontar el grupo diferencial (18) y la tapa intermedia Remontar el brazo completo, controlando la planari-
ESP (17). ESP dad y bloqueando con las modalidades indicadas en
CUIDADO! Si ha sido cambiada la corona, restabilizar al capitulo «ASEMBLAJE DE LOS GRUPOS DE
los juegos. FRENADURA».
Para los detalles, vease «ASEMBLAJE Y INSTALACION GRUPO Conectar tambien la barra de direccion.
DIFERENCIAL».
Remonter le groupe diffeÂrentiel (18) et le couvercle Remonter le bras complet, en controÃler l'uniformiteÂ et
F intermeÂdiaire (17). F le bloquer suivant le mode indiqueÂ au paragraphe
ATTENTION! Si la couronne a eÂteÂ substitueÂe, reÂtablir «ASSEMBLAGE DES GROUPES DE FREINAGE».
les jeux. Brancher eÂgalement la barre de braquage.
Pour tout deÂtail, voir «ASSEMBLAGE ET INSTALLATION GROUPE
DIFFERENTIEL».
Montare sul pignone (20) l'ingranaggio inferiore (13). Inserire nel corpo riduttore (11) il gruppo ingranaggio
ITA ITA superiore (12).
Das untere Zahnrad (13) auf das Rad (20) montieren. Das obere Zahnradaggregat (12) in den Reduzierer-
D D koÈrper (11) einsetzen.
c d
Montar sobre el pinon (20) el engranaje inferior (13). Introducir en el cuerpo reductor (11) el grupo
ESP ESP engranaje superior (12).
Monter sur le pignon (20) l'engrenage infeÂrieur (13). Introduire dans le corps reÂducteur (11) le groupe
F F engrenage supeÂrieur (12).
Spalmare la superficie di chiusura del corpo riduttore Bloccare il coperchio (9) con le viti (7) e (8) e le relative
ITA (11) con Loctite 510. ITA rondelle (10) serrando con il metodo di serraggio
Lubrificare gli anelli di tenuta (6) e (15); montare il incrociato.
coperchio (9) assestandolo (se necessario) con leggeri colpi di un Coppia di serraggio: 82v91 Nm
mazzuolo in materiale plastico.
Die SchlieûflaÈche des ReduziererkoÈrpers (11) mit Deckel (9) mit den Schrauben (7) und (8) und den
D Loctite 510 schmieren. D Unterlegscheiben (10) festschrauben; die Schrauben
Kolbenringe (6) und (15) schmieren; Deckel (9) im Kreuz abwechselnd fest ziehen.
montieren und wenn noÈtig, mit einem Gummihammer leicht Anzugsmoment: 82v91 Nm.
e schlagen. f
Pasar la superficie de cierre del cuerpo reductor (11) Bloquear la tapa (9) con los tornillos (7) y (8) y las
ESP con Loctite 510. ESP relativas arandelas (10) apretando con el metodo de
Lubrificar los segmentos de compresion (6) y (15); torsion cruzado.
montar la tapa (9) arreglando (si necesario) con ligeros golpes de Par de torsion : 82v91 Nm.
martillo en material plastico.
Enduire la surface de fermeture du corps reÂducteur Bloquer le couvercle (9) avec les vis (7) et (8) et leurs
F (11) avec du Loctite 510. F relatives rondelles (10) en serrant aÁ l'aide du systeÁme
de serrage croiseÂ.
Couple de serrage: 82v91 Nm.
219
1
20 1
3 4
T20A
(T20B)
2
2 F1240627
3 F1240656
GB a GB b
Fit the upper (1) and lower (2) flanges. Apply tool T20A (or T20B) to flanges (1) and (2) and tighten
Apply Loctite 242 to the threaded portion of pinion (20) and nuts (3) using a dynamometric wrench.
upper gear (12). Fit O-rings (4) and nuts (3). Torque wrench setting: 280 ± 310 Nm
GB c GB d
GB e GB f
220
Montare le flange superiore (1) ed inferiore (2). Applicare alle flange (1) e (2) l'attrezzo T20A (oppure
ITA Spalmare le filettature del pignone (20) e dell'ingra- ITA T20B) e serrare i dadi (3) con una chiave dinamome-
naggio superiore (12) con Loctite 242. trica.
Montare gli anelli OR (4) ed i dadi (3). Coppia di serraggio: 280v310 Nm
Obere (1) und untere Flanschen (2) montieren. An den Flanschen (1) und (2) das Werkzeug T20A
D Radgewinde (20) und oberes Zahnrad (12) mit Loctite D (oder T20B) anbringen und Muttern (3) mit einem
242 schmieren. MomentenschluÈssel fest ziehen.
O-Ringe (4) und Muttern (3) montieren. Anzugsmoment: 280v310 Nm.
a b
Montar las bridas superior (1) y inferior (2). Aplicar a las bridas (1) y (2) la herramienta T20A (o
ESP Pasar las roscas del pinon (20) y del engranaje ESP T20B) y apretar las tuercas (3) con una llave
superior (12) Loctite 242. dinamometrica.
Montar los segmentos OR (4) y las tuercas (3). Par de torsin : 280v310 Nm.
Monter les flasques supeÂrieures (1) et infeÂrieures (2). Appliquer aux flasques (1) et (2) l'outil T20A (ou T20B)
F Enduire les filetages du pignon (20) et de l'engrenage F et serrer les eÂcrous (3) au moyen d'une cleÂ dynamo-
supeÂrieur (12) avec du Loctite 242. meÂtrique.
Monter les bagues OR (4) et les eÂcrous (3). Couple de serrage: 280v310 Nm.
ITA ITA
D D
c d
ESP ESP
F F
ITA ITA
D D
e f
ESP ESP
F F
221
2 23
22
4
25
28
5 19
26
10
18
27
1 3 14
223
6
7
11 24
8 21 20
9 17
12
13
15
16
.%'!4)6%"2!+%$)3!33%-",).' &2%./.%'!4)6/3-/.4!'')/
.%'!4)6"2%-3%!"-/.4)%2%. &2%./.%'!4)6/$%3-/.4!*% &2%)..%'!4)&$%3!33%-",!'%
%DU
EDU A
'" '" B
!$*534).'4(%"2!+%3 3LINGTHEARMTOBEREMOVEDANDCONNECTITTOAHOIST
#ONNECTANEXTERNALPUMPTOTHEUNIONPIECEh0hOFTHENEGA ,OOSENANDREMOVESCREWS
TIVEBRAKEANDINTRODUCEAPRESSUREOF BARTOELIMINATETHE
PRESSUREOFTHE"ELLEVILLEWASHERS

'" C '" D
2EMOVEARMTOGETHERWITHBRAKESANDAXLESHAFTSLAYDOWNTHE 2EMOVETHEREVERSALSPRINGS FROMTHEPISTON
ARMVERTICALLY
2ELEASEPRESSURE

$OWN
'" E '" F
2EMOVETHEPINSCREWS GUIDINGTHEPISTON .OTEDOWNTHEIRORDEROFASSEMBLYANDREMOVETHECOUNTE
#!54)/.)FTHESCREWSARETOBEREPLACEDNOTEDOWNTHE RWASHER
DIFFERENTCOLOURSFORTHEDIFFERENTBRAKEGAPS
224
2%')342!:)/.%&2%.) )MBRAGAREILBRACCIODAASPORTAREECOLLEGARLOADUN
)4! #OLLEGAREALRACCORDOh0vDELFRENONEGATIVOUNA )4! MEZZODISOLLEVAMENTO
POMPAESTERNAEDIMMETTEREUNAPRESSIONEDI !LLENTAREEDASPORTARELEVITI
BARPERELIMINARELAPRESSIONEDELLEMOLLEATAZZA
"2%-3%.%).34%,,%. $ENABZUNEHMENDEN!RMANSCHLAGENUNDANEINE
$ !NSCHLUSTUECKh0vDER&EDERSPEICHERBREMSEAN $ (EBEZEUGBEFESTIGEN
EINEAEUERE0UMPEANSCHLIEENUND$RUCKBEI 3CHRAUBEN ABSCHRAUBEN
BAREINLASSENUM4ELLERFEDERN ZUENTLASTEN
A B
2%')342!#)/.&2%./3 !TARELEJEDESACARYCONECTARLOAUNMEDIODE
%30 #ONECTARALEMPALMEi0wDELFRENONEGATIVOUNA %30 LEVANTAMIENTO
POMPAESTERNAYINTRODUCIRUNAPRESIONDE BAR !mOJARYSACARLOSTORNILLOS
PARAELIMINARLAPRESIONDELOSMUELLESATAZA
2%',!'%$%3&2%).3
& "RANCHERAURACCORDh0vDUFREINN£GATIFUNEPOMPE & %LINGUERLEBRASA£NLEVERETBRANCHERCELUI CIUN
MOYENDERELEVAGE
EXTERNEETENVOYERUNEPRESSIONDE BARPOUR $ESSERRERETENLEVERLESVIS
£LIMINERLAPRESSIONDESRESSORTSBELLEVILLE
2IMUOVEREILBRACCIOCOMPLETODIFRENIESEMIASSI 2IMUOVERELEMOLLE DIRIENTRODELPISTONE

)4! DEPORREILBRACCIOINMODOVERTICALE )4!
2ILASCIARELAPRESSIONE
2EMOVERELEJECOMPLETODEFRENOSYSEMI EJES 2ÓCKZUGSFEDERN DES+OLBENS ABNEHMEN

$ COLOCARELEJEDEMANERAVERTICAL $
$RUCKABLASSEN
C %NLEVERLEBRASCOMPLETDEFREINSETDEMI ESSIEUX
D 2EMOVERLOSMUELLES DEVUELTADELPISTN
%30 D£POSERLEBRASENVERTICAL$EJARLAPRESION %30
$EN!RMSAMT"REMSENUND(ALBACHSENAB
NEHMENDEN!RMSENKRECHTABLEGEN,IB£RERLAPRES %NLEVERLESRESSORTS DERENTR£EDUPISTON
& SION &
2IMUOVERELEVITIAPERNO DIGUIDADELPISTONE !NNOTARELORDINEDIMONTAGGIOERIMUOVEREIL

)4! )4! CONTRODISCO
!44%.:)/.%3ELEVITIDEVONOESSERESOSTITUITE
ANNOTARELACOLORAZIONEDISTINTIVAPERIGIOCHIFRENO
$IE3TIFTSCHRAUBE ZUR+OLBENFÓHRUNG ENT !UFDIE2EIHENFOLGEDER-ONTAGEUNDACHTEN

$ FERNEN $ 'EGENSCHEIBE ABNEHMEN
!#(45.'3OLLENDIE3CHRAUBENAUSGEWECHSELT
WERDENAUFDIEFARBIGE+ENNZEICHNUNGFÓRDAS
"REMSENSPIELACHTEN
E F
2EMOVERLOSPERNOSROSCADOS DEGU¤ADEL !NOTARELORDENDEMONTAJEYREMOVERLOSCONTRADI
%30 PISTN %30 SCO
#5)$!$/3IHAYQUESUSTITUIRLOSPERNOSANOTAREL
COLORDISTINTIVOPARALOSJUEGOSDELFRENO
%NLEVERLESVISGOUJON DEGUIDAGEDU 0RENANTNOTEDELORDREDEMONTAGEENLEVERLESCON

& PISTON & TRE DISQUE
!44%.4)/.3ILESVISDOIVENTäTREREMPLAC£ES
PRENDRENOTEDELACOULEURDEDISTINCTIONDESJEUX
225
.%'!4)6%"2!+%$)3!33%-",).' &2%./.%'!4)6/3-/.4!'')/
.%'!4)6"2%-3%!"-/.4)%2%. &2%./.%'!4)6/$%3-/.4!*% &2%)..%'!4)&$%3!33%-",!'%
'" A '" B
,OOSETHESTUDSANDREMOVETWOOFTHEM 2EMOVETHESTUDS
'" C '" D
-OVETHECYLINDER OUTWARDSWHILE 2EMOVETHE"ELLEVILLEWASHERS ANDNOTEDOWNDIRECTIONOF
ASSEMBLY

'" E '" F
3LOWLYINTRODUCELOW PRESSURECOMPRESSEDAIRTHROUGHTHECON ./4%4HE/ RINGSMUSTBEREPLACEDEACHTIMETHEUNITIS
NECTIONMEMBERFORTHESERVICEBRAKEINORDERTOEXTRACTTHE DISASSEMBLED
PISTON
#!54)/.(OLDTHEPISTON BACKASITMAYBESUDDENLY
EJECTEDANDDAMAGED
226
!LLENTAREIPRIGIONIERIFERMA COPERCHIOERIMUOVERNE 2IMUOVEREIPRIGIONIERI
)4! )4!
$IE3TIFTSCHRAUBENLOCKERN 3TIFTSCHRAUBENABNEHMEN
$ 3TIFTSCHRAUBENABNEHMEN $
A B
!mOJARLOSPRISIONEROS 2EMOVERPRISIONEROS
%30 2EMOVERPRISIONEROS %30
$ESSERRERLESPRISONNIERS %NLEVERPRISONNIERS
& %NLEVERPRISONNIERS &
3POSTAREVERSOLESTERNOILCILINDRO 2IMUOVERELEMOLLE EDANNOTAREILSENSODIMON

)4! )4! TAGGIO
$EN:YLINDER NACHÛUENVERSTELLEN &EDERN ABNEHMENUNDDIE-ONTAGERICHTUNG

$ $ NOTIEREN
C $ESPLAZARHACIAELESTERIORELCILINDRO
D 2EMOVERLOSMUELLES YANOTARELSENTIDODEMON
%30 %30 TAJE
%NLEVERLERESSORT ETPRENDRENOTEDUSENSDESON
& $áPLACERLECYLINDRE VERSLEXTáRIEURENSOUTENANT & MONTAGE
LERESSORTBELLEVILLE
)MMETTERELENTAMENTEARIACOMPRESSAABASSAPRES ./4!'LIANELLI/2DEVONOESSERE
)4! SIONEATTRAVERSOLATTACCOPERILFRENODISERVIZIOPER )4! SOSTITUITIADOGNISMONTAGGIO
ESTRARREILPISTONE
!44%.:)/.%4RATTENEREILPISTONE CHEPUÒESSEREESPULSO
VELOCEMENTEEDESSERE
DANNEGGIATO
"%-%2+5.'$IE/ 2INGEMUESSENJEDESMAL
$ ,ANGSAM$RUCKLUFTBEI.IEDERDRUCKDURCHDEN!N
SCHLUDER&EDERSPEICHERBREMSEEINLASSENUMDEN $ AUSGEWECHSELTWERDENWENNDAS4EILZERLEGTWIRD
+LBEN HERAUSZUDRUCKEN
!#(45.'$EN+OLBEN HALTENDAERPLOETZLICHHERAUS
SPRINGENUNDBESCHADIGTWERDENKOENNTE
E F
%30 )NTRODUCIRLENTAMENTEAIRECOMPRIMIDAABAJAPRESIÒN
ATRAVESELEMPALMEPORELFRENONEGATIVOPARASACAR %30 ./4!,OSANILLOS/2DEBENDESER
SOBSTITUIDOSCADADESMONTAJE
ELPISTON
!4%.#)/.4ENERELPISTON QUEPUEDESEREXPULSORAPIDA
MENTEYESTROPEARSE
%NVOYERLENTEMENTDELAIRCOMPRIMáABASSEPRESSION 2%-!215%,ESANNEAUX/2).'SONTÜSUBSTITUER
& ÜTRAVERSLERACCORDDUFREINNáGATIFPOUREXTRAIRELE & ÜCHAQUEDáMONTAGE
PISTON
!44%.4)/.4ENIRLEPISTON QUIPOURRAITáTREEXPULSER
RAPIDEMENTETENDOMMAGER
227
.%'!4)6%"2!+%$)3!33%-",).' &2%./.%'!4)6/3-/.4!'')/
.%'!4)6"2%-3%!"-/.4)%2%. &2%./.%'!4)6/$%3-/.4!*% &2%)..%'!4)&$%3!33%-",!'%
'" A EDU '" B

.OTEDOWNTHEIRORDEROFASSEMBLYANDREMOVENEGATIVEPISTON 3LOWLYINTRODUCELOW PRESSURECOMPRESSEDAIRTHROUGHTHECON
SIGNTHEPOSITION NECTIONMEMBERFORTHENEGATIVEBRAKEINORDERTOEXTRACTTHE
PISTON
#!54)/.(OLDTHEPISTON BACKASITMAYBESUDDENLY
EJECTEDANDDAMAGED

'" C '" D
2EMOVEBRAKINGDISCS AND NOTINGDOWNDIRECTIONOF 2EMOVEBRAKINGDISCS ANDSHIMS NOTINGDOWNDIRECTION
ASSEMBLY OFASSEMBLY
./4%)FDISKSARENOTTOBEREPLACEDAVOIDCHANGINGTHEIR ./4%)FDISKSARENOTTOBEREPLACEDAVOIDCHANGINGTHEIR
POSITION POSITION
228
0RIMADIRIMUOVEREILPISTONEDELFRENONEGATIVO )MMETTERELENTAMENTEARIACOMPRESSAABASSAPRES
)4! SEGNARELAPOSIZIONEDIMONTAGGIO )4! SIONEATTRAVERSOLATTACCOPERILFRENONEGATIVOPER
ESTRARREILPISTONE
!44%.:)/.%4RATTENEREILPISTONE CHEPUÒESSEREESPULSO
VELOCEMENTEEDESSERE
DANNEGGIATO
!UFDIE"REMSEDER-ONTAGEUNDACHTEN ,ANGSAM$RUCKLUFTBEI.IEDERDRUCKDURCHDEN!N
$ 'EGENSCHEIBE ABNEHMEN $ SCHLUDER&EDERSPEICHERBREMSEEINLASSENUMDEN
+OLBEN HERAUSZUDRUCKEN
!#(45.'$EN+OLBEN HALTENDAERPLOETZLICHHERAUSSPRIN
GENUNDBESCHADIGTWERDENKOENNTE
A B
!NOTARELORDENDEMONTAJEYREMOVERLOSFRENO )NTRODUCIRLENTAMENTEAIRECOMPRIMIDAABAJAPRESIÒN
%30 %30 ATRAVESELEMPALMEPORELFRENONEGATIVOPARASACAR
ELPISTON
!4%.#)/.4ENERELPISTON QUEPUEDESEREXPULSORAPIDA
MENTEYESTROPEARSE
0RENANTNOTEDELORDREDEMONTAGEENLEVERLES %NVOYERLENTEMENTDELAIRCOMPRIMáABASSEPRESSION

& FREIN & ÜTRAVERSLERACCORDDUFREINNáGATIFPOUREXTRAIRELE
PISTON
!44%.4)/.4ENIRLEPISTON QUIPOURRAITáTREEXPULSERRAPI
DEMENTETENDOMMAGER
2IMUOVEREIDISCHIDIFRENATURA E 2IMUOVEREIDISCHIDIFRENATURA ESPESSORI

)4! ANNOTANDOLORDINEDIMONTAGGIO )4! ANNOTANDOLORDINEDIMONTAGGIO
./4!3EIDISCHINONDEVONOESSERESOSTITUITIEVI ./4!3EIDISCHINONDEVONOESSERESOSTITUITIEVITARE
TARELOSCAMBIODIPOSIZIONE LOSCAMBIODIPOSIZIONE
"REMSSCHEIBEN UND ABNEHMENUND "REMSSCHEIBEN UND3CHEIBE ABNEHMENUND

$ -ONTAGERICHTUNGNOTIEREN $ -ONTAGERICHTUNGNOTIEREN
"%-%2+5.'&ALLSDIE3CHEIBENAUSGEWECHSELT "%-%2+5.'&ALLSDIE3CHEIBENAUSGEWECHSELT
WERDENMUSSENIHRE0OSITIONNICHTVERWECHSELN WERDENMUSSENIHRE0OSITIONNICHTVERWECHSELN
C 2EMOVERLOSDISCOSDEFRENADURA Y ANOTANDO

D 2EMOVERLOSDISCOSDEFRENADURA YESPESORES
%30 ELORDENDEMONTAJE %30 ANOTANDOELORDENDEMONTAJE
./4!3ILOSDISCOSNODEBENDESERSOBSTITUIDOS ./4%3ILOSDISCOSNODEBENDESERSOBSTITUI
EVITARELCAMBIODEPOSSICIÒN DOSEVITARELCAMBIODEPOSSICIÒN
%NLEVERLESDISQUESDEFREINAGE ET ETPRENDRE %NLEVERLESDISQUESDEFREINAGE ETCALES

& NOTEDELORDREDUMONTAGE & ETPRENDRENOTEDELORDREDUMONTAGE
2%-!215%3ILESDISQUESDOIVENT£TRESUBSTITU£S 2%-!215%3ILESDISQUESDOIVENT£TRESUBSTI
£VITERD£CHANGERLEURPOSITION TU£S£VITERD£CHANGERLEURPOSITION
229
.%'!4)6%"2!+%!33%-",).' &2%./.%'!4)6/-/.4!'')/
.%'!4)6"2%-3%-/.4)%2%. &2%./.%'!4)6/-/.4!*% &2%)..%'!4)&!33%-",!'%
9"2!+%'!0 8 6 3
9MMMMMMMM
MM

'" E '" F
&IT/ RINGS ONTOTHEPISTON 5SINGAPLASTICHAMMERRAMTHEPISTON INTOTHECYLINDER
,UBRICATETHEPISTONANDTHE/ RINGSANDINSTALLTHEUNITINTOTHE ./4%,IGHTLYHAMMERALLAROUNDTHEEDGEINANALTERNATE
CYLINDER SEQUENCE
230
-ONTARESULPISTONE GLIANELLI/2 5TILIZZANDOUNMAZZUOLOINMATERIALEPLASTICOINSE
)4! )4! RIREAFONDOILPISTONE NELCILINDRO
,UBRIlCAREILPISTONEEGLIANELLI/2EMONTAREIL ./4!"ATTERELEGGERICOLPIDISTRIBUITIINMODO
GRUPPONELCILINDRO ALTERNATOSUTUTTALACIRCONFERENZA
!UFDEN+OLBEN DIE/ 2INGE -ITEINEM'UMMIHAMMERDEN+OLBEN INDEN

$ MONTIEREN $ :YLINDER BISZUM!NSCHLAGEINSCHLAGEN
$EN+OLBENUNDDIE/ 2INGESCHMIERENUNDDAS "%-%2+5.'$EN+OLBENABWECHSELNDRUNDUM
!GGREGATINDEN:YLINDER MONTIEREN DIEGESAMTE+REISLINIELEICHTSCHLAGEN
E F
-ONTARSOBREELPISTON LOSANILLOS 5TILIZANDOUNMARTILLODEMATERIAPLASTICAINTRODUCIRA
%30 /2 %30 FONDOELPISTON ENELCILINDRO
,UBRIlCARELPISTONYLOSANILLOS/2YMONTARELGRUPO ./4!0EGARLIGEROSGOLPESDISTRIBUIDOSDEMANERA
ENLOSCILINDROS ALTERNADASOBRETODALACIRCONFERENCIA
-ONTERSURLEPISTON LESANNEAUX/2).' !LAIDEDUNMAILLETENMATIE¬REPLASTIQUEINTRODUIRE

& & LEPISTON A¬FONDDANSLECYLINDRE
,UBRIlERLEPISTONETLESANNEAUX/2).'PUIS 2%-!215%$ONNERDELE¸GERSCOUPSRE¸GULIERS
MONTERLEGROUPEDANSLECYLINDRE TOUTAUTOURDELACIRCONFE¸RENCE
231
.%'!4)6%"2!+%!33%-",).' &2%./.%'!4)6/-/.4!'')/
.%'!4)6"2%-3%-/.4)%2%. &2%./.%'!4)6/-/.4!*% &2%)..%'!4)&!33%-",!'%

'" A '" B
&IT/ RINGS AND ONTOTHEPISTON
,UBRICATETHEPISTONANDTHE/ RINGSANDINSTALLTHEUNITINTOTHE
CYLINDER

'" C '" D
5SINGAPLASTICHAMMERRAMTHEPISTON INTOTHECYLINDER
./4%,IGHTLYHAMMERALLAROUNDTHEEDGEINANALTERNATE
SEQUENCE
*UHDVH
*UHDVH
'" E '" F
0OSITIONTHE"ELLEVILLEWASHERS ANDENGAGETHECYLINDER 0OSITIONTHE"ELLEVILLEWASHERS ANDENGAGETHECYLINDER
./4%#HECKTHESENSEOFDIRECTIONOFWASHERS ANDRELATIVE ./4%#HECKTHESENSEOFDIRECTIONOFWASHERS ANDRELATIVE
CENTRING CENTRING
232
-ONTARESULPISTONE GLIANELLI/2 E
)4! ,UBRIlCAREILPISTONEEGLIANELLI/2EMONTAREIL
GRUPPONELCILINDRO
!UFDEN+OLBEN DIE/ 2INGE UND

$ MONTIEREN
$EN+OLBENUNDDIE/ 2INGESCHMIERENUNDDAS
!GGREGATINDEN:YLINDER MONTIEREN
A -ONTARSOBREELPISTON LOSANILLOS/2 Y

%30 ,UBRIlCARELPISTONYLOSANILLOS/2YMONTARELGRUPO
ENLOSCILINDROS
-ONTERSURLEPISTON LESANNEAUX/2).' ET

&
,UBRIlERLEPISTONETLESANNEAUX/2).'PUIS
MONTERLEGROUPEDANSLECYLINDRE
5TILIZZANDOUNMAZZUOLOINMATERIALEPLASTICOINSE
)4! RIREAFONDOILPISTONE NELCILINDRO
./4!"ATTERELEGGERICOLPIDISTRIBUITIINMODO
ALTERNATOSUTUTTALACIRCONFERENZA
-ITEINEM'UMMIHAMMERDEN+OLBEN INDEN
$ :YLINDER BISZUM!NSCHLAGEINSCHLAGEN
"%-%2+5.'$EN+OLBENABWECHSELNDRUNDUM
DIEGESAMTE+REISLINIELEICHTSCHLAGEN
C 5TILIZANDOUNMARTILLODEMATERIAPLASTICAINTRODUCIRA
%30 FONDOELPISTON ENELCILINDRO
./4!0EGARLIGEROSGOLPESDISTRIBUIDOSDEMANERA
ALTERNADASOBRETODALACIRCONFERENCIA
& !LAIDEDUNMAILLETENMATI£REPLASTIQUEINTRODUIRELE

PISTON ÜFONDDANSLECYLINDRE
2%-!215%$ONNERDEL£GERSCOUPSRáGULIERSTOUT
AUTOURDELACIRCONF£RENCE
0OSIZIONARELEMOLLEATAZZA EMANDAREINBATTUTA 0OSIZIONARELEMOLLEATAZZA EMANDAREINBATTUTA

)4! ILCILINDRO )4! ILCILINDRO
./4!#ONTROLLAREILSENSODIORIENTAMENTODELLE ./4!#ONTROLLAREILSENSODIORIENTAMENTODELLE
MOLLEATAZZA ELALOROCENTRATURA MOLLEATAZZA ELALOROCENTRATURA
4ELLERFEDERN POSITIONIERENUNDDEN:YLINDER BIS 4ELLERFEDERN POSITIONIERENUNDDEN:YLINDER BIS

$ ZUM!NSCHLAGEINSETZEN $ ZUM!NSCHLAGEINSETZEN
"%-%2+5.'/RIENTIERUNGDER4ELLERFEDERN UND "%-%2+5.'/RIENTIERUNGDER4ELLERFEDERN UND
IHRE:ENTRIERUNGKONTROLLIEREN IHRE:ENTRIERUNGKONTROLLIEREN
E F
#OLOCARLOSMUELLESATAZA YMANDARATOPEEL #OLOCARLOSMUELLESATAZA YMANDARATOPEEL
%30 CILINDRO %30 CILINDRO
./4!#ONTROLARELSENTIDODEORIENTAMIENTODELOS ./4!#ONTROLARELSENTIDODEORIENTAMIENTODELOS
MUELLESATAZA YSUCENTRAJE MUELLESATAZA YSUCENTRAJE
0OSITIONNERLESRESSORTSBELLEVILLE ETINS£RERÜFOND 0OSITIONNERLESRESSORTSBELLEVILLE ETINS£RERÜFOND

& LECYLINDRE & LECYLINDRE
2%-!215%#ONTRÒLERLORIENTATIONDESRESSORTS 2%-!215%#ONTRÒLERLORIENTATIONDESRESSORTSBEL
BELLEVILLE ETLEURCENTRAGE LEVILLE ETLEURCENTRAGE
233
.%'!4)6%"2!+%!33%-",).' &2%./.%'!4)6/-/.4!'')/
.%'!4)6"2%-3%-/.4)%2%. &2%./.%'!4)6/-/.4!*% &2%)..%'!4)&!33%-",!'%
'" A '" B
#HECKINTEGRITYANDPOSITIONOFTHECYLINDERS/ RING 0OSITIONTHE"ELLEVILLEWASHERS ANDENGAGETHECYLINDER
./4%#HECKTHESENSEOFDIRECTIONOFWASHERS ANDRELATIVE
CENTRING
1P
'" C '" D
,OCKTHECYLINDER 4IGHTENINGTHESTUDSWITHADYNAMOMETRICWRENCHSETTOATORQUE
OFÕ.M
2LOÀOOLQJ
0
0
%DU
'" E '" F
#ONNECTANEXTERNALPUMPTOTHENEGATIVEBRAKEANDINTRODUCE
PRESSURETO BAR
234
6ERIlCARELINTEGRITÜEDILPOSIZIONAMENTODELLANELLO 0OSIZIONARELEMOLLEATAZZA EMANDAREINBATTUTA
)4! /2 )4! ILCILINDRO
./4!#ONTROLLAREILSENSODIORIENTAMENTODELLE
MOLLEATAZZA ELALOROCENTRATURA
:USTANDUNDDIE0OSITIONDES/ 2INGES 4ELLERFEDERN POSITIONIERENUNDDEN:YLINDER BIS

$ KONTROLLIEREN $ ZUM!NSCHLAGEINSETZEN
"%-%2+5.'/RIENTIERUNGDER4ELLERFEDERN UND
IHRE:ENTRIERUNGKONTROLLIEREN
A B
!VERIGUARLAINTEGRIDADYLACOLOCACIÒNDELANILLO/2 #OLOCARLOSMUELLESATAZA YMANDARATOPEEL
%30 %30 CILINDRO
./4!#ONTROLARELSENTIDODEORIENTAMIENTODELOS
MUELLESATAZA YSUCENTRAJE
6£RIlERLEBON£TATETLEPOSITIONNEMENTDELANNEAU 0OSITIONNERLESRESSORTSBELLEVILLE ETINS£RERÜFOND

& /2).' & LECYLINDRE
2%-!215%#ONTRÒLERLORIENTATIONDESRESSORTS
BELLEVILLE ETLEURCENTRAGE
"LOCCAREILCILINDRO "LOCCAREILCILINDROCONLEVITISERRATECONCHIAVEDINA
)4! )4! MOMETRICAADUNCOPPIADI .M
$EN:YLINDERBLOCKIEREN $EN:YLINDERMITDEN3CHRAUBENMITEINEM
$ $ $YNAMOMETERUNDEINEM!NZUGSMOMENTVON
.MBLOCKIEREN
C "LOQUEARELCILINDRO
D "LOQUEARELCILINDROCONLOSTORNILLOSAPRETADOSCON
%30 %30 LLAVEDINAMOMETRICAAUNPARDE .M
"LOQUERLECYLINDRE "LOQUERLECYLINDREAVECLESVISSERRERÜLAIDEDELA

& &
CL£DYNAMOM£TRIQUEÜUNCOUPLEDE .M
#OLLEGAREALRACCORDODELFRENONEGATIVOUNAPOMPA
)4! ESTERNAEDIMMETTEREUNAPRESSIONEDI BAR
!NDAS!NSCHLÓSTÓCKDER&EDERSPEICHERBREMSEEINE
$ ÛUERE0UMPESCHLIEÓNUND$RUCKBEI BAR
EINLASSEN
F
#ONECTARALEMPALMEDELFRENONEGATIVOUNA
%30 POMPAEXTERNAYINTRODUCIRPRESIONDE BAR
"RANCHERAURACCORDDUFREINN£GATIFUNEPOMPE
& EXTERNEETENVOYERUNEPRESSIONDE BAR
235
.%'!4)6%"2!+%!33%-",).' &2%./.%'!4)6/-/.4!'')/
.%'!4)6"2%-3%-/.4)%2%. &2%./.%'!4)6/-/.4!*% &2%)..%'!4)&!33%-",!'%

'" A '" B
)NSERTTHESTROKEAUTOMATICREGULATIONSPRINGS PLACETHEMIN )NSERTTHEINTERMEDIATEDISK
LINEWITHTHEPISTON
1P
,OCTITE

'" C '" D
&ITTHEREVERSALSPRINGS ONTHEPISTON !PPLY,/#4)4%TOTHETHREADOFTHEPISTIONADJUSTMENTNUT
4IGHTENWITHTORQUEWRENCHSETTINGOF .M
1P
9 ,OCTITE
9
9"2!+%'!0
'" E '" F
9BRAKEGAP &ITTHEPINSCREWSMAKINGSURETHATTHEYAREALLOFTHESAME
MMMMMMMM
DEPENDINgONAXLECONlGURATION COLOUR
!PPLY,OCTITETOTHETHREAD
4ORQUEWRENCHSETTINGÕ.M
236
)NSERIREAlLODELPISTONE LEMOLLEPER )NSERIREILDISCOINTERMEDIODELPISTONE
)4! LAUTOREGOLAZIONEDELLACORSA )4!
$EN+OLBEN UNDDIE&EDERN ZUR3ELBSTREGE -ITTLERE3CHEIBEMONTIEREN

$ LUNGDES(UBSGENAUEINSETZEN $
A B
)NTRODUCIRARASDELPISTÒN LOSMUELLES PARA -ONTARELDISCOINTERMEDIO
%30 LAAUTORREGULACIÒNDELACARRERA %30
)NTRODUIREAUlLDUBORDDUPISTON LESRESSORTS -ONTERLEDISQUE)NTERM£DIAIRE

& POURLAUTOR£GULATIONDELACOURSE &
-ONTARELEMOLLE DIRITORNODELPISTONE 3PALMARELAlLETTATURACON,/#4)4%SULLA

)4! )4! VITERITORNOPISTONE3ERRAREACOPPIADISERRAGGIO
.M
$IE2ÓCKZUGSFEDERN DES+OLBENS MON !UFDAS'EWINDEDER:YLINDER 2ÓCKHOLMUTTER,/#

$ TIEREN $ 4)4%AUFTRAGEN
-IT .M!NZUGSMOMENTANZIEHEN
C -ONTARLOSMUELLES DERETORNODELPISTN

D 5NTARLAROSCADELTORNILLODERETORNODELPISTÒNCON
%30 %30 ,/#4)4%YAPRETARAPARDETORSION .M
-ONTERLESRESSORTS DERETOURDUPISTON %NDUIRELElLETAGEAVEC,OCTITESRLAVISDE

& & RETOURPISTON3ERRERACOUPLE .M
-ONTARELEVITIAPERNOCONTROLLANDOCHESIANOTUTTE
)4! DELLOSTESSOCOLORE
3PALMARELAlLETTATURECON,OCTITE
#OPPIADISERRAGGIO
$IE3TIFTSCHRAUBENEINSETZEN$IESEMUáSSENALLE
$ GLEICHFARBIGSEIN
$AS'EWINDEMIT,OCTITESCHMIEREN
!NZUGSMOMENT.M
F
-ONTARLOSPERNOSROSCADOSCONTROLANDOQUESEAN
%30 TODOSDELMISMOCOLOR
0ASARENLAROSCA,OCTITE
0ARDETORSIÒN.M
-ONTERLESVISÜTOURILLONENCONTRÒLANTSIELLESSONT
& TOUTESDEMAM£MECOULEUR
%NDUIRELElLETAGEDE,OCTITE
#OUPLEDESERRAGE.M
237
.%'!4)6%"2!+%!33%-",).' &2%./.%'!4)6/-/.4!'')/
.%'!4)6"2%-3%-/.4)%2%. &2%./.%'!4)6/-/.4!*% &2%)..%'!4)&!33%-",!'%
.J
8 6
8 6
'" A '" B
4AKETHEMEASUREFROMTHESURFACEOFTHEINTERMEDIATEDISKTO 0UTTHEBRAKEDISCPACKINCLUDINGTHESHIMUNDERAPRESSLOAD
THECOVERSEALINGSURFACEWITHBAROFPRESSUREINTRODUCED WITHKGANDTAKETHEMEASUREh6v
%8!-0,%MM %8!-0,%6MM
MM
3
!RMlXQUOTEMM 3MM XYV

'" C '" D
!RMlXQUOTEMM 3MM XYV 4HICKNESSOFSHIMSTOINSERTUNDER
THESHIMWASHER
3
'" E
238
#ONPRESSIONEINSERITABARRILEVARELAMISURATRA 0OSIZIONAREILPACCOFRENICOMPLETODIDISTANZIALESOTTO
)4! DISCOINTERMEDIOECOPERCHIO )4! LAPRESSA
%3%-0)/MM CARICARECON+GERILEVARELAMISURAh6v
%3%-0)/6MM
"EIANGELEGTEM$RUCKVONBARDAS-AVONDER $AS"REMSSCHEIBENPAKETKOMPLETTMIT$ISTANZSTÓCK

$ :WISCHENSCHEIBEZUR$ECKELmÛCHEERMITTELN $ UNTEREINE0RESSELEGENMITKGBELASTENUND
DAS-Ah6vERMITTELN
%8!-0,%6MM
A B
#ONLAPRESIONA"ARMEDIRLADISTANCIAENREEL 0ONERELPAQUETEDEFRENOSDISCOS COMPLETOCONEL
%30 DISCOINTERMEDIOYLATAPA %30 DISTANCIAL$EBAJOLAPRENSACARGARCON+GE
MEDIRLADISTANCA6
%JEMPLO6MM
%NDONNANTPRESSUREDE"ARRELEVERLAMESURE 0OSITIONNERLESABOTDESFREINSAVáCLAENTRETOISE
& ENRELEmASQUEINTERMEDIAIREETCOUVERCLE & SOUSLAPRESSE
%XAMPLEMM
1UOTAlSSAPERILBRACCIOMM 3MM XYV 3PESSORIDAINSERIRESOTTO

)4! )4! ILDISTANZIALE
&ESTES-AMM 3MM XYV -ADER:WISCHENLEGS

$ $ CHEIBENDIEUNTERDIE$ISTANZSCHEIBEGELEGTWERDEN
MÓSSEN
C 0ROFUNDIDADlJAPARAELBRAZOMM
D 3MM XYV %SPESORESPARAPONER
%30 %30 DEBAJODELDISTANCIAL
-ESURElXPOULEBRASMM 3MM XYV áPAISSEURSDEáPOSITION

& & SOUSLAENTRETOISE
239
.%'!4)6%"2!+%!33%-",).' &2%./.%'!4)6/-/.4!'')/
.%'!4)6"2%-3%-/.4)%2%. &2%./.%'!4)6/-/.4!*% &2%)..%'!4)&!33%-",!'%
"

,AST
&IRST
'" A '" B
3LIGHTLYLUBRICATETHEBRAKINGDISKS ANDlTTHEMINTHEARM
FOLLOWINGTHECORRECTSEQUENCEORIENTTHEMSOTHATTHEOIL
CIRCULATIONHOLESANDTHEMARKSh"vAREPERFECTLYLINEDUP
./4%7HENINSTALLINGTHESTEELDISCSTHESLOTCORRESPONDINGTO
THEOILLEVELCAPSHOULDALWAYSBEKEPTFREE
!
"
'" C '" D
#HECKINTEGRITYANDPOSITIONOFTHEARMS/ RINGINSTALLTHE 4ORQUEWRENCHSETTING
COMPLETEARM !.M
./4%4OASSISTAXLESHAFTCENTRINGSLIGHTLYMOVETHEWHEELHUB ".M
./4%4IGHTENUSINGTHECRISS CROSSMETHOD
240
,UBRIlCARELEGGERMENTEIDISCHIDIFRENATURA E
)4! MONTARLINELLACORONA
CONLAGIUSTASEQUENZAORIENTATIINMODOCHEIFORI
OVALI@"SIANOPERFETTAMENTEALLINEATI

$IE"REMSSCHEIBEN LEICHTSCHMIERENUNDINDER
$ RICHTIGEN2EIHENFOLGEAUFDEN!RMMONTIEREN$ABEI
MÂSSENSIESOORIENTIERTSEINDA/£LLEITUNGSLÒCHER
GENAUMITDEN+ENNZEICHNUNGENh"vÂBEREINSTIMMEN
"%-%2+5.'"EIDER-ONTAGEDER3TAHLSCHEIBENDIEDEM/áL
FÂLLSTOPFENENTSPRICHTFREILASSEN
A ,UBRICARLIGERAMENTELOSDISCOSDEFRENADO Y
%30 MONTARLOSENELBRAZOCONLASECUENCIAEXACTA
ORIENTADOSDEMANERAQUELOSORIlCIOSDECIRCULACIÒN
DELACEITEYLASMARCASh"vESTáNPERFECTAMENTEALINEADOS
./4!,OSDISCOSENACERODEBENDESERASEMBLADOSDEJANDO
LIBREELNICHOCORRESPONDIENTEALATAPADENIVELACEITE
,UBRIlERLáGáREMENTLESDISQUESDEFREINAGE PUIS
& MONTERCEUX CIDANSLEBRASÜLAJUSTES£QUENCE
ORIENT£SDETELLESORTEÜCEQUELESTROUSDECIRCULATION
DELHUILEETCEUXMARQU£Sh"vSOIENTPARFAITEMENTALIGN£S
./4%,ESDISQUESENACIERDOIVENT£TREMONT£SSANSD£RANGER
LARAINUREDUBOUCHONDUNIVEAUDELHUILE
6ERIlCARELINTEGRITÜEDILPOSIZIONAMENTODELLANELLO #OPPIADISERRAGGIO
)4! /2DELBRACCIOINSTALLAREILBRACCIOCOMPLETO )4! !.M
./4!0ERAGEVOLARELACENTRATURADELSEMIASSE ".M
MUOVERELENTAMENTEILMOZZOPORTARUOTA ./4!3ERRARECONILMETODOINCROCIATO
!M!RMDEN:USTANDUNDDIE0OSITIONDES/ 2INGES !NZUGSMOMENT

$ KONTROLLIERENDENGESAMTEN!RMINSTALLIEREN $ !.M
"%-%2+5.'5MDIE(ALBACHSELEICHTERZENTRIEREN ".M
ZUKNNENDIE2ADHALTERNABEETWASBEWEGEN "%-%2+5.')M+REUZFESTDREHEN
C !VERIGUARLAINTEGRIDADYLACOLOCACIÒNDELANILLO/2
D 0ARDESERRAJE
%30 DELEJECOLOCARELEJECOMPLETO %30 !.M
./4!0ARAFACILITARELCENTRAJEDELSEMI EJEMOVER ".M
LENTAMENTEELCUBOPORTA RUEDA ./4!!PRETARDEMANERACRUZADA
6£RIlERLEBON£TATETLEPOSITIONNEMENTDELANNEAU #OUPLEDESERRAGE
& /2).'DUBRASINSTALLERLEBRASCOMPLET & !.M
2%-!215%!lNDERENDREPLUSAIS£LECENTRAGEDU ".M
DEMI ESSIEUBOUGERLENTEMENTLEMOYEUPORTE ROUE 2%-!215%3ERRERAVECLAM£HODECROISE
241
COPIES.
Overview inclination sensors
with CAN/CANopen interface
Characteristics:
1/2-dimensional inclination sensors

High resolution and accuracy
Comfortable CAN/CANopen interface
High sampling rate and bandwidth
Programmable vibration suppression
– configurable critical frequency (0.3..25 Hz)
Functions CAN:
– Angle request and cyclical output
Figure similarly
– Comfortable setting of parameters
Functions CANopen:
– a TPDO (RTR, cyclic, event-controlled,
– synchronised)
– SYNC Consumer (synchronised trans-
mission of the TPDO after receiving a
SYNC message)
Sensors
– EMCY Producer (exceeding of a limit value,
temperature monitoring in the device)
– Failure monitoring via heartbeat or
nodeguarding / lifeguarding Figure similarly
optional available as robust, simply mountable aluminium
housing or high impact strength plastic housing
suitable for industrial use:
– Temperature range: -40 °C up to +80 °C
– degree of protection: IP65/67
The inclination sensors are available either with a second connection to a CAN bus (loopthroughed,
socket) or with four freely configurable, potential-free switching outputs and can also be used as
transducer in control systems. The compact and robust design makes the sensor a suitable angle
measurement device in rough surroundings for different applications in industry and automotive
technology. A simple configuration and putting into operation is possible by the standardised CAN
open interface. All parameters are stored in the internal permanent memory.
Applications:
Industry automation
Agricultural and forestry machines
Utility vehicles
Crane and hoisting technology
GEMAC - Gesellschaft für Mikro- Zwickauer Straße 227 Tel: +49 371 3377-0 www.gemac-chemnitz.de
elektronikanwendung Chemnitz mbH D-09116 Chemnitz Fax: +49 371 3377-272 info@gemac-chemnitz.de
Overview:
Number of axes Product type Angle Article number
Aluminium housing Plastic housing

CAN
1-dimensional IS1D 00 P13 360° PR-23000-01 PR-23040-00
2-dimensional IS2D 10 P03 ±10° PR-23001-01 PR-23041-00
IS2D 45 P03 ±45° PR-23002-01 PR-23042-00
IS2D 60 P03 ±60° PR-23003-01 PR-23043-00
CAN, with a second connection to a CAN bus
IS2D 45 P03 ±45° - PR-23042-30
IS2D 60 P03 ±60° PR-23012-01 PR-23043-30
CAN, with for switching outputs
IS2D 45 P04 ±45° PR-23201-01 PR-23242-00
IS2D 60 P04 ±60° PR-23202-01 PR-23243-00
CANopen
IS2D 45 P06 ±45° PR-23102-01 PR-23142-00
IS2D 60 P06 ±60° PR-23103-01 PR-23143-00
CANopen, with a second connection to a CAN bus
1-dimensional IS1D 00 P15 360° - PR-23140-30
2-dimensional IS2D 10 P06 ±10° - PR-23141-30
IS2D 45 P06 ±45° - PR-23142-30
IS2D 60 P06 ±60° - PR-23143-30
CANopen, with for switching outputs
IS2D 45 P07 ±45° PR-23301-01 PR-23342-00
IS2D 60 P07 ±60° PR-23302-01 PR-23343-00
 Copyright 2008 GEMAC mbH · Document: 23xxx-DB-1-4-E-ISxDxxPxx · Date: 27.08.2008

Subject to change without notice · Any kind of duplication, reprocessing and translation of this document as well as excerpts from it
require the written permission of GEMAC mbH.
GEMAC mbH Zwickauer Straße 227 Phone: +49 371 3377-0 eMail: info@gemac-chemnitz.de
Page: 2/2 D-09116 Chemnitz Fax: +49 371 3377-272 Web: www.gemac-chemnitz.de
2D Inclination Sensors with
CAN Bus Interface
Figure similarly
User Manual
IS2D 10 P03 / P04 (±10°)
IS2D 45 P03 / P04 (±45°)
IS2D 60 P03 / P04 (±60°)
Version: 2.2
th
Date: August 25 2006
GEMAC mbH · Zwickauer Straße 227 · 09116 Chemnitz · Germany

Telephone: (+49) (0)371 / 33 77 – 0 · Telefax: (+49) (0)371 / 33 77 – 272
E-Mail: info@gemac-chemnitz.de · Web: www.gemac-chemnitz.de
User Manual IS2D XX P03 (±10° / ±45° / ±60°) Revision History
Revision History
Date Revision Changes
2003-11-10 0 - First version
2004-03-17 1 - Integration of IS2D 60 P03
- Extension of the CAN protocol
2004-03-24 2 - Integration of IS2D xx P04
- Documentation of the switching outputs
2004-03-26 3 - Correction of cyclic interval in section “Floating Averaging“
- Various supplementation's
2004-04-27 4 - Function description of the LED
2004-04-30 5 - Various changes
2004-10-08 6 - Various changes and error correction
2005-06-06 7 - Various changes
Version 2
2005-09-28 0 - Adaptation of technical data to new sensor
- documentation of functional enhancement (digital filter)
2006-03-02 1 - Correction of layout
2006-08-25 2 - Correction of ordering information, technical data extended
© Copyright 2006 GEMAC mbH

This document is subject to change without notice.
We constantly work to further develop of our products. We reserve any changes of the scope of delivery in
shape, equipment and technology for ourselves. No claims can be made from the details, illustrations and de-
scriptions in this documents.
Any kind of duplication, reprocessing and translation of this document as well as excerpts from it require the
written permission of GEMAC mbH.
All rights according to the copyright remain explicitly reserved for GEMAC mbH.
Preliminary User Manual · Document: 23001-HB-2-2-E-IS1DxxP03-P04 · Page: 2/20

Subject to change without notice · © 2006 GEMAC mbH
User Manual IS2D XX P03 (±10° / ±45° / ±60°) Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................5
1.1 Characteristics..........................................................................................................................................5
1.2 Applications..............................................................................................................................................5
2 Technical Data................................................................................................................................................6
3 Mounting.........................................................................................................................................................7
3.1 Position of Drilling Holes..........................................................................................................................7
3.2 Definition of the Axes...............................................................................................................................7
4 Connection......................................................................................................................................................8
4.1 Connector Pin Out....................................................................................................................................8
4.1.1 4.1.1 CAN Bus Connection..............................................................................................................8
4.1.2 4.1.2 Connection of Switching Output (Type IS2D xx P04 only)......................................................8
4.2 Bus-Termination Resistor........................................................................................................................8
5 Software Description.....................................................................................................................................9
5.1 Format of the CAN Frames......................................................................................................................9
5.1.1 Data Part in the CAN Frame............................................................................................................9
5.1.2 Status Byte (STATUS).....................................................................................................................9
5.2 Boot Up Message...................................................................................................................................10
5.3 Position Request Mode..........................................................................................................................11
5.4 Cyclic Mode............................................................................................................................................11
5.4.1 Operation Procedure......................................................................................................................11
5.4.2 Settings..........................................................................................................................................12
5.5 Set Parameter Mode..............................................................................................................................12
5.5.1 Set Parameter Frame....................................................................................................................12
5.5.2 Reply Parameter Frames...............................................................................................................16
5.6 Digital Filter.............................................................................................................................................16
5.7 Use of the Switching Outputs (Type IS2D xx P04 only).........................................................................17
5.7.1 5.8.1 Operational Principle.............................................................................................................17
5.7.2 Settings..........................................................................................................................................17
5.8 Status Display of the Two-Coloured LED...............................................................................................18
5.9 Default Device Parameters....................................................................................................................19
6 Ordering Information...................................................................................................................................20

User Manual IS2D XX P03 (±10° / ±45° / ±60°) List of Tables
List of Tables
Table 1: Technical Data .................................................................................................................................... 6
Table 2: Format of the CAN Frames ................................................................................................................. 9
Table 3: Status Byte .......................................................................................................................................... 9
Table 4: “Boot Up” Message ........................................................................................................................... 10
Table 5: Request frame: Request Position Update ID (default ID = 100h) ..................................................... 11
Table 6: Reply frame: Reply Position Update ID (default ID = 101h) .............................................................. 11
Table 7: Cyclic position frame: Cyclic Position Update ID (default ID = 201h) ............................................... 11
Table 8: Supported FSC and Parameters of the Set Parameter Frames ....................................................... 13
Table 9: CAN Identifier .................................................................................................................................. 14
Table 10: Configuration byte of a switching output ....................................................................................... 14
Table 11: Restoration of Default Device Parameters ...................................................................................... 15
Table 12: Function Codes and Parameters of the Reply Parameter Frames ................................................. 16
Table 13: Default Settings of the Device Parameters ..................................................................................... 19
Table 14: Ordering Information ....................................................................................................................... 20

User Manual IS2D XX P03 (±10° / ±45° / ±60°) 1 Overview
1 Overview
1.1 Characteristics
 2-dimensional inclination sensors with measure-

ment range: ±10° / ±45° / ±60°
 High resolution and accuracy
 Comfortable CAN Bus interface:
 Freely selectable IDs
Figure similarly
 Baud rates from 10 kBit/s to 1 MBit/s
 High sampling rate and bandwidth
 Programmable vibration suppression
 Functions:
 Position request and cyclical output
 Comfortable setting of parameters
 Configurable cut-off frequency (digital filter)
 Four freely configurable, potential-free switching outputs (type IS2D xx P04 only)
 Robust, simply mountable aluminium housing
 Suitable for industrial use:
 Temperature range: -40°C to +80°C
 Degree of protection: IP65/67
The 2-dimensional inclination sensors IS2D xx P03 / P04 enable, according to the type, the measurement of
inclinations in the ranges ±10°, ±45° or ±60°. To guarantee a high accuracy each sensor is calibrated fac-
tory-made at 25 °C.
The inclination sensor IS2D xx P04 includes four freely configurable, potential-free switching outputs and can
also be used as transducer in control systems without connection to the CAN Bus.
The compact and robust design makes the sensor a suitable angle measurement device in rough surround-
ings for different applications in industry and vehicle technology. A simple configuration and putting into op-
eration is possible by the standardised CAN Bus interface. All parameters are saved in the internal perma-
nent memory.
1.2 Applications
 Industry automation
 Agricultural and forestry machines
 Utility vehicles
 Crane and hoisting technology

User Manual IS2D XX P03 (±10° / ±45° / ±60°) 2 Technical Data
2 Technical Data
General Parameters
Measurement axes 2 (X/Y)
Measurement range ±10° / ±45° / ±60°
Resolution 0,05° / 0,1° / 0,1°
Calibration accuracy (at 25° C) ±0.1° (zero point and accumulated value)
Nonlinearity max. ±0.2° / ±0.3° / ±0.4°
Temperature coefficient (zero point) typ. ±0,008 °/K
Cut-Off frequency typ. 20 Hz, 2nd order (without digital filter) / 0,3 ... 25 Hz, 8th order (with digital filter)
Sampling rate 100 s-1
Operating temperature -40 °C bis +80 °C
Characteristics
Interface CAN 2.0 A and B (11- and 29-Bit-ID) according ISO 11898-2
Data rates 10; 20; 50; 62,5; 100; 125; 250; 500; 800 kBit/s; 1 MBit/s
Functions Position request, cyclical transmission, setting of parameters, digital filter (butterworth
lowpass , 8th order), output of the device’s internal temperature (±2.0 K accuracy)
Four switching outputs** PhotoMOS relais, synchronically switched
Display of function Two-colour LED (green / red)
Electrical Parameters
Supply voltage 10 bis 30 V DC
Current consumption (IS2D 00 P13 / P14) 105 mA to 40 mA / 150 mA to 60 mA
Current carrying capacity of the 0,5 A, max. 30 V DC, short-circuit-proof
switching outputs**
Mechanical Parameters
Connector CAN Sensor connector 5-pole (M12)
Connector switching outputs** Sensor connector 8-pole (M12)
Degree of protection IP65/67
Mechanical shock max. 3,500 g
Dimensions 58 mm x 90 mm x 31 mm
Mass ca. 160 g
Table 1: Technical Data

** type IS2D xx P04 only

User Manual IS2D XX P03 (±10° / ±45° / ±60°) 3 Mounting
3 Mounting
3.1 Position of Drilling Holes
The four drilling holes to mount the sensor (Figure 1) are situated in the basic plate of the inclination sensor.
The additional M5 press-in bolt is used as ground-connector.
Figure 1: Dimensioned Sketch of the Basic Housing Plate
3.2 Definition of the Axes
Figure 2: Definition of the Axes

User Manual IS2D XX P03 (±10° / ±45° / ±60°) 4 Connection
4 Connection
4.1 Connector Pin Out
4.1.1 4.1.1 CAN Bus Connection
The inclination sensors IS2D xx P03 / P04 are equipped with a common 5-pole round plug M12 (A-coded).
The pin allocation fulfils CiA DRP 303-1 (Figure 3).
Pin Allocation
1 Shield
2 Supply voltage (+24 V)
3 GND (data reference potential)
4 CAN_H
5 CAN_L
Figure 3: Connector Pin Out CAN Bus
4.1.2 4.1.2 Connection of Switching Output (Type IS2D xx P04 only)
The IS2D xx P04 additionally includes an 8-pole round plug M12 to connect the switching outputs. The pin al-
location is shown in Figure 4.
Pin Switching Output Allocation
1 +U
0
2 -U
3 +U
1
4 -U
5 +U
2
6 -U
7 +U
3
8 -U
Figure 4: Connector Pin Out Switching Outputs
4.2 Bus-Termination Resistor
The inclination sensors IS2D xx P03 / P04 contain no internal termination resistor. It can be realised exter-
nally by a T-stick at the end of the bus on request (120 Ω).

User Manual IS2D XX P03 (±10° / ±45° / ±60°) 5 Software Description
5 Software Description
Each inclination sensor offers the following three operation modes:
 Position request
 (Automatically) cyclical transmission of the position
 Reading/writing of device parameters
For each mode a CAN-ID for receipt of data/commands (except cyclical transmission) and a CAN-ID for
transmission of the reply/confirmation are available. These IDs are saved in an internal permanent memory
(EEPROM) and can be configured freely. CAN 2.0 A (Standard Frame Format) as well as CAN 2.0 B (Ex-
tended Frame Format) are supported.
5.1 Format of the CAN Frames
5.1.1 Data Part in the CAN Frame
The data part of all transmission and receipt frames always contains a function select code (FSC) and addi-
tionally up to seven data bytes depending on the FSC. The length of the data part of the CAN frame is de-
fined in the DLC field (Data Length Code). The general format of the data part is structured as follows:
Byte0 Byte1 Byte2 Byte3 Byte4 Byte5 Byte6 Byte7

FSC D0/Status D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
Table 2: Format of the CAN Frames
FSC: Function Select Code – Function code (detailed description in the sections about the op-
eration modes). Each frame of the inclination sensor always contains the FSC of the pre-
ceding request as confirmation.
D0-D7: Data bytes, depending on the function select code
Status: Status information which is included in each frame output by the inclination sensor (see
section 5.1.2).
Frames which are transmitted to the inclination sensor may contain further data bytes beyond the needed
ones – those will not be evaluated. Frames sent by the inclination sensor only contain the data bytes defined
by the function select code.
5.1.2 Status Byte (STATUS)
Each frame output by the inclination sensor contains the recent status of the device in Byte1 of the CAN
frame. The status byte is structured as follows:
Bit7-6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0

SensorY SensorX CmdParam EEPROM Default Cyclic
reserved
Error Error Error Error Param Mode
Table 3: Status Byte

When “1”, the status bits have the following meaning (default value in brackets):
CyclicMode: The inclination is in the cyclic mode. This means it transmits the recent angle values cycli-
cally (for detailed description please see section 5.4).
DefaultParam: The default device parameters have been restored. This case occurs, if the default pa-
rameters have been set or invalid parameters are read from the EEPROM after device re-
set. This bit is only reset if a device parameter in the EEPROM is changed by a Set Pa-
rameter Frame. The inclination sensor is delivered with the default de-vice parameters
listed in section 5.9). Therefore this bit is set automatically.
EEPROMError: While reading/writing on the EEPROM an error occurred, for example data loss. The cor-
rect function of the inclination sensor is no longer guaranteed. This bit is reset by reading
of the status byte (Set Parameter Telegram with FSC = 02h).
CmdParamError: A received frame contained a command or parameter error (invalid FSC, too less data
bytes, invalid values). This bit is also set if an error occurred in the execution of a function
(for example writing/reading error on EEPROM). It will be reset by reading of the status
byte (Set Parameter Frame with FSC = 02h).
SensorErrorX: The sensor of the X-axis is located outside of the tolerable value range (limit). The angle
value can be incorrect. This bit is reset automatically if the sensor is inside its measuring
range again.
SensorErrorY: Error bit of the sensor of the Y-axis (function like SensorErrorX).
5.2 Boot Up Message
After device reset (hardware or software reset) the inclination sensor outputs a “boot up” message twice.
With this the correct boot process is displayed and the Set Parameter ID is notified (CAN-ID on that the incli-
nation sensor can be parameterised). This frame contains the following information:
“Boot up“ message after device reset: Reply Parameter ID (default ID: 301h)
FSC D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
FFh Status SID0 SID1 SID2 SID3 SWV0 SWV1
Table 4: “Boot Up” Message
SID0-3: Set Parameter ID (description in section 5.5)
SWV0-1: Software version

Format: 16 bit unsigned integer value
Example: 67h = 103 (corresponds to v1.03)

5.3 Position Request Mode
The position request is always available. In this mode the angle value of the inclination sensor can be re-
quested via a Request Position Update Frame. The inclination sensor replies to that frame via a Reply Po-
sition Update Frame. Both frames are structured as follows:
00h - - - - - - -
Table 5: Request frame: Request Position Update ID (default ID = 100h)

FSC Status D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
00h Status AngleX0 AngleX1 AngleY0 AngleY1 Temp -
Table 6: Reply frame: Reply Position Update ID (default ID = 101h)
AngleX0/1: Angle value of the X-axis

Format: 16 bit signed value (two’s complement)
Conversion: Value / 100 = angle value
Example: -1065 / 100 = -10.65°
AngleY0/1: Angle value of the Y-axis (format equal to AngleX0/1)
Temp: Temperature between -55 °C and +120 °C

5.4 Cyclic Mode
The inclination sensor supports the cyclical transmission of the recent position (angle position) after the expi-
ration of a defined time interval. This operation mode can be (de)activated separately and the needed time in-
terval (cycle time) can be parameterised freely
5.4.1 Operation Procedure
The cyclic mode is activated if the status bit STATUS:CyclicMode is set. Corresponding to the operational
principle shown in Figure 5 the inclination sensor outputs the recent position value in periodical intervals (cy-
cle time) with a Cyclic Position Update Frame. This is structured as follows:
30h Status AngleX0 AngleX1 AngleY0 AngleY1 Temp -
Table 7: Cyclic position frame: Cyclic Position Update ID (default ID = 201h)
Meaning of the data bytes as mentioned in section 5.3.

Cyclic Modus
(STATUS:CyclicMode)
Internal Timer
(Cyclic Time)
CAN
(Cyclic-Position-Telegramme)
Cyclic Time
Figure 5: Operational Principle of the Cyclic Mode
5.4.2 Settings
The cyclic mode can be configured by Set Parameter Frames (see section 5.5). It has to be considered that
changes in the internal permanent memory (EEPROM) will go into effect after device reset. Changes in the
non-permanent memory (RAM) are effected immediately and are lost after reset.
For configuration of the cyclic mode the following two parameters are available:
 Cycle time (CYT): Period interval in milliseconds (1 – 65,535)

 Cycle mode (CYM): (De)activate cyclic mode
 Cyclic position update ID: CAN ID of the Cyclic Position Update Frame
5.5 Set Parameter Mode
The set parameter mode is always active. It enables the reading and setting of the needed device parameters
as well as the execution of various commands. The complete parameters like CAN IDs, baud rate, cyclic time
etc. can be set and requested via the Set Parameter Frame. The inclination sensor confirms each Frame
with a Reply Parameter Frame which also contains the needed data according to FSC.
5.5.1 Set Parameter Frame
Each function of the Set Parameter Mode is defined by a special FSC. Table 8 shows all the supported func-
tion select codes and the according parameters of a Set Parameter Frame.

Set/request parameters: Set Parameter ID (default ID = 300h)
FSC D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 Description
01h - - - - - - - Software reset
02h - - - - - - - Read status
03h CYT0 CYT1 - - - - - Write cyclic time in RAM
04h CYM - - - - - - Set cyclic mode in RAM
11h - - - - - - - Cyclic time
12h - - - - - - - Cyclic mode
13h - - - - - - - Request Position Update ID
Read from EEPROM

14h - - - - - - - Reply Position Update ID
15h - - - - - - - Cyclic Position Update ID
16h - - - - - - - Set Parameter ID
17h - - - - - - - Reply Parameter ID
18h - - - - - - - Baud rate
19h - - - - - - - Cut-off frequency digital filter
1Ah SNO - - - - - - Config. switching output*
21h CYT0 CYT1 - - - - - Cyclic time
22h CYM - - - - - - Cyclic mode
23h ID0 ID1 ID2 ID3 - - - Request Position Update ID
24h ID0 ID1 ID2 ID3 - - - Reply Position Update ID
Write in EEPROM
25h ID0 ID1 ID2 ID3 - - - Cyclic Position Update ID
26h ID0 ID1 ID2 ID3 - - - Set Parameter ID
27h ID0 ID1 ID2 ID3 - - - Reply Parameter ID
28h BR - - - - - - Baud rate
29h CF0 CF1 - - - - - Cut-off frequency digital filter
2Ah SNO SCG HU0 HU1 HL0 HL1 - Config. switching output*
40h 'R' 'E' 'S' 'T' 'O' 'R' 'E' Default device parameters
Table 8: Supported FSC and Parameters of the Set Parameter Frames
* These function select codes are available for type IS2D xx P04 only.
(a) Configuration of Cyclic Mode
Parameters:
CYT0/1: Cyclic time in ms
Format: 16 bit unsigned integer value (1 – 65,535)
CYM: (De) activate cyclic mode

= 0 → cyclic mode deactivated
= 1 → cyclic mode activated
The section 5.4 contains a detailed description of the usage of the cyclic mode.

(b) Configuration of the CAN Identifier
Parameters:
ID0-3: CAN Identifier (ID), 11 bit ID (CAN 2.0 A) or 29 bit ID (CAN 2.0 B)
Format: 32 bit value with the following structure:
ID3 ID2 ID1 ID0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 - 11 Bit ID (CAN 2.0 A)
1 - 29 Bit ID (CAN 2.0 B)
Table 9: CAN Identifier
Example: CAN ID = 361h (29 Bit ID, CAN 2.0 B)

ID0 = 61h, ID1 = 03h, ID2 = 00h, ID3 = 80h
If a CAN ID is set newly, it must not be used by another frame type. If this occurs the error bit
STATUS:CmdParamError is set in the Reply Param Frame and the CAN ID is refused.
(c) Setting of Baud Rate
Parameters:
BR: Code of a baud rate
Format: 8 bit unsigned integer value (0 - 9)
Code : 0: 10 kBit/s 1: 20 kBit/s 2: 50 kBit/s
3: 62,5 kBit/s 4: 100 kBit/s 5: 125 kBit/s
6: 250 kBit/s 7: 500 kBit/s 8: 800 kBit/s
9: 1 MBit/s
(d) Configuration of Cut-off Frequency
CF0/1: Cut-off frequency in mHz

Format: 16 bit unsigned integer value (300 – 25,000 / 0 = digital filter disabled)
The section 5.6 contains a detailed description.
(e) Configuration of the Switching Outputs (Type IS2D xx P04 only)
Parameters:
SNO: Number of a switching output
Format: 8 bit unsigned integer value (0 - 3)
A10/1: Configuration byte of a switching output

Format: 8 bit value with the following structure:
B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
- ACTIVE YAXIS POL
Table 10: Configuration byte of a switching output

POL (B0): Polarity/switch condition on angle overstepping:

= 0 → open on angle overstepping, otherwise closed
= 1 → closed on angle overstepping, otherwise open
YAXIS (B1): Assignment of axes:

= 0 → Switching output for the X-axis
= 1 → Switching output for the Y-axis
ACTIVE (B2): (De)activate switching output:

= 0 → Switching output deactivated (switch always open)
= 1 → Switching output activated (switch active)
HU0/1: Angle value for upper hysteresis threshold

Conversion: Value / 100 = angle value
Example: -1065 / 100 = -10.65°
HL0/1: Angle value for lower hysteresis threshold (format equal to HU0/1).
(f) Restoration of Default Device Parameters
Parameters:
The following ASCII text sequence has to be transmitted in the data bytes D0-D6 as protection against unin-
tentional reset of the device parameters to factory-made settings:
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6
'R' 'E' 'S' 'T' 'O' 'R' 'E'
52h 45h 53h 54h 4Fh 52h 45h
Table 11: Restoration of Default Device Parameters

5.5.2 Reply Parameter Frames
Each Reply Parameter Frame contains the identical FSC as confirmation to the correctly received Set Para-
meter Frame. The error bits of the status byte indicate insufficient or invalid parameters or errors occurred
while writing into the EEPROM (see section 5.1.2). The structure of a Reply Parameter Frames in depend-
ence to the FSC is shown in Table 12.
Reply parameter (on Set Parameter Frames): Reply Parameter ID (default ID = 301h)
FSC Status D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 Description

01h Device reset (2 frames with FSC = FFh) Software reset
02h Status - - - - - - - Read status
03h Status - - - - - - - Write cyclic time in RAM
04h Status - - - - - - - Set cyclic mode in RAM
11h Status CYT0 CYT1 - - - - - Cyclic time
12h Status CYM - - - - - - Cyclic mode
13h Status ID0 ID1 ID2 ID3 - - - Request Position Update ID
Read from EEPROM

14h Status ID0 ID1 ID2 ID3 - - - Reply Position Update ID
15h Status ID0 ID1 ID2 ID3 - - - Cyclic Position Update ID
16h Status ID0 ID1 ID2 ID3 - - - Set Parameter ID
17h Status ID0 ID1 ID2 ID3 - - - Reply Parameter ID
18h Status BR - - - - - - Baud rate
19h Status CF0 CF1 - - - - - Cut-off frequency digital filter
1Ah Status SNO SCG HU0 HU1 HO0 HO1 - Config. switching output*
21h Status - - - - - - - Cyclic time
22h Status - - - - - - - Cyclic mode
23h Status - - - - - - - Request Position Update ID
24h Status - - - - - - - Reply Position Update ID
Write in EEPROM
25h Status - - - - - - - Cyclic Position Update ID
26h Status - - - - - - - Set Parameter ID
27h Status - - - - - - - Reply Parameter ID
28h Status - - - - - - - Baud rate
29h Status - - - - - - - Cut-off frequency digital filter
2Ah Status - - - - - - - Config. switching output*
40h Status - - - - - - - Default device parameters
Table 12: Function Codes and Parameters of the Reply Parameter Frames
* These function select codes are available for type IS2D xx P04 only.
The section 5.5.1contains a detailed description of the parameters of the several frames.
5.6 Digital Filter

The inclination sensor offers the possibility to suppress the influence of external disturbing vibrations. The in-
ternal lowpass digital filter (Butterworth, 8th order) is programmable down to 0.3 Hz. The cut-off frequency is
adjustable between 0.3 and 25 Hz.
The cut-off frequency is programmable by FSC = 19h (Set Parameter Frame). Values for CF are allowed be-
tween 300 (= 0.3 Hz) and 25,000 (= 25 Hz). CF = 0 disables the digital filter.

5.7 Use of the Switching Outputs (Type IS2D xx P04 only)
The four switching outputs of the inclination sensor IS2D xx P04 are configurable individually. Each setting
can be saved in the internal permanent memory (EEPROM). By this an autonomous operation of the switch-
ing outputs (without CAN Bus interface) is possible.
5.7.1 5.8.1 Operational Principle
Figure 6 shows the operation of a switching output in the example of a ±45° sensor. In this example the
switching output is assigned to the X-axis (SCG:YAXIS = 0). That means it only reacts to inclination changes
of this axis. The set inclination threshold values (HU and HL) define a hysteresis inside which the switching
outputs do not switch. If the inclination value of the X-axis is above the upper hysteresis threshold value (HU)
an overrun occurred; if the inclination value is below the lower hysteresis threshold value (HL) an underrun
occurred. The polarity bit (SCG:POL) defines whether the switch has to be open or closed with over- or un-
derrun. A switching output can be (de)activated via the configuration bit SCG:ACTIVE. The switch is always
open in deactivated condition.
+45°
Upper Hysteresis Threshold (HU)

Lower Hysteresis Threshold (HL)
Inclination Value (X-Axis)

SCG: YAXIS = 0)
-45°
closed
Switch state = close on overrun
open open (SCG:POL = 1, SCG:ACTIVE = 1
closed closed
Switch state = open on overrun
open (SCG:POL = 0, SCG:ACTIVE = 1
Switch state
open (SCG:ACTIVE = 0)
Figure 6: Operational Principle of a Switching Output
5.7.2 Settings
The function of the switching outputs can be configured by the Set Parameter Frames (see section 5.5). All
the settings are saved in the internal permanent memory (EEPROM) and will go into effect after reset. The
settings which were effective during the change are not influenced.

The function of one switching output is defined by the following parameters:
 Number of switching output (SNO): Assignment to a switching output (0, 1, 2 or 3)

 Upper hysteresis threshold (HU): Angle value for upper hysteresis threshold
 Lower hysteresis threshold (HL): Angle value for lower hysteresis threshold
 Configuration (SCG):
 Polarity (SCG:POL): Polarity/switch condition on overrun
 Allocation of axes (SCG:YAXIS): Axis assignment (X- or Y-axis)
 (De)activation (SCG:ACTIVE): (De)activate switching output
Remarks:
When setting the switching outputs it has to be observed that:
 The angles of the hysteresis threshold values are within the measurement range of the inclination sensor
(for example -45° ≤ HU, HL ≤ +45° with a ±45°-Sensor)
 HL ≤ HU
 The number of the switching output is valid (SNO ≤ 3)
If one of these conditions is not fulfilled the settings in this Set Parameter Frame are ignored and the error is
displayed in the status bit (STATUS:CmdParamError).
5.8 Status Display of the Two-Coloured LED
The operating status of the inclination sensor is displayed by the two-coloured LED. Here the following in-for-
mation are differed:
 Colour of the LED (red/green) → sensor error (yes/no) (according to the status bits STATUS: SensorEr-
rorX and STATUS: SensorErrorY)
 LED (flashing/not flashing) → CAN data transfer (sensor is transmitting/sensor is not transmitting data)

5.9 Default Device Parameters
The inclination sensor is delivered with the default device parameters shown in Table 13. These can be re-
stored by a Set Parameter Frame with FSC = 40h (see section 5.5).
Parameter Default Value

Cyclic time (CYT) 250 ms
Cyclic mode (CYM) 0 (deactivated)
Request Position Update ID 100h (CAN 2.0 A Standard Frame)
Reply Position Update ID 101h (CAN 2.0 A Standard Frame)
Cyclic Position Update ID 201h (CAN 2.0 A Standard Frame)
Set Parameter ID 300h (CAN 2.0 A Standard Frame)
Reply Parameter ID 301h (CAN 2.0 A Standard Frame)
Baudrate (BR) 7 (500 kBit/s)
Cut-off frequency (CF) 3000 (3 Hz)
Switching output 0 (SNO = 0)* Configuration (SCG) POL 1 (closed with overrun)
YAXIS 0 (X-Axis)
ACTIVE 0 (deactivated)
Upper Hysteresis angle (HU) 500 (5°)
Lower Hysteresis angle (HL) 450 (4,5°)
YAXIS 0 (X-Axis)
YAXIS 0 (X-Axis)
YAXIS 0 (X-Axis)
Table 13: Default Settings of the Device Parameters
* These parameters are available for type IS2D xx P04 only.
These default settings will also be set if invalid device parameters are read from the EEPROM after device
reset. If the default settings have been restored this is displayed by the status bit STATUS:DefaultParam =1.

User Manual IS2D XX P03 (±10° / ±45° / ±60°) 6 Ordering Information
6 Ordering Information
Article Number Product Type Description / Difference
PR-23001-01 IS2D 10 P03 2-dimensional, ±10°, CAN Bus interface
PR-23200-01 IS2D 10 P04 2-dimensional, ±10°, CAN Bus interface, with 4 switching outputs
Table 14: Ordering Information

PRIMO L
PRIMO XL
08/2004 1 095 537

D ............................................................................................................................. 3
GB ........................................................................................................................... 15
F ........................................................................................................................... 27
I ........................................................................................................................... 39
E ........................................................................................................................... 51
NL ........................................................................................................................... 63
2
GRAMMER: Sitz-Komfort für hohe Ansprüche!
Sie haben einen GRAMMER Sitz erworben. Gratulation!
Nehmen Sie bitte Platz und erleben Sie Sitz-Komfort und Sicherheit. Freuen
Sie sich auf einen Fahrersitz, der sich durch einfache Bedienung und hohe
Anpassungsfähigkeit auszeichnet.
Mit Ihrem neuen Sitz fördern Sie nicht nur Ihre Gesundheit, sondern auch
Ihre Leistungsfähigkeit.
Gute Fahrt wünscht Ihnen

Ihr GRAMMER-Team
Impressum
Copyright © Fa.

AG
Postfach 1454
D-92204 Amberg
Nachdruck, Vervielfältigung oder Übersetzung,
Genehmigung durch die Firma

auch auszugsweise, ist ohne schriftliche
nicht erlaubt.
Amberg, 08/2004
3
3
4
5
2 1
977
4
Bedienungsanleitung
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Hinweise ....................................................................................................... 6
Sicherheitshinweise ...................................................................................... 6
Garantie ........................................................................................................ 8
Sitzfunktionen und Bedienung ...................................................................... 9
1 Gewichtseinstellung .............................................................................. 9
2 Längseinstellung ................................................................................... 9
3 Rückenverlängerung * ** ................................................................... 10
4 Sitzheizung * ** .................................................................................. 10
5 Lendenwirbelstütze ............................................................................. 10
6 Armlehnen * ** ................................................................................... 11
7 Armlehnenneigung * ........................................................................... 11
8 Rückenlehneneinstellung.................................................................... 11
Pflege.......................................................................................................... 12
* falls vorhanden ** nachrüstbar
5
Hinweise
Die Bedienungsanleitung muss vor Inbetriebnahme vollständig gelesen werden.

Die Bedienungsanleitung muss im Fahrzeug mitgeführt werden und dem Fahrzeugführer
jederzeit zugänglich sein.
Der Fahrersitz darf nur von Fachpersonal montiert, gewartet und repariert werden.
Jeweilige länderspezifische Vorschriften und Einbauvorschriften des Fahrzeugherstellers
sind dabei zu berücksichtigen.
Die jeweiligen länderspezifischen Einbauvorschriften sind bei der Firma und

deren Vertretungen oder beim Fahrzeughersteller zu erhalten.
Für den Erhalt Ihrer Gesundheit ist ein stets funktionierender und individuell eingestellter
Fahrersitz Voraussetzung. Erhalten Sie die Funktionsfähigkeit Ihres Fahrersitzes durch
Pflege und regelmäßige Funktionsüberprüfungen.
Die Funktionsprüfungen sind mindestens den Wartungsintervallen des Fahrzeuges
anzupassen (siehe Wartungsplan des Fahrzeuges).
Die Bedienungsanleitung ist zusammen mit dem Fahrersitz aufzuheben. Falls der
Fahrersitz an Dritte weitergegeben wird, ist auch die Bedienungsanleitung weiterzugeben.
Sicherheitshinweise
Bei notwendigen elektrischen Anschlüssen an das Bordnetz ist folgendes unbedingt zu

beachten:
Vor Anschluss eines im Sitz vorhandenen Sitzschalters, einer Sitzheizung oder eines
Kompressors müssen entsprechende auf das Fahrzeug bezogene elektrische Daten
bezüglich Spannung, Absicherung und Art der Anschlussverbindung beim
Fahrzeughersteller, bei der Firma

oder deren Vertretungen erfragt werden.
Aus Sicherheitsgründen muss der Einbau und Anschluss an das Bordnetz von
autorisiertem Fachpersonal durchgeführt werden.
Die Sitzanschlüsse sind unabhängig von anderen Fahrzeugbauteilen separat
abzusichern.
DC Kompressor Sitzheizung / Sitzschalter - Strombelastbarkeit

Kompressor
12V 10A 20A 12V DC 10mA (min.)
24V 10A 15A 250V DC 5A (max.)
48V 10A 10A
!"$#$%'&( *)
Min. und max. Strombelastbarkeit bei rein ohmscher
Belastung.
+$, $#$%( -

Bei induktiver oder kapazitiver Last ist eine Schutzschaltung der Verbraucher am
.' /10'&% !2-$34%' ( ( '&'#$% &'3
Fahrzeug durch den Fahrzeughersteller vorzunehmen. Bei Unklarheiten
.
6
Sicherheitshinweise
Falsch eingestellte Fahrersitze haben einen geringeren Schwingbereich. Um Schäden am

Rücken und Beschädigungen des Fahrersitzes zu vermeiden, muss 5$647'8 9':97 ; <='9?>7@ 9=$A
<'BCDE9
des Fahrzeuges und ='9@F8 9':9$D1G'BC7 97 H9'I$CJ'9K
die Gewichtseinstellung auf das
individuelle Gewicht des Fahrers eingestellt werden.
Um Verletzungen zu vermeiden, dürfen L"9@ <'9MN9'O9<J> P<$:9Q@ DSRTI$CH@ <$O4='97 9@ I$C des
Fahrersitzes gelagert werden.
UV647 ; <='9?>7@ 9=<'BCDE9 des Fahrersitzes müssen eventuell vorhandene UT97W'B'I$LX<$O$J$A
DEB?> 97@ BK @ 9< von den Sitz- und Rückenpolstern entfernt werden.
Um Unfallgefahren zu vermeiden, muss 5$647 ; <='9?>7@ 9=<'BCDE9 des Fahrzeuges geprüft
werden, ob alle Einstellvorrichtungen richtig eingerastet sind.
Die Einstellvorrichtungen des Fahrersitzes dürfen HPC7 9<$:Y:9?JYZ 9?>7@ 9='9?J nicht betätigt
werden.
Bei 9<> [ 97<> 9$D1\]$I$L"9<W$64K J> 97
darf die Rückenlehneneinstellung nur betätigt werden,
wenn die Rückenplatte z.B. mit der Hand abgestützt wird. Bei Nichtbeachtung besteht
9 7C$^4C> 9_UT97K 9?> `'X<$O$J$O9?[ BC7
durch Vorschnellen der Rückenplatte.
a'9':9_UT97 P<$:97X<$OY:9?JR 97@ 9<`'XJ> B<$:9?J
des Fahrersitzes (z.B. durch Nachrüsten von
nicht original Nachrüst- und Ersatzteilen der Firma ) kann den geprüften M\bccd \
Zustand des Fahrersitzes aufheben. Es können GX<Le>@ 64<'9<E:9?JYG'BC7 97 J@ > `29?J
='99@ <>7 P'I$C>@ O$>H97f:9<
, die Ihre R@ I$C'97C'9@ >
gefährden. Aus diesem Grund muss 8 9':9
='BXK @ I$C'9_UT97 P<$:97X<$O
des Fahrersitzes durch die Firma freigegeben M\bccd \
werden.
Beim Aus- und Einbau des Fahrersitzes sind unbedingt die Angaben des Fahrzeug-
herstellers zu beachten.
g <[ BK K O9?[ BC74:4X7fI$CYh$^$J'9<E6:97 Z7 9'I$C'9<

Fahrersitze nicht an den Abdeckungen anheben. Bei Nichtbeachtung besteht 97C$^4C> 9
der Abdeckungen.
Vor dem Ausbau des Fahrersitzes sind sämtliche Steckverbindungen zwischen Fahrersitz
und Bordnetz zu trennen. Bei Wiederherstellen der Steckverbindungen muss auf
Dichtigkeit (Staub, Wasser) geachtet werden.
Rückhaltegurte sind am Fahrersitz nachrüstbar. Das mit Rückhaltegurten ist i B'I$C7]J> 9<
wegen erhöhter Belastung der Fahrersitzbefestigung <X7 <'B'I$CEMN9<'9CDj@ O4X<$OY:9?J
G'BC7 `29X$O4C'97 J> 9K K 97 J`'XK P?JJ@ O
.
Die Nachrüstung muss unter Beachtung der jeweiligen länderspezifischen Vorschriften
und Richtlinien erfolgen und muss von der Firma M \bccd \
freigegeben werden.
Nachgerüstete Rückhaltegurte müssen 5$647 ; <='9?>7@ 9=<'BCDE9
des Fahrzeuges angelegt
werden.
Nach einem Unfall Dj]JJ'9<E:4@ 9Q\]$I$LC'BK > 9'O4X7 > 9BXJ$O9?H9'I$CJ'9K >H97f:9<
.
Bei am Fahrersitz montierten Rückhaltegurten müssen nach einem Unfall der `'XJ'P?> `'K @ I$C
G'BC7 97 J@ > `
und die G'BC7 97 J@ > `'='9?[ 9?J>@ O4X<$O
durch Fachpersonal überprüft werden.
Schraubverbindungen müssen regelmäßig auf [ 9?J> 9<R@ > `_O9W7][ >
werden. Ein Wackeln
des Fahrersitzes kann auf lose Schraubverbindungen oder sonstige Defekte hinweisen.
7
Sicherheitshinweise
Bei Feststellung von Unregelmäßigkeiten in den Funktionen des Fahrersitzes (z.B.

defekte Federung des Fahrersitzes, unsachgemäße Vorwölbung der Lendenwirbelstütze
oder beschädigter Faltenbalg) klQmno'np$qQnr p'nQs't'u$ovnwxeyz t?z z
zur Behebung der
Ursache aufsuchen.
Bei Nichtbeachtung besteht Gefahr für Ihre Gesundheit und . nwo${4oz nQ|p} t~ ~ mn?} tow
Vor Inbetriebnahme des Fahrzeuges sind eventuell im Fahrersitz vorhandene Schalter
(zur Stilllegung von Aggregaten beim Verlassen des Fahrersitzes oder Fahrzeuges) auf
ihre skpxezr 4py} or m4x"nr z
zu prüfen.
Bei Funktionsstörungen darf das Fahrzeug nicht in Betrieb genommen werden.
– T 4|s$ s
–
Fahrersitze mit eingebautem Schalter für die Sitzbelegungserkennung dürfen außer
normaler Benutzung nicht mit Nn'mnpyz p$qnptk}4qnwr z "}~ 'u$o'n
belastet werden, da
sich das Fahrzeug sonst führerlos in Bewegung setzen kann.
– T 4|s$ s
–
Das Entlasten der Sitzfläche während der Fahrt führt zum Fahrzeugstillstand.
Während des Betriebs – bei belastetem Fahrersitz – Faltenbalg nicht nach innen drücken.
– |TT s
–
Es ist darauf zu achten, dass x"nr p'n Nn'mnpyz p$qn oder s~ yyr m4x"nr z np in das pp'nw nqn?y
s'tow nw yr z 2n?y
gelangen.
Der Fahrersitz ist pr u$ozvt?yy'nwfq4r u$oz und ist vor Spritzwasser zu schützen!
Umbau oder Nachrüstarbeiten an Fahrersitzen der Firma dürfen nur von
tkzf4wr yr nw z npYs't'u$ovnwxeyz ?z z np mn?y$u$ok~ z n$l1nw y$4p't~
, beziehungsweise entsprechend
tky$mnr ~ qn?z npYnw y$4p'np
unter Berücksichtigung der anwendbaren Bedienungs-,
Wartungs- und Einbauvorschriften sowie der länderspezifischen Vorschriften durchgeführt
werden.
Bei kpy't'u$o$mn$lE'nw _4pz t'mn besteht die Gefahr von Tnw~ n?z 'kp$mnp sowie t'u$o$
'n?y$u$o''q4r m4kp$mnp und die Funktion des Fahrersitzes oder der angebauten Teile kann
nicht garantiert werden.
Garantie
Die Firma
übernimmt bei unsachgemäßer Montage, Verwendung, Benutzung
und Reparatur keine Gewährleistung oder Haftung für daraus folgende Schäden.
Einzelheiten über die von der Firma
gewährten Garantie, finden sich in der
Rechnung oder im Lieferschein. Andere als dort beschriebene Garantien können
gegenüber der Firma
nicht geltend gemacht werden.
8
Sitzfunktionen und Bedienung
Gewichtseinstellung
Das jeweilige Fahrergewicht muss bei
belastetem Fahrersitz durch Ziehen oder
Drücken des Gewichtseinstellungshebels
eingestellt werden.
Das richtige Fahrergewicht ist eingestellt,
wenn sich der Pfeil innerhalb des mittleren
max.
klaren Bereiches des Sichtfensters befindet.
Innerhalb dieses Sichtbereiches kann die
min. 978 individuelle Höhe bis zu einem Mindest-
federweg angepasst werden.
Die min. oder max. Gewichtseinstellung wird
durch Erreichen des hörbaren oberen oder
unteren Endanschlages angezeigt.
Um Gesundheits- und Materialschäden
zu vermeiden, muss vor Inbetriebnahme des
Fahrzeuges die individuelle Fahrergewichts-
einstellung kontrolliert und eingestellt werden.
Um Beschädigungen am Kompressor zu
vermeiden, darf bei Einstellung des
Gewichtes der Kompressor max. 1 Minute
betätigt werden.
Längseinstellung
Durch Betätigen des Verriegelungshebels
nach oben wird die Längseinstellung
freigegeben.
V4 $ ¡¢ £¤ ¤ ¥¦?¢ £¨§
T¦ ¦'¥¦¤ ©¡$¥$'¦ª'¦¤'¡ $«¬ ¦¡$
¦ ®'£ ª'¦? ¬? ¥¦¡¯
V4 $4°©'¦? $$$¥¦?¢ £¨§
± ¦ª'¦¤'¡©£¡E¦ ²©¤ ¦_¢ £?'¦¡
³f´©f$$¥4 ¢ ¢ $'¦©¡$¥µ ¶$¡ $ ©¡ ¦
979
¦$·1± ¦ª'¦¤?4©f$$¥4 ¦ ¢ ¦¡¯
Nach der Einstellung muss der
Verriegelungshebel in der gewünschten
Position einrasten. Nach dem Verriegeln darf
sich der Fahrersitz nicht mehr in eine andere
Position verschieben lassen.
Verriegelungshebel nicht mit Bein oder
Wade anheben.
9
Rückenverlängerung * **
Die Rückenverlängerung kann in der Höhe
durch Herausziehen oder Hineinschieben
über spürbare Rasterungen bis zu einem
Endanschlag individuell angepasst werden.
Zum Entfernen der Rückenverlängerung wird
der Endanschlag nach oben mit einem Ruck
überwunden.
985
Sitzheizung * **
Die Sitzheizung wird durch Betätigung des
Schalters ein- bzw. ausgeschaltet.
0 0 = Sitzheizung AUS
1 = Sitzheizung EIN
980
1
Lendenwirbelstütze
Mit der Lendenwirbelstütze kann sowohl der
0 Sitzkomfort erhöht als auch die Leistungs-
fähigkeit des Fahrers erhalten werden.
2
Durch Drehen des Handrades nach oben wird
1 die Stärke der Vorwölbung im oberen Bereich
des Rückenpolsters und durch Drehen nach
unten im unteren Bereich des Rückenpolsters
2 individuell angepasst.
981 0 = Keine Vorwölbung
1 = Max. Vorwölbung oben
2 = Max. Vorwölbung unten.
10
Armlehnen * **
Die Armlehnen können bei Bedarf nach hinten
geklappt und in der Höhe individuell
angepasst werden.
Zur Verstellung der Armlehnenhöhe wird die
runde Kappe (Pfeil) aus der Abdeckung
herausgehebelt und die dahinter liegende
Sechskantmutter (Schlüsselweite 13 mm)
gelöst. Armlehnen in die gewünschte Stellung
983 bringen (5-stufiges Raster) und Sechskant-
mutter festziehen. Die Abdeckkappe wieder
auf die Mutter drücken.
Armlehnenneigung *
Die Längsneigung der Armlehne kann durch
Drehen des Handrades verändert werden.
Bei Drehung nach außen (+) wird die
Armlehne vorn angehoben, bei Drehung nach
innen (-) wird sie vorn abgesenkt.
-+
984
Rückenlehneneinstellung
- 5° +30°
Nach Betätigung des Verriegelungshebels
nach oben wird die Verzahnung der Rücken-
lehneneinstellung gelöst.
Nach der Verstellung muss der
Verriegelungshebel in der gewünschten
Position einrasten. Nach dem Verriegeln darf
sich die Rückenlehne nicht mehr in eine
andere Position bewegen lassen.
982 Für einen ergonomischen
Arbeitsgebrauch ist der Verstellwinkel der
Rückenlehne (15 Stufen zu je 2,5 Grad) im
Bereich zwischen -5 und +30 Grad
einzustellen.
11
Pflege
Schmutz kann die Funktion des Fahrersitzes
beeinträchtigen.
Halten Sie deshalb Ihren Fahrersitz sauber!
Polster müssen zur Pflege nicht vom
Sitzgestell gelöst und abgenommen werden.
¸T¹º» ¹?¼ ½'¾¿$À$Á$À¹?Â ÃÄº4Å4¾ºfÆ$Ä
¸VÇ4º Á$Æ$Ä¿'¹» » ¹¿EÅ¹º ÈÉ$Æ$Ê"¹¿» ¹Ä¿'¹Ë
Ì ¹Í Î1È ¹Í ¿Í À¹¿EÅ¹?ÁYÈÉ$Æ$Ê"¹¿$Ï
» ¹Ä¿'¹¿Ð$Ç4» Á¼ ¹º ÁQÎj¾ÁÁYÑ'¹Í
Ì ¹?¼ Ò?¼Í À4¾¿$ÀYÅ¹º ÈÉ$Æ$Ê"¹¿» ¹Ä¿'¹¿$Ï
¹Í ¿Á¼ ¹» » ¾¿$ÀYÅ4Í ¹QÈÉ$Æ$Ê"¹¿» ¹Ä¿'¹EÎjÍ ¼
Å¹º Ó Ã¿$ÅQÃÑ$À¹?Á¼É¼ ½"¼Ô¹ºfÅ¹¿Õ
986
ÖV×Ó Ø4ÙÚTÛÜ Fahrersitz nicht mit Hochdruck-

reiniger reinigen!
Bei der Reinigung der Polsterflächen sollte
ein Durchfeuchten der Polster vermieden
werden.
º ¹Í ¿Í À¹º

Handelsübliche oder Ý Ç4» Á¼ ¹ºfÏ Þ ¾¿Á¼ Á¼fÇ$Â ÂfÏ
auf
¸T¹º ¼º Ò'À4» Í Æ$ÄÊ"¹Í ¼ ÐºÉÂ ¹¿
erst an verdeckter, kleinerer Fläche
12
13
14
GRAMMER: Seating comfort for high demands!
You have acquired a GRAMMER seat. Congratulations!
Take your seat please, and enjoy the ultimate in seating comfort and safety.
You will be enjoying a drivers seat characterized by user-friendliness and a
high degree of adaptability.
With your new seat you are not only preserving your health; you are
improving your performance and efficiency as well.
Have a good trip, with best wishes from

your GRAMMER Team
Imprint
Copyright © ßàáââã à Corp.

ßàáââã à
AG
Postfach 1454
D-92204 Amberg
Reprinting, reproduction or translation,

in whole or in part, requires the written
permission of the ßàáââã à
Corporation.
Amberg, 08/2004
GB 15
3
4
5
2 1
977
16 GB
Operating instructions
Contents
General instructions .................................................................................... 18
Safety instructions....................................................................................... 18
Guarantee ................................................................................................... 20
Seat functions and operation ...................................................................... 21
1 Weight adjustment.............................................................................. 21
2 Fore/aft adjustment............................................................................. 21
3 Backrest extension * ** ...................................................................... 22
4 Seat heater * ** .................................................................................. 22
5 Lumbar support................................................................................... 22
6 Armrests * ** ...................................................................................... 23
7 Armrest adjustment * .......................................................................... 23
8 Backrest adjustment ........................................................................... 23
Maintenance ............................................................................................... 24
* if fitted ** optional extra
GB 17
General instructions
The operating instructions must be read in full before use.

The operating instructions must be kept in the vehicle and always be at hand.
The driver’s seat may only be fitted, serviced and repaired by specialist personnel,
in accordance with national regulations and the vehicle manufacturer’s fitting instructions.
The national fitting regulations can be obtained from äåæççè å
or from agencies of the
company, or from the vehicle manufacturer.
A correctly functioning and individually adjusted driver’s seat is essential to your health.
Take adequate care of your seat and have it serviced regularly to ensure that it functions
correctly.
The functional checks are to be carried out at least as regularly as vehicle services
(see maintenance plan for vehicle).
These operating instructions should always be kept with the driver’s seat. If the seat is
passed on to a third party, it must be accompanied by the relevant operating instructions.
Safety instructions
If you need to connect cables to the vehicle supply network, strictly observe the following
instructions:
Before you connect a seat switch, seat heater or compressor, you must obtain the
relevant electrical data for the respective vehicle with reference to voltage, protection and
the kind of connections from the manufacturer, from or the company’s äåæççè å
agencies.
For safety reasons, the installation and connection to the vehicle supply network must be
carried out by authorized specialist personnel only.
The seat connections must be protected independently of other vehicle components.
DC Compressor Seat heater / Seat switch – current carrying

compressor capacity
12V 10A 20A 12V DC 10mA (min.)
24V 10A 15A 250V DC 5A (max.)
48V 10A 10A
éTê$ë ì?íEîê4ï$î?ìðïñ ï$òEí'ìó?ëíôñ ëfî$õ4ö
Minimum and maximum current carrying capacity for
purely resistive load.
÷ø ìó?í'ìó?íùúëõ'ì
In case of inductive or capacitive load, the manufacturer must install a protective circuit
û ìõñ î ø E
ì üEóïýþ ó'î2ëýð ìð ÿ'ì?þfê4ð ìEüEóùñ ï$òYîê4ïï'ì'î2ëñ ê4ïí
breaker for the consumers in the vehicle. If there are any uncertainties,
.
Driver’s seats that have been adjusted incorrectly have a smaller moving area. To prevent
weight
ÿ'ì?þfê4ð ìQýí'ì
and
ÿ'ì?þfê4ð ìì û ìð _î$õ'óï$òìê$þ 4ðñ û ìð
damage to the driver’s back and to the seat, the seat must be adjusted for the driver’s

.
18 GB
Safety instructions
To prevent injury,

! "$#
% of the driver’s
seat.
&'
()#
%*+ % " of the driver’s seat, possible , " "+
$# $ has to be
removed from the seat cushion and the backrest upholstery.
To eliminate any risk of accident, the settings must be checked to ensure they are
correctly engaged
()#
-
-!
$
# !
$ .
Adjustments must be made
# ! " .
.'(
$#'#
!$(
,%#
% ' %
$# / , the backrest frame must be supported, for
example held in place, before the backrest adjuster is operated. If you fail to do so, there
is a danger that the backrest frame may jerk forward and $%
0# / .
.1%/-$"$
)
-
$#
% $$$#)(
-
% (for example fitting parts which are not
original
8 2435.1667'3 parts) may impair the safety standard to which it has been tested.
%/
+$ #
, threatening your (
/ . For this reason, $%/-$"$

$
"(
-
% must be approved by 2435.1667'3 .
During the removal and installation of the driver’s seat, the corresponding instructions by
the specific vehicle manufacturer must be strictly observed!
Do not hold onto the covers for lifting the driver’s seats. If you do so anyway, there is an
#
%
# ,4(' 0# /-
- )
$ "#'#
%$,% "%!
$# .
Before you remove the driver’s seat, disconnect all plug-in connections between the seat
and the vehicle supply network. When you replace the plug-in connectors, make sure they
are tight (dust, water).
Seatbelts can be retrofitted to the driver’s seat. Seatbelts /- /
-(

$#)!$(
-!
$
$%( #
$# , as they increase the load in the seat mounting
area.
Seatbelts must be fitted in accordance with specific national regulations and guidelines,
and must be approved by 2435.1667'3 .
Retrofitted seatbelts must be fastened
()#
# ! " .
9

-
%
$ +%% '
#
$
after an accident.
Where seatbelts are fitted to the driver’s seat, the
% and
% 5% " must be
checked $ / by specialist personnel after an accident has occurred.
Fasteners must be
,
#
" $# /:()# "%
% . If the seat wobbles there may be
loose bolts or other faults.
If you notice that the seat does not function correctly (for example a defective seat
suspension; improper curvature of the lumbar support or damaged bellows), %% *

$ % -#,;

$ / to arrange for repairs to be carried out.
If you fail to do so, your health may be affected and the # ,4(*% $
$% ' #
%
.
GB 19
Safety instructions
Before the vehicle is used, switches that might be in the seat (for shutting down
mechanical equipment when the driver leaves his/her seat) must be checked for
@ABCDE B <=)><?$=
> .
If malfunctions are detected, the vehicle must not be driven.
– F GIHKJMLNIOML'PQJMF OMRTS4UNVHMHKF PML'G'W –
A 'D B '
D ] C B D E D` ]AE D)a)E B E D)C`
X>$YZ[\ [ > ? <^ Y ?Z> [?%Y [_ Y ^ [%_
, except for the driver’s
weight during normal use, as the vehicle may otherwise start to move by itself.
– F GIHKJMLNIOML'PQJMF OMRTS4UNVHMHKF PML'G'W –
If you take off the weight from the seat while driving, this will cause the vehicle to stop.
Do not indent the bellows while there is load on the driver’s seat.
– JMF OMRTS4UHKJMb'OMcMF GId –
E B%D E @D` Ee D @ E gB DE C
Make sure that the
E hAE ?$= > => ?Z= $? =0f [[?%Y remains free of >= ? <Y$= ^ ?[ or
^ Z[ .
B D D DE g`%D
The driver’s seat is > _4Y ?$= and must be protected against splashes of water!
Any conversion or refitting work on a d4J5N1iiL'J driver’s seat must be performed
A%D` E j ` D EB AE D ] hA E @E BB
exclusively in Y >= ?Z_->=k;[ ><%[ by = Y ?Z or [ Y ^ l Y$^ ?Z<?$= [> ?$^ and in
adherence with the applicable operating, maintenance and installation instructions and in
compliance with all relevant national regulations.
EB D DE B B ] B E B m0A D
F \+<=)>g <?$= [ Y$^ ^ Y > Y ZY[%[?\ ^ l bear the risk of <?$= [> Y$^ = l or <=)><?$= l
Z$Y\Y ? and the proper function of the driver’s seat or mounted parts can no longer be
guaranteed.
Guarantee
d4J5N1iiL'J can provide no guarantee for damage resulting from incorrect assembly, use
or repair of the driver’s seats.
Further details on the guarantee granted by d4J5N1iiL'J are stated on the invoice or the
delivery note. Warranty claims against d4J5N1iiL'J beyond the guarantee obligations
described there are excluded.
20 GB
Seat functions and operation
Weight adjustment
The seat is adjusted for the driver’s weight by
pulling or pressing the lever for seat weight
adjustment and with the driver sitting on the
seat.
The driver’s weight is adjusted correctly when
max. the arrow is in the middle clear area of the
viewing window.
Within this viewing area, the individual height
min. 978 can be adjusted to a minimum spring
movement.
When the minimum/maximum weight
adjustment has been reached, you can hear it
reaching the upper or lower end stop.
To prevent damage to the health and
material, the setting for the driver’s weight
must be checked and adjusted individually
before the vehicle is driven.
In order to avoid compressor damage
during weight adjustment, the compressor
must be operated no longer than 1 minute.
Fore/aft adjustment
The fore/aft adjustment is released by lifting
the locking lever.
nTo1pMqMr qIs-tpMu vw4xy*z{%{u |$}$~%t
Ix~xx}$ z }-} x{w%u ~ }}$
u }|u u ~
nTo1pMqMr qIs-tpMu vw4xy{%vu ~5t
~ :)x{} }}$*z}
u ~|$}$~% }|u $%|x~x' }%z{z{w
979
~|$}$} }}$
After the adjustment, the locking lever

must latch into the desired position with an
audible click. It should not be possible to
move the driver’s seat into another position
when it is locked.
Do not lift the locking lever with your leg
or calf.
GB 21
Backrest extension * **
The backrest extension can be individually
adjusted by pulling it upwards or pushing it
downwards over the various locking
increments up the end stop.
To remove the backrest extension, pull it
upwards over the end stop.
985
Seat heater * **
The seat heater can be turned on/off by
pressing the switch.
0 1 = seat heater OFF

2 = seat heater ON
980
1
Lumbar support
The lumbar support increases both the
0 seating comfort and the performance of the
driver.
2
By turning the adjustment knob upwards, the
1 curvature in the upper part of the backrest
cushion can be adjusted. By turning the knob
downwards, the curvature in the lower part of
2 the backrest cushion can be adjusted.
981 0 = No curvature
1 = Max. curvature at the top
2 = Max. curvature at the bottom
22 GB
Armrests * **
The armrests can be folded up if required and
the height individually adjusted.
To adjust the armrests for height, separate
the round cap (see arrow) from the cover,
loosen the hexagon nut (size 13 mm) behind
it and adjust the armrests to the desired
position (5-steps) and tighten the nut again.
Replace the cap onto the nut.
983
Armrest adjustment *
The inclination of the armrests can be
modified by turning the adjustment knob.
When turning the knob to the outside (+) the
front part of the armrest will be lifted, when
turning the knob to inside (-) it will be lowered.
-+
984
Backrest adjustment
- 5° +30°
Moving the locking lever upwards loosens the
notching of the backrest adjustment.
After the adjustment, the locking lever
must latch into the desired position. It should
not be possible to move the backrest into
another position when it is locked.
For an ergonomic use the backrest can
be adjusted in a range of –5 to +30 degrees
982 (15 steps of 2.5 degrees each).
GB 23
Maintenance
Dirt can impair the function of the seat,
so make sure you keep your seat clean!
Upholstery does not need to be removed from
the seat frame for cleaning.
V$% $ $ -
% % 5 ¡K¢ $¤£) 4$)¥$¥
$% ¢0 ¡¦
§ $¨ %$ © % %
% % %5 +%%
$¨ ¥ ª¨ -$ª$ ©
986
% %'¨ «$¬
$%
Do not clean the seat with a
pressure washer!
During cleaning the upholstery should not be
soaked through.
Use a standard commercially available
ª¨ % $ ¡-'ª¨ % ¨ %$ ©©$$% %
.®
£ %£)%* +ª ¨ ¡
on a small, concealed
area.
24 GB
25
26
GRAMMER : Siège confort répondant aux exigences les plus élevées !
Vous avez acheté un siège GRAMMER. Félicitations !
Veuillez prendre place et profiter ainsi du confort de l'assise et de la
sécurité.
Sachez apprécier ce siège de conducteur qui se distingue par sa facilité
d'utilisation et sa grande souplesse.
A laide de ce nouveau siège, non seulement vous préservez votre santé,
mais vous augmentez aussi vos capacités physiques.
Votre équipe GRAMMER

vous souhaite bonne route !
Impression
Copyright © Soc. ¯4°5±1²²³'°

¯4°5±1²²³'° AG
Boîte postale 1454
D-92204 Amberg
Tous droits de reproduction, de traduction,
même partielle, exclus sans l’accord écrit préalable
de la société ¯4°5±1²²³'° .
Amberg, 08/2004
F 27
3
4
5
2 1
977
28 F
Mode d'emploi
Sommaire
Instructions ................................................................................................. 30
Instructions de sécurité............................................................................... 30
Garantie ...................................................................................................... 32
Fonctions et utilisation du siège.................................................................. 33
1 Réglage du poids ................................................................................ 33
2 Réglage longitudinal ........................................................................... 33
3 Rallonge de dossier * ** ..................................................................... 34
4 Chauffage du siège * ** ..................................................................... 34
5 Réglage lombaire................................................................................ 34
6 Accoudoirs * ** ................................................................................... 35
7 Inclinaison des accoudoirs * ............................................................... 35
8 Réglage de l'inclinaison du dossier..................................................... 35
Entretien...................................................................................................... 36
* si disponible ** peut être rééquipé
F 29
Instructions
Lisez complètement le mode d'emploi avant la mise en service du produit.
Conservez le mode d'emploi dans le véhicule pour qu’il soit à tout moment à portée de
main du conducteur.
Seul un personnel qualifié est autorisé à monter, à vérifier et à réparer le siège de
conducteur.
Les dispositions légales en vigueur dans le pays d’utilisation et les instructions de
montage du constructeur automobile doivent être respectées.
Les instructions de montage du pays d’utilisation peuvent être fournies sur demande par
la société ´4µ5¶1··¸'µ , ses concessionnaires ou par le constructeur automobile.
Un siège fonctionnant correctement et adapté à la stature du conducteur est une
condition préalable pour préserver votre santé. Gardez votre siège de conducteur en bon
état de fonctionnement en effectuant des entretiens et des contrôles réguliers.
Les contrôles de fonctionnement doivent être effectués en même temps que les
travaux d’entretien du véhicule (voir aussi le plan d’entretien du véhicule).
Conservez le mode d’emploi à proximité du siège de conducteur. Au cas où le siège
serait remis à une tierce personne, le mode d‘emploi doit être joint à celui-ci.
Instructions de sécurité
Lorsque vous effectuez des raccordements électriques au réseau d’alimentation de bord,

respectez impérativement les instructions suivantes :
Avant de raccorder un interrupteur intégré au siège, un chauffage de siège ou un
compresseur, veuillez vous informer de toutes les données techniques électriques
relatives au véhicule, à savoir la tension, la protection par fusibles et le type de
raccordement, auprès du constructeur automobile, de la société ´4µ5¶1··¸'µ ou auprès
de ses concessionnaires.
Pour des raisons de sécurité, le montage et le raccordement au réseau d’alimentation de
bord ne doivent être effectués que par du personnel qualifié autorisé.
Les raccordements du siège doivent être protégés par fusibles indépendamment des
autres composants du véhicule.
DC Compresseur Chauffage du siège / Interrupteur du siège –

Compresseur Intensité max. admissible
12V 10A 20A 12V DC 10mA (mini.)
24V 10A 15A 250V DC 5A (maxi.)
48V 10A 10A
µ'¹º»$¼)½¾¹¿%ÀÁ¿¹$¼Á»$Á%Â'Ã Ä Å Á%Â ¹$¼¼¾Æ%Â ¹$¾¼Ç¾ÈÅ ÉÊ$¹+Ë Les intensités min. et max. admissibles
ne sont valables que pour une charge ohmique.
En cas de charge inductive ou capacitive, un circuit protecteur protégeant les récepteurs
électriques doit être monté sur le véhicule par le constructeur automobile. Si vous avez
des doutes, »Ç¼ ¹È%È¹ÌÍ ÎÀ¾%È»$¾¿%ÀÁ%È%Â¼¾¿Â ¹$¾¼*»$¾%Â)À*ºÀÏÅ Ã ¹»Î»$Á%ÂÇ*Ä ¹Ð Ð ¹¿Â¾¹$¼'Ã ¹
¼ »¿%¿%À¼)Ç$¹º¹$Á%ÂÑ
30 F
Un siège de conducteur mal ajusté ne dispose que d’une zone d’oscillation réduite. Afin
de prévenir les lésions du dos et tout endommagement du siège, il faut l’ajuster ÒÓÒ$Ô%Õ
Ö× ÒØÙÚÙ%ÕÛ Ü Û ÝÒÕÛ ÞÔ du véhicule et ß Ö× ÒØÙÚ Ö× Ò$Ôà$ÚáÚ$Ô%Õâ$Ú Ö ÞÔâÙ Ö Õ Ú$Ùã en fonction du
poids de celui-ci.
Afin d' éviter les blessures, il est interdit de déposer â$ÚÝÞä å ÚÕ Ýâ$Ò$Ô%ÝÜ Ò-æÞÔÚ
â*ç ÞÝ Ö Û Ü Ü ÒÕÛ ÞÔ du siège de conducteur.
è'ÓÒ$Ô%Õ'Ü Òá+Û ÝÚÚ$ÔÝÚ$ã ÓÛ Ö Ú
du siège de conducteur, il faut enlever Ü ÚÝÚá+äÒ$Ü Ü Òà$ÚÝ des
rembourrages du siège et du dossier.
Afin d' accident, il faut vérifier ÒÓÒ$Ô%Õ'Ü Òá+Û ÝÚÚ$ÔáÒ$ã
éviter tout risque d'
Ö× ÚâÙÓé × Û Ö ÙÜ Ú
que tous les dispositifs de réglage sont bien enclenchés.
Il est interdit d'
activer les dispositifs de réglage du siège êÚ$Ôâ$Ò$Ô%ÕØÙÚÜ Ú-Óé × Û Ö ÙÜ Úã)ÞÙÜ Ú .
ëMÛÜ ÚâÞÝ%ÝÛ Ú$ã'ã Úá+äÞÙãã éÒéÕ éÚ$ÔÜ ÚÓéì le réglage du dossier de siège ne doit être
actionné que si la plaque dorsale est retenue, par ex. avec la main. Sinon, ÓÞÙ%ÝãÛ ÝØÙÚæ
â$Ú-ÓÞÙ%ÝäÜ ÚÝ%ÝÚ$ã car la plaque dorsale pourrait jaillir vers l’avant.
íÞÙ%Õ Ú-Õã Ò$Ô%Ý%î)Þã0áÒÕÛ ÞÔÒ$êêÞã Õ é%ÚÒ$ÙáÞâ$ï$Ü Úâ$Ú-Ýé$ãÛ Ú (p. ex. pièces de rééquipement ou
de rechange non originales au lieu de pièces d’origine de la société ð4ñ5è1òòó'ñ ) peut
causer l’annulation de l’état de conformité certifié du siège de conducteur. Ceci pourrait
Ö Ö Ö Ö Ö
avoir pour conséquence Ü Òã ÚÝ%ÕãÛ ÕÛ ÞÔâ$Ú Ú$ã Õ Ò$Û ÔÚÝî)ÞÔ ÕÛ ÞÔ%ÝâÙÝÛ ïà$Úâ$Ú ÞÔâÙ Õ Ú$Ùã
Ö
qui pourraient mettre en danger ÓÞÕã Ú-Ýé ÙãÛ Õ é . Pour cette raison, Õ)ÞÙ%Õ Ú-Õã Ò$Ô%Ý%î)Þã0áÒÕÛ ÞÔ
du siège doit impérativement être homologuée par la société ð4ñ5è1òòó'ñ .
Lors du montage et du démontage d’un siège de conducteur, il faut impérativement tenir
compte des instructions du constructeur automobile.
Ne soulevez pas le siège en le prenant par les couvercles. Sinon, il y a àã Ò$ÔâãÛ ÝØÙÚ
â*ç Ò Ö%Ö Û â$Ú$Ô%Õ Ö Ò$ã'Ü ÚÝ Ö ÞÙ%ÓÚ$ã Ö Ü ÚÝêÞÙãã Ò$Û Ú$Ô%ÕÝÚâ$éÕ Ò Ö× Ú$ãÞÙÝÚäãÛ ÝÚ$ã .
Avant le démontage du siège de conducteur, il faut déconnecter tous les raccordements
par fiche entre le siège et le réseau d’alimentation de bord. Lorsque vous reconnectez le
siège, il faut s’assurer de l'
étanchéité (poussière, eau) des raccordements.
Le siège peut être équipé ultérieurement de ceintures de sécurité. ô$ç éØÙÛ êÚáÚ$Ô%Õ
ÙÜ Õ é$ãÛ Ú$Ùã en ceintures n’est autorisé que si Ü Ú Ö ÞÔ%Ý%ÕãÙ Ö Õ Ú$Ùã*Ò$Ù%Õ)Þ*áÞäÛ Ü ÚÒâÞÔÔé-ÝÞÔ
Ò Ö%Ö Þã)âêã é%Ò$Ü Ò$äÜ Úì car la fixation du siège doit alors supporter une charge plus élevée.
Cet équipement ultérieur devra être effectué conformément aux dispositions et aux
directives du pays d’utilisation correspondant et être approuvé par la société ð4ñ5è1òòó'ñ .
Les ceintures de sécurité montées ultérieurement doivent impérativement être mises
Òõ ÓÒ$Ô%Õ'Ü Òá+Û ÝÚÚ$ÔÝÚ$ã ÓÛ Ö ÚâÙÓé × Û Ö ÙÜ Ú .
ÜÚÝ%Õ'Û á+êé$ã ÒÕÛ îâ$Ú Ö× Ò$Ôà$Ú$ã'Ü ÚÝ Ö Ú$Û Ô%ÕÙã ÚÝâ$Ú-Ýé Ö ÙãÛ Õ é après chaque accident.
Si un siège est équipé de ceintures de sécurité, Ü Ú-ÝÛ ïà$Ú et ÝÒ-îÛ öÒÕÛ ÞÔ doivent
également, après un accident, être soumis à un contrôle par du personnel qualifié.
Il faut s’assurer régulièrement que les assemblages par vis sont äÛ Ú$ÔÝÚ$ãã éÝ . Si le siège
bouge, cela peut indiquer que des vis sont débloquées ou qu’il y a un défaut.
F 31
Si vous constatez des irrégularités dans le fonctionnement du siège de conducteur (p. ex.
une suspension défectueuse, une déformation du support lombaire ou un soufflet
endommagé), ÷%øù%úûü ý þÿ

ý þ þ$ù%ý'ûù ý þ$ü þ ú ÷ $ü ú pour en chercher la
cause.

Le non-respect constitue un danger pour votre santé et $û þ$ù%ý þü þ ú ûþ

÷%÷ $þ$ù%ý .
Avant la mise en service du véhicule, vérifiez le bon ) øù÷ý øùùþ
þ$ù%ý des interrupteurs
intégrés au siège de conducteur (permettant d’arrêter des appareils quand vous quittez le
siège ou le véhicule).
En cas de dysfonctionnements, le véhicule ne doit pas être mis en service.
– !#"$%&# ('') %**+
–
'þ øúþÿ ú, ø-/. þý úúû'ü , ú%ú úþ, ûùú 0$þ avec interrupteur intégré de détection
d’occupation 1 sinon le véhicule pourrait se mettre en marche sans chauffeur en dehors
d’une utilisation normale.
– !#"$%&(, ('') %**+ –
Descendre du siège pendant que le véhicule roule provoque son arrêt.
Pendant la circulation - siège occupé - ne pressez pas le soufflet vers l’intérieur.
– !#"$%&(, %')#!%*2%**+
–
Veillez à ce û, $ û÷ûùø-/. þý ùü û $þ ne pénètre à ü , ù%ý þ$ûûú 0$þ .
Le siège de conducteur ù, þú%ý* úý $ù÷
3þ54ü , þ6 $û et doit être protégé contre les
éclaboussures !
Des modifications ou équipements ultérieurs des sièges de conducteur de la société
22%*
ne doivent être effectués que par un ý þ$ü þ $û%ý)ø ú
1

û þ úøùùþ$ü

û $ü þýú ÷ $ü ú tout en respectant les prescriptions d’utilisation, d’entretien et de
montage ainsi que les dispositions en vigueur dans le pays d’utilisation correspondant.
Un øù%ý $ þ ù÷%ø þ÷ý

risque de causer des ü ú øù%ú÷%ø ø þ$ü ü þú ainsi que des
ø $þú ý þ$ü ú1
et le fonctionnement correct du siège de conducteur ou des
pièces rapportées ne peut pas être assuré.
Garantie
La société 22%*
décline toute responsabilité pour les dommages consécutifs dus à
un montage et un maniement incorrect ou une réparation incorrecte du siège.
Pour avoir plus de détails sur la garantie accordée par 22%*
, veuillez lire la facture
ou le bon de livraison. Toute garantie autre que celles stipulées dans ces deux
documents sera refusée par .22%*
32 F
Fonctions et utilisation du siège
Réglage du poids
Le siège doit être réglé en fonction du poids
du conducteur lorsque celui-ci est assis sur le
siège en tirant ou en appuyant sur la manette
de réglage du poids.
Le poids du conducteur est réglé
max. correctement lorsque la flèche est bien lisible
dans la zone centrale du hublot.
A l’intérieur de ce hublot, la hauteur peut être
min. 978 réglée individuellement jusqu’à un
allongement minimal du ressort.
Le poids minimal ou maximal peut être réglé
par l’enclenchement de la butée inférieure ou
supérieure.
Afin d'éviter des dommages corporels et
matériels, il faut contrôler et ajuster le réglage
individuel du poids avant de mettre le véhicule
en marche.
Pour éviter d’endommager le
compresseur, il ne doit pas être actionné
pendant plus d’une minute lors du réglage du
poids.
Réglage longitudinal
Actionner la manette de blocage, soit vers le
haut soit de côté pour libérer le réglage
longitudinal.
7*8 8 9:68; <:>=
?; @
AB9CD EF6F
; C9:68#=
G(D EFH8; <::9JIKEJ@L EME:9J8 8 9C9
NL <FJEO9K9:
CE:68*L EF6<:
CB; 8 9P
7*8 8 9:68; <:>=
Q L/RES; @
AB9
CD TF
S EJ@9
M9:68#=
G(D EFH8; <::9JIL EME:9J8 8 9ABD EB
979
F
S 9B6UC9FJ9L L 9V F
;H9J8*:9L EW@E; @; @6@9JI
KEJ@9:KEJ@6@E:68*L EME; :9:
C9J@6@
<B6@XYKSY<
8 9FH8; <:; :68 TOS T69ZYP
Après avoir effectué le réglage, la
manette de blocage doit s’enclencher dans la
position souhaitée. Celle-ci bloquée, vous ne
pouvez plus déplacer le siège de conducteur
dans une autre position.
Ne soulevez pas la manette de blocage
avec la jambe ou le mollet.
F 33
Rallonge de dossier * **
La rallonge de dossier peut être ajustée en
hauteur en tirant ou introduisant la tige avec
des crans du dossier jusqu’à la butée.
Pour enlever la pièce de rallonge du dossier,
il faut la sortir en tirant brusquement vers le
haut pour dépasser la butée finale.
985
Chauffage du siège * **
Actionnez l’interrupteur pour activer ou
désactiver le chauffage du siège.
0 0 = Chauffage du siège NON ACTIVE

1 = Chauffage du siège ACTIVE.
980
1
Réglage lombaire
Le support lombaire permet d' augmenter
0 aussi bien le confort de l'
assise que la liberté
de mouvement du conducteur.
2
On peut ajuster individuellement le renflement
1 dans la zone supérieure du dossier rembourré
en tournant la roue à main manuellement vers
le haut ; tourner la roue à la main vers le bas
2 permet d’ajuster individuellement celui de la
zone inférieure.
981
0 = Pas de renflement
1 = Renflement maximal en haut
2 = Renflement minimal en bas
34 F
Accoudoirs * **
Vous pouvez, au besoin, faire basculer les
accoudoirs vers l'arrière ou régler leur
hauteur.
Le réglage de la hauteur des accoudoirs
s’effectue en ôtant le capuchon sur le côté du
siège (flèche) et en dévissant l’écrou
hexagonal (clé de 13 mm) qui se trouve
derrière le capuchon. Ajustez la hauteur
983 souhaitée des accoudoirs (5 pas) et resserrez
l’écrou hexagonal. Ensuite, remettez en place
le capuchon.
Inclinaison des accoudoirs *

Vous pouvez modifier l’inclinaison des
accoudoirs en tournant la roue à la main.
En tournant la roue à la main vers l’extérieur
(+), la partie avant de l’accoudoir sera levée ;
tourner la roue à la main vers l’intérieur (-)
-+ permet d’abaisser l’accoudoir.
984
Réglage de l'inclinaison du
- 5° +30° dossier
Le mécanisme de réglage du dossier peut
être relâché si vous actionnez la manette de
blocage vers le haut.
Après avoir effectué le réglage, la
manette de blocage doit s’enclencher dans la
position souhaitée. Celle-ci bloquée, vous ne
pouvez plus déplacer le siège de conducteur
982
dans une autre position.
Dans le but d’une utilisation ergono-
mique, l’angle du dossier (15 pas à 2,5
degrés) doit être réglé entre -5 et +30 .
F 35
Entretien
La saleté peut nuire au bon fonctionnement
du siège de conducteur.
C’est pourquoi, veillez à ce que votre siège
soit toujours propre !
Il n’est pas nécessaire de sortir les coussins
de la carcasse du siège pour les nettoyer.
[ \/]^_` a
bcdedf\ dJa6ac_ d\ g_ a
bcd
\ deg
a6a` d_*f^Ja
h
c\ dWacf` i d
jdk6i
l d_ a\ m ^ l ^k6i#n
o
g_ aeckdJi iYg
]H^pdedJah6gc6a6a` k6a
eceg
a6a` d_rq
` \/s ^c6i*_ tp\ d_
\ m ` k
h
\ ` k^` a
gkeceg
a6a` d_dk
986
_ dJi dk^k6i*\ deg

a6a` d_^ l dh\ ^j^` ku
v#wwx*y*w[ zy|{ Ne pas nettoyer le siège de
conducteur avec un appareil de nettoyage à
haute pression !
Evitez de mouiller le tissu des coussins
lorsque vous le nettoyez.
\ ^_ tJa` a6i ^k

hJdec5i` a6ac
Vérifiez d'
abord sur une petite surface cachée
kdJi iYg
]H^k6i ah6gc_ ^k6i a}
gc_i` a6ac6adJi
avant d' utiliser les
j^Ji` ~_ dJa}\ ^Ja6i` bcdJa .
36 F
37
38
GRAMMER: Comfort del sedile per massime esigenze!
Lei ha acquistato un sedile GRAMMER. Congratulazioni!
Si accomodi e provi il comfort del sedile con la massima sicurezza.
Goda il piacere di un sedile per conducente, che si distingue per il suo
impiego semplice e l'elevata capacità di adattamento.
Il Suo nuovo sedile non giova solo alla Sua salute, ma aumenta anche le
Sue prestazioni.
Buon viaggio Le augura

il Suo Team GRAMMER
Sigla editoriale
Copyright © Ditta *

*
AG
Postfach 1454
D-92204 Amberg
E' vietata la ristampa, la riproduzione o traduzione,

anche parziale, senza l'autorizzazione scritta
della Ditta *
.
Amberg, 08/2004
I 39
3
4
5
2 1
977
40 I
Istruzioni per luso
Indice
Avvertenze ................................................................................................. 42
Avvertenze per la sicurezza ........................................................................ 42
Garanzia ..................................................................................................... 44
Funzioni del sedile e operazione ................................................................ 45
1 Regolazione del peso ......................................................................... 45
2 Regolazione longitudinale ................................................................... 45
3 Prolunga dello schienale * **.............................................................. 46
4 Riscaldamento del sedile * **............................................................. 46
5 Supporto lombare ............................................................................... 46
6 Braccioli * ** ....................................................................................... 47
7 Inclinazione del bracciolo * ................................................................. 47
8 Regolazione dello schienale ............................................................... 47
Cura ............................................................................................................ 48
* se presente ** montabile a posteriori
I 41
Avvertenze
Le istruzioni per l’uso devono essere lette completamente prima della messa in funzione.
Le istruzioni per l'
uso devono essere portate con sé nel veicolo e devono essere
accessibili in qualsiasi momento al conducente del veicolo.
Il montaggio, la manutenzione e la riparazione del sedile del conducente deve essere
effettuato soltanto da personale specializzato.
Devono essere osservate le rispettive prescrizioni nazionali e le prescrizioni di montaggio
del costruttore del veicolo.
*
Le rispettive prescrizioni di montaggio nazionali possono essere richieste alla ditta
o alle sue rappresentanze o presso il costruttore del veicolo.
Un funzionamento ottimale e una regolazione individuale del sedile del conducente sono
indispensabili per salvaguardare la propria salute. Mantenete perciò la funzionalità del
sedile del conducente con una cura sufficiente e controlli regolari del funzionamento.
I controlli del funzionamento devono essere adattati ai rispettivi intervalli di
manutenzione del veicolo (vedere lo schema di manutenzione del veicolo).
Le istruzioni per l’uso devono essere conservate insieme al sedile del conducente. Nel
caso che il sedile del conducente venga passato a terzi si deve consegnare anche il
manuale.
Avvertenze per la sicurezza
Per i necessari collegamenti elettrici alla rete di bordo si devono osservare i punti
seguenti:
Prima della connessione di un interruttore presente nel sedile, di un riscaldamento del
sedile oppure di un compressore devono essere richiesti i rispettivi dati elettrici del veicolo
riguardo alla tensione, alla protezione e al tipo di connessione alla ditta , alle
*
sue rappresentanze oppure presso il costruttore del veicolo.
Per motivi di sicurezza il montaggio ed il collegamento alla rete di bordo deve essere
effettuato soltanto da personale specializzato e autorizzato.
I collegamenti del sedile devono essere protetti separatamente e indipendentemente da
altri componenti del veicolo.
DC Compressore Riscaldamento del Interruttore del sedile –

sedile / compressore Capacità di corrente portata
12V 10A 20A 12V DC 10mA (min.)
24V 10A 15A 250V DC 5A (max.)
48V 10A 10A

JJ >
6 * 6 6 Y /
Minimale e massimale capacità di
corrente portata con puro carico ohmico.
In caso di un carico induttivo oppure capacitivo va eseguito un circuito di protezione dei

J JHJ6
66 Y / 6 HJ
consumatori al veicolo da parte del costruttore del veicolo. Nel caso che ci siano delle
6
6Y
questioni insolute
.
42 I
I sedili che non sono stati regolati correttamente hanno un campo di oscillazione minore.
Per evitare danni alla schiena e al sedile, ¡¢£ J¤¥¦ 6¡§J¨6¨¢ ¦5©ª¦6« ¤¦§
del veicolo o
¢£¤¥¦ J¬J¢
¡> ¤£ J¬6¤¦
£ª
¬J§¦6® §
è necessario eseguire la regolazione del peso al peso
del rispettivo conducente.
Per evitare ferimenti ¦
¤¦ devono essere deposti ¤¥¥§J® ® ¦§¯J¬J¢
¡>
¤£ J¤
¨
¬
¯ ¯ ¢J« ¤¦§ del
sedile del conducente.
°* ¡¢£§¯ ¯ ¢¡§J¨6¨¢ ¦5©ª¦6« ¤¦§ del sedile del conducente vanno rimossi i ¡¢J® § ¢¯ J£
¡>¢¯ ¯ ¢¥¥ ¤ dalle imbottiture del sedile e dello schienale.
Per evitare pericoli di incidente, ¡¢£§¯ ¯ ¢¡§J¨6¨¢ ¦5©ª¦6« ¤¦§ del veicolo è necessario
controllare se tutte le regolazioni sono scattate correttamente.
I dispositivi di regolazione del sedile del conducente non devono essere azionati £ª ¢¦6® §
¯/©ª¦6« ¤¦¢
¡§¦6®Y¤±
Con l' ¡>
¤
® ® ®ª ¢£§¯ ¯ ¤¨
¬
² §¦¢¯ §5¢J¨
¤ ® ¢J® ¢ la regolazione dello schienale deve essere
azionata solo se il pannello dello schienale viene sostenuto, per esempio con la mano. In
caso di non osservanza sussiste §¯ §J³¢J®Y¤§ ¬6¤¯ ¤£ /© § ¡§¦6®Y¤ dovuto allo scatto in
avanti del pannello dello schienale ±
´ª¢¯ ¨ ¢J¨ 6¡¤£ © ¬J¢£§¯ ¯ ¤¨6® ¢J®Y¤£ /¨§ § del sedile del conducente (p. es. in seguito
all'equipaggiamento a posteriori di pezzi non originali della ditta µ¶·¸¸¹*¶ ) può
annullare lo stato controllato del sedile del conducente. Possono §J¨6¨§ §¬6¤¡>Y¤¡§J¨6¨§
©º ª¦6« ¤¦ J£§¯/¨§£ ¯ § , che mettono in pericolo la vostra ¨ ¬
ª §J«/«H¢ . Per questo motivo
ª¢¯ ¨ ¢J¨ 6¡¤£ © ¬J¢¬6¤
¨6®ª6® ® ³¢ del sedile del conducente deve essere approvata dalla
ditta µ¶·¸¸¹*¶ .
Durante lo smontaggio ed il rimontaggio del sedile conducente devono assolutamente
essere osservate le istruzioni del costruttore del veicolo.
I sedili del conducente non devono essere sollevati alle coperture. In caso di non
osservanza sussiste §¯ §J³¢J®Y¤§ ¬6¤¯ ¤£ ¦
¬
£§¦6® § ¦ º ª¢¦6®Y¤¯ §¬6¤§ ®ª §
¤
® §§Y¤
¨6® ¢¬6¬J¢ ¨ J¤ª §Y¤¡>§ ¨
.
Prima di smontare il sedile conducente vanno staccati tutti i connettori tra il sedile e la
rete di bordo. Ricollegando i connettori deve essere mantenuta l’ermeticità (polvere,
acqua).
Le cinture statiche e ad arrotolamento possono essere generalmente montate a posteriori
sul sedile del conducente. Il ¡¤¦6® ¢¥¥ ¤¢
¤
¨6® § ¤
delle cinture di sicurezza è

¢ ¡¡§J¨6¨
¤
, a causa dell'elevato carico nella zona di fissaggio del sedile, ¨
¤¯ ¤£ §J®Y¤
¢Y¤
³¢J« ¤¦§£§¯J¬6¤
¨6®ª6® ®Y¤ §£§¯/³§ ¬6¤¯ ¤
.
L'equipaggiamento a posteriori deve essere eseguito osservando le rispettive prescrizioni
e direttive nazionali, e deve essere approvato dalla ditta µ¶·¸¸¹*¶±
Le cinture di sicurezza montate a posteriori devono essere allacciate ¡¢£ 6¡§J® ® § § ¦
©ª¦6« ¤¦§
il veicolo.
Dopo un incidente ¯ §¬
¦6®ª §£ /¨ ¬
ª §J«/«H¢£§J³
¤¦
¤§J¨6¨§ §W¨
¤
¨6® ®ª ® §
.
Con le cinture di sicurezza montate sul sedile del conducente, dopo un incidente il ¢¦
¬
²§
¨§£ ¯ §
e il © ¨6¨¢¥¥ ¤ £§¯/¨§£ ¯ §£§¯J¬6¤¦
£ª
¬J§¦6® §
devono essere controllati da personale
tecnico.
I 43
I collegamenti a vite devono essere controllati regolarmente per vedere se »
¼½
¼¾¿ »6»¿¿ ½
»ÀÁÀ. Un traballamento del sedile può essere dovuto a collegamenti a vite allentati o ad
altri difetti.
Se vengono accertate irregolarità nelle funzioni del sedile del conducente (p. es.
molleggio difettoso del sedile, bombatura del supporto lombare impropria o soffietto
danneggiato) rivolgersi ¿ ÂÂÀÁ¿ ÃJÄ Ã
ÂÀ½6Ä À5ÃÁÅ½
Æ ¼
¾ ¾¿ Ç
¿ ½ÃW»ÈÀÇ
¿ ÃÉ ¿ Ê/ÊHÃJÄ Ã
per far eliminare
la causa.
In caso di non osservanza sussiste pericolo per la propria salute e un ÀÉ ÀJËÃJÄY¼ÈÀÌ¿ Ç6¼É ¼Á¿
¿ ½
Ç
¿ ÁÀ½6Ä À
.
Prima della messa in funzione del veicolo va controllato il di eventuali ¾Å½6Ê¿ ¼½Ã
ÂÀ½6ÄY¼
interruttori presenti nel sedile del conducente (per l'arresto di aggregati quando si lascia il
sedile del conducente o il veicolo).
In caso di disturbi di funzionamento il veicolo non deve essere messo in funzione.
– Í*ÎÍÏ*Ð#ÑÒÔÓ*Í*ÕÖ ×ÒÎ
ÒÔØÖÖ Ù#×)Ö ØÍ*Ù*ÑÍ
–
I sedili del conducente con interruttore incorporato per l’identificazione occupazione sedile
½
¼½
devono essere caricati, eccetto che per il normale impiego, Ç6¼½¼ÚÚÀJÄ Ä¿/»ÅÉ É Ã
»ÅÈÀÌ ¾¿ Ç
¿ ÀÁÀÉ/»ÀÁ¿ É À
, poiché‚ altrimenti il veicolo potrebbe mettersi in movimento senza
conducente.
– Í*ÎÍÏ*Ð#ÑÒÔÓ*Í*ÕÖ ×ÒÎ
ÒÔØÖÖ Ù#×)Ö ØÍ*Ù*ÑÍ
–
Un alleggerimento della superficie del sedile durante il viaggio provoca l’arresto del
veicolo.
Durante il funzionamento - con il sedile del conducente carico – non premere il soffietto
verso l’interno.
– Ó*Í*ÕÖ ×ÒÎ
ÒÔØÖJ×ÒÙ*ÑÛ*ÜÖ ÒÙÍ
–
Fare attenzione che ½
¼½ penetrino ÁÀÚÉ ¿J¼ÚÚÀJÄ Ä¿ oppure É ¿ ÝÅ¿ Á¿HÃÉ É Þ ¿ ½6Ä ÀÌ½
¼ÁÀÉ/»ÀÁ¿ É À
ÁÀÉJÇ6¼½
ÁÅ
ÇJÀ½6Ä À .
Il sedile non è Ì ÀJ»¿ »6Ä À½6Ä À5ÃÉ É Þ ÃÇ6ÝÅÃ e deve essere protetto dagli spruzzi d’acqua!
Qualsiasi modifica ed equipaggiamento a posteriori effettuato ai sedili conducente della
ditta ßÕÐààÍ*Õ
deve essere eseguito soltanto da ¼
¾ ¾¿ Ç
¿ ½À5ÃÅ6ÄY¼Ì¿ Ê/ÊHÃJÄ À5ÀÈÀÌ »
¼½ÃÉ À
ÃÁÁÀJ»6ÄÌ ÃJÄY¼ÃÁÀÚÅÃJÄ Ã
ÂÀ½6Ä À
osservando le rispettive prescrizioni riguardo all’uso, alla
manutenzione e al montaggio nonché le direttive nazionali.
In caso di un Â¼½6Ä ÃÚÚ¿ ¼¿ Â>ÈÌY¼ÈÌ¿ ¼
sussiste il pericolo di nonché di ¾ ÀÌ¿ ÂÀ½6Ä¿ ÁÃ½½¿
ÂÃJÄ ÀÌ¿ ÃÉ ¿
e la funzione del sedile del conducente oppure dei componenti montati non può
essere garantita.
Garanzia
La ditta ßÕÐààÍ*Õ
non assume alcuna responsabilità in caso di montaggio, impiego,
utilizzo e riparazione improprio dei sedili per conducente.
Ulteriori dettagli sulla garanzia concessa dalla ditta ßÕÐààÍ*Õ
li troverete sulla fattura
oppure sulla bolletta di consegna. Altre garanzie oltre a quella descritta lì non si possono
far valere nei confronti della ditta . ßÕÐààÍ*Õ
44 I
Funzioni del sedile e comando
Regolazione del peso
Il rispettivo peso del conducente deve essere
regolato, con il sedile del conducente
caricato, tirando oppure premendo la leva per
la regolazione del peso.
Il corretto peso del conducente è regolato
max. quando la freccia si trova nella posizione
media della finestrella di ispezione.
Entro questo campo visivo l’altezza
min. 978 individuale può essere adattata fino ad una
corsa minima della molla.
La regolazione del peso minima o massima
viene indicata percettibilmente quando viene
raggiunto il fermo finale superiore oppure
inferiore.
Per evitare danni alla salute e al
materiale, prima della messa in funzione del
veicolo è necessario controllare e registrare la
regolazione individuale del peso del
conducente.
Al fine di evitare qualsiasi danno al
compressore non azionare il compressore per
più di un minuto quando si regola il peso.
Regolazione longitudinale
Spostando verso l'alto la leva di bloccaggio si
disimpegna la regolazione in lunghezza.
á*â â ãä6åæ çäãèéãêæ ë6çì çíæ
æ ä
ë
æ íãä6â ãî
ï#çäðJåæ çäðê ãì ðì ãJñðíæ
òì çë6ëJðóóæ çíôê ðä6â ãæ ì/ñæ ðóóæ çõ
á*â â ãä6åæ çäãèéãêæ ë6çì çíæ
ë6çä6âô6öæ çäãî
á*÷ ÷ ãêê ðê ãì ðì ãJñðWö
çì çðì ì ðë6çä
ëJð
979
øYé*êYç
â ãJåæ çäãù ú
ä
çäûðJö6öðê ãì ð
ü ðä
çðìJíæ/ö
ç
â âYçíãì ì ðì ãJñðõ
Dopo aver effettuato la regolazione la
leva di bloccaggio deve scattare nella
posizione desiderata. Dopo il bloccaggio il
sedile non deve più lasciarsi spostare in
un’altra posizione.
Non alzare la leva di bloccaggio con la
gamba oppure il polpaccio.
I 45
Prolunga dello schienale * **
La prolunga dello schienale può essere
regolata individualmente in altezza tirandola
verso l’alto oppure spingendola verso il basso
(scatti percettibili fino al fermo finale).
Per togliere la prolunga dello schienale tirare
con forza verso l’alto, superando il fermo
finale.
985
Riscaldamento del sedile * **

Azionando l’interruttore il riscaldamento del
sedile viene acceso oppure spento.
0 0 = Riscaldamento DISINSERITO
1 = Riscaldamento INSERITO.
980
1
Supporto lombare
Con il supporto lombare può essere sia
0 aumentato il comfort del sedile che
mantenuta la durata delle prestazioni del
2 conducente.
1 Ruotando l’apposita manopola in alto il grado

di bombatura nella zona superiore
dell'
imbottitura dello schienale può essere
2 adattato in modo individuale, ruotandola in
basso si regola la zona inferiore dello
981
schienale.
0 = Nessuna bombatura
1 = Massima bombatura nella zona superiore
2 = Massima bombatura nella zona inferiore
46 I
Braccioli * **
I braccioli possono essere ribaltati, se
necessario, all’indietro ed essere portati
all’altezza individuale.
Per la regolazione dell’altezza dei braccioli
rimuovere la calotta rotonda (vedi freccia)
dalla copertura e allentare il dado esagonale
che si trova là dietro (chiave 13 mm).
Regolare i braccioli nella posizione desiderata
983 (5 scatti possibili) e serrare il dado esagonale.
Riposizionare alla fine la calotta sul dado.
Inclinazione del bracciolo *

L'
inclinazione longitudinale del bracciolo può
essere modificata ruotando la manopola.
Ruotando la manopola verso l' esterno (+) il
bracciolo viene sollevato all’estremità
anteriore, ruotando la manopola verso
-+ l'
interno (-) il bracciolo viene abbassato.
984
Regolazione dello schienale

- 5° +30°
Dopo l’azionamento della leva di bloccaggio
in alto viene sbloccata la dentatura del
dispositivo di regolazione dello schienale.
Dopo aver effettuato la regolazione la
leva di bloccaggio deve scattare nella
posizione desiderata. Dopo il bloccaggio lo
schienale non deve lasciarsi più spostare in
un'altra posizione.
982 Per un impiego ergonomico si deve
regolare l’angolo di regolazione dello
schienale (15 stadi a 2,5 gradi ognuno) tra –5
gradi e +30 gradi.
I 47
Cura
Lo sporco può compromettere il
funzionamento del sedile.
Mantenete perciò il sedile sempre pulito!
Per effettuare la pulizia le imbottiture non
devono essere staccate dal telaio del sedile.
ýþÿ
þÿ þ
þ

þ þ
ÿ þ
! # þ
" ÿ
þ þ þ ÿ þ $ þ
þ þ þ þ þ5þ þÿ þ
þ þ þ
þ þ þ %% &
986

')( (*,+.-,/ 01+*32

Non pulire il sedile con
macchine pulitrici a vapore ad alta pressione!
Durante la pulizia delle superfici delle
imbottiture evitare il passaggio di umidità
attraverso l'imbottitura.
ÿ ÿ
4 þ 5# " 6þ þ þÿ$þ
þÿ, #" ÿ þþÿ.% þÿ þ in

commercio prima su una superficie nascosta

e piccola.
I
48
49
50
GRAMMER: Asientos cómodos para los más exigentes.
Ud. ha adquirido un asiento GRAMMER ¡Enhorabuena!
Tome asiento y disfrutará de confort y seguridad. Alégrese de disponer de
un asiento de conducción caracterizado por un manejo sencillo y por una
gran capacidad de adaptación.
Con el nuevo asiento no solamente beneficiará su salud, sino que también
aumentará su capacidad de rendimiento.
Muy buen viaje le desea

el personal de GRAMMER
Colofón
718.9;::<,8
Copyright © Fa.
718.9;::<,8
AG
Postfach 1454
D-92204 Amberg
Prohibida la reimpresión, reproducción o traducción,

aunque sea en extracto, sin el consentimiento
718.9;::<,8
por escrito de la empresa
Amberg, 08/2004
E 51
3
4
5
2 1
977
52 E
Instrucciones de manejo
Índice
Indicaciones ................................................................................................ 54
Indicaciones de seguridad .......................................................................... 54
Garantía ...................................................................................................... 56
Funciones y manejo del asiento ................................................................. 57
1 Ajuste del peso ................................................................................... 57
2 Ajuste longitudinal............................................................................... 57
3 Prolongación del respaldo * ** ........................................................... 58
4 Calefacción de asiento * ** ................................................................ 58
5 Soporte lumbar ................................................................................... 58
6 Apoyabrazos * ** ................................................................................ 59
7 Inclinación del apoyabrazos * ............................................................. 59
8 Ajuste del respaldo ............................................................................. 59
Cuidados..................................................................................................... 60
* si existe ** instalable posteriormente
E 53
Indicaciones
Deben leerse completamente las instrucciones de manejo antes de la puesta en servicio.
Las instrucciones de manejo deben llevarse en el vehículo, permaneciendo en todo
momento al alcance del conductor.
Únicamente personal especializado debe efectuar el montaje, el mantenimiento y la
reparación del asiento.
Deben tenerse en cuenta las disposiciones propias del país, así como las instrucciones
de montaje dadas por el fabricante del vehículo.
Las normas específicas del país pueden consultarse en la empresa =1>.?;@@A,> o en sus
representaciones.
Para prevenir daños, es imprescindible que el asiento funcione óptimamente y esté
ajustado a su peso y estatura. Por lo tanto, mantenga su asiento en perfecto estado
dedicándole los cuidados suficientes.
Como mínimo, los controles de mantenimiento se deben hacer coincidir con los
intervalos de mantenimiento del vehículo.
Las instrucciones de manejo deben acompañar al asiento del conductor en caso que se
retire el asiento. En caso de que el asiento de conductor se entregue a terceros, también
deben adjuntarse las instrucciones de manejo.
Indicaciones de seguridad
Para la necesaria conexión a la red eléctrica del vehículo, es imprescindible que se tenga
en cuenta lo siguiente:
Antes de la conexión de un posible interruptor de asiento, una calefacción de asiento o un
compresor, se debe solicitar al fabricante del vehículo, a la empresa =1>.?;@@A,> o a uno
de sus representantes los datos eléctricos correspondientes al vehículo, relativos a la
tensión, protección por fusible y al tipo de conexión.
Por motivos de seguridad, la instalación y la conexión eléctrica deben efectuarse por
parte de personal autorizado especializado.
Las conexiones del asiento deben protegerse por fusibles de los otros elementos del
vehículo.
DC Compresor Calefacción de Interruptor asiento – intensidad

asiento / Compresor corriente máx. admisible
12V 10A 20A 12V DC 10mA (min.)
24V 10A 15A 250V DC 5A (max.)
48V 10A 10A
B CDE FGFE HCIG J GLK ME CN K JJOINPJD KLGQE K CNP,R
Intensidad de corriente mín. y máx. en carga
puramente resistiva.
Ante carga inductiva o capacitiva, se debe implementar una conexión de protección de
los usuarios, en el vehículo, llevada a cabo por el fabricante del vehículo. En caso de
G CN KQ%D KM GFPCKSE HC TUQKD K VKIJ KWOCN G J5G M
X G VJE FG CN KD K M
YK Z[ FOM P\
dudas,
54 E
Los asientos del conductor instalados incorrectamente presentan un área menor de
oscilación. Para evitar lesiones en su espalda y daños en el asiento del conductor, ] ^_ à
b b b b b b
`c] ]deà_ ]L` ^f%] gch] ` i
j` hk cei l5m o c] ]njònpe`na`c]f#qr ` `cl^ ecU_lgsm
deberá efectuarse el ajuste al peso individual del conductor.
b b
A fin de evitar lesiones, ^l ` dlar _ `lq
t `_la` î ]nol^] ùr gl del asiento.
b
v;^_ à ì ]deà_ ]L` ^La` g jr cr l del asiento del conductor, se deben retirar los
b
f%]_ ` gr ] i à `L`f#q] i ]wt ` tal vez existentes del acolchado del respaldo y del asiento.
b
Para evitar el riesgo de accidentes, ] ^_ à ì ]deà_ ]L` ^f%] gch] del vehículo,
compruebe que todos los dispositivos de ajuste hayan encajado correctamente.
Tomar la manija del dispositivo de ajuste de la longitud solamente por delante, en la
empuñadura empotrada prevista (no empuñarla del todo).
– x,y,z{ |1})~yv;x,}{ { ~1.v;{ y,,~ –
b b
Los dispositivos de ajuste y regulación del asiento ^l ` q` ^]ccr l^] g a` eg ] ^_ ì ]
f%] gch] .
b b b
Si se ha quitado ` iU]cli ch] l ` ig àd] i l , el dispositivo de ajuste de dicho respaldo
sólo deberá accionarse en el caso de que el respaldo se retenga con la mano. Si no se
b
tiene en cuenta esto, existe un ug ] ^gr àul ì àr ^ al desplazarse el respaldo
bruscamente hacia adelante.
b b b b
e] i per ` g.fl r r c]cr ^ `na` gr ` del asiento (p. ej. por montaje ulterior de
` iUà_ ] l
piezas no originales de la empresa |1}.v;y,} ) puede anular el estado homologado del
b b b b b
asiento. x,e` ` ^Lj` g a`d` g tse r c] ]aLe^cr l^à ` r chl]ar ` ^_l , poniendo en peligro
b b b
su aùegr ] . Por esta razón, ce] i per ` g.fl r r c]cr ^` î ]clâ_geccr ^ del asiento
tiene que ser autorizada por la empresa |1}.v;y,} .
¡Al desmontar y al montar el asiento del conductor, es imprescindible respetar las
especificaciones del fabricante del vehículo!
El asiento del conductor no se debe elevar tomándolo desde la cubierta. Si no se tiene en
b
cuenta esto, existe un ug ] ^gr àul ì àr ^ si se aflojan o se parten las cubiertas.
Antes de desmontar el asiento del conductor, se deben retirar todas las conexiones entre
el asiento del conductor y el sistema eléctrico de a bordo. Al restituir las conexiones
eléctricas, debe tenerse en cuenta la hermeticidad (polvo, agua).
En el asiento, pueden montarse ulteriormente cinturones de seguridad estáticos y
enrollables. )i l%a`d` gsf#r _ ` el `per d]f#r ` ^_lei _ ` gr lg de cinturones de seguridad
b b b b b
àdea `pe`na`h]lq_ ` ^r li ]L] e_lgr oU]cr ^ ` i
] qgr c] ^_ ` ` i
j` hk cei l , ya que la
fijación del asiento soporta elevadas cargas.
El equipamiento ulterior debe realizarse teniendo en cuenta las respectivas normas y
directrices específicas del país, debiendo ser autorizado por la empresa |1}.v;y,} .
b
Hay que ajustarse los cinturones de seguridad instalados posteriormente ] ^_ à `dl^` g
` i
j` hk cei l` ^f%] gch]
b b b b
Tras un accidente ` q`g ``f#di ]oU] g a`L` icr ^_eg^ `naùegr ] .
En el caso de los cinturones de seguridad montados en el asiento, es necesario que
b
personal especializado cl5f#dge` q`L` iU]ar ` ^_l%i ]nr t ]cr ^ ` if#r a fl después de un
accidente.
E 55
Periódicamente debe s%U de las uniones por tornillos. Un tambaleo
del asiento del conductor puede ser síntoma de uniones por tornillos sueltas o de otro
tipo de defecto.
En caso de observar irregularidades en las funciones del asiento del conductor (p. ej.
suspensión defectuosa del asiento del conductor, un arqueamiento desproporcionado del
respaldo lumbar o fuelle averiado), % % LL 5 U
para la reparación.
Si no se tiene en cuenta esto, habrá riesgos para su salud y también un %,
L .
Antes de la puesta en marcha del vehículo, debe asegurarse de que los interruptores que
puedan existir en el asiento del conductor (para la suspensión de elementos adicionales
al abandonar el asiento del conductor o el vehículo) % U %
En caso de anomalías en el funcionamiento, no debe poner en funcionamiento el
vehículo.
– 1 .¡;¢£ ¤ ¥5¦)¨§©¥¡3ªª¤ ©¥,¢,«¥ –
No se deben dejar ¬
%® s% sobre los asientos del
conductor que tengan interruptores para reconocimiento de disposición del asiento, de lo
contrario el vehículo podría ponerse en movimiento sin conductor.
– 1 .¡;¢£ ¤ ¥5¦)¨§©¥¡3ªª¤ ©¥,¢,«¥ –
Si se retira el peso de la superficie del asiento se produce una parada del vehículo.
Durante el funcionamiento – con el asiento del conductor soportando carga – no se debe
apretar el fuelle hacia adentro.
– ¯,¥,°¤ 1 )§©¥¡;¯, ¤ ¦¤ §1¢.¡;±¤ ¥,¢,«§ –
Se debe evitar que ® ¬
o ² ® entre en el U
U .
¡El asiento del conductor # s% ¬ y se debe evitar que sea salpicado por
agua!
La modificación o los trabajos de reequipamiento en los asientos de la empresa
1 .¡;±±¥, solamente pueden ser efectuados por U U ,
por por adecuadamente, teniéndose en
cuenta las normativas aplicables de utilización, mantenimiento y montaje, así como las
normas específicas del país.
En caso de w U5³ existe peligro de así como de ´
% y no se puede garantizar el funcionamiento del asiento o de los componentes
instalados.
Garantía
La empresa 1 .¡;±±¥, no asume ninguna garantía o responsabilidad en caso de
montaje, uso, aplicación o reparación inadecuados de los asientos, ni por los daños
resultantes de ello.
Puede encontrar detalles sobre la garantía ofrecida por la empresa 1 .¡;±±¥, en la
factura o en el albarán de entrega. No se podrán exigir a la firma 1 .¡;±±¥, otras
garantías aparte de las allí descritas.
56 E
Funciones y manejo del asiento
Ajuste del peso
El peso correspondiente del conductor deberá
ajustarse con él sentado sobre el asiento del
conductor tirando o presionando de la
palanca de ajuste del peso.
Se ha regulado el correcto peso del conductor
max. cuando la flecha se encuentra en el área
central clara del visualizador.
Dentro de esta área de visualización, se
min. 978 puede ajustar la altura individual hasta un
recorrido de amortiguación mínimo.
La regulación de peso mín. o máx. se
muestra cuando se alcanza de forma audible
el tope superior o inferior.
A fin de evitar lesiones para su salud o
daños materiales, antes de la puesta en
servicio del vehículo, debe controlarse y
ajustarse el peso individual del conductor.
Para evitar daños en el compresor, al
regular el peso, no se debe activar el
compresor durante más de 1 minuto.
Ajuste longitudinal
El mecanismo de regulación longitudinal
queda libre accionando hacia arriba la
palanca de bloqueo.
µ ¶,· ¸ ¹º» ¼¹ ½¾¸ ¿ » ÀÁÂÃ ¸LÄºº» Ã ¸ ¹· ¸Å
Æ Â Äºº» Â¹¸¿ Ä¾Ä ¿ Ä ¹ºÄÃ ¸LÄwÇsÈÉ· ¸
¿ Â¹À» ·ÈÃ» ¹Ä ¿ºÈÄ ¹ÃÂÈÉ· ¸Ã¸É· Ê
ºÂ¹ÃÈº» ¸ ¹ÃÂË
µ ¶,· ¸ ¹º» ¼¹ ½Ì5¸ ¿ » ÀÁÂÃ ¸

Í ÄÀÈ¿ ¿ ÄÃÈÁ ÄÉ5Å
979
Î Â Í Ä Á,¿ Ä¾Ä ¿ Ä ¹ºÄnÉÂ¿ Ä Í ¸ ¹· ¸L¸ ¹
¿ ÄL¸ Í ¾ÈÏÄÃÈÁ ÄÐ É¸ÀÈÁÂÃ ¸
¾Ä ¿ Ä ¹ºÄÑ ½¹ÂÒÄº¸ Á¿ Â¾ÂÁÃ ¸ ÓÄwÇ Â
Ã ¸¿ Ä¾Ä ¿ Ä ¹ºÄ Ë
La palanca de bloqueo tiene que encajar

en la posición deseada. Una vez que ha sido
bloqueado, no se debe desplazar el asiento
del conductor a otra posición.
Evitar levantar la palanca de bloqueo
con la pierna o la pantorrilla.
E 57
Prolongación del respaldo * **
La extensión del respaldo puede ser ajustada
individualmente en altura, tirando o
empujando de ésta en varios incrementos
hasta llegar al tope.
Para retirar la extensión del respaldo, tirar de
ella hacia arriba, el tope se vence con un tirón
adicional.
985
Calefacción de asiento * **
La calefacción de asiento se enciende o
apaga utilizando el interruptor.
0 0 = Calefacción DESCONECTADA
1 = Calefacción CONECTADA
980
1
Soporte lumbar
Con el apoyo lumbar se puede aumentar el
0 confort del asiento, permitiendo que el
conductor aumente su rendimiento.
2
Girando la rueda de ajuste hacia arriba, se
1 regula la curvatura en la parte superior del
acolchado del respaldo, y girando hacia
abajo, se regula individualmente la parte
2 inferior del acolchado del asiento.
981 0 = Ninguna curvatura
1 = Curvatura máx. arriba
2 = Curvatura máx. abajo.
58 E
Apoyabrazos * **
Los apoyabrazos son plegables hacia arriba
y la altura puede regularse individualmente.
Para regular la altura de los apoyabrazos,
retirar el tapón redondo (flecha) de la cubierta
y aflojar la tuerca de cabeza hexagonal
situada detrás (llave de 13 mm). Ajuste los
apoyabrazos a la posición deseada (consta
de 5 pasos) y apretar la tuerca hexagonal.
983 Presionar la cubierta nuevamente sobre la
tuerca.
Inclinación del apoyabrazos *

La inclinación longitudinal del apoyabrazos
puede modificarse girando el volante.
Si se gira hacia afuera (+), se eleva el
apoyabrazos; girándolo hacia adentro (-) se
inclina hacia adelante.
-+
984
Ajuste del respaldo

- 5° +30°
Después de accionar la palanca de bloqueo
hacia arriba, se libera el engranaje del ajuste
del respaldo del asiento.
Después del ajuste, la palanca de
bloqueo debe enganchar en la posición
deseada. Tras el bloqueo, el respaldo ya no
se deber mover a otra posición.
Para una operación ergonómica, se
982 puede regular el ángulo de ajuste del
respaldo (15 pasos, cada uno de 2,5°
grados) entre 5° y +30° grados.
E 59
Cuidados
La suciedad puede perjudicar el
funcionamiento del asiento del conductor.
¡Por lo tanto, mantenga limpio su asiento del
conductor!
Durante la limpieza, no es necesario aflojar ni
retirar el acolchado del bastidor del asiento.
Ô Õ5Ö × Ø ÙÚÛÜ Ö× ÖÝØ ÛÞÖÝß ×
Ü ÖÝà× ßáUß Ú ÝÖâÚãÝäßå%Ö Þæ ÖLÖ ×
äßÝäÛÜ Ö ×Ú ÖÝàß × ÜÛçßäØ ß
ßÜ Ö × ß Þæ Öè
986
é ×× Ø å#àØ ß Ú5Ö ×UßäÛ× äçßÜÛÜ Ö ×
Ú ÖÝàß × ÜÛ5êß ×UßääØ ÛÞß Ú5Ö ×UßwësãÝæ Ö
Ü Ö ×Ú ÖÝàß × ÜÛ%ÝÖÜ Ö âÖLß àÛìUß Ú5Ö ×
Ú ÖÝàß × ÜÛäÛÞ× ß%å%ß ÞÛí
é)îï,ð)ñò ó1ðô
¡No limpiar el asiento del
conductor con limpiador de alta presión!
Al limpiar la superficie de los acolchados,
procure evitar que se humedezca el interior
de los mismos.
Antes de proceder a la limpieza, comprobar
en una pequeña superficie poco visible que
æ ß àØ äÖ Úõ ßÝLì
ö Û
los productos limpiadores de
à× ÷ÝæØ äÛÝ ÞÛ%ÝÖß ÞàÖ ÚÞØ äØ ÛÝÛÝí
60 E
61
62
GRAMMER: Zitcomfort voor de hoogste eisen!
U heeft een stoel van GRAMMER aangeschaft. Gefeliciteerd!
Neem a.u.b. plaats en ervaar het zitcomfort en de veiligheid. Beleef plezier
aan een chauffeursstoel die wordt gekenmerkt door een eenvoudige bedie-
ning en vele aanpassingsmogelijkheden.
Met uw nieuwe stoel bevordert u niet alleen uw gezondheid, maar levert u
bovendien betere prestaties.
Uw GRAMMER team
wenst u een goede reis.
Impressum
Copyright © Fa. ø1ù.ú;ûûü,ù
ø1ù.ú;ûûü,ù AG
Postfach 1454
D-92204 Amberg
Herdruk, vermenigvuldiging of vertaling, ook als uittreksel,

is niet toegestaan zonder schriftelijke toestemming van
de firma ø1ù.ú;ûûü,ù .
Amberg, 08/2004
NL 63
3
4
5
2 1
977
64 NL
Handleiding
Inhoudsopgave
Instructies .................................................................................................. 66
Veiligheidsvoorschriften .............................................................................. 66
Garantie ...................................................................................................... 68
Functies en bediening van de stoel ............................................................ 69
1 Gewichts- en hoogte-instelling............................................................ 69
2 Lengte-instelling.................................................................................. 69
3 Rugverlenging * **.............................................................................. 70
4 Stoelverwarming * ** .......................................................................... 70
5 Lendensteun ....................................................................................... 70
6 Armleuningen * **............................................................................... 71
7 Neiging van de armleuning *............................................................... 71
8 Instelling van de rugleuning ................................................................ 71
Onderhoud .................................................................................................. 72
* indien aanwezig ** kan naderhand worden aangebracht
NL 65
Instructies
Voordat de stoel in gebruik wordt genomen moet de handleiding volledig worden gelezen.
De handleiding dient in het voertuig aanwezig te zijn, bij voorkeur binnen handbereik van
de chauffeur.
De chauffeursstoel mag alleen door deskundig personeel worden gemonteerd, onderhou-
den en gerepareerd.
Hierbij moet rekening worden gehouden met de landspecifieke voorschriften en instructies
van de voertuigfabrikant.
De landspecifieke voorschriften kunnen bij de firma ý1þ.ÿ,þ en haar vertegenwoordi-
gingen of de voertuigfabrikant worden opgevraagd.
Een voorwaarde voor het behoud van uw gezondheid is een optimaal functionerende en
individueel ingestelde chauffeursstoel. Door zorgvuldig onderhoud en een regelmatige
controle blijft de functionaliteit van uw chauffeursstoel lange tijd behouden.
De functiecontroles moeten aan de onderhoudsbeurten van het voertuig worden
aangepast (zie het onderhoudsschema van het voertuig).
De handleiding moet bij de chauffeursstoel worden bewaard. Als de chauffeursstoel aan
derden wordt doorgegeven, moet ook de handleiding worden doorgegeven.
Veiligheidsvoorschriften
Wanneer de stoel elektrisch op de boordspanning wordt aangesloten, moet het volgende

in ieder geval in acht worden genomen:
Vóór de aansluiting van de stoelschakelaar, de stoelverwarming of een compressor moe-
ten de elektrische gegevens voor de spanning, de beveiliging en de aansluitverbindingen
van het voertuig bij de voertuigfabrikant, de firma ý1þ.ÿ,þ of haar vertegenwoordigin-
gen worden opgevraagd.
Om veiligheidsredenen mag het inbouwen en het uitvoeren van aansluitingen op de
boordspanning enkel door deskundig personeel gebeuren.
De stoelaansluitingen moeten onafhankelijk van de andere voertuigonderdelen op
separate wijze worden beveiligd.
DC Compressor Stoelverwarming / Stoelschakelaar - stroombelasting

compressor
12V 10A 20A 12V DC 10mA (min.)
24V 10A 15A 250V DC 5A (max.)
48V 10A 10A

Min. en max. stroombelasting bij zuiver ohmse belasting.
Bij inductieve of capacitieve belasting moet de voertuigfabrikant een veiligheidsschakeling
voorzien voor de verbruikers aan het voertuig. Gelieve

! " #
$$
# #%'&( )
# als er iets onduidelijk is.
66 NL
Verkeerd ingestelde chauffeursstoelen hebben een kleiner veerbereik. Om blessures aan

de rug en beschadigingen aan de chauffeursstoel te voorkomen moet de stoel * +,+- +
. ++-,/1032+1045+- 06* 78* 9)7+:-6* .<; 5-,07+95'=)+9)5>4/9)?2/6> > +6- ; 5-,07+ ; * @@+A ,
op het individuele gewicht van de chauffeur worden ingesteld.
Om letsels te voorkomen mogen er 7++9B455- ; +-C+9%* 9%2+104++-:+- +* . van de chauf-
feursstoel worden gedeponeerd.
DFEE-,+G* 97+:-6* . 9/=)+ van de chauffeursstoel moeten eventuele 4+-C/ .. * 97@=)/10 +-* H
/A +9 van de zit- en rugkussens worden verwijderd.
Om gevaar voor ongevallen te voorkomen, moet bij het voertuig - 455-,/1032+103* 9)7+:-6*
.
; 5-,07+95'=)+9 - gecontroleerd worden of alle instellingen juist vergrendeld zijn.
De instelvoorzieningen van de chauffeursstoel mogen niet worden bediend 0* I ,+9@%2+10
-* I ,+9 .
J 9,* +9%2+103-67 . 6@@+9B4+- ; * I ,+-,8* @ , mag de instelling van de rugleuning alleen worden
gedaan wanneer de rugschaal bijv. met de hand wordt tegengehouden. Wordt dit niet in
;
acht genomen bestaat een 4+-2557,8-* @* ?5)455-4+- 59,* 97+9 doordat de rugschaal
versneld naar voren kan komen.
K3A . +4+- /9,+-* 97G//9),+> /:-* + . @=)/10* 7+G6* 0 45+-* 97 van de chauffeursstoel (bijv. door
het naderhand aanbrengen van niet originele onderdelen van de firma LNMPOQQK3M ) kan
de goedgekeurde staat van de chauffeursstoel tenietdoen. Er kunnen >69?R0* +1@B4/9),+
?2/6> > +6- @@05+. A ; 5-,+9%:+RS94A 5+, die uw 4+* A * 72+* , in gevaar brengen. Op grond
hiervan dient +A +?59@0-6?R0* +14+4+- /9,+-* 97 van de chauffeursstoel door de firma
LNMPOQQK3M te worden vrijgegeven.
Bij het demonteren of het inbouwen van de chauffeursstoel moeten de aanwijzingen van
de voertuigfabrikant steeds in acht worden genomen.
Hef de chauffeursstoelen niet aan de afdekkingen omhoog. Wordt dit niet in acht geno-
;
men bestaat een 4+-2557,8-* @* ?5)455-4+- 59,* 97+9),//-,+B/1>,+
.. * 97+9 . 699+9
.
A 5@:- + +9 .
Als de chauffeursstoel gedemonteerd wordt, moeten alle verbindingsdraden tussen de
stoel en de boordspanning worden losgekoppeld. Bij het opnieuw aansluiten van de ver-
bindingsdraden dient op dichtheid (tegen stof, water) te worden gelet.
Veiligheidsgordels kunnen naderhand aan de chauffeursstoel worden gemonteerd. In
verband met een verhoogde belasting van de stoelbevestigingen is 2+1039/,+-2/9,
=G590 +- +9B4/9),+4+* A * 72+* ,@75-,+A @/A A ++9B05+7+1@0 //9%9/05+1@0 +=%=T* 97)4/9),+
45+- 06* 7> /:-* . /90 .
Het naderhand monteren dient aan de landspecifieke voorschriften en richtlijnen te
voldoen en dient bovendien door de firma LNMPOQQK3M te worden vrijgegeven.
Veiligheidsgordels die naderhand werden aangebracht moeten 4EE-,+G* 97+:-6* 9/=)+
.
van het voertuig worden omgedaan.
Na een ongeval =G5+10 +9),+4+* A * 72+* ,@75-,+A @B4+- 4/97+9
; 5-,+9 .
Als er aan de chauffeursstoel veiligheidsgordels gemonteerd zijn, moeten na een ongeval
daarenboven de ?2/6> > +6- @@05+A en de @05+A :+14+1@0* 7* 97+9 door deskundig personeel
worden gecontroleerd.
NL 67
Schroefverbindingen moeten regelmatig op een UVWXWGYW1ZW1[\] U] Û)_V`XW^)UWaV^\`Vb
c WW`X . Een onstabiele stoel kan het gevolg zijn van losse schroefverbindingen of andere
gebreken.
Indien onregelmatigheden in de functionaliteit van de chauffeursstoel worden geconsta-
teerd (bijv. bij het inveren van de stoel, een onjuiste bolling van de lendensteun of een
cc c c
beschadigd harmonicarubber), moet V^dT] XXW ] egfhWW^)UW1[iWa] j ] [WW`XW_NW`fi jj1\ [
worden ingeschakeld om de gebreken te laten repareren.
Wordt dit niet in acht genomen bestaat gevaar voor uw gezondheid en een ZW`kVVUX
`] [] aV)ZVV`VÛW1Zj c c W^ .
Vóór de ingebruikname van het voertuig moeten eventuele in de chauffeursstoel aanwe-
zige schakelaars (bijv. voor het uitschakelen van aggregaten bij het verlaten van de stoel
of het voertuig) op hun UVWXW_NW`f] Û worden gecontroleerd.
Bij storingen mag het voertuig niet in bedrijf worden genomen.
– lm3npoq<q<rNstnpu vpu wpqxlFq<qNnyqNzrNml3{||m3z –
Chauffeursstoelen met ingebouwde schakelaars die herkennen als de stoel belast wordt
mogen, met uitzondering van normaal gebruik, ^] W1\XVV` ZVV` _NWìW^)Vi)XW}] \ \] Û wor-
den belast omdat het voertuig zich dan zonder chauffeur in beweging zou kunnen zetten.
– lm3npoq<q<rNstnpu vpu wpqxlFq<qNnyqNzrNml3{||m3z –
Door het ontlasten van de zitting tijdens de rit zal het voertuig tot stilstand komen.
Tijdens het rijden - als de chauffeursstoel belast wordt - mag het harmonicarubber niet
naar binnen worden geduwd.
– rNml3{3{n~lFq<qNntpzpm3P3u zrNm3z –
Let erop, dat er UWW^BZVV` _NWìW^ of Z
c VW] [\V W^ in het ] ^_NW^X] UWZj^)XWakj W` [b
[\VW c geraken.
De chauffeursstoel is ^] W1\_Nj1\ W`X] ak\ en moet tegen spatwater worden beschermd!
Het ombouwen van chauffeursstoelen van de firma rNnP{m3n of het naderhand aan-
c c
brengen van onderdelen mag alleen gebeuren door YW1ZVWUXW_NW`fi jj1\ [WÛW1[akVV X
c c
iW` [V^WW of overeenkomstig ViUW W] XWGiW` [V^W^ . Hierbij moet rekening worden gehou-
den met de geldende bedienings-, onderhouds- en inbouwinstructies en de landspecifieke
voorschriften.
Door een V^XW1[f^X] UW)dGV^\ jUW bestaat het gevaar voor ZW` _V^X] ÛW^ en YW1[akjX] b
U] ÛW^ en kan de functie van de chauffeursstoel of de gemonteerde onderdelen niet wor-
den gewaarborgd.
Garantie
De firma rNnP{m3n is op geen enkele wijze aansprakelijk voor schade indien de chauf-
feursstoelen op ondeskundige wijze gemonteerd, gebruikt en gerepareerd worden.
Meer informatie over de garantie van de firma rNnP{m3n vindt u op de factuur of de
leveringsbon. Andere garanties dan daar vermeld zullen niet worden aanvaard door de
firma rNnP{m3n .
68 NL
Functies en bediening van de stoel
Gewichts- en hoogte-instelling
Het gewicht van de chauffeur moet worden in-
gesteld terwijl de chauffeursstoel belast wordt.
Trek of duw hiertoe aan de greep voor de ge-
wichtsinstelling.
Het juiste gewicht is ingesteld als de pijl zich
max. in het midden van het kijkglaasje bevindt.
Binnen dit zichtbaar bereik kan de individuele
hoogte worden aangepast tot het minimale
min. 978 veerbereik.
De min. of max gewichtsinstelling is bereikt
als u de bovenste of onderste aanslag hoort.
Om blessures en beschadigingen van
het materiaal te voorkomen, moet de individu-
ele gewichtsinstelling van de chauffeur vóór
de ingebruikname van het voertuig worden
gecontroleerd en/of opnieuw worden inge-
steld.
Om beschadigingen aan de compressor
te voorkomen, mag bij de gewichtsinstelling
de compressor max. 1 minuut worden ge-
bruikt.
Lengte-instelling
Door de vergrendelingshendel omhoog te
trekken, is het mogelijk om de lengte in te
stellen.
N 111 '
)8 1
% ) %13
N 113 '
¡1G )G
11¢£G 1P)13 G¤
979
G
Na de instelling moet de hendel in de
gewenste stand vergrendelen. Na het ver-
grendelen mag de chauffeursstoel niet meer
in een andere stand kunnen worden gezet.
Trek de hendel niet met uw been of kuit
omhoog.
NL 69
Rugverlenging * **
De rugverlenging kan naar boven of beneden
individueel in hoogte worden versteld (diverse
standen) tot het hoogste of laagste punt be-
reikt is.
Met een ferme ruk omhoog kan de rugverlen-
ging worden verwijderd.
985
Stoelverwarming * **
De stoelverwarming wordt met de schakelaar
in- of uitgeschakeld.
0 0 = stoelverwarming UIT
1 = stoelverwarming AAN
980
1
Lendensteun
Met de lendensteun kan het zitcomfort wor-
0 den verhoogd en blijven de prestaties van de
chauffeur constant.
2
Door het handwieltje naar boven te draaien,
1 wordt de bolling van het rugkussen in het bo-
venste gedeelte individueel aangepast. Als u
het handwieltje naar beneden draait, wordt de
2 bolling in het onderste gedeelte aangepast.
981 0 = geen bolling
1 = max. bolling bovenaan
2 = max. bolling onderaan
70 NL
Armleuningen * **
De armleuningen kunnen naar achteren
worden gekanteld en individueel in hoogte
worden versteld.
Om de armleuningen in hoogte te verstellen,
moet eerst de ronde afdekkap (pijl) worden
weggehaald en de zeskantmoer die zich daar-
achter bevindt (sleutelmaat 13 mm) worden
losgedraaid. Breng de armleuningen in de
gewenste stand (5 instellingen mogelijk) en
983
draai de moer weer vast. Duw daarna de af-
dekkap weer op de moer.
Neiging van de armleuning *

De neiging van de armleuning kan met het
handwieltje worden aangepast.
Wordt het wieltje naar buiten (+) gedraaid,
gaat de armleuning vooraan naar boven.
Wordt het wieltje naar binnen (-) gedraaid,
-+ gaat de armleuning vooraan naar beneden.
984
Instelling van de rugleuning

- 5° +30°
Als u de vergrendelingshendel naar boven
duwt, kan de instelling van de rugleuning
worden gedaan.
Na de instelling moet de hendel in de
gewenste stand vergrendelen. Na het ver-
grendelen mag de rugleuning niet meer in een
andere stand kunnen worden gezet.
Voor een ergonomisch gebruik moet de
982 instelhoek van de rugleuning (15 stappen van
telkens 2,5 graden) in een bereik tussen -5
en +30 graden worden ingesteld.
NL 71
Onderhoud
Vuil kan de werking van de stoel beïnvloeden.
Houd uw stoel daarom schoon!
De kussens moeten voor de reiniging niet van
het frame worden gehaald.
¥£¦1§¨¨©§ªª©§¦© «ª¬® ¬¯¦¬)ªª©
° ¦1±3¬¨¨©§ª© ¦¬B²³ ° ® ¦1± ¦¬B§¨¬)¦
©´¯µ ¦´¬® ¬¯P¶
· ® ¸'¦G© ¦® ¬® ¯® ¬¯)§¨¬ ° ¦1±3©´¯¹´²º
²¦¬G»Gª¦1±¦G©´¯µ ¦´¬® ¬¯T»)¦1±¦
° ¨¬)«ª©¦¬B± ¦¯¦¬¯¦ ° ª´¦¬¨µ ²
986
¦ ° ¦¬¦µ§ªª©¦G©´¯µ ¦´¬® ¬¯
«ª©±3¼¦® ¦¬½
¾N¿¥NÀ3ÁÀ'Â3Ã
Stoel niet met een hogedruk-
reiniger schoonmaken!
Tijdens het schoonmaken van de kussens
moet worden voorkomen dat deze te nat wor-
den.
¹´²²¦¬
De in de handel verkrijgbare - resp.
¹´¬²± ²±ªÄ© ¦® ¬® ¯¦© ²
eerst op een onopvallend
ª'»Å± ¦
klein oppervlak aanbrengen
³ª¬±©ªµ ¦© ¦¬)ªÄ ° ¦1±P»)¨1± ¦©® ¨¨µ1ªª©¦1ÆR¦
© ¦® ¬® ¯¦©3¬® ¦1±«ª©±'¨¨¬¯¦1± ¨1²±
.
72 NL
73
74
Datos técnicos MIXKRET 4
Actualización 31/08/2011
1. Datos generales
Nº Datos generales Unidad Característica
1. Peso de servicio. Kg 10.000
2. Peso máximo del vehículo Kg 18.000
3. Medidas largo / alto / ancho mm 6531/2548/2200
4. Motor Caterpillar C6.6
5. Bomba hidráulica de traslación Sauer H1 automotive 115
6. Motoreductor de la traslación ICVD GT S1N-233V-164
2. Chasis
Nº Chasis Unidad Característica
7. Cabina de conducción FOPS-ROPS
8. Depósito de combustible L 160
9. Velocidad máxima Km/h 20
10 Transmisión hidrostática Nº 2
11 Número de ejes 2
12 Tipo de freno, hidráulico o seco. Hidráulico
13 N° Discos freno en baño de aceite Nº 8
14 Freno de estacionamiento Eléctrico
15 Ángulo de giro +/- 24º
16 Ángulo frontal º 17
17 Ángulo trasero º 40
18 Altura libre al suelo mm 300
19 Ruedas 12”-20”
20 Batalla mm 3350
21 Radio de giro exterior mm 5915
22 Radio de giro interior mm 2584
23 Ángulo máximo de inclinación transversal % 10
conduciendo
24 Ángulo máximo de inclinación longitudinal % 35
conduciendo
3. Motor
Nº Caterpillar C-6.6 Unidad Característica
25 Potencia Kw 129,5
26 Gama de operación rpm 800 a 2200 rpm
27 Configuración y cilindros 6 cilindros en línea.
28 Cilindrada L 6,6
29 Calibre Ø mm 105
30 Carrera Ø mm 127
31 Aspiración Turbocompresor y
posenfriamiento.
32 Compresión 16,2:1
33 Orden de encendido 1-5-3-6-2-4
34 Sentido de giro Izquierdas
35 Juego de las válvulas de admisión mm 0,35
36 Juego de las válvulas de escape mm 0,35
PME653.1 ED: 0701
4. Cuba de hormigón.
Nº Cuba de hormigón Unidad Característica
37 Peso kg 830
38 Bomba hidráulica de la cuba Sauer S42 31cc
39 Motor hidráulico de la cuba Sauer OMTS 250
40 Reductora de la cuba Bonfiglioli 568
41 Ratio de la reductora i 22:1
42 Revoluciones máximas de giro. rpm 17
43 Revoluciones de descarga. rpm 14
44 Revoluciones de amasado. rpm 5
45 Altura de descarga mm 1022 - 1473
46 Volumen de la cuba m 3 4,395
47 Volumen hasta la línea de aguas m 3 3,357
Putzmeister Ibérica, S.A. Camino de Hormigueras, 173 – 28031 Madrid. Tel.: 34-914288100 - Fax: 914288106 – www.putzmeister.es
Página 1 de2
Datos técnicos MIXKRET 4
Actualización 31/08/2011
5. Sistema hidráulico
Nº Sistema hidráulico Unidad Característica
48 Depósito de aceite Tipo HLP 46 L 238
49 Bomba hidráulica principal H1 115 automotive L/min 253
50 Filtro de aspiración (micras) μ 10
51 Presión máxima hidráulica bar 450
6. Electricidad
Nº Alimentación de corriente eléctrica Unidad Característica
52 Tensión de mando V 24
Nº Cuadro eléctrico general Unidad Característica

53 Potencia KW 1,92
54 Protección panel IP 55
55 Tensión V DC 24
Nº Baterías Unidad Característica

56 Baterías (Tudor TA-1000) 2x 12V 100Ah
Nº Luces Unidad Característica
57 Focos Trabajo máquina (HELLA LED) 8x 24V 18W
7. Limpiador de alta presión.

Nº Bomba de agua Unidad Característica
58 Caudal l/min 13,2
59 Presión máxima bar 140
PME653.1 ED: 0701
Putzmeister Ibérica, S.A. Camino de Hormigueras, 173 – 28031 Madrid. Tel.: 34-914288100 - Fax: 914288106 – www.putzmeister.es
Página 2 de2

ENбетон мешалка PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

ENбетон мешалка PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

ES Español (Spanisch / Spanish) EN English (Englisch) FR Français (French) DE Deutsch (German)

Documentación técnica Technical Documentation Documentation technique Technische Dokumentation

2 490700918 Declaración Ce de conformidad EC Declaration of Conformity Déclaration CE de conformité EG-Konformitätserklärung

3 490700918 Ficha Técnica Machine card Carte machine Maschinenkarte

5 E559040 Esquema eléctrico Electr. circuit diagram Plan électrique Elektr.-Schaltplan

2 Lista de repuestos Spare parts list Lieste de pieces de rechange Ersatzteilliste

3 Instrucciones de servicio Operating instructions Instructions de service Betriebsanleitung

4 Anexo técnico Technical Enclosure Annex technique Technischer Anhang

Atención Caution Attention Achtung

KD-Auftrag:20343951 Pos-Nr:100 Mat-Nr:E10100136 Masch.Nr.490700918 Datum 25.06.2012 Seite: 1

POS Materialnr. Bezeichnung EBN Serialnummer

KD-Auftrag:20343951 Pos-Nr:100 Mat-Nr:E10100136 Masch.Nr.490700918 Datum 25.06.2012 Seite: 2

POS Materialnr. Bezeichnung EBN Serialnummer

KD-Auftrag:20343951 Pos-Nr:100 Mat-Nr:E10100136 Masch.Nr.490700918 Datum 25.06.2012 Seite: 3

POS Materialnr. Bezeichnung EBN Serialnummer

Descripción Cuadro general Mixkret (2º Prototipo)

Ref.de pedido: Codigo de cuadro: E559040 AB 29/02/12 AS BUILT

Fecha 11/06/12 Cliente : Putzmeister Descripción de página : Pedido : Mixkret

Características Técnicas : Colores de Pulsadores y Pilotos :

Fecha 11/06/12 Cliente : Putzmeister Descripción de página : Pedido : Mixkret

Fecha 11/06/12 Cliente : Putzmeister Descripción de página : Pedido : Mixkret

VISTA GENERAL DEL CUADRO ELECTRICO

LATERAL IZDO. VISTA GENERAL PUERTA PLACA DE

Fecha 11/06/12 Cliente : Putzmeister Descripción de página : Pedido : Mixkret

Seta de Interruptor Interruptor Interruptor Interruptor

Fecha 11/06/12 Cliente : Putzmeister Descripción de página : Pedido : Mixkret

4mm2 16mm2 2,5mm2 2,5mm2 2,5mm2 4mm2

50mm2 50mm2 2,5mm2 25mm2

Свет Свет Свет Передние Задние Dirección Doble

Fecha 11/06/12 Cliente : Putzmeister Descripción de página : Pedido : Mixkret

025.02 025.03 025.04 025.05

X0 35 36 37 38 39 40 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151

Limpia Claxon Palanca

Fecha 11/06/12 Cliente : Putzmeister Descripción de página : Pedido : Mixkret

30F0 30F3 30F6

Subir teja Bajar teja Subir tapa Bajar tapa

X0 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 155 155 156 130 131 132 133

Caja de Cabina W27 1 2

Fecha 11/06/12 Cliente : Putzmeister Descripción de página : Pedido : Mixkret

Drive pedal input 10

Sensor (+) 1 + Насос RPM

Pump rpm input 2 rpm H1 Nota : Viene cableado.

Digital output A1 (+) 3 C1 C2 Electronic

Fecha 11/06/12 Cliente : Putzmeister Descripción de página : Pedido : Mixkret

Mod. switch B input 2

Digital output B2 (-) 9 Cabina

Digital output B1 (+) 10

Стояночный Claxon Prop.

Fecha 11/06/12 Cliente : Putzmeister Descripción de página : Pedido : Mixkret

45K2 45K3 45K3

Can Shield (1)

DP620 CP1 Main power ground C1-P1

Sensor supply P8 50C6 Conector Sub-D

Multi input P10

Fecha 11/06/12 Cliente : Putzmeister Descripción de página : Pedido : Mixkret

Реле безопасности PILZ / PNOZ S3

S11 S21 S22 S12 S34 14 24

1mm2 1mm2 1mm2 1mm2 1mm2

Аварийка Аварийка Аварийка Final de Rearme Giro Cuba

Nota : Quitar puente si lleva FC.

Fecha 11/06/12 Cliente : Putzmeister Descripción de página : Pedido : Mixkret

60F0 60F3 60F7 60F8

Fecha 11/06/12 Cliente : Putzmeister Descripción de página : Pedido : Mixkret